summaryrefslogtreecommitdiff
path: root/info/tex-references
diff options
context:
space:
mode:
Diffstat (limited to 'info/tex-references')
-rw-r--r--info/tex-references/README5
-rw-r--r--info/tex-references/tex-refs.css124
-rw-r--r--info/tex-references/tex-refs.epubbin0 -> 167393 bytes
-rw-r--r--info/tex-references/tex-refs.html18237
-rw-r--r--info/tex-references/tex-refs.txt8776
5 files changed, 27142 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/info/tex-references/README b/info/tex-references/README
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..1bc45bec74
--- /dev/null
+++ b/info/tex-references/README
@@ -0,0 +1,5 @@
+The tex-refs project has the aim of providing a help file for LaTeX (and
+its friends like ConTeXt, Metapost, Metafont, etc.) using DocBook/XML.
+It is released under the GFDL.
+
+The home page is http://www.miwie.org/tex-refs.
diff --git a/info/tex-references/tex-refs.css b/info/tex-references/tex-refs.css
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..c4d1e1bdc5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/info/tex-references/tex-refs.css
@@ -0,0 +1,124 @@
+/* $Id: tex-refs.css 120 2004-03-26 20:19:43Z mw $ */
+
+body { background-color: whitesmoke;
+ }
+
+h1.title { background-color: gainsboro;
+ text-align: center;
+ font-family: sans-serif;
+ color: black;
+ }
+
+h2.title { background-color: gainsboro;
+ font-family: sans-serif;
+ color: black;
+ }
+
+h3.title { background-color: gainsboro;
+ font-family: sans-serif;
+ color: black;
+ }
+
+h4.title { background-color: gainsboro;
+ font-family: sans-serif;
+ color: black;
+ }
+h5.title { background-color: gainsboro;
+ font-family: sans-serif;
+/* font-size: small; */
+ color: black;
+ }
+h6.title { background-color: gainsboro;
+ font-family: sans-serif;
+/* font-size: x-small; */
+ font-size: small;
+ color: black;
+ }
+span.title { background-color: gainsboro;
+ font-family: sans-serif;
+/* font-size: x-small; */
+ font-size: small;
+ color: black;
+ }
+
+.title { background-color: gainsboro;
+ font-family: sans-serif;
+ }
+
+.authorgroup {
+ background-color: #EEEEEE
+ }
+
+.copyright {
+ }
+
+.legalnotice {
+ }
+
+.revhistory {
+ }
+
+.abstract {
+ margin-top: 1em
+ }
+
+.toc {
+ }
+
+.itemizedlist {
+ }
+
+.orderedlist {
+ }
+
+.variablelist {
+ }
+
+.term { background-color: #EFEFEF
+ }
+
+pre.programlisting
+{
+ background-color: #E0E0E0;
+ border: thin solid gray;
+ margin-top: 1.33ex;
+ margin-bottom: 1.33ex;
+}
+
+
+.footer-date { font-size: xx-small;
+ font-family: monospace;
+ }
+
+
+#customheader, #customfooter
+{
+ /* list of fonts provides fallbacks if a font is not present */
+ font-family: Verdana, Arial, Helvetica, Sans-Serif;
+ /* font size, relative to body font size */
+ font-size: 80%;
+
+ /* line height, relative to body font size */
+ line-height: 200%;
+
+ text-align: center;
+ vertical-align: middle;
+ color: #fff;
+ background-color: #009;
+}
+
+/* leave more space between last paragraph and footer */
+/* some browser do not add up the bottom margin of the prior element */
+/* and the top margin of the footer */
+#customfooter {
+ margin-top: 15px;
+}
+
+/* define special font for logo */
+/* list of fonts provides fallbacks in case selected fonts are not present
+*/
+.logo
+{
+ font-family: Lucida Console, Verdana, Arial, Sans-Serif;
+}
+
diff --git a/info/tex-references/tex-refs.epub b/info/tex-references/tex-refs.epub
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..1700fe76a0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/info/tex-references/tex-refs.epub
Binary files differ
diff --git a/info/tex-references/tex-refs.html b/info/tex-references/tex-refs.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..4d62e45786
--- /dev/null
+++ b/info/tex-references/tex-refs.html
@@ -0,0 +1,18237 @@
+<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Transitional//EN"
+ "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-transitional.dtd">
+<html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml">
+<head>
+<meta name="generator" content=
+"HTML Tidy for Linux (vers 25 March 2009), see www.w3.org" />
+<meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content=
+"text/html; charset=us-ascii" />
+<title>References for TeX and Friends</title>
+<link rel="stylesheet" type="text/css" href="tex-refs.css" />
+<meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.76.1" />
+</head>
+<body>
+<div xml:lang="en" class="book" title=
+"References for TeX and Friends" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h1 class="title"><a id="idp425680" name="idp425680"></a>References
+for TeX and Friends</h1>
+</div>
+<div>
+<div class="author">
+<h3 class="author"><span class="firstname">Michael</span>
+<span class="surname">Wiedmann</span></h3>
+<div class="affiliation">
+<div class="address">
+<p><code class="email">&lt;<a class="email" href=
+"mailto:mw%20at%20miwie%20dot%20in-berlin%20dot%20de">mw&nbsp;at&nbsp;miwie&nbsp;dot&nbsp;in-berlin&nbsp;dot&nbsp;de</a>&gt;</code></p>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div>
+<p class="copyright">Copyright &copy; ? Stephen Gilmore</p>
+</div>
+<div>
+<p class="copyright">Copyright &copy; ? Torsten Martinsen</p>
+</div>
+<div>
+<p class="copyright">Copyright &copy; 1988, 1994 Free Software
+Foundation, Inc.</p>
+</div>
+<div>
+<p class="copyright">Copyright &copy; 1994 - 1996 Torsten
+Martinsen</p>
+</div>
+<div>
+<p class="copyright">Copyright &copy; 2002, 2003 Peter Karp,
+Michael Wiedmann</p>
+</div>
+<div>
+<p class="copyright">Copyright &copy; 2004 - 2012 Michael
+Wiedmann</p>
+</div>
+<div>
+<div class="legalnotice" title="License"><a id="idp270624" name=
+"idp270624"></a>
+<p class="legalnotice-title"><strong>License</strong></p>
+<p>Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this
+document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License,
+Version 1.2 or any later version published by the Free Software
+Foundation; with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts, and
+no Back-Cover Texts.</p>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div>
+<div class="revhistory">
+<table border="2" cellspacing="4" width="100%" summary=
+"Revision history">
+<tr>
+<th align="left" valign="top" colspan="2"><b>Revision
+History</b></th>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">Revision 0.4.1</td>
+<td align="left">2012-12-03</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left" colspan="2">Removed obsolete file still referenced
+in Makefile (no visible changes)</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">Revision 0.2.0</td>
+<td align="left">2003-01-11</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left" colspan="2">License changed to <a class="ulink"
+href="http://www.gnu.org/licenses/fdl.html" target="_top">GNU Free
+Documentation License</a>.</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">Revision 0.0.1</td>
+<td align="left">2002-06-21</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left" colspan="2">This version was adapted from the
+edition 1.6 of the LaTeX2e documentation, converted to DocBook XML
+using <a class="ulink" href="http://www.tldp.org/downloads/"
+target="_top">texi2db</a>, and further edited manually.</td>
+</tr>
+</table>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<hr /></div>
+<div class="toc">
+<p><strong>Table of Contents</strong></p>
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="preface"><a href=
+"#preface">Preface</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="preface"><a href=
+"#credits">Credits</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="chapter"><a href="#tex">1 TeX</a></span></dt>
+<dd>
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#plaintex">1
+PlainTeX</a></span></dt>
+<dd>
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#plaintex-ovw">1.1
+Overview</a></span></dt>
+</dl>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#latex">2 LaTeX</a></span></dt>
+<dd>
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#opt-latex">2.1
+Options</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#overview">2.2 Overview of LaTeX
+and Local Guide</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#commands">2.3
+Commands</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#parameters">2.4
+Parameters</a></span></dt>
+</dl>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#latex-packages">3 LaTeX
+Packages</a></span></dt>
+<dd>
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#amsmath">3.1 <code class=
+"filename">amsmath</code></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#dcolumn">3.2 <code class=
+"filename">dcolumn</code></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#float">3.3 <code class=
+"filename">float</code></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#fontenc">3.4 <code class=
+"filename">fontenc</code></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#german">3.5 <code class=
+"filename">german</code></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#graphics">3.6 <code class=
+"filename">graphics</code></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#hyperref">3.7 <code class=
+"filename">hyperref</code></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#inputenc">3.8 <code class=
+"filename">inputenc</code></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#komascript">3.9 <code class=
+"filename">KOMA-Script</code></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#mathpazo">3.10 <code class=
+"filename">mathpazo</code></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#varioref">3.11 <code class=
+"filename">varioref</code></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#small-packages">3.12 Several
+Small Packages</a></span></dt>
+</dl>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#generic-packages">4 Generic
+Packages</a></span></dt>
+<dd>
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#pictex">4.1 PiCTeX
+(tbd.)</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#pstricks">4.2
+PSTricks</a></span></dt>
+</dl>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#fontinst">5 <code class=
+"filename">fontinst</code> (tbd.)</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#context">6 ConTeXt
+(tbd.)</a></span></dt>
+<dd>
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#context-ovw">6.1
+Overview</a></span></dt>
+</dl>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#texinfo">7 Texinfo
+(tbd.)</a></span></dt>
+</dl>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="chapter"><a href="#pdftex">2
+pdfTeX</a></span></dt>
+<dd>
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#pdftex-options">1
+Options</a></span></dt>
+<dd>
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href=
+"#pdftex-option-file-line-error-style">1.1 <code class=
+"filename">--file-line-error-style</code></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#pdftex-option-fmt">1.2
+<code class="filename">--fmt format</code></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#pdftex-option-help">1.3
+<code class="filename">--help</code></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#pdftex-option-ini">1.4
+<code class="filename">--ini</code></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href=
+"#pdftex-option-interaction-mode">1.5 <code class=
+"filename">--interaction mode</code></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#pdftex-option-ipc">1.6
+<code class="filename">--ipc</code></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#pdftex-option-ipc-start">1.7
+<code class="filename">--ipc-start</code></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#pdftex-option-jobname-name">1.8
+<code class="filename">--jobname name</code></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href=
+"#pdftex-option-kpathsea-debug">1.9 <code class=
+"filename">--kpathsea-debug bitmask</code></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#pdftex-option-maketex">1.10
+<code class="filename">--maketex fmt</code></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#pdftex-option-no-maketex">1.11
+<code class="filename">--no-maketex fmt</code></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href=
+"#pdftex-option-output-comment">1.12 <code class=
+"filename">--output-comment string</code></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href=
+"#pdftex-option-parse-first-line">1.13 <code class=
+"filename">--parse-first-line</code></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#pdftex-option-progname">1.14
+<code class="filename">--progname name</code></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#pdftex-option-recorder">1.15
+<code class="filename">--recorder</code></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href=
+"#pdftex-option-shell-escape">1.16 <code class=
+"filename">--shell-escape</code></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href=
+"#pdftex-option-translate-file">1.17 <code class=
+"filename">--translate-file tcxname</code></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#pdftex-option-version">1.18
+<code class="filename">--version</code></a></span></dt>
+</dl>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#pdftex-environment">2
+Environment</a></span></dt>
+</dl>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="chapter"><a href="#metafont">3 Metafont
+(tbd.)</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="chapter"><a href="#metapost">4
+MetaPost</a></span></dt>
+<dd>
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#metapost-options">1
+Options</a></span></dt>
+<dd>
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href=
+"#metapost-option-file-line-error-style">1.1 <code class=
+"filename">--file-line-error-style</code></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#metapost-option-help">1.2
+<code class="filename">--help</code></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#metapost-option-ini">1.3
+<code class="filename">--ini</code></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href=
+"#metapost-option-intercation">1.4 <code class=
+"filename">--interaction mode</code></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#metapost-option-jobname">1.5
+<code class="filename">--jobname name</code></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href=
+"#metapost-option-kpathsea-debug">1.6 <code class=
+"filename">--kpathsea-debug bitmask</code></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#metapost-option-mem">1.7
+<code class="filename">--mem mem</code></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href=
+"#metapost-option-parse-first-line">1.8 <code class=
+"filename">--parse-first-line</code></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#metapost-option-progname">1.9
+<code class="filename">--progname name</code></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#metapost-option-recorder">1.10
+<code class="filename">--recorder</code></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#metapost-option-T">1.11
+<code class="filename">-T</code></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href=
+"#metapost-option-translate-file">1.12 <code class=
+"filename">--translate-file tcxname</code></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#metapost-option-troff">1.13
+<code class="filename">--troff</code></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#metapost-option-version">1.14
+<code class="filename">--version</code></a></span></dt>
+</dl>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#metapost-environment">2
+Environment</a></span></dt>
+</dl>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="chapter"><a href="#bibtex">5
+BibTeX</a></span></dt>
+<dd>
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#bibtex-parameters">1
+Parameters</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#bibtex-command-qualifiers">2
+Command Qualifiers</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#bibtex-bib-files">3 bib
+files</a></span></dt>
+<dd>
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#bibtex-string-command">3.1
+<code class="filename">@STRING</code> command</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#bibtex-entry-format">3.2 Entry
+Format</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#bibtex-entry-types">3.3 Entry
+Types</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#bibtex-field-text">3.4 Field
+Text</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#bibtex-field-types">3.5 Field
+Types</a></span></dt>
+</dl>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#bibtex-bst-files">4 bst
+files</a></span></dt>
+<dd>
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#bibtex-bst-abbr">4.1
+<code class="filename">ABBRV.BST</code></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#bibtex-bst-alpha">4.2
+<code class="filename">ALPHA.BST</code></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#bibtex-bst-plain">4.3
+<code class="filename">PLAIN.BST</code></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#bibtex-bst-sample">4.4
+<code class="filename">SAMPLE.BST</code></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#bibtex-bst-unsrt">4.5
+<code class="filename">UNSRT.BST</code></a></span></dt>
+</dl>
+</dd>
+</dl>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="chapter"><a href="#makeindex">6
+Make-Index</a></span></dt>
+<dd>
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#makeindex-options">1
+Options</a></span></dt>
+<dd>
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#makeindex-option-c">1.1
+<code class="filename">-c</code></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#makeindex-option-g">1.2
+<code class="filename">-g</code></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#makeindex-option-i">1.3
+<code class="filename">-i</code></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#makeindex-option-l">1.4
+<code class="filename">-l</code></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#makeindex-option-q">1.5
+<code class="filename">-q</code></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#makeindex-option-r">1.6
+<code class="filename">-r</code></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#makeindex-option-s-sty">1.7
+<code class="filename">-s sty</code></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#makeindex-option-o-ind">1.8
+<code class="filename">-o ind</code></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#makeindex-option-t-log">1.9
+<code class="filename">-t log</code></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#makeindex-option-p-no">1.10
+<code class="filename">-p no</code></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#makeindex-option-L">1.11
+<code class="filename">-L</code></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#makeindex-option-T">1.12
+<code class="filename">-T</code></a></span></dt>
+</dl>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#makeindex-style-file">2 Style
+File</a></span></dt>
+<dd>
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#makeindex-style">2.1 Input
+Style Specifiers</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href=
+"#makeindex-output-style-specs">2.2 Output Style
+Specifiers</a></span></dt>
+</dl>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#makeindex-example">3
+Example</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#makeindex-ordering">4
+Ordering</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#makeindex-special-effects">5
+Special Effects</a></span></dt>
+</dl>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="chapter"><a href="#xindy">7 xindy</a></span></dt>
+<dd>
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#xindy-command-list">1 Command
+List</a></span></dt>
+<dd>
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href=
+"#xindy-command-list-processing">1.1 Processing
+Commands</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#xindy-command-list-markup">1.2
+Markup Commands</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href=
+"#xindy-command-list-raw-index">1.3 Raw Index
+Interface</a></span></dt>
+</dl>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#xindy-invoking">2 Invoking
+xindy</a></span></dt>
+<dd>
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#xindy-invoking-cmdline">2.1
+Command Line Options</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#xindy-search-path">2.2 Search
+Path</a></span></dt>
+</dl>
+</dd>
+</dl>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="appendix"><a href="#appendices">A
+Appendices</a></span></dt>
+<dd>
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#issues">1 Bugs / Known Issues /
+Missing Features</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#about">2 About this
+Document</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#release-news">3 Release
+News</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#gfdl">4 GNU Free Documentation
+License</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="index"><a href=
+"#tex-refs-idx">Index</a></span></dt>
+</dl>
+</dd>
+</dl>
+</div>
+<div class="list-of-tables">
+<p><strong>List of Tables</strong></p>
+<dl>
+<dt>1.1 <a href="#table-newcommand">Options for <code class=
+"literal">\newcommand</code></a></dt>
+<dt>1.2 <a href="#table-newenvironment">Options for <code class=
+"literal">\newenvironment</code></a></dt>
+<dt>1.3 <a href="#table-newtheorem">Options for <code class=
+"literal">\newtheorem</code></a></dt>
+<dt>1.4 <a href="#table-tabbing">Commands in a <code class=
+"literal">tabbing</code> environment</a></dt>
+<dt>1.5 <a href="#table-tabular">Commands used inside a
+<code class="literal">tabular</code> environment</a></dt>
+<dt>1.6 <a href="#table-standard-styles">Standard styles
+distributed with BibTeX</a></dt>
+<dt>1.7 <a href="#table-math-mode">Three environments that put
+LaTeX in math mode</a></dt>
+<dt>1.8 <a href="#table-math-miscellany">Math Miscellany</a></dt>
+<dt>1.9 <a href="#table-typefaces">Typefaces</a></dt>
+<dt>1.10 <a href="#table-standard-type-size-commands">Standard type
+size commands</a></dt>
+<dt>1.11 <a href="#table-low-level-font-commands">Low-level font
+commands</a></dt>
+<dt>1.12 <a href="#table-special-coordinates">Special coordinates
+and angles</a></dt>
+</dl>
+</div>
+<div class="preface" title="Preface">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h2 class="title"><a id="preface" name="preface"></a>Preface</h2>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<p>LaTeX2e is a document preparation system implemented as a macro
+package for Donald E. Knuth's TeX typesetting program.</p>
+<p>LaTeX was originally conceived by Leslie Lamport.</p>
+<p>This updated LaTeX reference is by no means complete, but it's a
+first step towards a more complete LaTeX reference! We welcome if
+we'll get pointed to missing commands or even better when you make
+additions and further improvements and send them to the
+authors.</p>
+<p><a class="ulink" href="http://www.tug.org" target="_top">TUG
+(TeX User Group)</a> and <a class="ulink" href=
+"http://www.dante.de" target="_top">DANTE (German TeX User
+Group)</a> both have excellent FAQ's which answer many questions or
+give great pointers to additional resources both on the internet or
+in books. Most if not all missing packages can also be found on the
+CTAN servers.</p>
+<p>This reference is not meant to replace the package documentation
+or the standard literature like the LaTeX handbook and the LaTeX
+companion. Look there for detailed descriptions of the commands and
+even mostly more options and examples.</p>
+<p>The authors intend to extend this documentation to other TeX
+related packages (e.g. ConTeXt, MetaPost, Metafont, etc.).
+Contributions are very welcome!</p>
+</div>
+<div class="preface" title="Credits">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h2 class="title"><a id="credits" name="credits"></a>Credits</h2>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp250720" class="indexterm" name="idp250720"></a>
+<p>The following people have contributed substantial parts to this
+documentation project or helped in some other way (listed
+alphabetically):</p>
+<div class="itemizedlist">
+<ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc" compact="compact">
+<li class="listitem">
+<p class="simpara">Karl Berry</p>
+<a id="idp245776" class="indexterm" name="idp245776"></a></li>
+<li class="listitem">
+<p class="simpara">Wolfgang Borgert</p>
+<a id="idp248064" class="indexterm" name="idp248064"></a></li>
+<li class="listitem">
+<p class="simpara">Ramon Casellas</p>
+<a id="idp294304" class="indexterm" name="idp294304"></a></li>
+<li class="listitem">
+<p class="simpara">Holger Danielsson</p>
+<a id="idp296592" class="indexterm" name="idp296592"></a></li>
+<li class="listitem">
+<p class="simpara">James Devenish</p>
+<a id="idp298880" class="indexterm" name="idp298880"></a></li>
+<li class="listitem">
+<p class="simpara">Hubert Gaesslein</p>
+<a id="idp301168" class="indexterm" name="idp301168"></a></li>
+<li class="listitem">
+<p class="simpara">Peter Karp</p>
+<a id="idp303456" class="indexterm" name="idp303456"></a></li>
+<li class="listitem">
+<p class="simpara">Rolf Niepraschk</p>
+<a id="idp305744" class="indexterm" name="idp305744"></a></li>
+<li class="listitem">
+<p class="simpara">Hans Fredrik Nordhaug</p>
+<a id="idp308032" class="indexterm" name="idp308032"></a></li>
+<li class="listitem">
+<p class="simpara">Simon Pepping</p>
+<a id="idp2040400" class="indexterm" name="idp2040400"></a></li>
+<li class="listitem">
+<p class="simpara">Bob Stayton</p>
+<a id="idp2042688" class="indexterm" name="idp2042688"></a></li>
+<li class="listitem">
+<p class="simpara">Herbert Voss</p>
+<a id="idp2044976" class="indexterm" name="idp2044976"></a></li>
+</ul>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div xml:lang="en" class="chapter" title="Chapter&nbsp;1.&nbsp;TeX"
+lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h2 class="title"><a id="tex" name=
+"tex"></a>Chapter&nbsp;1.&nbsp;TeX</h2>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="toc">
+<p><strong>Table of Contents</strong></p>
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#plaintex">1
+PlainTeX</a></span></dt>
+<dd>
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#plaintex-ovw">1.1
+Overview</a></span></dt>
+</dl>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#latex">2 LaTeX</a></span></dt>
+<dd>
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#opt-latex">2.1
+Options</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#overview">2.2 Overview of LaTeX
+and Local Guide</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#commands">2.3
+Commands</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#parameters">2.4
+Parameters</a></span></dt>
+</dl>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#latex-packages">3 LaTeX
+Packages</a></span></dt>
+<dd>
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#amsmath">3.1 <code class=
+"filename">amsmath</code></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#dcolumn">3.2 <code class=
+"filename">dcolumn</code></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#float">3.3 <code class=
+"filename">float</code></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#fontenc">3.4 <code class=
+"filename">fontenc</code></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#german">3.5 <code class=
+"filename">german</code></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#graphics">3.6 <code class=
+"filename">graphics</code></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#hyperref">3.7 <code class=
+"filename">hyperref</code></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#inputenc">3.8 <code class=
+"filename">inputenc</code></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#komascript">3.9 <code class=
+"filename">KOMA-Script</code></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#mathpazo">3.10 <code class=
+"filename">mathpazo</code></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#varioref">3.11 <code class=
+"filename">varioref</code></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#small-packages">3.12 Several
+Small Packages</a></span></dt>
+</dl>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#generic-packages">4 Generic
+Packages</a></span></dt>
+<dd>
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#pictex">4.1 PiCTeX
+(tbd.)</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#pstricks">4.2
+PSTricks</a></span></dt>
+</dl>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#fontinst">5 <code class=
+"filename">fontinst</code> (tbd.)</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#context">6 ConTeXt
+(tbd.)</a></span></dt>
+<dd>
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#context-ovw">6.1
+Overview</a></span></dt>
+</dl>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#texinfo">7 Texinfo
+(tbd.)</a></span></dt>
+</dl>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="1 PlainTeX">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h2 class="title" style="clear: both"><a id="plaintex" name=
+"plaintex"></a>1 PlainTeX</h2>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp2050448" class="indexterm" name="idp2050448"></a>
+<div class="section" title="1.1 Overview">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="plaintex-ovw" name="plaintex-ovw"></a>1.1
+Overview</h3>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<p>For a really excellent reference of all TeX primitive control
+sequences see David Bausum's<a id="idp2053504" class="indexterm"
+name="idp2053504"></a> <a class="ulink" href=
+"http://www.tug.org/utilities/plain/cseq.html" target=
+"_top"><span class="emphasis"><em>TeX Primitive Control
+Sequences</em></span></a>.</p>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="2 LaTeX">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h2 class="title" style="clear: both"><a id="latex" name=
+"latex"></a>2 LaTeX</h2>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="note" title="Note" style=
+"margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;">
+<h3 class="title">Note</h3>
+<p>The original file <code class="filename">latex2e.texi</code>
+contains the following copyright and permission notice:</p>
+<p><span class="quote">&ldquo;<span class="quote">Permission is
+granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of this manual
+provided the copyright notice and this permission notice are
+preserved on all copies.</span>&rdquo;</span></p>
+<p><span class="quote">&ldquo;<span class="quote">Permission is
+granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this manual
+under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that the entire
+resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a
+permission notice identical to this one.</span>&rdquo;</span></p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="2.1 Options">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="opt-latex" name="opt-latex"></a>2.1
+Options</h3>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp6690976" class="indexterm" name="idp6690976"></a>
+<p>LaTeX understands the following command line options.</p>
+<div class="section" title="2.1.1 -file-line-error-style">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="opt-latex-file-line-error-style" name=
+"opt-latex-file-line-error-style"></a>2.1.1 <code class=
+"filename">-file-line-error-style</code></h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp6694720" class="indexterm" name="idp6694720"></a>
+<p>Print error messages in the form <code class=
+"literal">file:line:error</code>.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="2.1.2 -fmt=FMTNAME">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="opt-latex-fmt" name=
+"opt-latex-fmt"></a>2.1.2 <code class=
+"filename">-fmt=FMTNAME</code></h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp6699120" class="indexterm" name="idp6699120"></a>
+<p>Use <code class="literal">FMTMAME</code> instead of program name
+or a %&amp; line.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="2.1.3 -ini">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="opt-latex-ini" name=
+"opt-latex-ini"></a>2.1.3 <code class="filename">-ini</code></h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp6703520" class="indexterm" name="idp6703520"></a>
+<p>Be <span class="command"><strong>initex</strong></span>, for
+dumping formats; this is implicitly true if the program is called
+as <span class="command"><strong>initex</strong></span>.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="2.1.4 -interaction=STRING">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="opt-latex-interaction-mode" name=
+"opt-latex-interaction-mode"></a>2.1.4 <code class=
+"filename">-interaction=STRING</code></h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp6708544" class="indexterm" name="idp6708544"></a>
+<p>Set interaction mode (<code class=
+"literal">STRING=batchmode/nonstopmode/scrollmode/errorstopmode</code>).</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="2.1.5 -ipc">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="opt-latex-ipc" name=
+"opt-latex-ipc"></a>2.1.5 <code class="filename">-ipc</code></h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp6712944" class="indexterm" name="idp6712944"></a>
+<p>Send DVI output to a socket as well as the usual output
+file.</p>
+<p>Note: not available on all systems.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="2.1.6 -ipc-start">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="opt-latex-ipc-start" name=
+"opt-latex-ipc-start"></a>2.1.6 <code class=
+"filename">-ipc-start</code></h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp6717104" class="indexterm" name="idp6717104"></a>
+<p>As <code class="literal">-ipc</code>, and also start the server
+at the other end.</p>
+<p>Note: not available on all systems.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="2.1.7 -jobname=STRING">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="opt-latex-jobname-name" name=
+"opt-latex-jobname-name"></a>2.1.7 <code class=
+"filename">-jobname=STRING</code></h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp6721888" class="indexterm" name="idp6721888"></a>
+<p>Set the job name to <code class="literal">STRING</code>.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="2.1.8 -kpathsea-debug=NUMBER">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="opt-latex-kpathsea-debug" name=
+"opt-latex-kpathsea-debug"></a>2.1.8 <code class=
+"filename">-kpathsea-debug=NUMBER</code></h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp6726288" class="indexterm" name="idp6726288"></a>
+<p>Sets path searching debugging flags according to the bits of
+<code class="literal">NUMBER</code>.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="2.1.9 [-no]-maketex=FMT">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="opt-latex-no-maketex" name=
+"opt-latex-no-maketex"></a>2.1.9 <code class=
+"filename">[-no]-maketex=FMT</code></h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp6730688" class="indexterm" name="idp6730688"></a>
+<p>Disable/enable <span class=
+"command"><strong>mktexFMT</strong></span> generation
+(FMT=tex/tfm).</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="2.1.10 -mltex">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="opt-latex-mltex" name=
+"opt-latex-mltex"></a>2.1.10 <code class=
+"filename">-mltex</code></h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp6735088" class="indexterm" name="idp6735088"></a>
+<p>Enable MLTeX extensions such as <code class=
+"literal">\charsubdef</code>.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="2.1.11 -output-comment=STRING">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="opt-latex-output-comment" name=
+"opt-latex-output-comment"></a>2.1.11 <code class=
+"filename">-output-comment=STRING</code></h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp6739488" class="indexterm" name="idp6739488"></a>
+<p>use <code class="literal">STRING</code> for DVI file comment
+instead of date.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="2.1.12 -parse-first-line">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="opt-latex-parse-first-line" name=
+"opt-latex-parse-first-line"></a>2.1.12 <code class=
+"filename">-parse-first-line</code></h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp6743888" class="indexterm" name="idp6743888"></a>
+<p>Parse of the first line of the input file.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="2.1.13 -progname=STRING">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="opt-latex-progname" name=
+"opt-latex-progname"></a>2.1.13 <code class=
+"filename">-progname=STRING</code></h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp6747664" class="indexterm" name="idp6747664"></a>
+<p>Set program (and fmt) name to <code class=
+"literal">STRING</code>.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="2.1.14 -recorder">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="opt-latex-recorder" name=
+"opt-latex-recorder"></a>2.1.14 <code class=
+"filename">-recorder</code></h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp6752064" class="indexterm" name="idp6752064"></a>
+<p>Enable filename recorder.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="2.1.15 -shell-escape">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="opt-latex-shell-escape" name=
+"opt-latex-shell-escape"></a>2.1.15 <code class=
+"filename">-shell-escape</code></h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp6755840" class="indexterm" name="idp6755840"></a>
+<p>Enable <code class="literal">\write18{SHELL COMMAND}</code>.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="2.1.16 -src-specials">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="opt-latex-src-specials" name=
+"opt-latex-src-specials"></a>2.1.16 <code class=
+"filename">-src-specials</code></h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp6760240" class="indexterm" name="idp6760240"></a>
+<p>Insert source specials into the DVI file.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="2.1.17 -src-specials=WHERE">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="opt-latex-src-specials-where" name=
+"opt-latex-src-specials-where"></a>2.1.17 <code class=
+"filename">-src-specials=WHERE</code></h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp6764016" class="indexterm" name="idp6764016"></a>
+<p>Insert source specials in certain places of the DVI file.
+<code class="literal">WHERE</code> is a comma-separated value list:
+<code class="literal">cr display hbox math par parend
+vbox</code>.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="2.1.18 -translate-file=TCXNAME">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="opt-latex-translate-file-tcxname" name=
+"opt-latex-translate-file-tcxname"></a>2.1.18 <code class=
+"filename">-translate-file=TCXNAME</code></h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp6769040" class="indexterm" name="idp6769040"></a>
+<p>Use the <code class="literal">TCX</code> file <code class=
+"literal">TCXNAME</code>.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="2.1.19 -help">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="opt-latex-help" name=
+"opt-latex-help"></a>2.1.19 <code class=
+"filename">-help</code></h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp6774064" class="indexterm" name="idp6774064"></a>
+<p>Display this help and exit.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="2.1.20 -version">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="opt-latex-version" name=
+"opt-latex-version"></a>2.1.20 <code class=
+"filename">-version</code></h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp6777840" class="indexterm" name="idp6777840"></a>
+<p>Output version information and exit.</p>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="2.2 Overview of LaTeX and Local Guide">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="overview" name="overview"></a>2.2 Overview
+of LaTeX and Local Guide</h3>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp6781760" class="indexterm" name="idp6781760"></a><a id=
+"idp6782512" class="indexterm" name="idp6782512"></a>
+<p>The LaTeX command typesets a file of text using the TeX program
+and the LaTeX Macro package for TeX. To be more specific, it
+processes an input file containing the text of a document with
+interspersed commands that describe how the text should be
+formatted. It produces at least three files as output:</p>
+<div class="orderedlist">
+<ol class="orderedlist" type="1">
+<li class="listitem">
+<p>A <span class="emphasis"><em>Device Independent</em></span>, or
+<code class="filename">.dvi</code> file. This contains commands
+that can be translated into commands for a variety of output
+devices. You can view the output of LaTeX by using a program such
+as <code class="literal">xdvi</code>, which actually uses the
+<code class="filename">.dvi</code> file.</p>
+</li>
+<li class="listitem">
+<p>A <span class="emphasis"><em>transcript</em></span> or
+<code class="filename">.log</code> file that contains summary
+information and diagnostic messages for any errors discovered in
+the input file.</p>
+</li>
+<li class="listitem">
+<p>An <span class="emphasis"><em>auxiliary</em></span> or
+<code class="filename">.aux</code> file. This is used by LaTeX
+itself, for things such as sectioning.</p>
+</li>
+</ol>
+</div>
+<p>For a description of what goes on inside TeX, you should consult
+<em class="citetitle">The TeXbook</em> by Donald E. Knuth, ISBN
+0-201-13448-9, published jointly by the American Mathematical
+Society and Addison-Wesley Publishing Company.</p>
+<p>For a description of LaTeX, you should consult:</p>
+<p><em class="citetitle">LaTeX: A Document Preparation System</em>,
+by Leslie Lamport,<a id="idp6796768" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp6796768"></a> Addison-Wesley Publishing Company, 2nd edition,
+1994.</p>
+<p><em class="citetitle">The LaTeX Companion</em>, by Michel
+Goossens,<a id="idp6798800" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp6798800"></a> Frank Mittelbach, <a id="idp6799808" class=
+"indexterm" name="idp6799808"></a> and Alexander Samarin,<a id=
+"idp6800816" class="indexterm" name="idp6800816"></a>
+Addison-Wesley, 1994.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="2.3 Commands">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="commands" name="commands"></a>2.3
+Commands</h3>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<p>A LaTeX command begins with the command name, which consists of
+a <code class="literal">\</code> followed by either (a) a string of
+letters or (b) a single non-letter. Arguments contained in square
+brackets, <code class="literal">[]</code>, are optional while
+arguments contained in braces, <code class="literal">{}</code>, are
+required.</p>
+<p>NOTE: LaTeX is case sensitive. Enter all commands in lower case
+unless explicitly directed to do otherwise.</p>
+<div class="section" title="2.3.1 Counters">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="counters" name="counters"></a>2.3.1
+Counters</h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp6807984" class="indexterm" name="idp6807984"></a><a id=
+"idp6808736" class="indexterm" name="idp6808736"></a>
+<p>Everything LaTeX numbers for you has a counter associated with
+it. The name of the counter is the same as the name of the
+environment or command that produces the number, except with no
+<code class="literal">\</code> (<code class="literal">enumi</code>
+- <code class="literal">enumiv</code> are used for the nested
+enumerate environment). Below is a list of the counters used in
+LaTeX's standard document classes to control numbering.</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+part paragraph figure enumi
+chapter subparagraph table enumii
+section page footnote enumiii
+subsection equation mpfootnote enumiv
+subsubsection
+</pre>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-addtocounter" name=
+"cmd-addtocounter"></a><code class=
+"literal">\addtocounter</code></h5>
+<a id="idp6814944" class="indexterm" name="idp6814944"></a>
+<p>The <code class="literal">\addtocounter</code> command
+increments the <code class="literal">counter</code> by the amount
+specified by the <code class="literal">value</code> argument. The
+<code class="literal">value</code> argument can be negative.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-alph-title" name=
+"cmd-alph-title"></a><code class=
+"literal">\alph{counter}</code></h5>
+<a id="idp6819808" class="indexterm" name="idp6819808"></a><a id=
+"idp6820560" class="indexterm" name="idp6820560"></a>
+<p>This command causes the value of the <code class=
+"literal">counter</code> to be printed in alphabetic characters.
+The <code class="literal">\alph</code> command uses lower case
+alphabetic alphabetic characters, i.e., <code class="literal">a, b,
+c...</code> while the <code class="literal">\Alph</code> command
+uses upper case alphabetic characters, i.e., <code class=
+"literal">A, B, C...</code>.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-arabic-title" name=
+"cmd-arabic-title"></a><code class=
+"literal">\arabic{counter}</code></h5>
+<a id="idp6826048" class="indexterm" name="idp6826048"></a>
+<p>The <code class="literal">\arabic</code> command causes the
+value of the <code class="literal">counter</code> to be printed in
+Arabic numbers, i.e., <code class="literal">3</code>.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-fnsymbol-title" name=
+"cmd-fnsymbol-title"></a><code class=
+"literal">\fnsymbol{counter}</code></h5>
+<a id="idp6830288" class="indexterm" name="idp6830288"></a>
+<p>The <code class="literal">\fnsymbol</code> command causes the
+value of the <code class="literal">counter</code> to be printed in
+a specific sequence of nine symbols that can be used for numbering
+footnotes.</p>
+<p>NB. <code class="literal">counter</code> must have a value
+between 1 and 9 inclusive.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-newcounter-title" name=
+"cmd-newcounter-title"></a><code class=
+"literal">\newcounter{foo}[counter]</code></h5>
+<a id="idp6835040" class="indexterm" name="idp6835040"></a><a id=
+"idp6835792" class="indexterm" name="idp6835792"></a>
+<p>The <code class="literal">\newcounter</code> command defines a
+new counter named <code class="literal">foo</code>. The counter is
+initialized to zero.</p>
+<p>The optional argument <code class="literal">[counter]</code>
+causes the counter <code class="literal">foo</code> to be reset
+whenever the counter named in the optional argument is
+incremented.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-refstepcounter-title" name=
+"cmd-refstepcounter-title"></a><code class=
+"literal">\refstepcounter{counter}</code></h5>
+<a id="idp6841152" class="indexterm" name="idp6841152"></a>
+<p>The <code class="literal">\refstepcounter</code> command works
+like <code class="literal">\stepcounter</code>. See <a class="link"
+href="#cmd-stepcounter-title" title=
+"2.3.1.&nbsp;\stepcounter{counter}">\stepcounter</a>, except it
+also defines the current <code class="literal">\ref</code> value to
+be the result of <code class="literal">\thecounter</code>.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-roman-title" name=
+"cmd-roman-title"></a><code class=
+"literal">\roman{counter}</code></h5>
+<a id="idp6858944" class="indexterm" name="idp6858944"></a><a id=
+"idp6859696" class="indexterm" name="idp6859696"></a>
+<p>This command causes the value of the <code class=
+"literal">counter</code> to be printed in Roman numerals. The
+<code class="literal">\roman</code> command uses lower case Roman
+numerals, i.e., <code class="literal">i, ii, iii...</code>, while
+the <code class="literal">\Roman</code> command uses upper case
+Roman numerals, i.e., <code class="literal">I, II,
+III...</code>.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-stepcounter-title" name=
+"cmd-stepcounter-title"></a><code class=
+"literal">\stepcounter{counter}</code></h5>
+<a id="idp6865184" class="indexterm" name="idp6865184"></a>
+<p>The <code class="literal">\stepcounter</code> command adds one
+to the <code class="literal">counter</code> and resets all
+subsidiary counters.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-setcounter-title" name=
+"cmd-setcounter-title"></a><code class=
+"literal">\setcounter{counter}{value}</code></h5>
+<a id="idp6868800" class="indexterm" name="idp6868800"></a><a id=
+"idp6869552" class="indexterm" name="idp6869552"></a>
+<p>The <code class="literal">\setcounter</code> command sets the
+value of the <code class="literal">counter</code> to that specified
+by the <code class="literal">value</code> argument.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-usecounter-title" name=
+"cmd-usecounter-title"></a><code class=
+"literal">\usecounter{counter}</code></h5>
+<a id="idp6873792" class="indexterm" name="idp6873792"></a>
+<p>The <code class="literal">\usecounter</code> command is used in
+the second argument of the <code class="literal">list</code>
+environment to allow the counter specified to be used to number the
+list items.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-value-title" name=
+"cmd-value-title"></a><code class=
+"literal">\value{counter}</code></h5>
+<a id="idp6877520" class="indexterm" name="idp6877520"></a><a id=
+"idp6878272" class="indexterm" name="idp6878272"></a>
+<p>The <code class="literal">\value</code> command produces the
+value of the <code class="literal">counter</code> named in the
+mandatory argument. It can be used where LaTeX expects an integer
+or number, such as the second argument of a <code class=
+"literal">\setcounter</code> or <code class=
+"literal">\addtocounter</code> command, or in:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\hspace{\value{foo}\parindent}
+</pre>
+<p>It is useful for doing arithmetic with counters.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="2.3.2 Cross References">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="cross-references" name=
+"cross-references"></a>2.3.2 Cross References</h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp6884544" class="indexterm" name="idp6884544"></a>
+<p>One reason for numbering things like figures and equations is to
+refer the reader to them, as in <span class="emphasis"><em>See
+Figure 3 for more details.</em></span> A smarter version of the
+cross reference commands is available in the package <a class=
+"link" href="#varioref" title="3.11 varioref"><code class=
+"literal">varioref</code></a>.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-label-title" name=
+"cmd-label-title"></a><code class="literal">\label{key}</code></h5>
+<a id="idp6888528" class="indexterm" name="idp6888528"></a>
+<p>A <code class="literal">\label</code> command appearing in
+ordinary text assigns to the <code class="literal">key</code> the
+number of the current sectional unit; one appearing inside a
+numbered environment assigns that number to the <code class=
+"literal">key</code>.</p>
+<p>A <code class="literal">key</code> can consist of any sequence
+of letters, digits, or punctuation characters. Upper and lowercase
+letters are different.</p>
+<p>To avoid accidentally creating two labels with the same name, it
+is common to use labels consisting of a prefix and a suffix
+separated by a colon. The prefixes conventionally used are</p>
+<div class="itemizedlist">
+<ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc" compact="compact">
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">cha</code> for
+chapters</li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">sec</code> for
+lower-level sectioning commands</li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">fig</code> for
+figures</li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">tab</code> for
+tables</li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">eq</code> for
+equations</li>
+</ul>
+</div>
+<p>Thus, a label for a figure would look like <code class=
+"literal">fig:bandersnatch</code>.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-pageref" name=
+"cmd-pageref"></a><code class="literal">\pageref{key}</code></h5>
+<a id="idp6902624" class="indexterm" name="idp6902624"></a><a id=
+"idp6903376" class="indexterm" name="idp6903376"></a>
+<p>The <code class="literal">\pageref</code> command produces the
+page number of the place in the text where the corresponding
+<code class="literal">\label</code> command appears. ie. where
+<code class="literal">\label{key}</code> appears. For a smart
+version see <a class="link" href="#cmd-vpageref"><code class=
+"literal">\vpageref</code></a>.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-ref-title" name=
+"cmd-ref-title"></a><code class="literal">\ref{key}</code></h5>
+<a id="idp6908720" class="indexterm" name="idp6908720"></a><a id=
+"idp6909472" class="indexterm" name="idp6909472"></a>
+<p>The <code class="literal">\ref</code> command produces the
+number of the sectional unit, equation number, ... of the
+corresponding <code class="literal">\label</code> command. For a
+smart version see <a class="link" href="#cmd-vref">\vref</a>.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="2.3.3 Definitions">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="definitions" name="definitions"></a>2.3.3
+Definitions</h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-newcommand-title" name=
+"cmd-newcommand-title"></a><code class=
+"literal">\newcommand</code></h5>
+<a id="idp6915344" class="indexterm" name="idp6915344"></a><a id=
+"idp6916096" class="indexterm" name="idp6916096"></a><a id=
+"idp6916848" class="indexterm" name="idp6916848"></a>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\newcommand{cmd}[args]{definition}
+\newcommand{cmd}[args][default]{definition}
+\renewcommand{cmd}[args]{definition}
+\renewcommand{cmd}[args][default]{definition}
+</pre>
+<p>These commands define (or redefine) a command.</p>
+<div class="table"><a id="table-newcommand" name=
+"table-newcommand"></a>
+<p class="title"><strong>Table&nbsp;1.1.&nbsp;Options for
+<code class="literal">\newcommand</code></strong></p>
+<div class="table-contents">
+<table summary="Options for \newcommand" border="0">
+<colgroup>
+<col align="left" />
+<col align="justify" /></colgroup>
+<tbody>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">cmd</td>
+<td align="justify">A command name beginning with a <code class=
+"literal">\</code>. For <code class="literal">\newcommand</code> it
+must not be already defined and must not begin with <code class=
+"literal">\end</code>; for <code class=
+"literal">\renewcommand</code> it must already be defined.</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">args</td>
+<td align="justify">An integer from 1 to 9 denoting the number of
+arguments of the command being defined. The default is for the
+command to have no arguments.</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">def</td>
+<td align="justify">If this optional parameter is present, it means
+that the command's first argument is optional. The default value of
+the optional argument is <code class="literal">def</code>.</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">definition</td>
+<td align="justify">The text to be substituted for every occurrence
+of <code class="literal">cmd</code>; a parameter of the form
+<code class="literal">#n</code> in <code class="literal">cmd</code>
+is replaced by the text of the nth argument when this substitution
+takes place.</td>
+</tr>
+</tbody>
+</table>
+</div>
+</div>
+<br class="table-break" />
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-newenvironment-title" name=
+"cmd-newenvironment-title"></a><code class=
+"literal">\newenvironment</code></h5>
+<a id="idp6935872" class="indexterm" name="idp6935872"></a><a id=
+"idp6936624" class="indexterm" name="idp6936624"></a><a id=
+"idp6937376" class="indexterm" name="idp6937376"></a>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\newenvironment{nam}[args]{begdef}{enddef}
+\newenvironment{nam}[args][default]{begdef}{enddef}
+\renewenvironment{nam}[args]{begdef}{enddef}
+</pre>
+<p>These commands define or redefine an environment.</p>
+<div class="table"><a id="table-newenvironment" name=
+"table-newenvironment"></a>
+<p class="title"><strong>Table&nbsp;1.2.&nbsp;Options for
+<code class="literal">\newenvironment</code></strong></p>
+<div class="table-contents">
+<table summary="Options for \newenvironment" border="0">
+<colgroup>
+<col align="left" />
+<col align="justify" /></colgroup>
+<tbody>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">nam</td>
+<td align="justify">The name of the environment. For <code class=
+"literal">\newenvironment</code> there must be no currently defined
+environment by that name, and the command <code class=
+"literal">\nam</code> must be undefined. For <code class=
+"literal">\renewenvironment</code> the environment must already be
+defined.</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">args</td>
+<td align="justify">An integer from 1 to 9 denoting the number of
+arguments of the newly-defined environment. The default is no
+arguments. Arguments can only be used in te <code class=
+"literal">{begdef}</code> part.</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">default</td>
+<td align="justify">If this is specified, the first argument is
+optional, and <code class="literal">default</code> gives the
+default value for that argument.</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">begdef</td>
+<td align="justify">The text substituted for every occurrence of
+<code class="literal">\begin{nam}</code>; a parameter of the form
+<code class="literal">#n</code> in <code class="literal">cmd</code>
+is replaced by the text of the nth argument when this substitution
+takes place.</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">enddef</td>
+<td align="justify">The text substituted for every occurrence of
+<code class="literal">\end{nam}</code>. It may not contain any
+argument parameters.</td>
+</tr>
+</tbody>
+</table>
+</div>
+</div>
+<br class="table-break" />
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-newtheorem-title" name=
+"cmd-newtheorem-title"></a><code class=
+"literal">\newtheorem</code></h5>
+<a id="idp6957904" class="indexterm" name="idp6957904"></a><a id=
+"idp6958656" class="indexterm" name="idp6958656"></a><a id=
+"idp6959408" class="indexterm" name="idp6959408"></a>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\newtheorem{env_name}{caption}[within]
+\newtheorem{env_name}[numbered_like]{caption}
+</pre>
+<p>This command defines a theorem-like environment.</p>
+<div class="table"><a id="table-newtheorem" name=
+"table-newtheorem"></a>
+<p class="title"><strong>Table&nbsp;1.3.&nbsp;Options for
+<code class="literal">\newtheorem</code></strong></p>
+<div class="table-contents">
+<table summary="Options for \newtheorem" border="0">
+<colgroup>
+<col align="left" />
+<col align="justify" /></colgroup>
+<tbody>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">env_name</td>
+<td align="justify">The name of the environment to be defined. A
+string of letters. It must not be the name of an existing
+environment or counter.</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">caption</td>
+<td align="justify">The text printed at the beginning of the
+environment, right before the number. This may simply say
+<span class="emphasis"><em>Theorem</em></span>, for example.</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">within</td>
+<td align="justify">The name of an already defined counter, usually
+of a sectional unit. Provides a means of resetting the new theorem
+counter <span class="bold"><strong>within</strong></span> the
+sectional unit.</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">numbered_like</td>
+<td align="justify">The name of an already defined theorem-like
+environment.</td>
+</tr>
+</tbody>
+</table>
+</div>
+</div>
+<br class="table-break" />
+<p>The <code class="literal">\newtheorem</code> command may have at
+most one optional argument.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-newfont-title" name=
+"cmd-newfont-title"></a><code class="literal">\newfont</code></h5>
+<a id="idp6974816" class="indexterm" name="idp6974816"></a><a id=
+"idp6975568" class="indexterm" name="idp6975568"></a><a id=
+"idp6976320" class="indexterm" name="idp6976320"></a>
+<p><code class="literal">\newfont{cmd}{font_name}</code></p>
+<p>Defines the command name <code class="literal">cmd</code>, which
+must not be currently defined, to be a declaration that selects the
+font named <code class="literal">font_name</code> to be the current
+font.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="2.3.4 Document Classes">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="document-classes" name=
+"document-classes"></a>2.3.4 Document Classes</h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp6980944" class="indexterm" name="idp6980944"></a><a id=
+"idp6981696" class="indexterm" name="idp6981696"></a><a id=
+"idp6982448" class="indexterm" name="idp6982448"></a><a id=
+"idp6983200" class="indexterm" name="idp6983200"></a><a id=
+"idp6983952" class="indexterm" name="idp6983952"></a><a id=
+"idp6984704" class="indexterm" name="idp6984704"></a><a id=
+"idp6985456" class="indexterm" name="idp6985456"></a>
+<p>Valid LaTeX document classes include:</p>
+<div class="itemizedlist">
+<ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc" compact="compact">
+<li class="listitem">article</li>
+<li class="listitem">report</li>
+<li class="listitem">letter</li>
+<li class="listitem">book</li>
+<li class="listitem">slides</li>
+</ul>
+</div>
+<p>Other document classes are often available. See <a class="link"
+href="#overview" title=
+"2.2 Overview of LaTeX and Local Guide">Overview</a>, for details.
+They are selected with the following command:</p>
+<p><code class="literal">\documentclass [options]
+{class}</code></p>
+<p>All the standard classes (except slides) accept the following
+options for selecting the typeface size (<code class=
+"literal">10pt</code> is default):</p>
+<p><code class="literal">10pt, 11pt, 12pt</code></p>
+<p>All classes accept these options for selecting the paper size
+(default is letter):</p>
+<p>a4paper, a5paper, b5paper, letterpaper, legalpaper,
+executivepaper</p>
+<p>Miscellaneous options:</p>
+<div class="itemizedlist">
+<ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc" compact="compact">
+<li class="listitem">landscape --- selects landscape format.
+Default is portrait.</li>
+<li class="listitem">titlepage, notitlepage --- selects if there
+should be a separate title page.</li>
+<li class="listitem">leqno --- equation number on left side of
+equations. Default is right side.</li>
+<li class="listitem">fleqn --- displayed formulas flush left.
+Default is centered.</li>
+<li class="listitem">openbib --- use <span class=
+"emphasis"><em>open</em></span> bibliography format.</li>
+<li class="listitem">draft, final --- mark/do not mark overfull
+boxes with a rule. Default is final.</li>
+</ul>
+</div>
+<p>These options are not available with the slides class:</p>
+<div class="itemizedlist">
+<ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc" compact="compact">
+<li class="listitem">oneside, twoside --- selects one- or twosided
+layout. Default is oneside, except for the book class.</li>
+<li class="listitem">openright, openany --- determines if a chapter
+should start on a right-hand page. Default is openright for
+book.</li>
+<li class="listitem">onecolumn, twocolumn --- one or two columns.
+Defaults to one column.</li>
+</ul>
+</div>
+<p>The slides class offers the option <code class=
+"literal">clock</code> for printing the time at the bottom of each
+note.</p>
+<p>If you specify more than one option, they must be separated by a
+comma.</p>
+<p>Additional packages are loaded by a</p>
+<p><a id="usepackage-linkend" name="usepackage-linkend"></a>
+<code class="literal">\usepackage[options]{pkg}</code> <a id=
+"idp7008832" class="indexterm" name="idp7008832"></a></p>
+<p>command. If you specify more than one package, they must be
+separated by a comma. <a id="idp7010080" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp7010080"></a> <a id="idp7010832" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp7010832"></a></p>
+<p>Any options given in the <code class=
+"literal">\documentclass</code> command that are unknown by the
+selected document class are passed on to the packages loaded with
+<code class="literal">\usepackage</code>. <a id="idp7013344" class=
+"indexterm" name="idp7013344"></a> <a id="idp7014096" class=
+"indexterm" name="idp7014096"></a></p>
+<a id="idp7014976" class="indexterm" name="idp7014976"></a></div>
+<div class="section" title="2.3.5 Layout">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="layout" name="layout"></a>2.3.5
+Layout</h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<p>Miscellaneous commands for controlling the general layout of the
+page.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-flushbottom-title" name=
+"cmd-flushbottom-title"></a><code class=
+"literal">\flushbottom</code></h5>
+<a id="idp7018688" class="indexterm" name="idp7018688"></a>
+<p>The <code class="literal">\flushbottom</code> declaration makes
+all text pages the same height, adding extra vertical space when
+necessary to fill out the page.</p>
+<p>This is the standard if twocolumn mode is selected.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-onecolumn-title" name=
+"cmd-onecolumn-title"></a><code class=
+"literal">\onecolumn</code></h5>
+<a id="idp7022208" class="indexterm" name="idp7022208"></a>
+<p>The <code class="literal">\onecolumn</code> declaration starts a
+new page and produces single-column output.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-raggedbottom-title" name=
+"cmd-raggedbottom-title"></a><code class=
+"literal">\raggedbottom</code></h5>
+<a id="idp7025296" class="indexterm" name="idp7025296"></a>
+<p>The <code class="literal">\raggedbottom</code> declaration makes
+all pages the height of the text on that page. No extra vertical
+space is added.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-twocolumn-title" name=
+"cmd-twocolumn-title"></a><code class=
+"literal">\twocolumn</code></h5>
+<a id="idp7028416" class="indexterm" name="idp7028416"></a><a id=
+"idp7029168" class="indexterm" name="idp7029168"></a>
+<p><code class="literal">\twocolumn[text]</code></p>
+<p>The <code class="literal">\twocolumn</code> declaration starts a
+new page and produces two-column output. If the optional
+<code class="literal">text</code> argument is present, it is
+typeset in one-column mode.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="2.3.6 Environments">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="env-latex" name="env-latex"></a>2.3.6
+Environments</h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp7034128" class="indexterm" name="idp7034128"></a><a id=
+"idp7034880" class="indexterm" name="idp7034880"></a><a id=
+"idp7035632" class="indexterm" name="idp7035632"></a>
+<p>LaTeX provides a number of different paragraph-making
+environments. Each environment begins and ends in the same
+manner.</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\begin{environment-name}
+ .
+ .
+ .
+\end{environment-name}
+</pre>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="env-array" name="env-array"></a>array</h5>
+<a id="idp7038736" class="indexterm" name="idp7038736"></a><a id=
+"idp7039488" class="indexterm" name="idp7039488"></a>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\begin{array}{col1col2...coln}
+column 1 entry &amp; column 2 entry ... &amp; column n entry \\
+ .
+ .
+ .
+\end{array}
+</pre>
+<p>Math arrays are produced with the array environment. It has a
+single mandatory argument describing the number of columns and the
+alignment within them. Each column, <code class=
+"literal">coln</code>, is specified by a single letter that tells
+how items in that row should be formatted.</p>
+<div class="itemizedlist">
+<ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc" compact="compact">
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">c</code> --- for
+centered</li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">l</code> --- for flush
+left</li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">r</code> --- for flush
+right</li>
+</ul>
+</div>
+<p>Column entries must be separated by an <code class=
+"literal">&amp;</code>. Column entries may include other LaTeX
+commands. Each row of the array must be terminated with the string
+<code class="literal">\\</code>.</p>
+<p>Note that the <code class="literal">array</code> environment can
+only be used in math mode, so normally it is used inside an
+<code class="literal">equation</code> environment.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="env-center" name=
+"env-center"></a><code class="literal">center</code></h5>
+<a id="idp7051984" class="indexterm" name="idp7051984"></a><a id=
+"idp7052736" class="indexterm" name="idp7052736"></a>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\begin{center}
+Text on line 1 \\
+Text on line 2 \\
+ .
+ .
+ .
+\end{center}
+</pre>
+<p>The <code class="literal">center</code> environment allows you
+to create a paragraph consisting of lines that are centered within
+the left and right margins on the current page. Each line must be
+terminated with the string <code class="literal">\\</code>.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-centering" name=
+"cmd-centering"></a><code class="literal">\centering</code></h5>
+<a id="idp7057296" class="indexterm" name="idp7057296"></a><a id=
+"idp7058048" class="indexterm" name="idp7058048"></a><a id=
+"idp7058800" class="indexterm" name="idp7058800"></a>
+<p>This declaration corresponds to the <code class=
+"literal">center</code> environment. This declaration can be used
+inside an environment such as <code class="literal">quote</code> or
+in a <code class="literal">parbox</code>. The text of a figure or
+table can be centered on the page by putting a <code class=
+"literal">\centering</code> command at the beginning of the figure
+or table environment.</p>
+<p>Unlike the <code class="literal">center</code> environment, the
+<code class="literal">\centering</code> command does not start a
+new paragraph; it simply changes how LaTeX formats paragraph units.
+To affect a paragraph unit's format, the scope of the declaration
+must contain the blank line or <code class="literal">\end</code>
+command (of an environment like quote) that ends the paragraph
+unit.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="env-description" name=
+"env-description"></a><code class="literal">description</code></h5>
+<a id="idp7066928" class="indexterm" name="idp7066928"></a><a id=
+"idp7067680" class="indexterm" name="idp7067680"></a>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\begin{description}
+\item [label] First item
+\item [label] Second item
+ .
+ .
+ .
+\end{description}
+</pre>
+<p>The <code class="literal">description</code> environment is used
+to make labelled lists. The <code class="literal">label</code> is
+bold face and flushed right.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="env-enumerate" name=
+"env-enumerate"></a><code class="literal">enumerate</code></h5>
+<a id="idp7072112" class="indexterm" name="idp7072112"></a><a id=
+"idp7072864" class="indexterm" name="idp7072864"></a>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\begin{enumerate}
+\item First item
+\item Second item
+ .
+ .
+ .
+\end{enumerate}
+</pre>
+<p>The <code class="literal">enumerate</code> environment produces
+a numbered list. Enumerations can be nested within one another, up
+to four levels deep. They can also be nested within other
+paragraph-making environments.</p>
+<p>Each item of an enumerated list begins with an <code class=
+"literal">\item</code> command. There must be at least one
+<code class="literal">\item</code> command within the
+environment.</p>
+<p>The <code class="literal">enumerate</code> environment uses the
+<code class="literal">enumi</code> through <code class=
+"literal">enumiv</code> counters (see <a class="link" href=
+"#counters" title="2.3.1 Counters">Counters</a>). The type of
+numbering can be changed by redefining <code class=
+"literal">\theenumi</code> etc.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="env-eqnarray" name=
+"env-eqnarray"></a><code class="literal">eqnarray</code></h5>
+<a id="idp7082000" class="indexterm" name="idp7082000"></a><a id=
+"idp7082752" class="indexterm" name="idp7082752"></a><a id=
+"idp7083504" class="indexterm" name="idp7083504"></a>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\begin{eqnarray}
+math formula 1 \\
+math formula 2 \\
+ .
+ .
+ .
+\end{eqnarray}
+</pre>
+<p>The <code class="literal">eqnarray</code> environment is used to
+display a sequence of equations or inequalities. It is very much
+like a three-column <code class="literal">array</code> environment,
+with consecutive rows separated by <code class="literal">\\</code>
+and consecutive items within a row separated by an <code class=
+"literal">&amp;</code>.</p>
+<p>An equation number is placed on every line unless that line has
+a <code class="literal">\nonumber</code> command.</p>
+<a id="idp7089168" class="indexterm" name="idp7089168"></a>
+<p>The command <code class="literal">\lefteqn</code> is used for
+splitting long formulas across lines. It typesets its argument in
+display style flush left in a box of zero width.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="env-equation" name=
+"env-equation"></a><code class="literal">equation</code></h5>
+<a id="idp7092320" class="indexterm" name="idp7092320"></a><a id=
+"idp7093072" class="indexterm" name="idp7093072"></a><a id=
+"idp7093824" class="indexterm" name="idp7093824"></a>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\begin{equation}
+ math formula
+\end{equation}
+</pre>
+<p>The <code class="literal">equation</code> environment centers
+your equation on the page and places the equation number in the
+right margin.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="env-figure" name=
+"env-figure"></a><code class="literal">figure</code></h5>
+<a id="idp7097568" class="indexterm" name="idp7097568"></a><a id=
+"idp7098320" class="indexterm" name="idp7098320"></a>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\begin{figure}[placement]
+
+ body of the figure
+
+\caption{figure title}
+\end{figure}
+</pre>
+<a id="idp7099792" class="indexterm" name="idp7099792"></a>
+<p>Figures are objects that are not part of the normal text, and
+are usually <span class="emphasis"><em>floated</em></span> to a
+convenient place, like the top of a page. Figures will not be split
+between two pages.</p>
+<p>The optional argument <code class="literal">[placement]</code>
+determines where LaTeX will try to place your figure. There are
+four places where LaTeX can possibly put a float:</p>
+<div class="orderedlist">
+<ol class="orderedlist" type="1">
+<li class="listitem">
+<p><code class="literal">h</code> (Here) - at the position in the
+text where the figure environment appears.</p>
+</li>
+<li class="listitem">
+<p><code class="literal">t</code> (Top) - at the top of a text
+page.</p>
+</li>
+<li class="listitem">
+<p><code class="literal">b</code> (Bottom) - at the bottom of a
+text page.</p>
+</li>
+<li class="listitem">
+<p><code class="literal">p</code> (Page of floats) - on a separate
+float page, which is a page containing no text, only floats.</p>
+</li>
+</ol>
+</div>
+<p>The standard report and article classes use the default
+placement <code class="literal">tbp</code>.</p>
+<p>The body of the figure is made up of whatever text, LaTeX
+commands, etc. you wish. The <code class="literal">\caption</code>
+command allows you to title your figure.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="env-flushleft" name=
+"env-flushleft"></a><code class="literal">flushleft</code></h5>
+<a id="idp7113328" class="indexterm" name="idp7113328"></a><a id=
+"idp7114080" class="indexterm" name="idp7114080"></a><a id=
+"idp7114832" class="indexterm" name="idp7114832"></a>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\begin{flushleft}
+Text on line 1 \\
+Text on line 2 \\
+ .
+ .
+ .
+\end{flushleft}
+</pre>
+<p>The <code class="literal">flushleft</code> environment allows
+you to create a paragraph consisting of lines that are flushed
+left, to the left-hand margin. Each line must be terminated with
+the string <code class="literal">\\</code>.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-raggedright" name=
+"cmd-raggedright"></a><code class=
+"literal">\raggedright</code></h5>
+<a id="idp7119376" class="indexterm" name="idp7119376"></a><a id=
+"idp7120128" class="indexterm" name="idp7120128"></a><a id=
+"idp7120880" class="indexterm" name="idp7120880"></a><a id=
+"idp7121632" class="indexterm" name="idp7121632"></a>
+<p>This declaration corresponds to the <code class=
+"literal">flushleft</code> environment. This declaration can be
+used inside an environment such as <code class=
+"literal">quote</code> or in a <code class=
+"literal">parbox</code>.</p>
+<p>Unlike the <code class="literal">flushleft</code> environment,
+the <code class="literal">\raggedright</code> command does not
+start a new paragraph; it simply changes how LaTeX formats
+paragraph units. To affect a paragraph unit's format, the scope of
+the declaration must contain the blank line or <code class=
+"literal">\end</code> command (of an environment like quote) that
+ends the paragraph unit.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="env-flushright" name=
+"env-flushright"></a><code class="literal">flushright</code></h5>
+<a id="idp7128960" class="indexterm" name="idp7128960"></a><a id=
+"idp7129712" class="indexterm" name="idp7129712"></a><a id=
+"idp7130464" class="indexterm" name="idp7130464"></a>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\begin{flushright}
+Text on line 1 \\
+Text on line 2 \\
+ .
+ .
+ .
+\end{flushright}
+</pre>
+<p>The <code class="literal">flushright</code> environment allows
+you to create a paragraph consisting of lines that are flushed
+right, to the right-hand margin. Each line must be terminated with
+the string <code class="literal">\\</code>.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-raggedleft" name=
+"cmd-raggedleft"></a><code class="literal">\raggedleft</code></h5>
+<a id="idp7134992" class="indexterm" name="idp7134992"></a><a id=
+"idp7135744" class="indexterm" name="idp7135744"></a><a id=
+"idp7136496" class="indexterm" name="idp7136496"></a><a id=
+"idp7137248" class="indexterm" name="idp7137248"></a>
+<p>This declaration corresponds to the <code class=
+"literal">flushright</code> environment. This declaration can be
+used inside an environment such as <code class=
+"literal">quote</code> or in a <code class=
+"literal">parbox</code>.</p>
+<p>Unlike the <code class="literal">flushright</code> environment,
+the <code class="literal">\raggedleft</code> command does not start
+a new paragraph; it simply changes how LaTeX formats paragraph
+units. To affect a paragraph unit's format, the scope of the
+declaration must contain the blank line or <code class=
+"literal">\end</code> command (of an environment like quote) that
+ends the paragraph unit.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="env-itemize" name=
+"env-itemize"></a><code class="literal">itemize</code></h5>
+<a id="idp7144576" class="indexterm" name="idp7144576"></a><a id=
+"idp7145328" class="indexterm" name="idp7145328"></a><a id=
+"idp7146080" class="indexterm" name="idp7146080"></a>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\begin{itemize}
+\item First item
+\item Second item
+ .
+ .
+ .
+\end{itemize}
+</pre>
+<p>The <code class="literal">itemize</code> environment produces a
+<span class="emphasis"><em>bulleted</em></span> list. Itemizations
+can be nested within one another, up to four levels deep. They can
+also be nested within other paragraph-making environments.</p>
+<p>Each item of an <code class="literal">itemized</code> list
+begins with an <code class="literal">\item</code> command. There
+must be at least one <code class="literal">\item</code> command
+within the environment.</p>
+<p>The <code class="literal">itemize</code> environment uses the
+<code class="literal">itemi</code> through <code class=
+"literal">itemiv</code> counters (see <a class="link" href=
+"#counters" title="2.3.1 Counters">Counters</a>). The type of
+numbering can be changed by redefining <code class=
+"literal">\theitemi</code> etc.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="env-letter" name=
+"env-letter"></a><code class="literal">letter</code></h5>
+<a id="idp7156192" class="indexterm" name="idp7156192"></a>
+<p>This environment is used for creating letters. See <a class=
+"link" href="#letters" title="2.3.9 Letters">Letters</a>.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="env-list" name="env-list"></a><code class=
+"literal">list</code></h5>
+<a id="idp7159264" class="indexterm" name="idp7159264"></a><a id=
+"idp7160016" class="indexterm" name="idp7160016"></a>
+<p>The <code class="literal">list</code> environment is a generic
+environment which is used for defining many of the more specific
+environments. It is seldom used in documents, but often in
+macros.</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\begin{list}{label}{spacing}
+\item First item
+\item Second item
+ .
+ .
+ .
+\end{list}
+</pre>
+<p>The <code class="literal">{label}</code> argument specifies how
+items should be labelled. This argument is a piece of text that is
+inserted in a box to form the label. This argument can and usually
+does contain other LaTeX commands.</p>
+<p>The <code class="literal">{spacing}</code> argument contains
+commands to change the spacing parameters for the list. This
+argument will most often be null, i.e., <code class=
+"literal">{}</code>. This will select all default spacing which
+should suffice for most cases.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="env-minipage" name=
+"env-minipage"></a><code class="literal">minipage</code></h5>
+<a id="idp7167424" class="indexterm" name="idp7167424"></a><a id=
+"idp7168176" class="indexterm" name="idp7168176"></a><a id=
+"idp7168928" class="indexterm" name="idp7168928"></a><a id=
+"idp7169680" class="indexterm" name="idp7169680"></a>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\begin{minipage}[position][height][inner-pos]{width}
+ text
+\end{minipage}
+</pre>
+<p>The <code class="literal">minipage</code> environment is similar
+to a <code class="literal">\parbox</code> command. It takes the
+same optional <code class="literal">position</code> argument and
+mandatory <code class="literal">width</code> argument. You may use
+other paragraph-making environments inside a minipage.</p>
+<p>Footnotes in a <code class="literal">minipage</code> environment
+are handled in a way that is particularly useful for putting
+footnotes in figures or tables. A <code class=
+"literal">\footnote</code> or <code class=
+"literal">\footnotetext</code> command puts the footnote at the
+bottom of the minipage instead of at the bottom of the page, and it
+uses the <code class="literal">mpfootnote</code> counter instead of
+the ordinary <code class="literal">footnote</code> counter See
+<a class="link" href="#counters" title=
+"2.3.1 Counters">Counters</a>.</p>
+<p>NOTE: Don't put one minipage inside another if you are using
+footnotes; they may wind up at the bottom of the wrong
+minipage.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="env-picture" name=
+"env-picture"></a><code class="literal">picture</code></h5>
+<a id="idp7180336" class="indexterm" name="idp7180336"></a><a id=
+"idp7181088" class="indexterm" name="idp7181088"></a><a id=
+"idp7181840" class="indexterm" name="idp7181840"></a>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\begin{picture}(width,height)(x offset,y offset)
+ .
+ .
+ picture commands
+ .
+ .
+\end{picture}
+</pre>
+<p>The <code class="literal">picture</code> environment allows you
+to create just about any kind of picture you want containing text,
+lines, arrows and circles. You tell LaTeX where to put things in
+the picture by specifying their coordinates. A coordinate is a
+number that may have a decimal point and a minus sign --- a number
+like <code class="literal">5</code>, <code class=
+"literal">2.3</code> or <code class="literal">-3.1416</code>. A
+coordinate specifies a length in multiples of the unit length
+<code class="literal">\unitlength</code>, so if <code class=
+"literal">\unitlength</code> has been set to <code class=
+"literal">1cm</code>, then the coordinate 2.54 specifies a length
+of 2.54 centimetres. You can change the value of <code class=
+"literal">\unitlength</code> anywhere you want, using the
+<code class="literal">\setlength</code> command, but strange things
+will happen if you try changing it inside the picture
+environment.</p>
+<p>A position is a pair of coordinates, such as <code class=
+"literal">(2.4,-5)</code>, specifying the point with x-coordinate
+<code class="literal">2.4</code> and y-coordinate <code class=
+"literal">-5</code>. Coordinates are specified in the usual way
+with respect to an origin, which is normally at the lower-left
+corner of the picture. Note that when a position appears as an
+argument, it is not enclosed in braces; the parentheses serve to
+delimit the argument.</p>
+<p>The <code class="literal">picture</code> environment has one
+mandatory argument, which is a <code class=
+"literal">position</code>. It specifies the size of the picture.
+The environment produces a rectangular box with width and height
+determined by this argument's x- and y-coordinates.</p>
+<p>The <code class="literal">picture</code> environment also has an
+optional <code class="literal">position</code> argument, following
+the <code class="literal">size</code> argument, that can change the
+origin. (Unlike ordinary optional arguments, this argument is not
+contained in square brackets.) The optional argument gives the
+coordinates of the point at the lower-left corner of the picture
+(thereby determining the origin). For example, if <code class=
+"literal">\unitlength</code> has been set to <code class=
+"literal">1mm</code>, the command</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\begin{picture}(100,200)(10,20)
+</pre>
+<p>produces a picture of width 100 millimetres and height 200
+millimetres, whose lower-left corner is the point (10,20) and whose
+upper-right corner is therefore the point (110,220). When you first
+draw a picture, you will omit the optional argument, leaving the
+origin at the lower-left corner. If you then want to modify your
+picture by shifting everything, you just add the appropriate
+optional argument.</p>
+<p>The environment's mandatory argument determines the nominal size
+of the picture. This need bear no relation to how large the picture
+really is; LaTeX will happily allow you to put things outside the
+picture, or even off the page. The picture's nominal size is used
+by LaTeX in determining how much room to leave for it.</p>
+<p>Everything that appears in a picture is drawn by the
+<code class="literal">\put</code> command. The command</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\put (11.3,-.3){...}
+</pre>
+<p>puts the object specified by <code class="literal">...</code> in
+the picture, with its reference point at coordinates (11.3,-.3).
+The reference points for various objects will be described
+below.</p>
+<p>The <code class="literal">\put</code> command creates an
+<span class="bold"><strong>LR box</strong></span>. You can put
+anything in the text argument of the <code class=
+"literal">\put</code> command that you'd put into the argument of
+an <code class="literal">\mbox</code> and related commands. When
+you do this, the reference point will be the lower left corner of
+the box.</p>
+<p>Picture commands:</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-circle" name=
+"cmd-circle"></a><code class="literal">\circle{diameter},
+\circle*{diameter}</code></h5>
+<a id="idp7208560" class="indexterm" name="idp7208560"></a>
+<p>The <code class="literal">\circle</code> command produces a
+circle with a diameter as close to the specified one as possible.
+If the <code class="literal">*</code>-form of the command is used,
+LaTeX draws a solid circle.</p>
+<p>Note that only circles up to 40 pt can be drawn.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-dashbox" name=
+"cmd-dashbox"></a><code class="literal">\dashbox</code></h5>
+<a id="idp7213072" class="indexterm" name="idp7213072"></a>
+<p>Draws a box with a dashed line.</p>
+<p><code class=
+"literal">\dashbox{dash_length}(width,height){...}</code></p>
+<p>The <code class="literal">\dashbox</code> has an extra argument
+which specifies the width of each dash. A dashed box looks best
+when the <code class="literal">width</code> and <code class=
+"literal">height</code> are multiples of the <code class=
+"literal">dash_length</code>.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-frame" name=
+"cmd-frame"></a><code class="literal">\frame{...}</code></h5>
+<a id="idp7219472" class="indexterm" name="idp7219472"></a>
+<p>The <code class="literal">\frame</code> command puts a
+rectangular frame around the object specified in the argument. The
+reference point is the bottom left corner of the frame. No extra
+space is put between the frame and the object.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-framebox-op-picture-cp" name=
+"cmd-framebox-op-picture-cp"></a><code class=
+"literal">\framebox(width,height)[position]{...}</code></h5>
+<a id="idp7222592" class="indexterm" name="idp7222592"></a>
+<p>The <code class="literal">\framebox</code> command is exactly
+the same as the <code class="literal">\makebox</code> command,
+except that it puts a frame around the outside of the box that it
+creates.</p>
+<p>The <code class="literal">framebox</code> command produces a
+rule of thickness <code class="literal">\fboxrule</code>, and
+leaves a space <code class="literal">\fboxsep</code> between the
+rule and the contents of the box.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-line" name="cmd-line"></a><code class=
+"literal">\line(x slope,y slope){length}</code></h5>
+<a id="idp7228576" class="indexterm" name="idp7228576"></a>
+<p>The <code class="literal">\line</code> command draws a line of
+the specified <code class="literal">length</code> and <code class=
+"literal">slope</code>.</p>
+<p>Note that LaTeX can only draw lines with slope = x/y, where x
+and y have integer values from -6 through 6.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-linethickness" name=
+"cmd-linethickness"></a><code class=
+"literal">\linethickness{dimension}</code></h5>
+<a id="idp7233712" class="indexterm" name="idp7233712"></a>
+<p>Declares the thickness of horizontal and vertical lines in a
+picture environment to be <code class="literal">dimension</code>,
+which must be a positive length. It does not affect the thickness
+of slanted lines and circles, or the quarter circles drawn by
+<code class="literal">\oval</code> to form the corners of an
+oval.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-makebox-op-picture-cp" name=
+"cmd-makebox-op-picture-cp"></a><code class=
+"literal">\makebox(width,height)[position]{...}</code></h5>
+<a id="idp7237616" class="indexterm" name="idp7237616"></a>
+<p>The <code class="literal">\makebox</code> command for the
+picture environment is similar to the normal <code class=
+"literal">\makebox</code> command except that you must specify a
+<code class="literal">width</code> and <code class=
+"literal">height</code> in multiples of <code class=
+"literal">\unitlength</code>.</p>
+<p>The optional argument, <code class="literal">[position]</code>,
+specifies the quadrant that your text appears in. You may select up
+to two of the following:</p>
+<div class="itemizedlist">
+<ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc" compact="compact">
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">t</code> - Moves the
+item to the top of the rectangle</li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">b</code> - Moves the
+item to the bottom</li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">l</code> - Moves the
+item to the left</li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">r</code> - Moves the
+item to the right</li>
+</ul>
+</div>
+<p>See <a class="link" href="#cmd-makebox" title=
+"2.3.17.&nbsp;\makebox">\makebox</a>.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-multiput" name=
+"cmd-multiput"></a><code class="literal">\multiput(x coord,y
+coord)(delta x,delta y){number of copies}{object}</code></h5>
+<a id="idp7251104" class="indexterm" name="idp7251104"></a>
+<p>The <code class="literal">\multiput</code> command can be used
+when you are putting the same object in a regular pattern across a
+picture.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-oval" name="cmd-oval"></a><code class=
+"literal">\oval(width,height)[portion]</code></h5>
+<a id="idp7254224" class="indexterm" name="idp7254224"></a>
+<p>The <code class="literal">\oval</code> command produces a
+rectangle with rounded corners. The optional argument, <code class=
+"literal">[portion]</code>, allows you to select part of the
+oval.</p>
+<div class="itemizedlist">
+<ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc" compact="compact">
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">t</code> - Selects the
+top portion</li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">b</code> - Selects the
+bottom portion</li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">r</code> - Selects the
+right portion</li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">l</code> - Selects the
+left portion</li>
+</ul>
+</div>
+<p>Note that the <span class="emphasis"><em>corners</em></span> of
+the oval are made with quarter circles with a maximum radius of 20
+pt, so large <span class="emphasis"><em>ovals</em></span> will look
+more like boxes with rounded corners.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-put" name="cmd-put"></a><code class=
+"literal">\put(x coord,y coord){ ... }</code></h5>
+<a id="idp7264976" class="indexterm" name="idp7264976"></a>
+<p>The <code class="literal">\put</code> command places the item
+specified by the mandatory argument at the given coordinates.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-shortstack" name=
+"cmd-shortstack"></a><code class=
+"literal">\shortstack[position]{... \\ ... \\ ...}</code></h5>
+<a id="idp7268080" class="indexterm" name="idp7268080"></a>
+<p>The <code class="literal">\shortstack</code> command produces a
+stack of objects. The valid positions are:</p>
+<div class="itemizedlist">
+<ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc" compact="compact">
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">r</code> - Moves the
+objects to the right of the stack</li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">l</code> - Moves the
+objects to the left of the stack</li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">c</code> - Moves the
+objects to the centre of the stack (default)</li>
+</ul>
+</div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-vector" name=
+"cmd-vector"></a><code class="literal">\vector(x slope,y
+slope){length}</code></h5>
+<a id="idp7275744" class="indexterm" name="idp7275744"></a>
+<p>The <code class="literal">\vector</code> command draws a line
+with an arrow of the specified length and slope. The <code class=
+"literal">x</code> and <code class="literal">y</code> values must
+lie between -4 and +4, inclusive.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="env-quotation" name=
+"env-quotation"></a><code class="literal">quotation</code></h5>
+<a id="idp7280080" class="indexterm" name="idp7280080"></a><a id=
+"idp7280832" class="indexterm" name="idp7280832"></a><a id=
+"idp7281584" class="indexterm" name="idp7281584"></a>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\begin{quotation}
+ text
+\end{quotation}
+</pre>
+<p>The margins of the <code class="literal">quotation</code>
+environment are indented on the left and the right. The text is
+justified at both margins and there is paragraph indentation.
+Leaving a blank line between text produces a new paragraph.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="env-quote" name=
+"env-quote"></a><code class="literal">quote</code></h5>
+<a id="idp7285424" class="indexterm" name="idp7285424"></a><a id=
+"idp7286176" class="indexterm" name="idp7286176"></a><a id=
+"idp7286928" class="indexterm" name="idp7286928"></a>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\begin{quote}
+ text
+\end{quote}
+</pre>
+<p>The margins of the <code class="literal">quote</code>
+environment are indented on the left and the right. The text is
+justified at both margins. Leaving a blank line between text
+produces a new paragraph.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="env-tabbing" name=
+"env-tabbing"></a><code class="literal">tabbing</code></h5>
+<a id="idp7290736" class="indexterm" name="idp7290736"></a><a id=
+"idp7291488" class="indexterm" name="idp7291488"></a><a id=
+"idp7292240" class="indexterm" name="idp7292240"></a>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\begin{tabbing}
+text \= more text \= still more text \= last text \\
+second row \&gt; \&gt; more \\
+ .
+ .
+ .
+\end{tabbing}
+</pre>
+<p>The <code class="literal">tabbing</code> environment provides a
+way to align text in columns. It works by setting tab stops and
+tabbing to them much the way you do with an ordinary
+typewriter.</p>
+<p>It is best suited for cases where the width of each column is
+constant and known in advance.</p>
+<p>This environment can be broken across pages, unlike the
+<code class="literal">tabular</code> environment.</p>
+<p>The following commands can be used inside a <code class=
+"literal">tabbing</code> environment:</p>
+<div class="table"><a id="table-tabbing" name="table-tabbing"></a>
+<p class="title"><strong>Table&nbsp;1.4.&nbsp;Commands in a
+<code class="literal">tabbing</code> environment</strong></p>
+<div class="table-contents">
+<table summary="Commands in a tabbing environment" border="0">
+<colgroup>
+<col align="left" />
+<col align="justify" /></colgroup>
+<tbody>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">\= <a id="idp7302176" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp7302176"></a></td>
+<td align="justify">Sets a tab stop at the current position.</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">\&gt; <a id="idp7304192" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp7304192"></a></td>
+<td align="justify">Advances to the next tab stop.</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">\&lt; <a id="idp7306208" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp7306208"></a></td>
+<td align="justify">This command allows you to put something to the
+left of the local margin without changing the margin. Can only be
+used at the start of the line.</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">\+ <a id="idp7308416" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp7308416"></a></td>
+<td align="justify">Moves the left margin of the next and all the
+following commands one tab stop to the right.</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">\- <a id="idp7310560" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp7310560"></a></td>
+<td align="justify">Moves the left margin of the next and all the
+following commands one tab stop to the left.</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">\' <a id="idp7312704" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp7312704"></a></td>
+<td align="justify">Moves everything that you have typed so far in
+the current column, i.e. everything from the most recent
+<code class="literal">\&gt;</code>, <code class=
+"literal">\&lt;</code>, <code class="literal">\'</code>,
+<code class="literal">\\</code>, or <code class=
+"literal">\kill</code> command, to the right of the previous
+column, flush against the current column's tab stop.</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">\` <a id="idp7318112" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp7318112"></a></td>
+<td align="justify">Allows you to put text flush right against any
+tab stop, including tab stop 0. However, it can't move text to the
+right of the last column because there's no tab stop there. The
+<code class="literal">\`</code> command moves all the text that
+follows it, up to the <code class="literal">\\</code> or
+<code class="literal">\end{tabbing}</code> command that ends the
+line, to the right margin of the tabbing environment. There must be
+no <code class="literal">\&gt;</code> or <code class=
+"literal">\'</code> command between the <code class=
+"literal">\`</code> and the command that ends the line.</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">\kill <a id="idp7324320" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp7324320"></a></td>
+<td align="justify">Sets tab stops without producing text. Works
+just like <code class="literal">\\</code> except that it throws
+away the current line instead of producing output for it. The
+effect of any <code class="literal">\=</code>, <code class=
+"literal">\+</code> or <code class="literal">\-</code> commands in
+that line remain in effect.</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">\pushtabs <a id="idp7329056" class="indexterm"
+name="idp7329056"></a></td>
+<td align="justify">Saves all current tab stop positions. Useful
+for temporarily changing tab stop positions in the middle of a
+<code class="literal">tabbing</code> environment.</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">\poptabs <a id="idp7331840" class="indexterm"
+name="idp7331840"></a></td>
+<td align="justify">Restores the tab stop positions saved by the
+last <code class="literal">\pushtabs</code>.</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">\a <a id="idp7334560" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp7334560"></a></td>
+<td align="justify">In a <code class="literal">tabbing</code>
+environment, the commands <code class="literal">\=</code>,
+<code class="literal">\'</code> and <code class="literal">\`</code>
+do not produce accents as normal. Instead, the commands
+<code class="literal">\a=</code>, <code class="literal">\a'</code>
+and <code class="literal">\a`</code> are used.</td>
+</tr>
+</tbody>
+</table>
+</div>
+</div>
+<br class="table-break" />
+<p>This example typesets a Pascal function in a traditional
+format:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\begin{tabbing}
+function \= fact(n : integer) : integer;\\
+ \&gt; begin \= \+ \\
+ \&gt; if \= n $&gt;$ 1 then \+ \\
+ fact := n * fact(n-1) \- \\
+ else \+ \\
+ fact := 1; \-\- \\
+ end;\\
+\end{tabbing}
+</pre>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="env-table" name=
+"env-table"></a><code class="literal">table</code></h5>
+<a id="idp7343712" class="indexterm" name="idp7343712"></a><a id=
+"idp7344464" class="indexterm" name="idp7344464"></a><a id=
+"idp7345216" class="indexterm" name="idp7345216"></a>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\begin{table}[placement]
+
+ body of the table
+
+\caption{table title}
+\end{table}
+</pre>
+<p>Tables are objects that are not part of the normal text, and are
+usually <span class="emphasis"><em>floated</em></span> to a
+convenient place, like the top of a page. Tables will not be split
+between two pages.</p>
+<p>The optional argument <code class="literal">[placement]</code>
+determines where LaTeX will try to place your table. There are four
+places where LaTeX can possibly put a float:</p>
+<div class="itemizedlist">
+<ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc" compact="compact">
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">h</code> : Here - at the
+position in the text where the table environment appears.</li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">t</code> : Top - at the
+top of a text page.</li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">b</code> : Bottom - at
+the bottom of a text page.</li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">p</code> : Page of
+floats - on a separate float page, which is a page containing no
+text, only floats.</li>
+</ul>
+</div>
+<p>The standard <code class="literal">report</code> and
+<code class="literal">article</code> classes use the default
+placement <code class="literal">[tbp]</code>.</p>
+<p>The body of the table is made up of whatever text, LaTeX
+commands, etc., you wish. The <code class="literal">\caption</code>
+command allows you to title your table.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="env-tabular" name=
+"env-tabular"></a><code class="literal">tabular</code></h5>
+<a id="idp7360416" class="indexterm" name="idp7360416"></a><a id=
+"idp7361168" class="indexterm" name="idp7361168"></a><a id=
+"idp7361920" class="indexterm" name="idp7361920"></a>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\begin{tabular}[pos]{cols}
+column 1 entry &amp; column 2 entry ... &amp; column n entry \\
+ .
+ .
+ .
+\end{tabular}
+</pre>
+<p>or</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\begin{tabular*}{width}[pos]{cols}
+column 1 entry &amp; column 2 entry ... &amp; column n entry \\
+ .
+ .
+ .
+\end{tabular*}
+</pre>
+<p>These environments produce a box consisting of a sequence of
+rows of items, aligned vertically in columns. The mandatory and
+optional arguments consist of:</p>
+<div class="table"><a id="table-tabular" name="table-tabular"></a>
+<p class="title"><strong>Table&nbsp;1.5.&nbsp;Commands used inside
+a <code class="literal">tabular</code> environment</strong></p>
+<div class="table-contents">
+<table summary="Commands used inside a tabular environment" border=
+"0">
+<colgroup>
+<col align="left" />
+<col align="justify" /></colgroup>
+<tbody>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">width</td>
+<td align="justify">Specifies the width of the <code class=
+"literal">tabular*</code> environment. There must be rubber space
+between columns that can stretch to fill out the specified
+width.</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">pos</td>
+<td align="justify">Specifies the vertical position; default is
+alignment on the centre of the environment.
+<div class="itemizedlist">
+<ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc" compact="compact">
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">t</code> - align on top
+row</li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">b</code> - align on
+bottom row</li>
+</ul>
+</div>
+</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">cols</td>
+<td align="justify">Specifies the column formatting. It consists of
+a sequence of the following specifiers, corresponding to the
+sequence of columns and intercolumn material.
+<div class="itemizedlist">
+<ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc" compact="compact">
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">l</code> - A column of
+left-aligned items.</li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">r</code> - A column of
+right-aligned items.</li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">c</code> - A column of
+centred items.</li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">|</code> - A vertical
+line the full height and depth of the environment.</li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">@{text}</code> - This
+inserts <code class="literal">text</code> in every row. An
+@-expression suppresses the intercolumn space normally inserted
+between columns; any desired space between the inserted text and
+the adjacent items must be included in text. An <code class=
+"literal">\extracolsep{wd}</code> command in an @-expression causes
+an extra space of width <code class="literal">wd</code> to appear
+to the left of all subsequent columns, until countermanded by
+another <code class="literal">\extracolsep</code> command. Unlike
+ordinary intercolumn space, this extra space is not suppressed by
+an @-expression. An <code class="literal">\extracolsep</code>
+command can be used only in an @-expression in the <code class=
+"literal">cols</code> argument.</li>
+<li class="listitem">
+<p class="simpara"><code class="literal">p{wd}</code> - Produces a
+column with each item typeset in a parbox of width <code class=
+"literal">wd</code>, as if it were the argument of a <code class=
+"literal">\parbox[t]{wd}</code> command. However, a <code class=
+"literal">\\</code> may not appear in the item, except in the
+following situations:</p>
+<div class="orderedlist">
+<ol class="orderedlist" type="1">
+<li class="listitem">inside an environment like <code class=
+"literal">minipage</code>, <code class="literal">array</code>, or
+<code class="literal">tabular</code>.</li>
+<li class="listitem">inside an explicit <code class=
+"literal">\parbox</code>.</li>
+<li class="listitem">in the scope of a <code class=
+"literal">\centering</code>, <code class=
+"literal">\raggedright</code>, or <code class=
+"literal">\raggedleft</code> declaration. The latter declarations
+must appear inside braces or an environment when used in a
+<code class="literal">p</code>-column element.</li>
+</ol>
+</div>
+</li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">*{num}{cols}</code> -
+Equivalent to <code class="literal">num</code> copies of
+<code class="literal">cols</code>, where <code class=
+"literal">num</code> is any positive integer and <code class=
+"literal">cols</code> is any list of column-specifiers, which may
+contain another <code class="literal">*-expression</code>.</li>
+</ul>
+</div>
+</td>
+</tr>
+</tbody>
+</table>
+</div>
+</div>
+<br class="table-break" />
+<p>These commands can be used inside a <code class=
+"literal">tabular</code> environment:</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-cline" name=
+"cmd-cline"></a><code class="literal">\cline{i-j}</code></h5>
+<a id="idp7407632" class="indexterm" name="idp7407632"></a>
+<p>The <code class="literal">\cline</code> command draws horizontal
+lines across the columns specified, beginning in column
+<code class="literal">i</code> and ending in column <code class=
+"literal">j</code>, which are identified in the mandatory
+argument.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-hline" name=
+"cmd-hline"></a><code class="literal">\hline</code></h5>
+<a id="idp7412064" class="indexterm" name="idp7412064"></a>
+<p>The <code class="literal">\hline</code> command will draw a
+horizontal line the width of the table. It's most commonly used to
+draw a line at the top, bottom, and between the rows of the
+table.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-multicolumn" name=
+"cmd-multicolumn"></a><code class=
+"literal">\multicolumn</code></h5>
+<a id="idp7415248" class="indexterm" name="idp7415248"></a>
+<p><code class="literal">\multicolumn{cols}{pos}{text}</code></p>
+<p>The <code class="literal">\multicolumn</code> is used to make an
+entry that spans several columns. The first mandatory argument,
+<code class="literal">cols</code>, specifies the number of columns
+to span. The second mandatory argument, <code class=
+"literal">pos</code>, specifies the formatting of the entry;
+<code class="literal">c</code> for centred, <code class=
+"literal">l</code> for flushleft, <code class="literal">r</code>
+for flushright. The third mandatory argument, <code class=
+"literal">text</code>, specifies what text is to make up the
+entry.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-vline" name=
+"cmd-vline"></a><code class="literal">\vline</code></h5>
+<a id="idp7423152" class="indexterm" name="idp7423152"></a>
+<p>The <code class="literal">\vline</code> command will draw a
+vertical line extending the full height and depth of its row. An
+<code class="literal">\hfill</code> command can be used to move the
+line to the edge of the column. It can also be used in an
+@-expression.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="env-thebibliography" name=
+"env-thebibliography"></a><code class=
+"literal">thebibliography</code></h5>
+<a id="idp7427024" class="indexterm" name="idp7427024"></a><a id=
+"idp7427776" class="indexterm" name="idp7427776"></a>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\begin{thebibliography}{widest-label}
+\bibitem[label]{cite_key}
+ .
+ .
+ .
+\end{thebibliography}
+</pre>
+<p>The <code class="literal">thebibliography</code> environment
+produces a bibliography or reference list. In the <code class=
+"literal">article</code> class, this reference list is labelled
+<span class="emphasis"><em>References</em></span>; in the
+<code class="literal">report</code> class, it is labelled
+<span class="emphasis"><em>Bibliography</em></span>.</p>
+<div class="itemizedlist">
+<ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc" compact="compact">
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">widest-label</code>:
+Text that, when printed, is approximately as wide as the widest
+item label produces by the <code class="literal">\bibitem</code>
+commands.</li>
+</ul>
+</div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-bibitem" name=
+"cmd-bibitem"></a><code class=
+"literal">\bibitem[label]{cite_key}</code></h5>
+<a id="idp7436240" class="indexterm" name="idp7436240"></a>
+<p>The <code class="literal">\bibitem</code> command generates an
+entry labelled by <code class="literal">label</code>. If the
+<code class="literal">label</code> argument is missing, a number is
+generated as the <code class="literal">label</code>, using the
+<code class="literal">enumi</code> counter. The <code class=
+"literal">cite_key</code> is any sequence of letters, numbers, and
+punctuation symbols not containing a comma. This command writes an
+entry on the <code class="filename">.aux</code> file containing
+<code class="literal">cite_key</code> and the item's <code class=
+"literal">label</code>. When this <code class=
+"filename">.aux</code> file is read by the <code class=
+"literal">\begin{document}</code> command, the item's <code class=
+"literal">label</code> is associated with <code class=
+"literal">cite_key</code>, causing the reference to <code class=
+"literal">cite_key</code> by a <code class="literal">\cite</code>
+command to produce the associated <code class=
+"literal">label</code>.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-cite" name="cmd-cite"></a><code class=
+"literal">\cite[text]{key_list}</code></h5>
+<a id="idp7448832" class="indexterm" name="idp7448832"></a>
+<p>The <code class="literal">key_list</code> argument is a list of
+citation keys. This command generates an in-text citation to the
+references associated with the keys in <code class=
+"literal">key_list</code> by entries on the <code class=
+"filename">.aux</code> file read by the <code class=
+"literal">\begin{document}</code> command.</p>
+<p>The optional <code class="literal">text</code> argument will
+appear after the citation, i.e. <code class=
+"literal">\cite[p.~2f.]{knuth}</code> might produce `[Knuth, p.
+2]'.</p>
+<p><a id="idp7454592" class="indexterm" name="idp7454592"></a> The
+package <code class="literal">cite.sty</code> allows a line break
+in the <code class="literal">\cite</code> reference and can sort
+numerical entries.</p>
+<p><a id="idp7457232" class="indexterm" name="idp7457232"></a>
+<code class="literal">overcite.sty</code> makes citations like
+footnotes.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-nocite" name=
+"cmd-nocite"></a><code class=
+"literal">\nocite{key_list}</code></h5>
+<a id="idp7460224" class="indexterm" name="idp7460224"></a>
+<p>The <code class="literal">\nocite</code> command produces no
+text, but writes <code class="literal">key_list</code>, which is a
+list of one or more citation keys, on the <code class=
+"filename">.aux</code> file. <code class=
+"literal">\nocite{*}</code> uses all entries from the BibTeX
+database.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="using-bibtex" name=
+"using-bibtex"></a>Using BibTeX</h5>
+<a id="idp7465232" class="indexterm" name="idp7465232"></a><a id=
+"idp7466016" class="indexterm" name="idp7466016"></a><a id=
+"idp7467504" class="indexterm" name="idp7467504"></a><a id=
+"idp7468336" class="indexterm" name="idp7468336"></a><a id=
+"idp7469504" class="indexterm" name="idp7469504"></a>
+<p>If you use the BibTeX program by Oren Patashnik (highly
+recommended if you need a bibliography of more than a couple of
+titles) to maintain your bibliography, you don't use the
+<code class="literal">thebibliography</code> environment. Instead,
+you include the lines</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\bibliographystyle{style}
+\bibliography{bibfile}
+</pre>
+<p>where <code class="literal">style</code> refers to a file
+<code class="literal">style.bst</code>, which defines how your
+citations will look.</p>
+<div class="table"><a id="table-standard-styles" name=
+"table-standard-styles"></a>
+<p class="title"><strong>Table&nbsp;1.6.&nbsp;Standard styles
+distributed with BibTeX</strong></p>
+<div class="table-contents">
+<table summary="Standard styles distributed with BibTeX" border=
+"0">
+<colgroup>
+<col align="left" />
+<col align="justify" /></colgroup>
+<tbody>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">alpha</td>
+<td align="justify">Sorted alphabetically. Labels are formed from
+name of author and year of publication.</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">plain</td>
+<td align="justify">Sorted alphabetically. Labels are numeric.</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">unsrt</td>
+<td align="justify">Like <code class="literal">plain</code>, but
+entries are in order of citation.</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">abbrv</td>
+<td align="justify">Like <code class="literal">plain</code>, but
+more compact labels.</td>
+</tr>
+</tbody>
+</table>
+</div>
+</div>
+<br class="table-break" />
+<p>In addition, numerous other BibTeX style files exist tailored to
+the demands of various publications.</p>
+<p>The argument to <code class="literal">\bibliography</code>
+refers to the file <code class="literal">bibfile.bib</code>, which
+should contain your database in BibTeX format. Only the entries
+referred to via <code class="literal">\cite</code> and <code class=
+"literal">\nocite</code> will be listed in the bibliography.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="env-theorem" name=
+"env-theorem"></a><code class="literal">theorem</code></h5>
+<a id="idp7489328" class="indexterm" name="idp7489328"></a><a id=
+"idp7490080" class="indexterm" name="idp7490080"></a>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\begin{theorem}
+ theorem text
+\end{theorem}
+</pre>
+<p>The <code class="literal">theorem</code> environment produces
+<span class="emphasis"><em>Theorem x</em></span> in boldface
+followed by your theorem text.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="env-titlepage" name=
+"env-titlepage"></a><code class="literal">titlepage</code></h5>
+<a id="idp7494080" class="indexterm" name="idp7494080"></a><a id=
+"idp7494832" class="indexterm" name="idp7494832"></a><a id=
+"idp7495584" class="indexterm" name="idp7495584"></a>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\begin{titlepage}
+ text
+\end{titlepage}
+</pre>
+<p>The <code class="literal">titlepage</code> environment creates a
+title page, i.e. a page with no printed page number or heading. It
+also causes the following page to be numbered page one. Formatting
+the title page is left to you. The <code class=
+"literal">\today</code> command comes in handy for title pages.
+<a id="idp7498704" class="indexterm" name="idp7498704"></a></p>
+<p>Note that you can use the <code class=
+"literal">\maketitle</code> (see <a class="link" href=
+"#cmd-maketitle" title="2.3.15.&nbsp;\maketitle">\maketitle</a>)
+command to produce a standard title page.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="env-verbatim" name=
+"env-verbatim"></a><code class="literal">verbatim</code></h5>
+<a id="idp7502448" class="indexterm" name="idp7502448"></a><a id=
+"idp7503200" class="indexterm" name="idp7503200"></a><a id=
+"idp7503952" class="indexterm" name="idp7503952"></a><a id=
+"idp7504704" class="indexterm" name="idp7504704"></a><a id=
+"idp7505456" class="indexterm" name="idp7505456"></a>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\begin{verbatim}
+ text
+\end{verbatim}
+</pre>
+<p>The <code class="literal">verbatim</code> environment is a
+paragraph-making environment that gets LaTeX to print exactly what
+you type in. It turns LaTeX into a typewriter with carriage returns
+and blanks having the same effect that they would on a
+typewriter.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-verb" name="cmd-verb"></a><code class=
+"literal">\verb char literal_text char</code> <code class=
+"literal">\verb*char literal_text char</code></h5>
+<a id="idp7510608" class="indexterm" name="idp7510608"></a><a id=
+"idp7511360" class="indexterm" name="idp7511360"></a>
+<p>Typesets <code class="literal">literal_text</code> exactly as
+typed, including special characters and spaces, using a typewriter
+(<code class="literal">\tt</code>) type style. There may be no
+space between <code class="literal">\verb</code> or <code class=
+"literal">\verb*</code> and <code class="literal">char</code>
+(space is shown here only for clarity). The <code class=
+"literal">*-form</code> differs only in that spaces are printed</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="env-verse" name=
+"env-verse"></a><code class="literal">verse</code></h5>
+<a id="idp7517584" class="indexterm" name="idp7517584"></a><a id=
+"idp7518336" class="indexterm" name="idp7518336"></a>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\begin{verse}
+ text
+\end{verse}
+</pre>
+<p>The <code class="literal">verse</code> environment is designed
+for poetry, though you may find other uses for it.</p>
+<p>The margins are indented on the left and the right. Separate the
+lines of each stanza with <code class="literal">\\</code>, and use
+one or more blank lines to separate the stanzas.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="2.3.7 Footnotes">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="footnotes" name="footnotes"></a>2.3.7
+Footnotes</h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp7523456" class="indexterm" name="idp7523456"></a>
+<p>Footnotes can be produced in one of two ways. They can be
+produced with one command, the <code class=
+"literal">\footnote</code> command. They can also be produced with
+two commands, the <code class="literal">\footnotemark</code> and
+the <code class="literal">\footnotetext</code> commands. See the
+specific command for information on why you would use one over the
+other.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-cmd-footnote" name=
+"cmd-cmd-footnote"></a><code class=
+"literal">\footnote[number]{text}</code></h5>
+<a id="idp7527936" class="indexterm" name="idp7527936"></a>
+<p>The <code class="literal">\footnote</code> command places the
+numbered footnote <code class="literal">text</code> at the bottom
+of the current page. The optional argument, <code class=
+"literal">number</code>, is used to change the default footnote
+number. This command can only be used in outer paragraph mode;
+i.e., you cannot use it in sectioning commands like <code class=
+"literal">\chapter</code>, in figures, tables or in a <code class=
+"literal">tabular</code> environment.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-footnotemark" name=
+"cmd-footnotemark"></a><code class=
+"literal">\footnotemark</code></h5>
+<a id="idp7533616" class="indexterm" name="idp7533616"></a>
+<p>The <code class="literal">\footnotemark</code> command puts the
+footnote <code class="literal">number</code> in the text. This
+command can be used in inner paragraph mode. The text of the
+footnote is supplied by the <code class=
+"literal">\footnotetext</code> command.</p>
+<p>This command can be used to produce several consecutive footnote
+markers referring to the same footnote by using</p>
+<p><code class="literal">\footnotemark[\value{footnote}]</code></p>
+<p>after the first <code class="literal">\footnote</code>
+command.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-footnotetext" name=
+"cmd-footnotetext"></a><code class=
+"literal">\footnotetext[number]{text}</code></h5>
+<a id="idp7540416" class="indexterm" name="idp7540416"></a>
+<p>The <code class="literal">\footnotetext</code> command produces
+the <code class="literal">text</code> to be placed at the bottom of
+the page. This command can come anywhere after the <code class=
+"literal">\footnotemark</code> command. The <code class=
+"literal">\footnotetext</code> command must appear in outer
+paragraph mode.</p>
+<p>The optional argument, <code class="literal">number</code>, is
+used to change the default footnote number.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="2.3.8 Lengths">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="lengths" name="lengths"></a>2.3.8
+Lengths</h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp7546496" class="indexterm" name="idp7546496"></a>
+<p>A <code class="literal">length</code> is a measure of distance.
+Many LaTeX commands take a length as an argument.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-newlength" name=
+"cmd-newlength"></a><code class="literal">\newlength</code></h5>
+<a id="idp7549872" class="indexterm" name="idp7549872"></a><a id=
+"idp7550624" class="indexterm" name="idp7550624"></a>
+<p><code class="literal">\newlength{\gnat}</code></p>
+<p>The <code class="literal">\newlength</code> command defines the
+mandatory argument, <code class="literal">\gnat</code>, as a
+<code class="literal">length</code> command with a value of
+<code class="literal">0in</code>. An error occurs if a <code class=
+"literal">\gnat</code> command already exists.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-setlength" name=
+"cmd-setlength"></a><code class="literal">\setlength</code></h5>
+<a id="idp7556992" class="indexterm" name="idp7556992"></a><a id=
+"idp7557744" class="indexterm" name="idp7557744"></a>
+<p><code class="literal">\setlength{\gnat}{length}</code></p>
+<p>The <code class="literal">\setlength</code> command is used to
+set the value of a <code class="literal">length</code> command. The
+<code class="literal">length</code> argument can be expressed in
+any terms of length LaTeX understands, i.e., inches (<code class=
+"literal">in</code>), millimetres (<code class=
+"literal">mm</code>), points (<code class="literal">pt</code>),
+etc.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-addtolength" name=
+"cmd-addtolength"></a><code class=
+"literal">\addtolength</code></h5>
+<a id="idp7564992" class="indexterm" name="idp7564992"></a><a id=
+"idp7565744" class="indexterm" name="idp7565744"></a>
+<p><code class="literal">\addtolength{\gnat}{length}</code></p>
+<p>The <code class="literal">\addtolength</code> command increments
+<span class="emphasis"><em>length command</em></span> by the amount
+specified in the <code class="literal">length</code> argument. It
+can be a negative amount.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-settodepth" name=
+"cmd-settodepth"></a><code class="literal">\settodepth</code></h5>
+<a id="idp7570496" class="indexterm" name="idp7570496"></a>
+<p><code class="literal">\settodepth{\gnat}{text}</code></p>
+<p>The <code class="literal">\settodepth</code> command sets the
+value of a <code class="literal">length</code> command equal to the
+depth of the <code class="literal">text</code> argument.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-settoheight" name=
+"cmd-settoheight"></a><code class=
+"literal">\settoheight</code></h5>
+<a id="idp7575488" class="indexterm" name="idp7575488"></a>
+<p><code class="literal">\settoheight{\gnat}{text}</code></p>
+<p>The <code class="literal">\settoheight</code> command sets the
+value of a <code class="literal">length</code> command equal to the
+height of the <code class="literal">text</code> argument.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-settowidth" name=
+"cmd-settowidth"></a><code class="literal">\settowidth</code></h5>
+<a id="idp7580480" class="indexterm" name="idp7580480"></a>
+<p><code class="literal">\settowidth{\gnat}{text}</code></p>
+<p>The <code class="literal">\settowidth</code> command sets the
+value of a <code class="literal">length</code> command equal to the
+width of the <code class="literal">text</code> argument.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="predefined-lengths-title" name=
+"predefined-lengths-title"></a><code class="literal">Predefined
+lengths</code></h5>
+<a id="idp7585472" class="indexterm" name="idp7585472"></a><a id=
+"idp7586224" class="indexterm" name="idp7586224"></a>
+<p><a id="cmd-length-pre-width" name=
+"cmd-length-pre-width"></a><code class="literal">\width</code>
+<a id="idp7587968" class="indexterm" name="idp7587968"></a></p>
+<p><a id="cmd-length-pre-height" name=
+"cmd-length-pre-height"></a><code class="literal">\height</code>
+<a id="idp7589840" class="indexterm" name="idp7589840"></a></p>
+<p><a id="cmd-length-pre-depth" name=
+"cmd-length-pre-depth"></a><code class="literal">\depth</code>
+<a id="idp7591712" class="indexterm" name="idp7591712"></a></p>
+<p><a id="cmd-length-pre-totalheight" name=
+"cmd-length-pre-totalheight"></a><code class=
+"literal">\totalheight</code> <a id="idp7593584" class="indexterm"
+name="idp7593584"></a></p>
+<p>These length parameters can be used in the arguments of the
+box-making commands See <a class="link" href="#spaces-and-boxes"
+title="2.3.17 Spaces &amp; Boxes">Spaces &amp; Boxes</a>. They
+specify the natural width etc. of the text in the box. <code class=
+"literal">\totalheight</code> equals <code class=
+"literal">\height</code> + <code class="literal">\depth</code>. To
+make a box with the text stretched to double the natural size,
+e.g., say</p>
+<p><code class="literal">\makebox[2\width]{Get a
+stretcher}</code></p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="2.3.9 Letters">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="letters" name="letters"></a>2.3.9
+Letters</h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp7599872" class="indexterm" name="idp7599872"></a><a id=
+"idp7600624" class="indexterm" name="idp7600624"></a>
+<p>You can use LaTeX to typeset letters, both personal and
+business. The <code class="literal">letter</code> document class is
+designed to make a number of letters at once, although you can make
+just one if you so desire.</p>
+<p>Your <code class="filename">.tex</code> source file has the same
+minimum commands as the other document classes, i.e., you must have
+the following commands as a minimum:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\documentclass{letter}
+\begin{document}
+ ... letters ...
+\end{document}
+</pre>
+<p>Each letter is a <code class="literal">letter</code>
+environment, whose argument is the name and address of the
+recipient. For example, you might have:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\begin{letter}{Mr. Joe Smith\\ 2345 Princess St.\\ Edinburgh, EH1 1AA}
+ ...
+\end{letter}
+</pre>
+<p>The letter itself begins with the <code class=
+"literal">\opening</code> command. The text of the letter follows.
+It is typed as ordinary LaTeX input. Commands that make no sense in
+a letter, like <code class="literal">\chapter</code>, do not work.
+The letter closes with a <code class="literal">\closing</code>
+command.</p>
+<p>After the <code class="literal">closing</code>, you can have
+additional material. The <code class="literal">\cc</code> command
+produces the usual <span class="emphasis"><em>cc: ...</em></span>.
+There's also a similar <code class="literal">\encl</code> command
+for a list of enclosures. With both these commands, use
+<code class="literal">\\</code> to separate the items.</p>
+<p>These commands are used with the <code class=
+"literal">letter</code> class:</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-address" name=
+"cmd-address"></a>\address</h5>
+<a id="idp7614784" class="indexterm" name="idp7614784"></a>
+<p><code class="literal">\address{Return address}</code></p>
+<p>The return address, as it should appear on the letter and the
+envelope. Separate lines of the address should be separated by
+<code class="literal">\\</code> commands. If you do not make an
+<code class="literal">\address</code> declaration, then the letter
+will be formatted for copying onto your organisation's standard
+letterhead. (See <a class="link" href="#overview" title=
+"2.2 Overview of LaTeX and Local Guide">Overview</a>, for details
+on your local implementation). If you give an <code class=
+"literal">\address</code> declaration, then the letter will be
+formatted as a personal letter.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-cc" name="cmd-cc"></a>\cc</h5>
+<a id="idp7620624" class="indexterm" name="idp7620624"></a><a id=
+"idp7621376" class="indexterm" name="idp7621376"></a>
+<p><code class="literal">\cc{Kate Schechter\\Rob
+McKenna}</code></p>
+<p>Generate a list of other persons the letter was sent to. Each
+name is printed on a separate line.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-closing" name=
+"cmd-closing"></a>\closing</h5>
+<a id="idp7624384" class="indexterm" name="idp7624384"></a><a id=
+"idp7625136" class="indexterm" name="idp7625136"></a>
+<p><code class="literal">\closing{text}</code></p>
+<p>The letter closes with a <code class="literal">\closing</code>
+command, i.e.,</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\closing{Best Regards,}
+</pre>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-encl" name="cmd-encl"></a>\encl</h5>
+<a id="idp7629264" class="indexterm" name="idp7629264"></a><a id=
+"idp7630016" class="indexterm" name="idp7630016"></a>
+<p><code class="literal">\encl{CV\\Certificates}</code></p>
+<p>Generate a list of enclosed material.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-location" name=
+"cmd-location"></a>\location</h5>
+<a id="idp7632896" class="indexterm" name="idp7632896"></a>
+<p><code class="literal">\location{address}</code></p>
+<p>This modifies your organisation's standard address. This only
+appears if the <code class="literal">firstpage</code> pagestyle is
+selected.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-makelabels" name=
+"cmd-makelabels"></a>\makelabels</h5>
+<a id="idp7636496" class="indexterm" name="idp7636496"></a>
+<p><code class="literal">\makelabels{number}</code></p>
+<p>If you issue this command in the preamble, LaTeX will create a
+sheet of address labels. This sheet will be output before the
+letters.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-name" name="cmd-name"></a>\name</h5>
+<a id="idp7639872" class="indexterm" name="idp7639872"></a>
+<p><code class="literal">\name{June Davenport}</code></p>
+<p>Your name, used for printing on the envelope together with the
+return address.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-opening" name=
+"cmd-opening"></a>\opening</h5>
+<a id="idp7642848" class="indexterm" name="idp7642848"></a><a id=
+"idp7643600" class="indexterm" name="idp7643600"></a>
+<p><code class="literal">\opening{text}</code></p>
+<p>The letter begins with the <code class="literal">\opening</code>
+command. The mandatory argument, <code class="literal">text</code>,
+is whatever text you wish to start your letter, i.e.,</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\opening{Dear Joe,}
+</pre>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-ps" name="cmd-ps"></a>\ps</h5>
+<a id="idp7648432" class="indexterm" name="idp7648432"></a>
+<p><code class="literal">\ps</code></p>
+<p>Use this command before a postscript.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-signature" name=
+"cmd-signature"></a>\signature</h5>
+<a id="idp7651312" class="indexterm" name="idp7651312"></a>
+<p><code class="literal">\signature{Harvey Swick}</code></p>
+<p>Your name, as it should appear at the end of the letter
+underneath the space for your signature. Items that should go on
+separate lines should be separated by <code class=
+"literal">\\</code> commands.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-startbreaks" name=
+"cmd-startbreaks"></a>\startbreaks</h5>
+<a id="idp7655008" class="indexterm" name="idp7655008"></a>
+<p><code class="literal">\startbreaks</code></p>
+<p>Used after a <code class="literal">\stopbreaks</code> command to
+allow page breaks again.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-stopbreaks" name=
+"cmd-stopbreaks"></a>\stopbreaks</h5>
+<a id="idp7658512" class="indexterm" name="idp7658512"></a>
+<p><code class="literal">\stopbreaks</code></p>
+<p>Inhibit page breaks until a <code class=
+"literal">\startbreaks</code> command occurs.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-telephone" name=
+"cmd-telephone"></a>\telephone</h5>
+<a id="idp7662016" class="indexterm" name="idp7662016"></a>
+<p><code class="literal">\telephone{number}</code></p>
+<p>This is your telephone number. This only appears if the
+<code class="literal">firstpage</code> pagestyle is selected.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="2.3.10 Line &amp; Page Breaking">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="line-and-page-breaking" name=
+"line-and-page-breaking"></a>2.3.10 Line &amp; Page Breaking</h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp7665984" class="indexterm" name="idp7665984"></a><a id=
+"idp7666736" class="indexterm" name="idp7666736"></a><a id=
+"idp7667488" class="indexterm" name="idp7667488"></a>
+<p>The first thing LaTeX does when processing ordinary text is to
+translate your input file into a string of glyphs and spaces. To
+produce a printed document, this string must be broken into lines,
+and these lines must be broken into pages. In some environments,
+you do the line breaking yourself with the <code class=
+"literal">\\</code> command, but LaTeX usually does it for you.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-bslash" name="cmd-bslash"></a>\\</h5>
+<a id="idp7671200" class="indexterm" name="idp7671200"></a><a id=
+"idp7671952" class="indexterm" name="idp7671952"></a>
+<p><code class="literal">\\[extra-space],
+\\*[extra-space]</code></p>
+<p>The <code class="literal">\\</code> command tells LaTeX to start
+a new line. It has an optional argument, <code class=
+"literal">extra-space</code>, that specifies how much extra
+vertical space is to be inserted before the next line. This can be
+a negative amount.</p>
+<p>The <code class="literal">\\*</code> command is the same as the
+ordinary <code class="literal">\\</code> command except that it
+tells LaTeX not to start a new page after the line.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-dash-op-hyphenation-cp" name=
+"cmd-dash-op-hyphenation-cp"></a>\-</h5>
+<a id="idp7678704" class="indexterm" name="idp7678704"></a><a id=
+"idp7679456" class="indexterm" name="idp7679456"></a>
+<p>The <code class="literal">\-</code> command tells LaTeX that it
+may hyphenate the word at that point. LaTeX is very good at
+hyphenating, and it will usually find all correct hyphenation
+points. The <code class="literal">\-</code> command is used for the
+exceptional cases.</p>
+<p>Note that when you insert <code class="literal">\-</code>
+commands in a word, the word will only be hyphenated at those
+points and not at any of the hyphenation points that LaTeX might
+otherwise have chosen.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-cleardoublepage" name=
+"cmd-cleardoublepage"></a>\cleardoublepage</h5>
+<a id="idp7685120" class="indexterm" name="idp7685120"></a><a id=
+"idp7685872" class="indexterm" name="idp7685872"></a>
+<p>The <code class="literal">\cleardoublepage</code> command ends
+the current page and causes all figures and tables that have so far
+appeared in the input to be printed. In a two-sided printing style,
+it also makes the next page a right-hand (odd-numbered) page,
+producing a blank page if necessary.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-clearpage" name=
+"cmd-clearpage"></a>\clearpage</h5>
+<a id="idp7688784" class="indexterm" name="idp7688784"></a><a id=
+"idp7689536" class="indexterm" name="idp7689536"></a>
+<p>The <code class="literal">\clearpage</code> command ends the
+current page and causes all figures and tables that have so far
+appeared in the input to be printed.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-enlargethispage" name=
+"cmd-enlargethispage"></a>\enlargethispage</h5>
+<a id="idp7692304" class="indexterm" name="idp7692304"></a><a id=
+"idp7693056" class="indexterm" name="idp7693056"></a>
+<p><code class="literal">\enlargethispage{size}</code></p>
+<p><code class="literal">\enlargethispage*{size}</code></p>
+<p>Enlarge the <code class="literal">\textheight</code> for the
+current page by the specified amount; e.g. <code class=
+"literal">\enlargethispage{\baselineskip}</code> will allow one
+additional line.</p>
+<p>The starred form tries to squeeze the material together on the
+page as much as possible. This is normally used together with an
+explicit <code class="literal">\pagebreak</code>.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-samepage" name=
+"cmd-samepage"></a>\samepage</h5>
+<a id="idp7699312" class="indexterm" name="idp7699312"></a>
+<p><code class="literal">\samepage</code></p>
+<p>The object in the argument <code class="literal">{}</code>
+should be on the current page.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-fussy" name=
+"cmd-fussy"></a>\fussy</h5>
+<a id="idp7702816" class="indexterm" name="idp7702816"></a>
+<p><code class="literal">\fussy</code></p>
+<p>This declaration (which is the default) makes TeX more fussy
+about line breaking. This can avoids too much space between words,
+but may produce overfull boxes.</p>
+<p>This command cancels the effect of a previous <code class=
+"literal">\sloppy</code> command. <a class="link" href=
+"#cmd-sloppy" title="2.3.10.&nbsp;\sloppy">\sloppy</a></p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-hyphenation" name=
+"cmd-hyphenation"></a>\hyphenation</h5>
+<a id="idp7707856" class="indexterm" name="idp7707856"></a><a id=
+"idp7708608" class="indexterm" name="idp7708608"></a>
+<p><code class="literal">\hyphenation{words}</code></p>
+<p>The <code class="literal">\hyphenation</code> command declares
+allowed hyphenation points, where <code class=
+"literal">words</code> is a list of words, separated by spaces, in
+which each hyphenation point is indicated by a <code class=
+"literal">-</code> character.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-linebreak" name=
+"cmd-linebreak"></a>\linebreak</h5>
+<a id="idp7713552" class="indexterm" name="idp7713552"></a><a id=
+"idp7714304" class="indexterm" name="idp7714304"></a>
+<p><code class="literal">\linebreak[number]</code></p>
+<p>The <code class="literal">\linebreak</code> command tells LaTeX
+to break the current line at the point of the command. With the
+optional argument, <code class="literal">number</code>, you can
+convert the <code class="literal">\linebreak</code> command from a
+demand to a request. The number must be a number from 0 to 4. The
+higher the number, the more insistent the request is.</p>
+<p>The <code class="literal">\linebreak</code> command causes LaTeX
+to stretch the line so it extends to the right margin.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-newline" name=
+"cmd-newline"></a>\newline</h5>
+<a id="idp7721184" class="indexterm" name="idp7721184"></a><a id=
+"idp7721936" class="indexterm" name="idp7721936"></a>
+<p>The <code class="literal">\newline</code> command breaks the
+line right where it is. It can only be used in paragraph mode.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-newpage" name=
+"cmd-newpage"></a>\newpage</h5>
+<a id="idp7724672" class="indexterm" name="idp7724672"></a><a id=
+"idp7725424" class="indexterm" name="idp7725424"></a>
+<p>The <code class="literal">\newpage</code> command ends the
+current page. In contrast to <a class="link" href="#cmd-pagebreak"
+title="2.3.10.&nbsp;\pagebreak">\pagebreak</a> it can produce a
+partly empty page, even when <a class="link" href=
+"#cmd-flushbottom-title" title=
+"2.3.5.&nbsp;\flushbottom">\flushbottom</a> is active.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-nolinebreak" name=
+"cmd-nolinebreak"></a>\nolinebreak</h5>
+<a id="idp7729456" class="indexterm" name="idp7729456"></a>
+<p><code class="literal">\nolinebreak[number]</code></p>
+<p>The <code class="literal">\nolinebreak</code> command prevents
+LaTeX from breaking the current line at the point of the command.
+With the optional argument, <code class="literal">number</code>,
+you can convert the <code class="literal">\nolinebreak</code>
+command from a demand to a request. The number must be a number
+from 0 to 4. The higher the number, the more insistent the request
+is.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-nopagebreak" name=
+"cmd-nopagebreak"></a>\nopagebreak</h5>
+<a id="idp7734864" class="indexterm" name="idp7734864"></a>
+<p><code class="literal">\nopagebreak[number]</code></p>
+<p>The <code class="literal">\nopagebreak</code> command prevents
+LaTeX from breaking the current page at the point of the command.
+With the optional argument, <code class="literal">number</code>,
+you can convert the <code class="literal">\nopagebreak</code>
+command from a demand to a request. The number must be a number
+from 0 to 4. The higher the number, the more insistent the request
+is.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-pagebreak" name=
+"cmd-pagebreak"></a>\pagebreak</h5>
+<a id="idp7740272" class="indexterm" name="idp7740272"></a><a id=
+"idp7741024" class="indexterm" name="idp7741024"></a>
+<p><code class="literal">\pagebreak[number]</code></p>
+<p>The <code class="literal">\pagebreak</code> command tells LaTeX
+to break the current page at the point of the command. With the
+optional argument, <code class="literal">number</code>, you can
+convert the <code class="literal">\pagebreak</code> command from a
+demand to a request. The number must be a number from 0 to 4. The
+higher the number, the more insistent the request is.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-sloppy" name=
+"cmd-sloppy"></a>\sloppy</h5>
+<a id="idp7746448" class="indexterm" name="idp7746448"></a>
+<p><code class="literal">\sloppy</code></p>
+<p>This declaration makes TeX less fussy about line breaking. This
+can prevent overfull boxes, but may leave too much space between
+words.</p>
+<p>Lasts until a <code class="literal">\fussy</code> command is
+issued. <a class="link" href="#cmd-fussy" title=
+"2.3.10.&nbsp;\fussy">\fussy</a>.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="2.3.11 Making Paragraphs">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="making-paragraphs" name=
+"making-paragraphs"></a>2.3.11 Making Paragraphs</h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp7751872" class="indexterm" name="idp7751872"></a><a id=
+"idp7752624" class="indexterm" name="idp7752624"></a>
+<p>A paragraph is ended by one or more completely blank lines ---
+lines not containing even a <code class="literal">%</code>. A blank
+line should not appear where a new paragraph cannot be started,
+such as in math mode or in the argument of a sectioning
+command.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-indent" name=
+"cmd-indent"></a>\indent</h5>
+<a id="idp7755536" class="indexterm" name="idp7755536"></a><a id=
+"idp7756288" class="indexterm" name="idp7756288"></a>
+<p><code class="literal">\indent</code></p>
+<p>This produces a horizontal space whose width equals the width of
+the paragraph indentation. It is used to add paragraph indentation
+where it would otherwise be suppressed.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-noindent" name=
+"cmd-noindent"></a>\noindent</h5>
+<a id="idp7759376" class="indexterm" name="idp7759376"></a><a id=
+"idp7760128" class="indexterm" name="idp7760128"></a>
+<p><code class="literal">\noindent</code></p>
+<p>When used at the beginning of the paragraph, it suppresses the
+paragraph indentation. It has no effect when used in the middle of
+a paragraph.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-par" name="cmd-par"></a>\par</h5>
+<a id="idp7763184" class="indexterm" name="idp7763184"></a><a id=
+"idp7763936" class="indexterm" name="idp7763936"></a>
+<p>Equivalent to a blank line; often used to make command or
+environment definitions easier to read.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="2.3.12 Margin Notes">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="margin-notes" name=
+"margin-notes"></a>2.3.12 Margin Notes</h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp7766448" class="indexterm" name="idp7766448"></a><a id=
+"idp7767200" class="indexterm" name="idp7767200"></a><a id=
+"idp7767952" class="indexterm" name="idp7767952"></a>
+<p>The command <code class="literal">\marginpar[left]{right}</code>
+creates a note in the margin. The first line will be at the same
+height as the line in the text where the <code class=
+"literal">\marginpar</code> occurs.</p>
+<p>When you only specify the mandatory argument <code class=
+"literal">right</code>, the text will be placed</p>
+<div class="itemizedlist">
+<ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc" compact="compact">
+<li class="listitem">in the right margin for one-sided layout</li>
+<li class="listitem">in the outside margin for two-sided
+layout</li>
+<li class="listitem">in the nearest margin for two-column
+layout.</li>
+</ul>
+</div>
+<p>By issuing the command <code class=
+"literal">\reversemarginpar</code>, you can force the marginal
+notes to go into the opposite (inside) margin.</p>
+<p>When you specify both arguments, <code class=
+"literal">left</code> is used for the left margin, and <code class=
+"literal">right</code> is used for the right margin.</p>
+<p>The first word will normally not be hyphenated; you can enable
+hyphenation by prefixing the first word with a <code class=
+"literal">\hspace{0pt}</code> command.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="2.3.13 Math Formulae">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="math-formulae" name=
+"math-formulae"></a>2.3.13 Math Formulae</h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp7779168" class="indexterm" name="idp7779168"></a><a id=
+"idp7779920" class="indexterm" name="idp7779920"></a><a id=
+"idp7780672" class="indexterm" name="idp7780672"></a><a id=
+"idp7781424" class="indexterm" name="idp7781424"></a><a id=
+"idp7782176" class="indexterm" name="idp7782176"></a><a id=
+"idp7782928" class="indexterm" name="idp7782928"></a><a id=
+"idp7783680" class="indexterm" name="idp7783680"></a><a id=
+"idp7784432" class="indexterm" name="idp7784432"></a>
+<div class="table"><a id="table-math-mode" name=
+"table-math-mode"></a>
+<p class="title"><strong>Table&nbsp;1.7.&nbsp;Three environments
+that put LaTeX in math mode</strong></p>
+<div class="table-contents">
+<table summary="Three environments that put LaTeX in math mode"
+border="0">
+<colgroup>
+<col align="left" />
+<col align="justify" /></colgroup>
+<tbody>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">math</td>
+<td align="justify">For Formulae that appear right in the
+text.</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">displaymath</td>
+<td align="justify">For Formulae that appear on their own
+line.</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">equation</td>
+<td align="justify">The same as the displaymath environment except
+that it adds an equation number in the right margin.</td>
+</tr>
+</tbody>
+</table>
+</div>
+</div>
+<br class="table-break" />
+<p>The <code class="literal">math</code> environment can be used in
+both paragraph and LR mode, but the <code class=
+"literal">displaymath</code> and <code class=
+"literal">equation</code> environments can be used only in
+paragraph mode. The <code class="literal">math</code> and
+<code class="literal">displaymath</code> environments are used so
+often that they have the following short forms:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\(...\) instead of \begin{math}...\end{math}
+
+\[...\] instead of \begin{displaymath}...\end{displaymath}
+</pre>
+<p>In fact, the <code class="literal">math</code> environment is so
+common that it has an even shorter form:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+$ ... $ instead of \(...\)
+</pre>
+<a id="idp7799472" class="indexterm" name="idp7799472"></a>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="subscripts-and-superscripts-title" name=
+"subscripts-and-superscripts-title"></a>Subscripts &amp;
+Superscripts</h5>
+<a id="idp7801088" class="indexterm" name="idp7801088"></a><a id=
+"idp7801840" class="indexterm" name="idp7801840"></a><a id=
+"idp7802592" class="indexterm" name="idp7802592"></a><a id=
+"idp7803344" class="indexterm" name="idp7803344"></a>
+<p>To get an expression <span class="emphasis"><em>exp</em></span>
+to appear as a subscript, you just type <code class=
+"literal">_{</code><span class=
+"emphasis"><em>exp</em></span><code class="literal">}</code> . To
+get <span class="emphasis"><em>exp</em></span> to appear as a
+superscript, you type <code class="literal">^{</code><span class=
+"emphasis"><em>exp</em></span> <code class="literal">}</code>.
+LaTeX handles superscripted superscripts and all of that stuff in
+the natural way. It even does the right thing when something has
+both a subscript and a superscript.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="math-symbols-title" name=
+"math-symbols-title"></a>Math Symbols</h5>
+<a id="idp7809568" class="indexterm" name="idp7809568"></a><a id=
+"idp7810320" class="indexterm" name="idp7810320"></a><a id=
+"idp7811072" class="indexterm" name="idp7811072"></a>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="spacing-in-math-mode-title" name=
+"spacing-in-math-mode-title"></a>Spacing in Math Mode</h5>
+<a id="idp7812688" class="indexterm" name="idp7812688"></a><a id=
+"idp7813440" class="indexterm" name="idp7813440"></a>
+<p>In a <code class="literal">math</code> environment, LaTeX
+ignores the spaces you type and puts in the spacing that it thinks
+is best. LaTeX formats mathematics the way it's done in mathematics
+texts. If you want different spacing, LaTeX provides the following
+four commands for use in math mode:</p>
+<a id="idp7816656" class="indexterm" name="idp7816656"></a><a id=
+"idp7817408" class="indexterm" name="idp7817408"></a><a id=
+"idp7818160" class="indexterm" name="idp7818160"></a><a id=
+"idp7818912" class="indexterm" name="idp7818912"></a>
+<div class="orderedlist">
+<ol class="orderedlist" type="1">
+<li class="listitem">
+<p><code class="literal">\;</code> - a thick space</p>
+</li>
+<li class="listitem">
+<p><code class="literal">\:</code> - a medium space</p>
+</li>
+<li class="listitem">
+<p><code class="literal">\,</code> - a thin space</p>
+</li>
+<li class="listitem">
+<p><code class="literal">\!</code> - a negative thin space</p>
+</li>
+</ol>
+</div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="math-miscellany-title" name=
+"math-miscellany-title"></a>Math Miscellany</h5>
+<a id="idp7825808" class="indexterm" name="idp7825808"></a>
+<div class="table"><a id="table-math-miscellany" name=
+"table-math-miscellany"></a>
+<p class="title"><strong>Table&nbsp;1.8.&nbsp;Math
+Miscellany</strong></p>
+<div class="table-contents">
+<table summary="Math Miscellany" border="0">
+<colgroup>
+<col align="left" />
+<col align="justify" /></colgroup>
+<tbody>
+<tr>
+<td align="left"><a id="cmd-math-misc-cdots" name=
+"cmd-math-misc-cdots"></a>\cdots<a id="idp7830896" class=
+"indexterm" name="idp7830896"></a></td>
+<td align="justify">Produces a horizontal ellipsis where the dots
+are raised to the centre of the line.</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left"><a id="cmd-math-misc-ddots" name=
+"cmd-math-misc-ddots"></a>\ddots <a id="idp7833520" class=
+"indexterm" name="idp7833520"></a></td>
+<td align="justify">Produces a diagonal ellipsis.</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left"><a id="cmd-math-misc-frac" name=
+"cmd-math-misc-frac"></a>\frac{num}{den} <a id="idp7835776" class=
+"indexterm" name="idp7835776"></a></td>
+<td align="justify">Produces the fraction <code class=
+"literal">num</code> divided by <code class=
+"literal">den</code>.</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left"><a id="cmd-math-misc-ldots" name=
+"cmd-math-misc-ldots"></a>\ldots <a id="idp7839280" class=
+"indexterm" name="idp7839280"></a></td>
+<td align="justify">Produces an ellipsis. This command works in any
+mode, not just math mode.</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left"><a id="cmd-math-misc-overbrace" name=
+"cmd-math-misc-overbrace"></a>\overbrace{text} <a id="idp7841632"
+class="indexterm" name="idp7841632"></a></td>
+<td align="justify">Generates a brace over text.</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left"><a id="cmd-math-misc-overline" name=
+"cmd-math-misc-overline"></a>\overline{text} <a id="idp7843888"
+class="indexterm" name="idp7843888"></a></td>
+<td align="justify">Causes the argument text to be overlined.</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left"><a id="cmd-math-misc-sqrt" name=
+"cmd-math-misc-sqrt"></a>\sqrt[root]{arg} <a id="idp7846144" class=
+"indexterm" name="idp7846144"></a></td>
+<td align="justify">Produces the square root of its argument. The
+optional argument, <code class="literal">root</code>, determines
+what root to produce, i.e., the cube root of <code class=
+"literal">x+y</code> would be typed as <code class=
+"literal">$\sqrt[3]{x+y}$</code>.</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left"><a id="cmd-math-misc-underbrace" name=
+"cmd-math-misc-underbrace"></a>\underbrace{text} <a id="idp7850448"
+class="indexterm" name="idp7850448"></a></td>
+<td align="justify">Generates text with a brace underneath.</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left"><a id="cmd-math-misc-underline" name=
+"cmd-math-misc-underline"></a>\underline{text} <a id="idp7852704"
+class="indexterm" name="idp7852704"></a></td>
+<td align="justify">Causes the argument text to be underlined. This
+command can also be used in paragraph and LR modes.</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left"><a id="cmd-math-misc-vdots" name=
+"cmd-math-misc-vdots"></a>\vdots <a id="idp7855216" class=
+"indexterm" name="idp7855216"></a></td>
+<td align="justify">Produces a vertical ellipsis.</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left"><a id="cmd-math-misc-ensuremath" name=
+"cmd-math-misc-ensuremath"></a>\ensuremath{} <a id="idp7857600"
+class="indexterm" name="idp7857600"></a></td>
+<td align="justify">It's argument is set in math mode. This is
+needed for own definitions.</td>
+</tr>
+</tbody>
+</table>
+</div>
+</div>
+<br class="table-break" /></div>
+<div class="section" title="2.3.14 Modes">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="modes" name="modes"></a>2.3.14 Modes</h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp7860720" class="indexterm" name="idp7860720"></a><a id=
+"idp7861472" class="indexterm" name="idp7861472"></a><a id=
+"idp7862224" class="indexterm" name="idp7862224"></a><a id=
+"idp7862976" class="indexterm" name="idp7862976"></a><a id=
+"idp7863728" class="indexterm" name="idp7863728"></a>
+<p>When LaTeX is processing your input text, it is always in one of
+three modes:</p>
+<div class="itemizedlist">
+<ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc" compact="compact">
+<li class="listitem">paragraph mode</li>
+<li class="listitem">Math mode</li>
+<li class="listitem">Left-to-right mode, called LR mode for
+short</li>
+</ul>
+</div>
+<p>LaTeX changes mode only when it goes up or down a staircase to a
+different level, though not all level changes produce mode changes.
+Mode changes occur only when entering or leaving an environment, or
+when LaTeX is processing the argument of certain text-producing
+commands.</p>
+<p><span class="emphasis"><em>Paragraph mode</em></span> is the
+most common; it's the one LaTeX is in when processing ordinary
+text. In that mode, LaTeX breaks your text into lines and breaks
+the lines into pages. LaTeX is in <span class="emphasis"><em>math
+mode</em></span> when it's generating a mathematical formula. In
+<span class="emphasis"><em>LR mode</em></span>, as in paragraph
+mode, LaTeX considers the output that it produces to be a string of
+words with spaces between them. However, unlike paragraph mode,
+LaTeX keeps going from left to right; it never starts a new line in
+LR mode. Even if you put a hundred words into an <code class=
+"literal">\mbox</code>, LaTeX would keep typesetting them from left
+to right inside a single box, and then complain because the
+resulting box was too wide to fit on the line.</p>
+<p>LaTeX is in LR mode when it starts making a box with an
+<code class="literal">\mbox</code> command. You can get it to enter
+a different mode inside the box - for example, you can make it
+enter math mode to put a formula in the box. There are also several
+text-producing commands and environments for making a box that put
+LaTeX in paragraph mode. The box make by one of these commands or
+environments will be called a <code class="literal">parbox</code>.
+When LaTeX is in paragraph mode while making a box, it is said to
+be in <span class="emphasis"><em>inner paragraph mode</em></span>.
+Its normal paragraph mode, which it starts out in, is called
+<span class="emphasis"><em>outer paragraph mode</em></span>.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="2.3.15 Page Styles">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="page-styles" name="page-styles"></a>2.3.15
+Page Styles</h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp7879632" class="indexterm" name="idp7879632"></a><a id=
+"idp7880384" class="indexterm" name="idp7880384"></a>
+<p>The <code class="literal">\documentclass</code> command
+determines the size and position of the page's head and foot. The
+page style determines what goes in them.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-maketitle" name=
+"cmd-maketitle"></a>\maketitle</h5>
+<a id="idp7883152" class="indexterm" name="idp7883152"></a><a id=
+"idp7883904" class="indexterm" name="idp7883904"></a>
+<p><code class="literal">\maketitle</code></p>
+<p>The <code class="literal">\maketitle</code> command generates a
+title on a separate title page. In the <code class=
+"literal">article</code> class, <code class=
+"literal">\maketitle</code> will also switch to pagestyle
+<code class="literal">plain</code>. See <a class="link" href=
+"#page-styles" title="2.3.15 Page Styles">Page Styles</a> for
+commands to change page numbering.</p>
+<p>Information used to produce the title is obtained from the
+following declarations:</p>
+<p>See <a class="link" href="#page-styles" title=
+"2.3.15 Page Styles">Page Styles</a> for the commands to give the
+information.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-author" name=
+"cmd-author"></a>\author</h5>
+<a id="idp7891680" class="indexterm" name="idp7891680"></a><a id=
+"idp7892432" class="indexterm" name="idp7892432"></a>
+<p><code class="literal">\author{names}</code></p>
+<p>The <code class="literal">\author</code> command declares the
+author(s), where <code class="literal">names</code> is a list of
+authors separated by <code class="literal">\and</code> commands.
+Use <code class="literal">\\</code> to separate lines within a
+single author's entry -- for example, to give the author's
+institution or address.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-date" name="cmd-date"></a>\date</h5>
+<a id="idp7897952" class="indexterm" name="idp7897952"></a><a id=
+"idp7898704" class="indexterm" name="idp7898704"></a>
+<p><code class="literal">\date{text}</code></p>
+<p>The <code class="literal">\date</code> command declares
+<span class="emphasis"><em>text</em></span> to be the document's
+date. With no <code class="literal">\date</code> command, the
+current date is used.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-thanks" name=
+"cmd-thanks"></a>\thanks</h5>
+<a id="idp7903216" class="indexterm" name="idp7903216"></a><a id=
+"idp7903968" class="indexterm" name="idp7903968"></a>
+<p><code class="literal">\thanks{text}</code></p>
+<p>The <code class="literal">\thanks</code> command produces a
+<code class="literal">\footnote</code> to the title.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-title" name=
+"cmd-title"></a>\title</h5>
+<a id="idp7908096" class="indexterm" name="idp7908096"></a><a id=
+"idp7908848" class="indexterm" name="idp7908848"></a>
+<p><code class="literal">\title{text}</code></p>
+<p>The <code class="literal">\title</code> command declares
+<code class="literal">text</code> to be the title. Use <code class=
+"literal">\\</code> to tell LaTeX where to start a new line in a
+long title.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-pagenumbering" name=
+"cmd-pagenumbering"></a>\pagenumbering</h5>
+<a id="idp7913984" class="indexterm" name="idp7913984"></a><a id=
+"idp7914736" class="indexterm" name="idp7914736"></a>
+<p><code class="literal">\pagenumbering{num_style}</code></p>
+<p>Specifies the style of page numbers. Possible values of
+<code class="literal">num_style</code> are:</p>
+<div class="itemizedlist">
+<ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc" compact="compact">
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">arabic</code> - Arabic
+numerals</li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">roman</code> - Lowercase
+Roman numerals</li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">Roman</code> - Uppercase
+Roman numerals</li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">alph</code> - Lowercase
+letters</li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">Alph</code> - Uppercase
+letters</li>
+</ul>
+</div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-pagestyle" name=
+"cmd-pagestyle"></a>\pagestyle</h5>
+<a id="idp7924624" class="indexterm" name="idp7924624"></a>
+<p><code class="literal">\pagestyle{option}</code></p>
+<p>The <code class="literal">\pagestyle</code> command changes the
+style from the current page on throughout the remainder of your
+document.</p>
+<p>The valid options are:</p>
+<div class="itemizedlist">
+<ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc" compact="compact">
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">plain</code> - Just a
+plain page number.</li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">empty</code> - Produces
+empty heads and feet - no page numbers.</li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">headings</code> - Puts
+running headings on each page. The document style specifies what
+goes in the headings.</li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">myheadings</code> - You
+specify what is to go in the heading with the <code class=
+"literal">\markboth</code> or the <code class=
+"literal">\markright</code> commands.</li>
+</ul>
+</div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-markboth" name=
+"cmd-markboth"></a>\markboth</h5>
+<a id="idp7935344" class="indexterm" name="idp7935344"></a>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\markboth{left head}{right head}
+</pre>
+<p>The <code class="literal">\markboth</code> command is used in
+conjunction with the page style <code class=
+"literal">myheadings</code> for setting both the left and the right
+heading. You should note that a <span class=
+"emphasis"><em>left-hand heading</em></span> is generated by the
+last <code class="literal">\markboth</code> command before the end
+of the page, while a <span class="emphasis"><em>right-hand
+heading</em></span> is generated by the first <code class=
+"literal">\markboth</code> or <code class=
+"literal">\markright</code> that comes on the page if there is one,
+otherwise by the last one before the page.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-markright" name=
+"cmd-markright"></a>\markright</h5>
+<a id="idp7942144" class="indexterm" name="idp7942144"></a>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\markright{right head}
+</pre>
+<p>The <code class="literal">\markright</code> command is used in
+conjunction with the page style <code class=
+"literal">myheadings</code> for setting the right heading, leaving
+the left heading unchanged. You should note that a <span class=
+"emphasis"><em>left-hand heading</em></span> is generated by the
+last <code class="literal">\markboth</code> command before the end
+of the page, while a <span class="emphasis"><em>right-hand
+heading</em></span> is generated by the first <code class=
+"literal">\markboth</code> or <code class=
+"literal">\markright</code> that comes on the page if there is one,
+otherwise by the last one before the page.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-thispagestyle" name=
+"cmd-thispagestyle"></a>\thispagestyle</h5>
+<a id="idp7948960" class="indexterm" name="idp7948960"></a>
+<p><code class="literal">\thispagestyle{option}</code></p>
+<p>The <code class="literal">\thispagestyle</code> command works in
+the same manner as the <code class="literal">\pagestyle</code>
+command except that it changes the style for the current page
+only.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="2.3.16 Sectioning">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="sectioning" name="sectioning"></a>2.3.16
+Sectioning</h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp7953568" class="indexterm" name="idp7953568"></a><a id=
+"idp7954320" class="indexterm" name="idp7954320"></a><a id=
+"idp7955072" class="indexterm" name="idp7955072"></a><a id=
+"idp7955824" class="indexterm" name="idp7955824"></a><a id=
+"idp7956576" class="indexterm" name="idp7956576"></a><a id=
+"idp7957328" class="indexterm" name="idp7957328"></a>
+<p>Sectioning commands provide the means to structure your text
+into units.</p>
+<div class="itemizedlist">
+<ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc" compact="compact">
+<li class="listitem"><a id="cmd-sectioning-part" name=
+"cmd-sectioning-part"></a><code class="literal">\part</code></li>
+<li class="listitem"><a id="cmd-sectioning-chapter" name=
+"cmd-sectioning-chapter"></a><code class="literal">\chapter</code>
+(report and book class only)</li>
+<li class="listitem"><a id="cmd-sectioning-section" name=
+"cmd-sectioning-section"></a><code class=
+"literal">\section</code></li>
+<li class="listitem"><a id="cmd-sectioning-subsection" name=
+"cmd-sectioning-subsection"></a><code class=
+"literal">\subsection</code></li>
+<li class="listitem"><a id="cmd-sectioning-subsubsection" name=
+"cmd-sectioning-subsubsection"></a><code class=
+"literal">\subsubsection</code></li>
+<li class="listitem"><a id="cmd-sectioning-paragraph" name=
+"cmd-sectioning-paragraph"></a><code class=
+"literal">\paragraph</code></li>
+<li class="listitem"><a id="cmd-sectioning-subparagraph" name=
+"cmd-sectioning-subparagraph"></a><code class=
+"literal">\subparagraph</code></li>
+</ul>
+</div>
+<p>All sectioning commands take the same general form, i.e.,</p>
+<p><code class="literal">\chapter[optional]{title}</code></p>
+<p>In addition to providing the heading in the text, the mandatory
+argument of the sectioning command can appear in two other
+places:</p>
+<div class="orderedlist">
+<ol class="orderedlist" type="1">
+<li class="listitem">
+<p>The table of contents</p>
+</li>
+<li class="listitem">
+<p>The running head at the top of the page</p>
+</li>
+</ol>
+</div>
+<p>You may not want the same thing to appear in these other two
+places as appears in the text heading. To handle this situation,
+the sectioning commands have an <code class=
+"literal">optional</code> argument that provides the text for these
+other two purposes.</p>
+<p>All sectioning commands have <code class=
+"literal">*</code>-forms that print a <span class=
+"emphasis"><em>title</em></span>, but do not include a number and
+do not make an entry in the table of contents.</p>
+<a id="idp7975504" class="indexterm" name="idp7975504"></a><a id=
+"idp7976256" class="indexterm" name="idp7976256"></a>
+<p><a id="cmd-sectioning-appendix" name=
+"cmd-sectioning-appendix"></a><code class=
+"literal">\appendix</code></p>
+<p>The <code class="literal">\appendix</code> command changes the
+way sectional units are numbered. The <code class=
+"literal">\appendix</code> command generates no text and does not
+affect the numbering of parts. The normal use of this command is
+something like</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\chapter{The First Chapter}
+ ...
+\appendix
+\chapter{The First Appendix}
+</pre></div>
+<div class="section" title="2.3.17 Spaces &amp; Boxes">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="spaces-and-boxes" name=
+"spaces-and-boxes"></a>2.3.17 Spaces &amp; Boxes</h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp7981952" class="indexterm" name="idp7981952"></a><a id=
+"idp7982704" class="indexterm" name="idp7982704"></a>
+<p>All the predefined length parameters See <a class="link" href=
+"#predefined-lengths-title" title=
+"2.3.8.&nbsp;Predefined lengths">Predefined lengths</a> can be used
+in the arguments of the box-making commands.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-dotfill" name=
+"cmd-dotfill"></a>\dotfill</h5>
+<a id="idp7985408" class="indexterm" name="idp7985408"></a>
+<p>The <code class="literal">\dotfill</code> command produces a
+<span class="emphasis"><em>rubber length</em></span> that produces
+dots instead of just spaces.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-hfill" name=
+"cmd-hfill"></a>\hfill</h5>
+<a id="idp7988416" class="indexterm" name="idp7988416"></a>
+<p>The <code class="literal">\hfill</code> fill command produces a
+<span class="emphasis"><em>rubber length</em></span> which can
+stretch or shrink horizontally. It will be filled with spaces.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-hrulefill" name=
+"cmd-hrulefill"></a>\hrulefill</h5>
+<a id="idp7991520" class="indexterm" name="idp7991520"></a>
+<p>The <code class="literal">\hrulefill</code> fill command
+produces a <span class="emphasis"><em>rubber length</em></span>
+which can stretch or shrink horizontally. It will be filled with a
+horizontal rule.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-hspace" name=
+"cmd-hspace"></a>\hspace</h5>
+<a id="idp7994640" class="indexterm" name="idp7994640"></a>
+<p><code class="literal">\hspace{length},
+\hspace*{length}</code></p>
+<p>The <code class="literal">\hspace</code> command adds horizontal
+space. The length of the space can be expressed in any terms that
+LaTeX understands, i.e., points, inches, etc. You can add negative
+as well as positive space with an <code class=
+"literal">\hspace</code> command. Adding negative space is like
+backspacing.</p>
+<p>LaTeX removes horizontal space that comes at the end of a line.
+If you don't want LaTeX to remove this space, include the optional
+<code class="literal">*</code> argument. Then the space is never
+removed.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-addvspace" name=
+"cmd-addvspace"></a>\addvspace</h5>
+<a id="idp8001216" class="indexterm" name="idp8001216"></a><a id=
+"idp8001968" class="indexterm" name="idp8001968"></a><a id=
+"idp8002720" class="indexterm" name="idp8002720"></a>
+<p><code class="literal">\addvspace{length}</code></p>
+<p>The <code class="literal">\addvspace</code> command normally
+adds a vertical space of height length. However, if vertical space
+has already been added to the same point in the output by a
+previous <code class="literal">\addvspace</code> command, then this
+command will not add more space than needed to make the natural
+length of the total vertical space equal to <code class=
+"literal">length</code>.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-bigskip" name=
+"cmd-bigskip"></a>\bigskip</h5>
+<a id="idp8008256" class="indexterm" name="idp8008256"></a>
+<p>The <code class="literal">\bigskip</code> command is equivalent
+to <code class="literal">\vspace{bigskipamount}</code> where
+<code class="literal">bigskipamount</code> is determined by the
+document class.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-medskip" name=
+"cmd-medskip"></a>\medskip</h5>
+<a id="idp8012864" class="indexterm" name="idp8012864"></a>
+<p>The <code class="literal">\medskip</code> command is equivalent
+to <code class="literal">\vspace{medskipamount}</code> where
+<code class="literal">medskipamount</code> is determined by the
+document class.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-smallskip" name=
+"cmd-smallskip"></a>\smallskip</h5>
+<a id="idp8017408" class="indexterm" name="idp8017408"></a>
+<p><code class="literal">\smallskip</code></p>
+<p>The <code class="literal">\smallskip</code> command is
+equivalent to <code class="literal">\vspace{smallskipamount}</code>
+where <code class="literal">smallskipamount</code> is determined by
+the document class.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-vfill" name=
+"cmd-vfill"></a>\vfill</h5>
+<a id="idp8022928" class="indexterm" name="idp8022928"></a>
+<p>The <code class="literal">\vfill</code> fill command produces a
+rubber length which can stretch or shrink vertically.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-vspace" name=
+"cmd-vspace"></a>\vspace</h5>
+<a id="idp8026048" class="indexterm" name="idp8026048"></a>
+<p><code class="literal">\vspace{length},
+\vspace*{length}</code></p>
+<p>The <code class="literal">\vspace</code> command adds vertical
+space. The length of the space can be expressed in any terms that
+LaTeX understands, i.e., points, inches, etc. You can add negative
+as well as positive space with an <code class=
+"literal">\vspace</code> command.</p>
+<p>LaTeX removes vertical space that comes at the end of a page. If
+you don't want LaTeX to remove this space, include the optional
+<code class="literal">*</code> argument. Then the space is never
+removed.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-fbox" name="cmd-fbox"></a>\fbox</h5>
+<a id="idp8033392" class="indexterm" name="idp8033392"></a>
+<p><code class="literal">\fbox{text}</code></p>
+<p>The <code class="literal">\fbox</code> command is exactly the
+same as the <code class="literal">\mbox</code> command, except that
+it puts a frame around the outside of the box that it creates.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-framebox" name=
+"cmd-framebox"></a>\framebox</h5>
+<a id="idp8037904" class="indexterm" name="idp8037904"></a>
+<p><code class=
+"literal">\framebox[width][position]{text}</code></p>
+<p>The <code class="literal">\framebox</code> command is exactly
+the same as the <code class="literal">\makebox</code> command,
+except that it puts a frame around the outside of the box that it
+creates.</p>
+<p>The framebox command produces a rule of thickness <code class=
+"literal">\fboxrule</code>, and leaves a space <code class=
+"literal">\fboxsep</code> between the rule and the contents of the
+box.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="env-lrbox" name="env-lrbox"></a>lrbox</h5>
+<a id="idp8044752" class="indexterm" name="idp8044752"></a>
+<p><code class="literal">\begin{lrbox}{cmd} text
+\end{lrbox}</code></p>
+<p>This is the environment form of <code class=
+"literal">\sbox</code>.</p>
+<p>The text inside the environment is saved in the box <code class=
+"literal">cmd</code>, which must have been declared with
+<code class="literal">\newsavebox</code>.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-makebox" name=
+"cmd-makebox"></a>\makebox</h5>
+<a id="idp8050640" class="indexterm" name="idp8050640"></a>
+<p><code class="literal">\makebox[width][position]{text}</code></p>
+<p>The <code class="literal">\makebox</code> command creates a box
+just wide enough to contain the <code class="literal">text</code>
+specified. The width of the box is specified by the optional
+<code class="literal">width</code> argument. The position of the
+text within the box is determined by the optional <code class=
+"literal">position</code> argument.</p>
+<div class="itemizedlist">
+<ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc" compact="compact">
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">c</code> --- centred
+(default)</li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">l</code> ---
+flushleft</li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">r</code> ---
+flushright</li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">s</code> --- stretch
+from left to right margin. The text must contain stretchable space
+for this to work.</li>
+</ul>
+</div>
+<p>See <a class="link" href="#cmd-makebox-op-picture-cp" title=
+"2.3.6.&nbsp;\makebox(width,height)[position]{...}">\makebox
+(picture)</a>.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-mbox" name="cmd-mbox"></a>\mbox</h5>
+<a id="idp8064032" class="indexterm" name="idp8064032"></a>
+<p><code class="literal">\mbox{text}</code></p>
+<p>The <code class="literal">\mbox</code> command creates a box
+just wide enough to hold the text created by its argument.</p>
+<p>Use this command to prevent text from being split across
+lines.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-newsavebox" name=
+"cmd-newsavebox"></a>\newsavebox</h5>
+<a id="idp8068592" class="indexterm" name="idp8068592"></a>
+<p><code class="literal">\newsavebox{cmd}</code></p>
+<p>Declares <code class="literal">cmd</code>, which must be a
+command name that is not already defined, to be a bin for saving
+boxes.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-parbox" name=
+"cmd-parbox"></a>\parbox</h5>
+<a id="idp8072704" class="indexterm" name="idp8072704"></a>
+<p><code class=
+"literal">\parbox[position][height][inner-pos]{width}{text}</code></p>
+<p>A <code class="literal">parbox</code> is a box whose contents
+are created in <code class="literal">paragraph</code> mode. The
+<code class="literal">\parbox</code> has two mandatory
+arguments:</p>
+<div class="itemizedlist">
+<ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc" compact="compact">
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">width</code> - specifies
+the width of the parbox, and</li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">text</code> - the text
+that goes inside the parbox.</li>
+</ul>
+</div>
+<p>LaTeX will position a <code class="literal">parbox</code> so its
+centre lines up with the centre of the text line. The optional
+<span class="emphasis"><em>position</em></span> argument allows you
+to line up either the top or bottom line in the parbox (default is
+top).</p>
+<p>If the <span class="emphasis"><em>height</em></span> argument is
+not given, the box will have the natural height of the text.</p>
+<p>The <span class="emphasis"><em>inner-pos</em></span> argument
+controls the placement of the text inside the box. If it is not
+specified, <span class="emphasis"><em>position</em></span> is
+used.</p>
+<div class="itemizedlist">
+<ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc" compact="compact">
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">t</code> --- text is
+placed at the top of the box.</li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">c</code> --- text is
+centred in the box.</li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">b</code> --- text is
+placed at the bottom of the box.</li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">s</code> --- stretch
+vertically. The text must contain vertically stretchable space for
+this to work.</li>
+</ul>
+</div>
+<p>A <code class="literal">\parbox</code> command is used for a
+parbox containing a small piece of text, with nothing fancy inside.
+In particular, you shouldn't use any of the paragraph-making
+environments inside a <code class="literal">\parbox</code>
+argument. For larger pieces of text, including ones containing a
+paragraph-making environment, you should use a <code class=
+"literal">minipage</code> environment See <a class="link" href=
+"#env-minipage" title="2.3.6.&nbsp;minipage">minipage</a>.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-raisebox" name=
+"cmd-raisebox"></a>\raisebox</h5>
+<a id="idp8094976" class="indexterm" name="idp8094976"></a>
+<p><code class=
+"literal">\raisebox{distance}[extend-above][extend-below]{text}</code></p>
+<p>The <code class="literal">\raisebox</code> command is used to
+raise or lower text. The first mandatory argument specifies how
+high the text is to be raised (or lowered if it is a negative
+amount). The text itself is processed in <code class="literal">LR
+mode</code>.</p>
+<p>Sometimes it's useful to make LaTeX think something has a
+different size than it really does - or a different size than LaTeX
+would normally think it has. The <code class=
+"literal">\raisebox</code> command lets you tell LaTeX how tall it
+is.</p>
+<p>The first optional argument, <code class=
+"literal">extend-above</code>, makes LaTeX think that the text
+extends above the line by the amount specified. The second optional
+argument, <code class="literal">extend-below</code>, makes LaTeX
+think that the text extends below the line by the amount
+specified.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-rule" name="cmd-rule"></a>\rule</h5>
+<a id="idp8105536" class="indexterm" name="idp8105536"></a>
+<p><code class=
+"literal">\rule[raise-height]{width}{thickness}</code></p>
+<p>The <code class="literal">\rule</code> command is used to
+produce horizontal lines. The arguments are defined as follows:</p>
+<div class="itemizedlist">
+<ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc" compact="compact">
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">raise-height</code> -
+specifies how high to raise the rule (optional)</li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">width</code> - specifies
+the length of the rule (mandatory)</li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">thickness</code> -
+specifies the thickness of the rule (mandatory)</li>
+</ul>
+</div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-savebox" name=
+"cmd-savebox"></a>\savebox</h5>
+<a id="idp8114176" class="indexterm" name="idp8114176"></a>
+<p><code class="literal">\savebox{cmd}[width][pos]{text}</code></p>
+<p>This command typeset <code class="literal">text</code> in a box
+just as for <code class="literal">\makebox</code>. However, instead
+of printing the resulting box, it saves it in bin <code class=
+"literal">cmd</code>, which must have been declared with
+<code class="literal">\newsavebox</code>.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-sbox" name="cmd-sbox"></a>\sbox</h5>
+<a id="idp8120368" class="indexterm" name="idp8120368"></a>
+<p><code class="literal">\sbox{cmd}\{text}</code></p>
+<p>This commands typesets <code class="literal">text</code> in a
+box just as for <code class="literal">\mbox</code>. However,
+instead of printing the resulting box, it saves it in <code class=
+"literal">cmd</code>, which must have been declared with
+<code class="literal">\newsavebox</code>.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-usebox" name=
+"cmd-usebox"></a>\usebox</h5>
+<a id="idp8126672" class="indexterm" name="idp8126672"></a>
+<p><code class="literal">\usebox{cmd}</code></p>
+<p>Prints the box most recently saved in bin <code class=
+"literal">cmd</code> by a <code class="literal">\savebox</code>
+command.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="2.3.18 Special Characters">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="special-characters" name=
+"special-characters"></a>2.3.18 Special Characters</h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp8132064" class="indexterm" name="idp8132064"></a><a id=
+"idp8132880" class="indexterm" name="idp8132880"></a><a id=
+"idp8133696" class="indexterm" name="idp8133696"></a><a id=
+"idp8134512" class="indexterm" name="idp8134512"></a>
+<p>The following characters play a special role in LaTeX and are
+called <span class="emphasis"><em>special printing
+characters</em></span>, or simply <span class=
+"emphasis"><em>special characters</em></span>.</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+# $ % &amp; ~ _ ^ \ { }
+</pre>
+<p>Whenever you put one of these special characters into your file,
+you are doing something special. If you simply want the character
+to be printed just as any other letter, include a <code class=
+"literal">\</code> in front of the character. For example,
+<code class="literal">\$</code> will produce <code class=
+"literal">$</code> in your output.</p>
+<p>One exception to this rule is the <code class="literal">\</code>
+itself because <code class="literal">\\</code> has its own special
+meaning. A <code class="literal">\</code> is produced by typing
+<code class="literal">$\backslash$</code> in your file.</p>
+<p>Also, <code class="literal">\~</code> means `place a tilde
+accent over the following letter', so you will probably want to use
+<code class="literal">\verb</code> instead.</p>
+<a id="idp8145728" class="indexterm" name="idp8145728"></a><a id=
+"idp8146544" class="indexterm" name="idp8146544"></a><a id=
+"idp8147360" class="indexterm" name="idp8147360"></a>
+<p>In addition, you can access any character of a font once you
+know its number by using the <code class="literal">\symbol</code>
+command. For example, the character used for displaying spaces in
+the <code class="literal">\verb*</code> command has the code
+decimal 32, so it can be typed as <code class=
+"literal">\symbol{32}</code>.</p>
+<p>You can also specify octal numbers with <code class=
+"literal">'</code> or hexadecimal numbers with <code class=
+"literal">"</code>, so the previous example could also be written
+as <code class="literal">\symbol{'40}</code> or <code class=
+"literal">\symbol{"20}</code>.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="2.3.19 Special Symbols">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="special-symbols" name=
+"special-symbols"></a>2.3.19 Special Symbols</h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp8156048" class="indexterm" name="idp8156048"></a>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="accents-on-chars-title" name=
+"accents-on-chars-title"></a>Accents on Characters</h5>
+<a id="idp8158960" class="indexterm" name="idp8158960"></a>
+<p>The rules differ somewhat depending whether you are in <a class=
+"link" href="#modes" title="2.3.14 Modes">text mode</a>, <a class=
+"link" href="#modes" title="2.3.14 Modes">math modes</a>, or the
+<a class="link" href="#env-tabbing" title=
+"2.3.6.&nbsp;tabbing">tabbing environment</a>.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="idp8163120" name="idp8163120"></a>Text
+Mode</h5>
+<p>The following accents may be placed on letters. Although
+<span class="emphasis"><em>o</em></span> is used in most of the
+example, the accents may be placed on any letter. Accents may even
+be placed above a <span class="emphasis"><em>missing</em></span>
+letter; for example, <code class="literal">\~{}</code> produces a
+tilde over a blank space.</p>
+<p>The following commands may be used only in paragraph or LR
+mode:</p>
+<div class="itemizedlist">
+<ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc" compact="compact">
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">\`{o}</code> produces a
+grave accent, <span class="emphasis"><em>&ograve;</em></span></li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">\'{o}</code> produces an
+acute accent, <span class="emphasis"><em>&oacute;</em></span></li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">\^{o}</code> produces a
+circumflex, <span class="emphasis"><em>&ocirc;</em></span></li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">\"{o}</code> produces an
+umlaut or dieresis, <span class=
+"emphasis"><em>&ouml;</em></span></li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">\H{o}</code> produces a
+long Hungarian umlaut</li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">\~{o}</code> produces a
+tilde, <span class="emphasis"><em>&otilde;</em></span></li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">\c{c}</code> produces a
+cedilla, <span class="emphasis"><em>&ccedil;</em></span></li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">\={o}</code> produces a
+macron accent (a bar over the letter)</li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">\b{o}</code> produces a
+bar under the letter</li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">\.{o}</code> produces a
+dot over the letter</li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">\d{o}</code> produces a
+dot under the letter</li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">\u{o}</code> produces a
+breve over the letter</li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">\v{o}</code> produces a
+<span class="emphasis"><em>v</em></span> over the letter</li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">\t{oo}</code> produces a
+<span class="emphasis"><em>tie</em></span> (inverted u) over the
+two letters</li>
+</ul>
+</div>
+<p>Note that the letters <span class="emphasis"><em>i</em></span>
+and <span class="emphasis"><em>j</em></span> require special
+treatment when they are given accents because it is often desirable
+to replace the dot with the accent. For this purpose, the commands
+<code class="literal">\i</code> and <code class="literal">\j</code>
+can be used to produce dotless letters.</p>
+<p>For example,</p>
+<div class="itemizedlist">
+<ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc" compact="compact">
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">\^{\i}</code> should be
+used for i, circumflex, &icirc;</li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">\"{\i}</code> should be
+used for i, umlaut, &iuml;</li>
+</ul>
+</div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="accents-chars-math" name=
+"accents-chars-math"></a>Math Mode</h5>
+<p>Several of the above and some similar accents can also be
+produced in math mode. The following commands may be used
+<span class="emphasis"><em>only</em></span> in math mode:</p>
+<div class="itemizedlist">
+<ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc" compact="compact">
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">\hat{o}</code> is
+similar to the circumflex (cf. <code class=
+"literal">\^</code>)</li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">\widehat{oo}</code> is a
+wide version of <span class="emphasis"><em>\hat</em></span> over
+several letters</li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">\check{o}</code> is a
+vee or check (cf. <code class="literal">\v</code>)</li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">\tilde{o}</code> is a
+tilde (cf. <code class="literal">\~</code>)</li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">\widetilde{oo}</code> is
+a wide version of <code class="literal">\tilde</code> over several
+letters</li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">\acute{o}</code> is an
+acute accent (cf. <code class="literal">\`</code>)</li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">\grave{o}</code> is a
+grave accent (cf. <code class="literal">&gt;\'</code>)</li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">\dot{o}</code> is a dot
+over the letter (cf. <code class="literal">\.</code>)</li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">\ddot{o}</code> is a
+double dot over the letter</li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">\breve{o}</code> is a
+breve (cf. <code class="literal">\u</code>)</li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">\bar{o}</code> is a
+macron (cf. <code class="literal">\=</code>)</li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">\vec{o}</code> is a
+vector (arrow) over the letter</li>
+</ul>
+</div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="accents-chars-tabbing" name=
+"accents-chars-tabbing"></a>Tabbing Environment</h5>
+<p>Some of the accent marks used in running text have other uses in
+the <a class="link" href="#env-tabbing" title=
+"2.3.6.&nbsp;tabbing">Tabbing Environment</a>. In that case they
+can be created with the following command:</p>
+<div class="itemizedlist">
+<ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc" compact="compact">
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">&gt;\a'</code> for an
+acute accent</li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">\a`</code> for a grave
+accent</li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">\a=</code> for a macron
+accent</li>
+</ul>
+</div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="arrows-title" name=
+"arrows-title"></a>Arrows</h5>
+<a id="idp8231888" class="indexterm" name="idp8231888"></a>
+<p>LaTeX provides commands for all sorts of arrows. The following
+commands are used only in math mode.</p>
+<p>In general the command names are created from <code class=
+"literal">left</code>, <code class="literal">right</code>,
+<code class="literal">up</code>, or <code class=
+"literal">down</code>. <code class="literal">leftright</code> gives
+a double headed arrow. Prefacing with <code class=
+"literal">long</code> gives a longer arrow. Capitalizing the first
+letter gives a double-shanked arrow.</p>
+<p>Examples are:</p>
+<div class="itemizedlist">
+<ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc" compact="compact">
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">\leftarrow</code></li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">\Leftarrow</code></li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class=
+"literal">\longleftarrow</code></li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class=
+"literal">\Longleftarrow</code></li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">\rightarrow</code></li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">\Rightarrow</code></li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class=
+"literal">\longrightarrow</code></li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class=
+"literal">\Longrightarrow</code></li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class=
+"literal">\leftrightarrow</code></li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class=
+"literal">\Leftrightarrow</code></li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class=
+"literal">\longleftrightarrow</code></li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">\uparrow</code></li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">\downarrow</code></li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">\Uparrow</code></li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">&gt;\nearrow</code>
+points from southwest to northeast</li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">\searrow</code> points
+from northwest to southeast</li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">\swarrow</code> points
+from northeast to southwest</li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">\nwarrow</code> points
+from southeast to northwest</li>
+</ul>
+</div>
+<p>The <code class="literal">\stackrel</code> command is useful for
+putting things over or under your arrow.</p>
+<p>See also:</p>
+<div class="itemizedlist">
+<ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc" compact="compact">
+<li class="listitem"><a class="link" href="#math-symbols-title"
+title="2.3.13.&nbsp;Math Symbols">Math Symbols</a></li>
+<li class="listitem"><a class="link" href=
+"#binary-and-relational-ops-title" title=
+"2.3.19.&nbsp;Binary and Relational Operators">Binary and
+Relational Operators</a></li>
+<li class="listitem"><a class="link" href="#greek-letters-title"
+title="2.3.19.&nbsp;Greek Letters">Greek Letters</a></li>
+<li class="listitem"><a class="link" href="#misc-symbols-title"
+title="2.3.19.&nbsp;Miscellaneous Symbols">Miscellaneous
+Symbols</a></li>
+<li class="listitem"><a class="link" href=
+"#variable-math-size-symbols-title" title=
+"2.3.19.&nbsp;Variable Size Math Symbols">Variable Size Math
+Symbols</a></li>
+</ul>
+</div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="binary-and-relational-ops-title" name=
+"binary-and-relational-ops-title"></a>Binary and Relational
+Operators</h5>
+<a id="idp8273408" class="indexterm" name="idp8273408"></a><a id=
+"idp8274480" class="indexterm" name="idp8274480"></a><a id=
+"idp8275552" class="indexterm" name="idp8275552"></a><a id=
+"idp8277040" class="indexterm" name="idp8277040"></a>
+<p>Some <span class="emphasis"><em>math</em></span> symbols are
+obtained by typing the corresponding keyboard character. Examples
+include</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
++ - = &lt; &gt;
+</pre>
+<div class="note" title="Note" style=
+"margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;">
+<h3 class="title">Note</h3>
+<p>plus, minus, and equal sign may be used in either text or math
+mode, but &lt; and &gt; are math mode only (they produce inverted
+exclamation and question marks, respectively, in text mode).</p>
+</div>
+<p>The following commands may be used only in math mode:</p>
+<div class="itemizedlist">
+<ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc" compact="compact">
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">\pm</code> plus or minus
+sign</li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">\mp</code> minus or plus
+sign</li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">\times</code> times (an
+"x")</li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">\div</code> divided by
+sign</li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">\ast</code> an asterisk
+(centered)</li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">\star</code> a
+five-point star (centered)</li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">\bullet</code> a
+bullet</li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">\circ</code> an open
+bullet</li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">\cdot</code> a centered
+dot</li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">\leq</code> less than or
+equal to</li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">\ll</code> much less
+than</li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">\subset</code> is a
+subset of</li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">\geq</code> greater than
+or equal to</li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">\gg</code> much greater
+than</li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">\equiv</code>
+equivalence symbol</li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">\sim</code> similar
+to</li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">\simeq</code> similar or
+equal to</li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">\approx</code>
+approximately equal to</li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">\neq</code> not equal
+to</li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">\per</code>
+"perpendicular to" symbols</li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">\propto</code>
+proportional to</li>
+</ul>
+</div>
+<p>Note that <span class="emphasis"><em>greater than</em></span>
+and <span class="emphasis"><em>less than</em></span> are obtained
+simply by entering <code class="literal">&gt;</code> and
+<code class="literal">&lt;</code>.</p>
+<p>A slash, indicating <span class="emphasis"><em>not</em></span>
+can be placed through a symbol (or a letter) with the <code class=
+"literal">\not</code> command. For example, not less than is
+<code class="literal">\not&lt;</code> and not less than or equal to
+is <code class="literal">\not\leq</code>. If the slash isn't
+properly positioned it can be moved by putting a math mode spacing
+command between the <code class="literal">\not</code>and the
+symbol.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="delimiters-title" name=
+"delimiters-title"></a>Delimiters</h5>
+<a id="idp8319136" class="indexterm" name="idp8319136"></a>
+<p>Delimiters are objects which act logically like parentheses.
+These can be used only in math mode.</p>
+<p>The delimiters recognized by LaTeX include:</p>
+<div class="itemizedlist">
+<ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc" compact="compact">
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">(</code> (left
+parenthesis)</li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">)</code> (right
+parenthesis)</li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">[</code> (left
+bracket)</li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">]</code> (right
+bracket)</li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">\{</code> (left
+brace)</li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">\}</code> (right
+brace)</li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">|</code> (vertical
+line)</li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">\vert</code> (vertical
+line)</li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">\|</code> (double
+vertical lines)</li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">\Vert</code> (double
+vertical lines)</li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">/</code> (slash)</li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">\backslash</code>
+(backslash)</li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">\langle</code> (left
+angle bracket)</li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">\rangle</code> (right
+angle bracket)</li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">\uparrow</code>
+(uparrow)</li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">\downarrow</code> (down
+arrow)</li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">\updownarrow</code>
+(up/down arrow)</li>
+</ul>
+</div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="idp8345328" name="idp8345328"></a>Making
+Delimiters the Right Size</h5>
+<p>Delimiters in formulas should be big enough to <span class=
+"emphasis"><em>fit</em></span> around the formulas they delimit
+(for example arround arrays). To obtain <span class=
+"emphasis"><em>stretchable</em></span> delimiters (LaTeX makes them
+the appropriate size) type a <code class="literal">\left</code> or
+<code class="literal">\right</code> command before the delimiter.
+<code class="literal">\left</code> and <code class=
+"literal">\right</code> commands must come in matching pairs,
+although the delimiters themselves need not be the same. Thus,
+<code class="literal">\left \{ ... \right \[</code> produces a
+legal pair. In cases where only one delimiter is desired, it is
+possible to make the matching delimiter <span class=
+"emphasis"><em>invisible</em></span> by typing a period
+(<code class="literal">.</code>) after the command, i.e.,
+<code class="literal">\left.</code> or <code class=
+"literal">\right.</code></p>
+<p>In an <a class="link" href="#env-eqnarray" title=
+"2.3.6.&nbsp;eqnarray">eqnarray</a> environment the matching
+<code class="literal">\left</code> and <code class=
+"literal">\right</code> cannot be split between lines and it may be
+necessary to use an <span class=
+"emphasis"><em>invisible</em></span> <code class=
+"literal">\right.</code> and <code class="literal">\left.</code> to
+terminate and begin parts on different lines. In this case a second
+problem may arise, since the size of the delimiters will be chosen
+only for the <span class="emphasis"><em>local part</em></span>, so
+that the size of the <span class="emphasis"><em>visible</em></span>
+<span class="emphasis"><em>left</em></span> and <span class=
+"emphasis"><em>right</em></span> delimiters might not match. The
+solution is to trick LaTeX into thinking that both parts have the
+same vertical height. This can be done by placing a strut, that is
+a zero-width <code class="literal">\rule</code>. It can also be
+accomplished with the <code class="literal">\vphantom</code>
+command, which I have not found documented, but which appears to
+work.</p>
+<p><code class="literal">\vphantom{construct}</code> creates a
+zero-width object with the height of <code class=
+"literal">construct</code>. The argument can contain things such as
+<code class="literal">\frac</code> or the <span class=
+"emphasis"><em>variable size math symbols</em></span> and should be
+chosen according to what is in the section with the delimiter you
+want to match.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="idp8366256" name="idp8366256"></a>Some
+Examples</h5>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="idp8366944" name="idp8366944"></a>A six-j
+symbol</h5>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\[ \left\{
+\begin{array}{ccc}
+a &amp; b &amp; c \\
+d &amp; e &amp; f \end{array}
+\right&gt;\} \]
+</pre>
+<p>This should be displayed something like (insofar as it can be
+rendered in "ascii art"):</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+( a b c )
+- -
+( d e f )
+</pre>
+<p>Note that the <code class="literal">\[ ... \]</code> set this
+off as <span class="emphasis"><em>Display Math</em></span>, and
+that the <span class="emphasis"><em>Array Environment</em></span>
+is used to generate the three centered columns inside the
+braces.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="idp8371424" name="idp8371424"></a>A
+"multiple choice" equation</h5>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\[ f(x) =
+ \left\{ \begin{array}{l}
+ 0, x &lt; 0 \\ 1, x = 0 \\
+ 2, x &gt; 0 \end{array} \right. \]
+</pre>
+<p>will be displayed as</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+ ( 0, x &lt; 0
+f(x) = - 1, x = 0
+ ( 2, x &gt; 0
+</pre>
+<p>Note that the <span class="emphasis"><em>invisible</em></span>
+<code class="literal">\right</code> delimiter is specified using a
+<span class="emphasis"><em>period</em></span>.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="ellipsis-title" name=
+"ellipsis-title"></a>Ellipsis</h5>
+<a id="idp8377040" class="indexterm" name="idp8377040"></a>
+<p>Ellipses (three dots) can be produced by the following
+commands</p>
+<div class="itemizedlist">
+<ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc" compact="compact">
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">\ldots</code>
+horizontally at bottom of line</li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">\cdots</code>
+horizontally center of line (math mode only)</li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">\ddots</code> diagonal
+(math mode only)</li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">\vdots</code> vertical
+(math mode only)</li>
+</ul>
+</div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="greek-letters-title" name=
+"greek-letters-title"></a>Greek Letters</h5>
+<a id="idp8385840" class="indexterm" name="idp8385840"></a>
+<p>These commands may be used only in math mode:</p>
+<div class="itemizedlist">
+<ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc" compact="compact">
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">\alpha</code></li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">\beta</code></li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">\gamma</code></li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">\delta</code></li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">\epsilon</code></li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">\varepsilon</code>
+(variation, script-like)</li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">\zeta</code></li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">\eta</code></li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">\theta</code></li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">\vartheta</code>
+(variation, script-like)</li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">\iota</code></li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">\kappa</code></li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">\lambda</code></li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">\mu</code></li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">\nu</code></li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">\xi</code></li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">\pi</code></li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">\varpi</code>
+(variation)</li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">\rho</code></li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">\varrho</code>
+(variation, with the tail)</li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">\sigma</code></li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">\varsigma</code>
+(variation, script-like)</li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">\tau</code></li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">\upsilon</code></li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">\phi</code></li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">\varphi</code>
+(variation, script-like)</li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">\chi</code></li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">\psi</code></li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">\omega</code></li>
+</ul>
+</div>
+<p>Capital letters:</p>
+<div class="itemizedlist">
+<ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc" compact="compact">
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">\Gamma</code></li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">\Delta</code></li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">\Theta</code></li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">\Lambda</code></li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">\Xi</code></li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">\Pi</code></li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">\Sigma</code></li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">\Upsilon</code></li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">\Phi</code></li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">\Psi</code></li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">\Omega</code></li>
+</ul>
+</div>
+<p>See also:</p>
+<div class="itemizedlist">
+<ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc" compact="compact">
+<li class="listitem"><a class="link" href="#math-symbols-title"
+title="2.3.13.&nbsp;Math Symbols">Math Symbols</a></li>
+<li class="listitem"><a class="link" href="#accents-on-chars-title"
+title="2.3.19.&nbsp;Accents on Characters">Accents</a></li>
+<li class="listitem"><a class="link" href="#misc-symbols-title"
+title="2.3.19.&nbsp;Miscellaneous Symbols">Miscellaneous
+Symbols</a></li>
+</ul>
+</div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="misc-symbols-title" name=
+"misc-symbols-title"></a>Miscellaneous Symbols</h5>
+<a id="idp8444672" class="indexterm" name="idp8444672"></a>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="idp8446160" name="idp8446160"></a>Some
+symbols for math</h5>
+<p>The following symbols are also used only in math mode</p>
+<div class="itemizedlist">
+<ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc" compact="compact">
+<li class="listitem"><a id="cmd-misc-symbol-aleph" name=
+"cmd-misc-symbol-aleph"></a><code class="literal">\aleph</code>
+Hebrew aleph</li>
+<li class="listitem"><a id="cmd-misc-symbol-hbar" name=
+"cmd-misc-symbol-hbar"></a><code class="literal">\hbar</code>
+h-bar, Planck's constant</li>
+<li class="listitem"><a id="cmd-misc-symbol-imath" name=
+"cmd-misc-symbol-imath"></a><code class="literal">\imath</code>
+variation on <span class="emphasis"><em>i</em></span>; no dot</li>
+<li class="listitem"><a id="cmd-misc-symbol-jmath" name=
+"cmd-misc-symbol-jmath"></a><code class="literal">\jmath</code>
+variation on <span class="emphasis"><em>j</em></span>; no dot</li>
+<li class="listitem"><a id="cmd-misc-symbol-ell" name=
+"cmd-misc-symbol-ell"></a><code class="literal">\ell</code> script
+(loop) <span class="emphasis"><em>l</em></span></li>
+<li class="listitem"><a id="cmd-misc-symbol-wp" name=
+"cmd-misc-symbol-wp"></a><code class="literal">\wp</code> fancy
+script lowercase <span class="emphasis"><em>P</em></span></li>
+<li class="listitem"><a id="cmd-misc-symbol-re" name=
+"cmd-misc-symbol-re"></a><code class="literal">\Re</code> script
+capital <span class="emphasis"><em>R</em></span> (<span class=
+"emphasis"><em>Real</em></span>)</li>
+<li class="listitem"><a id="cmd-misc-symbol-im" name=
+"cmd-misc-symbol-im"></a><code class="literal">\Im</code> script
+capital <span class="emphasis"><em>I</em></span> (<span class=
+"emphasis"><em>Imaginary</em></span>)</li>
+<li class="listitem"><a id="cmd-misc-symbol-prime" name=
+"cmd-misc-symbol-prime"></a><code class="literal">\prime</code>
+prime (also obtained by typing <code class="literal">'</code>)</li>
+<li class="listitem"><a id="cmd-misc-symbol-nabla" name=
+"cmd-misc-symbol-nabla"></a><code class="literal">\nabla</code>
+inverted capital Delta</li>
+<li class="listitem"><a id="cmd-misc-symbol-surd" name=
+"cmd-misc-symbol-surd"></a><code class="literal">\surd</code>
+radical (square root) symbol</li>
+<li class="listitem"><a id="cmd-misc-symbol-angle" name=
+"cmd-misc-symbol-angle"></a><code class="literal">\angle</code>
+angle symbol</li>
+<li class="listitem"><a id="cmd-misc-symbol-forall" name=
+"cmd-misc-symbol-forall"></a><code class="literal">\forall</code>
+<span class="emphasis"><em>for all</em></span> (inverted A)</li>
+<li class="listitem"><a id="cmd-misc-symbol-exists" name=
+"cmd-misc-symbol-exists"></a><code class="literal">\exists</code>
+<span class="emphasis"><em>exists</em></span> (left-facing E)</li>
+<li class="listitem"><a id="cmd-misc-symbol-partial" name=
+"cmd-misc-symbol-partial"></a><code class="literal">\partial</code>
+partial derivative symbol</li>
+<li class="listitem"><a id="cmd-misc-symbol-infty" name=
+"cmd-misc-symbol-infty"></a><code class="literal">\infty</code>
+infinity symbol</li>
+<li class="listitem"><a id="cmd-misc-symbol-triangle" name=
+"cmd-misc-symbol-triangle"></a><code class=
+"literal">\triangle</code> open triangle symbol</li>
+<li class="listitem"><a id="cmd-misc-symbol-box" name=
+"cmd-misc-symbol-box"></a><code class="literal">\Box</code> open
+square</li>
+<li class="listitem"><a id="cmd-misc-symbol-diamond" name=
+"cmd-misc-symbol-diamond"></a><code class="literal">\Diamond</code>
+open diamond</li>
+<li class="listitem"><a id="cmd-misc-symbol-flat" name=
+"cmd-misc-symbol-flat"></a><code class="literal">\flat</code>
+music: flat symbol</li>
+<li class="listitem"><a id="cmd-misc-symbol-natural" name=
+"cmd-misc-symbol-natural"></a><code class="literal">\natural</code>
+music: natural symbol</li>
+<li class="listitem"><a id="cmd-misc-symbol-clubsuit" name=
+"cmd-misc-symbol-clubsuit"></a><code class=
+"literal">\clubsuit</code> playing cards: club suit symbol</li>
+<li class="listitem"><a id="cmd-misc-symbol-diamondsuit" name=
+"cmd-misc-symbol-diamondsuit"></a><code class=
+"literal">\diamondsuit</code> playing cards: diamond suit
+symbol</li>
+<li class="listitem"><a id="cmd-misc-symbol-heartsuit" name=
+"cmd-misc-symbol-heartsuit"></a><code class=
+"literal">\heartsuit</code> playing cards: heart suit symbol</li>
+<li class="listitem"><a id="cmd-misc-symbol-spadsuit" name=
+"cmd-misc-symbol-spadsuit"></a><code class=
+"literal">\spadesuit</code> playing cards: space suit symbol</li>
+</ul>
+</div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="idp8498480" name="idp8498480"></a>Some
+Other Symbols</h5>
+<p>The following symbols can be used in any mode:</p>
+<div class="itemizedlist">
+<ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc" compact="compact">
+<li class="listitem"><a id="cmd-other-symbol-dag" name=
+"cmd-other-symbol-dag"></a><code class="literal">\dag</code>
+dagger</li>
+<li class="listitem"><a id="cmd-other-symbol-ddag" name=
+"cmd-other-symbol-ddag"></a>&gt;<code class="literal">\ddag</code>
+double dagger</li>
+<li class="listitem"><a id="cmd-other-symbol-s" name=
+"cmd-other-symbol-s"></a>&gt;<code class="literal">\S</code>
+section symbol</li>
+<li class="listitem"><a id="cmd-other-symbol-p" name=
+"cmd-other-symbol-p"></a>&gt;<code class="literal">\P</code>
+paragraph symbol</li>
+<li class="listitem"><a id="cmd-other-symbol-copyright" name=
+"cmd-other-symbol-copyright"></a>&gt;<code class=
+"literal">\copyright</code> copyright symbol</li>
+<li class="listitem"><a id="cmd-other-symbol-pounds" name=
+"cmd-other-symbol-pounds"></a>&gt;<code class=
+"literal">\pounds</code> British pound sterling symbol</li>
+</ul>
+</div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="idp8511904" name=
+"idp8511904"></a>Calligraphic Style Letters</h5>
+<p>Twenty-six calligraphic letters are provided (the upper case
+alphabet). These can only be used in math mode.</p>
+<p>In LaTeX 2.09 they are produced with the <code class=
+"literal">\cal</code> declaration:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+${\cal A}$
+</pre>
+<p>In LaTeX2e they are obtained with the <code class=
+"literal">\mathcal</code> command:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+$\mathcal{CAL}$
+</pre>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="math-functions-title" name=
+"math-functions-title"></a>Math Functions</h5>
+<a id="idp8518432" class="indexterm" name="idp8518432"></a>
+<p>Functions like <span class="emphasis"><em>log</em></span> or
+<span class="emphasis"><em>cos</em></span> are normally used in
+math mode. However, inmath mode strings of letters are treated as a
+product of variables, which would normally be displayed in math
+italics rather than a text font which would be appropriate for
+these functions. To get proper display of such functions they are
+generated with LaTeX commands.</p>
+<p>Some of these commands are:</p>
+<div class="itemizedlist">
+<ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc" compact="compact">
+<li class="listitem"><a id="cmd-math-func-arccos" name=
+"cmd-math-func-arccos"></a><code class=
+"literal">\arccos</code></li>
+<li class="listitem"><a id="cmd-math-func-arcsin" name=
+"cmd-math-func-arcsin"></a><code class=
+"literal">\arcsin</code></li>
+<li class="listitem"><a id="cmd-math-func-arctan" name=
+"cmd-math-func-arctan"></a><code class=
+"literal">\arctan</code></li>
+<li class="listitem"><a id="cmd-math-func-cos" name=
+"cmd-math-func-cos"></a><code class="literal">\cos</code></li>
+<li class="listitem"><a id="cmd-math-func-cosh" name=
+"cmd-math-func-cosh"></a><code class="literal">\cosh</code></li>
+<li class="listitem"><a id="cmd-math-func-cot" name=
+"cmd-math-func-cot"></a><code class="literal">\cot</code></li>
+<li class="listitem"><a id="cmd-math-func-coth" name=
+"cmd-math-func-coth"></a><code class="literal">\coth</code></li>
+<li class="listitem"><a id="cmd-math-func-csc" name=
+"cmd-math-func-csc"></a><code class="literal">\csc</code></li>
+<li class="listitem"><a id="cmd-math-func-deg" name=
+"cmd-math-func-deg"></a><code class="literal">\deg</code></li>
+<li class="listitem"><a id="cmd-math-func-det" name=
+"cmd-math-func-det"></a><code class="literal">\det</code></li>
+<li class="listitem"><a id="cmd-math-func-dim" name=
+"cmd-math-func-dim"></a><code class="literal">\dim</code></li>
+<li class="listitem"><a id="cmd-math-func-exp" name=
+"cmd-math-func-exp"></a><code class="literal">\exp</code></li>
+<li class="listitem"><a id="cmd-math-func-gcd" name=
+"cmd-math-func-gcd"></a><code class="literal">\gcd</code></li>
+<li class="listitem"><a id="cmd-math-func-hom" name=
+"cmd-math-func-hom"></a><code class="literal">\hom</code></li>
+<li class="listitem"><a id="cmd-math-func-inf" name=
+"cmd-math-func-inf"></a><code class="literal">\inf</code></li>
+<li class="listitem"><a id="cmd-math-func-ker" name=
+"cmd-math-func-ker"></a><code class="literal">\ker</code></li>
+<li class="listitem"><a id="cmd-math-func-lg" name=
+"cmd-math-func-lg"></a><code class="literal">\lg</code></li>
+<li class="listitem"><a id="cmd-math-func-lim" name=
+"cmd-math-func-lim"></a><code class="literal">\lim</code></li>
+<li class="listitem"><a id="cmd-math-func-liminf" name=
+"cmd-math-func-liminf"></a><code class=
+"literal">\liminf</code></li>
+<li class="listitem"><a id="cmd-math-func-limsup" name=
+"cmd-math-func-limsup"></a><code class=
+"literal">\limsup</code></li>
+<li class="listitem"><a id="cmd-math-func-ln" name=
+"cmd-math-func-ln"></a><code class="literal">\ln</code></li>
+<li class="listitem"><a id="cmd-math-func-log" name=
+"cmd-math-func-log"></a><code class="literal">\log</code></li>
+<li class="listitem"><a id="cmd-math-func-max" name=
+"cmd-math-func-max"></a><code class="literal">\max</code></li>
+<li class="listitem"><a id="cmd-math-func-min" name=
+"cmd-math-func-min"></a><code class="literal">\min</code></li>
+<li class="listitem"><a id="cmd-math-func-sec" name=
+"cmd-math-func-sec"></a><code class="literal">\sec</code></li>
+<li class="listitem"><a id="cmd-math-func-sin" name=
+"cmd-math-func-sin"></a><code class="literal">\sin</code></li>
+<li class="listitem"><a id="cmd-math-func-sinh" name=
+"cmd-math-func-sinh"></a><code class="literal">\sinh</code></li>
+<li class="listitem"><a id="cmd-math-func-sup" name=
+"cmd-math-func-sup"></a><code class="literal">\sup</code></li>
+<li class="listitem"><a id="cmd-math-func-tan" name=
+"cmd-math-func-tan"></a><code class="literal">\tan</code></li>
+<li class="listitem"><a id="cmd-math-func-tanh" name=
+"cmd-math-func-tanh"></a><code class="literal">\tanh</code></li>
+</ul>
+</div>
+<p>Two commands are provided for the "modulus" function</p>
+<div class="itemizedlist">
+<ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc" compact="compact">
+<li class="listitem"><a id="cmd-math-func-bmod" name=
+"cmd-math-func-bmod"></a><code class="literal">\bmod</code></li>
+<li class="listitem"><a id="cmd-math-func-pmod" name=
+"cmd-math-func-pmod"></a><code class="literal">\pmod{}</code></li>
+</ul>
+</div>
+<p>The former would be used to write "a mod b" as <code class=
+"literal">a \bmod b</code> and the latter, which requires an
+argument that is displayed in parentheses, would be used to write
+"n = i (mod j)" as <code class="literal">n = i \pmod{j}</code></p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="variable-math-size-symbols-title" name=
+"variable-math-size-symbols-title"></a>Variable Size Math
+Symbols</h5>
+<a id="idp8579440" class="indexterm" name="idp8579440"></a>
+<p>The size of some mathematical symbols, notably summation signs,
+product signs, and integral signs, depends on the environment in
+which they appear (i.e., <code class="literal">displaymath</code>
+as opposed to <code class="literal">math</code> environments.</p>
+<p>These include:</p>
+<div class="itemizedlist">
+<ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc" compact="compact">
+<li class="listitem"><a id="cmd-math-symbol-sum" name=
+"cmd-math-symbol-sum"></a><code class="literal">\sum</code> a
+summation sign (capital sigma)</li>
+<li class="listitem"><a id="cmd-math-symbol-prod" name=
+"cmd-math-symbol-prod"></a><code class="literal">\prod</code> a
+product (capital pi)</li>
+<li class="listitem"><a id="cmd-math-symbol-coprod" name=
+"cmd-math-symbol-coprod"></a><code class="literal">\coprod</code> a
+coproduct (inverted capital pi)</li>
+<li class="listitem"><a id="cmd-math-symbol-int" name=
+"cmd-math-symbol-int"></a><code class="literal">\int</code> an
+integral sign</li>
+<li class="listitem"><a id="cmd-math-symbol-oint" name=
+"cmd-math-symbol-oint"></a><code class="literal">\oint</code> a
+surface (circular) integral sign</li>
+<li class="listitem"><a id="cmd-math-symbol-bigcup" name=
+"cmd-math-symbol-bigcup"></a><code class="literal">\bigcup</code>
+big "U"</li>
+<li class="listitem"><a id="cmd-math-symbol-bigcap" name=
+"cmd-math-symbol-bigcap"></a><code class="literal">\bigcap</code>
+big inverted "U"</li>
+<li class="listitem"><a id="cmd-math-symbol-bigvee" name=
+"cmd-math-symbol-bigvee"></a><code class="literal">\bigvee</code>
+big "V"</li>
+<li class="listitem"><a id="cmd-math-symbol-bigwedge" name=
+"cmd-math-symbol-bigwedge"></a><code class=
+"literal">\bigwedge</code> big inverted "V"</li>
+<li class="listitem"><a id="cmd-math-symbol-bigodot" name=
+"cmd-math-symbol-bigodot"></a><code class="literal">\bigodot</code>
+big "O" with dot at center</li>
+<li class="listitem"><a id="cmd-math-symbol-bigotimes" name=
+"cmd-math-symbol-bigotimes"></a><code class=
+"literal">\bigotimes</code> big "O" with cross inside</li>
+<li class="listitem"><a id="cmd-math-symbol-bigoplus" name=
+"cmd-math-symbol-bigoplus"></a><code class=
+"literal">\bigoplus</code> big "O" with a + inside</li>
+<li class="listitem"><a id="cmd-math-symbol-biguplus" name=
+"cmd-math-symbol-biguplus"></a><code class=
+"literal">\biguplus</code> big "U" with a + inside</li>
+</ul>
+</div>
+<p>The <code class="literal">\sqrt</code> command also produces a
+variable size symbol appropriate for the size of hte radicand
+argument.</p>
+<p>The "limits" associated with these symbols are entered as
+<span class="emphasis"><em>subscripts</em></span> for entries
+appearing below the symbol and as <span class=
+"emphasis"><em>superscripts</em></span> for entries appearing above
+the symbol. For example the sum from n=0 to infinity of
+x<sup>n</sup> would be entered as</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\sum_{n=0}^{\infty} x_{n}
+</pre>
+<p>The actual placement of the limits depends on whether this is in
+<code class="literal">displaymath</code> mode in which case they
+are placed below/above or in <span class=
+"emphasis"><em>math</em></span> mode in running text in which case
+they are placed as regular subscripts and superscripts.</p>
+<p>Note that it is possible to treat several of these symbols (a
+common example would be a double sum) as a single symbol for
+placing limits above and/or below by using the <code class=
+"literal">\mathop</code> command.</p>
+<p><span class="emphasis"><em>Hats</em></span> and <span class=
+"emphasis"><em>tildes</em></span> over symbols which stretch (as
+best they can) to the correct size for their arguments are produced
+by <code class="literal">\widehat</code> and <code class=
+"literal">\widetilde</code></p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="2.3.20 Splitting the Input">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="splitting-the-input" name=
+"splitting-the-input"></a>2.3.20 Splitting the Input</h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp8618352" class="indexterm" name="idp8618352"></a><a id=
+"idp8619136" class="indexterm" name="idp8619136"></a>
+<p>A large document requires a lot of input. Rather than putting
+the whole input in a single large file, it's more efficient to
+split it into several smaller ones. Regardless of how many separate
+files you use, there is one that is the root file; it is the one
+whose name you type when you run LaTeX.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-include-title" name=
+"cmd-include-title"></a>\include</h5>
+<a id="idp8622240" class="indexterm" name="idp8622240"></a>
+<p><code class="literal">\include{file}</code></p>
+<p>The <code class="literal">\include</code> command is used in
+conjunction with the <code class="literal">\includeonly</code>
+command for selective inclusion of files. The <code class=
+"literal">file</code> argument is the first name of a file,
+denoting <code class="filename">file.tex</code>. If <code class=
+"literal">file</code> is one the file names in the file list of the
+<code class="literal">\includeonly</code> command or if there is no
+<code class="literal">\includeonly</code> command, the <code class=
+"literal">\include</code> command is equivalent to</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\clearpage \input{file} \clearpage
+</pre>
+<p>except that if the file <code class="filename">file.tex</code>
+does not exist, then a warning message rather than an error is
+produced. If the file is not in the file list, the <code class=
+"literal">\include</code> command is equivalent to <code class=
+"literal">\clearpage</code>.</p>
+<p>The <code class="literal">\include</code> command may not appear
+in the preamble or in a file read by another <code class=
+"literal">\include</code> command.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-includeonly-title" name=
+"cmd-includeonly-title"></a>\includeonly</h5>
+<a id="idp8636864" class="indexterm" name="idp8636864"></a>
+<p><code class="literal">\includeonly{</code><span class=
+"emphasis"><em>file_list</em></span><code class=
+"literal">}</code></p>
+<p>The <code class="literal">\includeonly</code> command controls
+which files will be read in by an <code class=
+"literal">\include</code> command. <span class=
+"emphasis"><em>file_list</em></span> should be a comma-separated
+list of filenames. Each filename must match exactly a filename
+specified in a <code class="literal">\include</code> command. This
+command can only appear in the preamble.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-input-title" name=
+"cmd-input-title"></a>\input</h5>
+<a id="idp8643840" class="indexterm" name="idp8643840"></a>
+<p><code class="literal">\input{file}</code></p>
+<p>The <code class="literal">\input</code> command causes the
+indicated <code class="literal">file</code> to be read and
+processed, exactly as if its contents had been inserted in the
+current file at that point. The file name may be a complete file
+name with extension or just a first name, in which case the file
+<code class="filename">file.tex</code> is used.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="2.3.21 Starting &amp; Ending">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="starting-and-ending" name=
+"starting-and-ending"></a>2.3.21 Starting &amp; Ending</h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp8650144" class="indexterm" name="idp8650144"></a><a id=
+"idp8650960" class="indexterm" name="idp8650960"></a>
+<p>Your input file must contain the following commands as a
+minimum:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\documentclass{class}
+\begin{document}
+ ... your text goes here ...
+\end{document}
+</pre>
+<p>where the <code class="literal">class</code> selected is one of
+the valid classes for LaTeX. See <a class="link" href=
+"#document-classes" title="2.3.4 Document Classes">Document
+Classes</a> (and see <a class="link" href="#overview" title=
+"2.2 Overview of LaTeX and Local Guide">Overview</a>), for details
+of the various document classes available locally.</p>
+<p>You may include other LaTeX commands between the <code class=
+"literal">\documentclass</code> and the <code class=
+"literal">\begin{document}</code> commands (i.e., in the
+`preamble').</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="2.3.22 Table of Contents">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="table-of-contents" name=
+"table-of-contents"></a>2.3.22 Table of Contents</h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp8660416" class="indexterm" name="idp8660416"></a>
+<p>A table of contents is produced with the <code class=
+"literal">\tableofcontents</code> <a id="idp8662256" class=
+"indexterm" name="idp8662256"></a> command. You put the command
+right where you want the table of contents to go; LaTeX does the
+rest for you. It produces a heading, but it does not automatically
+start a new page. If you want a new page after the table of
+contents, include a <code class="literal">\newpage</code> command
+after the <code class="literal">\tableofcontents</code>
+command.</p>
+<p>There are similar commands <code class=
+"literal">\listoffigures</code> <a id="idp8666416" class=
+"indexterm" name="idp8666416"></a> and <code class=
+"literal">\listoftables</code> <a id="idp8667952" class="indexterm"
+name="idp8667952"></a> for producing a list of figures and a list
+of tables, respectively. Everything works exactly the same as for
+the table of contents.</p>
+<p>NOTE: If you want any of these items to be generated, you cannot
+have the <code class="literal">\nofiles</code> <a id="idp8670096"
+class="indexterm" name="idp8670096"></a> command in your
+document.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-addcontentsline-title" name=
+"cmd-addcontentsline-title"></a>\addcontentsline</h5>
+<a id="idp8672336" class="indexterm" name="idp8672336"></a>
+<p><code class=
+"literal">\addcontentsline{file}{sec_unit}{entry}</code></p>
+<p>The <code class="literal">\addcontentsline</code> command adds
+an entry to the specified list or table where:</p>
+<div class="itemizedlist">
+<ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc" compact="compact">
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">file</code> is the
+extension of the file on which information is to be written:
+<code class="literal">toc</code> (table of contents), <code class=
+"literal">lof</code> (list of figures), or <code class=
+"literal">lot</code> (list of tables).</li>
+<li class="listitem">
+<p class="simpara"><code class="literal">sec_unit</code> controls
+the formatting of the entry. It should be one of the following,
+depending upon the value of the file argument:</p>
+<div class="orderedlist">
+<ol class="orderedlist" type="1">
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">toc</code> --- the name
+of the sectional unit, such as part or subsection.</li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">lof</code> ---
+figure</li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">lot</code> ---
+table</li>
+</ol>
+</div>
+</li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">entry</code> is the text
+of the entry.</li>
+</ul>
+</div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-addtocontents-title" name=
+"cmd-addtocontents-title"></a>\addtocontents</h5>
+<a id="idp8687536" class="indexterm" name="idp8687536"></a>
+<p><code class="literal">\addtocontents{file}{text}</code></p>
+<p>The <code class="literal">\addtocontents</code> command adds
+text (or formatting commands) directly to the file that generates
+the table of contents or list of figures or tables.</p>
+<div class="itemizedlist">
+<ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc" compact="compact">
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">file</code> is the
+extension of the file on which information is to be written:
+<code class="literal">toc</code> (table of contents), <code class=
+"literal">lof</code> (list of figures), or <code class=
+"literal">lot</code> (list of tables).</li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">text</code> is the
+information to be written.</li>
+</ul>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="2.3.23 Terminal Input/Output">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="terminal-input-slash-output" name=
+"terminal-input-slash-output"></a>2.3.23 Terminal Input/Output</h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp8697776" class="indexterm" name="idp8697776"></a><a id=
+"idp8698592" class="indexterm" name="idp8698592"></a>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-typein-title" name=
+"cmd-typein-title"></a>\typein</h5>
+<a id="idp8700464" class="indexterm" name="idp8700464"></a>
+<p><code class="literal">\typein[cmd]{msg}</code></p>
+<p>Prints <code class="literal">msg</code> on the terminal and
+causes LaTeX to stop and wait for you to type a line of input,
+ending with return. If the <code class="literal">cmd</code>
+argument is missing, the typed input is processed as if it had been
+included in the input file in place of the <code class=
+"literal">\typein</code> command. If the <code class=
+"literal">cmd</code> argument is present, it must be a command
+name. This command name is then defined or redefined to be the
+typed input.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="cmd-typeout-title" name=
+"cmd-typeout-title"></a>\typeout</h5>
+<a id="idp8707360" class="indexterm" name="idp8707360"></a>
+<p><code class="literal">\typeout{msg}</code></p>
+<p>Prints <code class="literal">msg</code> on the terminal and in
+the <code class="literal">log</code> file. Commands in <code class=
+"literal">msg</code> that are defined with <code class=
+"literal">\newcommand</code> or <code class=
+"literal">\renewcommand</code> are replaced by their definitions
+before being printed.</p>
+<p>LaTeX's usual rules for treating multiple spaces as a single
+space and ignoring spaces after a command name apply to
+<code class="literal">msg</code>. A <code class=
+"literal">\space</code> command in <code class="literal">msg</code>
+causes a single space to be printed. A <code class=
+"literal">^^J</code> in <code class="literal">msg</code> prints a
+newline.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="2.3.24 Typefaces">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="typefaces" name="typefaces"></a>2.3.24
+Typefaces</h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp8719168" class="indexterm" name="idp8719168"></a><a id=
+"idp8719984" class="indexterm" name="idp8719984"></a>
+<p>The <code class="literal">typeface</code> is specified by giving
+the <span class="emphasis"><em>size</em></span> and <span class=
+"emphasis"><em>style</em></span>. A typeface is also called a
+<span class="emphasis"><em>font</em></span>.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="styles-title" name=
+"styles-title"></a>\Styles</h5>
+<a id="idp8724480" class="indexterm" name="idp8724480"></a><a id=
+"idp8725296" class="indexterm" name="idp8725296"></a><a id=
+"idp8726112" class="indexterm" name="idp8726112"></a>
+<p>The following type style commands are supported by LaTeX.</p>
+<p>These commands are used like <code class=
+"literal">\textit{italics text}</code>. The corresponding command
+in parenthesis is the <span class="emphasis"><em>declaration
+form</em></span>, which takes no arguments. The scope of the
+declaration form lasts until the next type style command or the end
+of the current group.</p>
+<p>The declaration forms are cumulative; i.e., you can say
+<code class="literal">\sffamily\bfseries</code> to get sans serif
+boldface.</p>
+<p>You can also use the environment form of the declaration forms;
+e.g. <code class=
+"literal">\begin{ttfamily}...\end{ttfamily}</code>.</p>
+<div class="table"><a id="table-typefaces" name=
+"table-typefaces"></a>
+<p class="title">
+<strong>Table&nbsp;1.9.&nbsp;Typefaces</strong></p>
+<div class="table-contents">
+<table summary="Typefaces" border="0">
+<colgroup>
+<col align="left" />
+<col align="justify" /></colgroup>
+<tbody>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">\textrm (\rmfamily) <a id="idp8736432" class=
+"indexterm" name="idp8736432"></a> <a id="idp8737248" class=
+"indexterm" name="idp8737248"></a></td>
+<td align="justify">Roman.</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">\textit (\itshape) <a id="idp8739408" class=
+"indexterm" name="idp8739408"></a> <a id="idp8740224" class=
+"indexterm" name="idp8740224"></a>, \emph <a id="idp8741072" class=
+"indexterm" name="idp8741072"></a></td>
+<td align="justify">Emphasis (toggles between \textit and
+\textrm).</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">\textmd (\mdseries) <a id="idp8743264" class=
+"indexterm" name="idp8743264"></a> <a id="idp8744080" class=
+"indexterm" name="idp8744080"></a></td>
+<td align="justify">Medium weight (default). The opposite of
+boldface.</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">\textbf (\bfseries) <a id="idp8746288" class=
+"indexterm" name="idp8746288"></a> <a id="idp8747104" class=
+"indexterm" name="idp8747104"></a></td>
+<td align="justify">Boldface.</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">\textup (\upshape) <a id="idp8749264" class=
+"indexterm" name="idp8749264"></a> <a id="idp8750080" class=
+"indexterm" name="idp8750080"></a></td>
+<td align="justify">Upright (default). The opposite of
+slanted.</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">\textsl (\slshape) <a id="idp8752272" class=
+"indexterm" name="idp8752272"></a> <a id="idp8753088" class=
+"indexterm" name="idp8753088"></a></td>
+<td align="justify">Slanted.</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">\textsf (\sffamily) <a id="idp8755248" class=
+"indexterm" name="idp8755248"></a> <a id="idp8756064" class=
+"indexterm" name="idp8756064"></a></td>
+<td align="justify">Sans serif.</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">\textsc (\scshape) <a id="idp8758224" class=
+"indexterm" name="idp8758224"></a> <a id="idp8759040" class=
+"indexterm" name="idp8759040"></a></td>
+<td align="justify">Small caps.</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">\texttt (\ttfamily) <a id="idp8761200" class=
+"indexterm" name="idp8761200"></a> <a id="idp8762016" class=
+"indexterm" name="idp8762016"></a></td>
+<td align="justify">Typewriter.</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">\textnormal (\normalfont) <a id="idp8764176"
+class="indexterm" name="idp8764176"></a> <a id="idp8764992" class=
+"indexterm" name="idp8764992"></a></td>
+<td align="justify">Main document font.</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">\mathrm <a id="idp8767152" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp8767152"></a></td>
+<td align="justify">Roman, for use in math mode.</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">\mathbf <a id="idp8769312" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp8769312"></a></td>
+<td align="justify">Boldface, for use in math mode. For bold
+symbols or complete equations take a look at <a class="link" href=
+"#boldsymbol-linkend"><code class="literal">\boldsymbol</code></a>
+and <a class="link" href="#cmd-bm"><code class=
+"literal">\bm</code></a>.</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">\mathsf <a id="idp8774144" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp8774144"></a></td>
+<td align="justify">Sans serif, for use in math mode.</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">\mathtt <a id="idp8776304" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp8776304"></a></td>
+<td align="justify">Typewriter, for use in math mode.</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">\mathit <a id="idp8778464" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp8778464"></a></td>
+<td align="justify">Italics, for use in math mode, e.g. variable
+names with several letters.</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">\mathnormal <a id="idp8780672" class="indexterm"
+name="idp8780672"></a></td>
+<td align="justify">For use in math mode, e.g. inside another type
+style declaration.</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">\mathcal <a id="idp8782880" class="indexterm"
+name="idp8782880"></a></td>
+<td align="justify">`Calligraphic' letters, for use in math
+mode.</td>
+</tr>
+</tbody>
+</table>
+</div>
+</div>
+<br class="table-break" />
+<p>In addition, the command <code class=
+"literal">\mathversion{bold}</code> <a id="idp8785776" class=
+"indexterm" name="idp8785776"></a> can be used for switching to
+bold letters and symbols in formulas. <code class=
+"literal">\mathversion{normal}</code> restores the default.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="sizes-title" name=
+"sizes-title"></a>Sizes</h5>
+<a id="idp8788656" class="indexterm" name="idp8788656"></a><a id=
+"idp8789472" class="indexterm" name="idp8789472"></a><a id=
+"idp8790288" class="indexterm" name="idp8790288"></a>
+<p>The following standard type size commands are supported by
+LaTeX.</p>
+<p>The commands as listed here are "declaration forms". The scope
+of the declaration form lasts until the next type style command or
+the end of the current group.</p>
+<p>You can also use the environment form of these commands; e.g.
+<code class="literal">\begin{tiny}...\end{tiny}</code>.</p>
+<div class="table"><a id="table-standard-type-size-commands" name=
+"table-standard-type-size-commands"></a>
+<p class="title"><strong>Table&nbsp;1.10.&nbsp;Standard type size
+commands</strong></p>
+<div class="table-contents">
+<table summary="Standard type size commands" border="0">
+<colgroup>
+<col align="left" />
+<col align="justify" /></colgroup>
+<tbody>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">\tiny<a id="idp8798272" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp8798272"></a></td>
+<td align="justify"></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">\scriptsize <a id="idp8800768" class="indexterm"
+name="idp8800768"></a></td>
+<td align="justify"></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">\footnotesize <a id="idp8803008" class="indexterm"
+name="idp8803008"></a></td>
+<td align="justify"></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">\small <a id="idp8805248" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp8805248"></a></td>
+<td align="justify"></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">\normalsize <a id="idp8807488" class="indexterm"
+name="idp8807488"></a></td>
+<td align="justify">(default)</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">\large <a id="idp8809760" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp8809760"></a></td>
+<td align="justify"></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">\Large <a id="idp8812000" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp8812000"></a></td>
+<td align="justify"></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">\LARGE <a id="idp8814240" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp8814240"></a></td>
+<td align="justify"></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">\huge <a id="idp8816480" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp8816480"></a></td>
+<td align="justify"></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">\Huge <a id="idp8818720" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp8818720"></a></td>
+<td align="justify">&nbsp;</td>
+</tr>
+</tbody>
+</table>
+</div>
+</div>
+<br class="table-break" />
+<h5 class="title"><a id="low-dash-level-font-commands-title" name=
+"low-dash-level-font-commands-title"></a>Low-level font
+commands</h5>
+<a id="idp8821680" class="indexterm" name="idp8821680"></a><a id=
+"idp8822496" class="indexterm" name="idp8822496"></a>
+<p>These commands are primarily intended for writers of macros and
+packages. The commands listed here are only a subset of the
+available ones. For full details, you should consult Chapter 7 of
+<em class="citetitle">The LaTeX Companion</em>.</p>
+<div class="table"><a id="table-low-level-font-commands" name=
+"table-low-level-font-commands"></a>
+<p class="title"><strong>Table&nbsp;1.11.&nbsp;Low-level font
+commands</strong></p>
+<div class="table-contents">
+<table summary="Low-level font commands" border="0">
+<colgroup>
+<col align="left" />
+<col align="justify" /></colgroup>
+<tbody>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">\fontencoding{enc} <a id="idp8829152" class=
+"indexterm" name="idp8829152"></a></td>
+<td align="justify">Select font encoding. Valid encodings include
+<code class="literal">OT1</code> and <code class=
+"literal">T1</code>.</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">\fontfamily{family} <a id="idp8832816" class=
+"indexterm" name="idp8832816"></a></td>
+<td align="justify">Select font family. Valid families include:
+<div class="itemizedlist">
+<ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc" compact="compact">
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">cmr</code> for Computer
+Modern Roman</li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">cmss</code> for Computer
+Modern Sans Serif</li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">cmtt</code> for Computer
+Modern Typewriter</li>
+</ul>
+</div>
+and numerous others.</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">\fontseries{series} <a id="idp8839504" class=
+"indexterm" name="idp8839504"></a></td>
+<td align="justify">Select font series. Valid series include:
+<div class="itemizedlist">
+<ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc" compact="compact">
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">m</code> Medium
+(normal)</li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">b</code> Bold</li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">c</code> Condensed</li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">bc</code> Bold
+condensed</li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">bx</code> Bold
+extended</li>
+</ul>
+</div>
+and various other combinations.</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">\fontshape{shape} <a id="idp8848528" class=
+"indexterm" name="idp8848528"></a></td>
+<td align="justify">Select font shape. Valid shapes are:
+<div class="itemizedlist">
+<ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc" compact="compact">
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">n</code> Upright
+(normal)</li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">it</code> Italic</li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">sl</code> Slanted
+(oblique)</li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">sc</code> Small
+caps</li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">ui</code> Upright
+italics</li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">ol</code> Outline</li>
+</ul>
+</div>
+The two last shapes are not available for most font families.</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">\fontsize{size}{skip} <a id="idp8858864" class=
+"indexterm" name="idp8858864"></a></td>
+<td align="justify">Set font size. The first parameter is the font
+size to switch to; the second is the <code class=
+"literal">\baselineskip</code> to use. The unit of both parameters
+defaults to pt. A rule of thumb is that the baselineskip should be
+1.2 times the font size.</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">\selectfont <a id="idp8861936" class="indexterm"
+name="idp8861936"></a></td>
+<td align="justify">The changes made by calling the four font
+commands described above do not come into effect until <code class=
+"literal">\selectfont</code> is called.</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">\usefont{enc}{family}{series}{shape} <a id=
+"idp8864928" class="indexterm" name="idp8864928"></a></td>
+<td align="justify">Equivalent to calling <code class=
+"literal">\fontencoding</code>, <code class=
+"literal">\fontfamily</code>, <code class=
+"literal">\fontseries</code> and <code class=
+"literal">\fontshape</code> with the given parameters, followed by
+<code class="literal">\selectfont</code>.</td>
+</tr>
+</tbody>
+</table>
+</div>
+</div>
+<br class="table-break" /></div>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="2.4 Parameters">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="parameters" name="parameters"></a>2.4
+Parameters</h3>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp8872224" class="indexterm" name="idp8872224"></a>
+<p>The input file specification indicates the file to be formatted;
+TeX uses <code class="filename">.tex</code> as a default file
+extension. If you omit the input file entirely, TeX accepts input
+from the terminal. You specify command options by supplying a
+string as a parameter to the command; e.g.</p>
+<p><code class="literal">latex \scrollmode\input foo.tex</code></p>
+<p>will process <code class="filename">foo.tex</code> without
+pausing after every error.</p>
+<p>Output files are always created in the current directory. When
+you fail to specify an input file name, TeX bases the output names
+on the file specification associated with the logical name
+TEX_OUTPUT, typically <code class="literal">texput.log</code>.</p>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="3 LaTeX Packages">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h2 class="title" style="clear: both"><a id="latex-packages" name=
+"latex-packages"></a>3 LaTeX Packages</h2>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp8881376" class="indexterm" name="idp8881376"></a>
+<div class="section" title="3.1 amsmath">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="amsmath" name="amsmath"></a>3.1
+<code class="filename">amsmath</code></h3>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp8884448" class="indexterm" name="idp8884448"></a><a id=
+"idp8885264" class="indexterm" name="idp8885264"></a>
+<p><code class="literal">amsmath</code> consists of several
+packages to aid in typesetting math.</p>
+<div class="variablelist"><a id="boldsymbol-linkend" name=
+"boldsymbol-linkend"></a>
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\boldsymbol</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp8889984" class="indexterm" name="idp8889984"></a>
+<p>Produces a bold math symbol. When not only a single symbol, but
+a complete equation has to be bold you might consider using the
+superior <a class="link" href="#cmd-bm"><code class=
+"literal">\bm</code></a> command which takes better care of
+spacing.</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><a id="pmb-linkend" name="pmb-linkend"></a><span class=
+"term"><code class="literal">\pmb</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp8894896" class="indexterm" name="idp8894896"></a>
+<p>Can be used for mathematic symbols, when no bold version is
+available. It prints the standard symbol several times slightly
+shifted and is inferior to a real bold font!</p>
+</dd>
+</dl>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="3.2 dcolumn">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="dcolumn" name="dcolumn"></a>3.2
+<code class="filename">dcolumn</code></h3>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp8899488" class="indexterm" name="idp8899488"></a><a id=
+"idp8900304" class="indexterm" name="idp8900304"></a>
+<p><code class="literal">\usepackage{dcolumn}</code></p>
+<p>Defines a system for defining columns of entries in an
+<code class="literal">array</code> or <code class=
+"literal">tabular</code> which are to be aligned on a <span class=
+"emphasis"><em>decimal point</em></span>.</p>
+<p>This package defines <code class="literal">D</code> to be a
+column specifier with three arguments:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+D{sep.tex}{sep.dvi}{decimal places}
+</pre>
+<p><code class="literal">sep.tex</code> should be a single
+character, this is used as the separator in the <code class=
+"literal">.tex</code> file. It will usually be '<code class=
+"literal">.</code>' or '<code class="literal">,</code>'.</p>
+<p><code class="literal">sep.dvi</code> is used as the separator in
+the output.</p>
+<p><code class="literal">decimal places</code> should be the
+maximum number of decimal places in the column.</p>
+<p><code class="literal">\newcolumntype</code> can be used to
+define own column types.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="3.3 float">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="float" name="float"></a>3.3 <code class=
+"filename">float</code></h3>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp8915328" class="indexterm" name="idp8915328"></a>
+<div class="note" title="Note" style=
+"margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;">
+<h3 class="title">Note</h3>
+<p>The contents of this section was taken from the documentation of
+<code class="filename">float</code> v1.3d of 2001/11/08.</p>
+</div>
+<p><span class="quote">&ldquo;<span class="quote">This style option
+improves the interface for defining objects such as figures and
+tabels in LaTeX. It adds the notion of a <span class=
+"emphasis"><em>float style</em></span> that governs the appearance
+of floats.</span>&rdquo;</span></p>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\newfloat{&lt;placement&gt;}{&lt;ext&gt;}[&lt;within&gt;]</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp8921072" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp8921072"></a><a id="idp8921888" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp8921888"></a>
+<p>Add a new class of floats.</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\floatstyle{&lt;style&gt;}</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp8925456" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp8925456"></a><a id="idp8926272" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp8926272"></a>
+<p>Sets a default float style.</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\floatname{&lt;style&gt;}{&lt;name&gt;}</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp8929808" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp8929808"></a><a id="idp8930624" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp8930624"></a>
+<p>Define the <span class="emphasis"><em>float name</em></span>
+used in the caption of a float.</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\floatplacement{&lt;&gt;}{&lt;placement&gt;}</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp8934608" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp8934608"></a><a id="idp8935424" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp8935424"></a>
+<p>Resets the default placement specifier of a class of floats.</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\restylefloat&lt;style&gt;</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp8938976" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp8938976"></a><a id="idp8939792" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp8939792"></a>
+<p>Change styles for the standard float types <code class=
+"literal">figure</code> and <code class="literal">table</code>.</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\listof{&lt;type&gt;}{&lt;title&gt;}</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp8944768" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp8944768"></a><a id="idp8945584" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp8945584"></a>
+<p>Produces a list of all floats of a given class.</p>
+</dd>
+</dl>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="3.4 fontenc">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="fontenc" name="fontenc"></a>3.4
+<code class="filename">fontenc</code></h3>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp8950272" class="indexterm" name="idp8950272"></a>
+<p><code class="literal">\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}</code></p>
+<p>chooses T1-fonts and allows correct automatic hyphenation.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="3.5 german">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="german" name="german"></a>3.5 <code class=
+"filename">german</code></h3>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp8954880" class="indexterm" name="idp8954880"></a><a id=
+"idp8955696" class="indexterm" name="idp8955696"></a>
+<p>Das <code class="literal">german</code> Paket mu&szlig; geladen
+sein:</p>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class="literal">"a</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp8960208" class="indexterm" name="idp8960208"></a>
+<p>erzeugt ein <span class="emphasis"><em>&auml;</em></span></p>
+<p>entsprechend <code class="literal">"o</code>, <code class=
+"literal">"u</code>, <code class="literal">"A</code>, <code class=
+"literal">"O</code>, <code class="literal">"U</code>, <code class=
+"literal">"s (&szlig;)</code></p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class="literal">"ck</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp8968464" class="indexterm" name="idp8968464"></a>
+<p>wird bei Trennung zu <code class="literal">k-k</code></p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class="literal">"ff</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp8972512" class="indexterm" name="idp8972512"></a>
+<p>wird bei Trennung zu <code class="literal">ff-f</code></p>
+<p>entsprechend <code class="literal">"ll</code>, <code class=
+"literal">"mm</code>, <code class="literal">"pp</code>,
+<code class="literal">"rr</code>, <code class=
+"literal">"tt</code></p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\glqq</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp8980512" class="indexterm" name="idp8980512"></a>
+<p>oder <code class="literal">"`</code> erzeugt untere doppelte
+Anf&uuml;hrungszeichen</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><a id="cmd-grqq" name="cmd-grqq"></a><span class=
+"term"><code class="literal">\grqq</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp8985248" class="indexterm" name="idp8985248"></a>
+<p>oder <code class="literal">"'</code> erzeugt obere doppelte
+Anf&uuml;hrungszeichen</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\glq</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp8989552" class="indexterm" name="idp8989552"></a>
+<p>erzeugt untere einfache Anf&uuml;hrungszeichen</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\flqq</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp8993120" class="indexterm" name="idp8993120"></a>
+<p>oder <code class="literal">"&lt;</code> doppelte linke
+franz&ouml;sische Anf&uuml;hrungszeichen</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\frqq</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp8997424" class="indexterm" name="idp8997424"></a>
+<p>oder <code class="literal">"&gt;</code> doppelte rechte
+franz&ouml;sische Anf&uuml;hrungszeichen</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\flq</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp9001728" class="indexterm" name="idp9001728"></a>
+<p>einfache linke franz&ouml;sische Anf&uuml;hrungszeichen</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\frq</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp9005296" class="indexterm" name="idp9005296"></a>
+<p>einfache rechte franz&ouml;sische Anf&uuml;hrungszeichen</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class="literal">"|</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp9008832" class="indexterm" name="idp9008832"></a>
+<p>verhindert eine Ligatur an der Stelle</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class="literal">\-</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp9012272" class="indexterm" name="idp9012272"></a>
+<p>markiert m&ouml;gliche Trennstelle, im restlichen Wort ist keine
+Trennung mehr m&ouml;glich</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class="literal">"-</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp9015904" class="indexterm" name="idp9015904"></a>
+<p>Trennvorschlag, der Rest des Wortes kann noch automatisch
+getrennt werden</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class="literal">""</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp9019488" class="indexterm" name="idp9019488"></a>
+<p>Trennvorschlag, bei dem bei einer Trennung kein Bindestrich
+eingef&uuml;gt wird</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class="literal">"~</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp9023056" class="indexterm" name="idp9023056"></a>
+<p>Bindestrich, an dem nicht getrennt werden darf</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class="literal">"=</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp9026512" class="indexterm" name="idp9026512"></a>
+<p>Bindestrich, an dem getrennt werden darf</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class="literal">\dq</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp9030016" class="indexterm" name="idp9030016"></a>
+<p>erzeugt ein nicht-typographisches gerades
+Anf&uuml;hrungszeichen</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\texttt{\dq}
+</pre></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">&lt;</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp9034288" class="indexterm" name="idp9034288"></a>
+<p>oder <code class="literal">\dq</code> ergibt das
+Zoll-Zeichen</p>
+</dd>
+</dl>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="3.6 graphics">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="graphics" name="graphics"></a>3.6
+<code class="filename">graphics</code></h3>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp9039840" class="indexterm" name="idp9039840"></a><a id=
+"idp9040656" class="indexterm" name="idp9040656"></a>
+<p>Look up details in <code class="filename">grfguide</code>.</p>
+<div class="section" title="3.6.1 \includegraphics">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="includegraphics" name=
+"includegraphics"></a>3.6.1 \includegraphics</h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp9044768" class="indexterm" name="idp9044768"></a>
+<p><code class=
+"literal">\includegraphics[]{picture-name}</code></p>
+<p>File extensions of the graphics should be omitted, so it's
+easier to change the format (for example for pdf or ps output).</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="3.6.2 \graphicspath">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="graphicspath" name=
+"graphicspath"></a>3.6.2 \graphicspath</h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp9048736" class="indexterm" name="idp9048736"></a>
+<p><code class="literal">\graphicspath{dir-list}</code></p>
+<p><code class="literal">dir-list</code> is a list of absolute or
+relative paths, where the command <a class="link" href=
+"#includegraphics" title="3.6.1 \includegraphics"><code class=
+"literal">\includegraphics{}</code></a> searches for the graphic
+files:</p>
+<p><code class="literal">\graphicspath{{eps/}{tiff/}}</code> would
+cause the system to look in the subdirectories <code class=
+"literal">eps</code> and <code class="literal">tiff</code> of the
+current directory. This is unix syntax, on a Mac it would be:</p>
+<p><code class="literal">\graphicspath{{:eps:}{:tiff:}}</code></p>
+<p>Under Windows/DOS use also the slash <code class=
+"literal">/</code> to separate directories. Not all tex
+installations can handle filenames with spaces. So it's better to
+avoid them.</p>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="3.7 hyperref">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="hyperref" name="hyperref"></a>3.7
+<code class="filename">hyperref</code></h3>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp9060176" class="indexterm" name="idp9060176"></a><a id=
+"idp9061248" class="indexterm" name="idp9061248"></a>
+<p>For more infos read in the book <span class="emphasis"><em>LaTeX
+Web Companion</em></span> or <span class="emphasis"><em>Mit LaTeX
+ins Web</em></span>.</p>
+<div class="section" title="3.7.1 Options">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="hyperref-options" name=
+"hyperref-options"></a>3.7.1 Options</h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="term">4</span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp9067600" class="indexterm" name="idp9067600"></a>
+<p>use Acrobat 4 features (default: <code class=
+"literal">false</code>).</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term">a4paper, a5paper, b5paper, legalpaper,
+letterpaper, executivepaper</span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp9071872" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp9071872"></a><a id="idp9073776" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp9073776"></a><a id="idp9075680" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp9075680"></a><a id="idp9077584" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp9077584"></a><a id="idp9079488" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp9079488"></a><a id="idp9081392" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp9081392"></a>
+<p>use the specified paper size.</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term">anchorcolor</span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp9084912" class="indexterm" name="idp9084912"></a>
+<p>set color of anchors (default: <code class=
+"literal">black</code>).</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term">backref</span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp9089152" class="indexterm" name="idp9089152"></a>
+<p>do bibliographical back references (default: <code class=
+"literal">false</code>).</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term">baseurl</span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp9093408" class="indexterm" name="idp9093408"></a>
+<p>set base URL for document (default: <code class=
+"literal">empty</code>).</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term">bookmarks</span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp9097664" class="indexterm" name="idp9097664"></a>
+<p>make bookmarks (default: <code class="literal">true</code>).</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term">bookmarksnumbered</span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp9101904" class="indexterm" name="idp9101904"></a>
+<p>put section numbers in bookmarks (default: <code class=
+"literal">false</code>).</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term">bookmarksopen</span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp9106160" class="indexterm" name="idp9106160"></a>
+<p>open up bookmark tree (default: <code class=
+"literal">false</code>).</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term">bookmarksopenlevel</span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp9110448" class="indexterm" name="idp9110448"></a>
+<p>level to which bookmarks are open (default: <code class=
+"literal">\maxdimen</code>).</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term">bookmarkstype</span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp9114704" class="indexterm" name="idp9114704"></a>
+<p>to specify which `toc' file to mimic toc.</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term">breaklinks</span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp9118240" class="indexterm" name="idp9118240"></a>
+<p>allow links to break over lines (default: <code class=
+"literal">false</code>).</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term">citebordercolor</span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp9122496" class="indexterm" name="idp9122496"></a>
+<p>color of border around cites (default: <code class="literal">0 1
+0</code>).</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term">citecolor</span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp9126752" class="indexterm" name="idp9126752"></a>
+<p>color of citation links (default: <code class=
+"literal">green</code>).</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term">colorlinks</span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp9130992" class="indexterm" name="idp9130992"></a>
+<p>color links (default: <code class="literal">false</code>).</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term">debug</span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp9135232" class="indexterm" name="idp9135232"></a>
+<p>provide details of anchors defined (same as verbose, default:
+<code class="literal">false</code>).</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term">draft</span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp9139520" class="indexterm" name="idp9139520"></a>
+<p>do not do any hyper linking (default: <code class=
+"literal">false</code>).</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term">dvipdf, dvipdfm, dvips, dvipsone, dviwindo,
+hypertex,</span> <span class="term">latex2html, pdftex, tex4ht,
+textures, ps2pdf, vtex</span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp9144256" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp9144256"></a><a id="idp9146160" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp9146160"></a><a id="idp9148064" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp9148064"></a><a id="idp9149968" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp9149968"></a><a id="idp9151872" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp9151872"></a><a id="idp9153776" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp9153776"></a><a id="idp9155680" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp9155680"></a><a id="idp9157584" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp9157584"></a><a id="idp9159488" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp9159488"></a><a id="idp9161392" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp9161392"></a><a id="idp9163296" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp9163296"></a>
+<p>use the specified backend.</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term">extension</span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp9166816" class="indexterm" name="idp9166816"></a>
+<p>suffix of linked files (default: <code class=
+"literal">dvi</code>).</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term">filebordercolor</span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp9171072" class="indexterm" name="idp9171072"></a>
+<p>color of border around file links (default: <code class=
+"literal">0 .5 .5</code>).</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term">filecolor</span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp9175328" class="indexterm" name="idp9175328"></a>
+<p>color of file links (default: <code class=
+"literal">cyan</code>).</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term">frenchlinks</span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp9179568" class="indexterm" name="idp9179568"></a>
+<p>use small caps instead of color for links (default: <code class=
+"literal">false</code>).</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term">hyperfigures</span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp9183840" class="indexterm" name="idp9183840"></a>
+<p>make figures hyper links (default: <code class=
+"literal">false</code>).</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term">hyperindex</span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp9188096" class="indexterm" name="idp9188096"></a>
+<p>set up hyperlinked indices (default: <code class=
+"literal">true</code>).</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term">hypertexnames</span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp9192352" class="indexterm" name="idp9192352"></a>
+<p>use guessable names for links (default: <code class=
+"literal">true</code>).</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term">implicit</span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp9196608" class="indexterm" name="idp9196608"></a>
+<p>redefine LaTeX internals (default: <code class=
+"literal">true</code>).</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term">linkbordercolor</span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp9201296" class="indexterm" name="idp9201296"></a>
+<p>color of border around links (default: <code class="literal">1 0
+0</code>).</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term">linkcolor</span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp9205552" class="indexterm" name="idp9205552"></a>
+<p>color of links (default: <code class="literal">red</code>).</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term">linktocpage</span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp9209808" class="indexterm" name="idp9209808"></a>
+<p>make page number, not text, be link on TOC, LOF and LOT
+(default: <code class="literal">false</code>).</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term">menubordercolor</span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp9214096" class="indexterm" name="idp9214096"></a>
+<p>color of border around menu links (default: <code class=
+"literal">1 0 0</code>).</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term">menucolor</span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp9218352" class="indexterm" name="idp9218352"></a>
+<p>color for menu links (default: <code class=
+"literal">red</code>).</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term">naturalnames</span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp9222560" class="indexterm" name="idp9222560"></a>
+<p>use LaTeX-computed names for links (default: <code class=
+"literal">false</code>).</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term">nesting</span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp9227264" class="indexterm" name="idp9227264"></a>
+<p>allow nesting of links (default: <code class=
+"literal">false</code>).</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term">pageanchor</span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp9231504" class="indexterm" name="idp9231504"></a>
+<p>put an anchor on every page (default: <code class=
+"literal">true</code>).</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term">pagebackref</span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp9235760" class="indexterm" name="idp9235760"></a>
+<p>backreference by page number (default: <code class=
+"literal">false</code>).</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term">pagebordercolor</span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp9240016" class="indexterm" name="idp9240016"></a>
+<p>color of border around page links (default: <code class=
+"literal">1 1 0</code>).</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term">pagecolor</span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp9244272" class="indexterm" name="idp9244272"></a>
+<p>color of page links (default: <code class=
+"literal">red</code>).</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term">pdfauthor</span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp9248480" class="indexterm" name="idp9248480"></a>
+<p>text for PDF Author field (default: empty).</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term">pdfborder</span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp9252016" class="indexterm" name="idp9252016"></a>
+<p>width of PDF link border (default: <code class="literal">0 0
+1</code>; <code class="literal">0 0 0</code> for <code class=
+"literal">colorlinks</code>)</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term">pdfcenterwindow</span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp9257712" class="indexterm" name="idp9257712"></a>
+<p>position the document window center of the screen (default:
+<code class="literal">false</code>).</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term">pdfcreator</span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp9261984" class="indexterm" name="idp9261984"></a>
+<p>text for PDF Creator field (default: LaTeX with hyperref
+package).</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term">pdffitwindow</span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp9265984" class="indexterm" name="idp9265984"></a>
+<p>resize document window to fit document size (default:
+<code class="literal">false</code>).</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term">pdfhighlight</span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp9270256" class="indexterm" name="idp9270256"></a>
+<p>set highlighting of PDF links (default: <code class=
+"literal">/I</code>).</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term">pdfkeywords</span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp9274480" class="indexterm" name="idp9274480"></a>
+<p>text for PDF Keywords field (default: empty).</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term">pdfmenubar</span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp9278016" class="indexterm" name="idp9278016"></a>
+<p>make PDF viewer's menu bar visible (default: <code class=
+"literal">true</code>).</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term">pdfnewwindow</span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp9282272" class="indexterm" name="idp9282272"></a>
+<p>make links that open another PDF file start a new window
+(default: <code class="literal">false</code>).</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term">pdfpagelayout</span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp9286560" class="indexterm" name="idp9286560"></a>
+<p>set layout of PDF pages (default: empty).</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term">pdfpagemode</span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp9290096" class="indexterm" name="idp9290096"></a>
+<p>set default mode of PDF display (default: empty).</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term">pdfpagescrop</span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp9293648" class="indexterm" name="idp9293648"></a>
+<p>set crop size of PDF document (default: empty).</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term">pdfpagetransition</span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp9297184" class="indexterm" name="idp9297184"></a>
+<p>set PDF page transition style (default: empty).</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term">pdfproducer</span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp9300720" class="indexterm" name="idp9300720"></a>
+<p>text for PDF Producer field (default: empty).</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term">pdfstartpage</span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp9304256" class="indexterm" name="idp9304256"></a>
+<p>page at which PDF document opens (default: <code class=
+"literal">1</code>).</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term">pdfstartview</span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp9308480" class="indexterm" name="idp9308480"></a>
+<p>starting view of PDF document (default: <code class=
+"literal">/Fit</code>).</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term">pdfsubject</span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp9312736" class="indexterm" name="idp9312736"></a>
+<p>text for PDF Subject field (default: empty).</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term">pdftitle</span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp9316368" class="indexterm" name="idp9316368"></a>
+<p>text for PDF Title field(default: empty).</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term">pdftoolbar</span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp9319840" class="indexterm" name="idp9319840"></a>
+<p>make PDF toolbar visible (default: <code class=
+"literal">true</code>).</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term">pdfview</span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp9324096" class="indexterm" name="idp9324096"></a>
+<p>PDF `view' when on link traversal (default: empty).</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term">pdfwindowui</span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp9327696" class="indexterm" name="idp9327696"></a>
+<p>make PDF user interface elements visible (default: <code class=
+"literal">true</code>).</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term">plainpages</span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp9331968" class="indexterm" name="idp9331968"></a>
+<p>do page number anchors as plain arabic (default: <code class=
+"literal">true</code>).</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term">raiselinks</span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp9336240" class="indexterm" name="idp9336240"></a>
+<p>raise up links (for HyperTeX backend; default: <code class=
+"literal">false</code>).</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term">runbordercolor</span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp9340512" class="indexterm" name="idp9340512"></a>
+<p>color of border around run links (default: <code class=
+"literal">0 .7 .7</code>).</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term">unicode</span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp9344768" class="indexterm" name="idp9344768"></a>
+<p>Unicode encoded pdf strings (default: <code class=
+"literal">true</code>).</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term">urlbordercolor</span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp9349024" class="indexterm" name="idp9349024"></a>
+<p>color of border around URL links (default: <code class=
+"literal">0 1 1</code>).</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term">urlcolor</span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp9353280" class="indexterm" name="idp9353280"></a>
+<p>color of URL links (default: <code class=
+"literal">magenta</code>).</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term">verbose</span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp9357520" class="indexterm" name="idp9357520"></a>
+<p>be chatty (default: <code class="literal">false</code>).</p>
+</dd>
+</dl>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="3.7.2 Commands">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="hyperref-commands" name=
+"hyperref-commands"></a>3.7.2 Commands</h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\texorpdfstring{TeX-string}{pdf-string}</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp9364528" class="indexterm" name="idp9364528"></a>
+<p>allows different texts for PDF or TeX creation.</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\section{The role of \texorpdfstring{H$_2$O}{water}}
+</pre></dd>
+<dt><a id="href" name="href"></a><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\href{URL}{Text}</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp9370096" class="indexterm" name="idp9370096"></a>
+<p>the text will be resolved into a URL. The URL must be complete,
+according to a base-url which might be defined in a <a class="link"
+href="#cmd-hyperbaseurl"><code class=
+"literal">\hyperbaseurl</code></a>.</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\href{http://www.karpfenteich.net/pit/}{Peter's input tips}
+</pre></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><a id="cmd-hyperbaseurl" name=
+"cmd-hyperbaseurl"></a><code class=
+"literal">\hyperbaseurl{URL}</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp9376624" class="indexterm" name="idp9376624"></a>
+<p>defines a base URL, which is preset to a given URL. This helps
+to make portable documents.</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\hyperimage{image-URL}</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp9380608" class="indexterm" name="idp9380608"></a>
+<p>includes the picture of the URL reference.</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\hyperref{URL}{category}{name}{text}</code>,</span>
+<span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\hyperref[mark]{text}</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp9385424" class="indexterm" name="idp9385424"></a>
+<p><code class="literal">text</code> is activated as a hyperlink to
+the point which is defined with a <a class="link" href=
+"#cmd-label-title" title="2.3.2.&nbsp;\label{key}"><code class=
+"filename">\label</code></a> command with the symbolic name
+<code class="literal">mark</code>.</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\hyperlink{name}{text}</code>,</span> <span class=
+"term"><code class=
+"literal">\hyertarget{name}{text}</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp9393072" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp9393072"></a><a id="idp9394976" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp9394976"></a>
+<p><code class="literal">\hyperlink</code> creates an internal link
+to an object which is somewhere defined with a <code class=
+"literal">\hypertarget</code> command.</p>
+<p>For HTML the command <code class="literal">\hyperlink</code>
+inserts a <code class="literal">#</code> character in front of each
+link. Thus it'll refer to the topical document, while <code class=
+"literal">\href</code> will expect a complete URL.</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\autoref{marker}</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp9402864" class="indexterm" name="idp9402864"></a>
+<p><code class="literal">\autoref</code> is a substitution for the
+standard <code class="literal">\ref</code> command. It inserts a
+context sensitive phrase.</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+see \autoref{foo}
+</pre>
+<p>for a <code class="literal">\label</code> in a section will
+output <span class="emphasis"><em>see section 3</em></span> for an
+example.</p>
+<p>There are macros to change the default output with the help of
+the <code class="literal">\renewcommand</code>:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\figurename *\figurename*
+\tablename *\tablename*
+\partname *\partname*
+\appendixname *\appendixname*
+\equationname *\equationname*
+\Itemname *\Itemname*
+\chaptername *\chaptername*
+\sectionname *\sectionname*
+\subsectionname *\subsesctionname*
+\subsubsectionname *\subsubsectionname*
+\paragraphname *\paragraphname*
+\Hfootnotename *\Hfootnotename*
+\AMSname *\AMSname*
+\theoremname *\theoremname*
+</pre></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><a id="cmd-nolinkurl" name=
+"cmd-nolinkurl"></a><code class=
+"literal">\nolinkurl</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp9413248" class="indexterm" name="idp9413248"></a>
+<p>Allows line breaks in a verbatim like environment like
+<code class="literal">\url</code>, but without the hyperlink
+function. This is useful to define own commands like this
+example:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\newcommand*{\urlw}[1]{\href{http://www.#1}%
+ {\nolinkurl{www.#1}}}
+</pre>
+<p>This new defined command <code class="literal">\urlw</code>
+allows the user to typeset a linkable (this function is offered by
+<code class="literal">\href</code>) <code class=
+"literal">www.example.org</code> address in the latex source like
+this:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\urlw{example.org}
+</pre>
+<p>This will produce the string <code class=
+"literal">www.example.org</code> which is hyperlinked and breakable
+(when the driver like pdfTeX allows line breaks in links).</p>
+</dd>
+</dl>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="3.8 inputenc">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="inputenc" name="inputenc"></a>3.8
+<code class="filename">inputenc</code></h3>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp9424944" class="indexterm" name="idp9424944"></a>
+<p><code class="literal">\usepackage[encoding
+name]{inputenc}</code></p>
+<p>Allows to specify an input encoding for direct input of
+character codes &gt; 127, e.g. accented characters.</p>
+<p>Important encodings are:</p>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class="literal">latin9,
+latin1</code></span></dt>
+<dd>
+<p class="simpara">Linux, Unix, VMS</p>
+<a id="idp9429952" class="indexterm" name="idp9429952"></a><a id=
+"idp9430768" class="indexterm" name="idp9430768"></a></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">ansinew</code></span></dt>
+<dd>
+<p class="simpara">Windows (codepage 1252)</p>
+<a id="idp9433584" class="indexterm" name="idp9433584"></a></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">cp850</code></span></dt>
+<dd>
+<p class="simpara">OS/2, MSDOS (codpage 850)</p>
+<a id="idp9436544" class="indexterm" name="idp9436544"></a></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">applemac</code></span></dt>
+<dd>
+<p class="simpara">Apple Macintosh</p>
+<a id="idp9439360" class="indexterm" name="idp9439360"></a></dd>
+</dl>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="3.9 KOMA-Script">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="komascript" name="komascript"></a>3.9
+<code class="filename">KOMA-Script</code></h3>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp9442992" class="indexterm" name="idp9442992"></a><a id=
+"idp9444032" class="indexterm" name="idp9444032"></a>
+<p>The <code class="literal">KOMA-Script</code> package has a very
+detailed and well written documentation. Read the <code class=
+"literal">scrguide</code> for further information! :-)</p>
+<div class="section" title="3.9.1 Page-Layout">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="komascript-page-layout" name=
+"komascript-page-layout"></a>3.9.1 Page-Layout</h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<p><code class="literal">\typearea[BCOR]{DIV}</code></p>
+<a id="idp9450080" class="indexterm" name="idp9450080"></a>
+<p><code class=
+"literal">\areaset[BCOR]{Breite}{H&ouml;he}</code></p>
+<a id="idp9451936" class="indexterm" name="idp9451936"></a></div>
+<div class="section" title="3.9.2 Options">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="komascript-options" name=
+"komascript-options"></a>3.9.2 Options</h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="term">headinclude, headexclude,</span>
+<span class="term">footinclude, footexclude</span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp9456288" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp9456288"></a><a id="idp9457472" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp9457472"></a><a id="idp9458544" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp9458544"></a><a id="idp9459616" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp9459616"></a>
+<p>will determine if headers and footers are used in the
+calculation of the page size. Default is exclude. Include will make
+the text area smaller.</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term">DIV</span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp9462448" class="indexterm" name="idp9462448"></a>
+<p>is a factor which determins how large the used page size is.
+This method takes care of good typography.</p>
+<p>Try values between 10 and 15. Higher values will cause smaller
+margins. An example would be: <code class=
+"literal">DIV12</code>.</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term">BCOR</span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp9466400" class="indexterm" name="idp9466400"></a>
+<p>Binding correction. Takes care of the loss of the visible paper
+size when the paper is cut and a book is bound.</p>
+</dd>
+</dl>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="3.9.3 Letter Class scrlttr2">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="komascript-scrlttr2" name=
+"komascript-scrlttr2"></a>3.9.3 Letter Class <code class=
+"literal">scrlttr2</code></h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp9470720" class="indexterm" name="idp9470720"></a>
+<p>This reference is based on the excellent <code class=
+"literal">scrguien.pdf</code> from 2002-09-06.</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="idp9473376" name=
+"idp9473376"></a>Options</h5>
+<a id="idp9474064" class="indexterm" name="idp9474064"></a>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="idp9475968" name="idp9475968"></a>Defining
+Options Later</h5>
+<a id="idp9476656" class="indexterm" name="idp9476656"></a>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class="literal">\KOMAoptions{options
+list}</code></span></dt>
+<dd>Use this to change options after loading the class. List single
+or multiple options, separated by commas.</dd>
+</dl>
+</div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="idp9481408" name="idp9481408"></a>Page
+Layout Options</h5>
+<a id="idp9482096" class="indexterm" name="idp9482096"></a>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">paper=format</code></span></dt>
+<dd>Defines the paper format.</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">BCOR=length</code>,</span> <span class=
+"term"><code class="literal">DIV=value</code>,</span> <span class=
+"term"><code class="literal">headlines=count</code></span></dt>
+<dd>Divisor, binding correction, and number of headlines.</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">enlargefirstpage</code></span></dt>
+<dd>If <span class="emphasis"><em>true</em></span> some more text
+would fit on the first page</dd>
+</dl>
+</div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="idp9492960" name="idp9492960"></a>Other
+Layout Options</h5>
+<a id="idp9493648" class="indexterm" name="idp9493648"></a><a id=
+"idp9495552" class="indexterm" name="idp9495552"></a>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">twoside</code></span></dt>
+<dd>Activate possibilities of a double-sided document, but stay
+with with the one-sided layout as far as possible.</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">cleardoublepage=style</code></span></dt>
+<dd>
+<p class="simpara">Inserted pages by <code class=
+"literal">\cleardoublepage</code> get one of these page styles:</p>
+<div class="itemizedlist">
+<ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc">
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">empty</code></li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">plain</code></li>
+<li class="listitem"><code class="literal">standard</code></li>
+</ul>
+</div>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">headsepline</code>,</span> <span class=
+"term"><code class="literal">footsepline</code></span></dt>
+<dd>Insert a separator line below the head or above the foot.</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">mpinclude</code>,</span> <span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">mpexclude</code></span></dt>
+<dd>These two options of the <code class="literal">typearea</code>
+package should not be used with <code class=
+"literal">scrlttr2</code>.</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">pagenumber=position</code></span></dt>
+<dd>
+<p class="simpara">This option defines if and where a page number
+will be placed. Possible values are:</p>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class="literal">bot</code>,</span>
+<span class="term"><code class="literal">foot</code></span></dt>
+<dd>Page number in foot, horizontal position not changed</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">botcenter</code>,</span> <span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">botcentered</code>,</span> <span class=
+"term"><code class="literal">botmiddle</code>,</span> <span class=
+"term"><code class="literal">footcenter</code>,</span> <span class=
+"term"><code class="literal">footcentered</code>,</span>
+<span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">footmiddle</code></span></dt>
+<dd>Page number infoot,centered</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class="literal">botleft</code>,</span>
+<span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">footleft</code></span></dt>
+<dd>Page number in foot, left justified</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">botrigth</code>,</span> <span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">footright</code></span></dt>
+<dd>Page number in foot, right justified</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class="literal">center</code>,</span>
+<span class="term"><code class="literal">centered</code>,</span>
+<span class="term"><code class="literal">middle</code></span></dt>
+<dd>Page number centered horizontally, vertical position not
+changed</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class="literal">false</code>,</span>
+<span class="term"><code class="literal">no</code>,</span>
+<span class="term"><code class="literal">off</code></span></dt>
+<dd>No page number</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class="literal">head</code>,</span>
+<span class="term"><code class="literal">top</code></span></dt>
+<dd>Page number in head, horizontal position not changed</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">headcenter</code>,</span> <span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">headcentered</code>,</span> <span class=
+"term"><code class="literal">headmiddle</code>,</span> <span class=
+"term"><code class="literal">topcenter</code>,</span> <span class=
+"term"><code class="literal">topcentered</code>,</span>
+<span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">topmiddle</code></span></dt>
+<dd>Page number in head, centered</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">headleft</code>,</span> <span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">topleft</code></span></dt>
+<dd>Page number in head, left justified</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">headright</code>,</span> <span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">topright</code></span></dt>
+<dd>Page number in head, right justified</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">left</code></span></dt>
+<dd>Page number left, vertical position not changed</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">right</code></span></dt>
+<dd>Page number right, vertical position not changed</dd>
+</dl>
+</div>
+<p class="simpara">Default is <code class=
+"literal">botcenter</code></p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">parskip=value</code></span></dt>
+<dd>
+<p class="simpara">Mark paragraphs alternatively by vertical skip.
+Possible values are:</p>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class="literal">false</code>,</span>
+<span class="term"><code class="literal">off</code></span></dt>
+<dd>Paragraph indentation instead of verticalk space</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class="literal">full</code>,</span>
+<span class="term"><code class="literal">on</code>,</span>
+<span class="term"><code class="literal">true</code></span></dt>
+<dd>One line vertical space between paragraphs; at least 1 em free
+space in the last line.</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">full*</code></span></dt>
+<dd>One line vertical space betwen paragraphs; at least a quarter
+of a line free space at the end of a paragraph.</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">full+</code></span></dt>
+<dd>One line vertical space betwen paragraphs; at least a third of
+aline free space at the end of a paragraph.</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">full-</code></span></dt>
+<dd>One line vertical space betwen paragraphs; last line of a
+paragraph may be arbitrarily filled.</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">half</code></span></dt>
+<dd>Half a line vertical space between paragraphs; at least 1 em
+free space in the last line.</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">half*</code></span></dt>
+<dd>Half a line vertical space between paragraphs; at least a
+quarter of a line free space at the end of a paragraph.</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">half+</code></span></dt>
+<dd>Half a line vertical space between paragraphs; at least a third
+of a line free space at the end of a paragraph.</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">half-</code></span></dt>
+<dd>One line vertical space between paragraphs; last line may be
+arbitrarily filled.</dd>
+</dl>
+</div>
+<p class="simpara">Default is <code class=
+"literal">false</code>.</p>
+</dd>
+</dl>
+</div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="idp9584448" name="idp9584448"></a>Font
+Options</h5>
+<a id="idp9585136" class="indexterm" name="idp9585136"></a>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">fontsize=size</code></span></dt>
+<dd>Font size of the document. Defaults to <code class=
+"literal">12pt</code>.</dd>
+</dl>
+</div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="idp9590560" name="idp9590560"></a>Options
+for Letterhead and Address</h5>
+<a id="idp9591264" class="indexterm" name="idp9591264"></a>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">fromalign</code></span></dt>
+<dd>
+<p class="simpara">Defines the placement of the from address in the
+letterhead. Possible values are:</p>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class="literal">center</code>,</span>
+<span class="term"><code class="literal">centered</code>,</span>
+<span class="term"><code class="literal">middle</code></span></dt>
+<dd>Return address centered.</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class="literal">false</code>,</span>
+<span class="term"><code class="literal">no</code>,</span>
+<span class="term"><code class="literal">off</code></span></dt>
+<dd>Standard design for return address.</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">left</code></span></dt>
+<dd>Left justified return address.</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">rigth</code></span></dt>
+<dd>Right justified return address.</dd>
+</dl>
+</div>
+<p class="simpara">Default is <code class="literal">left</code></p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">fromrule</code></span></dt>
+<dd>
+<p class="simpara">Allows to place a horizontal rule within return
+address. Possible values are:</p>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">afteraddress</code>,</span> <span class=
+"term"><code class="literal">below</code>,</span> <span class=
+"term"><code class="literal">true</code>,</span> <span class=
+"term"><code class="literal">yes</code></span></dt>
+<dd>Line below return address</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">aftername</code></span></dt>
+<dd>Line right below sender's name</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class="literal">false</code>,</span>
+<span class="term"><code class="literal">no</code>,</span>
+<span class="term"><code class="literal">off</code></span></dt>
+<dd>No line.</dd>
+</dl>
+</div>
+<p class="simpara">Default is <code class=
+"literal">false</code>.</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">fromphone</code></span></dt>
+<dd>Defines whether the phone number will be part of the return
+address.</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">fromfax</code></span></dt>
+<dd>Defines whether the facsimile number will be part of the return
+address.</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">fromemail</code></span></dt>
+<dd>Defines whether the email address will be part of the return
+address.</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">fromurl</code></span></dt>
+<dd>Defines whether the URL will be part of the return
+address.</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">fromlogo</code></span></dt>
+<dd>Defines whether the logo will be part of the return
+address.</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">addrfield</code></span></dt>
+<dd>Defines whether a return address field will be set.</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">backaddress</code></span></dt>
+<dd>Defines whether a return address for window envelopes will be
+set.</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">subject</code></span></dt>
+<dd>
+<p class="simpara">Choose of your subject should have a title and
+if the subject should be set before or after the opening. Possible
+values are:</p>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">afteropening</code></span></dt>
+<dd>Set subject after opening.</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">beforeopening</code></span></dt>
+<dd>Set subject before opening.</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">titled</code></span></dt>
+<dd>Add title to subject.</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">untitled</code></span></dt>
+<dd>Do not add title to subject.</dd>
+</dl>
+</div>
+<p class="simpara">Defaults are <code class=
+"literal">beforeopening</code> and <code class=
+"literal">untitled</code>.</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">locfield</code></span></dt>
+<dd>
+<p class="simpara">Toggle between presets for the field width of
+additionbal sender attributes.</p>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">narrow</code></span></dt>
+<dd>Small sender supplement field.</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">wide</code></span></dt>
+<dd>Wide sender supplement field.</dd>
+</dl>
+</div>
+<p class="simpara">Default is <code class=
+"literal">narrow</code>.</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">foldmarks</code></span></dt>
+<dd>Activates fold marks.</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">numericaldate</code></span></dt>
+<dd>Toggles between standard, language-dependent date presentation
+and a short, numerical one.</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">refline</code></span></dt>
+<dd>Defines that the reference line may extend beyond the normal
+type area.</dd>
+</dl>
+</div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="idp9664320" name="idp9664320"></a>Format
+Options</h5>
+<a id="idp9665008" class="indexterm" name="idp9665008"></a>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">draft</code></span></dt>
+<dd>Toggles between the final and the draft version.</dd>
+</dl>
+</div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="idp9669728" name="idp9669728"></a>Letter
+Class Option Files</h5>
+<a id="idp9670432" class="indexterm" name="idp9670432"></a>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\LoadLetterOption{name}</code></span></dt>
+<dd>
+<p class="simpara">Load a <code class="literal">lco</code> file.
+<code class="literal">name</code> is the filename without
+suffix.</p>
+<p>Predefined <code class="literal">lco</code> files:</p>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class="literal">DIN</code></span></dt>
+<dd>For A4 size paper, complying with DIN 676.</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">DINmtext</code></span></dt>
+<dd>For A4 size paper, complying with DIN 676, but using an
+alternate layout with more text on the first page.</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">KOMAold</code></span></dt>
+<dd>Fo AQ4 paper size using a layout close to the obsolete
+<code class="literal">scrlettr</code> class.</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class="literal">SN</code></span></dt>
+<dd>For Swiss letters with address field on the right side,
+according to SN 010 130</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">SNleft</code></span></dt>
+<dd>For Swiss letters with address field on the left side.</dd>
+</dl>
+</div>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\LetterOptionNeedsPaperSize{option name}{paper
+size}</code></span></dt>
+<dd>Useful to be abel to emit warnings if the user selects a
+different paper size from the one the <code class=
+"literal">lco</code> file is based on.</dd>
+</dl>
+</div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="idp9692256" name="idp9692256"></a>General
+Document Properties</h5>
+<a id="idp9692928" class="indexterm" name="idp9692928"></a>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="idp9694848" name="idp9694848"></a>Font
+Selection</h5>
+<a id="idp9695536" class="indexterm" name="idp9695536"></a>
+<p>See also the section for <span class="emphasis"><em>Changing
+Fonts</em></span> in KOMA-Script (still to be written).</p>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">backaddress</code></span></dt>
+<dd>Back address for a window envelope</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">descriptionlabel</code></span></dt>
+<dd>Label in a <code class="literal">description</code>
+environment</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">fromaddress</code></span></dt>
+<dd>Sender's address in letterhead</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">fromname</code></span></dt>
+<dd>Sender's address in letterhead if different from <code class=
+"literal">fromaddress</code></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">pagefoot</code></span></dt>
+<dd>Footer, sometimes header of a page</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">pagehead</code></span></dt>
+<dd>Header, sometimes footer of a page</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">pagenumber</code></span></dt>
+<dd>Page number in footer or header</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">subject</code></span></dt>
+<dd>Subject in the opening</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">title</code></span></dt>
+<dd>Headline in the opening</dd>
+</dl>
+</div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="idp9718656" name="idp9718656"></a>Page
+Style</h5>
+<a id="idp9719344" class="indexterm" name="idp9719344"></a>
+<p>See also the section for <span class="emphasis"><em>Page
+Style</em></span> in KOMA-Script (still to be written).</p>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">empty</code></span></dt>
+<dd>Entirely empty headers and footers</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">plain</code></span></dt>
+<dd>Empty head and and only page number in header or footer</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">headings</code></span></dt>
+<dd>Automatic page headings</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">myheadings</code></span></dt>
+<dd>Manual page headings</dd>
+</dl>
+</div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="idp9731008" name=
+"idp9731008"></a>Variables</h5>
+<a id="idp9731696" class="indexterm" name="idp9731696"></a>
+<p>The main difference between a <span class=
+"emphasis"><em>command</em></span> and a <span class=
+"emphasis"><em>variable</em></span> is that a command usually
+triggers an action whereas a variable only consists of plain text.
+Furthermore a variable can have an additional description.</p>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\newkomavar[description]{name}</code>,</span>
+<span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\newkomavar*[description]{name}</code>,</span>
+<span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\addtoreffields{name}</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp9738592" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp9738592"></a><a id="idp9740496" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp9740496"></a>
+<p class="simpara"><code class="literal">\newkomavar</code> defines
+a new variable, addressed with <code class=
+"literal">name</code>.</p>
+<p class="simpara">The command <code class=
+"literal">\addtoreffields</code> adds the variable <code class=
+"literal">name</code> to the reference fields. See section
+<a class="link" href="#scrlttr-business-line" title=
+"3.9.3.&nbsp;Business Line">Business Line</a>.</p>
+<p class="simpara">The command <code class=
+"literal">\newkomavar*</code> works like <code class=
+"literal">\newkomavar</code> with an additional call of the command
+<code class="literal">\addtoreffields</code>.</p>
+</dd>
+</dl>
+</div>
+<p>Overview of all variables:</p>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">backaddress</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp9752048" class="indexterm" name="idp9752048"></a>
+<p class="simpara">Back address for window envelopes</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">backaddressseparator</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp9755968" class="indexterm" name="idp9755968"></a>
+<p class="simpara">Separator within the back address</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">ccseparator</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp9759888" class="indexterm" name="idp9759888"></a>
+<p class="simpara">Separator between title of additional recipients
+and additional recipients</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">customer</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp9763856" class="indexterm" name="idp9763856"></a>
+<p class="simpara">Customer number</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">date</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp9767760" class="indexterm" name="idp9767760"></a>
+<p class="simpara">Date</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">emailseparator</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp9771664" class="indexterm" name="idp9771664"></a>
+<p class="simpara">Separator between e-mail name and e-mail
+address</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">enclseparator</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp9775616" class="indexterm" name="idp9775616"></a>
+<p class="simpara">Separator between title of enclosure and and
+enclosures</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">faxseparator</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp9779568" class="indexterm" name="idp9779568"></a>
+<p class="simpara">Separator between title of fax and fax
+number</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">fromaddress</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp9783520" class="indexterm" name="idp9783520"></a>
+<p class="simpara">Sender's address without its name</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">frombank</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp9787440" class="indexterm" name="idp9787440"></a>
+<p class="simpara">Sender's bank account</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">fromemail</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp9791344" class="indexterm" name="idp9791344"></a>
+<p class="simpara">Sender's e-mail</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">fromfax</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp9795248" class="indexterm" name="idp9795248"></a>
+<p class="simpara">Sender's fax number</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">fromlogo</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp9799152" class="indexterm" name="idp9799152"></a>
+<p class="simpara">Commands for inserting the sender's logo</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">fromname</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp9803088" class="indexterm" name="idp9803088"></a>
+<p class="simpara">Complete name of the sender</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">fromphone</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp9807008" class="indexterm" name="idp9807008"></a>
+<p class="simpara">Sender's telephone number</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">fromurl</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp9810928" class="indexterm" name="idp9810928"></a>
+<p class="simpara">URL of the sender</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">invoice</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp9814832" class="indexterm" name="idp9814832"></a>
+<p class="simpara">Invoice number</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">location</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp9818736" class="indexterm" name="idp9818736"></a>
+<p class="simpara">More details of the sender</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">myref</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp9822656" class="indexterm" name="idp9822656"></a>
+<p class="simpara">Sender's reference</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">place</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp9826560" class="indexterm" name="idp9826560"></a>
+<p class="simpara">Place</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">placeseparator</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp9830464" class="indexterm" name="idp9830464"></a>
+<p class="simpara">Separator between place and date</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">phoneseparator</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp9834384" class="indexterm" name="idp9834384"></a>
+<p class="simpara">Separator between title of telephone and
+telephone number</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">signature</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp9838336" class="indexterm" name="idp9838336"></a>
+<p class="simpara">Signature beneath the ending of the letter</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">specialmail</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp9842272" class="indexterm" name="idp9842272"></a>
+<p class="simpara">Special mail</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">subject</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp9846176" class="indexterm" name="idp9846176"></a>
+<p class="simpara">Subject</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">subjectseparator</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp9850080" class="indexterm" name="idp9850080"></a>
+<p class="simpara">Separator between title of subject and
+subject</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">title</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp9854032" class="indexterm" name="idp9854032"></a>
+<p class="simpara">Letter title</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">toname</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp9857936" class="indexterm" name="idp9857936"></a>
+<p class="simpara">Complete name of recipient</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">toaddress</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp9861856" class="indexterm" name="idp9861856"></a>
+<p class="simpara">Address of recipient without its name</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">yourmail</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp9865776" class="indexterm" name="idp9865776"></a>
+<p class="simpara">Date of recipient's mail</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">yourref</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp9869696" class="indexterm" name="idp9869696"></a>
+<p class="simpara">Recipient's reference</p>
+</dd>
+</dl>
+</div>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\setkomavar{name}[description]{content}</code>,</span>
+<span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\setkomavar*{name}{description}</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp9875216" class="indexterm" name="idp9875216"></a>
+<p class="simpara"><code class="literal">\setkomavar</code> sets
+the content of the variable <code class="literal">name</code>. The
+optional argument sets the <code class="literal">description</code>
+of the variable.</p>
+<p class="simpara"><code class="literal">\setkomavar*</code> only
+sets the <code class="literal">description</code>.</p>
+</dd>
+</dl>
+</div>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\usekomavar[command]{name}</code>,</span> <span class=
+"term"><code class=
+"literal">\usekomavar*[command]{name}</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp9884544" class="indexterm" name="idp9884544"></a>
+<p class="simpara"><code class="literal">\usekomavar</code> gives
+you access to the content of the variable <code class=
+"literal">name</code>.</p>
+<p class="simpara"><code class="literal">\usekomavar*</code> gives
+you access to the <code class="literal">description</code> of the
+variable <code class="literal">name</code>.</p>
+</dd>
+</dl>
+</div>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\ifkomavarempty{name}{true}{false}</code>,</span>
+<span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\ifkomavarempty*{name}{true}{false}</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp9893824" class="indexterm" name="idp9893824"></a>
+<p class="simpara">The <code class="literal">true</code> argument
+will be executed if the content or description is empty. Otherwise
+the <code class="literal">false</code> argument will be
+executed.</p>
+<p class="simpara">The starred version handles the description of a
+variable, the variant without star the content.</p>
+</dd>
+</dl>
+</div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="idp9898704" name="idp9898704"></a>Pseudo
+Lengths</h5>
+<a id="idp9899392" class="indexterm" name="idp9899392"></a>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\@newplength{name}</code></span></dt>
+<dd>Defines a new pseudo length</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\useplength{name}</code></span></dt>
+<dd>Access value of pseudo length <code class=
+"literal">name</code></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\setlengthtoplength[factor]{length}{pseudo length}</code>
+,</span> <span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\addtolengthplength[factor]{length}{pseudo
+length}</code></span></dt>
+<dd>Assign a multiple of <code class="literal">pseudo length</code>
+to a real <code class="literal">length</code>. Adds a multiple of
+<code class="literal">pseudo length</code> to <code class=
+"literal">length</code>.</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\@setplength[factor]{pseudo length}{value}</code>
+,</span> <span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\@addtoplength[factor]{pseudo
+length}{value}</code></span></dt>
+<dd>Assign a multiple of a <code class="literal">value</code> to a
+<code class="literal">pseudo length</code>. Adds <code class=
+"literal">value</code> to <code class="literal">pseudo
+length</code>.</dd>
+</dl>
+</div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="idp9919360" name="idp9919360"></a>Letter
+Declaration</h5>
+<a id="idp9920048" class="indexterm" name="idp9920048"></a>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="idp9921952" name=
+"idp9921952"></a>Letterhead</h5>
+<a id="idp9922640" class="indexterm" name="idp9922640"></a>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">firstheadvpos</code></span></dt>
+<dd>Distance between the top of the sheet and the letterhead.</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">firstheadwidth</code></span></dt>
+<dd>Width of the letterhead.</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">fromname</code>,</span> <span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">fromaddress</code>,</span> <span class=
+"term"><code class="literal">fromphone</code>,</span> <span class=
+"term"><code class="literal">fromfax</code>,</span> <span class=
+"term"><code class="literal">fromemail</code>,</span> <span class=
+"term"><code class="literal">fromurl</code>,</span> <span class=
+"term"><code class="literal">fromlogo</code></span></dt>
+<dd>This variables give all statements concerning the sender
+necessary to create the letterhead.</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">phoneseparator</code>,</span> <span class=
+"term"><code class="literal">faxseparator</code>,</span>
+<span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">emailseparator</code>,</span> <span class=
+"term"><code class="literal">urlseparator</code></span></dt>
+<dd>Separators for variables in letterhead.</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\firsthead{construction}</code></span></dt>
+<dd>Create letterhead freely.</dd>
+</dl>
+</div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="idp9942880" name=
+"idp9942880"></a>Footer</h5>
+<a id="idp9943568" class="indexterm" name="idp9943568"></a>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">firstfootvpos</code></span></dt>
+<dd>Distance between footer and upper border of the sheet.</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">firstfootwidth</code></span></dt>
+<dd>Width of letter's firstpage footer.</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\firstfoot{Construction}</code></span></dt>
+<dd>Set definition for first page's footer</dd>
+</dl>
+</div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="idp9952336" name=
+"idp9952336"></a>Address</h5>
+<a id="idp9953024" class="indexterm" name="idp9953024"></a>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">toaddrvpos</code>,</span> <span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">toaddrhpos</code></span></dt>
+<dd>Distance between address window of a window envelope and the
+upper and left border of the sheet.</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">toaddrwidth</code></span></dt>
+<dd>Width of the address window.</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">toaddrindent</code></span></dt>
+<dd>Value of indentation for the address from the left border.</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">backaddress</code>,</span> <span class=
+"term"><code class="literal">backaddressseparator</code>,</span>
+<span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">backaddrheight</code></span></dt>
+<dd>Double backslashes within return address will be exchanged with
+<code class="literal">backaddressseparator</code>. Height of the
+return address field.</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">specialmail</code>,</span> <span class=
+"term"><code class="literal">specialmailindent</code>,</span>
+<span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">specialmailrightindent</code></span></dt>
+<dd>Optionally set between return address and addressee.
+<code class="literal">specialmailindent</code> and <code class=
+"literal">specialmailrightindent</code> determine left and right
+indentation.</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class="literal">toname</code>,</span>
+<span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">toaddress</code></span></dt>
+<dd>Usually not set directly by the user.</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\begin{letter}[options]{address}</code></span></dt>
+<dd>Major point of the letter class.</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\AtBeginLetter{command}</code></span></dt>
+<dd>Hook for commands run at begin of a letter.</dd>
+</dl>
+</div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="idp9979184" name="idp9979184"></a>Sender's
+Extension</h5>
+<a id="idp9979872" class="indexterm" name="idp9979872"></a>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">locwidth</code></span></dt>
+<dd>Declares width of sender's extensions.</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">location</code></span></dt>
+<dd>Content of sender's extension.</dd>
+</dl>
+</div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="scrlttr-business-line" name=
+"scrlttr-business-line"></a>Business Line</h5>
+<a id="idp9987696" class="indexterm" name="idp9987696"></a>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">refvpos</code></span></dt>
+<dd>Distance between upper border of sheet and business line.</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">refwidth</code></span></dt>
+<dd>Available width for the business line.</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">refaftervskip</code></span></dt>
+<dd>Vertical space to be inserted beneath business line.</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class="literal">place</code>,</span>
+<span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">placeseparator</code></span></dt>
+<dd>If all variables for business line are empty, the content of
+<code class="literal">place</code> and <code class=
+"literal">placeseparator</code> will be set, followed by content of
+<code class="literal">date</code>.</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class="literal">yourref</code>,</span>
+<span class="term"><code class="literal">yourmail</code>,</span>
+<span class="term"><code class="literal">myref</code>,</span>
+<span class="term"><code class="literal">customer</code>,</span>
+<span class="term"><code class="literal">invoice</code>,</span>
+<span class="term"><code class="literal">date</code></span></dt>
+<dd>Typical fields for business lines.</dd>
+</dl>
+</div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="idp10007648" name="idp10007648"></a>Title
+and Subject Line</h5>
+<a id="idp10008336" class="indexterm" name="idp10008336"></a><a id=
+"idp10010240" class="indexterm" name="idp10010240"></a>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">title</code></span></dt>
+<dd>Additional tile. Set centered beneath the business line.</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class="literal">subject</code>,</span>
+<span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">subjectseparator</code></span></dt>
+<dd>Set the subject of the letter, optional prefixed by a
+label.</dd>
+</dl>
+</div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="idp10017824" name=
+"idp10017824"></a>Further Issues</h5>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">tfoldmarkvpos</code>,</span> <span class=
+"term"><code class="literal">bfoldmarkvpos</code></span></dt>
+<dd>Position of upper and lower fold mark.</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">foldmarkhpos</code></span></dt>
+<dd>Distance between fold marks and the sheet's left border.</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">frombank</code></span></dt>
+<dd>Internally not used yet.</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\nexthead{construction}</code>,</span> <span class=
+"term"><code class=
+"literal">\nextfoot{construction}</code></span></dt>
+<dd>Create letter head or foot for the following pages freely.</dd>
+</dl>
+</div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="idp10029040" name="idp10029040"></a>The
+Text</h5>
+<a id="idp10029728" class="indexterm" name="idp10029728"></a>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="idp10031632" name=
+"idp10031632"></a>Opening</h5>
+<a id="idp10032320" class="indexterm" name="idp10032320"></a>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\opening{opening}</code></span></dt>
+<dd>Set the opening of the letter.</dd>
+</dl>
+</div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="idp10037008" name=
+"idp10037008"></a>Footnotes</h5>
+<a id="idp10037696" class="indexterm" name="idp10037696"></a>
+<p>See section <span class="emphasis"><em>Footnotes</em></span> in
+KOMA-Script (still to be written).</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="idp10040560" name=
+"idp10040560"></a>Lists</h5>
+<a id="idp10041184" class="indexterm" name="idp10041184"></a>
+<p>See section <span class="emphasis"><em>Lists</em></span> in
+KOMA-Script (still to be written).</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="idp10044048" name="idp10044048"></a>Margin
+Notes</h5>
+<a id="idp10044672" class="indexterm" name="idp10044672"></a>
+<p>See section <span class="emphasis"><em>Margin Notes</em></span>
+in KOMA-Script (still to be written).</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="idp10047536" name="idp10047536"></a>Text
+Emphasis</h5>
+<a id="idp10048160" class="indexterm" name="idp10048160"></a>
+<p>See section <span class="emphasis"><em>Logical Markup of
+Text</em></span> in KOMA-Script (still to be written).</p>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="idp10051024" name=
+"idp10051024"></a>Closing Part</h5>
+<a id="idp10051648" class="indexterm" name="idp10051648"></a>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="idp10053552" name=
+"idp10053552"></a>Closing</h5>
+<a id="idp10054240" class="indexterm" name="idp10054240"></a>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">signature</code></span></dt>
+<dd>Inlcudes an explanation for the inscription. Defaults to
+<code class="literal">\usekomavar{fromname}</code>.</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class="literal">\closing{closing
+phrase}</code></span></dt>
+<dd>Typesets the colsing phrase follwoed by a vertical space and
+the contents fo variable <code class=
+"literal">signature</code>.</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">sigindent</code>,</span> <span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">sigbeforevskip</code>,</span> <span class=
+"term"><code class="literal">\raggedsignature</code></span></dt>
+<dd>Indentation of the box for closing phrase, inscription and
+signature (defaults to 0mm). Vertical space between closing phrase
+and signature (defaults to two lines). Alignment inside the
+box.</dd>
+</dl>
+</div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="idp10066320" name=
+"idp10066320"></a>Postscript, Carbon Copy, and Enclosures</h5>
+<a id="idp10067024" class="indexterm" name="idp10067024"></a><a id=
+"idp10068928" class="indexterm" name="idp10068928"></a><a id=
+"idp10070832" class="indexterm" name="idp10070832"></a>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class="literal">\ps</code></span></dt>
+<dd>Set a postscript.</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class="literal">\cc{distribution
+list}</code>,</span> <span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">ccseparator</code></span></dt>
+<dd>Set a ddistribution list. If the contents of <code class=
+"literal">ccseparator</code> isn't empty then the name and the
+content of the variable is inserted prior to distribution
+list.</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\encl{enclosures}</code>,</span> <span class=
+"term"><code class="literal">enclseparator</code></span></dt>
+<dd>Same structur as the distribution list.</dd>
+</dl>
+</div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="idp10081984" name=
+"idp10081984"></a>Language Support</h5>
+<a id="idp10082672" class="indexterm" name="idp10082672"></a>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="idp10084576" name=
+"idp10084576"></a>Language Selection</h5>
+<a id="idp10085264" class="indexterm" name="idp10085264"></a>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\captionenglish</code>,</span> <span class=
+"term"><code class="literal">\captionUSenglish</code>,</span>
+<span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\captionamerican</code>,</span> <span class=
+"term"><code class="literal">\captionbritish</code>,</span>
+<span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\captionUKenglish</code>,</span> <span class=
+"term"><code class="literal">\captiongerman</code>,</span>
+<span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\captionngerman</code>,</span> <span class=
+"term"><code class="literal">\captionaustrian</code>,</span>
+<span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\captionfrench</code>,</span> <span class=
+"term"><code class="literal">\captionitalian</code>,</span>
+<span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\captionspanish</code>,</span> <span class=
+"term"><code class="literal">\captiondutch</code>,</span>
+<span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\captioncroatian</code></span></dt>
+<dd>If the used language selection scheme does not support
+switching the language the above commands can be used
+directly.</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\dateenglish</code>,</span> <span class=
+"term"><code class="literal">\dateUSenglish</code>,</span>
+<span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\dateamerican</code>,</span> <span class=
+"term"><code class="literal">\datebritish</code>,</span>
+<span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\dateUKenglish</code>,</span> <span class=
+"term"><code class="literal">\dategerman</code>,</span>
+<span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\datengerman</code>,</span> <span class=
+"term"><code class="literal">\dateaustrian</code>,</span>
+<span class="term"><code class="literal">\datefrench</code>,</span>
+<span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\dateitalian</code>,</span> <span class=
+"term"><code class="literal">\datespanish</code>,</span>
+<span class="term"><code class="literal">\datedutch</code>,</span>
+<span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\datecrotian</code></span></dt>
+<dd>Numerical date representation.</dd>
+</dl>
+</div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="idp10111648" name=
+"idp10111648"></a>Language-Dependent Terms</h5>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\yourrefname</code>,</span> <span class=
+"term"><code class="literal">\youremailname</code>,</span>
+<span class="term"><code class="literal">\myrefname</code>,</span>
+<span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\customername</code>,</span> <span class=
+"term"><code class="literal">\invoicename</code>,</span>
+<span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\subjectname</code>,</span> <span class=
+"term"><code class="literal">\ccname</code>,</span> <span class=
+"term"><code class="literal">\enclname</code>,</span> <span class=
+"term"><code class="literal">\headtoname</code>,</span>
+<span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\headfromname</code>,</span> <span class=
+"term"><code class="literal">\datename</code>,</span> <span class=
+"term"><code class="literal">\pagename</code>,</span> <span class=
+"term"><code class="literal">\phonename</code>,</span> <span class=
+"term"><code class="literal">\faxname</code>,</span> <span class=
+"term"><code class="literal">\emailname</code>,</span> <span class=
+"term"><code class="literal">\wwwname</code>,</span> <span class=
+"term"><code class="literal">\bankname</code></span></dt>
+<dd>These defintions can be modified to support a new language of
+for private customization.</dd>
+</dl>
+</div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="idp10128272" name=
+"idp10128272"></a>Defining Language Terms</h5>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\providecaptioname{language}{term}{definition}</code>,</span>
+<span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\newcaptioname{language}{term}{defintion}</code>,</span>
+<span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\renewcaptionname{language}{term}{definition}</code></span></dt>
+<dd>Assign a <span class="emphasis"><em>definition</em></span> for
+a <span class="emphasis"><em>language</em></span> to a <span class=
+"emphasis"><em>term</em></span>.</dd>
+</dl>
+</div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="idp10134800" name=
+"idp10134800"></a>Address Files and Circular Letters</h5>
+<a id="idp10135504" class="indexterm" name="idp10135504"></a><a id=
+"idp10137408" class="indexterm" name="idp10137408"></a>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\adrentry{Lastname}{Firstname}{Address}{Telephone}{F1}{F2}{Comment}{Key}</code></span></dt>
+<dd>Address entry for address files. The file extension has to be
+<code class="literal">.adr</code>!</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\addrentry{Lastname}{Firstname}{Address}{Telephone}{F1}{F2}{F3}{F4}{Key}</code></span></dt>
+<dd>This command supports four freely definable parameters for an
+address entry.</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class="literal">\adrchar{initial
+letter}</code>,</span> <span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\addrchar{initial letter}</code></span></dt>
+<dd>Separator for address entries. Ignored by <code class=
+"literal">scrlttr2</code>.</dd>
+</dl>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="3.9.4 Address Files with scraddr">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="komascript-scraddr" name=
+"komascript-scraddr"></a>3.9.4 Address Files with <code class=
+"literal">scraddr</code></h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp10151008" class="indexterm" name="idp10151008"></a>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class="literal">\InputAddressFile{file
+name}</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp10154304" class="indexterm" name="idp10154304"></a>
+<p class="simpara">Read the contents of the given address file.
+Filename extension has to be <code class="literal">.adr</code> and
+has to be omitted in the argument.</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\Name{Key}</code>,</span> <span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\FirstName{Key}</code>,</span> <span class=
+"term"><code class="literal">\LastName{Key}</code>,</span>
+<span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\Address{Key}</code>,</span> <span class=
+"term"><code class="literal">\Telephone{Key}</code>,</span>
+<span class="term"><code class="literal">\FreeI{Key}</code>,</span>
+<span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\FreeII{Key}</code>,</span> <span class=
+"term"><code class="literal">\Comment{Key}</code>,</span>
+<span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\FreeIII{Key}</code>,</span> <span class=
+"term"><code class="literal">\FreeIV{Key}</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp10166368" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp10166368"></a><a id="idp10168272" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp10168272"></a><a id="idp10170176" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp10170176"></a><a id="idp10172080" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp10172080"></a><a id="idp10173984" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp10173984"></a><a id="idp10175888" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp10175888"></a><a id="idp10177792" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp10177792"></a><a id="idp10179696" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp10179696"></a><a id="idp10181600" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp10181600"></a><a id="idp10183504" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp10183504"></a>
+<p class="simpara">Access to the data in address file. <code class=
+"literal">\Name</code> is a concatenation of <code class=
+"literal">\FirstName</code> and <code class=
+"literal">\LastName</code>.</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">AdrFreeIVempty</code>,</span> <span class=
+"term"><code class="literal">AdrFreeIVshow</code>,</span>
+<span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">AdrFreeIVwarn</code>,</span> <span class=
+"term"><code class="literal">AdrFreeIVstop</code></span></dt>
+<dd>Package warning options. Defaults to <code class=
+"literal">AdrFreeIVshow</code>.</dd>
+</dl>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="3.10 mathpazo">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="mathpazo" name="mathpazo"></a>3.10
+<code class="filename">mathpazo</code></h3>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp10196240" class="indexterm" name="idp10196240"></a><a id=
+"idp10197056" class="indexterm" name="idp10197056"></a>
+<p>Math fonts for the use with the Palatino font.</p>
+<div class="section" title="3.10.1 \upDelta / \upOmega">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="upDelta-upOmega" name=
+"upDelta-upOmega"></a>3.10.1 \upDelta / \upOmega</h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp10200624" class="indexterm" name="idp10200624"></a><a id=
+"idp10201440" class="indexterm" name="idp10201440"></a>
+<p>Math fonts for the use with the Palatino font.</p>
+<p>Package options are:</p>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">[slantedGreek]</code></span></dt>
+<dd>
+<p>Uppercase Greek will be typeset slanted.</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">[noBBpl]</code></span></dt>
+<dd>
+<p>Do not use PazoMathBlackboardBold as (partial) blackboard bold
+font (e.g with <code class="literal">\mathbb{R}</code>).</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">[osf]</code></span></dt>
+<dd>
+<p>Make the font family <code class="literal">pplj</code> (Palatino
+with old style numerals) the default roman font, and use an
+alternative version of the virtual math italic fonts (<code class=
+"literal">zplmrj7m</code> and <code class=
+"literal">zplmbj7m</code>) with upright Palatino old style numerals
+for use with the <code class="literal">\oldstylenums</code>
+command.</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">[osfeqnnum]</code></span></dt>
+<dd>
+<p>Use old style numerals for equation numbering.</p>
+</dd>
+</dl>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="3.11 varioref">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="varioref" name="varioref"></a>3.11
+<code class="filename">varioref</code></h3>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp10217888" class="indexterm" name="idp10217888"></a><a id=
+"idp10218704" class="indexterm" name="idp10218704"></a>
+<p>Smarter version of the original latex2e <a class="link" href=
+"#cross-references" title="2.3.2 Cross References">cross reference
+commands</a>. Generated strings are customizable, Babel options are
+recognized (further info in the package documentation).</p>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="term"><a id="cmd-vref" name=
+"cmd-vref"></a><code class="literal">\vref</code>,</span>
+<span class="term"><a id="cmd-vpageref" name=
+"cmd-vpageref"></a><code class=
+"literal">\vpageref</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp10225120" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp10225120"></a><a id="idp10226192" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp10226192"></a>
+<p><code class="literal">\vref</code> is similar to <code class=
+"literal">\ref</code> but adds an additional page reference, like
+<span class="emphasis"><em>on the facing page</em></span> or
+<span class="emphasis"><em>on page 27</em></span> whenever the
+corresponding <a class="link" href="#cmd-label-title" title=
+"2.3.2.&nbsp;\label{key}"><code class="filename">\label</code></a>
+is not on the same page.</p>
+<p><code class="literal">\vpageref</code> is a variation of
+<code class="literal">\pageref</code> with similar
+functionality.</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\vrefrange</code>,</span> <span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\vpagerefrange</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp10235552" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp10235552"></a><a id="idp10236624" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp10236624"></a>
+<p>The <code class="literal">\v...range</code> commands take two
+labels as arguments and produce strings which depend on wether or
+not these labels fall onto a single page or on different pages.</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class="literal">\vref*</code>,</span>
+<span class="term"><code class="literal">\vpageref*</code>,</span>
+<span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\vpagerefrange*</code></span></dt>
+<dd>
+<p>Star * variants do not add any space before the generated text
+for situations like:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+(\vref{foo} ...)
+</pre></dd>
+</dl>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="3.12 Several Small Packages">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="small-packages" name=
+"small-packages"></a>3.12 Several Small Packages</h3>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp10245536" class="indexterm" name="idp10245536"></a><a id=
+"idp10246352" class="indexterm" name="idp10246352"></a><a id=
+"idp10247168" class="indexterm" name="idp10247168"></a>
+<p>Must be loaded with the usual <a class="link" href=
+"#usepackage-linkend"><code class="literal">\usepackage</code></a>
+command. Further info for a package to be found in the
+documentation (dvi, pdf, ps) or in the <code class=
+"literal">sty</code>-file itself.</p>
+<div class="section" title="3.12.1 bm">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="bm-package" name="bm-package"></a>3.12.1
+<code class="filename">bm</code></h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp10253488" class="indexterm" name="idp10253488"></a><a id=
+"idp10254528" class="indexterm" name="idp10254528"></a><a id=
+"idp10255984" class="indexterm" name="idp10255984"></a>
+<p>Bold math symbols or equations with better spacing then the
+<code class="literal">\boldsymbold</code> command. <a id=
+"idp10258528" class="indexterm" name="idp10258528"></a> If possible
+load after other packages which redefine the fonts. When no bold
+font is available for a certain char <code class=
+"literal">bm</code> will use <span class="emphasis"><em>poor man's
+bold</em></span> <a class="link" href="#pmb-linkend"><code class=
+"literal">\pmb</code></a>.</p>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="term"><a id="cmd-bm" name=
+"cmd-bm"></a><code class="literal">\bm</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp10264528" class="indexterm" name="idp10264528"></a>
+<p>Produces bold math symbol or equation.</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\unboldmath</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp10267584" class="indexterm" name="idp10267584"></a>
+<p>Can be used to set parts of an equation unbold.</p>
+</dd>
+</dl>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="3.12.2 url">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="url-package" name="url-package"></a>3.12.2
+<code class="filename">url</code></h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp10272016" class="indexterm" name="idp10272016"></a><a id=
+"idp10273056" class="indexterm" name="idp10273056"></a>
+<p>Defines line breakable hyperlinked (uses <a class="link" href=
+"#hyperref" title="3.7 hyperref">hyperref</a> package) verbatim
+input for urls and e-mail addresses.</p>
+<p>Example: <code class="literal">\url{http://example.org}</code>
+outputs <code class="literal">http://example.org</code>.</p>
+<p>Related commands are <a class="link" href="#href"><code class=
+"literal">\href</code></a> and <a class="link" href=
+"#cmd-nolinkurl"><code class="literal">\nolinkurl</code></a>.</p>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="4 Generic Packages">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h2 class="title" style="clear: both"><a id="generic-packages"
+name="generic-packages"></a>4 Generic Packages</h2>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="4.1 PiCTeX (tbd.)">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="pictex" name="pictex"></a>4.1 PiCTeX
+(tbd.)</h3>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp10284000" class="indexterm" name="idp10284000"></a>
+<p>tbd.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="4.2 PSTricks">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="pstricks" name="pstricks"></a>4.2
+PSTricks</h3>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp10287792" class="indexterm" name="idp10287792"></a>
+<div class="section" title="4.2.1 Overview">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="pstricks-ovw" name=
+"pstricks-ovw"></a>4.2.1 Overview</h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<p>The idea behind the PSTricks package of Timothy van Zandt <a id=
+"idp10288208" class="indexterm" name="idp10288208"></a> is to
+provide most of the PostScript language in LaTeX and TeX
+syntax.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="4.2.2 Commands and Parameters">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="pstricks-commands" name=
+"pstricks-commands"></a>4.2.2 Commands and Parameters</h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="4.2.2.1 Color">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="pstricks-color" name=
+"pstricks-color"></a>4.2.2.1 Color</h5>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp10296496" class="indexterm" name="idp10296496"></a><a id=
+"idp10298576" class="indexterm" name="idp10298576"></a><a id=
+"idp10300416" class="indexterm" name="idp10300416"></a><a id=
+"idp10302320" class="indexterm" name="idp10302320"></a>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\newgray{color}{num}</code> ,</span> <span class=
+"term"><code class="literal">\newrgbcolor{color}{num1 num2
+num3}</code> ,</span> <span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\newhsbcolor{color}{num1 num2 num3}</code> ,</span>
+<span class="term"><code class="literal">\newcmykcolor{color}{num1
+num2 num3 num4}</code></span></dt>
+</dl>
+</div>
+<p>Note that these commands are obsolete for LaTeX. Load PSTricks
+with <code class="literal">\usepackage{pstcol}</code> and use the
+standard LaTeX color commands instead.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="4.2.2.2 Setting graphics parameters">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="pstricks-setting" name=
+"pstricks-setting"></a>4.2.2.2 Setting graphics parameters</h5>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\psset{par1=value1,par2=value2,...}</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp10315824" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp10315824"></a></dd>
+</dl>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title=
+"4.2.2.3 Dimensions, coordinates and angles">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="pstricks-dimensions" name=
+"pstricks-dimensions"></a>4.2.2.3 Dimensions, coordinates and
+angles</h5>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\pssetlength{cmd}{dim}</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp10321808" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp10321808"></a></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class="literal">unit=dim, xunit=dim,
+yunit=dim, yunit=dim</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp10325584" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp10325584"></a><a id="idp10327536" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp10327536"></a><a id="idp10329440" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp10329440"></a><a id="idp10331344" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp10331344"></a>
+<p>Default: <code class="literal">1cm</code></p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\degrees[num]</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp10336160" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp10336160"></a></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\radians</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp10339904" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp10339904"></a></dd>
+</dl>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="4.2.2.4 Basic graphics parameters">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="pstricks-basic" name=
+"pstricks-basic"></a>4.2.2.4 Basic graphics parameters</h5>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">linewidth=dim</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp10345760" class="indexterm" name="idp10345760"></a>
+<p>Default: <code class="literal">.8pt</code></p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">linecolor=color</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp10350608" class="indexterm" name="idp10350608"></a>
+<p>Default: <code class="literal">black</code></p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">showpoints=true/false</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp10355456" class="indexterm" name="idp10355456"></a>
+<p>Default: <code class="literal">false</code></p>
+</dd>
+</dl>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="4.2.2.5 Lines and polygons">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="pstricks-lines" name=
+"pstricks-lines"></a>4.2.2.5 Lines and polygons</h5>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">linearc=dim</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp10362448" class="indexterm" name="idp10362448"></a>
+<p>Default: <code class="literal">0pt</code></p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">framearc=num</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp10367152" class="indexterm" name="idp10367152"></a>
+<p>Default: <code class="literal">0</code></p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">cornersize=relative/absolute</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp10371984" class="indexterm" name="idp10371984"></a>
+<p>Default: <code class="literal">relative</code></p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\psline*[par]{arrows}(x0,y0)(x1,y1)...(xn,yn)</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp10376864" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp10376864"></a></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\qline(coor0)(coor1)</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp10380656" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp10380656"></a></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\pspolygon*[par](x0,y0)(x1,y1)(x2,y2)...(xn,yn)</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp10384480" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp10384480"></a></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\psframe*[par](x0,y0)(x1,y1)</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp10388240" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp10388240"></a></dd>
+</dl>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="4.2.2.6 Arcs, circles and ellipses">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="pstricks-arcs" name=
+"pstricks-arcs"></a>4.2.2.6 Arcs, circles and ellipses</h5>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\pscircle*[par](x0,y0){radius}</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp10394160" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp10394160"></a></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\qdisk(coor){radius}</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp10397904" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp10397904"></a></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\pswedge*[par](x0,y0){radius}{angle1}{angle2}</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp10401680" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp10401680"></a></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\psellipse*[par](x0,y0)(x1,y1)</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp10405440" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp10405440"></a></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\psarc*[par]{arrows}(x,y){radius}{angleA}{angleB}</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp10409216" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp10409216"></a></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\psarcn*[par]{arrows}(x,y){radius}{angleA}{angleB}</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp10412992" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp10412992"></a></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class="literal">arcsep=dim,
+arcsepA=dim, arcsepB=dim</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp10416800" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp10416800"></a><a id="idp10418704" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp10418704"></a><a id="idp10420608" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp10420608"></a>
+<p>Default: <code class="literal">0pt</code></p>
+</dd>
+</dl>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="4.2.2.7 Curves">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="pstricks-curves" name=
+"pstricks-curves"></a>4.2.2.7 Curves</h5>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\psbezier*[par]{arrows}(x0,y0)(x1,y1)(x2,y2)(x3,y3)</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp10427600" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp10427600"></a></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\parabola*[par]{arrows}(x0,y0)(x1,y1)</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp10431360" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp10431360"></a></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\pscurve*[par]{arrows}(x1,y1)...(xn,yn)</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp10435120" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp10435120"></a></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\psecurve*[par]{arrows}(x1,y1)...(xn,yn)</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp10438896" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp10438896"></a></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\psccurve*[par]{arrows}(x1,y1)...(xn,yn)</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp10442672" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp10442672"></a></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class="literal">curvature=num1 num2
+num3</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp10446480" class="indexterm" name="idp10446480"></a>
+<p>Default: <code class="literal">1 .1 0</code></p>
+</dd>
+</dl>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="4.2.2.8 Dots">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="pstricks-dots" name=
+"pstricks-dots"></a>4.2.2.8 Dots</h5>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\psdots*[par](x1,y1)(x2,y2)...(xn,yn)</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp10453424" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp10453424"></a></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">dotstyle=style</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp10457168" class="indexterm" name="idp10457168"></a>
+<p class="simpara">Default: <code class="literal">*</code></p>
+<p class="simpara">Dots: <code class="literal">*, o, +, triangle,
+triangle*, square, square*, pentagon, pentagon*, |</code></p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class="literal">dotscale=num1
+num2</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp10463024" class="indexterm" name="idp10463024"></a>
+<p>Default: <code class="literal">1</code></p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">dotangle=angle</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp10467840" class="indexterm" name="idp10467840"></a>
+<p>Default: <code class="literal">0</code></p>
+</dd>
+</dl>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="4.2.2.9 Grids">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="pstricks-grids" name=
+"pstricks-grids"></a>4.2.2.9 Grids</h5>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\psgrid(x0,y0)(x1,y1)(x2,y2)</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp10474768" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp10474768"></a></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">gridwidth=dim</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp10478512" class="indexterm" name="idp10478512"></a>
+<p class="simpara">Default: <code class="literal">.8pt</code></p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">gridcolor=color</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp10483232" class="indexterm" name="idp10483232"></a>
+<p class="simpara">Default: <code class="literal">black</code></p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">griddots=num</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp10487952" class="indexterm" name="idp10487952"></a>
+<p class="simpara">Default: <code class="literal">0</code></p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">gridlabels=dim</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp10492640" class="indexterm" name="idp10492640"></a>
+<p class="simpara">Default: <code class="literal">10pt</code></p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">gridlabelcolor=color</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp10497360" class="indexterm" name="idp10497360"></a>
+<p class="simpara">Default: <code class="literal">black</code></p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">subgriddiv=int</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp10502080" class="indexterm" name="idp10502080"></a>
+<p class="simpara">Default: <code class="literal">5</code></p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">subgridwidth=dim</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp10506768" class="indexterm" name="idp10506768"></a>
+<p class="simpara">Default: <code class="literal">.4pt</code></p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">subgridcolor=color</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp10511488" class="indexterm" name="idp10511488"></a>
+<p class="simpara">Default: <code class="literal">gray</code></p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">subgriddots=num</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp10516208" class="indexterm" name="idp10516208"></a>
+<p class="simpara">Default: <code class="literal">0</code></p>
+</dd>
+</dl>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="4.2.2.10 Plots">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="pstricks-plots" name=
+"pstricks-plots"></a>4.2.2.10 Plots</h5>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\fileplot*[par]{file}</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp10522928" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp10522928"></a></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\dataplot*[par]{commands}</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp10526688" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp10526688"></a></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\savedata{command}[data]</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp10530448" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp10530448"></a></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\readdata{command}{file}</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp10534208" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp10534208"></a></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\listplot*[par]{list}</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp10537952" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp10537952"></a></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\psplot*[par]{xmin}{xmax}{function}</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp10541712" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp10541712"></a></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\parametricplot*[par]{tmin}{tmax}{function}</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp10545488" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp10545488"></a></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">plotstyle=style</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp10549232" class="indexterm" name="idp10549232"></a>
+<p class="simpara">Default: <code class="literal">line</code></p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">plotpoints=int</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp10553952" class="indexterm" name="idp10553952"></a>
+<p class="simpara">Default: <code class="literal">50</code></p>
+</dd>
+</dl>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="4.2.2.11 Coordinate systems">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="pstricks-coordinate" name=
+"pstricks-coordinate"></a>4.2.2.11 Coordinate systems</h5>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">origin={coor}</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp10561008" class="indexterm" name="idp10561008"></a>
+<p class="simpara">Default: <code class=
+"literal">0pt,0pt</code></p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">swapaxes=true</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp10565728" class="indexterm" name="idp10565728"></a>
+<p class="simpara">Default: <code class="literal">false</code></p>
+</dd>
+</dl>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="4.2.2.12 Line styles">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="pstricks-line-styles" name=
+"pstricks-line-styles"></a>4.2.2.12 Line styles</h5>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">linestyle=style</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp10572624" class="indexterm" name="idp10572624"></a>
+<p class="simpara">Default: <code class="literal">solid</code></p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class="literal">dash=dim1
+dim2</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp10577344" class="indexterm" name="idp10577344"></a>
+<p class="simpara">Default: <code class="literal">5pt
+3pt</code></p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">dotsep=dim</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp10582064" class="indexterm" name="idp10582064"></a>
+<p class="simpara">Default: <code class="literal">3pt</code></p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">border=dim</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp10586752" class="indexterm" name="idp10586752"></a>
+<p class="simpara">Default: <code class="literal">0pt</code></p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">bordercolor=color</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp10591440" class="indexterm" name="idp10591440"></a>
+<p class="simpara">Default: <code class="literal">white</code></p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">doubleline=true/false</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp10596160" class="indexterm" name="idp10596160"></a>
+<p class="simpara">Default: <code class="literal">false</code></p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">doublesep=dim</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp10600880" class="indexterm" name="idp10600880"></a>
+<p class="simpara">Default: <code class=
+"literal">1.25\pslinewidth</code></p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">doublecolor=color</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp10605600" class="indexterm" name="idp10605600"></a>
+<p class="simpara">Default: <code class="literal">white</code></p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">shadow=true/false</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp10610320" class="indexterm" name="idp10610320"></a>
+<p class="simpara">Default: <code class="literal">false</code></p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">shadowsize=dim</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp10615040" class="indexterm" name="idp10615040"></a>
+<p class="simpara">Default: <code class="literal">3pt</code></p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">shadowangle=angle</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp10619728" class="indexterm" name="idp10619728"></a>
+<p class="simpara">Default: <code class="literal">-45</code></p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">shadowcolor=color</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp10624416" class="indexterm" name="idp10624416"></a>
+<p class="simpara">Default: <code class=
+"literal">darkgray</code></p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">dimen=outer/inner/middle</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp10629152" class="indexterm" name="idp10629152"></a>
+<p class="simpara">Default: <code class="literal">outer</code></p>
+</dd>
+</dl>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="4.2.2.13 Fill styles">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="pstricks-fill-styles" name=
+"pstricks-fill-styles"></a>4.2.2.13 Fill styles</h5>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">fillstyle=style</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp10636048" class="indexterm" name="idp10636048"></a>
+<p class="simpara">Default: <code class="literal">none</code></p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">fillcolor=color</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp10640768" class="indexterm" name="idp10640768"></a>
+<p class="simpara">Default: <code class="literal">white</code></p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">hatchwidth=dim</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp10645488" class="indexterm" name="idp10645488"></a>
+<p class="simpara">Default: <code class="literal">.8pt</code></p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">hatchsep=dim</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp10650208" class="indexterm" name="idp10650208"></a>
+<p class="simpara">Default: <code class="literal">4pt</code></p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">hatchcolor=color</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp10654944" class="indexterm" name="idp10654944"></a>
+<p class="simpara">Default: <code class="literal">black</code></p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">hatchangle=rot</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp10659664" class="indexterm" name="idp10659664"></a>
+<p class="simpara">Default: <code class="literal">45</code></p>
+</dd>
+</dl>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="4.2.2.14 Arrowheads and such">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="pstricks-arrowheads" name=
+"pstricks-arrowheads"></a>4.2.2.14 Arrowheads and such</h5>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">arrows=style</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp10666624" class="indexterm" name="idp10666624"></a>
+<p class="simpara">Default: <code class="literal">-</code></p>
+<p class="simpara">Arrows: <code class="literal">-, &lt;-&gt;,
+&gt;-&lt;, &lt;&lt;-&gt;&gt;, &gt;&gt;-&lt;&lt;, |-|, |*-|*, [-],
+(-), o-o, *-*, oo-oo, **-**, c-c, cc-cc, C-C</code></p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class="literal">arrowsize=dim
+num</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp10672640" class="indexterm" name="idp10672640"></a>
+<p class="simpara">Default: <code class="literal">2pt 3</code></p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">arrowlength=num</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp10677360" class="indexterm" name="idp10677360"></a>
+<p class="simpara">Default: <code class="literal">1.4</code></p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">arrowinset=num</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp10682048" class="indexterm" name="idp10682048"></a>
+<p class="simpara">Default: <code class="literal">.4</code></p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class="literal">tbarsize=dim
+num</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp10686736" class="indexterm" name="idp10686736"></a>
+<p class="simpara">Default: <code class="literal">2pt 5</code></p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class="literal">bracketlength=num,
+rbracketlength=num</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp10691472" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp10691472"></a><a id="idp10693376" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp10693376"></a>
+<p class="simpara">Default: <code class="literal">.15</code></p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class="literal">dotsize=dim
+num</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp10698112" class="indexterm" name="idp10698112"></a>
+<p class="simpara">Default: <code class="literal">.5pt
+2.5</code></p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class="literal">arrowscale=num1
+num2</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp10702832" class="indexterm" name="idp10702832"></a>
+<p class="simpara">Default: <code class="literal">1</code></p>
+</dd>
+</dl>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="4.2.2.15 Custom styles">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="pstricks-custom" name=
+"pstricks-custom"></a>4.2.2.15 Custom styles</h5>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\newpsobject{name}{object}{par1=value1,...}</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp10709648" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp10709648"></a></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\newpsstyle{name}{par1=value1,...}</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp10713456" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp10713456"></a></dd>
+</dl>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="4.2.2.16 The basics">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="pstricks-basics" name=
+"pstricks-basics"></a>4.2.2.16 The basics</h5>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\pscustom*[par]{commands}</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp10719232" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp10719232"></a></dd>
+</dl>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="4.2.2.17 Parameters">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="pstricks-parameters" name=
+"pstricks-parameters"></a>4.2.2.17 Parameters</h5>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">linetype=int</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp10725200" class="indexterm" name="idp10725200"></a>
+<p class="simpara">Default: <code class="literal">0</code></p>
+</dd>
+</dl>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="4.2.2.18 Graphics objects">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="pstricks-graphics-objects" name=
+"pstricks-graphics-objects"></a>4.2.2.18 Graphics objects</h5>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">liftpen=0/1/2</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp10732144" class="indexterm" name="idp10732144"></a>
+<p class="simpara">Default: <code class="literal">0</code></p>
+</dd>
+</dl>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="4.2.2.19 Safe tricks">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="safe-tricks" name=
+"safe-tricks"></a>4.2.2.19 Safe tricks</h5>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\newpath</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp10738960" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp10738960"></a></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\moveto(coor)</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp10742704" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp10742704"></a></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\closepath</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp10746448" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp10746448"></a></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\stroke[par]</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp10750192" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp10750192"></a></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\fill[par]</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp10753936" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp10753936"></a></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\gsave</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp10757680" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp10757680"></a></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\grestore</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp10761424" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp10761424"></a></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\translate(coor)</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp10765168" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp10765168"></a></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class="literal">\scale{num1
+num2}</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp10768912" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp10768912"></a></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\rotate{angle}</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp10772656" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp10772656"></a></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\swapaxes</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp10776400" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp10776400"></a></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\msave</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp10780144" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp10780144"></a></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\mrestore</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp10783888" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp10783888"></a></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\openshadow[par]</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp10787632" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp10787632"></a></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\closedshadow[par]</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp10791376" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp10791376"></a></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\movepath(coor)</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp10795120" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp10795120"></a></dd>
+</dl>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="4.2.2.20 Pretty safe tricks">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="pretty-safe-tricks" name=
+"pretty-safe-tricks"></a>4.2.2.20 Pretty safe tricks</h5>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\lineto(coor)</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp10800848" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp10800848"></a></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\rlineto(coor)</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp10804592" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp10804592"></a></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\curveto(x1,y1)(x2,y2)(x3,y3)</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp10808352" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp10808352"></a></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\rcurveto(x1,y1)(x2,y2)(x3,y3)</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp10812112" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp10812112"></a></dd>
+</dl>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="4.2.2.21 For hackers only">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="hackers" name="hackers"></a>4.2.2.21 For
+hackers only</h5>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\code{code}</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp10818000" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp10818000"></a></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\dim{dim}</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp10821744" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp10821744"></a></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\coor(x1,y1)(x2,y2)...(xn,yn)</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp10825504" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp10825504"></a></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\rcoor(x1,y1)(x2,y2)...(xn,yn)</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp10829264" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp10829264"></a></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\file{file}</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp10833008" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp10833008"></a></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\arrows{arrows}</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp10836752" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp10836752"></a></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\setcolor{color}</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp10840496" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp10840496"></a></dd>
+</dl>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="4.2.2.22 Pictures">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="pictures" name="pictures"></a>4.2.2.22
+Pictures</h5>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\pspicture*[baseline](x0,y0)(x1,y1)</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp10846400" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp10846400"></a></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\endpspicture</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp10850144" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp10850144"></a></dd>
+</dl>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title=
+"4.2.2.23 Placing and rotating whatever">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="placing" name="placing"></a>4.2.2.23
+Placing and rotating whatever</h5>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\rput*[refpoint]{rotation}(x,y){stuff}</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp10856016" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp10856016"></a></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\uput*{labelsep}[refangle]{rotation}(x,y){stuff}</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp10859792" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp10859792"></a></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\pslabelsep</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp10863536" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp10863536"></a></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">labelsep=dim</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp10867280" class="indexterm" name="idp10867280"></a>
+<p>Default: <code class="literal">5pt</code></p>
+</dd>
+</dl>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="4.2.2.24 Repetition">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="pstricks-repetition" name=
+"pstricks-repetition"></a>4.2.2.24 Repetition</h5>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\multirput*[refpoint]{angle}(x0,y0)(x1,y1){int}{stuff}</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp10874352" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp10874352"></a></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\multips{angle}(x0,y0)(x1,y1){int}{graphics}</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp10878128" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp10878128"></a></dd>
+</dl>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="4.2.2.25 Axes">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="pstricks-axes" name=
+"pstricks-axes"></a>4.2.2.25 Axes</h5>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp10882176" class="indexterm" name="idp10882176"></a>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\psaxes*[par]{arrows}(x0,y0)(x1,y1)(x2,y2)</code></span></dt>
+<dd>
+<div class="informaltable">
+<table border="0">
+<colgroup>
+<col align="left" />
+<col align="left" />
+<col align="left" />
+<col align="justify" /></colgroup>
+<tbody>
+<tr>
+<td align="left"><span class=
+"emphasis"><em>Horizontal</em></span></td>
+<td align="left"><span class=
+"emphasis"><em>Vertical</em></span></td>
+<td align="left"><span class="emphasis"><em>Dflt</em></span></td>
+<td align="justify"><span class=
+"emphasis"><em>Description</em></span></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">Ox=num</td>
+<td align="left">Oy=num</td>
+<td align="left">0</td>
+<td align="justify">Label at origin.</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">Dx=num</td>
+<td align="left">Dy=num</td>
+<td align="left">1</td>
+<td align="justify">Label increment.</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">dx=dim</td>
+<td align="left">oy=dim</td>
+<td align="left">0pt</td>
+<td align="justify">Dist btwn labels.</td>
+</tr>
+</tbody>
+</table>
+</div>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">labels=all/x/y/none</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp10902272" class="indexterm" name="idp10902272"></a>
+<p>Default: <code class="literal">all</code></p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">showorigin=true/false</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp10907184" class="indexterm" name="idp10907184"></a>
+<p>Default: <code class="literal">true</code></p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">ticks=all/x/y/none</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp10912032" class="indexterm" name="idp10912032"></a>
+<p>Default: <code class="literal">all</code></p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">tickstyle=full/top/bottom</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp10916864" class="indexterm" name="idp10916864"></a>
+<p>Default: <code class="literal">full</code></p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">ticksize=dim</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp10921760" class="indexterm" name="idp10921760"></a>
+<p>Default: <code class="literal">3pt</code></p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class="literal">\psxlabel,
+\psylabel</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp10926624" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp10926624"></a><a id="idp10928528" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp10928528"></a></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">axesstyle=axes/frame/none</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp10932336" class="indexterm" name="idp10932336"></a>
+<p>Default: <code class="literal">axes</code></p>
+</dd>
+</dl>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="4.2.2.26 Framed boxes">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="pstricks-framed" name=
+"pstricks-framed"></a>4.2.2.26 Framed boxes</h5>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">framesep=dim</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp10939376" class="indexterm" name="idp10939376"></a>
+<p>Default: <code class="literal">3pt</code></p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">boxsep=true/false</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp10944192" class="indexterm" name="idp10944192"></a>
+<p>Default: <code class="literal">true</code></p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\psframebox*[par]{stuff}</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp10949104" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp10949104"></a></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\psdblframebox*[par]{stuff}</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp10952912" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp10952912"></a></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\psshadowbox*[par]{stuff}</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp10956672" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp10956672"></a></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\pscirclebox*[par]{stuff}</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp10960432" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp10960432"></a></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\cput*[par]{angle}(x,y){stuff}</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp10964192" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp10964192"></a></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\psovalbox*[par]{stuff}</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp10967984" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp10967984"></a></dd>
+</dl>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="4.2.2.27 Clipping">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="pstricks-clipping" name=
+"pstricks-clipping"></a>4.2.2.27 Clipping</h5>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\clipbox[dim]{stuff}</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp10973760" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp10973760"></a></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class="literal">\psclip{graphics} ...
+\endpsclip</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp10977520" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp10977520"></a></dd>
+</dl>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="4.2.2.28 Rotation and scaling boxes">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="pstricks-rotation" name=
+"pstricks-rotation"></a>4.2.2.28 Rotation and scaling boxes</h5>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\rotateleft{stuff}</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp10983360" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp10983360"></a></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\rotateright{stuff}</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp10987104" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp10987104"></a></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\rotatedown{stuff}</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp10990848" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp10990848"></a></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class="literal">\scalebox{num1
+num2}{stuff}</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp10994656" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp10994656"></a></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\scaleboxto(x,y){stuff}</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp10998400" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp10998400"></a></dd>
+</dl>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="4.2.2.29 Nodes">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="pstricks-nodes" name=
+"pstricks-nodes"></a>4.2.2.29 Nodes</h5>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\rnode[refpoint]{name}{stuff}</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp11004144" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp11004144"></a></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\Rnode(x,y){name}{stuff}</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp11007904" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp11007904"></a></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\RnodeRef</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp11011648" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp11011648"></a></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\pnode(x,y){name}</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp11015392" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp11015392"></a></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\cnode*[par](x,y){radius}{name}</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp11019152" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp11019152"></a></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\circlenode*[par]{name}{stuff}</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp11022912" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp11022912"></a></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\cnodeput*[par]{angle}(x,y){name}{stuff}</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp11026688" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp11026688"></a></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\ovalnode*[par]{name}{stuff}</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp11030448" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp11030448"></a></dd>
+</dl>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="4.2.2.30 Node connections">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="pstricks-connections" name=
+"pstricks-connections"></a>4.2.2.30 Node connections</h5>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">nodesep=dim</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp11036352" class="indexterm" name="idp11036352"></a>
+<p>Default: <code class="literal">0</code></p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">offset=dim</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp11041216" class="indexterm" name="idp11041216"></a>
+<p>Default: <code class="literal">0</code></p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">arm=dim</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp11046032" class="indexterm" name="idp11046032"></a>
+<p>Default: <code class="literal">10pt</code></p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">angle=angle</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp11050848" class="indexterm" name="idp11050848"></a>
+<p>Default: <code class="literal">0</code></p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">arcangle=angle</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp11055712" class="indexterm" name="idp11055712"></a>
+<p>Default: <code class="literal">8</code></p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">ncurv=num</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp11060528" class="indexterm" name="idp11060528"></a>
+<p>Default: <code class="literal">.67</code></p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">loopsize=dim</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp11065440" class="indexterm" name="idp11065440"></a>
+<p>Default: <code class="literal">1cm</code></p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\ncline*[par]{arrows}{nodeA}{nodeB}</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp11070272" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp11070272"></a></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\ncLine*[par]{arrows}{nodeA}{nodeB}</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp11074032" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp11074032"></a></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\nccurve*[par]{arrows}{nodeA}{nodeB}</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp11077792" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp11077792"></a></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\ncarc*[par]{arrows}{nodeA}{nodeB}</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp11081552" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp11081552"></a></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\ncbar*[par]{arrows}{nodeA}{nodeB}</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp11085312" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp11085312"></a></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\ncdiag*[par]{arrows}{nodeA}{nodeB}</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp11089120" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp11089120"></a></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\ncdiagg*[par]{arrows}{nodeA}{nodeB}</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp11092880" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp11092880"></a></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\ncangle*[par]{arrows}{nodeA}{nodeB}</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp11096640" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp11096640"></a></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\ncangles*[par]{arrows}{nodeA}{nodeB}</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp11100400" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp11100400"></a></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\ncloop*[par]{arrows}{nodeA}{nodeB}</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp11104160" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp11104160"></a></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\nccircle*[par]{arrows}{node}{radius}</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp11107920" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp11107920"></a></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\pcline*[par]{arrows}(x1,y1)(x2,y2)</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp11111728" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp11111728"></a></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\pccurve*[par]{arrows}(x1,y1)(x2,y2)</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp11115488" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp11115488"></a></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\pcarc*[par]{arrows}(x1,y1)(x2,y2)</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp11119248" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp11119248"></a></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\pcbar*[par]{arrows}(x1,y1)(x2,y2)</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp11123008" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp11123008"></a></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\pcdiag*[par]{arrows}(x1,y1)(x2,y2)</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp11126768" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp11126768"></a></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\pcangle*[par]{arrows}(x1,y1)(x2,y2)</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp11130528" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp11130528"></a></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\pcloop*[par]{arrows}(x1,y1)(x2,y2)</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp11134288" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp11134288"></a></dd>
+</dl>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title=
+"4.2.2.31 Attaching labels to node connections">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="pstricks-attaching" name=
+"pstricks-attaching"></a>4.2.2.31 Attaching labels to node
+connections</h5>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\lput*[refpoint]{rotation}(pos){stuff}</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp11140336" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp11140336"></a></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\aput*[labelsep]{angle}(pos){stuff}</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp11144096" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp11144096"></a></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\bput*[labelsep]{angle}(pos){stuff}</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp11147856" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp11147856"></a></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\mput*[refpoint]{stuff}</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp11151600" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp11151600"></a></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\Aput*[labelsep]{stuff}</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp11155344" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp11155344"></a></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\Bput*[labelsep]{stuff}</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp11159088" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp11159088"></a></dd>
+</dl>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="4.2.2.32 Coils and zigzags">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="pstricks-coils" name=
+"pstricks-coils"></a>4.2.2.32 Coils and zigzags</h5>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\pscoil*[par]{arrows}(x0,y0)(x1,y1)</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp11164944" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp11164944"></a></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\psCoil*[par]{angle1}{angle2}</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp11168704" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp11168704"></a></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\pszigzag*[par]{arrows}(x0,y0)(x1,y1)</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp11172464" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp11172464"></a></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">coilwidth=dim</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp11176208" class="indexterm" name="idp11176208"></a>
+<p>Default: <code class="literal">1cm</code></p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">coilheight=num</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp11181024" class="indexterm" name="idp11181024"></a>
+<p>Default: <code class="literal">1</code></p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">coilarm=dim</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp11185840" class="indexterm" name="idp11185840"></a>
+<p>Default: <code class="literal">.5cm</code></p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">coilaspect=angle</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp11190736" class="indexterm" name="idp11190736"></a>
+<p>Default: <code class="literal">45</code></p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">coilinc=angle</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp11195552" class="indexterm" name="idp11195552"></a>
+<p>Default: <code class="literal">10</code></p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\nccoil*[par]{arrows}{nodeA}{nodeB}</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp11200432" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp11200432"></a></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\nczigzag*[par]{arrows}{nodeA}{nodeB}</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp11204192" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp11204192"></a></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\pccoil*[par]{arrows}(x1,y1)(x2,y2)</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp11208000" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp11208000"></a></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\pczigzag*[par]{arrows}(x1,y1)(x2,y2)</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp11211760" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp11211760"></a></dd>
+</dl>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="4.2.2.33 Special coordinates">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="pstricks-coordinates" name=
+"pstricks-coordinates"></a>4.2.2.33 Special coordinates</h5>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<p><code class="literal">\SpecialCoor</code></p>
+<a id="idp11216848" class="indexterm" name="idp11216848"></a>
+<div class="table"><a id="table-special-coordinates" name=
+"table-special-coordinates"></a>
+<p class="title"><strong>Table&nbsp;1.12.&nbsp;Special coordinates
+and angles</strong></p>
+<div class="table-contents">
+<table summary="Special coordinates and angles" border="0">
+<colgroup>
+<col align="left" />
+<col align="left" />
+<col align="justify" /></colgroup>
+<tbody>
+<tr>
+<td align="left"><span class=
+"emphasis"><em>Coordinate</em></span></td>
+<td align="left"><span class=
+"emphasis"><em>Example</em></span></td>
+<td align="justify"><span class=
+"emphasis"><em>Description</em></span></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">(x,y)</td>
+<td align="left">(3,4)</td>
+<td align="justify">Cartesian coordinate.</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">(r;a)</td>
+<td align="left">(3;110)</td>
+<td align="justify">Polar coordinate.</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">(node)</td>
+<td align="left">(A)</td>
+<td align="justify">Center of node.</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">([par]node)</td>
+<td align="left">([angle=45]A)</td>
+<td align="justify">Relative to node.</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">(!ps)</td>
+<td align="left">(!5 3.3 2 exp)</td>
+<td align="justify">Raw PostScript.</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">(coor1|coor2)</td>
+<td align="left">(A|1in;30)</td>
+<td align="justify">Combination.</td>
+</tr>
+</tbody>
+</table>
+<table summary="Special coordinates and angles" border="0">
+<colgroup>
+<col align="left" />
+<col align="left" />
+<col align="justify" /></colgroup>
+<tbody>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">&nbsp;</td>
+<td class="auto-generated">&nbsp;</td>
+<td class="auto-generated">&nbsp;</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left"><span class="emphasis"><em>Angle</em></span></td>
+<td align="left"><span class=
+"emphasis"><em>Example</em></span></td>
+<td align="justify"><span class=
+"emphasis"><em>Description</em></span></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">num</td>
+<td align="left">45</td>
+<td align="justify">Angle.</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">(coor)</td>
+<td align="left">(-1,1)</td>
+<td align="justify">Coordinate (vector).</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">!ps</td>
+<td align="left">!33 sqrt</td>
+<td align="justify">Raw PostScript.</td>
+</tr>
+</tbody>
+</table>
+</div>
+</div>
+<br class="table-break" />
+<p><code class="literal">\NormalCoor</code></p>
+<a id="idp11251264" class="indexterm" name="idp11251264"></a></div>
+<div class="section" title="4.2.2.34 Overlays">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="pstricks-overlays" name=
+"pstricks-overlays"></a>4.2.2.34 Overlays</h5>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class="literal">\overlaybox
+stuff\endoverlaybox</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp11256768" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp11256768"></a></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\psoverlay{string}</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp11260512" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp11260512"></a></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\putoverlaybox{string}</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp11264304" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp11264304"></a></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">gradbegin=color</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp11268048" class="indexterm" name="idp11268048"></a>
+<p>Default: <code class="literal">gradbegin</code></p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">gradend=color</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp11272896" class="indexterm" name="idp11272896"></a>
+<p>Default: <code class="literal">gradend</code></p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">gradlines=int</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp11277744" class="indexterm" name="idp11277744"></a>
+<p>Default: <code class="literal">500</code></p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">gradmidpoint=num</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp11282608" class="indexterm" name="idp11282608"></a>
+<p>Default: <code class="literal">.9</code></p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">gradangle=angle</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp11287472" class="indexterm" name="idp11287472"></a>
+<p>Default: <code class="literal">0</code></p>
+</dd>
+</dl>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title=
+"4.2.2.35 Typesetting text along a path">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="pstricks-path" name=
+"pstricks-path"></a>4.2.2.35 Typesetting text along a path</h5>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\pstextpath[pos](x,y){graphics
+object}{text}</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp11294528" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp11294528"></a></dd>
+</dl>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title=
+"4.2.2.36 Stroking and filling character paths">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="pstricks-stroking" name=
+"pstricks-stroking"></a>4.2.2.36 Stroking and filling character
+paths</h5>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\pscharpath*[par]{text}</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp11300480" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp11300480"></a></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\pscharclip*[par]{text} ...
+\endpscharclip</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp11304304" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp11304304"></a></dd>
+</dl>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="4.2.2.37 Exporting EPS files">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="pstricks-exporting" name=
+"pstricks-exporting"></a>4.2.2.37 Exporting EPS files</h5>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class="literal">\TeXtoEPS ...
+\endTeXtoEPS</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp11310240" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp11310240"></a></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\PSTtoEPS[par]{file}{graphics objects}</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp11314000" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp11314000"></a></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">bbllx=dim</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp11317744" class="indexterm" name="idp11317744"></a>
+<p>Default: <code class="literal">-1pt</code></p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">bblly=dim</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp11322592" class="indexterm" name="idp11322592"></a>
+<p>Default: <code class="literal">-1pt</code></p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">bburx=dim</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp11327440" class="indexterm" name="idp11327440"></a>
+<p>Default: <code class="literal">1pt</code></p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">bbury=dim</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp11332304" class="indexterm" name="idp11332304"></a>
+<p>Default: <code class="literal">1pt</code></p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">headerfile=file</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp11337120" class="indexterm" name="idp11337120"></a>
+<p>Default: <code class="literal">s</code></p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">headers=none/all/user</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp11341936" class="indexterm" name="idp11341936"></a>
+<p>Default: <code class="literal">none</code></p>
+</dd>
+</dl>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="4.2.2.38 Boxes">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="pstricks-boxes" name=
+"pstricks-boxes"></a>4.2.2.38 Boxes</h5>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class="literal">\psmathboxtrue,
+\psmathboxfalse</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp11348944" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp11348944"></a><a id="idp11350848" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp11350848"></a></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\everypsbox{commands}</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp11354592" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp11354592"></a></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">\pslongbox{name}{cmd}</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp11358336" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp11358336"></a></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class="literal">\psverbboxtrue,
+\psverbboxfalse</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp11362096" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp11362096"></a><a id="idp11364000" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp11364000"></a></dd>
+</dl>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="4.2.2.39 Tips and More Tricks">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="pstricks-tricks" name=
+"pstricks-tricks"></a>4.2.2.39 Tips and More Tricks</h5>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class="literal">\pslbrace,
+\psrbrace</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp11369824" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp11369824"></a><a id="idp11371728" class="indexterm" name=
+"idp11371728"></a></dd>
+</dl>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title=
+"4.2.3 List of Additional PSTricks Packages">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="pstricks-add-packages" name=
+"pstricks-add-packages"></a>4.2.3 List of Additional PSTricks
+Packages</h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="term"><a class="ulink" href=
+"ftp://ftp.dante.de/pub/tex/graphics/pstricks/contrib/psgo/"
+target="_top"><code class="literal">psgo</code></a></span></dt>
+<dd>Draw Go diagrams</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><a class="ulink" href=
+"ftp://ftp.dante.de/pub/tex/graphics/pstricks/contrib/pst-blur/"
+target="_top"><code class="literal">pst-blur</code></a></span></dt>
+<dd>PSTricks package for "blurred" shadows</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><a class="ulink" href=
+"http://dominique.rodriguez.9online.fr/pst-eucl/" target=
+"_top"><code class="literal">pst-euc</code></a></span></dt>
+<dd>G&eacute;om&eacute;trie en LaTeX et PSTricks</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><a class="ulink" href=
+"http://www.tug.org/applications/PSTricks/More/pst-fr3d.tar.gz"
+target="_top"><code class="literal">pst-fr3d</code></a></span></dt>
+<dd>Three dimensional framed Boxes</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><a class="ulink" href=
+"ftp://ftp.dante.de/pub/tex/graphics/pstricks/contrib/pst-ghsb/"
+target="_top"><code class="literal">pst-ghsb</code></a></span></dt>
+<dd>PSTricks package for HSB Gradients</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><a class="ulink" href=
+"ftp://ftp.dante.de/pub/tex/graphics/pstricks/contrib/pst-gr3d/"
+target="_top"><code class="literal">pst-gr3d</code></a></span></dt>
+<dd>PSTricks package for 3D grids</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><a class="ulink" href=
+"http://members.aol.com/ManuelLuque2/optique.htm" target=
+"_top"><code class="literal">pst-lens</code></a></span></dt>
+<dd>Optique g&eacute;om&eacute;trique</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><a class="ulink" href=
+"ftp://ftp.dante.de/tex-archive/graphics/pstricks/generic/" target=
+"_top"><code class="literal">pst-node</code></a></span></dt>
+<dd>PSTricks package for nodes</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><a class="ulink" href=
+"http://members.aol.com/Mluque5130/pst-ob3d.tar.gz" target=
+"_top"><code class="literal">pst-ob3d</code></a></span></dt>
+<dd>A PSTricks package for three dimensional basic objects</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><a class="ulink" href=
+"http://www.tug.org/applications/PSTricks/Physics/Oscilloscopes/"
+target="_top"><code class="literal">pst-osci</code></a></span></dt>
+<dd>Oscilloscopes with PSTricks</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><a class="ulink" href=
+"ftp://ftp.dante.de/pub/tex/graphics/pstricks/contrib/pst-poly/"
+target="_top"><code class="literal">pst-poly</code></a></span></dt>
+<dd>Polygons with PSTricks</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><a class="ulink" href=
+"ftp://ftp.dante.de/tex-archive/graphics/pstricks/generic/" target=
+"_top"><code class="literal">pst-tree</code></a></span></dt>
+<dd>PSTricks package for trees</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><a class="ulink" href=
+"http://www.ensta.fr/~diam/latex/pst-uml/" target=
+"_top"><code class="literal">pst-uml</code></a></span></dt>
+<dd>Draw easily diagrams with UML notation</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><a class="ulink" href=
+"http://perso.enst.fr/~lombardy/Vauc/" target="_top"><code class=
+"literal">vaucansom.sty</code></a></span></dt>
+<dd>Drawing automata</dd>
+</dl>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="5 fontinst (tbd.)">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h2 class="title" style="clear: both"><a id="fontinst" name=
+"fontinst"></a>5 <code class="filename">fontinst</code> (tbd.)</h2>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp11414640" class="indexterm" name="idp11414640"></a>
+<p>tbd.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="6 ConTeXt (tbd.)">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h2 class="title" style="clear: both"><a id="context" name=
+"context"></a>6 ConTeXt (tbd.)</h2>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp11417680" class="indexterm" name="idp11417680"></a><a id=
+"idp11418688" class="indexterm" name="idp11418688"></a>
+<div class="section" title="6.1 Overview">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="context-ovw" name="context-ovw"></a>6.1
+Overview</h3>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<p>ConTeXt is based on PlainTeX and MetaPost and gets controlled
+with some Perl scripts. It's mainly targeted towards layout
+oriented users and especially useful for presentations. It's
+extensible by the use of modules and has in it's base distribution
+already a large amount of functionality. The preferred output
+format is PDF, but DVI is possible too.</p>
+<p>Some of the unique features of ConTeXt are:</p>
+<div class="itemizedlist">
+<ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc" compact="compact">
+<li class="listitem">Inline XML (including MathML, ChemML, and
+PhysML)</li>
+<li class="listitem">really good XML support in general</li>
+<li class="listitem">inline MetaPost</li>
+</ul>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="7 Texinfo (tbd.)">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h2 class="title" style="clear: both"><a id="texinfo" name=
+"texinfo"></a>7 Texinfo (tbd.)</h2>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp11428560" class="indexterm" name="idp11428560"></a>
+<p>tbd.</p>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div xml:lang="en" class="chapter" title=
+"Chapter&nbsp;2.&nbsp;pdfTeX" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h2 class="title"><a id="pdftex" name=
+"pdftex"></a>Chapter&nbsp;2.&nbsp;pdfTeX</h2>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="toc">
+<p><strong>Table of Contents</strong></p>
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#pdftex-options">1
+Options</a></span></dt>
+<dd>
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href=
+"#pdftex-option-file-line-error-style">1.1 <code class=
+"filename">--file-line-error-style</code></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#pdftex-option-fmt">1.2
+<code class="filename">--fmt format</code></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#pdftex-option-help">1.3
+<code class="filename">--help</code></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#pdftex-option-ini">1.4
+<code class="filename">--ini</code></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href=
+"#pdftex-option-interaction-mode">1.5 <code class=
+"filename">--interaction mode</code></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#pdftex-option-ipc">1.6
+<code class="filename">--ipc</code></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#pdftex-option-ipc-start">1.7
+<code class="filename">--ipc-start</code></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#pdftex-option-jobname-name">1.8
+<code class="filename">--jobname name</code></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href=
+"#pdftex-option-kpathsea-debug">1.9 <code class=
+"filename">--kpathsea-debug bitmask</code></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#pdftex-option-maketex">1.10
+<code class="filename">--maketex fmt</code></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#pdftex-option-no-maketex">1.11
+<code class="filename">--no-maketex fmt</code></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href=
+"#pdftex-option-output-comment">1.12 <code class=
+"filename">--output-comment string</code></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href=
+"#pdftex-option-parse-first-line">1.13 <code class=
+"filename">--parse-first-line</code></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#pdftex-option-progname">1.14
+<code class="filename">--progname name</code></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#pdftex-option-recorder">1.15
+<code class="filename">--recorder</code></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href=
+"#pdftex-option-shell-escape">1.16 <code class=
+"filename">--shell-escape</code></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href=
+"#pdftex-option-translate-file">1.17 <code class=
+"filename">--translate-file tcxname</code></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#pdftex-option-version">1.18
+<code class="filename">--version</code></a></span></dt>
+</dl>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#pdftex-environment">2
+Environment</a></span></dt>
+</dl>
+</div>
+<a id="idp11432784" class="indexterm" name="idp11432784"></a>
+<div class="note" title="Note" style=
+"margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;">
+<h3 class="title">Note</h3>
+<p>The contents of this section was taken from <code class=
+"filename">pdftex(1)</code>.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="1 Options">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h2 class="title" style="clear: both"><a id="pdftex-options" name=
+"pdftex-options"></a>1 Options</h2>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp11436624" class="indexterm" name="idp11436624"></a>
+<p>pdfTeX understands the following command line options.</p>
+<div class="section" title="1.1 --file-line-error-style">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="pdftex-option-file-line-error-style" name=
+"pdftex-option-file-line-error-style"></a>1.1 <code class=
+"filename">--file-line-error-style</code></h3>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp11440816" class="indexterm" name="idp11440816"></a>
+<p>Print error messages in the form <code class=
+"literal">file:line:error</code> which is similar to the way many
+compilers format them.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="1.2 --fmt format">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="pdftex-option-fmt" name=
+"pdftex-option-fmt"></a>1.2 <code class="filename">--fmt
+format</code></h3>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp11445776" class="indexterm" name="idp11445776"></a>
+<p>Use <code class="literal">format</code> as the name of the
+format to be used, instead of the name by which pdfTeX was called
+or a <code class="literal">%&amp;</code> line.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="1.3 --help">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="pdftex-option-help" name=
+"pdftex-option-help"></a>1.3 <code class=
+"filename">--help</code></h3>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp11452096" class="indexterm" name="idp11452096"></a>
+<p>Print help message and exit.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="1.4 --ini">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="pdftex-option-ini" name=
+"pdftex-option-ini"></a>1.4 <code class=
+"filename">--ini</code></h3>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp11456384" class="indexterm" name="idp11456384"></a>
+<p>Be <span class="command"><strong>pdfinitex</strong></span>, for
+dumping formats; this is implicitly true if the program is called
+as <span class="command"><strong>pdfinitex</strong></span>.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="1.5 --interaction mode">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="pdftex-option-interaction-mode" name=
+"pdftex-option-interaction-mode"></a>1.5 <code class=
+"filename">--interaction mode</code></h3>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp11462112" class="indexterm" name="idp11462112"></a>
+<p>Sets the interaction mode. The mode can be one of <code class=
+"literal">batchmode</code>, <code class=
+"literal">nonstopmode</code>, <code class=
+"literal">scrollmode</code>, and <code class=
+"literal">errorstopmode</code>. The meaning of these modes is the
+same as that of the corresponding <code class=
+"literal">\commands</code>.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="1.6 --ipc">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="pdftex-option-ipc" name=
+"pdftex-option-ipc"></a>1.6 <code class=
+"filename">--ipc</code></h3>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp11469856" class="indexterm" name="idp11469856"></a>
+<p>Send DVI or PDF output to a socket as well as the usual output
+file. Whether this option is available is the choice of the
+installer.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="1.7 --ipc-start">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="pdftex-option-ipc-start" name=
+"pdftex-option-ipc-start"></a>1.7 <code class=
+"filename">--ipc-start</code></h3>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp11474208" class="indexterm" name="idp11474208"></a>
+<p>As <code class="literal">--ipc</code>, and starts the server at
+the other end as well. Whether this option is available is the
+choice of the installer.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="1.8 --jobname name">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="pdftex-option-jobname-name" name=
+"pdftex-option-jobname-name"></a>1.8 <code class=
+"filename">--jobname name</code></h3>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp11479360" class="indexterm" name="idp11479360"></a>
+<p>Use <code class="literal">name</code> for the job name, instead
+of deriving it from the name of the input file.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="1.9 --kpathsea-debug bitmask">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="pdftex-option-kpathsea-debug" name=
+"pdftex-option-kpathsea-debug"></a>1.9 <code class=
+"filename">--kpathsea-debug bitmask</code></h3>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp11484304" class="indexterm" name="idp11484304"></a>
+<p>Sets path searching debugging flags according to the
+<code class="literal">bitmask</code>. See the Kpathsea manual for
+details.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="1.10 --maketex fmt">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="pdftex-option-maketex" name=
+"pdftex-option-maketex"></a>1.10 <code class="filename">--maketex
+fmt</code></h3>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp11489376" class="indexterm" name="idp11489376"></a>
+<p>Enable <span class="command"><strong>mktexfmt</strong></span>,
+where <code class="literal">fmt</code> must be one of <code class=
+"literal">tex</code> or <code class="literal">tfm</code>.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="1.11 --no-maketex fmt">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="pdftex-option-no-maketex" name=
+"pdftex-option-no-maketex"></a>1.11 <code class=
+"filename">--no-maketex fmt</code></h3>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp11496608" class="indexterm" name="idp11496608"></a>
+<p>Disable <span class="command"><strong>mktexfmt</strong></span>,
+where <code class="literal">fmt</code> must be one of <code class=
+"literal">tex</code> or <code class="literal">tfm</code>.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="1.12 --output-comment string">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="pdftex-option-output-comment" name=
+"pdftex-option-output-comment"></a>1.12 <code class=
+"filename">--output-comment string</code></h3>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp11503648" class="indexterm" name="idp11503648"></a>
+<p>Use <code class="literal">string</code> for the DVI file comment
+instead of the date.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="1.13 --parse-first-line">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="pdftex-option-parse-first-line" name=
+"pdftex-option-parse-first-line"></a>1.13 <code class=
+"filename">--parse-first-line</code></h3>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp11508704" class="indexterm" name="idp11508704"></a>
+<p>If the first line of the main input file begins with
+<code class="literal">%&amp;</code> parse it to look for a dump
+name or a <code class="literal">--translate-file</code> option.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="1.14 --progname name">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="pdftex-option-progname" name=
+"pdftex-option-progname"></a>1.14 <code class="filename">--progname
+name</code></h3>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp11514432" class="indexterm" name="idp11514432"></a>
+<p>Pretend to be program <code class="literal">name</code>. This
+affects both the format used and the search paths.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="1.15 --recorder">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="pdftex-option-recorder" name=
+"pdftex-option-recorder"></a>1.15 <code class=
+"filename">--recorder</code></h3>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp11519424" class="indexterm" name="idp11519424"></a>
+<p>Enable the filename recorder. This leaves a trace of the files
+opened for input and output in a file with extension <code class=
+"literal">.fls</code>.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="1.16 --shell-escape">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="pdftex-option-shell-escape" name=
+"pdftex-option-shell-escape"></a>1.16 <code class=
+"filename">--shell-escape</code></h3>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp11524592" class="indexterm" name="idp11524592"></a>
+<p>Enable the <code class="literal">\write18{command}</code>
+construct. The command can be any Bourne shell command. This
+construct is normally disallowed for security reasons.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="1.17 --translate-file tcxname">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="pdftex-option-translate-file" name=
+"pdftex-option-translate-file"></a>1.17 <code class=
+"filename">--translate-file tcxname</code></h3>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp11529696" class="indexterm" name="idp11529696"></a>
+<p>Use the <code class="literal">tcxname</code> translation
+table.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="1.18 --version">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="pdftex-option-version" name=
+"pdftex-option-version"></a>1.18 <code class=
+"filename">--version</code></h3>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp11534720" class="indexterm" name="idp11534720"></a>
+<p>Print version information and exit.</p>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="2 Environment">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h2 class="title" style="clear: both"><a id="pdftex-environment"
+name="pdftex-environment"></a>2 Environment</h2>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp11538416" class="indexterm" name="idp11538416"></a>
+<p>See the Kpathsearch library documentation (the `Path
+specifications' node) for the details of how the environment
+variables are used when searching. The <span class=
+"command"><strong>kpsewhich</strong></span> utility can be used to
+query the values of the variables.</p>
+<p>One caveat: In most pdfTeX formats, you cannot use ~ in a
+filename you give directly to pdfTeX, because ~ is an active
+character, and hence is expanded, not taken as part of the
+filename. Other programs, such as Metafont, do not have this
+problem.</p>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">TEXMFOUTPUT</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp11544928" class="indexterm" name="idp11544928"></a>
+<p class="simpara">Normally, pdfTeX puts its output files in the
+current directory. If any output file cannot be opened there, it
+tries to open it in the directory specified in the environment
+variable <code class="literal">TEXMFOUTPUT</code>. There is no
+default value for that variable. For example, if you say
+<span class="command"><strong>pdftex paper</strong></span> and the
+current directory is not writable, if <code class=
+"literal">TEXMFOUTPUT</code> has the value <code class=
+"literal">/tmp</code>, pdfTeX attempts to create <code class=
+"literal">/tmp/paper.log</code> (and <code class=
+"literal">/tmp/paper.pdf</code>, if any output is produced.)</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">TEXINPUTS</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp11555008" class="indexterm" name="idp11555008"></a>
+<p class="simpara">Search path for <code class=
+"literal">\input</code> and <code class="literal">\openin</code>
+files. This should probably start with ``.'', so that user files
+are found before system files. An empty path component will be
+replaced with the paths defined in the <code class=
+"filename">texmf.cnf</code> file. For example, set <code class=
+"literal">TEXINPUTS</code> to <code class=
+"literal">".:/home/usr/tex:"</code> to prepend the current direcory
+and <code class="literal">``/home/user/tex''</code> to the standard
+search path.</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">TEXFONTS</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp11563792" class="indexterm" name="idp11563792"></a>
+<p class="simpara">earch path for font metric (<code class=
+"literal">.tfm</code>) files.</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">TEXFORMATS</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp11568720" class="indexterm" name="idp11568720"></a>
+<p class="simpara">Search path for format files.</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">TEXPOOL</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp11572928" class="indexterm" name="idp11572928"></a>
+<p class="simpara">Search path for <span class=
+"command"><strong>pdfinitex</strong></span> internal strings.</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">TEXEDIT</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp11577856" class="indexterm" name="idp11577856"></a>
+<p class="simpara">Command template for switching to editor. The
+default, usually <span class="command"><strong>vi</strong></span>,
+is set when pdfTeX is compiled.</p>
+</dd>
+</dl>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div xml:lang="en" class="chapter" title=
+"Chapter&nbsp;3.&nbsp;Metafont (tbd.)" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h2 class="title"><a id="metafont" name=
+"metafont"></a>Chapter&nbsp;3.&nbsp;Metafont (tbd.)</h2>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp11584672" class="indexterm" name="idp11584672"></a>
+<p>tbd.</p>
+</div>
+<div xml:lang="en" class="chapter" title=
+"Chapter&nbsp;4.&nbsp;MetaPost" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h2 class="title"><a id="metapost" name=
+"metapost"></a>Chapter&nbsp;4.&nbsp;MetaPost</h2>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="toc">
+<p><strong>Table of Contents</strong></p>
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#metapost-options">1
+Options</a></span></dt>
+<dd>
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href=
+"#metapost-option-file-line-error-style">1.1 <code class=
+"filename">--file-line-error-style</code></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#metapost-option-help">1.2
+<code class="filename">--help</code></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#metapost-option-ini">1.3
+<code class="filename">--ini</code></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href=
+"#metapost-option-intercation">1.4 <code class=
+"filename">--interaction mode</code></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#metapost-option-jobname">1.5
+<code class="filename">--jobname name</code></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href=
+"#metapost-option-kpathsea-debug">1.6 <code class=
+"filename">--kpathsea-debug bitmask</code></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#metapost-option-mem">1.7
+<code class="filename">--mem mem</code></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href=
+"#metapost-option-parse-first-line">1.8 <code class=
+"filename">--parse-first-line</code></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#metapost-option-progname">1.9
+<code class="filename">--progname name</code></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#metapost-option-recorder">1.10
+<code class="filename">--recorder</code></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#metapost-option-T">1.11
+<code class="filename">-T</code></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href=
+"#metapost-option-translate-file">1.12 <code class=
+"filename">--translate-file tcxname</code></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#metapost-option-troff">1.13
+<code class="filename">--troff</code></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#metapost-option-version">1.14
+<code class="filename">--version</code></a></span></dt>
+</dl>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#metapost-environment">2
+Environment</a></span></dt>
+</dl>
+</div>
+<a id="idp11588048" class="indexterm" name="idp11588048"></a>
+<div class="note" title="Note" style=
+"margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;">
+<h3 class="title">Note</h3>
+<p>The contents of this section was taken from <code class=
+"filename">mpost(1)</code>.</p>
+</div>
+<p>MetaPost is a programming language much like Knuth's Metafont
+except that it outputs PostScript programs instead of bitmaps.
+Borrowed from Metafont are the basic tools for creating and
+manipulating pictures. These include numbers, coordinate pairs,
+cubic splines, affine transformations, text strings, and boolean
+quantities. Additional features facilitate integrating text and
+graphics and accessing special features of PostScript such as
+clipping, shading, and dashed lines. Another feature borrowed from
+Metafont is the ability to solve linear equations that are given
+implicitly, thus allowing many programs to be written in a largely
+declarative style. By building complex operations from simpler
+ones, MetaPost achieves both power and exibility.</p>
+<div class="section" title="1 Options">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h2 class="title" style="clear: both"><a id="metapost-options"
+name="metapost-options"></a>1 Options</h2>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp11593248" class="indexterm" name="idp11593248"></a>
+<p>MetaPost understands the following command line options.</p>
+<div class="section" title="1.1 --file-line-error-style">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="metapost-option-file-line-error-style"
+name="metapost-option-file-line-error-style"></a>1.1 <code class=
+"filename">--file-line-error-style</code></h3>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp11597104" class="indexterm" name="idp11597104"></a>
+<p>Print error messages in the form <code class=
+"literal">file:line:error</code> which is similar to the way many
+compilers format them.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="1.2 --help">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="metapost-option-help" name=
+"metapost-option-help"></a>1.2 <code class=
+"filename">--help</code></h3>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp11602064" class="indexterm" name="idp11602064"></a>
+<p>Print help message and exit.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="1.3 --ini">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="metapost-option-ini" name=
+"metapost-option-ini"></a>1.3 <code class=
+"filename">--ini</code></h3>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp11606304" class="indexterm" name="idp11606304"></a>
+<p>Be <span class="command"><strong>inimpost</strong></span>, for
+dumping bases; this is implicitly true if the program is called as
+<span class="command"><strong>inimpost</strong></span>.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="1.4 --interaction mode">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="metapost-option-intercation" name=
+"metapost-option-intercation"></a>1.4 <code class=
+"filename">--interaction mode</code></h3>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp11612032" class="indexterm" name="idp11612032"></a>
+<p>Sets the interaction mode. The mode can be one of <code class=
+"literal">batchmode</code>, <code class=
+"literal">nonstopmode</code>, <code class=
+"literal">scrollmode</code>, and <code class=
+"literal">errorstopmode</code>. The meaning of these modes is the
+same as that of the corresponding commands.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="1.5 --jobname name">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="metapost-option-jobname" name=
+"metapost-option-jobname"></a>1.5 <code class="filename">--jobname
+name</code></h3>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp11619200" class="indexterm" name="idp11619200"></a>
+<p>Use <code class="literal">name</code> for the job name, instead
+of deriving it from the name of the input file.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="1.6 --kpathsea-debug bitmask">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="metapost-option-kpathsea-debug" name=
+"metapost-option-kpathsea-debug"></a>1.6 <code class=
+"filename">--kpathsea-debug bitmask</code></h3>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp11624256" class="indexterm" name="idp11624256"></a>
+<p>Sets path searching debugging flags according to the
+<code class="literal">bitmask</code>. See the Kpathsea manual for
+details.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="1.7 --mem mem">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="metapost-option-mem" name=
+"metapost-option-mem"></a>1.7 <code class="filename">--mem
+mem</code></h3>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp11629312" class="indexterm" name="idp11629312"></a>
+<p>Use <code class="literal">mem</code> as the name of the mem to
+be used, instead of the name by which MetaPost was called or a
+<code class="literal">%&amp;</code> line.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="1.8 --parse-first-line">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="metapost-option-parse-first-line" name=
+"metapost-option-parse-first-line"></a>1.8 <code class=
+"filename">--parse-first-line</code></h3>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp11635168" class="indexterm" name="idp11635168"></a>
+<p>If the first line of the main input file begins with
+<code class="literal">%&amp;</code> parse it to look for a dump
+name or a <code class="literal">--translate-file</code> option.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="1.9 --progname name">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="metapost-option-progname" name=
+"metapost-option-progname"></a>1.9 <code class=
+"filename">--progname name</code></h3>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp11640976" class="indexterm" name="idp11640976"></a>
+<p>Pretend to be program <code class="literal">name</code>. This
+affects both the format used and the search paths.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="1.10 --recorder">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="metapost-option-recorder" name=
+"metapost-option-recorder"></a>1.10 <code class=
+"filename">--recorder</code></h3>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp11645920" class="indexterm" name="idp11645920"></a>
+<p>Enable the filename recorder. This leaves a trace of the files
+opened for input and output in a file with extension <code class=
+"literal">.fls.</code></p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="1.11 -T">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="metapost-option-T" name=
+"metapost-option-T"></a>1.11 <code class="filename">-T</code></h3>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp11650768" class="indexterm" name="idp11650768"></a>
+<p>Produce TROFF output.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="1.12 --translate-file tcxname">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="metapost-option-translate-file" name=
+"metapost-option-translate-file"></a>1.12 <code class=
+"filename">--translate-file tcxname</code></h3>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp11655008" class="indexterm" name="idp11655008"></a>
+<p>Use the <code class="literal">tcxname</code> translation
+table.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="1.13 --troff">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="metapost-option-troff" name=
+"metapost-option-troff"></a>1.13 <code class=
+"filename">--troff</code></h3>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp11659968" class="indexterm" name="idp11659968"></a>
+<p>As -T.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="1.14 --version">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="metapost-option-version" name=
+"metapost-option-version"></a>1.14 <code class=
+"filename">--version</code></h3>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp11664192" class="indexterm" name="idp11664192"></a>
+<p>Print version information and exit.</p>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="2 Environment">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h2 class="title" style="clear: both"><a id="metapost-environment"
+name="metapost-environment"></a>2 Environment</h2>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp11667936" class="indexterm" name="idp11667936"></a>
+<p>See the Kpathsearch library documentation (the `Path
+specifications' node) for the details of how the environment
+variables are use when searching. The <span class=
+"command"><strong>kpsewhich</strong></span> utility can be used to
+query the values of the variables.</p>
+<p>If the environment variable <code class=
+"literal">TEXMFOUTPUT</code> is set, MetaPost attempts to put its
+output files in it, if they cannot be put in the current
+directory.</p>
+<p>Here is a list of the environment variables which affect the
+behavior of MetaPost:</p>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">MPINPUTS</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp11674064" class="indexterm" name="idp11674064"></a>
+<p class="simpara">Search path for input files.</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">MFINPUTS</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp11677984" class="indexterm" name="idp11677984"></a>
+<p class="simpara">Auxiliary search path for input files with
+<code class="literal">.mf</code> extensions.</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">MPSUPPORT</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp11682656" class="indexterm" name="idp11682656"></a>
+<p class="simpara">Directory for various tables for handling
+included TeX and troff.</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">MPXCOMMAND</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp11687056" class="indexterm" name="idp11687056"></a>
+<p class="simpara">The name of a shell script that converts
+embedded typesetting commands to a form that MetaPost understands.
+Defaults: <code class="literal">makempx</code> for TeX and
+<code class="literal">troffmpx</code> for troff.</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class="literal">TEX</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp11692944" class="indexterm" name="idp11692944"></a>
+<p class="simpara">The version of TeX - or LaTeX - to use when
+processing <span class="command"><strong>btex</strong></span> and
+<span class="command"><strong>verbatimtex</strong></span> commands.
+Default TeX. This version of MetaPost allows you to use a
+<code class="literal">`%&amp;format'</code> line instead.</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">TROFF</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp11700416" class="indexterm" name="idp11700416"></a>
+<p class="simpara">The troff pipeline for <span class=
+"command"><strong>btex</strong></span> and <span class=
+"command"><strong>verbatimtex</strong></span> commands. Default
+<code class="literal">eqn -d\$\$ | troff</code></p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">MPEDIT</code></span></dt>
+<dd><a id="idp11706336" class="indexterm" name="idp11706336"></a>
+<p class="simpara">A command template for invoking an editor.</p>
+</dd>
+</dl>
+</div>
+<p>A <code class="literal">.mem</code> file is a binary file that
+permits fast loading of macro packages. MetaPost reads the default
+<code class="literal">plain.mem</code> unless another <code class=
+"literal">.mem</code> file is specified at the start of the first
+line with an <code class="literal">&amp;</code> just before it.
+There is also an <code class="literal">mfplain.mem</code> that
+simulates plain Metafont so that MetaPost can read <code class=
+"literal">.mf</code> fonts. (Plain Metafont is described in
+<span class="emphasis"><em>The Metafontbook</em></span>).</p>
+<p>Experts can create <code class="literal">.mem</code> files by
+invoking <span class="command"><strong>inimpost</strong></span> and
+giving macro definitions followed by a dump command.</p>
+<p>The MetaPost language is similar to Metafont, but the manual
+<span class="emphasis"><em>A User's Manual for MetaPost</em></span>
+assumes no knowledge of Metafont. MetaPost does not have bitmap
+output commands or Metafont's online display mechanism.</p>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div xml:lang="en" class="chapter" title=
+"Chapter&nbsp;5.&nbsp;BibTeX" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h2 class="title"><a id="bibtex" name=
+"bibtex"></a>Chapter&nbsp;5.&nbsp;BibTeX</h2>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="toc">
+<p><strong>Table of Contents</strong></p>
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#bibtex-parameters">1
+Parameters</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#bibtex-command-qualifiers">2
+Command Qualifiers</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#bibtex-bib-files">3 bib
+files</a></span></dt>
+<dd>
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#bibtex-string-command">3.1
+<code class="filename">@STRING</code> command</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#bibtex-entry-format">3.2 Entry
+Format</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#bibtex-entry-types">3.3 Entry
+Types</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#bibtex-field-text">3.4 Field
+Text</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#bibtex-field-types">3.5 Field
+Types</a></span></dt>
+</dl>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#bibtex-bst-files">4 bst
+files</a></span></dt>
+<dd>
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#bibtex-bst-abbr">4.1
+<code class="filename">ABBRV.BST</code></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#bibtex-bst-alpha">4.2
+<code class="filename">ALPHA.BST</code></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#bibtex-bst-plain">4.3
+<code class="filename">PLAIN.BST</code></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#bibtex-bst-sample">4.4
+<code class="filename">SAMPLE.BST</code></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#bibtex-bst-unsrt">4.5
+<code class="filename">UNSRT.BST</code></a></span></dt>
+</dl>
+</dd>
+</dl>
+</div>
+<a id="idp11719920" class="indexterm" name="idp11719920"></a>
+<div class="note" title="Note" style=
+"margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;">
+<h3 class="title">Note</h3>
+<p>The contents of this section was taken from the HTML helppages
+for BibTeX of Norman Walsh (Version 1.0, 12 Apr 94).</p>
+</div>
+<p>Invokes the BibTeX utility to compile a bibliography file for
+LaTeX. Full details can be found in "LaTeX: A Document Preparation
+System" by Leslie Lamport.</p>
+<div class="section" title="1 Parameters">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h2 class="title" style="clear: both"><a id="bibtex-parameters"
+name="bibtex-parameters"></a>1 Parameters</h2>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp11724784" class="indexterm" name="idp11724784"></a>
+<p><code class="literal">bibliography-file-spec</code></p>
+<p>Specifies the name of the bibliography database file to be
+compiled by BibTeX. If the file specification does not include a
+file type, BibTeX assumes a default type of BIB.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="2 Command Qualifiers">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h2 class="title" style="clear: both"><a id=
+"bibtex-command-qualifiers" name="bibtex-command-qualifiers"></a>2
+Command Qualifiers</h2>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp11729888" class="indexterm" name="idp11729888"></a>
+<p><code class="literal">/BIBINPUTS
+/BIBINPUTS=(name,...)</code></p>
+<p>Specify directories containing input files, and the order in
+which they will be searched to locate each input file. A null value
+in the list indicates the current directory. The search procedure
+TeX uses to locate input files is to first search your default
+directory and then search each of the directories specified by the
+<code class="literal">/BIBINPUTS</code> option.</p>
+<p>Default is <code class="literal">/BIBINPUTS=(TEX_BIB:)</code>;
+TeX looks in the directory associated with the logical name
+<code class="literal">TEX_BIB.</code></p>
+<p><code class="literal">/STATS /STATS /NOSTATS [D]</code></p>
+<p>This qualifier is used while debugging <code class=
+"literal">.BST</code> files to determine BIBTEX memory usage.</p>
+<p><code class="literal">/TEXINPUTS
+/TEXINPUTS=(name,...)</code></p>
+<p>Specify directories containing input files, and the order in
+which they will be searched to locate each input file. A null value
+in the list indicates the current directory. The search procedure
+TeX uses to locate input files is to first search your default
+directory and then search each of the directories specified by the
+<code class="literal">/TEXINPUTS</code> option.</p>
+<p>Default is <code class="literal">/TEXINPUTS=(TEX_INPUTS)</code>;
+TeX looks in the directory associated with the logical name
+<code class="literal">TEX_INPUTS</code>.</p>
+<p><code class="literal">/TRACE /TRACE /NOTRACE [D]</code></p>
+<p>This qualifier is used while debugging <code class=
+"literal">.BST</code> files to follow program flow.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="3 bib files">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h2 class="title" style="clear: both"><a id="bibtex-bib-files"
+name="bibtex-bib-files"></a>3 bib files</h2>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp11746736" class="indexterm" name="idp11746736"></a>
+<p>This help entry contains the same information as Appendix B of
+the LaTeX manual. It describes the format of a bibliography
+database (<code class="literal">.BIB</code>) file.</p>
+<p>A bibliography database file may contains two types of entry -
+an abbreviation definition or a reference entry for citation.</p>
+<div class="section" title="3.1 @STRING command">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="bibtex-string-command" name=
+"bibtex-string-command"></a>3.1 <code class=
+"filename">@STRING</code> command</h3>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp11752400" class="indexterm" name="idp11752400"></a>
+<p>The <code class="literal">@STRING</code> command is used to
+define abbreviations for use by BibTeX within the bibliography
+database file. The command</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+ @string{jgg1 = "Journal of Gnats and Gnus, Series~1"}
+</pre>
+<p>defines 'jgg1' to be the abbreviation for the string "Journal of
+Gnats and Gnus, Series~1". Parentheses can be used in place of the
+outermost braces in the @string command, and braces can be used
+instead of the quotation marks. The text must have matching
+braces.</p>
+<p>The case of letters is ignored in an abbreviation as well as in
+the command name @string, so the command above could have been
+written:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+ @STRING{JgG1 = "Journal of Gnats and Gnus, Series~1"}
+</pre>
+<p>A <code class="literal">@string</code> command can appear
+anywhere before or between entries in a bibliography database file.
+However, it must come before any use of the abbreviation, so a
+sensible place for <code class="literal">@string</code> commands is
+at the beginning of the file. A <code class=
+"literal">@string</code> command in the bibliography database file
+takes precedence over a definition made by the bibliography style,
+so it can be used to change the definition of an abbreviation such
+as 'Feb'.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="3.2 Entry Format">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="bibtex-entry-format" name=
+"bibtex-entry-format"></a>3.2 Entry Format</h3>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp11762464" class="indexterm" name="idp11762464"></a>
+<p>A bibliography database file contains a series of reference
+entries like the following:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+ @BOOK{kn:gnus,
+ AUTHOR = "Donald E. Knudson",
+ TITLE = "1966 World Gnus Almanac",
+ PUBLISHER = {Permafrost Press},
+ ADDRESS = {Novisibirsk} }
+</pre>
+<p>The <code class="literal">@BOOK</code> states that this is an
+entry of type book. various entry types are described below. The
+'kn:gnus' is the citation key, as it appears in the argument of a
+<code class="literal">\cite</code> command referring to the
+entry.</p>
+<p>This entry has four fields, named <code class=
+"literal">AUTHOR</code>, <code class="literal">TITLE</code>,
+<code class="literal">PUBLISHER</code> and <code class=
+"literal">ADDRESS</code>. The meanings of these and other fields
+are described below. A field consists of the name, an '=' character
+with optional space around it, followed by its text. The text of a
+field is a string of characters, with no unmatched braces,
+surrounded by either a pair of braces or a pair of '"' characters.
+Entry fields are separated from one another, and from the citation
+key, by commas. A comma may have optional space around it.</p>
+<p>The outermost braces that surround the entire entry may be
+replaced by parentheses. As in TeX input files, an end-of-line
+character counts as a space and one space is equivalent to many
+spaces. Unlike TeX, BibTeX ignores the case of letters in the entry
+type, citation key and field names. The above entry could have been
+typed as follows:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+@BOOK(kn:gnus, author = {Donald E. Knudson},
+ TITLE = "1966 World Gnus Almanac",
+ PUBLISHER = {Permafrost Press},
+ ADDRESS = {Novisibirsk} )
+</pre>
+<p>However, the case of letters does matter to LaTeX, so the
+citation key ("kn:gnus" in the example above) should appear exactly
+the same in all <code class="literal">\cite</code> commands in the
+LaTeX input file.</p>
+<p>The quotes or braces can be omitted around text consisting
+entirely of numerals. The following two fields are equivalent:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+Volume = "27" Volume = 27
+</pre></div>
+<div class="section" title="3.3 Entry Types">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="bibtex-entry-types" name=
+"bibtex-entry-types"></a>3.3 Entry Types</h3>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp11779008" class="indexterm" name="idp11779008"></a>
+<p>When entering a reference in the bibliography database, the
+first thing to decide is what type of entry it is. No fixed
+classification scheme can be complete, but BibTeX provides enough
+entry types to handle almost any reference reasonably well.</p>
+<p>References to different types of publications contain different
+information; a reference to a journal might include the volume and
+number of the journal, which is usually not meaningful for a book.
+Therefore, database entries of different types have different
+fields for each entry type, the fields are divided into three
+classes:</p>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="term">Required</span></dt>
+<dd>
+<p>omitting the field will produce an error message and may result
+in a badly formatted bibliography entry. If the required
+information is not meaningful, you are using the wrong entry
+type.</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term">Optional</span></dt>
+<dd>
+<p>the field's information will be used if present, but can be
+omitted without causing any formatting problems. A reference should
+contain any available information that might help the reader, so
+you should include the optional field if it is applicable.</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term">Ignored</span></dt>
+<dd>
+<p>the field is ignored. BibTeX ignores any field that is not
+required or optional, so you can include any fields you want in a
+bibliography entry. It's often a good idea to put all relevant
+information about a reference in its bibliography entry - even
+information that may never appear in the bibliography. For example,
+if you want to keep an abstract of a paper in a computer file, put
+it in an 'abstract' field in the paper's bibliography entry. The
+bibliography database file is likely to be as good a place as any
+for the abstract, and it is possible to design a bibliography style
+for printing selected abstracts.</p>
+</dd>
+</dl>
+</div>
+<p>BibTeX ignores the case of letters in the entry type.</p>
+<div class="section" title="3.3.1 article entry">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="bibtex-entry-types-article" name=
+"bibtex-entry-types-article"></a>3.3.1 article entry</h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp11791424" class="indexterm" name="idp11791424"></a>
+<p>An article from a journal or magazine.</p>
+<p>Format:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+@ARTICLE{citation_key,
+ required_fields [, optional_fields] }
+</pre>
+<p>Required fields: <a class="link" href=
+"#bibtex-field-types-author" title="3.5.3 author field">author</a>,
+<a class="link" href="#bibtex-field-types-title" title=
+"3.5.20 title field">title</a>, <a class="link" href=
+"#bibtex-field-types-journal" title=
+"3.5.10 journal field">journal</a>, <a class="link" href=
+"#bibtex-field-types-year" title="3.5.23 year field">year</a></p>
+<p>Optional fields: <a class="link" href=
+"#bibtex-field-types-volume" title=
+"3.5.22 volume field">volume</a>, <a class="link" href=
+"#bibtex-field-types-number" title=
+"3.5.14 number field">number</a>, <a class="link" href=
+"#bibtex-field-types-pages" title="3.5.16 pages field">pages</a>,
+<a class="link" href="#bibtex-field-types-month" title=
+"3.5.12 month field">month</a>, <a class="link" href=
+"#bibtex-field-types-note" title="3.5.13 note field">note</a>,
+<a class="link" href="#bibtex-field-types-key" title=
+"3.5.11 key field">key</a></p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="3.3.2 book entry">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="bibtex-entry-types-book" name=
+"bibtex-entry-types-book"></a>3.3.2 book entry</h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp11806640" class="indexterm" name="idp11806640"></a>
+<p>A book with an explicit publisher.</p>
+<p>Format:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+@BOOK{citation_key,
+ required_fields [, optional_fields] }
+</pre>
+<p>Required fields: <a class="link" href=
+"#bibtex-field-types-author" title="3.5.3 author field">author</a>
+or <a class="link" href="#bibtex-field-types-editor" title=
+"3.5.7 editor field">editor</a>, <a class="link" href=
+"#bibtex-field-types-title" title="3.5.20 title field">title</a>,
+<a class="link" href="#bibtex-field-types-publisher" title=
+"3.5.17 publisher field">publisher</a>, <a class="link" href=
+"#bibtex-field-types-year" title="3.5.23 year field">year</a></p>
+<p>Optional fields: <a class="link" href=
+"#bibtex-field-types-volume" title=
+"3.5.22 volume field">volume</a>, <a class="link" href=
+"#bibtex-field-types-series" title=
+"3.5.19 series field">series</a>, <a class="link" href=
+"#bibtex-field-types-address" title=
+"3.5.1 address field">address</a>, <a class="link" href=
+"#bibtex-field-types-edition" title=
+"3.5.6 edition field">edition</a>, <a class="link" href=
+"#bibtex-field-types-month" title="3.5.12 month field">month</a>,
+<a class="link" href="#bibtex-field-types-note" title=
+"3.5.13 note field">note</a>, <a class="link" href=
+"#bibtex-field-types-key" title="3.5.11 key field">key</a></p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="3.3.3 booklet entry">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="bibtex-entry-types-booklet" name=
+"bibtex-entry-types-booklet"></a>3.3.3 booklet entry</h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp11823008" class="indexterm" name="idp11823008"></a>
+<p>A work that is printed and bound, but without a named publisher
+or sponsoring institution.</p>
+<p>Format:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+@BOOKLET{citation_key,
+ required_fields [, optional_fields] }
+</pre>
+<p>Required fields: <a class="link" href=
+"#bibtex-field-types-title" title=
+"3.5.20 title field">title</a></p>
+<p>Optional fields: <a class="link" href=
+"#bibtex-field-types-author" title="3.5.3 author field">author</a>,
+<a class="link" href="#bibtex-field-types-howpublished" title=
+"3.5.8 howpublished field">howpublished</a>, <a class="link" href=
+"#bibtex-field-types-address" title=
+"3.5.1 address field">address</a>, <a class="link" href=
+"#bibtex-field-types-month" title="3.5.12 month field">month</a>,
+<a class="link" href="#bibtex-field-types-year" title=
+"3.5.23 year field">year</a>, <a class="link" href=
+"#bibtex-field-types-note" title="3.5.13 note field">note</a>,
+<a class="link" href="#bibtex-field-types-key" title=
+"3.5.11 key field">key</a></p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="3.3.4 conference entry">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="bibtex-entry-types-conference" name=
+"bibtex-entry-types-conference"></a>3.3.4 conference entry</h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp11835488" class="indexterm" name="idp11835488"></a>
+<p>An article in the proceedings of a conference. This entry is
+identical to the 'inproceedings' entry and is included for
+compatibility with another text formatting system.</p>
+<p>Format:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+@CONFERENCE{citation_key,
+ required_fields [, optional_fields] }
+</pre>
+<p>Required fields: <a class="link" href=
+"#bibtex-field-types-author" title="3.5.3 author field">author</a>,
+<a class="link" href="#bibtex-field-types-title" title=
+"3.5.20 title field">title</a>, <a class="link" href=
+"#bibtex-field-types-booktitle" title=
+"3.5.4 booktitle field">booktitle</a>, <a class="link" href=
+"#bibtex-field-types-year" title="3.5.23 year field">year</a></p>
+<p>Optional fields: <a class="link" href=
+"#bibtex-field-types-editor" title="3.5.7 editor field">editor</a>,
+<a class="link" href="#bibtex-field-types-pages" title=
+"3.5.16 pages field">pages</a>, <a class="link" href=
+"#bibtex-field-types-organization" title=
+"3.5.15 organization field">organization</a>, <a class="link" href=
+"#bibtex-field-types-publisher" title=
+"3.5.17 publisher field">publisher</a>, <a class="link" href=
+"#bibtex-field-types-address" title=
+"3.5.1 address field">address</a>, <a class="link" href=
+"#bibtex-field-types-month" title="3.5.12 month field">month</a>,
+<a class="link" href="#bibtex-field-types-note" title=
+"3.5.13 note field">note</a>, <a class="link" href=
+"#bibtex-field-types-key" title="3.5.11 key field">key</a></p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="3.3.5 inbook entry">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="bibtex-entry-types-inbook" name=
+"bibtex-entry-types-inbook"></a>3.3.5 inbook entry</h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp11851600" class="indexterm" name="idp11851600"></a>
+<p>A part of a book, which may be a chapter and/or a range of
+pages.</p>
+<p>Format:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+@INBOOK{citation_key,
+ required_fields [, optional_fields] }
+</pre>
+<p>Required fields: <a class="link" href=
+"#bibtex-field-types-author" title="3.5.3 author field">author</a>
+or <a class="link" href="#bibtex-field-types-editor" title=
+"3.5.7 editor field">editor</a>, <a class="link" href=
+"#bibtex-field-types-title" title="3.5.20 title field">title</a>,
+<a class="link" href="#bibtex-field-types-chapter" title=
+"3.5.5 chapter field">chapter</a> and/or <a class="link" href=
+"#bibtex-field-types-pages" title="3.5.16 pages field">pages</a>,
+<a class="link" href="#bibtex-field-types-publisher" title=
+"3.5.17 publisher field">publisher</a>, <a class="link" href=
+"#bibtex-field-types-year" title="3.5.23 year field">year</a></p>
+<p>Optional fields: <a class="link" href=
+"#bibtex-field-types-volume" title=
+"3.5.22 volume field">volume</a>, <a class="link" href=
+"#bibtex-field-types-series" title=
+"3.5.19 series field">series</a>, <a class="link" href=
+"#bibtex-field-types-address" title=
+"3.5.1 address field">address</a>, <a class="link" href=
+"#bibtex-field-types-edition" title=
+"3.5.6 edition field">edition</a>, <a class="link" href=
+"#bibtex-field-types-month" title="3.5.12 month field">month</a>,
+<a class="link" href="#bibtex-field-types-note" title=
+"3.5.13 note field">note</a>, <a class="link" href=
+"#bibtex-field-types-key" title="3.5.11 key field">key</a></p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="3.3.6 incollection entry">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="bibtex-entry-types-incollection" name=
+"bibtex-entry-types-incollection"></a>3.3.6 incollection entry</h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp11869248" class="indexterm" name="idp11869248"></a>
+<p>A part of a book with its own title.</p>
+<p>Format:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+@INCOLLECTION{citation_key,
+ required_fields [, optional_fields] }
+</pre>
+<p>Required fields: <a class="link" href=
+"#bibtex-field-types-author" title="3.5.3 author field">author</a>,
+<a class="link" href="#bibtex-field-types-title" title=
+"3.5.20 title field">title</a>, <a class="link" href=
+"#bibtex-field-types-booktitle" title=
+"3.5.4 booktitle field">booktitle</a>, <a class="link" href=
+"#bibtex-field-types-year" title="3.5.23 year field">year</a></p>
+<p>Optional fields: <a class="link" href=
+"#bibtex-field-types-editor" title="3.5.7 editor field">editor</a>,
+<a class="link" href="#bibtex-field-types-pages" title=
+"3.5.16 pages field">pages</a>, <a class="link" href=
+"#bibtex-field-types-organization" title=
+"3.5.15 organization field">organization</a>, <a class="link" href=
+"#bibtex-field-types-publisher" title=
+"3.5.17 publisher field">publisher</a>, <a class="link" href=
+"#bibtex-field-types-address" title=
+"3.5.1 address field">address</a>, <a class="link" href=
+"#bibtex-field-types-month" title="3.5.12 month field">month</a>,
+<a class="link" href="#bibtex-field-types-note" title=
+"3.5.13 note field">note</a>, <a class="link" href=
+"#bibtex-field-types-key" title="3.5.11 key field">key</a></p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="3.3.7 inproceedings entry">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="bibtex-entry-types-inproceedings" name=
+"bibtex-entry-types-inproceedings"></a>3.3.7 inproceedings
+entry</h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp11885024" class="indexterm" name="idp11885024"></a>
+<p>An article in the proceedings of a conference.</p>
+<p>Format:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+@INPROCEEDINGS{citation_key,
+ required_fields [, optional_fields] }
+</pre>
+<p>Required fields: <a class="link" href=
+"#bibtex-field-types-author" title="3.5.3 author field">author</a>,
+<a class="link" href="#bibtex-field-types-title" title=
+"3.5.20 title field">title</a>, <a class="link" href=
+"#bibtex-field-types-booktitle" title=
+"3.5.4 booktitle field">booktitle</a>, <a class="link" href=
+"#bibtex-field-types-year" title="3.5.23 year field">year</a></p>
+<p>Optional fields: <a class="link" href=
+"#bibtex-field-types-editor" title="3.5.7 editor field">editor</a>,
+<a class="link" href="#bibtex-field-types-pages" title=
+"3.5.16 pages field">pages</a>, <a class="link" href=
+"#bibtex-field-types-organization" title=
+"3.5.15 organization field">organization</a>, <a class="link" href=
+"#bibtex-field-types-publisher" title=
+"3.5.17 publisher field">publisher</a>, <a class="link" href=
+"#bibtex-field-types-address" title=
+"3.5.1 address field">address</a>, <a class="link" href=
+"#bibtex-field-types-month" title="3.5.12 month field">month</a>,
+<a class="link" href="#bibtex-field-types-note" title=
+"3.5.13 note field">note</a>, <a class="link" href=
+"#bibtex-field-types-key" title="3.5.11 key field">key</a></p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="3.3.8 manual entry">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="bibtex-entry-types-manual" name=
+"bibtex-entry-types-manual"></a>3.3.8 manual entry</h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp11900864" class="indexterm" name="idp11900864"></a>
+<p>Technical documentation.</p>
+<p>Format:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+@MANUAL{citation_key,
+ required_fields [, optional_fields] }
+</pre>
+<p>Required fields: <a class="link" href=
+"#bibtex-field-types-title" title=
+"3.5.20 title field">title</a></p>
+<p>Optional fields: <a class="link" href=
+"#bibtex-field-types-author" title="3.5.3 author field">author</a>,
+<a class="link" href="#bibtex-field-types-organization" title=
+"3.5.15 organization field">organization</a>, <a class="link" href=
+"#bibtex-field-types-address" title=
+"3.5.1 address field">address</a>, <a class="link" href=
+"#bibtex-field-types-edition" title=
+"3.5.6 edition field">edition</a>, <a class="link" href=
+"#bibtex-field-types-month" title="3.5.12 month field">month</a>,
+<a class="link" href="#bibtex-field-types-year" title=
+"3.5.23 year field">year</a>, <a class="link" href=
+"#bibtex-field-types-note" title="3.5.13 note field">note</a>,
+<a class="link" href="#bibtex-field-types-key" title=
+"3.5.11 key field">key</a></p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="3.3.9 mastersthesis entry">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="bibtex-entry-types-mastersthesis" name=
+"bibtex-entry-types-mastersthesis"></a>3.3.9 mastersthesis
+entry</h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp11914032" class="indexterm" name="idp11914032"></a>
+<p>A Master's thesis.</p>
+<p>Format:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+@MASTERSTHESIS{citation_key,
+ required_fields [, optional_fields] }
+</pre>
+<p>Required fields: <a class="link" href=
+"#bibtex-field-types-author" title="3.5.3 author field">author</a>,
+<a class="link" href="#bibtex-field-types-title" title=
+"3.5.20 title field">title</a>, <a class="link" href=
+"#bibtex-field-types-school" title=
+"3.5.18 school field">school</a>, <a class="link" href=
+"#bibtex-field-types-year" title="3.5.23 year field">year</a></p>
+<p>Optional fields: <a class="link" href=
+"#bibtex-field-types-address" title=
+"3.5.1 address field">address</a>, <a class="link" href=
+"#bibtex-field-types-month" title="3.5.12 month field">month</a>,
+<a class="link" href="#bibtex-field-types-note" title=
+"3.5.13 note field">note</a>, <a class="link" href=
+"#bibtex-field-types-key" title="3.5.11 key field">key</a></p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="3.3.10 misc entry">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="bibtex-entry-types-misc" name=
+"bibtex-entry-types-misc"></a>3.3.10 misc entry</h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp11926432" class="indexterm" name="idp11926432"></a>
+<p>Use this type when nothing else seems appropriate.</p>
+<p>Format:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+@MISC{citation_key,
+ required_fields [, optional_fields] }
+</pre>
+<p>Required fields: none</p>
+<p>Optional fields: <a class="link" href=
+"#bibtex-field-types-author" title="3.5.3 author field">author</a>,
+<a class="link" href="#bibtex-field-types-title" title=
+"3.5.20 title field">title</a>, <a class="link" href=
+"#bibtex-field-types-howpublished" title=
+"3.5.8 howpublished field">howpublished</a>, <a class="link" href=
+"#bibtex-field-types-month" title="3.5.12 month field">month</a>,
+<a class="link" href="#bibtex-field-types-year" title=
+"3.5.23 year field">year</a>, <a class="link" href=
+"#bibtex-field-types-note" title="3.5.13 note field">note</a>,
+<a class="link" href="#bibtex-field-types-key" title=
+"3.5.11 key field">key</a></p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="3.3.11 phdthesis entry">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="bibtex-entry-types-phdthesis" name=
+"bibtex-entry-types-phdthesis"></a>3.3.11 phdthesis entry</h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp11938032" class="indexterm" name="idp11938032"></a>
+<p>A PhD thesis.</p>
+<p>Format:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+@PHDTHESIS{citation_key,
+ required_fields [, optional_fields] }
+</pre>
+<p>Required fields: <a class="link" href=
+"#bibtex-field-types-author" title="3.5.3 author field">author</a>,
+<a class="link" href="#bibtex-field-types-title" title=
+"3.5.20 title field">title</a>, <a class="link" href=
+"#bibtex-field-types-school" title=
+"3.5.18 school field">school</a>, <a class="link" href=
+"#bibtex-field-types-year" title="3.5.23 year field">year</a></p>
+<p>Optional fields: <a class="link" href=
+"#bibtex-field-types-address" title=
+"3.5.1 address field">address</a>, <a class="link" href=
+"#bibtex-field-types-month" title="3.5.12 month field">month</a>,
+<a class="link" href="#bibtex-field-types-note" title=
+"3.5.13 note field">note</a>, <a class="link" href=
+"#bibtex-field-types-key" title="3.5.11 key field">key</a></p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="3.3.12 proceedings entry">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="bibtex-entry-types-proceedings" name=
+"bibtex-entry-types-proceedings"></a>3.3.12 proceedings entry</h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp11950336" class="indexterm" name="idp11950336"></a>
+<p>The proceedings of a conference.</p>
+<p>Format:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+@PROCEEDINGS{citation_key,
+ required_fields [, optional_fields] }
+</pre>
+<p>Required fields: <a class="link" href=
+"#bibtex-field-types-title" title="3.5.20 title field">title</a>,
+<a class="link" href="#bibtex-field-types-year" title=
+"3.5.23 year field">year</a></p>
+<p>Optional fields: <a class="link" href=
+"#bibtex-field-types-editor" title="3.5.7 editor field">editor</a>,
+<a class="link" href="#bibtex-field-types-publisher" title=
+"3.5.17 publisher field">publisher</a>, <a class="link" href=
+"#bibtex-field-types-organization" title=
+"3.5.15 organization field">organization</a>, <a class="link" href=
+"#bibtex-field-types-address" title=
+"3.5.1 address field">address</a>, <a class="link" href=
+"#bibtex-field-types-month" title="3.5.12 month field">month</a>,
+<a class="link" href="#bibtex-field-types-note" title=
+"3.5.13 note field">note</a>, <a class="link" href=
+"#bibtex-field-types-key" title="3.5.11 key field">key</a></p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="3.3.13 techreport entry">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="bibtex-entry-types-techreport" name=
+"bibtex-entry-types-techreport"></a>3.3.13 techreport entry</h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp11963568" class="indexterm" name="idp11963568"></a>
+<p>A report published by a school or other institution, usually
+numbered within a series.</p>
+<p>Format:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+@TECHREPORT{citation_key,
+ required_fields [, optional_fields] }
+</pre>
+<p>Required fields: <a class="link" href=
+"#bibtex-field-types-author" title="3.5.3 author field">author</a>,
+<a class="link" href="#bibtex-field-types-title" title=
+"3.5.20 title field">title</a>, <a class="link" href=
+"#bibtex-field-types-institution" title=
+"3.5.9 institution field">institution</a>, <a class="link" href=
+"#bibtex-field-types-year" title="3.5.23 year field">year</a></p>
+<p>Optional fields: <a class="link" href="#bibtex-field-types-type"
+title="3.5.21 type field">type</a>, <a class="link" href=
+"#bibtex-field-types-number" title=
+"3.5.14 number field">number</a>, <a class="link" href=
+"#bibtex-field-types-address" title=
+"3.5.1 address field">address</a>, <a class="link" href=
+"#bibtex-field-types-month" title="3.5.12 month field">month</a>,
+<a class="link" href="#bibtex-field-types-note" title=
+"3.5.13 note field">note</a>, <a class="link" href=
+"#bibtex-field-types-key" title="3.5.11 key field">key</a></p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="3.3.14 unpublished entry">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="bibtex-entry-types-unpublished" name=
+"bibtex-entry-types-unpublished"></a>3.3.14 unpublished entry</h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp11978032" class="indexterm" name="idp11978032"></a>
+<p>A document with an author and title, but not formally
+published.</p>
+<p>Format:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+@UNPUBLISHED{citation_key,
+ required_fields [, optional_fields] }
+</pre>
+<p>Required fields: <a class="link" href=
+"#bibtex-field-types-author" title="3.5.3 author field">author</a>,
+<a class="link" href="#bibtex-field-types-title" title=
+"3.5.20 title field">title</a>, <a class="link" href=
+"#bibtex-field-types-note" title="3.5.13 note field">note</a></p>
+<p>Optional fields: <a class="link" href=
+"#bibtex-field-types-month" title="3.5.12 month field">month</a>,
+<a class="link" href="#bibtex-field-types-year" title=
+"3.5.23 year field">year</a>, <a class="link" href=
+"#bibtex-field-types-key" title="3.5.11 key field">key</a></p>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="3.4 Field Text">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="bibtex-field-text" name=
+"bibtex-field-text"></a>3.4 Field Text</h3>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp11988768" class="indexterm" name="idp11988768"></a>
+<p>The text of the field is enclosed in braces or double quote
+characters. A part of the text is said to be enclosed in braces if
+it lies inside a matching pair of braces other than the ones
+enclosing the entire entry or the entire field text.</p>
+<p>BibTeX manipulates the case of letters in the field text as
+described in the subtopics below.</p>
+<div class="section" title="3.4.1 Names">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="bibtex-field-text-names" name=
+"bibtex-field-text-names"></a>3.4.1 Names</h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp11993216" class="indexterm" name="idp11993216"></a>
+<p>The text of an author or editor field represents a list of
+names. The bibliography style determines the format in which the
+name is printed: whether the first name or last name appears first,
+if the full first name or just the first initial is used, etc. The
+bibliography file entry simply tells BibTeX what the name is.</p>
+<p>You should type an author's complete name and let the
+bibliography style decide what to abbreviate. (But an author's
+complete name may be "Donald~E. Knuth" or even "J.~P.~Morgan"; you
+should type it the way the author would like it to appear, if
+that's known.)</p>
+<p>Most names can be entered in the obvious way, either with or
+without a comma, as in the following examples:</p>
+<p>"John Paul Jones" "Jones, John Paul" "Ludwig von Beethoven" "von
+Beethoven, Ludwig"</p>
+<p>Some people have multiple last names - for example, Per Brinch
+Hansen's last name is Brinch~Hansen. His name should be typed with
+a comma:</p>
+<p>"Brinch Hansen, Per"</p>
+<p>To understand why, you must understand how BibTeX handles names
+(for what follows, a "name" corresponds to a person).</p>
+<p>Each name consists of four parts: First, von, Last, and~Jr; each
+part consists of a (possibly empty) list of name-tokens. For
+example the First part of Per Brinch~Hansen's name has the single
+token "Per"; the Last part has two, "Brinch" and "Hansen"; and the
+von and Jr parts are empty. If you had typed</p>
+<p>"Per Brinch Hansen"</p>
+<p>instead, BibTeX would erroneously think "Brinch" were a
+First-part token, just as "Paul" is a First-part token in
+"John~Paul Jones".</p>
+<p>Here's another example:</p>
+<p>"Charles Louis Xavier Joseph de la Vallee Poussin"</p>
+<p>This name has four tokens in the First part, two in the von, and
+two in the Last. Here BibTeX knows where one part ends and the
+other begins because the tokens in the von part begin with
+lower-case letters.</p>
+<p>If you want BibTeX to consider something a single token, enclose
+it in braces. You should do this, for example, if a comma is part
+of a name:</p>
+<p>"{Barnes and Noble, Inc.}" "{Barnes and} {Noble, Inc.}"
+"{Barnes} {and} {Noble,} {Inc.}"</p>
+<p>The braces surrounding the comma keep "Inc." from being
+interpreted as a First token; this name has only a Last part, with
+either one, two, or four tokens (there must be a space separating
+the tokens in the second and third forms). Probably the second form
+is slightly more meaningful, but don't lose sleep over this since
+only rarely will an institution be an author or editor.</p>
+<p>So the two names</p>
+<p>"von Beethoven, Ludwig" "{von Beethoven}, Ludwig"</p>
+<p>are considered by BibTeX to be different names. In the first,
+"Beethoven" is the Last part and "von" is the von part; in the
+second, which in this case happens to be incorrect, the Last part
+has a single token and there's no von part. The bibliography style
+will probably print both the same, but it may alphabetize and label
+them differently.</p>
+<p>"Juniors" pose a special problem. Most people having "Jr." in
+their name precede it with a comma. Such a name should be entered
+as follows:</p>
+<p>"Ford, Jr., Henry"</p>
+<p>However, a few people do not use a comma. They are handled by
+considering the "Jr." to be part of the last Last token:</p>
+<p>"{Steele Jr.}, Guy L." "Guy L. {Steele Jr.}"</p>
+<p>This name has no Jr part.</p>
+<p>To summarize, you may type a name in one of three forms:</p>
+<p>"First von Last" "von Last, First" "von Last, Jr, First"</p>
+<p>You may almost always use the first form; you shouldn't if
+either there's a Jr part or the Last part has multiple tokens but
+there's no von part.</p>
+<p>If there are multiple authors or editors, their names must be
+separated by the word "and", surrounded by spaces, not enclosed in
+braces:</p>
+<p>AUTHOR = "Ralph Alpher and Bethe, Hans and George Gamow"</p>
+<p>Since BibTeX interprets commas as separating parts of a name and
+"and" as separating names themselves, this example has three
+coauthors: Ralph Alpher, Hans Bethe, and George Gamow. If the word
+"and" appears as part of a name, it must be enclosed in braces, as
+in the example of "Barnes and Noble,~Inc." given above. If you have
+too many names to list in a field, you can end the list with "and
+others"; the standard styles appropriately append an "et al."</p>
+<p>BibTeX's rules are actually a bit more complicated than
+indicated here, but this description will suffice for most
+names.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="3.4.2 Titles">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="bibtex-field-text-titles" name=
+"bibtex-field-text-titles"></a>3.4.2 Titles</h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp12016768" class="indexterm" name="idp12016768"></a>
+<p>The bibliography style determines whether or not a title is
+capitalized; the titles of books usually are, the title of articles
+usually are not. You type a title the way it should appear if it is
+capitalized (you should capitalize everything but articles and
+unstressed conjunctions and prepositions, and even these should be
+capitalized as the first word or the first after a colon):</p>
+<p>TITLE = "The Agony and the Ecstasy"</p>
+<p>BibTeX will change uppercase letters to lowercase if
+appropriate. Uppercase letters that should not be changed are
+enclosed in braces. The following two titles are equivalent; the
+"A" of "Africa" will not be made lowercase.</p>
+<p>"The Gnats and Gnus of {Africa}" "The Gnats and Gnus of
+{A}frica"</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="3.4.3 Abbreviations">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="bibtex-field-text-abbr" name=
+"bibtex-field-text-abbr"></a>3.4.3 Abbreviations</h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp12022560" class="indexterm" name="idp12022560"></a>
+<p>Instead of an ordinary text string, the text of a field can be
+replaced by an abbreviation for it. An abbreviation is a string of
+characters that starts with a letter and does not contain a space
+or any of the following ten characters:</p>
+<p><code class="literal">" # % ' ( ) , = { }</code></p>
+<p>The abbreviation is typed in place of the text field, with no
+braces or quotation marks. If 'jgg1' is an abbreviation for</p>
+<p>Journal of Gnats and Gnus, Series~1</p>
+<p>then the following are equivalent:</p>
+<p>JOURNAL = jgg1 JOURNAL = "Journal of Gnats and Gnus,
+Series~1"</p>
+<p>Some abbreviations are predefined by the bibliography style.
+These always include the usual 3 letter abbreviations for the
+month: jan, feb, mar etc.</p>
+<p>Bibliography styles usually contain abbreviations for the names
+of commonly referenced journals. Consult the Local Guide for a list
+of the predefined abbreviations for the bibliography styles
+available.</p>
+<p>You can define your own abbreviations by using BibTeX's
+<code class="literal">@STRING</code> command.</p>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="3.5 Field Types">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="bibtex-field-types" name=
+"bibtex-field-types"></a>3.5 Field Types</h3>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp12031968" class="indexterm" name="idp12031968"></a>
+<p>Below is a list of all fields recognized by the standard
+bibliography styles. An entry can also contain other fields, which
+are ignored by those styles.</p>
+<p>BibTeX ignores the case of letters in the field names.</p>
+<div class="section" title="3.5.1 address field">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="bibtex-field-types-address" name=
+"bibtex-field-types-address"></a>3.5.1 address field</h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp12036352" class="indexterm" name="idp12036352"></a>
+<p>Publisher's address. For major publishing houses, just the city
+is given. For small publishers, you can help the reader by giving
+the complete address.</p>
+<p>Format:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+ADDRESS = field_text
+</pre></div>
+<div class="section" title="3.5.2 annote field">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="bibtex-field-types-annote" name=
+"bibtex-field-types-annote"></a>3.5.2 annote field</h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp12041232" class="indexterm" name="idp12041232"></a>
+<p>An annotation, used only for annotated bibliography styles
+(which are not among the standard ones).</p>
+<p>Format:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+ANNOTE = field_text
+</pre></div>
+<div class="section" title="3.5.3 author field">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="bibtex-field-types-author" name=
+"bibtex-field-types-author"></a>3.5.3 author field</h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp12046016" class="indexterm" name="idp12046016"></a>
+<p>The name(s) of the author(s).</p>
+<p>Format:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+AUTHOR = field_text
+</pre></div>
+<div class="section" title="3.5.4 booktitle field">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="bibtex-field-types-booktitle" name=
+"bibtex-field-types-booktitle"></a>3.5.4 booktitle field</h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp12050720" class="indexterm" name="idp12050720"></a>
+<p>Title of a book, part of which is being cited.</p>
+<p>Format:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+BOOKTITLE = field_text
+</pre></div>
+<div class="section" title="3.5.5 chapter field">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="bibtex-field-types-chapter" name=
+"bibtex-field-types-chapter"></a>3.5.5 chapter field</h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp12055440" class="indexterm" name="idp12055440"></a>
+<p>A chapter number.</p>
+<p>Format:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+CHAPTER = field_text
+</pre></div>
+<div class="section" title="3.5.6 edition field">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="bibtex-field-types-edition" name=
+"bibtex-field-types-edition"></a>3.5.6 edition field</h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp12060128" class="indexterm" name="idp12060128"></a>
+<p>The edition of a book - for example, "second".</p>
+<p>Format:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+EDITION = field_text
+</pre></div>
+<div class="section" title="3.5.7 editor field">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="bibtex-field-types-editor" name=
+"bibtex-field-types-editor"></a>3.5.7 editor field</h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp12064848" class="indexterm" name="idp12064848"></a>
+<p>Name(s) of editor(s). If there is also an "author" field, then
+the "editor" field gives the editor of the book or collection in
+which the reference appears.</p>
+<p>Format:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+EDITOR = field_text
+</pre></div>
+<div class="section" title="3.5.8 howpublished field">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="bibtex-field-types-howpublished" name=
+"bibtex-field-types-howpublished"></a>3.5.8 howpublished field</h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp12069696" class="indexterm" name="idp12069696"></a>
+<p>How something strange has been published.</p>
+<p>Format:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+HOWPUBLISHED = field_text
+</pre></div>
+<div class="section" title="3.5.9 institution field">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="bibtex-field-types-institution" name=
+"bibtex-field-types-institution"></a>3.5.9 institution field</h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp12074432" class="indexterm" name="idp12074432"></a>
+<p>The institution that published the work.</p>
+<p>Format:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+INSTITUTION = field_text
+</pre></div>
+<div class="section" title="3.5.10 journal field">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="bibtex-field-types-journal" name=
+"bibtex-field-types-journal"></a>3.5.10 journal field</h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp12079168" class="indexterm" name="idp12079168"></a>
+<p>A journal name. Abbreviations are provided for many journals;
+see the Local Guide.</p>
+<p>Format:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+JOURNAL = field_text
+</pre></div>
+<div class="section" title="3.5.11 key field">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="bibtex-field-types-key" name=
+"bibtex-field-types-key"></a>3.5.11 key field</h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp12083904" class="indexterm" name="idp12083904"></a>
+<p>Used for alphabetizing and creating a label when the "author"
+and "editor" fields are missing. This field should not be confused
+with the citation key that appears in the <code class=
+"literal">\cite</code> command and at the beginning of the
+entry.</p>
+<p>Format:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+KEY = field_text
+</pre></div>
+<div class="section" title="3.5.12 month field">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="bibtex-field-types-month" name=
+"bibtex-field-types-month"></a>3.5.12 month field</h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp12089520" class="indexterm" name="idp12089520"></a>
+<p>The month in which the work was published or, for an unpublished
+work, in which it was written.</p>
+<p>Format:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+MONTH = field_text
+</pre></div>
+<div class="section" title="3.5.13 note field">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="bibtex-field-types-note" name=
+"bibtex-field-types-note"></a>3.5.13 note field</h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp12094272" class="indexterm" name="idp12094272"></a>
+<p>Any additional information that can help the reader.</p>
+<p>Format:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+NOTE = field_text
+</pre></div>
+<div class="section" title="3.5.14 number field">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="bibtex-field-types-number" name=
+"bibtex-field-types-number"></a>3.5.14 number field</h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp12099008" class="indexterm" name="idp12099008"></a>
+<p>The number of a journal, magazine, or technical report. An issue
+of a journal or magazine is usually identified by its volume and
+number; the organization that issues a technical report usually
+gives it a number.</p>
+<p>Format:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+NUMBER = field_text
+</pre></div>
+<div class="section" title="3.5.15 organization field">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="bibtex-field-types-organization" name=
+"bibtex-field-types-organization"></a>3.5.15 organization
+field</h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp12103920" class="indexterm" name="idp12103920"></a>
+<p>The organization sponsoring a conference.</p>
+<p>Format:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+ORGANIZATION = field_text
+</pre></div>
+<div class="section" title="3.5.16 pages field">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="bibtex-field-types-pages" name=
+"bibtex-field-types-pages"></a>3.5.16 pages field</h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp12108656" class="indexterm" name="idp12108656"></a>
+<p>A page number or range of numbers such as "42--111"; you may
+also have several of these, separating them with commas:
+"7,41,73--97". The standard styles convert a single dash to a
+double. &gt;</p>
+<p>Format:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+PAGES = field_text
+</pre></div>
+<div class="section" title="3.5.17 publisher field">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="bibtex-field-types-publisher" name=
+"bibtex-field-types-publisher"></a>3.5.17 publisher field</h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp12113744" class="indexterm" name="idp12113744"></a>
+<p>The publisher's name.</p>
+<p>Format:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+PUBLISHER = field_text
+</pre></div>
+<div class="section" title="3.5.18 school field">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="bibtex-field-types-school" name=
+"bibtex-field-types-school"></a>3.5.18 school field</h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp12118448" class="indexterm" name="idp12118448"></a>
+<p>The name of the school where a thesis was written.</p>
+<p>Format:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+SCHOOL = field_text
+</pre></div>
+<div class="section" title="3.5.19 series field">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="bibtex-field-types-series" name=
+"bibtex-field-types-series"></a>3.5.19 series field</h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp12123168" class="indexterm" name="idp12123168"></a>
+<p>The name of a series or set of books. When citing an entire
+book, the the "title" field gives its title and an optional
+"series" field gives the name of a series in which the book is
+published.</p>
+<p>Format:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+SERIES = field_text
+</pre></div>
+<div class="section" title="3.5.20 title field">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="bibtex-field-types-title" name=
+"bibtex-field-types-title"></a>3.5.20 title field</h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp12128048" class="indexterm" name="idp12128048"></a>
+<p>The work's title.</p>
+<p>Format:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+TITLE = field_text
+</pre></div>
+<div class="section" title="3.5.21 type field">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="bibtex-field-types-type" name=
+"bibtex-field-types-type"></a>3.5.21 type field</h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp12132704" class="indexterm" name="idp12132704"></a>
+<p>The type of a technical report - for example, "Research
+Note".</p>
+<p>Format:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+TYPE = field_text
+</pre></div>
+<div class="section" title="3.5.22 volume field">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="bibtex-field-types-volume" name=
+"bibtex-field-types-volume"></a>3.5.22 volume field</h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp12137440" class="indexterm" name="idp12137440"></a>
+<p>The volume of a journal or multivolume book work.</p>
+<p>Format:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+VOLUME = field_text
+</pre></div>
+<div class="section" title="3.5.23 year field">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="bibtex-field-types-year" name=
+"bibtex-field-types-year"></a>3.5.23 year field</h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp12142128" class="indexterm" name="idp12142128"></a>
+<p>The year of publication or, for an unpublished work, the year it
+was written. This field's text should contain only numerals.</p>
+<p>Format:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+YEAR = field_text
+</pre></div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="4 bst files">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h2 class="title" style="clear: both"><a id="bibtex-bst-files"
+name="bibtex-bst-files"></a>4 bst files</h2>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp12147168" class="indexterm" name="idp12147168"></a>
+<p>Bibliography style files define the style of a bibliography
+source list.</p>
+<p>The standard bibliography style files are <a class="link" href=
+"#bibtex-bst-plain" title="4.3 PLAIN.BST"><code class=
+"filename">PLAIN</code></a>, <a class="link" href=
+"#bibtex-bst-unsrt" title="4.5 UNSRT.BST"><code class=
+"filename">UNSRT</code></a>, <a class="link" href=
+"#bibtex-bst-alpha" title="4.2 ALPHA.BST"><code class=
+"filename">ALPHA</code></a> and <a class="link" href=
+"#bibtex-bst-abbr" title="4.1 ABBRV.BST"><code class=
+"filename">ABBRV</code></a>.</p>
+<p>If you want to make a bibliography style of your own, look at
+<a class="link" href="#bibtex-bst-sample" title=
+"4.4 SAMPLE.BST"><code class="filename">SAMPLE.BST</code></a>.</p>
+<div class="section" title="4.1 ABBRV.BST">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="bibtex-bst-abbr" name=
+"bibtex-bst-abbr"></a>4.1 <code class=
+"filename">ABBRV.BST</code></h3>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp12159760" class="indexterm" name="idp12159760"></a>
+<p>This style is the same as the style defined in <code class=
+"filename">PLAIN.BST</code>, except that entries are more compact
+because first names, month names and journal names are
+abbreviated.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="4.2 ALPHA.BST">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="bibtex-bst-alpha" name=
+"bibtex-bst-alpha"></a>4.2 <code class=
+"filename">ALPHA.BST</code></h3>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp12164832" class="indexterm" name="idp12164832"></a>
+<p>This style is the same as the style defined in <code class=
+"filename">PLAIN.BST</code> except that entry labels like "Knu66",
+formed from the author's name and the year of publication, are
+used.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="4.3 PLAIN.BST">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="bibtex-bst-plain" name=
+"bibtex-bst-plain"></a>4.3 <code class=
+"filename">PLAIN.BST</code></h3>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp12169904" class="indexterm" name="idp12169904"></a>
+<p>This style is formatted more or less as suggested by Mary-Claire
+van Leunen in "A Handbook for Scholars" (Alfred A. Knopf, New York,
+1979). Entries are sorted alphabetically and are labelled with
+numbers.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="4.4 SAMPLE.BST">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="bibtex-bst-sample" name=
+"bibtex-bst-sample"></a>4.4 <code class=
+"filename">SAMPLE.BST</code></h3>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp12174320" class="indexterm" name="idp12174320"></a>
+<p>This is a sample bibliography style file meant to help you
+construct a new style. It creates a bibliography in which entries
+appear as follows:</p>
+<p>[Jones79] Jones, R. L. and Richards, P. Q. The Birds and the
+Bees. {\it Journal of Irreproducible Results 4}, 2 (Jan. 1979),
+27-33.</p>
+<p>[Jones82a] Jones, P. G. The Bees and the Trees ... (1982).</p>
+<p>[Jones82b] Jones, R. L. The Trees and the Peas ... (1982).</p>
+<p>[Krist74] Kristofferson, R. P. Peopl and Places ... (1974)</p>
+<p>It should illustrate how you write a style file. The functions
+are described in an informal Pascal-like style in comments. Because
+of the way while loops and if-then-else statements must use
+functions, the following convention is used. If a while loop is
+labeled 'foo' in the informal description, then its test and body
+are the functions named 'foo.test' and 'foo.body'. If an if
+statement is labeled 'foo', then its two clauses are the functions
+named 'foo.then' and 'foo.else'. (Null clauses just use the 'skip$'
+function.) Note that because functions have to be defined in terms
+of already-defined functions, the actual function definitions are
+given in a 'bottom-up' order.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="4.5 UNSRT.BST">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="bibtex-bst-unsrt" name=
+"bibtex-bst-unsrt"></a>4.5 <code class=
+"filename">UNSRT.BST</code></h3>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp12182448" class="indexterm" name="idp12182448"></a>
+<p>This style is that same as <code class=
+"filename">PLAIN.BST</code> except that entries appear in the order
+of their first citation.</p>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div xml:lang="en" class="chapter" title=
+"Chapter&nbsp;6.&nbsp;Make-Index" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h2 class="title"><a id="makeindex" name=
+"makeindex"></a>Chapter&nbsp;6.&nbsp;Make-Index</h2>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="toc">
+<p><strong>Table of Contents</strong></p>
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#makeindex-options">1
+Options</a></span></dt>
+<dd>
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#makeindex-option-c">1.1
+<code class="filename">-c</code></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#makeindex-option-g">1.2
+<code class="filename">-g</code></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#makeindex-option-i">1.3
+<code class="filename">-i</code></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#makeindex-option-l">1.4
+<code class="filename">-l</code></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#makeindex-option-q">1.5
+<code class="filename">-q</code></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#makeindex-option-r">1.6
+<code class="filename">-r</code></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#makeindex-option-s-sty">1.7
+<code class="filename">-s sty</code></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#makeindex-option-o-ind">1.8
+<code class="filename">-o ind</code></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#makeindex-option-t-log">1.9
+<code class="filename">-t log</code></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#makeindex-option-p-no">1.10
+<code class="filename">-p no</code></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#makeindex-option-L">1.11
+<code class="filename">-L</code></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#makeindex-option-T">1.12
+<code class="filename">-T</code></a></span></dt>
+</dl>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#makeindex-style-file">2 Style
+File</a></span></dt>
+<dd>
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#makeindex-style">2.1 Input
+Style Specifiers</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href=
+"#makeindex-output-style-specs">2.2 Output Style
+Specifiers</a></span></dt>
+</dl>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#makeindex-example">3
+Example</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#makeindex-ordering">4
+Ordering</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#makeindex-special-effects">5
+Special Effects</a></span></dt>
+</dl>
+</div>
+<a id="idp12187760" class="indexterm" name="idp12187760"></a>
+<div class="note" title="Note" style=
+"margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;">
+<h3 class="title">Note</h3>
+<p>The contents of this section was taken from the HTML helppages
+for Make-Index of Norman Walsh (Version 1.0, 12 Apr 94).</p>
+<p>Some obvious errors in this documentation have been corrected
+according to <code class="filename">makeindex(1L)</code>.</p>
+<p>Additional information was taken from <code class=
+"filename">makeindex(1L)</code> and the program source files as
+found in teTeX 2.0.2.</p>
+</div>
+<p>Make-Index is a general purpose index processor. It takes one or
+more raw index files (normally generated by a formatter), sorts the
+entries, and produces the actual index file. It is not dependent on
+any particular format of raw index file, although the <code class=
+"literal">.idx</code> file generated by LaTeX is the default. Up to
+three levels (0, 1, and 2) of subitem nesting within the same entry
+is supported. The input format may be redefined in a style file so
+that raw index or glossary output from other formatters may be
+processed. The style file also defines the style of output index
+file. Unless specified otherwise, the file name base of the first
+input file (<code class="literal">idx0</code>) is used to determine
+other related input/output files. The default input file type is
+<code class="literal">.idx</code>.</p>
+<div class="section" title="1 Options">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h2 class="title" style="clear: both"><a id="makeindex-options"
+name="makeindex-options"></a>1 Options</h2>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp12198800" class="indexterm" name="idp12198800"></a>
+<p>Make-Index is a Unix program, and therefore has a Unix-style
+command line. Instead of qualifiers delimited with a slash
+(<code class="literal">/</code>), Make-Index options are delimited
+with a hyphen (<code class="literal">-</code>).</p>
+<div class="section" title="1.1 -c">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="makeindex-option-c" name=
+"makeindex-option-c"></a>1.1 <code class="filename">-c</code></h3>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp12204800" class="indexterm" name="idp12204800"></a>
+<p>Enable blank compression. By default every blank counts in the
+index key. The <code class="literal">-c</code> option ignores
+leading and trailing blanks and tabs and compresses intermediate
+ones to a single space.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="1.2 -g">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="makeindex-option-g" name=
+"makeindex-option-g"></a>1.2 <code class="filename">-g</code></h3>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp12209856" class="indexterm" name="idp12209856"></a>
+<p>Employ German word ordering in the index, in accord with rules
+set forth in DIN 5007. The quote character must be redefined in a
+style file (for example, redefine quote as <code class=
+"literal">'+'</code>). If the quote character is not redefined,
+Make-Index will produce an error message and abort.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="1.3 -i">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="makeindex-option-i" name=
+"makeindex-option-i"></a>1.3 <code class="filename">-i</code></h3>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp12215424" class="indexterm" name="idp12215424"></a>
+<p>Use <code class="literal">stdin</code> as the input file. When
+this option is specified and the <code class="literal">-o</code> is
+not, output is written to <code class="literal">stdout</code>.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="1.4 -l">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="makeindex-option-l" name=
+"makeindex-option-l"></a>1.4 <code class="filename">-l</code></h3>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp12221792" class="indexterm" name="idp12221792"></a>
+<p>Use letter ordering. Default is word ordering (explained in the
+<a class="link" href="#makeindex-ordering" title=
+"4 Ordering">Ordering</a> section).</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="1.5 -q">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="makeindex-option-q" name=
+"makeindex-option-q"></a>1.5 <code class="filename">-q</code></h3>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp12227040" class="indexterm" name="idp12227040"></a>
+<p>Quiet mode, send no messages to <code class=
+"literal">stderr</code>. By default progress and error messages are
+sent to <code class="literal">stderr</code> as well as the
+transcript file. The <code class="literal">-q</code> option
+disables the <code class="literal">stderr</code> messages.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="1.6 -r">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="makeindex-option-r" name=
+"makeindex-option-r"></a>1.6 <code class="filename">-r</code></h3>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp12234176" class="indexterm" name="idp12234176"></a>
+<p>Disable implicit page range formation. By default three or more
+successive pages will be automatically abbreviated as a range (e.g.
+1--5). The <code class="literal">-r</code> option disables it,
+making the explicit range operators the only way to create page
+ranges (see the <a class="link" href="#makeindex-special-effects"
+title="5 Special Effects">Special Effects</a> section below).</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="1.7 -s sty">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="makeindex-option-s-sty" name=
+"makeindex-option-s-sty"></a>1.7 <code class="filename">-s
+sty</code></h3>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp12240224" class="indexterm" name="idp12240224"></a>
+<p>Take <code class="literal">sty</code> as the style file. There
+is no default for the style file name. The environment variable
+INDEXSTYLE defines the path where the style file should be
+found.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="1.8 -o ind">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="makeindex-option-o-ind" name=
+"makeindex-option-o-ind"></a>1.8 <code class="filename">-o
+ind</code></h3>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp12245328" class="indexterm" name="idp12245328"></a>
+<p>Take <code class="literal">ind</code> as the output index file.
+By default the file name base of the first input file <code class=
+"literal">idx0</code> concatenated with the extension <code class=
+"literal">.ind</code> is used as the output file name.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="1.9 -t log">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="makeindex-option-t-log" name=
+"makeindex-option-t-log"></a>1.9 <code class="filename">-t
+log</code></h3>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp12251840" class="indexterm" name="idp12251840"></a>
+<p>Take <code class="literal">log</code> as the transcript file. By
+default the file name base of the first input file <code class=
+"literal">idx0</code> concatenated with the extension <code class=
+"literal">.ilg</code> is used as the transcript file name.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="1.10 -p no">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="makeindex-option-p-no" name=
+"makeindex-option-p-no"></a>1.10 <code class="filename">-p
+no</code></h3>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp12258352" class="indexterm" name="idp12258352"></a>
+<p>Set the starting page number of the output index file to be
+<code class="literal">no</code>. This is useful when the index file
+is to be formatted separately. Other than pure numbers, three
+special cases are allowed for no: <code class="literal">any</code>,
+<code class="literal">odd</code>, and <code class=
+"literal">even</code>. In these special cases, the starting page
+number is determined by retrieving the last page number from the
+source log file. The source log file name is determined by
+concatenating the file name base of the first raw index file
+(<code class="literal">idx0</code>) with the extension <code class=
+"literal">.log</code>. The last source page is obtained by
+searching backward in the log file for the first instance of a
+number included in <code class="literal">[...]</code>. If a page
+number is missing or the log file is not found, no attempt will be
+made to set the starting page number. The meaning of each of these
+cases follows:</p>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="term">any</span></dt>
+<dd>
+<p>The starting page is the last source page number plus 1.</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term">odd</span></dt>
+<dd>
+<p>The starting page is the first odd page following the last
+source page number.</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term">even</span></dt>
+<dd>
+<p>The starting page is the first even page following the last
+source page number.</p>
+</dd>
+</dl>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="1.11 -L">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="makeindex-option-L" name=
+"makeindex-option-L"></a>1.11 <code class="filename">-L</code></h3>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp12273584" class="indexterm" name="idp12273584"></a>
+<p>Sort based on locale settings. String comparisons for sorting
+are done using <span class=
+"command"><strong>strcoll(3)</strong></span>, which compares
+strings according to the current locale category <code class=
+"literal">LC_COLLATE</code>.</p>
+<p>Not available on all systems (depends on compile time
+settings).</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="1.12 -T">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="makeindex-option-T" name=
+"makeindex-option-T"></a>1.12 <code class="filename">-T</code></h3>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp12279792" class="indexterm" name="idp12279792"></a>
+<p>Special support for Thai documents.</p>
+<p>Not available on all systems (depends on compile time
+settings).</p>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="2 Style File">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h2 class="title" style="clear: both"><a id="makeindex-style-file"
+name="makeindex-style-file"></a>2 Style File</h2>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp12283920" class="indexterm" name="idp12283920"></a>
+<p>The style file format is very simple. It is a list of
+<code class="literal">&lt;specifier, attribute&gt;</code> pairs.
+There are two types of specifiers (input and output). The pairs
+don't have to obey any particular order in the file. A line lead by
+`<code class="literal">%</code>' is a comment. The following is a
+list of all the specifiers and their respective arguments where
+<code class="literal">&lt;string&gt;</code> is an arbitrary string
+delimited by double quotes (<code class="literal">"..."</code>),
+<code class="literal">&lt;char&gt;</code> is a single letter
+embraced by single quotes (<code class="literal">'...'</code>), and
+<code class="literal">&lt;number&gt;</code> is a nonnegative
+integer. The maximum length of a <code class=
+"literal">&lt;string&gt;</code> is 144. Notice that a backslash
+must be escaped (by an extra backslash) in the string quotation.
+Anything not specified in the style file will be assigned a default
+value, which is shown on a separate line. This file can reside
+anywhere in the path defined by the environment variable
+<code class="envar">INDEXSTYLE</code>.</p>
+<div class="section" title="2.1 Input Style Specifiers">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="makeindex-style" name=
+"makeindex-style"></a>2.1 Input Style Specifiers</h3>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp12293760" class="indexterm" name="idp12293760"></a>
+<div class="section" title="2.1.1 actual &lt;char&gt;">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="makeindex-actual-char" name=
+"makeindex-actual-char"></a>2.1.1 actual &lt;char&gt;</h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp12296400" class="indexterm" name="idp12296400"></a>
+<p>Default: <code class="literal">@</code></p>
+<p>The symbol which indicates that the next entry is to appear in
+the actual index file.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="2.1.2 arg_close &lt;char&gt;">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="makeindex-arg-close" name=
+"makeindex-arg-close"></a>2.1.2 arg_close &lt;char&gt;</h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp12301072" class="indexterm" name="idp12301072"></a>
+<p>Default: <code class="literal">}</code></p>
+<p>This is the closing delimiter for the index entry argument.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="2.1.3 arg_open &lt;char&gt;">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="makeindex-style-arg-open" name=
+"makeindex-style-arg-open"></a>2.1.3 arg_open &lt;char&gt;</h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp12305792" class="indexterm" name="idp12305792"></a>
+<p>Default: <code class="literal">{</code></p>
+<p>This is the opening delimiter for the index entry argument.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="2.1.4 encap &lt;char&gt;">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="makeindex-encap-char" name=
+"makeindex-encap-char"></a>2.1.4 encap &lt;char&gt;</h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp12310336" class="indexterm" name="idp12310336"></a>
+<p>Default: <code class="literal">|</code></p>
+<p>The symbol which indicates that the rest of the argument list is
+to be used as the encapsulating command for the page number.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="2.1.5 escape &lt;char&gt;">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="makeindex-escape-char" name=
+"makeindex-escape-char"></a>2.1.5 escape &lt;char&gt;</h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp12315072" class="indexterm" name="idp12315072"></a>
+<p>Default: <code class="literal">\\</code></p>
+<p>The symbol which escapes the next letter, unless its preceding
+letter is escape. In other words, quote is used to escape the
+letter which immediately follows it. But if it is preceded by
+escape, it does not escape anything.</p>
+<p>Notice that the two symbols must be distinct.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="2.1.6 keyword &lt;string&gt;">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="makeindex-style-string" name=
+"makeindex-style-string"></a>2.1.6 keyword &lt;string&gt;</h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp12320288" class="indexterm" name="idp12320288"></a>
+<p>Default: <code class="literal">"\\indexentry"</code></p>
+<p>This is the command which tells Make-Index that its argument is
+an index entry.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="2.1.7 level &lt;char&gt;">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="makeindex-level-char" name=
+"makeindex-level-char"></a>2.1.7 level &lt;char&gt;</h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp12325360" class="indexterm" name="idp12325360"></a>
+<p>Default: <code class="literal">!</code></p>
+<p>The delimiter which denotes a new level of subitem.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="2.1.8 quote &lt;char&gt;">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="makeindex-quote-char" name=
+"makeindex-quote-char"></a>2.1.8 quote &lt;char&gt;</h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp12329888" class="indexterm" name="idp12329888"></a>
+<p>Default: <code class="literal">"</code></p>
+<p><code class="literal">quote</code> is used to escape the letter
+which immediately follows it, but if it is preceded by escape, it
+is treated as a ordinary character. These two symbols must be
+distinct.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="2.1.9 range_close &lt;char&gt;">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="makeindex-range-close" name=
+"makeindex-range-close"></a>2.1.9 range_close &lt;char&gt;</h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp12335216" class="indexterm" name="idp12335216"></a>
+<p>Default: <code class="literal">)</code></p>
+<p>The closing delimiter indicating the end of an explicit page
+range.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="2.1.10 range_open &lt;char&gt;">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="makeindex-range-open" name=
+"makeindex-range-open"></a>2.1.10 range_open &lt;char&gt;</h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp12339680" class="indexterm" name="idp12339680"></a>
+<p>Default: <code class="literal">(</code></p>
+<p>The opening delimiter indicating the beginning of an explicit
+page range.</p>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="2.2 Output Style Specifiers">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="makeindex-output-style-specs" name=
+"makeindex-output-style-specs"></a>2.2 Output Style Specifiers</h3>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp12344320" class="indexterm" name="idp12344320"></a>
+<div class="section" title="2.2.1 page_compositor &lt;string&gt;">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="makeindex-page-compositor" name=
+"makeindex-page-compositor"></a>2.2.1 page_compositor
+&lt;string&gt;</h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp12347008" class="indexterm" name="idp12347008"></a>
+<p>Default: <code class="literal">"-"</code></p>
+<p>This specifier is used to separate a range of page numbers.</p>
+<p>Officially undocumented!</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="2.2.2 preamble &lt;string&gt;">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="makeindex-output-preamble-string" name=
+"makeindex-output-preamble-string"></a>2.2.2 preamble
+&lt;string&gt;</h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp12352112" class="indexterm" name="idp12352112"></a>
+<p>Default: <code class="literal">"\\begin{theindex}\n"</code></p>
+<p>The preamble of actual index file.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="2.2.3 postamble &lt;string&gt;">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="makeindex-output-postamble-string" name=
+"makeindex-output-postamble-string"></a>2.2.3 postamble
+&lt;string&gt;</h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp12356736" class="indexterm" name="idp12356736"></a>
+<p>Default: <code class=
+"literal">"\n\n\\end{theindex}\n"</code></p>
+<p>The postamble of actual index file.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="2.2.4 setpage_prefix &lt;string&gt;">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="makeindex-output-setpage-prefix" name=
+"makeindex-output-setpage-prefix"></a>2.2.4 setpage_prefix
+&lt;string&gt;</h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp12361376" class="indexterm" name="idp12361376"></a>
+<p>Default: <code class="literal">"\n
+\\setcounter{page}{"</code></p>
+<p>The prefix of the command which sets the starting page
+number.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="2.2.5 setpage_suffix &lt;string&gt;">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="makeindex-output-setpage-suffix" name=
+"makeindex-output-setpage-suffix"></a>2.2.5 setpage_suffix
+&lt;string&gt;</h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp12366064" class="indexterm" name="idp12366064"></a>
+<p>Default: <code class="literal">"}\n"</code></p>
+<p>The suffix of the command which sets the starting page
+number.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="2.2.6 group_skip &lt;string&gt;">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="makeindex-output-group-skip" name=
+"makeindex-output-group-skip"></a>2.2.6 group_skip
+&lt;string&gt;</h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp12370736" class="indexterm" name="idp12370736"></a>
+<p>Default: <code class="literal">"\n\n \\indexspace\n"</code></p>
+<p>The vertical space to be inserted before a new group begins.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="2.2.7 heading_prefix &lt;string&gt;">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="makeindex-output-heading-prefix-string"
+name="makeindex-output-heading-prefix-string"></a>2.2.7
+heading_prefix &lt;string&gt;</h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp12375408" class="indexterm" name="idp12375408"></a>
+<p>Default: <code class="literal">""</code></p>
+<p>The header prefix to be inserted before a new letter begins.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="2.2.8 heading_suffix &lt;string&gt;">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="makeindex-output-heading-suffix-string"
+name="makeindex-output-heading-suffix-string"></a>2.2.8
+heading_suffix &lt;string&gt;</h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp12380048" class="indexterm" name="idp12380048"></a>
+<p>Default: <code class="literal">""</code></p>
+<p>The header suffix to be inserted before a new letter begins.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="2.2.9 headings_flag &lt;string&gt;">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="makeindex-output-headings-flag" name=
+"makeindex-output-headings-flag"></a>2.2.9 headings_flag
+&lt;string&gt;</h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp12384624" class="indexterm" name="idp12384624"></a>
+<p>Default: <code class="literal">0</code></p>
+<p>The flag indicating the condition of inserting new letter
+header. Default is 0, which means no header. Positive means insert
+an uppercase letter between prefix and suffix. Negative means
+insert a lowercase letter.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title=
+"2.2.10 symhead_positive &lt;string&gt;">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="makeindex-output-symhead-positive" name=
+"makeindex-output-symhead-positive"></a>2.2.10 symhead_positive
+&lt;string&gt;</h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp12389376" class="indexterm" name="idp12389376"></a>
+<p>Default: <code class="literal">"Symbols"</code></p>
+<p>Heading for symbols to be inserted if <code class=
+"literal">headings_flag</code> is positive.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title=
+"2.2.11 symhead_negative &lt;string&gt;">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="makeindex-output-symhead-negative" name=
+"makeindex-output-symhead-negative"></a>2.2.11 symhead_negative
+&lt;string&gt;</h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp12394752" class="indexterm" name="idp12394752"></a>
+<p>Default: <code class="literal">"symbols"</code></p>
+<p>Heading for symbols to be inserted if <code class=
+"literal">headings_flag</code> is negative.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title=
+"2.2.12 numhead_positive &lt;string&gt;">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="makeindex-output-numhead-positive" name=
+"makeindex-output-numhead-positive"></a>2.2.12 numhead_positive
+&lt;string&gt;</h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp12400128" class="indexterm" name="idp12400128"></a>
+<p>Default: <code class="literal">"Numbers"</code></p>
+<p>Heading for numbers to be inserted if <code class=
+"literal">headings_flag</code> is positive.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title=
+"2.2.13 numhead_negative &lt;string&gt;">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="makeindex-output-numhead-negative" name=
+"makeindex-output-numhead-negative"></a>2.2.13 numhead_negative
+&lt;string&gt;</h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp12405504" class="indexterm" name="idp12405504"></a>
+<p>Default: <code class="literal">"numbers"</code></p>
+<p>Heading for numbers to be inserted if <code class=
+"literal">headings_flag</code> is negative.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="2.2.14 item_0 &lt;string&gt;">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="makeindex-output-item-0" name=
+"makeindex-output-item-0"></a>2.2.14 item_0 &lt;string&gt;</h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp12410784" class="indexterm" name="idp12410784"></a>
+<p>Default: <code class="literal">"\n \\item "</code></p>
+<p>The command to be inserted between two primary (level 0)
+items.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="2.2.15 item_1 &lt;string&gt;">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="makeindex-output-item-1" name=
+"makeindex-output-item-1"></a>2.2.15 item_1 &lt;string&gt;</h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp12415360" class="indexterm" name="idp12415360"></a>
+<p>Default: <code class="literal">"\n \\subitem "</code></p>
+<p>The command to be inserted between two secondary (level 1)
+items.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="2.2.16 item_2 &lt;string&gt;">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="makeindex-output-item-2" name=
+"makeindex-output-item-2"></a>2.2.16 item_2 &lt;string&gt;</h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp12419984" class="indexterm" name="idp12419984"></a>
+<p>Default: <code class="literal">"\n \\subsubitem "</code></p>
+<p>The command to be inserted between two level 2 items.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="2.2.17 item_01 &lt;string&gt;">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="makeindex-output-item-01" name=
+"makeindex-output-item-01"></a>2.2.17 item_01 &lt;string&gt;</h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp12424672" class="indexterm" name="idp12424672"></a>
+<p>Default: <code class="literal">"\n \\subitem "</code></p>
+<p>The command to be inserted between a level 0 item and a level 1
+item.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="2.2.18 item_x1 &lt;string&gt;">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="makeindex-output-item-x1" name=
+"makeindex-output-item-x1"></a>2.2.18 item_x1 &lt;string&gt;</h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp12429296" class="indexterm" name="idp12429296"></a>
+<p>Default: <code class="literal">"\n \\subitem "</code></p>
+<p>The command to be inserted between a level 0 item and a level 1
+item. The difference between this and previous is that in this case
+the level 0 item doesn't have any page numbers.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="2.2.19 item_12 &lt;string&gt;">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="makeindex-output-item-12" name=
+"makeindex-output-item-12"></a>2.2.19 item_12 &lt;string&gt;</h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp12434080" class="indexterm" name="idp12434080"></a>
+<p>Default: <code class="literal">"\n \\subsubitem "</code></p>
+<p>The command to be inserted between a level 1 item and a level 2
+item.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="2.2.20 item_x2 &lt;string&gt;">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="makeindex-output-item-x2" name=
+"makeindex-output-item-x2"></a>2.2.20 item_x2 &lt;string&gt;</h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp12438704" class="indexterm" name="idp12438704"></a>
+<p>Default: <code class="literal">"\n \\subsubitem "</code></p>
+<p>The command to be inserted between a level 1 item and a level 2
+item. The difference between this and previous is that in this case
+the level 1 item doesn't have any page numbers.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="2.2.21 delim_0 &lt;string&gt;">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="makeindex-output-delim-0" name=
+"makeindex-output-delim-0"></a>2.2.21 delim_0 &lt;string&gt;</h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp12443488" class="indexterm" name="idp12443488"></a>
+<p>Default: <code class="literal">", "</code></p>
+<p>The delimiter to be inserted between a level 0 key and its first
+page number. Default is a comma followed by a blank.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="2.2.22 delim_1 &lt;string&gt;">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="makeindex-output-delim-1" name=
+"makeindex-output-delim-1"></a>2.2.22 delim_1 &lt;string&gt;</h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp12448208" class="indexterm" name="idp12448208"></a>
+<p>Default: <code class="literal">", "</code></p>
+<p>The delimiter to be inserted between a level 1 key and its first
+page number. Default is a comma followed by a blank.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="2.2.23 delim_2 &lt;string&gt;">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="makeindex-output-delim-2" name=
+"makeindex-output-delim-2"></a>2.2.23 delim_2 &lt;string&gt;</h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp12452928" class="indexterm" name="idp12452928"></a>
+<p>Default: <code class="literal">", "</code></p>
+<p>The delimiter to be inserted between a level 2 key and its first
+page number. Default is a comma followed by a blank.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="2.2.24 delim_n &lt;string&gt;">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="makeindex-output-delim-n" name=
+"makeindex-output-delim-n"></a>2.2.24 delim_n &lt;string&gt;</h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp12457648" class="indexterm" name="idp12457648"></a>
+<p>Default: <code class="literal">", "</code></p>
+<p>The delimiter to be inserted between two page numbers for the
+same key in any level. Default is a comma followed by a blank.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="2.2.25 delim_r &lt;string&gt;">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="makeindex-output-delim-r" name=
+"makeindex-output-delim-r"></a>2.2.25 delim_r &lt;string&gt;</h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp12462480" class="indexterm" name="idp12462480"></a>
+<p>Default: <code class="literal">"--"</code></p>
+<p>The delimiter to be inserted between the starting and ending
+page numbers of a range.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="2.2.26 delim_t &lt;string&gt;">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="makeindex-output-delim-t" name=
+"makeindex-output-delim-t"></a>2.2.26 delim_t &lt;string&gt;</h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp12467104" class="indexterm" name="idp12467104"></a>
+<p>Default: <code class="literal">""</code></p>
+<p>The delimiter to be inserted at the end of a page list. This
+delimiter has no effect on entries which have no associated page
+list.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="2.2.27 encap_prefix &lt;string&gt;">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="makeindex-output-encap-prefix" name=
+"makeindex-output-encap-prefix"></a>2.2.27 encap_prefix
+&lt;string&gt;</h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp12471824" class="indexterm" name="idp12471824"></a>
+<p>Default: <code class="literal">"\\"</code></p>
+<p>The prefix for the command which encapsulates the page
+number.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="2.2.28 encap_infix &lt;string&gt;">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="makeindex-output-encap-infox" name=
+"makeindex-output-encap-infox"></a>2.2.28 encap_infix
+&lt;string&gt;</h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp12476448" class="indexterm" name="idp12476448"></a>
+<p>Default: <code class="literal">"{"</code></p>
+<p>The prefix for the command which encapsulates the page
+number.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="2.2.29 encap_suffix &lt;string&gt;">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="makeindex-output-encap-suffix" name=
+"makeindex-output-encap-suffix"></a>2.2.29 encap_suffix
+&lt;string&gt;</h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp12481040" class="indexterm" name="idp12481040"></a>
+<p>Default: <code class="literal">"}"</code></p>
+<p>The suffix for the command which encapsulates the page
+number.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="2.2.30 line_max &lt;number&gt;">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="makeindex-output-line-max" name=
+"makeindex-output-line-max"></a>2.2.30 line_max &lt;number&gt;</h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp12485664" class="indexterm" name="idp12485664"></a>
+<p>Default: <code class="literal">72</code></p>
+<p>The maximum length of a line in the output beyond which a line
+wraps around.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="2.2.31 indent_space &lt;string&gt;">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="makeindex-output-indent-space" name=
+"makeindex-output-indent-space"></a>2.2.31 indent_space
+&lt;string&gt;</h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp12490368" class="indexterm" name="idp12490368"></a>
+<p>Default: <code class="literal">"\t\t"</code></p>
+<p>The space to be inserted in front of a wrapped line. Default is
+two tabs.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="2.2.32 indent_length &lt;number&gt;">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="makeindex-output-indent-length" name=
+"makeindex-output-indent-length"></a>2.2.32 indent_length
+&lt;number&gt;</h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp12495056" class="indexterm" name="idp12495056"></a>
+<p>Default: <code class="literal">16</code></p>
+<p>The length of indent_space. In the default case this is 16 (for
+2 tabs).</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="2.2.33 suffix_2p &lt;string&gt;">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="makeindex-output-suffix-2p" name=
+"makeindex-output-suffix-2p"></a>2.2.33 suffix_2p
+&lt;string&gt;</h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp12499744" class="indexterm" name="idp12499744"></a>
+<p>Default: <code class="literal">""</code></p>
+<p>Delimiter to replace the range delimiter and the second page
+number of a two page list. When present, it overrides <code class=
+"literal">delim_r</code>.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="2.2.34 suffix_3p &lt;string&gt;">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="makeindex-output-suffix-3p" name=
+"makeindex-output-suffix-3p"></a>2.2.34 suffix_3p
+&lt;string&gt;</h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp12505072" class="indexterm" name="idp12505072"></a>
+<p>Default: <code class="literal">""</code></p>
+<p>Delimiter to replace the range delimiter and the second page
+number of a three page list. When present, it overrides
+<code class="literal">delim_r</code> and <code class=
+"literal">suffix_mp</code>.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="2.2.35 suffix_mp &lt;string&gt;">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="makeindex-output-suffix-mp" name=
+"makeindex-output-suffix-mp"></a>2.2.35 suffix_mp
+&lt;string&gt;</h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp12511120" class="indexterm" name="idp12511120"></a>
+<p>Default: <code class="literal">""</code></p>
+<p>Delimiter to replace the range delimiter and the second page
+number of a multiple page list (three or more pages). When present,
+it overrides <code class="literal">delim_r</code>.</p>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="3 Example">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h2 class="title" style="clear: both"><a id="makeindex-example"
+name="makeindex-example"></a>3 Example</h2>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp12516768" class="indexterm" name="idp12516768"></a>
+<p>The following example shows a style file called <code class=
+"literal">book.isty</code> which defines a stand-alone index for a
+book. By stand-alone, we mean it can be formatted independent of
+the main source.</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+preamble
+"\\documentstyle[12pt]{book}
+\\begin{document}
+\\begin{theindex}
+{\\small\n"
+
+postamble
+"\n\n}
+\\end{theindex}
+\\end{document}\n"
+</pre>
+<p>Suppose a particular book style requires the index (as well as
+any chapters) to start from an odd page number. Given <code class=
+"literal">foo.idx</code> as the raw index file, the following
+command line produces an index in file <code class=
+"literal">foo-.ind</code>.</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+makeindex -s book.isty -o foo-.ind -p odd foo
+</pre>
+<p>The reason to use a non-default output file name is to avoid
+clobbering the source output (presumably <code class=
+"literal">foo.dvi</code>) because if the index is in file
+<code class="literal">foo.ind</code>, its output will also be in
+<code class="literal">foo.dvi</code> as a result of separate
+formatting using . In the example the index is in <code class=
+"literal">foo-.ind</code>, its output will be in <code class=
+"literal">foo-.dvi</code> and thus introduces no confusion.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="4 Ordering">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h2 class="title" style="clear: both"><a id="makeindex-ordering"
+name="makeindex-ordering"></a>4 Ordering</h2>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp12529104" class="indexterm" name="idp12529104"></a>
+<p>By default <code class="literal">makeindex</code> assumes word
+ordering. The <code class="literal">-l</code> option turns it into
+letter ordering. The only difference is whether a blank is treated
+as an effective letter or not. In word ordering, a blank precedes
+any letter in the alphabet, whereas in letter ordering, it doesn't
+count at all. This is best illustrated by the following
+example:</p>
+<div class="informaltable">
+<table border="0">
+<colgroup>
+<col align="left" />
+<col align="left" /></colgroup>
+<thead>
+<tr>
+<th align="left"><span class="emphasis"><em>word
+order</em></span></th>
+<th align="left"><span class="emphasis"><em>letter
+order</em></span></th>
+</tr>
+</thead>
+<tbody>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">sea lion</td>
+<td align="left">seal</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">seal</td>
+<td align="left">seal lion</td>
+</tr>
+</tbody>
+</table>
+</div>
+<p>Numbers are sorted in numeric order. For instance,</p>
+<div class="informaltable">
+<table border="0">
+<colgroup>
+<col align="left" /></colgroup>
+<tbody>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">9 (nine), 123</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left">123 10 (ten), see Derek, Bo</td>
+</tr>
+</tbody>
+</table>
+</div>
+<p>Letters are first sorted with uppercase and lowercase considered
+identical; then, within identical words the uppercase letter
+precedes its lowercase counterpart.</p>
+<p>Patterns lead by a special symbol precede numbers, which precede
+patterns lead by a letter. The symbol here refers to anything not
+in the union of digits and English alphabet. This includes those
+which follow 'z' in the ASCII chart. As a special case, anything
+started with a digit but mixed with non-digits is considered a
+symbol-leading pattern instead of a number.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="5 Special Effects">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h2 class="title" style="clear: both"><a id=
+"makeindex-special-effects" name="makeindex-special-effects"></a>5
+Special Effects</h2>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp12549376" class="indexterm" name="idp12549376"></a>
+<p>In the normal case entries such as</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\indexentry{alpha}{1}
+\indexentry{alpha!beta}{3}
+\indexentry{alpha!beta!gamma}{10}
+</pre>
+<p>in the raw index file will be converted to</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\item alpha, 1
+ \subitem beta, 3
+ \subsubitem gamma, 10
+</pre>
+<p>in the output index file by Make-Index. Notice that the level
+symbol (<code class="literal">!</code>) is used to delimit levels
+of nesting.</p>
+<p>It is possible to make an item appear in a designated form by
+using the actual (<code class="literal">@</code>) operator. For
+instance,</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\indexentry{alpha@{\it alpha\/}}{1}
+</pre>
+<p>will become</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\item {\it alpha\/} 1
+</pre>
+<p>after the conversion. The idea is that the pattern preceding
+<code class="literal">@</code> is used as sort key, whereas the one
+following it is put in the actual result. However, the same key
+with and without the actual part are regarded as distinct
+entries.</p>
+<p>It is also possible to encapsulate a page number with a
+designated command using the encap (<code class="literal">|</code>)
+operator. For example, in the default case,</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\indexentry{alpha|bold}{1}
+</pre>
+<p>will be converted to</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\item alpha \bold{1}
+</pre>
+<p>where <code class="literal">\bold{n}</code> will expand to
+<code class="literal">{\bf n}</code>. This allows the encap
+operator to be used to set pages in different fonts, thereby
+conveying more information about whatever being indexed. For
+instance, given the same key the page where its definition appears
+can be in one font while where its primary example is given can be
+in another, with other ordinary appearances in a third. Notice that
+in this example, the three output attributes associated with page
+encapsulation <code class="literal">encap_prefix</code>,
+<code class="literal">encap_infix</code>, and <code class=
+"literal">encap_suffix</code> correspond respectively to backslash,
+left brace, and right brace. If this is to be formatted by
+languages other than , they would be defined differently.</p>
+<p>By the same token, the <code class="literal">encap</code>
+operator can be used to make cross references in the index. For
+instance,</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\indexentry{alpha|see{beta}}{1}
+</pre>
+<p>will become</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\item alpha \see{beta}{1}
+</pre>
+<p>in the output index file after the conversion, where</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\see{beta}{1}
+</pre>
+<p>will expand to</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+{\it see\/} beta
+</pre>
+<p>Notice that in a cross reference like this the page number
+disappears. Therefore, where to insert such a command in the source
+is immaterial.</p>
+<p>A pair of encap concatenated with <code class=
+"literal">range_open</code> (<code class="literal">|(</code>) and
+with <code class="literal">range_close</code> (<code class=
+"literal">|)</code>) creates an explicit page range. That is,</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\indexentry{alpha|(}{1}
+\indexentry{alpha|)}{5}
+</pre>
+<p>will become</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\item alpha, 1--5
+</pre>
+<p>Intermediate pages indexed by the same key will be merged into
+the range implicitly. This is especially useful when an entire
+section about a particular subject is to be indexed, in which case
+only the range opening and closing operators need to be inserted at
+the beginning and end of the section, respectively.</p>
+<p>This explicit page range formation can also include an extra
+command to set the page range in a designated font. Thus</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\indexentry{alpha|(bold}{1}
+\indexentry{alpha|)}{5}
+</pre>
+<p>will become</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\item alpha, \bold{1--5}
+</pre>
+<p>A couple of special cases are worth mentioning here. First,
+entries like</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\indexentry{alpha|(}{1}
+\indexentry{alpha|bold}{3}
+\indexentry{alpha|)}{5}
+</pre>
+<p>will be interpreted as</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\item alpha, \bold{3}, 1--5
+</pre>
+<p>but with a warning message in the transcript about the encounter
+of an inconsistent page encapsulator. Secondly, an explicit range
+beginning in a Roman page number and ending in Arabic is considered
+an error. In a case like this the range is broken into two
+subranges, if possible, one in Roman, the other in Arabic. For
+instance,</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\indexentry{alpha|(}{i}
+\indexentry{alpha}{iv}
+\indexentry{alpha}{3}
+\indexentry{alpha|)}{7}
+</pre>
+<p>will be turned into</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\item alpha, 1--iv, 3--7
+</pre>
+<p>with a warning message in the transcript complaining about the
+illegal range formation.</p>
+<p>Finally, every special symbol mentioned in this section may be
+escaped by the quote operator (<code class="literal">"</code>).
+Thus</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\indexentry{alpha"@beta}{1}
+</pre>
+<p>will actually become</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\item alpha@beta, 1
+</pre>
+<p>as a result of executing Make-Index. However, if quote is
+preceded by escape (<code class="literal">\</code>), its following
+letter is not escaped. That is,</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\indexentry{f\"ur}{1}
+</pre>
+<p>means</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\item f\"ur, 1
+</pre>
+<p>which represents umlaut accented <code class="literal">u</code>
+to the family of processors.</p>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div xml:lang="en" class="chapter" title=
+"Chapter&nbsp;7.&nbsp;xindy" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h2 class="title"><a id="xindy" name=
+"xindy"></a>Chapter&nbsp;7.&nbsp;xindy</h2>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="toc">
+<p><strong>Table of Contents</strong></p>
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#xindy-command-list">1 Command
+List</a></span></dt>
+<dd>
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href=
+"#xindy-command-list-processing">1.1 Processing
+Commands</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#xindy-command-list-markup">1.2
+Markup Commands</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href=
+"#xindy-command-list-raw-index">1.3 Raw Index
+Interface</a></span></dt>
+</dl>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#xindy-invoking">2 Invoking
+xindy</a></span></dt>
+<dd>
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#xindy-invoking-cmdline">2.1
+Command Line Options</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#xindy-search-path">2.2 Search
+Path</a></span></dt>
+</dl>
+</dd>
+</dl>
+</div>
+<a id="idp12589264" class="indexterm" name="idp12589264"></a>
+<div class="note" title="Note" style=
+"margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;">
+<h3 class="title">Note</h3>
+<p>The content of this section was taken from the original
+documentation of xindy V2.1 (<code class=
+"filename">Doc/manual*.html</code>).</p>
+</div>
+<p><span class="emphasis"><em>xindy</em></span> means
+fle<span class="emphasis"><em>x</em></span>ible <span class=
+"emphasis"><em>ind</em></span>exing s<span class=
+"emphasis"><em>y</em></span>stem. It is an indexing system that can
+be used to generate book-like indexes for arbitrary document
+preparation systems. This term includes systems such as TeX and
+LaTeX, the Nroff-family or SGML-based systems (e.g. HTML) that
+process some kind of text and generate indexing information. It is
+not fixed to any specific system, but can be configured for a wide
+variety of purposes.</p>
+<div class="section" title="1 Command List">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h2 class="title" style="clear: both"><a id="xindy-command-list"
+name="xindy-command-list"></a>1 Command List</h2>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp12596352" class="indexterm" name="idp12596352"></a>
+<p>Here is the complete list of xindy's commands that may be used
+in the index style. The symbol <code class="literal">name</code>
+always refers to a string. We separate the commands into the
+processing and markup commands. The commands are listed in
+alphabetical order.</p>
+<p>The parenthesis <code class="literal">[</code> and <code class=
+"literal">]</code> denote optional parts of the syntax and
+<code class="literal">{</code> and <code class="literal">}</code>
+denote the grouping of elements. A vertical bar indicates
+alternatives. However, the enclosing round braces <span class=
+"emphasis"><em>are</em></span> part of the syntax and must be
+supplied.</p>
+<div class="section" title="1.1 Processing Commands">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="xindy-command-list-processing" name=
+"xindy-command-list-processing"></a>1.1 Processing Commands</h3>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp12604208" class="indexterm" name="idp12604208"></a>
+<div class="section" title="1.1.1 define-alphabet">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id=
+"xindy-command-list-processing-define-alphabet" name=
+"xindy-command-list-processing-define-alphabet"></a>1.1.1
+<code class="literal">define-alphabet</code></h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp12607328" class="indexterm" name="idp12607328"></a>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+(define-alphabet name string-list)
+</pre>
+<p>Defines <code class="literal">name</code> to be the alphabet
+consisting of all elements of the <code class=
+"literal">string-list</code>. Examples:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+(define-alphabet "example-alphabet" ("An" "Example" "Alphabet"))
+</pre>
+<p>defines an alphabet consisting of exactly three symbols. For the
+successor relationship holds: <code class=
+"literal">succ("An")="Example"</code> and <code class=
+"literal">succ("Example")="Alphabet"</code>. The built-in alphabet
+<code class="literal">digits</code> is defined as follows:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+(define-alphabet "digits"
+ ("0" "1" "2" "3" "4" "5" "6" "7" "8" "9"))
+</pre></div>
+<div class="section" title="1.1.2 define-attributes">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id=
+"xindy-command-list-processing-define-attributes" name=
+"xindy-command-list-processing-define-attributes"></a>1.1.2
+<code class="literal">define-attributes</code></h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp12617264" class="indexterm" name="idp12617264"></a>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+(define-attributes attribute-list)
+</pre>
+<p>Defines all attributes the raw index may contain. Parameter
+<code class="literal">attribute-list</code> is a list of list of
+strings. The nesting level must not be more than 2. So <code class=
+"literal">(..(..)..)</code> is allowed, whereas <code class=
+"literal">(..(..(..)..)..)</code> is not.</p>
+<p>The list has two kinds of elements: strings and list of strings.
+A single string is treated as if it were a single element list. So
+the lists <code class="literal">("definition")</code> and
+<code class="literal">( ("definition") )</code> are equivalent. All
+elements forming a list are a so-called <span class=
+"emphasis"><em>attribute group</em></span>. The members of a group
+are written to the output file before any member of the following
+groups are written.</p>
+<p>Examples of valid attributes lists are:</p>
+<p><code class="literal">("definition" "usage")</code> defines two
+attribute groups. The first one contains all references with the
+attribute <code class="literal">definition</code> and the second
+one all with the attribute <code class="literal">usage</code>.</p>
+<p><code class="literal">(("definition" "important")
+"usage")</code> defines two attribute groups. The first one
+contains all references with the attributes <code class=
+"literal">definition</code> or <code class=
+"literal">important</code> and the second one all with the
+attribute <code class="literal">usage</code>. In the attribute
+group <code class="literal">("definition" "important")</code> the
+attribute <code class="literal">definition</code> overrides
+<code class="literal">important</code>.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="1.1.3 define-crossref-class">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id=
+"xindy-command-list-processing-define-crossref-class" name=
+"xindy-command-list-processing-define-crossref-class"></a>1.1.3
+<code class="literal">define-crossref-class</code></h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp12635344" class="indexterm" name="idp12635344"></a>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+(define-crossref-class name [:unverified])
+</pre>
+<p>Defines <code class="literal">name</code> to be a class of cross
+references. We distinguish two types of cross reference classes.
+<span class="emphasis"><em>Verified</em></span> cross reference
+classes can be checked for dangling references. If for instance a
+cross reference points to the non-existent keyword `foo' a warning
+is issued and the user is advised to correct the invalid cross
+reference. This is the default. If for some reasons this mechanism
+must be deactivated the switch <code class=
+"literal">:unverified</code> can be used to suppress this
+behaviour.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="1.1.4 define-letter-group">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id=
+"xindy-command-list-processing-define-letter-group" name=
+"xindy-command-list-processing-define-letter-group"></a>1.1.4
+<code class="literal">define-letter-group</code></h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp12642592" class="indexterm" name="idp12642592"></a>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+(define-letter-group name [:before lgname] [:after lgname]
+ [:prefixes list-of-prefixes])
+</pre>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+(define-letter-groups list-of-letter-groups)
+</pre>
+<p>This command defines a letter group with name <code class=
+"literal">name</code>, which must be a string value, grouping all
+index entries that have a <span class="emphasis"><em>sort
+key</em></span> beginning with the prefix <code class=
+"literal">name</code>. The command</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+(define-letter-group "a")
+</pre>
+<p>is equivalent to the command</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+(define-letter-group "a" :prefixes ("a"))
+</pre>
+<p>Using the latter form one can associate more than one prefix
+with a given letter group. Also further prefixes can be added to an
+already existing letter group by simply defining the same letter
+group again. This results not in a redefinition but in adding more
+prefixes to the currently defined prefixes.</p>
+<p>Example:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+(define-letter-group "a")
+</pre>
+<p>defines a letter group containing all index entries beginning
+with the string <code class="literal">"a"</code>.</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+(define-letter-group "c" :after "a")
+</pre>
+<p>defines a letter group containing all index entries beginning
+with the string <code class="literal">"c"</code>. The letter group
+appears behind the letter group <code class=
+"literal">"a"</code></p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+(define-letter-group "b" :after "a" :before "c")
+</pre>
+<p>inserts letter group <code class="literal">"b"</code> between
+letter group <code class="literal">"a"</code> and <code class=
+"literal">"c"</code>. This allows incremental definition of letter
+groups by extending already defined ones.</p>
+<p>The arguments <code class="literal">:after</code> and
+<code class="literal">:before</code> define a partial order on the
+letter groups. xindy tries to convert this partial order into a
+total one. If this is impossible due to circular definitions, an
+error is reported. If more than one possible total ordering can
+result, it is left open which one is used, so one should always
+define a complete total order.</p>
+<p>The command <code class="literal">define-letter-groups</code>
+(with an `s' at the end) is simply an abbreviation for a sequence
+of <code class="literal">define-letter-group</code> definitions
+where the elements are ordered in the ordering given by the list.
+Example:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+(define-letter-groups ("a" "b" "c")
+</pre>
+<p>equals the definitions</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+(define-letter-group "a")
+(define-letter-group "b" :after "a")
+(define-letter-group "c" :after "b")
+</pre>
+<p>See also commands <code class=
+"literal">markup-letter-group-list</code> and <code class=
+"literal">markup-letter-group</code> for further information.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="1.1.5 define-location-class">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id=
+"xindy-command-list-processing-define-location-class" name=
+"xindy-command-list-processing-define-location-class"></a>1.1.5
+<code class="literal">define-location-class</code></h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp12667920" class="indexterm" name="idp12667920"></a>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+(define-location-class name layer-list
+ [:min-range-length num]
+ [:hierdepth depth]
+ [:var])
+</pre>
+<p>Defines <code class="literal">name</code> to be a location class
+consisting of the given list of layers. A list of layers consists
+of names of basetypes and/or strings representing separators.
+Separators must follow the keyword argument <code class=
+"literal">:sep</code>. If the keyword <code class=
+"literal">:min-range-length</code> is specified we define the
+<span class="emphasis"><em>minimum range length</em></span> to be
+used when building ranges. The argument <code class=
+"literal">num</code> must be a positive integer number or the
+keyword <code class="literal">none</code> in which case the
+building of ranges is disallowed. If the switch <code class=
+"literal">:var</code> is specified the declared class is of type
+<span class="emphasis"><em>variable</em></span>, i.e. it is a
+<span class="emphasis"><em>var-location-class</em></span>. Since
+building of ranges is currently only allowed for standard classes
+<code class="literal">:var</code> and <code class=
+"literal">:min-range-length</code> must not be used together. The
+keyword argument <code class="literal">:hierdepth</code> can be
+used to declare that the location references have to be tagged in a
+hierarchical form. Its argument <code class="literal">depth</code>
+must be an integer number indicating the number of layers the
+hierarchy does contain. See command <code class=
+"literal">markup-locref-list</code> for more information.
+Examples:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+(define-location-class "page-numbers" ("arabic-numbers")
+ :minimum-range-length 3)
+</pre>
+<p>Defines the location class <code class=
+"literal">page-numbers</code> consisting of one layer which is the
+alphabet <code class="literal">arabic-numbers</code>. Since the
+minimum range length is set to 3 the location references 2, 3 and 4
+don't form a range because the range length is only 2. But the
+references 6, 7, 8, and 9 are enough to form a range. Some example
+instances of this class are <code class="literal">0, 1, ...
+2313</code>, etc.</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+(define-location-class "sections" :var
+ ("arabic-numbers" :sep "."
+ "arabic-numbers" :sep "."
+ "arabic-numbers"))
+</pre>
+<p>defines a variable location class. Valid instances are
+<code class="literal">1, 1.1, 1.2, 2, 2.4.5</code>, but none of
+<code class="literal">2-3</code> (wrong separator), <code class=
+"literal">1.2.3.4</code> (more than 3 layers), <code class=
+"literal">2.3.iv</code> (roman number instead of arabic one).</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="1.1.6 define-location-class-order">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id=
+"xindy-command-list-processing-define-location-class-order" name=
+"xindy-command-list-processing-define-location-class-order"></a>1.1.6
+<code class="literal">define-location-class-order</code></h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp12689984" class="indexterm" name="idp12689984"></a>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+(define-location-class-order list)
+</pre>
+<p>Defines the order in which the location classes are written to
+the output file. The parameter <code class="literal">list</code> is
+a list of names of location classes. Examples:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+(define-location-class-order
+ ("page-numbers" "sections" "xrefs"))
+</pre>
+<p>tells the system that the page numbers should appear before the
+section numbers and that the cross references should appear at the
+end. If this command is omitted, the declaration order of the
+location classes in the index style is implicitly used as the
+output order. In the case that a location class does not appear in
+the list, the output may behave unexpectedly, so one should always
+enumerate all used location classes when using this command.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="1.1.7 define-rule-set">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id=
+"xindy-command-list-processing-define-rule-set" name=
+"xindy-command-list-processing-define-rule-set"></a>1.1.7
+<code class="literal">define-rule-set</code></h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp12696928" class="indexterm" name="idp12696928"></a>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+(define-rule-set name
+ [ :inherit-from ("rule-set" "rule-set-2") ]
+ :rules (&lt;rule&gt;...) )
+</pre>
+<p>A complete specification of a multi-phase sorting process for a
+language requires that some rules have to appear in several
+subsequent sorting phases. Rule sets can be used to define a set of
+rules that can be instantiated in an arbitrary sorting phase.
+Basically, they offer means to separate the definition of sorting
+rules from their instantiation, hence, acting as a wrapper for
+calls to <code class="literal">sort-rule</code>. They do not add
+new functionality that is not already present with <code class=
+"literal">sort-rule</code>.</p>
+<p>A rule can be of the form:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+&lt;rule&gt; ::= ("pattern" "replacement"
+ [:string|:bregexp|:egegexp] [:again])
+</pre>
+<p>The following incomplete example defines a new rule set of name
+<code class="literal">isolatin1-tolower</code> that inherits
+definitions from rule set <code class=
+"literal">latin-tolower</code>, overriding or adding the sort rules
+in the list of <code class="literal">:rules</code>.</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+(define-rule-set "isolatin1-tolower"
+
+ :inherit-from ("latin-tolower")
+
+ :rules (("?" "?" :string :again)
+ ("?" "?" :string :again)
+ ("?" "?" :string :again)
+ ("?" "?" :string :again)
+ ("?" "?" :string :again)
+ ("?" "?" :string :again)
+ ("?" "?" :string :again)
+ ...
+ )
+...)
+</pre>
+<p>Rule sets can be instantiated with the command <code class=
+"literal">use-rule-set</code>. For further descriptions on the
+sorting model refer to the command <code class=
+"literal">sort-rule</code>.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="1.1.8 define-sort-rule-orientations">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id=
+"xindy-command-list-processing-define-sort-rule-orientations" name=
+"xindy-command-list-processing-define-sort-rule-orientations"></a>1.1.8
+<code class="literal">define-sort-rule-orientations</code></h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp12710496" class="indexterm" name="idp12710496"></a>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+(define-sort-rule-orientations (orientations...))
+</pre>
+<p>Defines the order for the different sorting phases. The
+currently implemented <span class=
+"emphasis"><em>orientations</em></span> are <code class=
+"literal">forward</code> and <code class="literal">backward</code>.
+This command must precede all <code class=
+"literal">sort-rule</code> commands in an index style. It defines
+the orientations and implicitly sets the maximum number of sorting
+phases performed.</p>
+<p>For further descriptions on the sorting model refer to the
+command <code class="literal">sort-rule</code>.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="1.1.9 merge-rule">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="xindy-command-list-processing-merge-rule"
+name="xindy-command-list-processing-merge-rule"></a>1.1.9
+<code class="literal">merge-rule</code></h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp12719504" class="indexterm" name="idp12719504"></a>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+(merge-rule pattern replacement [:again]
+ [:bregexp | :eregexp | :string])
+</pre>
+<p>Defines a keyword mapping rule that can be used to generate the
+<span class="emphasis"><em>merge key</em></span> from the
+<span class="emphasis"><em>main key</em></span> of an index entry.
+This mapping is necessary to map all keywords that are differently
+written but belong to the same keyword to the same canonical
+keyword.</p>
+<p>The parameter <code class="literal">pattern</code> can be a
+POSIX-compliant regular expression or an ordinary string. The
+implementation uses the GNU Rx regular expression library which
+implements the POSIX regular expressions. Regular expressions (REs)
+can be specified as <span class="emphasis"><em>basic regular
+expressions</em></span> (BREs) or <span class=
+"emphasis"><em>extended regular expressions</em></span> (EREs). You
+can use the switch <code class="literal">:bregexp</code> to force
+the interpretation of the pattern as a BRE, or <code class=
+"literal">:eregexp</code> to interpret it as an ERE. If you want
+xindy to interpret the pattern literally, use the switch
+<code class="literal">:string</code>. If none of these switches is
+selected, xindy uses an auto-detection mechanism to decide, if the
+pattern is a regular expression or not. If it recognizes the
+pattern as a RE, it interprets it as an ERE by default.</p>
+<p>The parameter <code class="literal">replacement</code> must be a
+string possibly containing the special characters <code class=
+"literal">&amp;</code> (substitutes for the complete match) and
+<code class="literal">\1 ,..., \9</code> (substituting for the
+<span class="emphasis"><em>n</em></span>-th submatch. Examples:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+(merge-rule "A" "a")
+</pre>
+<p>replaces each occurrence of the uppercase letter <code class=
+"literal">`A'</code> with its lowercase counterpart.</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+(merge-rule "\~"([AEOUaeou])" "\1")
+</pre>
+<p>transforms the TeX umlaut-letters into their stripped
+counterparts, such that <code class="literal">`\"A '</code> is
+treated as an <code class="literal">`A'</code> afterwards.</p>
+<p>The following sequences have a special meaning:</p>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class="literal">` ~n
+'</code></span></dt>
+<dd>
+<p>End of line symbol (<span class=
+"emphasis"><em>linefeed</em></span>).</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class="literal">` ~b
+'</code></span></dt>
+<dd>
+<p>The ISO-Latin character with the lowest ordinal number.</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class="literal">` ~e
+'</code></span></dt>
+<dd>
+<p>The ISO-Latin character with the highest ordinal number.</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class="literal">` ~~
+'</code></span></dt>
+<dd>
+<p>The tilde character.</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class="literal">` ~"
+'</code></span></dt>
+<dd>
+<p>The double quote character.</p>
+</dd>
+</dl>
+</div>
+<p>Tilde characters and double quotes have to be quoted themselves
+with a tilde character. The special characters <code class=
+"literal">` ~b '</code> and <code class="literal">` ~e '</code>
+allow the definition of arbitrary sorting orders by rules. In
+connection with an additional character every position in the
+alphabet can be described. E.g. <code class="literal">` m~e
+'</code> is lexicographically placed between <code class=
+"literal">`m'</code> and <code class="literal">`n'</code>.</p>
+<p>Due to efficiency, rules that just exchange characters or
+substitute constant character sequences are not treated as regular
+expressions. Therefore, instead of using the rule</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+(merge-rule "[A-Z]" "&amp;")
+</pre>
+<p>it is more efficient (though less comfortable) to use</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+(merge-rule "A" "Ax")
+(merge-rule "B" "Bx")
+...
+(merge-rule "Z" "Zx")
+</pre>
+<p>Usually rules are applied in order of their definition. Rules
+with a special prefix precede those that begin with a class of
+characters, so that the search pattern <code class=
+"literal">`alpha'</code> is checked before <code class=
+"literal">`.*'</code>, but <code class="literal">`auto'</code> and
+<code class="literal">`a.*'</code> are checked in order of their
+definition.</p>
+<p>The first rule from a style file that matches the input is
+applied and the process restarts behind the substituted text. If no
+rule could be applied, the actual character is copied from the
+input and the process continues with the next character.</p>
+<p>Sometimes it is necessary to apply rules anew to the result of a
+transformation. By specifying the keyword argument <code class=
+"literal">:again</code> in the merge rule the rule is marked as
+mutable, which means that after using this rule the transformation
+process shall restart at the same place. E.g. the rule</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+(merge-rule "\$(.*)\$" "\1" :again)
+</pre>
+<p>deletes <span class="emphasis"><em>all</em></span> surrounding
+<code class="literal">`$ '</code> symbols from the input.</p>
+<p>See also command <code class="literal">sort-rule</code>.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="1.1.10 merge-to">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="xindy-command-list-processing-merge-to"
+name="xindy-command-list-processing-merge-to"></a>1.1.10
+<code class="literal">merge-to</code></h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp12764048" class="indexterm" name="idp12764048"></a>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+(merge-to attr-from attr-to [:drop])
+</pre>
+<p>A merge rule says that the attribute <code class=
+"literal">attr-from</code> can be used to build ranges in
+<code class="literal">attr-to</code>. Both attributes must name
+valid attribute names. The switch <code class=
+"literal">:drop</code> indicates, that the original location
+reference with attribute <code class="literal">attr-from</code> has
+to be dropped (removed), if a successful range was built with
+location references in attribute <code class=
+"literal">attr-to</code>. A detailed description is given in the
+section about processing phases.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="1.1.11 require">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="xindy-command-list-processing-require"
+name="xindy-command-list-processing-require"></a>1.1.11
+<code class="literal">require</code></h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp12772832" class="indexterm" name="idp12772832"></a>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+(require filename)
+</pre>
+<p>This command allows to load more index style modules. The module
+is searched in the directories defined in the search path. The file
+is read in and processing of the current file continues. The
+argument <code class="literal">filename</code> must be a string.
+This allows to decompose the index style into several modules that
+can be included into the topmost index style file. Example:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+(require "french/alphabet.xdy")
+(require "french/sort-rules.xdy")
+(require "tex/locations.xdy")
+(require "tex/markup.xdy")
+</pre>
+<p>Submodules can load other submodules as well. If a file is
+required that was already loaded, the <code class=
+"literal">require</code> command is simply ignored and processing
+continues without including this file twice. See also command
+searchpath.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="1.1.12 searchpath">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="xindy-command-list-processing-searchpath"
+name="xindy-command-list-processing-searchpath"></a>1.1.12
+<code class="literal">searchpath</code></h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp12780560" class="indexterm" name="idp12780560"></a>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+(searchpath {path-string | path-list})
+</pre>
+<p>This command adds the given paths to the list of paths, xindy
+searches for index style files. The argument <code class=
+"literal">path-string</code> must be a colon-separated string of
+directory names. If this path ends with a colon the default search
+path is added to the end of the path list. Example:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+(searchpath ".:/usr/local/lib/xindy:/usr/local/lib/xindy/english:")
+</pre>
+<p>adds the specified directories to the search path. Since the
+last path ends with a colon, the built-in search path is added at
+the end. Specifying</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+(searchpath ("."
+ "/usr/local/lib/xindy"
+ "/usr/local/lib/xindy/english"
+ :default))
+</pre>
+<p>yields exactly the same result as the example above. Here
+<code class="literal">path-list</code> must be a list of strings
+and/or the keyword(s) <code class="literal">:default</code> and
+<code class="literal">:last</code>. The keyword <code class=
+"literal">:default</code> signifies that the default pathnames are
+to be inserted at the specified position in the list. The keyword
+<code class="literal">:last</code> allows to insert the currently
+active paths at the indicated position. Since this allows to insert
+the built-in paths at any position and incrementally adding new
+paths to the search path, this version of the command ist more
+flexible than the first version.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="1.1.13 sort-rule">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="xindy-command-list-processing-sort-rule"
+name="xindy-command-list-processing-sort-rule"></a>1.1.13
+<code class="literal">sort-rule</code></h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp12792192" class="indexterm" name="idp12792192"></a>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+(sort-rule pattern replacement [:run level] [:again])
+</pre>
+<p>Defines a keyword mapping rule that can be used to generate the
+<span class="emphasis"><em>sort key</em></span> of an index entry
+from the <span class="emphasis"><em>merge key</em></span>. This key
+is used to sort the index entries lexicographically after they have
+been merged using the merge key.</p>
+<p>The argument <code class="literal">:run</code> indicates that
+this rule is only in effect a the specified <span class=
+"emphasis"><em>level</em></span> (default is level 0). For a
+detailed discussion on the definition of sort rules for different
+layers refer to the documentation about the new sorting scheme
+(<code class="literal">new-sort-rules</code>) that comes with this
+distribution.</p>
+<p>See command <code class="literal">merge-rule</code> for more
+information about keyword rules.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="1.1.14 use-rule-set">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id=
+"xindy-command-list-processing-use-rule-set" name=
+"xindy-command-list-processing-use-rule-set"></a>1.1.14
+<code class="literal">use-rule-set</code></h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp12801904" class="indexterm" name="idp12801904"></a>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+(use-rule-set [:run phase]
+ [:rule-set ( &lt;rule-set&gt;... ))
+</pre>
+<p>This command instantiates the gives rule sets to be in effect at
+sorting phase <code class="literal">phase</code>. The order of the
+rule sets given with argument <code class=
+"literal">:rule-set</code> is significant. Rule set entries of rule
+set appearing at the beginning of the list override entries in rule
+sets at the end of the list.</p>
+<p>The following example declares that in phase 0 the rule sets
+<code class="literal">din5007</code> and <code class=
+"literal">isolatin1-tolower</code> should be active, whereas in
+phase 2 the other rule sets have to be applied.</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+(use-rule-set :run 0
+ :rule-set ("din5007" "isolatin1-tolower"))
+
+(use-rule-set :run 1
+ :rule-set ("resolve-umlauts"
+ "resolve-sharp-s"
+ "isolatin1-tolower"
+ ))
+</pre>
+<p>For a discussion on rule sets refer to command <code class=
+"literal">define-rule-set</code>.</p>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="1.2 Markup Commands">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="xindy-command-list-markup" name=
+"xindy-command-list-markup"></a>1.2 Markup Commands</h3>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp12812464" class="indexterm" name="idp12812464"></a>
+<p>The following commands can be used to define the markup of the
+index. They don't have any influence on the indexing process. Since
+the markup scheme is characterized by the concept of <span class=
+"emphasis"><em>environments</em></span>, the syntax and naming
+scheme of all commands follows a simple structure.</p>
+<p>The commands can be separated into <span class=
+"emphasis"><em>environment</em></span> and <span class=
+"emphasis"><em>list-environment</em></span> commands. All commands
+of the first group support the keyword arguments <code class=
+"literal">:open</code> and <code class="literal">:close</code>,
+whereas the second group additionally supports the keyword argument
+<code class="literal">:sep</code>. If one of these keyword
+arguments is missing, the default markup tag is always the empty
+tag. The <code class="literal">:open</code> tag is always printed
+before the object itself and the <code class=
+"literal">:close</code> tag is always printed after the object has
+been printed. If a list is printed the <code class=
+"literal">:sep</code> tag is printed between two elements of the
+list but not before the first element, or after the last one. All
+commands dealing with a list have the suffix <code class=
+"literal">`-list'</code> as part of their command name.</p>
+<p>Since the number of commands and the heavy usage of <span class=
+"emphasis"><em>default</em></span> and <span class=
+"emphasis"><em>specialized</em></span> tags makes the markup
+somehow complex (but very powerful) we have added a mechanism to
+trace the markup tags xindy omits during its markup phase with the
+command <code class="literal">markup-trace</code>.</p>
+<p>Here follows the list of markup commands in alphabetical order
+with some of the commands grouped together.</p>
+<div class="section" title="1.2.1 markup-attribute-group-list">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="markup-attribute-group-list" name=
+"markup-attribute-group-list"></a>1.2.1 <code class=
+"literal">markup-attribute-group-list</code></h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+(markup-attribute-group-list [:open string] [:close string]
+ [:sep string])
+
+(markup-attribute-group [:open string] [:close string]
+ [:group group-num])
+</pre>
+<p>Location class groups consist of lists of attribute groups. The
+markup of this list can be defined with the command <code class=
+"literal">markup-attribute-group-list</code>.</p>
+<p>To allow different markup for different attribute groups the
+command <code class="literal">markup-attribute-group</code> can be
+specialized on the group number with the keyword argument
+<code class="literal">:group</code> which must be an integer
+number. E.g., given are the groups <code class=
+"literal">("definition" "theorem")</code> and <code class=
+"literal">("default")</code> with group numbers 0 and 1, then</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+(markup-attribute-group :open "&lt;group0&gt;" :close &lt;/group0&gt;"
+ :group 0)
+
+(markup-attribute-group :open "&lt;group1&gt;" :close "&lt;/group1&gt;"
+ :group 1)
+</pre>
+<p>can be used to assign different markup for both groups in a
+SGML-based language.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="1.2.2 markup-crossref-list">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="markup-crossref-list" name=
+"markup-crossref-list"></a>1.2.2 <code class=
+"literal">markup-crossref-list</code></h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+(markup-crossref-list [:open string] [:close string]
+ [:sep string]
+ [:class crossref-class])
+
+(markup-crossref-layer-list [:open string] [:close string]
+ [:sep string]
+ [:class crossref-class])
+
+(markup-crossref-layer [:open string] [:close string]
+ [:class crossref-class])
+</pre>
+<p>A crossref class group contains cross references of the same
+class. The separator between the classes is defined with the
+<code class="literal">(markup-locclass-list :sep)</code>-parameter.
+A list of cross references can be tagged with the <code class=
+"literal">command markup-crossref-list</code> that specializes on
+the <code class="literal">:class</code> argument.</p>
+<p>Each cross reference is determined by a list of layers
+indicating the target of the cross reference. To define a suitable
+markup for such a list the <code class="literal">command
+markup-crossref-layer-list</code> can be used.</p>
+<p>Each layer of a cross reference can be assigned two tags that
+specialize on the class of the reference, like all other
+commands.</p>
+<p>A suitable markup for a cross reference class <code class=
+"literal">see</code> within LaTeX2e could look like that:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+(markup-crossref-list :class "see" :open "\emph{see} "
+ :sep "; ")
+(markup-crossref-layer-list :class "see" :sep ",")
+(markup-crossref-layer :class "see"
+ :open "\textbf{" :close "}")
+</pre>
+<p>An example output could look like <code class="literal">... see
+house; garden,winter; greenhouse</code></p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="1.2.3 markup-index">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="markup-index" name=
+"markup-index"></a>1.2.3 <code class=
+"literal">markup-index</code></h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+(markup-index [:open string] [:close string]
+ [ :flat | :tree | :hierdepth depth ])
+</pre>
+<p>Defines the markup tags that enclose the whole index via the
+<code class="literal">:open</code> and <code class=
+"literal">:close</code> parameters. Examples:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+(markup-index :open "Here comes the index~n"
+ :close "That's all folks!~n")
+</pre>
+<p>defines that the <code class="literal">:open</code> string is
+printed before the rest of the index and the <code class=
+"literal">:close</code> string appears after the index is
+printed.</p>
+<p>Additionally one can specify the form of the generated index. It
+is possible to produce flat indexes by specifying the switch
+<code class="literal">:flat</code>, to generate a tree with the
+<code class="literal">:tree</code> switch or any kind of mixture
+between both by specifying the depth up to which trees shall be
+built with the parameter <code class="literal">:hierdepth</code>.
+Its argument depth is the number of layers that can be formed into
+a tree. Therefore <code class="literal">:flat</code> is an
+abbrevation of <code class="literal">:hierdepth 0</code> and
+<code class="literal">:tree</code> is an abbrevation of
+<code class="literal">:hierdepth max-depth</code>, with
+<code class="literal">max-depth</code> being the maximum number of
+layers a keyword has. An example: the keywords</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+("tree" "binary" "AVL")
+("tree" "binary" "natural")
+</pre>
+<p>can be transformed in the following ways:</p>
+<p>A flat index (<code class="literal">:flat</code> or <code class=
+"literal">:hierdepth 0</code>)</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+tree binary AVL
+tree binary natural
+</pre>
+<p>with <code class="literal">:hierdepth 1</code></p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+tree
+ binary AVL
+ binary natural
+</pre>
+<p>and a tree (<code class="literal">:tree</code> or <code class=
+"literal">:hierdepth &gt; 1</code>)</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+tree
+ binary
+ AVL
+ natural
+</pre>
+<p>Most often one will create tree-like indexes or ones that are
+flat.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="1.2.4 markup-indexentry-list">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="markup-indexentry-list" name=
+"markup-indexentry-list"></a>1.2.4 <code class=
+"literal">markup-indexentry-list</code></h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+(markup-indexentry-list [:open string] [:close string]
+ [:sep string] [:depth integer])
+
+(markup-indexentry [:open string] [:close string]
+ [:depth integer])
+</pre>
+<p>Letter groups consists of a list of index entries. The command
+<code class="literal">markup-indexentry-list</code> defines the
+markup of these lists. The markup can be specialized on the depth
+if the index is hierarchically organized. The command</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+(markup-indexentry-list :open "\begin{IdxentList}"
+ :close "\end{IdxentList}"
+ :sep "~n")
+</pre>
+<p>defines that the index entries of all layers are wrapped into
+the given markup tags. If additionally</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+(markup-indexentry-list :open "\begin{IdxentListII}"
+ :close "\end{IdxentListII}"
+ :sep "~n"
+ :depth 2)
+</pre>
+<p>is defined, all index entry lists of all layers (except layer 2)
+are tagged according to the first specification, and the index
+entry list within depth 2 are tagged according to the second
+rule.</p>
+<p>The command <code class="literal">markup-indexentry</code>
+defines the markup of an index entry at a given depth. Since index
+entries may also contain subentries and the markup for subentries
+may be different in different layers, the optional keyword argument
+<code class="literal">:depth</code> can be used to assign different
+markup for different layers. If depth is ommited the default markup
+for all possible depths is defined. The top-most index entries have
+depth 0.</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+(markup-indexentry :open "\begin{Indexentry}"
+ :close "\end{Indexentry}")
+</pre>
+<p>defines that the index entries of all layers are wrapped into
+the given markup tags. If additionally</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+(markup-indexentry :open "\begin{IndexentryII}"
+ :close "\end{IndexentryII}"
+ :depth 2)
+</pre>
+<p>is defined, all index entries of all layers (except layer 2) are
+tagged according to the first specification, and the index entries
+with depth 2 are tagged according to the second rule.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="1.2.5 markup-keyword-list">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="markup-keyword-list" name=
+"markup-keyword-list"></a>1.2.5 <code class=
+"literal">markup-keyword-list</code></h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+(markup-keyword-list [:open string] [:close string]
+ [:sep string] [:depth integer])
+
+(markup-keyword [:open string] [:close string]
+ [:depth integer])
+</pre>
+<p>The print key of an index entry consists of a list of strings.
+The markup of this list can be defined with the command
+<code class="literal">markup-keyword-list</code>. The keyword
+argument <code class="literal">:depth</code> may be specified to
+define the markup of the list at a particular depth.</p>
+<p>The keyword of an index entry consists of a list of strings.
+Each of these components is tagged with the strings defined with
+the command <code class="literal">markup-keyword</code>. Since we
+maybe need different markup for different layers, the optional
+keyword argument can be used to specialize this markup for some
+depth.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="1.2.6 markup-letter-group-list">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="markup-letter-group-list" name=
+"markup-letter-group-list"></a>1.2.6 <code class=
+"literal">markup-letter-group-list</code></h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+(markup-letter-group-list [:open string] [:close string]
+ [:sep string])
+
+(markup-letter-group [:open string] [:close string] [:group group-name]
+ [:open-head string] [:close-head string]
+ [:upcase | :downcase | :capitalize])
+</pre>
+<p>The first command defines the markup of the letter group with
+name <code class="literal">group-name</code>. Since the markup of
+letter groups often contains the name of the letter group as a part
+of it, the other keyword arguments allow an additional markup for
+this group name. If one of the parameters <code class=
+"literal">:open-head</code> and <code class=
+"literal">:close-head</code> is specified additional markup is
+added as can be described as follows:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+&lt;OPEN&gt;
+ IF (:open-head OR :close-head)
+ &lt;OPEN-HEAD&gt;
+ transformer-of(&lt;GROUP-NAME&gt;)
+ &lt;CLOSE-HEAD&gt;
+ FI
+ &lt;INDEXENTRIES...&gt;
+&lt;CLOSE&gt;
+</pre>
+<p>Here, <code class="literal">transformer-of</code> is a function
+that possibly transforms the string representing the group name
+into another string. The transformers we currently support can be
+specified with the switches <code class="literal">:upcase</code>,
+<code class="literal">:downcase</code> and <code class=
+"literal">:capitalize</code> which result in the corresponding
+string conversions. If none of them is specified no transformation
+is done at all.</p>
+<p>The command <code class="literal">markup-letter-group</code>
+defines the markup of the list of letter groups.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="1.2.7 markup-locclass-list">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="markup-locclass-list" name=
+"markup-locclass-list"></a>1.2.7 <code class=
+"literal">markup-locclass-list</code></h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+(markup-locclass-list [:open string] [:close string]
+ [:sep string])
+</pre>
+<p>Each index entry contains a list of location class groups. This
+markup command can be used to define the markup of this list.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="1.2.8 markup-locref">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="markup-locref" name=
+"markup-locref"></a>1.2.8 <code class=
+"literal">markup-locref</code></h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+(markup-locref [:open string] [:close string]
+ [:class locref-class]
+ [:attr attribute]
+ [:depth integer])
+</pre>
+<p>The markup tags of a location reference can be specialized on
+the three arguments <code class="literal">:class</code>,
+<code class="literal">:attr</code> and additionally, if
+sub-references are used, <code class="literal">:depth</code>. Most
+often one will only use a tag depending on the attribute. For
+example, all location references with the attribute <code class=
+"literal">definition</code> should appear in a font series like
+bold, emphasizing the importance of this location reference; those
+with the attribute <code class="literal">default</code> in font
+shape italic. The markup in this case would not specialize on the
+depth or any particular class. A valid definition, suitable for a
+usage within HTML, could look like this.</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+(markup-locref :open "&lt;B&gt;" :close "&lt;/B&gt;" :attr "definition")
+(markup-locref :open "&lt;I&gt;" :close "&lt;/I&gt;" :attr "default")
+</pre></div>
+<div class="section" title="1.2.9 markup-locref-class">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="markup-locref-class" name=
+"markup-locref-class"></a>1.2.9 <code class=
+"literal">markup-locref-class</code></h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+(markup-locref-class [:open string] [:close string]
+ [:class locref-class])
+</pre>
+<p>All location references of a particular location reference class
+can be wrapped into the tags defined by this command. It
+specializes on the keyword argument <code class=
+"literal">:class</code>.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="1.2.10 markup-locref-layer">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="markup-locref-layer" name=
+"markup-locref-layer"></a>1.2.10 <code class=
+"literal">markup-locref-layer</code></h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+(markup-locref-layer [:open string] [:close string]
+ [:depth integer] [:layer integer]
+ [:class locref-class])
+
+(markup-locref-layer-list [:open string] [:close string]
+ [:sep string]
+ [:depth integer]
+ [:class locref-class])
+</pre>
+<p>A location reference contains a list of location reference
+layers. The second markup command can be used to markup this list.
+It specializes on the class of the location references and the
+depth (if sub-references are used).</p>
+<p>The first command allows to tag the elements of a layer list
+differently. The first element of this list can is specialisable
+with <code class="literal">:layer 0</code>, the next element with
+<code class="literal">:layer 1</code>, etc. See the next example
+for an example.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="1.2.11 markup-locref-list">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="markup-locref-list" name=
+"markup-locref-list"></a>1.2.11 <code class=
+"literal">markup-locref-list</code></h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+(markup-locref-list [:open string] [:close string] [:sep string]
+ [:depth integer] [:class locref-class])
+</pre>
+<p>An attribute group contains a list of location references and/or
+ranges. Additionally a layered location reference itself may
+contain sub-references that are stored as a list of location
+references. We specialize the markup for these lists on the
+location class they belong to with the keyword argument
+<code class="literal">:class</code>, and on <code class=
+"literal">:depth</code> that specializes on the different subentry
+levels when using location references with sub-references.</p>
+<p>Given is a list of location references that have the class
+description</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+(define-location-class "Appendix"
+ ("ALPHA" :sep "-" "arabic-numbers")
+ :hierdepth 2)
+</pre>
+<p>This location class has instances like <code class=
+"literal">A-1</code>, <code class="literal">B-5</code>, etc. The
+keyword argument <code class="literal">:hierdepth 2</code> informs
+xindy to markup these location references in a hierarchical form.
+With the commands</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+(markup-locref-list :sep "; "
+ :depth 0 :class "Appendix")
+(markup-locref-list :open " " :sep ","
+ :depth 1 :class "Appendix")
+(markup-locref-layer :open "{\bf " :close "}" :layer 0
+ :depth 0 :class "Appendix")
+</pre>
+<p>we obtain a markup sequence for some example data that could
+look like</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+ \bf A} 1,2,5; {\bf B} 5,6,9; {\bf D} 1,5,8; ...
+</pre></div>
+<div class="section" title="1.2.12 markup-range">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="markup-range" name=
+"markup-range"></a>1.2.12 <code class=
+"literal">markup-range</code></h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+(markup-range [:open string] [:close string] [:sep string]
+ [:class locref-class]
+ [:length num] [:ignore-end])
+</pre>
+<p>A range consists of two location references. Markup can be
+specified with the <code class="literal">:open</code> and
+<code class="literal">:close</code> arguments and one separator
+given by the argument <code class="literal">:sep</code>.</p>
+<p>Since both location references are tagged with markup defined by
+the command <code class="literal">markup-locref</code> a
+specialization on attributes or depth is not necessary.
+Specialization is allowed on the class they belong to, because the
+separator between two location refences may be different for each
+location class. Argument <code class="literal">:length</code> can
+be used to define different markup for different lengths. In
+conjunction with <code class="literal">:length</code> is may be
+useful not to print the second location reference at all. For
+example, one wishes to markup ranges of length 1 in the form Xf.
+instead of X--Y. This can be accomplished with the switch
+<code class="literal">:ignore-end</code>.</p>
+<p>The markup tags for a range (X,Y) can be described as
+follows:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+&lt;OPEN&gt;
+ Markup of location reference X
+&lt;SEP&gt;
+ IF (not :ignore-end)
+ Markup of location reference Y
+ FI
+&lt;CLOSE&gt;
+</pre>
+<p>The following tags can be used to define a range of page numbers
+(given in a location class <code class=
+"literal">page-numbers</code>) without considering the open and
+close parameters:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+(markup-range :sep "-" :class "page-numbers")
+</pre>
+<p>Location ranges then appear separated by a hyphen in a form like
+this:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+ ..., 5-8, 19-23, ...
+</pre></div>
+<div class="section" title=
+"1.2.13 (markup-trace [:on] [:open string] [:close string])">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h4 class="title"><a id="markup-trace" name=
+"markup-trace"></a>1.2.13 <code class="literal">(markup-trace [:on]
+[:open string] [:close string])</code></h4>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<p>This command can be used to activate the tracing of all markup
+commands xindy executes. The switch <code class=
+"literal">:on</code> activates the trace. If <code class=
+"literal">:on</code> is omitted, the command line flag <code class=
+"literal">-t</code> can be used as well. All tags which are emitted
+but not yet defined explicitly by the user are tagged with a
+symbolic notation indicating the commands that must be used to
+define this tag. The defaults for the keyword argument <code class=
+"literal">:open</code> is <code class="literal">`&lt;'</code> and
+for <code class="literal">:close</code> is <code class=
+"literal">`&gt;'</code>. The beginning of an example output could
+look like:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+&lt;INDEX:OPEN&gt;
+ &lt;LETTER-GROUP-LIST:OPEN&gt;
+ &lt;LETTER-GROUP:OPEN ["a"]&gt;
+ &lt;INDEXENTRY-LIST:OPEN [0]&gt;
+ &lt;INDEXENTRY:OPEN [0]&gt;
+ &lt;KEYWORD-LIST:OPEN [0]&gt;
+ &lt;KEYWORD:OPEN [0]&gt;
+ ...
+</pre>
+<p>We use a simple indentation scheme to make the structure of the
+tags visible. The symbolic tag <code class=
+"literal">&lt;LETTER-GROUP:OPEN ["a"]&gt;</code> for example
+indicates that the tag that can be specified with the command</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+(markup-letter-group :open "XXX" :group "a" ... )
+</pre>
+<p>is emitted at this point in the markup process. By incrementally
+adding markup commands to the index, more and more tags can be
+defined until the whole markup is defined. This general mechanism
+should allow everyone understand the markup process. The best is to
+start with a small index, define the complete markup and afterwards
+process the whole index. Additionally one can enclose the symbolic
+tags into an environment that is neutral to the document
+preparation system, such as a comment. For TeX this could be</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+(markup-trace :open "%%" :close "~n")
+</pre>
+<p>or a definition in the TeX document like</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\def\ignore#1{}
+</pre>
+<p>combined with the command</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+(markup-trace :open "\ignore{" :close "}")
+</pre></div>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="1.3 Raw Index Interface">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="xindy-command-list-raw-index" name=
+"xindy-command-list-raw-index"></a>1.3 Raw Index Interface</h3>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp12953120" class="indexterm" name="idp12953120"></a>
+<p>This section can be skipped if the reader is not interested in
+adapting xindy to a new document preparation system.</p>
+<p>The raw index is the file that represents the index that is to
+be processed. Since many different document preparation systems may
+use different forms of index representations, their output must be
+transformed in a form readable by xindy. We also could have written
+an configurable parser performing this task, but usually a tool
+written with some text processing tools such as <span class=
+"command"><strong>perl</strong></span>, <span class=
+"command"><strong>sed</strong></span> or <span class=
+"command"><strong>awk</strong></span> can achieve the same task as
+well. Therefore, adapting xindy to a completely different system
+can mostly be done by writing an appropriate raw index filter.</p>
+<p>The format of the raw index interface of xindy is defined as
+follows:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+(indexentry { :key string-list [:print string-list]
+ | :tkey list-of-layers }
+ [:attr string]
+ { :locref string [:open-range | :close-range]
+ | :xref string-list } )
+</pre>
+<p>The pseudo variable <span class=
+"emphasis"><em>string</em></span> is a sequence of characters
+surrounded by double quotes, e.g.</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+"Hi, it's me" "one" "a string with two \"double quotes\""
+</pre>
+<p>are three examples of valid strings. If you need to include a
+double quote as a literal character, you must quote it itself with
+a backslash as shown in the third example. A <span class=
+"emphasis"><em>string list</em></span> is simply a list of strings
+separated by whitespaces and surrounded by round braces. An example
+of a string list is</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+("This" "is" "a" "list" "of" "strings")
+</pre>
+<p>So far about the syntax. The semantics of the different elements
+are described here.</p>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">:key</code></span></dt>
+<dd>
+<p>The argument <span class="emphasis"><em>string list</em></span>
+defines the keyword of the index entry. It must be a list of
+strings, since the keyword may consist of different layers such as
+<code class="literal">("heap" "fibonacci")</code>.</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">:print</code></span></dt>
+<dd>
+<p>The optional <span class="emphasis"><em>print key</em></span>
+defines the way the keyword has to be printed in the markup
+phase.</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">:tkey</code></span></dt>
+<dd>
+<p>Another possibility to define the keys of an index entry is with
+the <code class="literal">:tkey</code> keyword argument. It can be
+used instead of the <code class="literal">:key</code> and
+<code class="literal">:print</code> arguments. Instead of
+specifying separately the key and the corresponding print key, we
+define the keyword by its layers. Each layer consist of a list of
+one or two strings. The first string will be interpreted as the
+main key, whereas the second one will become the print key. If the
+print key is ommited, the main key is taken instead. So the
+definition</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+:tkey (("This") ("is") ("a") ("bang" "BANG !!!"))
+</pre>
+<p>is equivalent to</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+:key ("This" "is" "a" "bang")
+:print ("This" "is" "a" "BANG !!!")
+</pre></dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">:locref</code></span></dt>
+<dd>
+<p>The reference an index entry describes can be a <span class=
+"emphasis"><em>location reference</em></span> or a <span class=
+"emphasis"><em>cross reference</em></span>. The switch <code class=
+"literal">:locref</code> describes a location reference. Its
+optional arguments are <code class="literal">:open-range</code> and
+<code class="literal">:close-range</code>. The <span class=
+"emphasis"><em>string</em></span> that must be supplied must
+somehow encode the location reference. It might look like the
+string <code class="literal">"25"</code> representing the page
+number 25, or <code class="literal">"Appendix-I"</code>
+representing the first appendix numbered in uppercase roman
+numerals.</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">:open-range,:close-range</code></span></dt>
+<dd>
+<p>These are switches that do not take any arguments. They describe
+the beginning and ending of a <span class=
+"emphasis"><em>range</em></span>, starting or ending from the
+location reference that is given by the argument <code class=
+"literal">:locref</code>. If they are supplied, the location
+reference may have influence on the way ranges are build.</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">:xref</code></span></dt>
+<dd>
+<p>These arguments choose the second alternative. The argument
+<span class="emphasis"><em>string list</em></span> of parameter
+<code class="literal">:xref</code> describes where the index entry
+should point to.</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term"><code class=
+"literal">:attr</code></span></dt>
+<dd>
+<p>This parameter may be used to tag a location reference with a
+certain attribute or it names the class of a cross reference. It
+may also used to associate different markup for different
+attributes in the markup phase. If this parameter is omitted or is
+the empty string, the indexentry is declared to have the attribute
+<code class="literal">default</code>.</p>
+</dd>
+</dl>
+</div>
+<p>Some examples:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+(indexentry :key ("airplane") :locref "25" :attr "default")
+</pre>
+<p>defines an index entry with the key <span class=
+"emphasis"><em>airplane'</em></span> indexed on page <span class=
+"emphasis"><em>25'</em></span>. This index entry has the attribute
+<code class="literal">default</code>.</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+(indexentry :key ("house") :xref("building") :attr "see")
+</pre>
+<p>defines a cross reference with the key <code class=
+"literal">house</code> pointing to the term <code class=
+"literal">building</code>. This cross reference belongs to the
+cross reference class <code class="literal">see</code>.</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+(indexentry :key ("house") :xref("building") :open-range)
+</pre>
+<p>is an invalid specification, since <code class=
+"literal">:open-range</code> mustn't be used together with cross
+references.</p>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="2 Invoking xindy">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h2 class="title" style="clear: both"><a id="xindy-invoking" name=
+"xindy-invoking"></a>2 Invoking xindy</h2>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp13002048" class="indexterm" name="idp13002048"></a>
+<div class="section" title="2.1 Command Line Options">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="xindy-invoking-cmdline" name=
+"xindy-invoking-cmdline"></a>2.1 Command Line Options</h3>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp13004688" class="indexterm" name="idp13004688"></a>
+<p>The following command line options are accepted:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+xindy [-h] [-t] [-v] [-l logfile] [-o outfile]
+ [-L n] [-f filterprog]
+ indexstyle raw-index
+</pre>
+<p>The argument <code class="literal">indexstyle</code> names a
+file, containing the index style description. The argument
+<code class="literal">raw-index</code> names a file, containing the
+raw index. Both arguments are mandatory.</p>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="term">-h</span></dt>
+<dd>
+<p>Gives a short summary of all command line options.</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term">-l</span></dt>
+<dd>
+<p>Writes helpful information into the specified <code class=
+"literal">logfile</code>. For example, the keyword mappings are
+written into this file, so one can check if the intended mappings
+were actually performed this way.</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term">-o</span></dt>
+<dd>
+<p>Explicitly defines the name of the <code class=
+"literal">output</code> file. If not given, the name of the
+<code class="literal">raw-index</code> is used with its extension
+changed to <code class="literal">.ind</code> (or added, if it had
+no extension at all).</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term">-t</span></dt>
+<dd>
+<p>Enters tracing mode of the symbolic markup tags. The format of
+the emitted tags can be defined with the command <code class=
+"literal">markup-trace</code>.</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term">-L</span></dt>
+<dd>
+<p>Set the xindy logging-level to <code class=
+"literal">n</code>.</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term">-f</span></dt>
+<dd>
+<p>Run <code class="literal">filterprog</code> on <code class=
+"literal">raw-index</code> before reading. The program must act as
+a filter reading from <code class="literal">stdin</code> and
+writing to <code class="literal">stdout</code>. The most obvious
+use of this option in conjunction with TeX is to run <code class=
+"literal">-f tex2xindy</code> on the index file prior to reading
+the entries into xindy.</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term">-v</span></dt>
+<dd>
+<p>Shows the version number of xindy.</p>
+</dd>
+</dl>
+</div>
+<p>Errors and warnings are reported to <code class=
+"literal">stdout</code> and additionally to the logfile if
+<code class="literal">-l</code> was specified.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="2.2 Search Path">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h3 class="title"><a id="xindy-search-path" name=
+"xindy-search-path"></a>2.2 Search Path</h3>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp13032720" class="indexterm" name="idp13032720"></a>
+<p>The system uses the concept of a search path for finding the
+index style files and modules. The searchpath can be set with the
+environment variable <code class="envar">XINDY_SEARCHPATH</code>
+which must contain a list of colon-separated directories. If it
+ends with a colon, the built-in searchpath is added to the entire
+searchpath. See the command <a class="link" href=
+"#xindy-command-list-processing-searchpath" title=
+"1.1.12 searchpath">searchpath</a> for further details.</p>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div xml:lang="en" class="appendix" title=
+"Appendix&nbsp;A.&nbsp;Appendices" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h2 class="title"><a id="appendices" name=
+"appendices"></a>Appendix&nbsp;A.&nbsp;Appendices</h2>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="toc">
+<p><strong>Table of Contents</strong></p>
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#issues">1 Bugs / Known Issues /
+Missing Features</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#about">2 About this
+Document</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#release-news">3 Release
+News</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="section"><a href="#gfdl">4 GNU Free Documentation
+License</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="index"><a href=
+"#tex-refs-idx">Index</a></span></dt>
+</dl>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title=
+"1 Bugs / Known Issues / Missing Features">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h2 class="title" style="clear: both"><a id="issues" name=
+"issues"></a>1 Bugs / Known Issues / Missing Features</h2>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp13040576" class="indexterm" name="idp13040576"></a>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="term">PDF</span></dt>
+<dd>
+<p>A PDF file is no longer supported.</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term">Texinfo</span></dt>
+<dd>
+<p>Currently we don't know any working solution to convert DocBook
+XML to Texinfo (at least not for a complex document). Anyone who
+wants to work on this issue is highly welcome. A starting point
+could be the <span class="emphasis"><em>docbook2X</em></span>
+project at <a class="ulink" href="http://docbook2x.sourceforge.net"
+target="_top">http://docbook2x.sourceforge.net</a>.</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term">vim-help</span></dt>
+<dd>
+<p>Quite a few poeple are asking for a version in vim-help format.
+<a class="ulink" href="mailto:srinath@eecs.berkeley.edu" target=
+"_top">Srinath Avadhanula</a> has already done some work on
+this.</p>
+</dd>
+</dl>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="2 About this Document">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h2 class="title" style="clear: both"><a id="about" name=
+"about"></a>2 About this Document</h2>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<a id="idp13051152" class="indexterm" name="idp13051152"></a>
+<p>The source format of this document is <a class="ulink" href=
+"http://www.oasis-open.org/committees/docbook/" target=
+"_top">DocBook XML (V4.3)</a>.</p>
+<p>The various output formats were generated using:</p>
+<div class="itemizedlist">
+<ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc">
+<li class="listitem"><a class="ulink" href=
+"http://xmlsoft.org/XSLT/" target="_top">xsltproc
+(libxml2-2.6.26/libxslt-1.1.26)</a> as XSLT processor</li>
+<li class="listitem"><a class="ulink" href=
+"http://sourceforge.net/projects/docbook" target="_top">DocBook XSL
+Stylesheets (V1.77.1)</a> for HTML and Epub</li>
+</ul>
+</div>
+<p>You'll always find the newest version of this document at
+<a class="ulink" href="http://www.miwie.org/tex-refs/" target=
+"_top">http://www.miwie.org/tex-refs/</a>.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="3 Release News">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h2 class="title" style="clear: both"><a id="release-news" name=
+"release-news"></a>3 Release News</h2>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="variablelist">
+<dl>
+<dt><span class="term">V0.4.1 12-12-03</span></dt>
+<dd>
+<div class="itemizedlist">
+<ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc" compact="compact">
+<li class="listitem">Removed obsolete file still referenced in
+Makefile (no visible changes)</li>
+</ul>
+</div>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term">V0.4.0 12-12-02</span></dt>
+<dd>
+<div class="itemizedlist">
+<ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc" compact="compact">
+<li class="listitem">Minor changes for Epub output</li>
+<li class="listitem">Added missing IDs on some sections and
+tables</li>
+</ul>
+</div>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term">V0.3.9 05-05-14</span></dt>
+<dd>
+<div class="itemizedlist">
+<ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc" compact="compact">
+<li class="listitem">Consistent naming scheme of IDs to ease the
+use of this reference for other projects</li>
+<li class="listitem">Added new section <a class="link" href=
+"#float" title="3.3 float">float</a> in chapter <a class="link"
+href="#latex" title="2 LaTeX">LaTeX</a></li>
+</ul>
+</div>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term">V0.3.8 04-10-28</span></dt>
+<dd>
+<div class="itemizedlist">
+<ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc" compact="compact">
+<li class="listitem">Minor changes in <a class="link" href=
+"#page-styles" title="2.3.15 Page Styles">\maketitle</a></li>
+</ul>
+</div>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term">V0.3.7 04-08-26</span></dt>
+<dd>
+<div class="itemizedlist">
+<ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc" compact="compact">
+<li class="listitem">Corrected typos and markup errors in chapter
+<a class="link" href="#bibtex" title=
+"Chapter&nbsp;5.&nbsp;BibTeX">BibTeX</a></li>
+<li class="listitem">Switched to DocBook XML V4.3</li>
+<li class="listitem">Added new section <a class="link" href=
+"#opt-latex" title="2.1 Options">Options</a> in chapter <a class=
+"link" href="#latex" title="2 LaTeX">LaTeX</a></li>
+</ul>
+</div>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term">V0.3.6 04-06-21</span></dt>
+<dd>
+<div class="itemizedlist">
+<ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc" compact="compact">
+<li class="listitem">Added a note in chapter <a class="link" href=
+"#latex" title="2 LaTeX">LaTeX</a> with the copyright and
+permission notice of the original file <code class=
+"filename">latex2.texi</code></li>
+<li class="listitem">Corrected typos and added missing hyperlinks
+in chapter <a class="link" href="#xindy" title=
+"Chapter&nbsp;7.&nbsp;xindy">xindy</a></li>
+<li class="listitem">PDF file optimized/linearized and some
+finetuning</li>
+</ul>
+</div>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term">V0.3.5 04-05-01</span></dt>
+<dd>
+<div class="itemizedlist">
+<ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc" compact="compact">
+<li class="listitem">Added content to chapters <a class="link"
+href="#metapost" title="Chapter&nbsp;4.&nbsp;MetaPost">MetaPost</a>
+and <a class="link" href="#pdftex" title=
+"Chapter&nbsp;2.&nbsp;pdfTeX">pdfTeX</a></li>
+<li class="listitem">Enhanced index for chapter <a class="link"
+href="#metapost" title=
+"Chapter&nbsp;4.&nbsp;MetaPost">Make-Index</a></li>
+</ul>
+</div>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term">V0.3.4 04-04-24</span></dt>
+<dd>
+<div class="itemizedlist">
+<ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc" compact="compact">
+<li class="listitem">Version control system changed from CVS to
+SVN</li>
+<li class="listitem">Added missing entries to chapter <a class=
+"link" href="#makeindex" title=
+"Chapter&nbsp;6.&nbsp;Make-Index">Make-Index</a></li>
+</ul>
+</div>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term">V0.3.3 04-01-26</span></dt>
+<dd>
+<div class="itemizedlist">
+<ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc" compact="compact">
+<li class="listitem">Corrected again section <a class="link" href=
+"#makeindex-output-style-specs" title=
+"2.2 Output Style Specifiers">Output Style Specifiers</a> and
+<a class="link" href="#makeindex-style" title=
+"2.1 Input Style Specifiers">Input Style Specifiers</a> of chapter
+<a class="link" href="#makeindex" title=
+"Chapter&nbsp;6.&nbsp;Make-Index">Make-Index</a></li>
+<li class="listitem">Corrected some symbols in the index</li>
+</ul>
+</div>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term">V0.3.2 04-01-16</span></dt>
+<dd>
+<div class="itemizedlist">
+<ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc" compact="compact">
+<li class="listitem">Corrected sections <a class="link" href=
+"#makeindex-output-style-specs" title=
+"2.2 Output Style Specifiers">Output Style Specifiers</a> and
+<a class="link" href="#makeindex-style" title=
+"2.1 Input Style Specifiers">Input Style Specifiers</a> of chapter
+<a class="link" href="#makeindex" title=
+"Chapter&nbsp;6.&nbsp;Make-Index">Make-Index</a></li>
+<li class="listitem">Enhanced index in PDF</li>
+</ul>
+</div>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term">V0.3.1 04-01-06</span></dt>
+<dd>
+<div class="itemizedlist">
+<ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc" compact="compact">
+<li class="listitem">More work on PDF</li>
+<li class="listitem">Modularized XSL stylesheet files</li>
+<li class="listitem">Corrected some typos</li>
+</ul>
+</div>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term">V0.3.0 03-12-25</span></dt>
+<dd>
+<div class="itemizedlist">
+<ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc" compact="compact">
+<li class="listitem">Changed document root to <span class=
+"emphasis"><em>book</em></span></li>
+<li class="listitem">More work on PDF version</li>
+<li class="listitem">Using new XSL stylesheets V1.64.1</li>
+<li class="listitem">Minor fixes</li>
+</ul>
+</div>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term">V0.2.6 03-10-27</span></dt>
+<dd>
+<div class="itemizedlist">
+<ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc" compact="compact">
+<li class="listitem">Rearranged appendix</li>
+<li class="listitem">Work on PDF version</li>
+</ul>
+</div>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term">V0.2.5 03-10-17</span></dt>
+<dd>
+<div class="itemizedlist">
+<ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc" compact="compact">
+<li class="listitem">Added contents of <a class="link" href="#gfdl"
+title="4 GNU Free Documentation License">GNU FDL</a> in
+appendix</li>
+<li class="listitem">Using new XSL stylesheets V1.62.4</li>
+<li class="listitem">Switched to <a class="ulink" href=
+"http://xmlsoft.org/XSLT/" target="_top"><code class=
+"literal">xsltproc</code></a> as XSLT-processor</li>
+<li class="listitem">Reedited some deeply nested sections</li>
+<li class="listitem">Changed colors in CSS</li>
+</ul>
+</div>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term">V0.2.4 03-09-06</span></dt>
+<dd>
+<div class="itemizedlist">
+<ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc" compact="compact">
+<li class="listitem">Added subsection <a class="link" href=
+"#dcolumn" title="3.2 dcolumn"><code class=
+"literal">dcolumn</code></a></li>
+<li class="listitem">Subsection <a class="link" href="#fontenc"
+title="3.4 fontenc"><code class="literal">fontenc</code></a>
+translated into english</li>
+<li class="listitem">Corrected typo in <a class="link" href=
+"#cmd-sbox" title="2.3.17.&nbsp;\sbox"><code class=
+"filename">\sbox</code></a></li>
+</ul>
+</div>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term">V0.2.3 03-04-12</span></dt>
+<dd>
+<div class="itemizedlist">
+<ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc" compact="compact">
+<li class="listitem">Provide PDF output using <a class="ulink"
+href="http://www.pragma-ade.com/" target="_top">ConTeXt</a> and
+<a class="ulink" href=
+"http://www.hobby.nl/~scaprea/context/index.html" target=
+"_top">DocBook In ConTeXt</a> (still experimental)</li>
+<li class="listitem">Reedited (beautified) sections LaTeX /
+Commands / <a class="link" href="#counters" title=
+"2.3.1 Counters">Counters</a> | <a class="link" href=
+"#cross-references" title="2.3.2 Cross References">Cross
+References</a> | <a class="link" href="#definitions" title=
+"2.3.3 Definitions">Definitions</a> | <a class="link" href=
+"#layout" title="2.3.5 Layout">Layout</a> | <a class="link" href=
+"#env-latex" title="2.3.6 Environments">Environments</a> |
+<a class="link" href="#footnotes" title=
+"2.3.7 Footnotes">Footnotes</a></li>
+</ul>
+</div>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term">V0.2.2 03-01-26</span></dt>
+<dd>
+<div class="itemizedlist">
+<ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc" compact="compact">
+<li class="listitem">Added bzip2 compressed version of source and
+outfiles tarball</li>
+<li class="listitem">Using new XSL stylesheets V1.60.1</li>
+<li class="listitem">Eliminated more spurious &amp;Acirc;
+characters in HTML output</li>
+</ul>
+</div>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term">V0.2.1 03-01-18</span></dt>
+<dd>
+<div class="itemizedlist">
+<ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc" compact="compact">
+<li class="listitem">Using new XSL stylesheets V1.59.2</li>
+<li class="listitem">Eliminated spurious &amp;Acirc;
+characters</li>
+</ul>
+</div>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term">V0.2.0 03-01-11</span></dt>
+<dd>
+<div class="itemizedlist">
+<ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc" compact="compact">
+<li class="listitem">Using new XSL stylesheets V1.58.1</li>
+<li class="listitem">Minor changes to CSS file</li>
+<li class="listitem">License changed to <a class="ulink" href=
+"http://www.gnu.org/licenses/fdl.html" target="_top">GNU Free
+Documentation License</a></li>
+<li class="listitem">Added subsection <a class="link" href=
+"#pstricks-commands" title="4.2.2 Commands and Parameters">Commands
+and Parameters</a> to section <a class="link" href="#pstricks"
+title="4.2 PSTricks">PSTricks</a></li>
+<li class="listitem">Reworked <a class="link" href="#inputenc"
+title="3.8 inputenc">inputenc</a> section</li>
+</ul>
+</div>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term">V0.1.3 02-10-17</span></dt>
+<dd>
+<div class="itemizedlist">
+<ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc" compact="compact">
+<li class="listitem">Started rework of <a class="link" href=
+"#komascript" title="3.9 KOMA-Script">KOMA-Script</a> section</li>
+<li class="listitem">Added subsection <a class="link" href=
+"#pstricks-add-packages" title=
+"4.2.3 List of Additional PSTricks Packages">Additional PSTricks
+Packages</a></li>
+<li class="listitem">Using new XSL stylesheets V1.56.1</li>
+</ul>
+</div>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term">V0.1.2 02-10-01</span></dt>
+<dd>
+<div class="itemizedlist">
+<ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc" compact="compact">
+<li class="listitem">Reworked <a class="link" href="#hyperref"
+title="3.7 hyperref">hyperref</a> section</li>
+</ul>
+</div>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term">V0.1.1 02-09-19</span></dt>
+<dd>
+<div class="itemizedlist">
+<ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc" compact="compact">
+<li class="listitem">Added template sections for <a class="link"
+href="#pictex" title="4.1 PiCTeX (tbd.)">PiCTeX</a> and <a class=
+"link" href="#texinfo" title="7 Texinfo (tbd.)">Texinfo</a></li>
+<li class="listitem">Added subsection <a class="link" href=
+"#release-news" title="3 Release News">Release News</a> in appendix
+<a class="link" href="#about" title="2 About this Document">About
+this Document</a></li>
+<li class="listitem">Using new XSL stylesheets V1.55.0</li>
+<li class="listitem">Added missing CSS file to outfiles
+tarball</li>
+<li class="listitem">Corrected wrong FPI</li>
+</ul>
+</div>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term">V0.1.0 02-08-20</span></dt>
+<dd>
+<div class="itemizedlist">
+<ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc" compact="compact">
+<li class="listitem">Eliminated trailing '.' in numbered
+sections</li>
+<li class="listitem">Minor markup errors corrected</li>
+<li class="listitem">Reworked CSS file</li>
+</ul>
+</div>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term">V0.0.5 02-08-10</span></dt>
+<dd>
+<div class="itemizedlist">
+<ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc" compact="compact">
+<li class="listitem">Switched to DocBook XML 4.2</li>
+<li class="listitem">Sections 'Bibindex' and 'xindy' completed</li>
+</ul>
+</div>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term">V0.0.4 02-07-25</span></dt>
+<dd>
+<div class="itemizedlist">
+<ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc" compact="compact">
+<li class="listitem">Section 'Makeindex' completed</li>
+</ul>
+</div>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term">V0.0.3 02-07-13</span></dt>
+<dd>
+<div class="itemizedlist">
+<ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc" compact="compact">
+<li class="listitem">New XSL stylesheets solve bug in creating
+index (no other changes)</li>
+</ul>
+</div>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term">V0.0.2 02-07-05</span></dt>
+<dd>
+<div class="itemizedlist">
+<ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc" compact="compact">
+<li class="listitem">New (template) sections 'fontinst', 'Bibtex',
+'Makeindex', and 'xindy'</li>
+<li class="listitem">New section 'Special Symbols'</li>
+<li class="listitem">Added information for 'german' package</li>
+<li class="listitem">Registered as a new project (tex-refs) on
+freshmeat.net</li>
+</ul>
+</div>
+</dd>
+<dt><span class="term">V0.0.1 02-06-21</span></dt>
+<dd>
+<div class="itemizedlist">
+<ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc" compact="compact">
+<li class="listitem">First official announcement</li>
+</ul>
+</div>
+</dd>
+</dl>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="section" title="4 GNU Free Documentation License">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h2 class="title" style="clear: both"><a id="gfdl" name=
+"gfdl"></a>4 GNU Free Documentation License</h2>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<h5 class="title"><a id="idp13212128" name=
+"idp13212128"></a>Version 1.2, November 2002</h5>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+ Copyright (C) 2000,2001,2002 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+ 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA
+ Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
+ of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
+
+
+0. PREAMBLE
+
+The purpose of this License is to make a manual, textbook, or other
+functional and useful document "free" in the sense of freedom: to
+assure everyone the effective freedom to copy and redistribute it,
+with or without modifying it, either commercially or noncommercially.
+Secondarily, this License preserves for the author and publisher a way
+to get credit for their work, while not being considered responsible
+for modifications made by others.
+
+This License is a kind of "copyleft", which means that derivative
+works of the document must themselves be free in the same sense. It
+complements the GNU General Public License, which is a copyleft
+license designed for free software.
+
+We have designed this License in order to use it for manuals for free
+software, because free software needs free documentation: a free
+program should come with manuals providing the same freedoms that the
+software does. But this License is not limited to software manuals;
+it can be used for any textual work, regardless of subject matter or
+whether it is published as a printed book. We recommend this License
+principally for works whose purpose is instruction or reference.
+
+
+1. APPLICABILITY AND DEFINITIONS
+
+This License applies to any manual or other work, in any medium, that
+contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it can be
+distributed under the terms of this License. Such a notice grants a
+world-wide, royalty-free license, unlimited in duration, to use that
+work under the conditions stated herein. The "Document", below,
+refers to any such manual or work. Any member of the public is a
+licensee, and is addressed as "you". You accept the license if you
+copy, modify or distribute the work in a way requiring permission
+under copyright law.
+
+A "Modified Version" of the Document means any work containing the
+Document or a portion of it, either copied verbatim, or with
+modifications and/or translated into another language.
+
+A "Secondary Section" is a named appendix or a front-matter section of
+the Document that deals exclusively with the relationship of the
+publishers or authors of the Document to the Document's overall subject
+(or to related matters) and contains nothing that could fall directly
+within that overall subject. (Thus, if the Document is in part a
+textbook of mathematics, a Secondary Section may not explain any
+mathematics.) The relationship could be a matter of historical
+connection with the subject or with related matters, or of legal,
+commercial, philosophical, ethical or political position regarding
+them.
+
+The "Invariant Sections" are certain Secondary Sections whose titles
+are designated, as being those of Invariant Sections, in the notice
+that says that the Document is released under this License. If a
+section does not fit the above definition of Secondary then it is not
+allowed to be designated as Invariant. The Document may contain zero
+Invariant Sections. If the Document does not identify any Invariant
+Sections then there are none.
+
+The "Cover Texts" are certain short passages of text that are listed,
+as Front-Cover Texts or Back-Cover Texts, in the notice that says that
+the Document is released under this License. A Front-Cover Text may
+be at most 5 words, and a Back-Cover Text may be at most 25 words.
+
+A "Transparent" copy of the Document means a machine-readable copy,
+represented in a format whose specification is available to the
+general public, that is suitable for revising the document
+straightforwardly with generic text editors or (for images composed of
+pixels) generic paint programs or (for drawings) some widely available
+drawing editor, and that is suitable for input to text formatters or
+for automatic translation to a variety of formats suitable for input
+to text formatters. A copy made in an otherwise Transparent file
+format whose markup, or absence of markup, has been arranged to thwart
+or discourage subsequent modification by readers is not Transparent.
+An image format is not Transparent if used for any substantial amount
+of text. A copy that is not "Transparent" is called "Opaque".
+
+Examples of suitable formats for Transparent copies include plain
+ASCII without markup, Texinfo input format, LaTeX input format, SGML
+or XML using a publicly available DTD, and standard-conforming simple
+HTML, PostScript or PDF designed for human modification. Examples of
+transparent image formats include PNG, XCF and JPG. Opaque formats
+include proprietary formats that can be read and edited only by
+proprietary word processors, SGML or XML for which the DTD and/or
+processing tools are not generally available, and the
+machine-generated HTML, PostScript or PDF produced by some word
+processors for output purposes only.
+
+The "Title Page" means, for a printed book, the title page itself,
+plus such following pages as are needed to hold, legibly, the material
+this License requires to appear in the title page. For works in
+formats which do not have any title page as such, "Title Page" means
+the text near the most prominent appearance of the work's title,
+preceding the beginning of the body of the text.
+
+A section "Entitled XYZ" means a named subunit of the Document whose
+title either is precisely XYZ or contains XYZ in parentheses following
+text that translates XYZ in another language. (Here XYZ stands for a
+specific section name mentioned below, such as "Acknowledgements",
+"Dedications", "Endorsements", or "History".) To "Preserve the Title"
+of such a section when you modify the Document means that it remains a
+section "Entitled XYZ" according to this definition.
+
+The Document may include Warranty Disclaimers next to the notice which
+states that this License applies to the Document. These Warranty
+Disclaimers are considered to be included by reference in this
+License, but only as regards disclaiming warranties: any other
+implication that these Warranty Disclaimers may have is void and has
+no effect on the meaning of this License.
+
+
+2. VERBATIM COPYING
+
+You may copy and distribute the Document in any medium, either
+commercially or noncommercially, provided that this License, the
+copyright notices, and the license notice saying this License applies
+to the Document are reproduced in all copies, and that you add no other
+conditions whatsoever to those of this License. You may not use
+technical measures to obstruct or control the reading or further
+copying of the copies you make or distribute. However, you may accept
+compensation in exchange for copies. If you distribute a large enough
+number of copies you must also follow the conditions in section 3.
+
+You may also lend copies, under the same conditions stated above, and
+you may publicly display copies.
+
+
+3. COPYING IN QUANTITY
+
+If you publish printed copies (or copies in media that commonly have
+printed covers) of the Document, numbering more than 100, and the
+Document's license notice requires Cover Texts, you must enclose the
+copies in covers that carry, clearly and legibly, all these Cover
+Texts: Front-Cover Texts on the front cover, and Back-Cover Texts on
+the back cover. Both covers must also clearly and legibly identify
+you as the publisher of these copies. The front cover must present
+the full title with all words of the title equally prominent and
+visible. You may add other material on the covers in addition.
+Copying with changes limited to the covers, as long as they preserve
+the title of the Document and satisfy these conditions, can be treated
+as verbatim copying in other respects.
+
+If the required texts for either cover are too voluminous to fit
+legibly, you should put the first ones listed (as many as fit
+reasonably) on the actual cover, and continue the rest onto adjacent
+pages.
+
+If you publish or distribute Opaque copies of the Document numbering
+more than 100, you must either include a machine-readable Transparent
+copy along with each Opaque copy, or state in or with each Opaque copy
+a computer-network location from which the general network-using
+public has access to download using public-standard network protocols
+a complete Transparent copy of the Document, free of added material.
+If you use the latter option, you must take reasonably prudent steps,
+when you begin distribution of Opaque copies in quantity, to ensure
+that this Transparent copy will remain thus accessible at the stated
+location until at least one year after the last time you distribute an
+Opaque copy (directly or through your agents or retailers) of that
+edition to the public.
+
+It is requested, but not required, that you contact the authors of the
+Document well before redistributing any large number of copies, to give
+them a chance to provide you with an updated version of the Document.
+
+
+4. MODIFICATIONS
+
+You may copy and distribute a Modified Version of the Document under
+the conditions of sections 2 and 3 above, provided that you release
+the Modified Version under precisely this License, with the Modified
+Version filling the role of the Document, thus licensing distribution
+and modification of the Modified Version to whoever possesses a copy
+of it. In addition, you must do these things in the Modified Version:
+
+A. Use in the Title Page (and on the covers, if any) a title distinct
+ from that of the Document, and from those of previous versions
+ (which should, if there were any, be listed in the History section
+ of the Document). You may use the same title as a previous version
+ if the original publisher of that version gives permission.
+B. List on the Title Page, as authors, one or more persons or entities
+ responsible for authorship of the modifications in the Modified
+ Version, together with at least five of the principal authors of the
+ Document (all of its principal authors, if it has fewer than five),
+ unless they release you from this requirement.
+C. State on the Title page the name of the publisher of the
+ Modified Version, as the publisher.
+D. Preserve all the copyright notices of the Document.
+E. Add an appropriate copyright notice for your modifications
+ adjacent to the other copyright notices.
+F. Include, immediately after the copyright notices, a license notice
+ giving the public permission to use the Modified Version under the
+ terms of this License, in the form shown in the Addendum below.
+G. Preserve in that license notice the full lists of Invariant Sections
+ and required Cover Texts given in the Document's license notice.
+H. Include an unaltered copy of this License.
+I. Preserve the section Entitled "History", Preserve its Title, and add
+ to it an item stating at least the title, year, new authors, and
+ publisher of the Modified Version as given on the Title Page. If
+ there is no section Entitled "History" in the Document, create one
+ stating the title, year, authors, and publisher of the Document as
+ given on its Title Page, then add an item describing the Modified
+ Version as stated in the previous sentence.
+J. Preserve the network location, if any, given in the Document for
+ public access to a Transparent copy of the Document, and likewise
+ the network locations given in the Document for previous versions
+ it was based on. These may be placed in the "History" section.
+ You may omit a network location for a work that was published at
+ least four years before the Document itself, or if the original
+ publisher of the version it refers to gives permission.
+K. For any section Entitled "Acknowledgements" or "Dedications",
+ Preserve the Title of the section, and preserve in the section all
+ the substance and tone of each of the contributor acknowledgements
+ and/or dedications given therein.
+L. Preserve all the Invariant Sections of the Document,
+ unaltered in their text and in their titles. Section numbers
+ or the equivalent are not considered part of the section titles.
+M. Delete any section Entitled "Endorsements". Such a section
+ may not be included in the Modified Version.
+N. Do not retitle any existing section to be Entitled "Endorsements"
+ or to conflict in title with any Invariant Section.
+O. Preserve any Warranty Disclaimers.
+
+If the Modified Version includes new front-matter sections or
+appendices that qualify as Secondary Sections and contain no material
+copied from the Document, you may at your option designate some or all
+of these sections as invariant. To do this, add their titles to the
+list of Invariant Sections in the Modified Version's license notice.
+These titles must be distinct from any other section titles.
+
+You may add a section Entitled "Endorsements", provided it contains
+nothing but endorsements of your Modified Version by various
+parties--for example, statements of peer review or that the text has
+been approved by an organization as the authoritative definition of a
+standard.
+
+You may add a passage of up to five words as a Front-Cover Text, and a
+passage of up to 25 words as a Back-Cover Text, to the end of the list
+of Cover Texts in the Modified Version. Only one passage of
+Front-Cover Text and one of Back-Cover Text may be added by (or
+through arrangements made by) any one entity. If the Document already
+includes a cover text for the same cover, previously added by you or
+by arrangement made by the same entity you are acting on behalf of,
+you may not add another; but you may replace the old one, on explicit
+permission from the previous publisher that added the old one.
+
+The author(s) and publisher(s) of the Document do not by this License
+give permission to use their names for publicity for or to assert or
+imply endorsement of any Modified Version.
+
+
+5. COMBINING DOCUMENTS
+
+You may combine the Document with other documents released under this
+License, under the terms defined in section 4 above for modified
+versions, provided that you include in the combination all of the
+Invariant Sections of all of the original documents, unmodified, and
+list them all as Invariant Sections of your combined work in its
+license notice, and that you preserve all their Warranty Disclaimers.
+
+The combined work need only contain one copy of this License, and
+multiple identical Invariant Sections may be replaced with a single
+copy. If there are multiple Invariant Sections with the same name but
+different contents, make the title of each such section unique by
+adding at the end of it, in parentheses, the name of the original
+author or publisher of that section if known, or else a unique number.
+Make the same adjustment to the section titles in the list of
+Invariant Sections in the license notice of the combined work.
+
+In the combination, you must combine any sections Entitled "History"
+in the various original documents, forming one section Entitled
+"History"; likewise combine any sections Entitled "Acknowledgements",
+and any sections Entitled "Dedications". You must delete all sections
+Entitled "Endorsements".
+
+
+6. COLLECTIONS OF DOCUMENTS
+
+You may make a collection consisting of the Document and other documents
+released under this License, and replace the individual copies of this
+License in the various documents with a single copy that is included in
+the collection, provided that you follow the rules of this License for
+verbatim copying of each of the documents in all other respects.
+
+You may extract a single document from such a collection, and distribute
+it individually under this License, provided you insert a copy of this
+License into the extracted document, and follow this License in all
+other respects regarding verbatim copying of that document.
+
+
+7. AGGREGATION WITH INDEPENDENT WORKS
+
+A compilation of the Document or its derivatives with other separate
+and independent documents or works, in or on a volume of a storage or
+distribution medium, is called an "aggregate" if the copyright
+resulting from the compilation is not used to limit the legal rights
+of the compilation's users beyond what the individual works permit.
+When the Document is included in an aggregate, this License does not
+apply to the other works in the aggregate which are not themselves
+derivative works of the Document.
+
+If the Cover Text requirement of section 3 is applicable to these
+copies of the Document, then if the Document is less than one half of
+the entire aggregate, the Document's Cover Texts may be placed on
+covers that bracket the Document within the aggregate, or the
+electronic equivalent of covers if the Document is in electronic form.
+Otherwise they must appear on printed covers that bracket the whole
+aggregate.
+
+
+8. TRANSLATION
+
+Translation is considered a kind of modification, so you may
+distribute translations of the Document under the terms of section 4.
+Replacing Invariant Sections with translations requires special
+permission from their copyright holders, but you may include
+translations of some or all Invariant Sections in addition to the
+original versions of these Invariant Sections. You may include a
+translation of this License, and all the license notices in the
+Document, and any Warranty Disclaimers, provided that you also include
+the original English version of this License and the original versions
+of those notices and disclaimers. In case of a disagreement between
+the translation and the original version of this License or a notice
+or disclaimer, the original version will prevail.
+
+If a section in the Document is Entitled "Acknowledgements",
+"Dedications", or "History", the requirement (section 4) to Preserve
+its Title (section 1) will typically require changing the actual
+title.
+
+
+9. TERMINATION
+
+You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Document except
+as expressly provided for under this License. Any other attempt to
+copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Document is void, and will
+automatically terminate your rights under this License. However,
+parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under this
+License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such
+parties remain in full compliance.
+
+
+10. FUTURE REVISIONS OF THIS LICENSE
+
+The Free Software Foundation may publish new, revised versions
+of the GNU Free Documentation License from time to time. Such new
+versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may
+differ in detail to address new problems or concerns. See
+http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/.
+
+Each version of the License is given a distinguishing version number.
+If the Document specifies that a particular numbered version of this
+License "or any later version" applies to it, you have the option of
+following the terms and conditions either of that specified version or
+of any later version that has been published (not as a draft) by the
+Free Software Foundation. If the Document does not specify a version
+number of this License, you may choose any version ever published (not
+as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation.
+
+
+ADDENDUM: How to use this License for your documents
+
+To use this License in a document you have written, include a copy of
+the License in the document and put the following copyright and
+license notices just after the title page:
+
+ Copyright (c) YEAR YOUR NAME.
+ Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
+ under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.2
+ or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
+ with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts, and no Back-Cover Texts.
+ A copy of the license is included in the section entitled "GNU
+ Free Documentation License".
+
+If you have Invariant Sections, Front-Cover Texts and Back-Cover Texts,
+replace the "with...Texts." line with this:
+
+ with the Invariant Sections being LIST THEIR TITLES, with the
+ Front-Cover Texts being LIST, and with the Back-Cover Texts being LIST.
+
+If you have Invariant Sections without Cover Texts, or some other
+combination of the three, merge those two alternatives to suit the
+situation.
+
+If your document contains nontrivial examples of program code, we
+recommend releasing these examples in parallel under your choice of
+free software license, such as the GNU General Public License,
+to permit their use in free software.
+</pre></div>
+<div class="index" title="Index">
+<div class="titlepage">
+<div>
+<div>
+<h2 class="title"><a id="tex-refs-idx" name=
+"tex-refs-idx"></a>Index</h2>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="index">
+<div class="indexdiv">
+<h3>Symbols</h3>
+<dl>
+<dt>$, <a class="indexterm" href="#math-formulae">Math
+Formulae</a></dt>
+<dt>\!, <a class="indexterm" href="#math-formulae">Math
+Formulae</a></dt>
+<dt>\' (tabbing), <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>\(, <a class="indexterm" href="#math-formulae">Math
+Formulae</a></dt>
+<dt>\), <a class="indexterm" href="#math-formulae">Math
+Formulae</a></dt>
+<dt>\+, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>\,, <a class="indexterm" href="#math-formulae">Math
+Formulae</a></dt>
+<dt>\- (hyphenation), <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#line-and-page-breaking">Line &amp; Page Breaking</a></dt>
+<dt>\- (tabbing) , <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>\;, <a class="indexterm" href="#math-formulae">Math
+Formulae</a></dt>
+<dt>\&lt; , <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>\=, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>\&gt;, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>\a, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>\addcontentsline, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#table-of-contents">Table of Contents</a></dt>
+<dt>\address, <a class="indexterm" href="#letters">Letters</a></dt>
+<dt>\addtocontents, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#table-of-contents">Table of Contents</a></dt>
+<dt>\addtocounter{counter}{value}, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#counters">Counters</a></dt>
+<dt>\addtolength, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#lengths">Lengths</a></dt>
+<dt>\addvspace, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#spaces-and-boxes">Spaces &amp; Boxes</a></dt>
+<dt>\alph, <a class="indexterm" href="#counters">Counters</a></dt>
+<dt>\Alph, <a class="indexterm" href="#counters">Counters</a></dt>
+<dt>\appendix, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#sectioning">Sectioning</a></dt>
+<dt>\arabic, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#counters">Counters</a></dt>
+<dt>\areaset, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#komascript-page-layout">Page-Layout</a></dt>
+<dt>\author, <a class="indexterm" href="#page-styles">Page
+Styles</a></dt>
+<dt>\backslash, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#special-characters">Special Characters</a></dt>
+<dt>\begin, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>\bfseries, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#typefaces">Typefaces</a></dt>
+<dt>\bibitem, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>\bibliography, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>\bibliographystyle, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>\bigskip, <a class="indexterm" href="#spaces-and-boxes">Spaces
+&amp; Boxes</a></dt>
+<dt>\bm, <a class="indexterm" href="#bm-package">bm</a></dt>
+<dt>\boldsymbol, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#amsmath">amsmath</a></dt>
+<dt>\boldsymbold, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#bm-package">bm</a></dt>
+<dt>\caption, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>\cc, <a class="indexterm" href="#letters">Letters</a></dt>
+<dt>\cdots, <a class="indexterm" href="#math-formulae">Math
+Formulae</a></dt>
+<dt>\centering, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>\chapter, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#sectioning">Sectioning</a></dt>
+<dt>\circle, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>\cite, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>\cleardoublepage, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#line-and-page-breaking">Line &amp; Page Breaking</a></dt>
+<dt>\clearpage, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#line-and-page-breaking">Line &amp; Page Breaking</a></dt>
+<dt>\cline, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>\closing, <a class="indexterm" href="#letters">Letters</a></dt>
+<dt>\COLON, <a class="indexterm" href="#math-formulae">Math
+Formulae</a></dt>
+<dt>\dashbox, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>\date, <a class="indexterm" href="#page-styles">Page
+Styles</a></dt>
+<dt>\ddots, <a class="indexterm" href="#math-formulae">Math
+Formulae</a></dt>
+<dt>\depth, <a class="indexterm" href="#lengths">Lengths</a></dt>
+<dt>\documentclass, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#document-classes">Document Classes</a></dt>
+<dt>\dotfill, <a class="indexterm" href="#spaces-and-boxes">Spaces
+&amp; Boxes</a></dt>
+<dt>\emph, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#typefaces">Typefaces</a></dt>
+<dt>\encl, <a class="indexterm" href="#letters">Letters</a></dt>
+<dt>\end, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>\enlargethispage, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#line-and-page-breaking">Line &amp; Page Breaking</a></dt>
+<dt>\ensuremath{}, <a class="indexterm" href="#math-formulae">Math
+Formulae</a></dt>
+<dt>\fbox, <a class="indexterm" href="#spaces-and-boxes">Spaces
+&amp; Boxes</a></dt>
+<dt>\floatname, <a class="indexterm" href="#float">float</a></dt>
+<dt>\floatplacement, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#float">float</a></dt>
+<dt>\floatstyle, <a class="indexterm" href="#float">float</a></dt>
+<dt>\flushbottom, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#layout">Layout</a></dt>
+<dt>\fnsymbol, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#counters">Counters</a></dt>
+<dt>\fontencoding, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#typefaces">Typefaces</a></dt>
+<dt>\fontfamily, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#typefaces">Typefaces</a></dt>
+<dt>\fontseries, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#typefaces">Typefaces</a></dt>
+<dt>\fontshape, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#typefaces">Typefaces</a></dt>
+<dt>\fontsize, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#typefaces">Typefaces</a></dt>
+<dt>\footnote, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#footnotes">Footnotes</a></dt>
+<dt>\footnotemark, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#footnotes">Footnotes</a></dt>
+<dt>\footnotesize, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#typefaces">Typefaces</a></dt>
+<dt>\footnotetext, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#footnotes">Footnotes</a></dt>
+<dt>\frac, <a class="indexterm" href="#math-formulae">Math
+Formulae</a></dt>
+<dt>\frame, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>\framebox, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#env-latex">Environments</a>, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#spaces-and-boxes">Spaces &amp; Boxes</a></dt>
+<dt>\fussy, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#line-and-page-breaking">Line &amp; Page Breaking</a></dt>
+<dt>\graphicspath, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#graphicspath">\graphicspath</a></dt>
+<dt>\height, <a class="indexterm" href="#lengths">Lengths</a></dt>
+<dt>\hfill, <a class="indexterm" href="#spaces-and-boxes">Spaces
+&amp; Boxes</a></dt>
+<dt>\hline, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>\hrulefill, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#spaces-and-boxes">Spaces &amp; Boxes</a></dt>
+<dt>\hspace, <a class="indexterm" href="#spaces-and-boxes">Spaces
+&amp; Boxes</a></dt>
+<dt>\huge, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#typefaces">Typefaces</a></dt>
+<dt>\Huge, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#typefaces">Typefaces</a></dt>
+<dt>\hyphenation, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#line-and-page-breaking">Line &amp; Page Breaking</a></dt>
+<dt>\include, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#splitting-the-input">Splitting the Input</a></dt>
+<dt>\includegraphics, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#includegraphics">\includegraphics</a></dt>
+<dt>\includeonly, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#splitting-the-input">Splitting the Input</a></dt>
+<dt>\indent, <a class="indexterm" href="#making-paragraphs">Making
+Paragraphs</a></dt>
+<dt>\input, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#splitting-the-input">Splitting the Input</a></dt>
+<dt>\item, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>\itshape, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#typefaces">Typefaces</a></dt>
+<dt>\kill, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>\label, <a class="indexterm" href="#cross-references">Cross
+References</a></dt>
+<dt>\large, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#typefaces">Typefaces</a></dt>
+<dt>\Large, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#typefaces">Typefaces</a></dt>
+<dt>\LARGE, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#typefaces">Typefaces</a></dt>
+<dt>\ldots, <a class="indexterm" href="#math-formulae">Math
+Formulae</a></dt>
+<dt>\lefteqn, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>\line, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>\linebreak, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#line-and-page-breaking">Line &amp; Page Breaking</a></dt>
+<dt>\linethickness, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>\listof, <a class="indexterm" href="#float">float</a></dt>
+<dt>\listoffigures, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#table-of-contents">Table of Contents</a></dt>
+<dt>\listoftables, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#table-of-contents">Table of Contents</a></dt>
+<dt>\location, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#letters">Letters</a></dt>
+<dt>\makebox, <a class="indexterm" href="#spaces-and-boxes">Spaces
+&amp; Boxes</a></dt>
+<dt>\makebox (picture), <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>\makelabels, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#letters">Letters</a></dt>
+<dt>\maketitle, <a class="indexterm" href="#page-styles">Page
+Styles</a></dt>
+<dt>\markboth, <a class="indexterm" href="#page-styles">Page
+Styles</a></dt>
+<dt>\markright, <a class="indexterm" href="#page-styles">Page
+Styles</a></dt>
+<dt>\mathbf, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#typefaces">Typefaces</a></dt>
+<dt>\mathcal, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#typefaces">Typefaces</a></dt>
+<dt>\mathit, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#typefaces">Typefaces</a></dt>
+<dt>\mathnormal, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#typefaces">Typefaces</a></dt>
+<dt>\mathrm, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#typefaces">Typefaces</a></dt>
+<dt>\mathsf, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#typefaces">Typefaces</a></dt>
+<dt>\mathtt, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#typefaces">Typefaces</a></dt>
+<dt>\mathversion, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#typefaces">Typefaces</a></dt>
+<dt>\mbox, <a class="indexterm" href="#spaces-and-boxes">Spaces
+&amp; Boxes</a></dt>
+<dt>\mdseries, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#typefaces">Typefaces</a></dt>
+<dt>\medskip, <a class="indexterm" href="#spaces-and-boxes">Spaces
+&amp; Boxes</a></dt>
+<dt>\multicolumn, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>\multiput, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>\name, <a class="indexterm" href="#letters">Letters</a></dt>
+<dt>\newcommand, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#definitions">Definitions</a></dt>
+<dt>\newcounter, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#counters">Counters</a></dt>
+<dt>\newenvironment, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#definitions">Definitions</a></dt>
+<dt>\newfloat, <a class="indexterm" href="#float">float</a></dt>
+<dt>\newfont, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#definitions">Definitions</a></dt>
+<dt>\newlength, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#lengths">Lengths</a></dt>
+<dt>\newline, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#line-and-page-breaking">Line &amp; Page Breaking</a></dt>
+<dt>\newpage, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#line-and-page-breaking">Line &amp; Page Breaking</a></dt>
+<dt>\newsavebox, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#spaces-and-boxes">Spaces &amp; Boxes</a></dt>
+<dt>\newtheorem, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#definitions">Definitions</a></dt>
+<dt>\nocite, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>\nofiles, <a class="indexterm" href="#table-of-contents">Table
+of Contents</a></dt>
+<dt>\noindent, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#making-paragraphs">Making Paragraphs</a></dt>
+<dt>\nolinebreak, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#line-and-page-breaking">Line &amp; Page Breaking</a></dt>
+<dt>\nopagebreak, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#line-and-page-breaking">Line &amp; Page Breaking</a></dt>
+<dt>\normalfont, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#typefaces">Typefaces</a></dt>
+<dt>\normalsize, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#typefaces">Typefaces</a></dt>
+<dt>\onecolumn, <a class="indexterm" href="#layout">Layout</a></dt>
+<dt>\opening, <a class="indexterm" href="#letters">Letters</a></dt>
+<dt>\oval, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>\overbrace, <a class="indexterm" href="#math-formulae">Math
+Formulae</a></dt>
+<dt>\overline, <a class="indexterm" href="#math-formulae">Math
+Formulae</a></dt>
+<dt>\pagebreak, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#line-and-page-breaking">Line &amp; Page Breaking</a></dt>
+<dt>\pagenumbering, <a class="indexterm" href="#page-styles">Page
+Styles</a></dt>
+<dt>\pageref, <a class="indexterm" href="#cross-references">Cross
+References</a></dt>
+<dt>\pagestyle, <a class="indexterm" href="#page-styles">Page
+Styles</a></dt>
+<dt>\par, <a class="indexterm" href="#making-paragraphs">Making
+Paragraphs</a></dt>
+<dt>\paragraph, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#sectioning">Sectioning</a></dt>
+<dt>\parbox, <a class="indexterm" href="#spaces-and-boxes">Spaces
+&amp; Boxes</a></dt>
+<dt>\pmb, <a class="indexterm" href="#amsmath">amsmath</a></dt>
+<dt>\poptabs, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>\ps, <a class="indexterm" href="#letters">Letters</a></dt>
+<dt>\pushtabs, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>\put, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>\raggedbottom, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#layout">Layout</a></dt>
+<dt>\raggedleft, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>\raggedright, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>\raisebox, <a class="indexterm" href="#spaces-and-boxes">Spaces
+&amp; Boxes</a></dt>
+<dt>\ref, <a class="indexterm" href="#cross-references">Cross
+References</a></dt>
+<dt>\refstepcounter, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#counters">Counters</a></dt>
+<dt>\restylefloat, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#float">float</a></dt>
+<dt>\rmfamily, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#typefaces">Typefaces</a></dt>
+<dt>\roman, <a class="indexterm" href="#counters">Counters</a></dt>
+<dt>\Roman, <a class="indexterm" href="#counters">Counters</a></dt>
+<dt>\rule, <a class="indexterm" href="#spaces-and-boxes">Spaces
+&amp; Boxes</a></dt>
+<dt>\samepage, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#line-and-page-breaking">Line &amp; Page Breaking</a></dt>
+<dt>\savebox, <a class="indexterm" href="#spaces-and-boxes">Spaces
+&amp; Boxes</a></dt>
+<dt>\sbox, <a class="indexterm" href="#spaces-and-boxes">Spaces
+&amp; Boxes</a></dt>
+<dt>\scriptsize, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#typefaces">Typefaces</a></dt>
+<dt>\scshape, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#typefaces">Typefaces</a></dt>
+<dt>\selectfont, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#typefaces">Typefaces</a></dt>
+<dt>\setcounter, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#counters">Counters</a></dt>
+<dt>\setlength, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#lengths">Lengths</a></dt>
+<dt>\settodepth, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#lengths">Lengths</a></dt>
+<dt>\settoheight, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#lengths">Lengths</a></dt>
+<dt>\settowidth, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#lengths">Lengths</a></dt>
+<dt>\sffamily, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#typefaces">Typefaces</a></dt>
+<dt>\shortstack, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>\signature, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#letters">Letters</a></dt>
+<dt>\sloppy, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#line-and-page-breaking">Line &amp; Page Breaking</a></dt>
+<dt>\slshape, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#typefaces">Typefaces</a></dt>
+<dt>\small, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#typefaces">Typefaces</a></dt>
+<dt>\smallskip, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#spaces-and-boxes">Spaces &amp; Boxes</a></dt>
+<dt>\sqrt, <a class="indexterm" href="#math-formulae">Math
+Formulae</a></dt>
+<dt>\startbreaks, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#letters">Letters</a></dt>
+<dt>\stepcounter, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#counters">Counters</a></dt>
+<dt>\stopbreaks, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#letters">Letters</a></dt>
+<dt>\subparagraph, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#sectioning">Sectioning</a></dt>
+<dt>\subsection, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#sectioning">Sectioning</a></dt>
+<dt>\subsubsection, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#sectioning">Sectioning</a></dt>
+<dt>\symbol, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#special-characters">Special Characters</a></dt>
+<dt>\tableofcontents, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#table-of-contents">Table of Contents</a></dt>
+<dt>\telephone, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#letters">Letters</a></dt>
+<dt>\textbf, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#typefaces">Typefaces</a></dt>
+<dt>\textit, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#typefaces">Typefaces</a></dt>
+<dt>\textmd, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#typefaces">Typefaces</a></dt>
+<dt>\textnormal, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#typefaces">Typefaces</a></dt>
+<dt>\textrm, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#typefaces">Typefaces</a></dt>
+<dt>\textsc, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#typefaces">Typefaces</a></dt>
+<dt>\textsf, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#typefaces">Typefaces</a></dt>
+<dt>\textsl, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#typefaces">Typefaces</a></dt>
+<dt>\texttt, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#typefaces">Typefaces</a></dt>
+<dt>\textup, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#typefaces">Typefaces</a></dt>
+<dt>\thanks, <a class="indexterm" href="#page-styles">Page
+Styles</a></dt>
+<dt>\thispagestyle, <a class="indexterm" href="#page-styles">Page
+Styles</a></dt>
+<dt>\tiny, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#typefaces">Typefaces</a></dt>
+<dt>\title, <a class="indexterm" href="#page-styles">Page
+Styles</a></dt>
+<dt>\today, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>\totalheight, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#lengths">Lengths</a></dt>
+<dt>\ttfamily, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#typefaces">Typefaces</a></dt>
+<dt>\twocolumn, <a class="indexterm" href="#layout">Layout</a></dt>
+<dt>\typearea, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#komascript-page-layout">Page-Layout</a></dt>
+<dt>\typein, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#terminal-input-slash-output">Terminal Input/Output</a></dt>
+<dt>\typeout, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#terminal-input-slash-output">Terminal Input/Output</a></dt>
+<dt>\unboldmath, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#bm-package">bm</a></dt>
+<dt>\underbrace, <a class="indexterm" href="#math-formulae">Math
+Formulae</a></dt>
+<dt>\underline, <a class="indexterm" href="#math-formulae">Math
+Formulae</a></dt>
+<dt>\upDelta, <a class="indexterm" href="#upDelta-upOmega">\upDelta
+/ \upOmega</a></dt>
+<dt>\upOmega, <a class="indexterm" href="#upDelta-upOmega">\upDelta
+/ \upOmega</a></dt>
+<dt>\upshape, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#typefaces">Typefaces</a></dt>
+<dt>\usebox, <a class="indexterm" href="#spaces-and-boxes">Spaces
+&amp; Boxes</a></dt>
+<dt>\usecounter, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#counters">Counters</a></dt>
+<dt>\usefont, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#typefaces">Typefaces</a></dt>
+<dt>\usepackage, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#document-classes">Document Classes</a></dt>
+<dt>\value, <a class="indexterm" href="#counters">Counters</a></dt>
+<dt>\vdots, <a class="indexterm" href="#math-formulae">Math
+Formulae</a></dt>
+<dt>\vector, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>\verb, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>\vfill, <a class="indexterm" href="#spaces-and-boxes">Spaces
+&amp; Boxes</a></dt>
+<dt>\vline, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>\vpageref, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#varioref">varioref</a></dt>
+<dt>\vpagerefrange, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#varioref">varioref</a></dt>
+<dt>\vref, <a class="indexterm" href="#varioref">varioref</a></dt>
+<dt>\vrefrange, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#varioref">varioref</a></dt>
+<dt>\vspace, <a class="indexterm" href="#spaces-and-boxes">Spaces
+&amp; Boxes</a></dt>
+<dt>\width, <a class="indexterm" href="#lengths">Lengths</a></dt>
+<dt>\[, <a class="indexterm" href="#math-formulae">Math
+Formulae</a></dt>
+<dt>\\, <a class="indexterm" href="#line-and-page-breaking">Line
+&amp; Page Breaking</a></dt>
+<dt>\], <a class="indexterm" href="#math-formulae">Math
+Formulae</a></dt>
+<dt>\` (tabbing), <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>^, <a class="indexterm" href="#math-formulae">Math
+Formulae</a></dt>
+<dt>_, <a class="indexterm" href="#math-formulae">Math
+Formulae</a></dt>
+</dl>
+</div>
+<div class="indexdiv">
+<h3>A</h3>
+<dl>
+<dt>About this Document, <a class="indexterm" href="#about">About
+this Document</a></dt>
+<dt>Accents, <a class="indexterm" href="#special-symbols">Special
+Symbols</a></dt>
+<dt>Accessing any character of a font, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#special-characters">Special Characters</a></dt>
+<dt>Aligning Equations, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>amsmath, <a class="indexterm" href="#amsmath">amsmath</a></dt>
+<dt>ansinew, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#inputenc">inputenc</a></dt>
+<dt>Appendix, creating, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#sectioning">Sectioning</a></dt>
+<dt>applemac, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#inputenc">inputenc</a></dt>
+<dt>array, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>Arrays, math, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>Arrows, <a class="indexterm" href="#special-symbols">Special
+Symbols</a></dt>
+<dt>article class, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#document-classes">Document Classes</a></dt>
+<dt>Author, for titlepage, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#page-styles">Page Styles</a></dt>
+</dl>
+</div>
+<div class="indexdiv">
+<h3>B</h3>
+<dl>
+<dt>BCOR, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#komascript-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>Bibliography, creating (automatically), <a class="indexterm"
+href="#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>Bibliography, creating (manually), <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>BibTeX, <a class="indexterm" href="#bibtex">BibTeX</a></dt>
+<dd>
+<dl>
+<dt>bib files, <a class="indexterm" href="#bibtex-bib-files">bib
+files</a></dt>
+<dd>
+<dl>
+<dt>@STRING command, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#bibtex-string-command">@STRING command</a></dt>
+<dt>Entry Format, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#bibtex-entry-format">Entry Format</a></dt>
+<dt>Entry Types, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#bibtex-entry-types">Entry Types</a></dt>
+<dt>Field Text, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#bibtex-field-text">Field Text</a></dt>
+<dt>Field Types, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#bibtex-field-types">Field Types</a></dt>
+</dl>
+</dd>
+<dt>bst files, <a class="indexterm" href="#bibtex-bst-files">bst
+files</a></dt>
+<dd>
+<dl>
+<dt>ABBRV.BST, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#bibtex-bst-abbr">ABBRV.BST</a></dt>
+<dt>ALPHA.BST, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#bibtex-bst-alpha">ALPHA.BST</a></dt>
+<dt>PLAIN.BST, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#bibtex-bst-plain">PLAIN.BST</a></dt>
+<dt>SAMPLE.BST, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#bibtex-bst-sample">SAMPLE.BST</a></dt>
+<dt>UNSRT.BST, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#bibtex-bst-unsrt">UNSRT.BST</a></dt>
+</dl>
+</dd>
+<dt>Command Qualifiers, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#bibtex-command-qualifiers">Command Qualifiers</a></dt>
+<dt>Entry Types</dt>
+<dd>
+<dl>
+<dt>article entry, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#bibtex-entry-types-article">article entry</a></dt>
+<dt>book entry, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#bibtex-entry-types-book">book entry</a></dt>
+<dt>booklet entry, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#bibtex-entry-types-booklet">booklet entry</a></dt>
+<dt>conference entry, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#bibtex-entry-types-conference">conference entry</a></dt>
+<dt>inbook entry, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#bibtex-entry-types-inbook">inbook entry</a></dt>
+<dt>incollection entry, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#bibtex-entry-types-incollection">incollection entry</a></dt>
+<dt>inproceedings entry, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#bibtex-entry-types-inproceedings">inproceedings entry</a></dt>
+<dt>manual entry, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#bibtex-entry-types-manual">manual entry</a></dt>
+<dt>mastersthesis entry, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#bibtex-entry-types-mastersthesis">mastersthesis entry</a></dt>
+<dt>misc entry, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#bibtex-entry-types-misc">misc entry</a></dt>
+<dt>phdthesis entry, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#bibtex-entry-types-phdthesis">phdthesis entry</a></dt>
+<dt>proceedings entry, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#bibtex-entry-types-proceedings">proceedings entry</a></dt>
+<dt>techreport entry, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#bibtex-entry-types-techreport">techreport entry</a></dt>
+<dt>unpublished entry, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#bibtex-entry-types-unpublished">unpublished entry</a></dt>
+</dl>
+</dd>
+<dt>Field Text</dt>
+<dd>
+<dl>
+<dt>Abbreviations, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#bibtex-field-text-abbr">Abbreviations</a></dt>
+<dt>Names, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#bibtex-field-text-names">Names</a></dt>
+<dt>Titles, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#bibtex-field-text-titles">Titles</a></dt>
+</dl>
+</dd>
+<dt>Field Types</dt>
+<dd>
+<dl>
+<dt>address field, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#bibtex-field-types-address">address field</a></dt>
+<dt>annote field, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#bibtex-field-types-annote">annote field</a></dt>
+<dt>author field, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#bibtex-field-types-author">author field</a></dt>
+<dt>booktitle field, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#bibtex-field-types-booktitle">booktitle field</a></dt>
+<dt>chapter field, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#bibtex-field-types-chapter">chapter field</a></dt>
+<dt>edition field, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#bibtex-field-types-edition">edition field</a></dt>
+<dt>editor field, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#bibtex-field-types-editor">editor field</a></dt>
+<dt>howpublished field, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#bibtex-field-types-howpublished">howpublished field</a></dt>
+<dt>institution field, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#bibtex-field-types-institution">institution field</a></dt>
+<dt>journal field, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#bibtex-field-types-journal">journal field</a></dt>
+<dt>key field, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#bibtex-field-types-key">key field</a></dt>
+<dt>month field, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#bibtex-field-types-month">month field</a></dt>
+<dt>note field, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#bibtex-field-types-note">note field</a></dt>
+<dt>number field, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#bibtex-field-types-number">number field</a></dt>
+<dt>organization field, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#bibtex-field-types-organization">organization field</a></dt>
+<dt>pages field, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#bibtex-field-types-pages">pages field</a></dt>
+<dt>publisher field, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#bibtex-field-types-publisher">publisher field</a></dt>
+<dt>school field, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#bibtex-field-types-school">school field</a></dt>
+<dt>series field, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#bibtex-field-types-series">series field</a></dt>
+<dt>title field, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#bibtex-field-types-title">title field</a></dt>
+<dt>type field, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#bibtex-field-types-type">type field</a></dt>
+<dt>volume field, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#bibtex-field-types-volume">volume field</a></dt>
+<dt>year field, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#bibtex-field-types-year">year field</a></dt>
+</dl>
+</dd>
+<dt>Parameters, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#bibtex-parameters">Parameters</a></dt>
+<dt>using, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+</dl>
+</dd>
+<dt>Binary Operators, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#special-symbols">Special Symbols</a></dt>
+<dt>bm, <a class="indexterm" href="#bm-package">bm</a></dt>
+<dt>book class, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#document-classes">Document Classes</a></dt>
+<dt>Boxes, <a class="indexterm" href="#spaces-and-boxes">Spaces
+&amp; Boxes</a></dt>
+</dl>
+</div>
+<div class="indexdiv">
+<h3>C</h3>
+<dl>
+<dt>Cc list, <a class="indexterm" href="#letters">Letters</a></dt>
+<dt>center, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>Centering text, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>Centering text, environment for, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>Characters, reserved, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#special-characters">Special Characters</a></dt>
+<dt>Characters, special, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#special-characters">Special Characters</a></dt>
+<dt>cite.sty, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>Classes of document, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#document-classes">Document Classes</a></dt>
+<dt>Commands, defining new ones, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#definitions">Definitions</a></dt>
+<dt>Computer programs, typesetting, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>ConTeXt, <a class="indexterm" href="#context">ConTeXt
+(tbd.)</a></dt>
+<dt>Counters, a list of, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#counters">Counters</a></dt>
+<dt>Counters, creating, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#counters">Counters</a></dt>
+<dt>Counters, getting the value of, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#counters">Counters</a></dt>
+<dt>Counters, setting, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#counters">Counters</a></dt>
+<dt>cp850, <a class="indexterm" href="#inputenc">inputenc</a></dt>
+<dt>Creating letters, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#letters">Letters</a></dt>
+<dt>Creating pictures, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>Creating tables, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>Credits, <a class="indexterm" href="#credits">Credits</a></dt>
+<dt>Cross referencing, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#cross-references">Cross References</a></dt>
+<dt>Cross referencing using page number, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#cross-references">Cross References</a></dt>
+<dt>Cross referencing using section number, <a class="indexterm"
+href="#cross-references">Cross References</a></dt>
+</dl>
+</div>
+<div class="indexdiv">
+<h3>D</h3>
+<dl>
+<dt>Date, for titlepage, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#page-styles">Page Styles</a></dt>
+<dt>dcolumn, <a class="indexterm" href="#dcolumn">dcolumn</a></dt>
+<dt>Defining a new command, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#definitions">Definitions</a></dt>
+<dt>Defining new environments, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#definitions">Definitions</a></dt>
+<dt>Defining new fonts, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#definitions">Definitions</a></dt>
+<dt>Defining new theorems, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#definitions">Definitions</a></dt>
+<dt>Delimiters, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#special-symbols">Special Symbols</a></dt>
+<dt>description, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>Displaying quoted text, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>Displaying quoted text with paragraph indentation, <a class=
+"indexterm" href="#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>DIV, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#komascript-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>Document Classes, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#document-classes">Document Classes</a></dt>
+</dl>
+</div>
+<div class="indexdiv">
+<h3>E</h3>
+<dl>
+<dt>Ellipsis, <a class="indexterm" href="#special-symbols">Special
+Symbols</a></dt>
+<dt>Enclosed material, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#letters">Letters</a></dt>
+<dt>Ending &amp; Starting, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#starting-and-ending">Starting &amp; Ending</a></dt>
+<dt>Enlarge current page, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#line-and-page-breaking">Line &amp; Page Breaking</a></dt>
+<dt>enumerate, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>Environments, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>Environments, defining, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#definitions">Definitions</a></dt>
+<dt>eqnarray, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>equation, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>Equations, aligning, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>Equations, environment for, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>exponent, <a class="indexterm" href="#math-formulae">Math
+Formulae</a></dt>
+</dl>
+</div>
+<div class="indexdiv">
+<h3>F</h3>
+<dl>
+<dt>figure, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>Figures, footnotes in, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>float, <a class="indexterm" href="#float">float</a></dt>
+<dd>
+<dl>
+<dt>\floatname, <a class="indexterm" href="#float">float</a></dt>
+<dt>\floatplacement, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#float">float</a></dt>
+<dt>\floatstyle, <a class="indexterm" href="#float">float</a></dt>
+<dt>\listof, <a class="indexterm" href="#float">float</a></dt>
+<dt>\newfloat, <a class="indexterm" href="#float">float</a></dt>
+<dt>\restylefloat, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#float">float</a></dt>
+</dl>
+</dd>
+<dt>Flushing a page, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#line-and-page-breaking">Line &amp; Page Breaking</a></dt>
+<dt>flushleft, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>flushright, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>Font commands, low-level, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#typefaces">Typefaces</a></dt>
+<dt>Font Sizes, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#typefaces">Typefaces</a></dt>
+<dt>Font Styles, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#typefaces">Typefaces</a></dt>
+<dt>fontenc, <a class="indexterm" href="#fontenc">fontenc</a></dt>
+<dt>fontinst, <a class="indexterm" href="#fontinst">fontinst
+(tbd.)</a></dt>
+<dt>Fonts, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#typefaces">Typefaces</a></dt>
+<dt>Fonts, new commands for, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#definitions">Definitions</a></dt>
+<dt>footexclude, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#komascript-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>footinclude, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#komascript-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>Footnotes in figures, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>Footnotes, creating, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#footnotes">Footnotes</a></dt>
+<dt>Formatting Text, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>Formulae, environment for, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>Formulae, maths, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#math-formulae">Math Formulae</a></dt>
+</dl>
+</div>
+<div class="indexdiv">
+<h3>G</h3>
+<dl>
+<dt>german, <a class="indexterm" href="#german">german</a></dt>
+<dd>
+<dl>
+<dt>!-, <a class="indexterm" href="#german">german</a></dt>
+<dt>"", <a class="indexterm" href="#german">german</a></dt>
+<dt>"=, <a class="indexterm" href="#german">german</a></dt>
+<dt>"a, <a class="indexterm" href="#german">german</a></dt>
+<dt>"ck, <a class="indexterm" href="#german">german</a></dt>
+<dt>"ff, <a class="indexterm" href="#german">german</a></dt>
+<dt>"|, <a class="indexterm" href="#german">german</a></dt>
+<dt>"~, <a class="indexterm" href="#german">german</a></dt>
+<dt>&lt;, <a class="indexterm" href="#german">german</a></dt>
+<dt>\-, <a class="indexterm" href="#german">german</a></dt>
+<dt>\dq, <a class="indexterm" href="#german">german</a></dt>
+<dt>\flq, <a class="indexterm" href="#german">german</a></dt>
+<dt>\flqq, <a class="indexterm" href="#german">german</a></dt>
+<dt>\frq, <a class="indexterm" href="#german">german</a></dt>
+<dt>\frqq, <a class="indexterm" href="#german">german</a></dt>
+<dt>\glq, <a class="indexterm" href="#german">german</a></dt>
+<dt>\glqq, <a class="indexterm" href="#german">german</a></dt>
+<dt>\grqq, <a class="indexterm" href="#german">german</a></dt>
+</dl>
+</dd>
+<dt>Global options, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#document-classes">Document Classes</a></dt>
+<dt>graphics, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#graphics">graphics</a></dt>
+<dt>Greek letters, <a class="indexterm" href="#math-formulae">Math
+Formulae</a></dt>
+<dt>Greek Letters, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#special-symbols">Special Symbols</a></dt>
+</dl>
+</div>
+<div class="indexdiv">
+<h3>H</h3>
+<dl>
+<dt>headexclude, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#komascript-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>headinclude, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#komascript-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>hyperref, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#hyperref">hyperref</a></dt>
+<dd>
+<dl>
+<dt>commands</dt>
+<dd>
+<dl>
+<dt>\autoref, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#hyperref-commands">Commands</a></dt>
+<dt>\href, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#hyperref-commands">Commands</a></dt>
+<dt>\hyperbaseurl, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#hyperref-commands">Commands</a></dt>
+<dt>\hyperimage, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#hyperref-commands">Commands</a></dt>
+<dt>\hyperlink, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#hyperref-commands">Commands</a></dt>
+<dt>\hyperref, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#hyperref-commands">Commands</a></dt>
+<dt>\hypertarget, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#hyperref-commands">Commands</a></dt>
+<dt>\nolinkurl, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#hyperref-commands">Commands</a></dt>
+<dt>\texorpdfstring, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#hyperref-commands">Commands</a></dt>
+</dl>
+</dd>
+<dt>options</dt>
+<dd>
+<dl>
+<dt>4, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>a4paper, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>a5paper, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>anchorcolor, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>b5paper, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>backref, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>baseurl, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>bookmarks, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>bookmarksnumbered, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>bookmarksopen, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>bookmarksopenlevel, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>bookmarkstype, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>breaklinks, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>citebordercolor, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>citecolor, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>colorlinks, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>debug, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>draft, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>dvipdf, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>dvipdfm, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>dvips, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>dvipsone, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>dviwindo, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>executivepaper, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>extension, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>filebordercolor, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>filecolor, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>frenchlinks, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>hyperfigures, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>hyperindex, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>hypertex, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>hypertexnames, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>implicit, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>latex2html, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>legalpaper, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>letterpaper, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>linkbordercolor, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>linkcolor, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>linktocpage, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>menubordercolor, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>menucolor, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>naturalnames, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>nesting, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>pageanchor, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>pagebackref, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>pagebordercolor, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>pagecolor, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>pdfauthor, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>pdfborder, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>pdfcenterwindow, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>pdfcreator, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>pdffitwindow, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>pdfhighlight, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>pdfkeywords, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>pdfmenubar, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>pdfnewwindow, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>pdfpagelayout, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>pdfpagemode, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>pdfpagescrop, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>pdfpagetransition, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>pdfproducer, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>pdfstartpage, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>pdfstartview, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>pdfsubject, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>pdftex, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>pdftitle, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>pdftoolbar, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>pdfview, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>pdfwindowui, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>plainpages, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>raiselinks, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>runbordercolor, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>tex4ht, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>textures, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>unicode, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>urlbordercolor, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>urlcolor, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>verbose, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dt>vtex, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#hyperref-options">Options</a></dt>
+</dl>
+</dd>
+</dl>
+</dd>
+<dt>Hyphenation, defining, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#line-and-page-breaking">Line &amp; Page Breaking</a></dt>
+<dt>Hyphenation, forcing, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#line-and-page-breaking">Line &amp; Page Breaking</a></dt>
+</dl>
+</div>
+<div class="indexdiv">
+<h3>I</h3>
+<dl>
+<dt>Indent, forcing, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#making-paragraphs">Making Paragraphs</a></dt>
+<dt>Indent, suppressing, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#making-paragraphs">Making Paragraphs</a></dt>
+<dt>Input file, splitting, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#splitting-the-input">Splitting the Input</a></dt>
+<dt>Input/Output, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#terminal-input-slash-output">Terminal Input/Output</a></dt>
+<dt>inputenc, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#inputenc">inputenc</a></dt>
+<dt>Inserting figures, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>itemize, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+</dl>
+</div>
+<div class="indexdiv">
+<h3>J</h3>
+<dl>
+<dt>Justification, ragged left, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>Justification, ragged right, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+</dl>
+</div>
+<div class="indexdiv">
+<h3>K</h3>
+<dl>
+<dt>Known Issues, <a class="indexterm" href="#issues">Bugs / Known
+Issues / Missing Features</a></dt>
+<dt>KOMA-Script, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#komascript">KOMA-Script</a></dt>
+<dd>
+<dl>
+<dt>scraddr, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#komascript-scraddr">Address Files with scraddr</a></dt>
+<dd>
+<dl>
+<dt>\Address{}, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#komascript-scraddr">Address Files with scraddr</a></dt>
+<dt>\Comment{}, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#komascript-scraddr">Address Files with scraddr</a></dt>
+<dt>\FirstName{}, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#komascript-scraddr">Address Files with scraddr</a></dt>
+<dt>\FreeIII{}, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#komascript-scraddr">Address Files with scraddr</a></dt>
+<dt>\FreeII{}, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#komascript-scraddr">Address Files with scraddr</a></dt>
+<dt>\FreeIV{}, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#komascript-scraddr">Address Files with scraddr</a></dt>
+<dt>\FreeI{}, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#komascript-scraddr">Address Files with scraddr</a></dt>
+<dt>\InputAddressFile, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#komascript-scraddr">Address Files with scraddr</a></dt>
+<dt>\LastName{}, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#komascript-scraddr">Address Files with scraddr</a></dt>
+<dt>\Name{}, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#komascript-scraddr">Address Files with scraddr</a></dt>
+<dt>\Telephone{}, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#komascript-scraddr">Address Files with scraddr</a></dt>
+</dl>
+</dd>
+<dt>scrlttr2, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#komascript-scrlttr2">Letter Class scrlttr2</a></dt>
+<dd>
+<dl>
+<dt>address, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#komascript-scrlttr2">Letter Class scrlttr2</a></dt>
+<dt>address files, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#komascript-scrlttr2">Letter Class scrlttr2</a></dt>
+<dt>backaddress, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#komascript-scrlttr2">Letter Class scrlttr2</a></dt>
+<dt>backaddressseparator, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#komascript-scrlttr2">Letter Class scrlttr2</a></dt>
+<dt>business line, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#komascript-scrlttr2">Letter Class scrlttr2</a></dt>
+<dt>carbon copy, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#komascript-scrlttr2">Letter Class scrlttr2</a></dt>
+<dt>ccseparator, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#komascript-scrlttr2">Letter Class scrlttr2</a></dt>
+<dt>circular letters, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#komascript-scrlttr2">Letter Class scrlttr2</a></dt>
+<dt>Closing, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#komascript-scrlttr2">Letter Class scrlttr2</a></dt>
+<dt>Closing Part, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#komascript-scrlttr2">Letter Class scrlttr2</a></dt>
+<dt>customer, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#komascript-scrlttr2">Letter Class scrlttr2</a></dt>
+<dt>date, <a class="indexterm" href="#komascript-scrlttr2">Letter
+Class scrlttr2</a></dt>
+<dt>emailseparator, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#komascript-scrlttr2">Letter Class scrlttr2</a></dt>
+<dt>enclosure, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#komascript-scrlttr2">Letter Class scrlttr2</a></dt>
+<dt>enclseparator, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#komascript-scrlttr2">Letter Class scrlttr2</a></dt>
+<dt>faxseparator, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#komascript-scrlttr2">Letter Class scrlttr2</a></dt>
+<dt>font options, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#komascript-scrlttr2">Letter Class scrlttr2</a></dt>
+<dt>font selection, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#komascript-scrlttr2">Letter Class scrlttr2</a></dt>
+<dt>footer, <a class="indexterm" href="#komascript-scrlttr2">Letter
+Class scrlttr2</a></dt>
+<dt>footnotes, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#komascript-scrlttr2">Letter Class scrlttr2</a></dt>
+<dt>format options, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#komascript-scrlttr2">Letter Class scrlttr2</a></dt>
+<dt>fromaddress, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#komascript-scrlttr2">Letter Class scrlttr2</a></dt>
+<dt>frombank, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#komascript-scrlttr2">Letter Class scrlttr2</a></dt>
+<dt>fromemail, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#komascript-scrlttr2">Letter Class scrlttr2</a></dt>
+<dt>fromfax, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#komascript-scrlttr2">Letter Class scrlttr2</a></dt>
+<dt>fromlogo, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#komascript-scrlttr2">Letter Class scrlttr2</a></dt>
+<dt>fromname, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#komascript-scrlttr2">Letter Class scrlttr2</a></dt>
+<dt>fromphone, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#komascript-scrlttr2">Letter Class scrlttr2</a></dt>
+<dt>fromurl, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#komascript-scrlttr2">Letter Class scrlttr2</a></dt>
+<dt>general document properties, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#komascript-scrlttr2">Letter Class scrlttr2</a></dt>
+<dt>invoice, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#komascript-scrlttr2">Letter Class scrlttr2</a></dt>
+<dt>language selection, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#komascript-scrlttr2">Letter Class scrlttr2</a></dt>
+<dt>language support, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#komascript-scrlttr2">Letter Class scrlttr2</a></dt>
+<dt>letter class option files, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#komascript-scrlttr2">Letter Class scrlttr2</a></dt>
+<dt>letter declaration, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#komascript-scrlttr2">Letter Class scrlttr2</a></dt>
+<dt>letterhead, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#komascript-scrlttr2">Letter Class scrlttr2</a></dt>
+<dt>lists, <a class="indexterm" href="#komascript-scrlttr2">Letter
+Class scrlttr2</a></dt>
+<dt>location, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#komascript-scrlttr2">Letter Class scrlttr2</a></dt>
+<dt>margin notes, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#komascript-scrlttr2">Letter Class scrlttr2</a></dt>
+<dt>myref, <a class="indexterm" href="#komascript-scrlttr2">Letter
+Class scrlttr2</a></dt>
+<dt>Opening, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#komascript-scrlttr2">Letter Class scrlttr2</a></dt>
+<dt>options, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#komascript-scrlttr2">Letter Class scrlttr2</a></dt>
+<dt>options for letterhead and address, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#komascript-scrlttr2">Letter Class scrlttr2</a></dt>
+<dt>other layout, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#komascript-scrlttr2">Letter Class scrlttr2</a></dt>
+<dt>page layout, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#komascript-scrlttr2">Letter Class scrlttr2</a></dt>
+<dt>page style, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#komascript-scrlttr2">Letter Class scrlttr2</a></dt>
+<dt>phoneseparator, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#komascript-scrlttr2">Letter Class scrlttr2</a></dt>
+<dt>place, <a class="indexterm" href="#komascript-scrlttr2">Letter
+Class scrlttr2</a></dt>
+<dt>placeseparator, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#komascript-scrlttr2">Letter Class scrlttr2</a></dt>
+<dt>postscript, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#komascript-scrlttr2">Letter Class scrlttr2</a></dt>
+<dt>pseudo lengths, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#komascript-scrlttr2">Letter Class scrlttr2</a></dt>
+<dt>sender's extension, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#komascript-scrlttr2">Letter Class scrlttr2</a></dt>
+<dt>signature, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#komascript-scrlttr2">Letter Class scrlttr2</a></dt>
+<dt>specialmail, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#komascript-scrlttr2">Letter Class scrlttr2</a></dt>
+<dt>subject, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#komascript-scrlttr2">Letter Class scrlttr2</a></dt>
+<dt>subject line, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#komascript-scrlttr2">Letter Class scrlttr2</a></dt>
+<dt>subjectseparator, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#komascript-scrlttr2">Letter Class scrlttr2</a></dt>
+<dt>text, <a class="indexterm" href="#komascript-scrlttr2">Letter
+Class scrlttr2</a></dt>
+<dt>text emphasis, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#komascript-scrlttr2">Letter Class scrlttr2</a></dt>
+<dt>title, <a class="indexterm" href="#komascript-scrlttr2">Letter
+Class scrlttr2</a></dt>
+<dt>title line, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#komascript-scrlttr2">Letter Class scrlttr2</a></dt>
+<dt>toaddress, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#komascript-scrlttr2">Letter Class scrlttr2</a></dt>
+<dt>toname, <a class="indexterm" href="#komascript-scrlttr2">Letter
+Class scrlttr2</a></dt>
+<dt>variables, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#komascript-scrlttr2">Letter Class scrlttr2</a></dt>
+<dt>yourmail, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#komascript-scrlttr2">Letter Class scrlttr2</a></dt>
+<dt>yourref, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#komascript-scrlttr2">Letter Class scrlttr2</a></dt>
+<dt>\addtoreffields, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#komascript-scrlttr2">Letter Class scrlttr2</a></dt>
+<dt>\ifkomavarempty, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#komascript-scrlttr2">Letter Class scrlttr2</a></dt>
+<dt>\KOMAoptions{}, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#komascript-scrlttr2">Letter Class scrlttr2</a></dt>
+<dt>\newkomavar, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#komascript-scrlttr2">Letter Class scrlttr2</a></dt>
+<dt>\setkomavar, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#komascript-scrlttr2">Letter Class scrlttr2</a></dt>
+<dt>\usekomavar, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#komascript-scrlttr2">Letter Class scrlttr2</a></dt>
+</dl>
+</dd>
+</dl>
+</dd>
+</dl>
+</div>
+<div class="indexdiv">
+<h3>L</h3>
+<dl>
+<dt>Labelled lists, creating, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>LaTeX</dt>
+<dd>
+<dl>
+<dt>Options, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#opt-latex">Options</a></dt>
+<dd>
+<dl>
+<dt>-file-line-error-style, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#opt-latex-file-line-error-style">-file-line-error-style</a></dt>
+<dt>-fmt=FMTNAME, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#opt-latex-fmt">-fmt=FMTNAME</a></dt>
+<dt>-help, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#opt-latex-help">-help</a></dt>
+<dt>-ini, <a class="indexterm" href="#opt-latex-ini">-ini</a></dt>
+<dt>-interaction=STRING, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#opt-latex-interaction-mode">-interaction=STRING</a></dt>
+<dt>-ipc, <a class="indexterm" href="#opt-latex-ipc">-ipc</a></dt>
+<dt>-ipc-start, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#opt-latex-ipc-start">-ipc-start</a></dt>
+<dt>-jobname=STRING, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#opt-latex-jobname-name">-jobname=STRING</a></dt>
+<dt>-kpathsea-debug=NUMBER, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#opt-latex-kpathsea-debug">-kpathsea-debug=NUMBER</a></dt>
+<dt>-mltex, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#opt-latex-mltex">-mltex</a></dt>
+<dt>-output-comment=STRING, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#opt-latex-output-comment">-output-comment=STRING</a></dt>
+<dt>-parse-first-line, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#opt-latex-parse-first-line">-parse-first-line</a></dt>
+<dt>-progname=STRING, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#opt-latex-progname">-progname=STRING</a></dt>
+<dt>-recorder, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#opt-latex-recorder">-recorder</a></dt>
+<dt>-shell-escape, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#opt-latex-shell-escape">-shell-escape</a></dt>
+<dt>-src-specials, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#opt-latex-src-specials">-src-specials</a></dt>
+<dt>-src-specials=WHERE, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#opt-latex-src-specials-where">-src-specials=WHERE</a></dt>
+<dt>-translate-file=TCXNAME, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#opt-latex-translate-file-tcxname">-translate-file=TCXNAME</a></dt>
+<dt>-version, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#opt-latex-version">-version</a></dt>
+</dl>
+</dd>
+</dl>
+</dd>
+<dt>LaTeX overview, <a class="indexterm" href="#overview">Overview
+of LaTeX and Local Guide</a></dt>
+<dt>LaTeX Packages, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#latex-packages">LaTeX Packages</a></dt>
+<dt>latin1, <a class="indexterm" href="#inputenc">inputenc</a></dt>
+<dt>latin9, <a class="indexterm" href="#inputenc">inputenc</a></dt>
+<dt>Layout commands, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#document-classes">Document Classes</a></dt>
+<dt>Left-justifying text, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>Left-justifying text, environment for, <a class="indexterm"
+href="#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>Left-to-right mode, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#modes">Modes</a></dt>
+<dt>Lengths, adding to, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#lengths">Lengths</a></dt>
+<dt>Lengths, defining a new, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#lengths">Lengths</a></dt>
+<dt>Lengths, defining and using, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#lengths">Lengths</a></dt>
+<dt>Lengths, predefined, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#lengths">Lengths</a></dt>
+<dt>Lengths, setting value of, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#lengths">Lengths</a></dt>
+<dt>letter, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>letter class, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#document-classes">Document Classes</a></dt>
+<dt>Letters, <a class="indexterm" href="#letters">Letters</a></dt>
+<dt>Letters, ending, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#letters">Letters</a></dt>
+<dt>Letters, starting, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#letters">Letters</a></dt>
+<dt>Line Breaking, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#line-and-page-breaking">Line &amp; Page Breaking</a></dt>
+<dt>Line breaks, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#line-and-page-breaking">Line &amp; Page Breaking</a></dt>
+<dt>Lines in tables, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>Lining text up in columns using tab stops, <a class="indexterm"
+href="#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>Lining text up in tables, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>list, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>Lists of items, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>Lists of items, generic, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>Lists of items, numbered, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>Loading additional packages, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#document-classes">Document Classes</a></dt>
+<dt>Low-level font commands, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#typefaces">Typefaces</a></dt>
+<dt>LR mode, <a class="indexterm" href="#modes">Modes</a></dt>
+<dt>lrbox, <a class="indexterm" href="#spaces-and-boxes">Spaces
+&amp; Boxes</a></dt>
+</dl>
+</div>
+<div class="indexdiv">
+<h3>M</h3>
+<dl>
+<dt>Make-Index, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#makeindex">Make-Index</a></dt>
+<dd>
+<dl>
+<dt>Example, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#makeindex-example">Example</a></dt>
+<dt>Input Style Specifiers, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#makeindex-style">Input Style Specifiers</a></dt>
+<dd>
+<dl>
+<dt>actual, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#makeindex-actual-char">actual &lt;char&gt;</a></dt>
+<dt>arg_close, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#makeindex-arg-close">arg_close &lt;char&gt;</a></dt>
+<dt>arg_open, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#makeindex-style-arg-open">arg_open &lt;char&gt;</a></dt>
+<dt>encap, <a class="indexterm" href="#makeindex-encap-char">encap
+&lt;char&gt;</a></dt>
+<dt>escape, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#makeindex-escape-char">escape &lt;char&gt;</a></dt>
+<dt>keyword, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#makeindex-style-string">keyword &lt;string&gt;</a></dt>
+<dt>level, <a class="indexterm" href="#makeindex-level-char">level
+&lt;char&gt;</a></dt>
+<dt>quote, <a class="indexterm" href="#makeindex-quote-char">quote
+&lt;char&gt;</a></dt>
+<dt>range_close, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#makeindex-range-close">range_close &lt;char&gt;</a></dt>
+<dt>range_open, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#makeindex-range-open">range_open &lt;char&gt;</a></dt>
+</dl>
+</dd>
+<dt>Options, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#makeindex-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dd>
+<dl>
+<dt>-c, <a class="indexterm" href="#makeindex-option-c">-c</a></dt>
+<dt>-g, <a class="indexterm" href="#makeindex-option-g">-g</a></dt>
+<dt>-i, <a class="indexterm" href="#makeindex-option-i">-i</a></dt>
+<dt>-l, <a class="indexterm" href="#makeindex-option-l">-l</a></dt>
+<dt>-L, <a class="indexterm" href="#makeindex-option-L">-L</a></dt>
+<dt>-o ind, <a class="indexterm" href="#makeindex-option-o-ind">-o
+ind</a></dt>
+<dt>-p no, <a class="indexterm" href="#makeindex-option-p-no">-p
+no</a></dt>
+<dt>-q, <a class="indexterm" href="#makeindex-option-q">-q</a></dt>
+<dt>-r, <a class="indexterm" href="#makeindex-option-r">-r</a></dt>
+<dt>-s sty, <a class="indexterm" href="#makeindex-option-s-sty">-s
+sty</a></dt>
+<dt>-T, <a class="indexterm" href="#makeindex-option-T">-T</a></dt>
+<dt>-t log, <a class="indexterm" href="#makeindex-option-t-log">-t
+log</a></dt>
+</dl>
+</dd>
+<dt>Ordering, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#makeindex-ordering">Ordering</a></dt>
+<dt>Output Style Specifiers, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#makeindex-output-style-specs">Output Style Specifiers</a></dt>
+<dd>
+<dl>
+<dt>delim_0, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#makeindex-output-delim-0">delim_0 &lt;string&gt;</a></dt>
+<dt>delim_1, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#makeindex-output-delim-1">delim_1 &lt;string&gt;</a></dt>
+<dt>delim_2, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#makeindex-output-delim-2">delim_2 &lt;string&gt;</a></dt>
+<dt>delim_n, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#makeindex-output-delim-n">delim_n &lt;string&gt;</a></dt>
+<dt>delim_r, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#makeindex-output-delim-r">delim_r &lt;string&gt;</a></dt>
+<dt>delim_t, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#makeindex-output-delim-t">delim_t &lt;string&gt;</a></dt>
+<dt>encap_infix, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#makeindex-output-encap-infox">encap_infix &lt;string&gt;</a></dt>
+<dt>encap_prefix, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#makeindex-output-encap-prefix">encap_prefix
+&lt;string&gt;</a></dt>
+<dt>encap_suffix, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#makeindex-output-encap-suffix">encap_suffix
+&lt;string&gt;</a></dt>
+<dt>group_skip, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#makeindex-output-group-skip">group_skip &lt;string&gt;</a></dt>
+<dt>headings_flag, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#makeindex-output-headings-flag">headings_flag
+&lt;string&gt;</a></dt>
+<dt>heading_prefix, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#makeindex-output-heading-prefix-string">heading_prefix
+&lt;string&gt;</a></dt>
+<dt>heading_suffix, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#makeindex-output-heading-suffix-string">heading_suffix
+&lt;string&gt;</a></dt>
+<dt>indent_length, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#makeindex-output-indent-length">indent_length
+&lt;number&gt;</a></dt>
+<dt>indent_space, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#makeindex-output-indent-space">indent_space
+&lt;string&gt;</a></dt>
+<dt>item_0, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#makeindex-output-item-0">item_0 &lt;string&gt;</a></dt>
+<dt>item_01, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#makeindex-output-item-01">item_01 &lt;string&gt;</a></dt>
+<dt>item_1, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#makeindex-output-item-1">item_1 &lt;string&gt;</a></dt>
+<dt>item_12, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#makeindex-output-item-12">item_12 &lt;string&gt;</a></dt>
+<dt>item_2, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#makeindex-output-item-2">item_2 &lt;string&gt;</a></dt>
+<dt>item_x1, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#makeindex-output-item-x1">item_x1 &lt;string&gt;</a></dt>
+<dt>item_x2, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#makeindex-output-item-x2">item_x2 &lt;string&gt;</a></dt>
+<dt>line_max, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#makeindex-output-line-max">line_max &lt;number&gt;</a></dt>
+<dt>numhead_negative, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#makeindex-output-numhead-negative">numhead_negative
+&lt;string&gt;</a></dt>
+<dt>numhead_positive, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#makeindex-output-numhead-positive">numhead_positive
+&lt;string&gt;</a></dt>
+<dt>page_compositor, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#makeindex-page-compositor">page_compositor
+&lt;string&gt;</a></dt>
+<dt>postamble, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#makeindex-output-postamble-string">postamble
+&lt;string&gt;</a></dt>
+<dt>preamble, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#makeindex-output-preamble-string">preamble
+&lt;string&gt;</a></dt>
+<dt>setpage_prefix, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#makeindex-output-setpage-prefix">setpage_prefix
+&lt;string&gt;</a></dt>
+<dt>setpage_suffix, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#makeindex-output-setpage-suffix">setpage_suffix
+&lt;string&gt;</a></dt>
+<dt>suffix_2p, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#makeindex-output-suffix-2p">suffix_2p &lt;string&gt;</a></dt>
+<dt>suffix_3p, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#makeindex-output-suffix-3p">suffix_3p &lt;string&gt;</a></dt>
+<dt>suffix_mp, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#makeindex-output-suffix-mp">suffix_mp &lt;string&gt;</a></dt>
+<dt>symhead_negative, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#makeindex-output-symhead-negative">symhead_negative
+&lt;string&gt;</a></dt>
+<dt>symhead_positive, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#makeindex-output-symhead-positive">symhead_positive
+&lt;string&gt;</a></dt>
+</dl>
+</dd>
+<dt>Special Effects, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#makeindex-special-effects">Special Effects</a></dt>
+<dt>Style File, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#makeindex-style-file">Style File</a></dt>
+</dl>
+</dd>
+<dt>Making a title page, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>Making paragraphs, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#making-paragraphs">Making Paragraphs</a></dt>
+<dt>Margin Notes, <a class="indexterm" href="#margin-notes">Margin
+Notes</a></dt>
+<dt>Math Formulae, <a class="indexterm" href="#math-formulae">Math
+Formulae</a></dt>
+<dt>Math Functions, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#special-symbols">Special Symbols</a></dt>
+<dt>Math Miscellany, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#math-formulae">Math Formulae</a></dt>
+<dt>Math mode, <a class="indexterm" href="#modes">Modes</a></dt>
+<dt>Math mode, entering, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#math-formulae">Math Formulae</a></dt>
+<dt>Math mode, spacing, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#math-formulae">Math Formulae</a></dt>
+<dt>Math Symbols, Variable Size, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#special-symbols">Special Symbols</a></dt>
+<dt>mathpazo, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#mathpazo">mathpazo</a></dt>
+<dt>Maths symbols, <a class="indexterm" href="#math-formulae">Math
+Formulae</a></dt>
+<dt>Metafont, <a class="indexterm" href="#metafont">Metafont
+(tbd.)</a></dt>
+<dt>MetaPost, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#metapost">MetaPost</a></dt>
+<dd>
+<dl>
+<dt>Environment, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#metapost-environment">Environment</a></dt>
+<dd>
+<dl>
+<dt>MFINPUTS, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#metapost-environment">Environment</a></dt>
+<dt>MPEDIT, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#metapost-environment">Environment</a></dt>
+<dt>MPINPUTS, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#metapost-environment">Environment</a></dt>
+<dt>MPSUPPORT, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#metapost-environment">Environment</a></dt>
+<dt>MPXCOMMAND, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#metapost-environment">Environment</a></dt>
+<dt>TEX, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#metapost-environment">Environment</a></dt>
+<dt>TROFF, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#metapost-environment">Environment</a></dt>
+</dl>
+</dd>
+<dt>Options, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#metapost-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dd>
+<dl>
+<dt>--file-line-error-style, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#metapost-option-file-line-error-style">--file-line-error-style</a></dt>
+<dt>--help, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#metapost-option-help">--help</a></dt>
+<dt>--ini, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#metapost-option-ini">--ini</a></dt>
+<dt>--interaction mode, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#metapost-option-intercation">--interaction mode</a></dt>
+<dt>--jobname name, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#metapost-option-jobname">--jobname name</a></dt>
+<dt>--kpathsea-debug bitmask, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#metapost-option-kpathsea-debug">--kpathsea-debug bitmask</a></dt>
+<dt>--mem mem, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#metapost-option-mem">--mem mem</a></dt>
+<dt>--parse-first-line, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#metapost-option-parse-first-line">--parse-first-line</a></dt>
+<dt>--progname name, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#metapost-option-progname">--progname name</a></dt>
+<dt>--recorder, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#metapost-option-recorder">--recorder</a></dt>
+<dt>--translate-file tcxname, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#metapost-option-translate-file">--translate-file tcxname</a></dt>
+<dt>--troff, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#metapost-option-troff">--troff</a></dt>
+<dt>--version, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#metapost-option-version">--version</a></dt>
+<dt>-T, <a class="indexterm" href="#metapost-option-T">-T</a></dt>
+</dl>
+</dd>
+</dl>
+</dd>
+<dt>minipage, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>Minipage, creating a, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>Modes, <a class="indexterm" href="#modes">Modes</a></dt>
+<dt>Multicolumn text, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#layout">Layout</a></dt>
+</dl>
+</div>
+<div class="indexdiv">
+<h3>N</h3>
+<dl>
+<dt>New line, starting, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#line-and-page-breaking">Line &amp; Page Breaking</a></dt>
+<dt>New line, starting (paragraph mode), <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#line-and-page-breaking">Line &amp; Page Breaking</a></dt>
+<dt>New Page, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#line-and-page-breaking">Line &amp; Page Breaking</a></dt>
+<dt>Notes in the margin, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#margin-notes">Margin Notes</a></dt>
+</dl>
+</div>
+<div class="indexdiv">
+<h3>O</h3>
+<dl>
+<dt>Operators</dt>
+<dd>
+<dl>
+<dt>Binary, <a class="indexterm" href="#special-symbols">Special
+Symbols</a></dt>
+<dt>Relational, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#special-symbols">Special Symbols</a></dt>
+</dl>
+</dd>
+<dt>Options, global, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#document-classes">Document Classes</a></dt>
+<dt>overcite.sty, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>Overview of LaTeX, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#overview">Overview of LaTeX and Local Guide</a></dt>
+</dl>
+</div>
+<div class="indexdiv">
+<h3>P</h3>
+<dl>
+<dt>Packages</dt>
+<dd>
+<dl>
+<dt>amsmath, <a class="indexterm" href="#amsmath">amsmath</a></dt>
+<dt>bm, <a class="indexterm" href="#bm-package">bm</a></dt>
+<dt>bm.sty, <a class="indexterm" href="#bm-package">bm</a></dt>
+<dt>dcolumn, <a class="indexterm" href="#dcolumn">dcolumn</a></dt>
+<dt>german, <a class="indexterm" href="#german">german</a></dt>
+<dt>graphics, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#graphics">graphics</a></dt>
+<dt>hyperref, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#hyperref">hyperref</a></dt>
+<dt>KOMA-Script, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#komascript">KOMA-Script</a></dt>
+<dt>mathpazo, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#mathpazo">mathpazo</a></dt>
+<dt>Several Small Packages, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#small-packages">Several Small Packages</a></dt>
+<dt>url, <a class="indexterm" href="#url-package">url</a></dt>
+<dt>varioref, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#varioref">varioref</a></dt>
+</dl>
+</dd>
+<dt>Packages, loading, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#document-classes">Document Classes</a></dt>
+<dt>Page break, forcing, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#line-and-page-breaking">Line &amp; Page Breaking</a></dt>
+<dt>Page Breaking, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#line-and-page-breaking">Line &amp; Page Breaking</a></dt>
+<dt>Page Formatting, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#line-and-page-breaking">Line &amp; Page Breaking</a></dt>
+<dt>Page numbering, <a class="indexterm" href="#page-styles">Page
+Styles</a></dt>
+<dt>Page styles, <a class="indexterm" href="#page-styles">Page
+Styles</a></dt>
+<dt>Paragraph mode, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#modes">Modes</a></dt>
+<dt>Paragraph, starting a new, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#making-paragraphs">Making Paragraphs</a></dt>
+<dt>Paragraphs, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#making-paragraphs">Making Paragraphs</a></dt>
+<dt>Parameters, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#parameters">Parameters</a></dt>
+<dt>pdfTeX, <a class="indexterm" href="#pdftex">pdfTeX</a></dt>
+<dd>
+<dl>
+<dt>Environment, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pdftex-environment">Environment</a></dt>
+<dd>
+<dl>
+<dt>TEXEDIT, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pdftex-environment">Environment</a></dt>
+<dt>TEXFONTS, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pdftex-environment">Environment</a></dt>
+<dt>TEXFORMATS, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pdftex-environment">Environment</a></dt>
+<dt>TEXINPUTS, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pdftex-environment">Environment</a></dt>
+<dt>TEXMFOUTPUT, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pdftex-environment">Environment</a></dt>
+<dt>TEXPOOL, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pdftex-environment">Environment</a></dt>
+</dl>
+</dd>
+<dt>Options, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pdftex-options">Options</a></dt>
+<dd>
+<dl>
+<dt>--file-line-error-style, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pdftex-option-file-line-error-style">--file-line-error-style</a></dt>
+<dt>--fmt format, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pdftex-option-fmt">--fmt format</a></dt>
+<dt>--help, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pdftex-option-help">--help</a></dt>
+<dt>--ini, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pdftex-option-ini">--ini</a></dt>
+<dt>--interaction mode, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pdftex-option-interaction-mode">--interaction mode</a></dt>
+<dt>--ipc, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pdftex-option-ipc">--ipc</a></dt>
+<dt>--ipc-start, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pdftex-option-ipc-start">--ipc-start</a></dt>
+<dt>--jobname name, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pdftex-option-jobname-name">--jobname name</a></dt>
+<dt>--kpathsea-debug bitmask, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pdftex-option-kpathsea-debug">--kpathsea-debug bitmask</a></dt>
+<dt>--maketex fmt, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pdftex-option-maketex">--maketex fmt</a></dt>
+<dt>--no-maketex fmt, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pdftex-option-no-maketex">--no-maketex fmt</a></dt>
+<dt>--output-comment string, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pdftex-option-output-comment">--output-comment string</a></dt>
+<dt>--parse-first-line, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pdftex-option-parse-first-line">--parse-first-line</a></dt>
+<dt>--progname name, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pdftex-option-progname">--progname name</a></dt>
+<dt>--recorder, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pdftex-option-recorder">--recorder</a></dt>
+<dt>--shell-escape, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pdftex-option-shell-escape">--shell-escape</a></dt>
+<dt>--translate-file tcxname, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pdftex-option-translate-file">--translate-file tcxname</a></dt>
+<dt>--version, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pdftex-option-version">--version</a></dt>
+<dt>[-no]-maketex=FMT, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#opt-latex-no-maketex">[-no]-maketex=FMT</a></dt>
+</dl>
+</dd>
+</dl>
+</dd>
+<dt>People</dt>
+<dd>
+<dl>
+<dt>Bausum, David, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#plaintex-ovw">Overview</a></dt>
+<dt>Berry, Karl, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#credits">Credits</a></dt>
+<dt>Borgert, Wolfgang, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#credits">Credits</a></dt>
+<dt>Casellas, Ramon, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#credits">Credits</a></dt>
+<dt>Danielsson, Holger, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#credits">Credits</a></dt>
+<dt>Devenish, James, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#credits">Credits</a></dt>
+<dt>Gaesslein, Hubert, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#credits">Credits</a></dt>
+<dt>Goossens, Michel, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#overview">Overview of LaTeX and Local Guide</a></dt>
+<dt>Hagen, Hans, <a class="indexterm" href="#context">ConTeXt
+(tbd.)</a></dt>
+<dt>Karp, Peter, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#credits">Credits</a></dt>
+<dt>Lamport, Leslie, <a class="indexterm" href="#overview">Overview
+of LaTeX and Local Guide</a></dt>
+<dt>Mittelbach, Frank, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#overview">Overview of LaTeX and Local Guide</a></dt>
+<dt>Niepraschk, Rolf, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#credits">Credits</a></dt>
+<dt>Nordhaug, Hans Fredrik, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#credits">Credits</a></dt>
+<dt>Pepping, Simon, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#credits">Credits</a></dt>
+<dt>Samarin, Alexander, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#overview">Overview of LaTeX and Local Guide</a></dt>
+<dt>Stayton, Bob, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#credits">Credits</a></dt>
+<dt>van Zandt, Timothy, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pstricks-ovw">Overview</a></dt>
+<dt>Voss, Herbert, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#credits">Credits</a></dt>
+</dl>
+</dd>
+<dt>PiCTeX, <a class="indexterm" href="#pictex">PiCTeX
+(tbd.)</a></dt>
+<dt>picture, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>Pictures, creating, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>PlainTeX, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#plaintex">PlainTeX</a></dt>
+<dt>Poetry, an environment for, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>Predefined lengths, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#lengths">Lengths</a></dt>
+<dt>Programs, typesetting, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>PSTricks, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pstricks">PSTricks</a></dt>
+<dd>
+<dl>
+<dt>commands</dt>
+<dd>
+<dl>
+<dt>\aput, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pstricks-attaching">Attaching labels to node connections</a></dt>
+<dt>\Aput, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pstricks-attaching">Attaching labels to node connections</a></dt>
+<dt>\arrows, <a class="indexterm" href="#hackers">For hackers
+only</a></dt>
+<dt>\bput, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pstricks-attaching">Attaching labels to node connections</a></dt>
+<dt>\Bput, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pstricks-attaching">Attaching labels to node connections</a></dt>
+<dt>\circlenode, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pstricks-nodes">Nodes</a></dt>
+<dt>\clipbox, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pstricks-clipping">Clipping</a></dt>
+<dt>\closedshadow, <a class="indexterm" href="#safe-tricks">Safe
+tricks</a></dt>
+<dt>\closepath, <a class="indexterm" href="#safe-tricks">Safe
+tricks</a></dt>
+<dt>\cnode, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pstricks-nodes">Nodes</a></dt>
+<dt>\cnodeput, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pstricks-nodes">Nodes</a></dt>
+<dt>\code, <a class="indexterm" href="#hackers">For hackers
+only</a></dt>
+<dt>\coor, <a class="indexterm" href="#hackers">For hackers
+only</a></dt>
+<dt>\cput, <a class="indexterm" href="#pstricks-framed">Framed
+boxes</a></dt>
+<dt>\curveto, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pretty-safe-tricks">Pretty safe tricks</a></dt>
+<dt>\dataplot, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pstricks-plots">Plots</a></dt>
+<dt>\degrees, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pstricks-dimensions">Dimensions, coordinates and angles</a></dt>
+<dt>\dim, <a class="indexterm" href="#hackers">For hackers
+only</a></dt>
+<dt>\endpspicture, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pictures">Pictures</a></dt>
+<dt>\everypsbox, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pstricks-boxes">Boxes</a></dt>
+<dt>\file, <a class="indexterm" href="#hackers">For hackers
+only</a></dt>
+<dt>\fileplot, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pstricks-plots">Plots</a></dt>
+<dt>\fill, <a class="indexterm" href="#safe-tricks">Safe
+tricks</a></dt>
+<dt>\grestore, <a class="indexterm" href="#safe-tricks">Safe
+tricks</a></dt>
+<dt>\gsave, <a class="indexterm" href="#safe-tricks">Safe
+tricks</a></dt>
+<dt>\lineto, <a class="indexterm" href="#pretty-safe-tricks">Pretty
+safe tricks</a></dt>
+<dt>\listplot, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pstricks-plots">Plots</a></dt>
+<dt>\lput, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pstricks-attaching">Attaching labels to node connections</a></dt>
+<dt>\movepath, <a class="indexterm" href="#safe-tricks">Safe
+tricks</a></dt>
+<dt>\moveto, <a class="indexterm" href="#safe-tricks">Safe
+tricks</a></dt>
+<dt>\mput, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pstricks-attaching">Attaching labels to node connections</a></dt>
+<dt>\mrestore, <a class="indexterm" href="#safe-tricks">Safe
+tricks</a></dt>
+<dt>\msave, <a class="indexterm" href="#safe-tricks">Safe
+tricks</a></dt>
+<dt>\multips, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pstricks-repetition">Repetition</a></dt>
+<dt>\multirput, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pstricks-repetition">Repetition</a></dt>
+<dt>\ncangle, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pstricks-connections">Node connections</a></dt>
+<dt>\ncangles, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pstricks-connections">Node connections</a></dt>
+<dt>\ncarc, <a class="indexterm" href="#pstricks-connections">Node
+connections</a></dt>
+<dt>\ncbar, <a class="indexterm" href="#pstricks-connections">Node
+connections</a></dt>
+<dt>\nccircle, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pstricks-connections">Node connections</a></dt>
+<dt>\nccoil, <a class="indexterm" href="#pstricks-coils">Coils and
+zigzags</a></dt>
+<dt>\nccurve, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pstricks-connections">Node connections</a></dt>
+<dt>\ncdiag, <a class="indexterm" href="#pstricks-connections">Node
+connections</a></dt>
+<dt>\ncdiagg, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pstricks-connections">Node connections</a></dt>
+<dt>\ncline, <a class="indexterm" href="#pstricks-connections">Node
+connections</a></dt>
+<dt>\ncLine, <a class="indexterm" href="#pstricks-connections">Node
+connections</a></dt>
+<dt>\ncloop, <a class="indexterm" href="#pstricks-connections">Node
+connections</a></dt>
+<dt>\nczigzag, <a class="indexterm" href="#pstricks-coils">Coils
+and zigzags</a></dt>
+<dt>\newcmykcolor, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pstricks-color">Color</a></dt>
+<dt>\newgray, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pstricks-color">Color</a></dt>
+<dt>\newhsbcolor, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pstricks-color">Color</a></dt>
+<dt>\newpath, <a class="indexterm" href="#safe-tricks">Safe
+tricks</a></dt>
+<dt>\newpsobject, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pstricks-custom">Custom styles</a></dt>
+<dt>\newpsstyle, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pstricks-custom">Custom styles</a></dt>
+<dt>\newrgbcolor, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pstricks-color">Color</a></dt>
+<dt>\NormalCoor, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pstricks-coordinates">Special coordinates</a></dt>
+<dt>\openshadow, <a class="indexterm" href="#safe-tricks">Safe
+tricks</a></dt>
+<dt>\ovalnode, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pstricks-nodes">Nodes</a></dt>
+<dt>\overlaybox, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pstricks-overlays">Overlays</a></dt>
+<dt>\parabola, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pstricks-curves">Curves</a></dt>
+<dt>\parametricplot, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pstricks-plots">Plots</a></dt>
+<dt>\pcangle, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pstricks-connections">Node connections</a></dt>
+<dt>\pcarc, <a class="indexterm" href="#pstricks-connections">Node
+connections</a></dt>
+<dt>\pcbar, <a class="indexterm" href="#pstricks-connections">Node
+connections</a></dt>
+<dt>\pccoil, <a class="indexterm" href="#pstricks-coils">Coils and
+zigzags</a></dt>
+<dt>\pccurve, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pstricks-connections">Node connections</a></dt>
+<dt>\pcdiag, <a class="indexterm" href="#pstricks-connections">Node
+connections</a></dt>
+<dt>\pcline, <a class="indexterm" href="#pstricks-connections">Node
+connections</a></dt>
+<dt>\pcloop, <a class="indexterm" href="#pstricks-connections">Node
+connections</a></dt>
+<dt>\pczigzag, <a class="indexterm" href="#pstricks-coils">Coils
+and zigzags</a></dt>
+<dt>\pnode, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pstricks-nodes">Nodes</a></dt>
+<dt>\psarc, <a class="indexterm" href="#pstricks-arcs">Arcs,
+circles and ellipses</a></dt>
+<dt>\psarcn, <a class="indexterm" href="#pstricks-arcs">Arcs,
+circles and ellipses</a></dt>
+<dt>\psaxes, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pstricks-axes">Axes</a></dt>
+<dt>\psbezier, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pstricks-curves">Curves</a></dt>
+<dt>\psccurve, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pstricks-curves">Curves</a></dt>
+<dt>\pscharclip, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pstricks-stroking">Stroking and filling character paths</a></dt>
+<dt>\pscharpath, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pstricks-stroking">Stroking and filling character paths</a></dt>
+<dt>\pscircle, <a class="indexterm" href="#pstricks-arcs">Arcs,
+circles and ellipses</a></dt>
+<dt>\pscirclebox, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pstricks-framed">Framed boxes</a></dt>
+<dt>\psclip, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pstricks-clipping">Clipping</a></dt>
+<dt>\pscoil, <a class="indexterm" href="#pstricks-coils">Coils and
+zigzags</a></dt>
+<dt>\psCoil, <a class="indexterm" href="#pstricks-coils">Coils and
+zigzags</a></dt>
+<dt>\pscurve, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pstricks-curves">Curves</a></dt>
+<dt>\pscustom, <a class="indexterm" href="#pstricks-basics">The
+basics</a></dt>
+<dt>\psdblframebox, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pstricks-framed">Framed boxes</a></dt>
+<dt>\psdots, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pstricks-dots">Dots</a></dt>
+<dt>\psecurve, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pstricks-curves">Curves</a></dt>
+<dt>\psellipse, <a class="indexterm" href="#pstricks-arcs">Arcs,
+circles and ellipses</a></dt>
+<dt>\psframe, <a class="indexterm" href="#pstricks-lines">Lines and
+polygons</a></dt>
+<dt>\psframebox, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pstricks-framed">Framed boxes</a></dt>
+<dt>\psgrid, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pstricks-grids">Grids</a></dt>
+<dt>\pslabelsep, <a class="indexterm" href="#placing">Placing and
+rotating whatever</a></dt>
+<dt>\pslbrace, <a class="indexterm" href="#pstricks-tricks">Tips
+and More Tricks</a></dt>
+<dt>\psline, <a class="indexterm" href="#pstricks-lines">Lines and
+polygons</a></dt>
+<dt>\pslongbox, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pstricks-boxes">Boxes</a></dt>
+<dt>\psmathboxfalse, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pstricks-boxes">Boxes</a></dt>
+<dt>\psmathboxtrue, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pstricks-boxes">Boxes</a></dt>
+<dt>\psovalbox, <a class="indexterm" href="#pstricks-framed">Framed
+boxes</a></dt>
+<dt>\psoverlay, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pstricks-overlays">Overlays</a></dt>
+<dt>\pspicture, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pictures">Pictures</a></dt>
+<dt>\psplot, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pstricks-plots">Plots</a></dt>
+<dt>\pspolygon, <a class="indexterm" href="#pstricks-lines">Lines
+and polygons</a></dt>
+<dt>\psrbrace, <a class="indexterm" href="#pstricks-tricks">Tips
+and More Tricks</a></dt>
+<dt>\psset, <a class="indexterm" href="#pstricks-setting">Setting
+graphics parameters</a></dt>
+<dt>\pssetlength, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pstricks-dimensions">Dimensions, coordinates and angles</a></dt>
+<dt>\psshadowbox, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pstricks-framed">Framed boxes</a></dt>
+<dt>\pstextpath, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pstricks-path">Typesetting text along a path</a></dt>
+<dt>\PSTtoEPS, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pstricks-exporting">Exporting EPS files</a></dt>
+<dt>\psverbboxfalse, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pstricks-boxes">Boxes</a></dt>
+<dt>\psverbboxtrue, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pstricks-boxes">Boxes</a></dt>
+<dt>\pswedge, <a class="indexterm" href="#pstricks-arcs">Arcs,
+circles and ellipses</a></dt>
+<dt>\psxlabel, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pstricks-axes">Axes</a></dt>
+<dt>\psylabel, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pstricks-axes">Axes</a></dt>
+<dt>\pszigzag, <a class="indexterm" href="#pstricks-coils">Coils
+and zigzags</a></dt>
+<dt>\putoverlaybox, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pstricks-overlays">Overlays</a></dt>
+<dt>\qline, <a class="indexterm" href="#pstricks-lines">Lines and
+polygons</a></dt>
+<dt>\radians, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pstricks-dimensions">Dimensions, coordinates and angles</a></dt>
+<dt>\rcoor, <a class="indexterm" href="#hackers">For hackers
+only</a></dt>
+<dt>\rcurveto, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pretty-safe-tricks">Pretty safe tricks</a></dt>
+<dt>\readdata, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pstricks-plots">Plots</a></dt>
+<dt>\rlineto, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pretty-safe-tricks">Pretty safe tricks</a></dt>
+<dt>\rnode, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pstricks-nodes">Nodes</a></dt>
+<dt>\Rnode, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pstricks-nodes">Nodes</a></dt>
+<dt>\RnodeRef, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pstricks-nodes">Nodes</a></dt>
+<dt>\rotate, <a class="indexterm" href="#safe-tricks">Safe
+tricks</a></dt>
+<dt>\rotatedown, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pstricks-rotation">Rotation and scaling boxes</a></dt>
+<dt>\rotateleft, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pstricks-rotation">Rotation and scaling boxes</a></dt>
+<dt>\rotateright, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pstricks-rotation">Rotation and scaling boxes</a></dt>
+<dt>\rput, <a class="indexterm" href="#placing">Placing and
+rotating whatever</a></dt>
+<dt>\savedata, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pstricks-plots">Plots</a></dt>
+<dt>\scale, <a class="indexterm" href="#safe-tricks">Safe
+tricks</a></dt>
+<dt>\scalebox, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pstricks-rotation">Rotation and scaling boxes</a></dt>
+<dt>\scaleboxto, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pstricks-rotation">Rotation and scaling boxes</a></dt>
+<dt>\setcolor, <a class="indexterm" href="#hackers">For hackers
+only</a></dt>
+<dt>\SpecialCoor, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pstricks-coordinates">Special coordinates</a></dt>
+<dt>\stroke, <a class="indexterm" href="#safe-tricks">Safe
+tricks</a></dt>
+<dt>\swapaxes, <a class="indexterm" href="#safe-tricks">Safe
+tricks</a></dt>
+<dt>\TeXtoEPS, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pstricks-exporting">Exporting EPS files</a></dt>
+<dt>\translate, <a class="indexterm" href="#safe-tricks">Safe
+tricks</a></dt>
+<dt>\uput, <a class="indexterm" href="#placing">Placing and
+rotating whatever</a></dt>
+</dl>
+</dd>
+<dt>parameter</dt>
+<dd>
+<dl>
+<dt>angle, <a class="indexterm" href="#pstricks-connections">Node
+connections</a></dt>
+<dt>arcangle, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pstricks-connections">Node connections</a></dt>
+<dt>arcsep, <a class="indexterm" href="#pstricks-arcs">Arcs,
+circles and ellipses</a></dt>
+<dt>arcsepA, <a class="indexterm" href="#pstricks-arcs">Arcs,
+circles and ellipses</a></dt>
+<dt>arcsepB, <a class="indexterm" href="#pstricks-arcs">Arcs,
+circles and ellipses</a></dt>
+<dt>arm, <a class="indexterm" href="#pstricks-connections">Node
+connections</a></dt>
+<dt>arrowinset, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pstricks-arrowheads">Arrowheads and such</a></dt>
+<dt>arrowlength, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pstricks-arrowheads">Arrowheads and such</a></dt>
+<dt>arrows, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pstricks-arrowheads">Arrowheads and such</a></dt>
+<dt>arrowscale, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pstricks-arrowheads">Arrowheads and such</a></dt>
+<dt>arrowsize, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pstricks-arrowheads">Arrowheads and such</a></dt>
+<dt>axesstyle, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pstricks-axes">Axes</a></dt>
+<dt>bbllx, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pstricks-exporting">Exporting EPS files</a></dt>
+<dt>bblly, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pstricks-exporting">Exporting EPS files</a></dt>
+<dt>bburx, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pstricks-exporting">Exporting EPS files</a></dt>
+<dt>bbury, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pstricks-exporting">Exporting EPS files</a></dt>
+<dt>border, <a class="indexterm" href="#pstricks-line-styles">Line
+styles</a></dt>
+<dt>bordercolor, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pstricks-line-styles">Line styles</a></dt>
+<dt>boxsep, <a class="indexterm" href="#pstricks-framed">Framed
+boxes</a></dt>
+<dt>bracketlength, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pstricks-arrowheads">Arrowheads and such</a></dt>
+<dt>coilheight, <a class="indexterm" href="#pstricks-coils">Coils
+and zigzags</a></dt>
+<dt>coilinc, <a class="indexterm" href="#pstricks-coils">Coils and
+zigzags</a></dt>
+<dt>coilwidth, <a class="indexterm" href="#pstricks-coils">Coils
+and zigzags</a></dt>
+<dt>cornersize, <a class="indexterm" href="#pstricks-lines">Lines
+and polygons</a></dt>
+<dt>curvature, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pstricks-curves">Curves</a></dt>
+<dt>dash, <a class="indexterm" href="#pstricks-line-styles">Line
+styles</a></dt>
+<dt>dimen, <a class="indexterm" href="#pstricks-line-styles">Line
+styles</a></dt>
+<dt>dotangle, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pstricks-dots">Dots</a></dt>
+<dt>dotscale, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pstricks-dots">Dots</a></dt>
+<dt>dotsep, <a class="indexterm" href="#pstricks-line-styles">Line
+styles</a></dt>
+<dt>dotsize, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pstricks-arrowheads">Arrowheads and such</a></dt>
+<dt>dotstyle, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pstricks-dots">Dots</a></dt>
+<dt>doublecolor, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pstricks-line-styles">Line styles</a></dt>
+<dt>doubleline, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pstricks-line-styles">Line styles</a></dt>
+<dt>doublesep, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pstricks-line-styles">Line styles</a></dt>
+<dt>fillcolor, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pstricks-fill-styles">Fill styles</a></dt>
+<dt>fillstyle, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pstricks-fill-styles">Fill styles</a></dt>
+<dt>framearc, <a class="indexterm" href="#pstricks-lines">Lines and
+polygons</a></dt>
+<dt>framesep, <a class="indexterm" href="#pstricks-framed">Framed
+boxes</a></dt>
+<dt>gradangle, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pstricks-overlays">Overlays</a></dt>
+<dt>gradbegin, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pstricks-overlays">Overlays</a></dt>
+<dt>gradend, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pstricks-overlays">Overlays</a></dt>
+<dt>gradlines, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pstricks-overlays">Overlays</a></dt>
+<dt>gradmidpoint, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pstricks-overlays">Overlays</a></dt>
+<dt>gridcolor, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pstricks-grids">Grids</a></dt>
+<dt>griddots, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pstricks-grids">Grids</a></dt>
+<dt>gridlabelcolor, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pstricks-grids">Grids</a></dt>
+<dt>gridlabels, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pstricks-grids">Grids</a></dt>
+<dt>gridwidth, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pstricks-grids">Grids</a></dt>
+<dt>hatchangle, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pstricks-fill-styles">Fill styles</a></dt>
+<dt>hatchcolor, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pstricks-fill-styles">Fill styles</a></dt>
+<dt>hatchsep, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pstricks-fill-styles">Fill styles</a></dt>
+<dt>hatchwidth, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pstricks-fill-styles">Fill styles</a></dt>
+<dt>headerfile, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pstricks-exporting">Exporting EPS files</a></dt>
+<dt>headers, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pstricks-exporting">Exporting EPS files</a></dt>
+<dt>labels, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pstricks-axes">Axes</a></dt>
+<dt>labelsep, <a class="indexterm" href="#placing">Placing and
+rotating whatever</a></dt>
+<dt>liftpen, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pstricks-graphics-objects">Graphics objects</a></dt>
+<dt>linearc, <a class="indexterm" href="#pstricks-lines">Lines and
+polygons</a></dt>
+<dt>linecolor, <a class="indexterm" href="#pstricks-basic">Basic
+graphics parameters</a></dt>
+<dt>linestyle, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pstricks-line-styles">Line styles</a></dt>
+<dt>linetype, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pstricks-parameters">Parameters</a></dt>
+<dt>linewidth, <a class="indexterm" href="#pstricks-basic">Basic
+graphics parameters</a></dt>
+<dt>loopsize, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pstricks-connections">Node connections</a></dt>
+<dt>ncurv, <a class="indexterm" href="#pstricks-connections">Node
+connections</a></dt>
+<dt>nodesep, <a class="indexterm" href="#pstricks-connections">Node
+connections</a></dt>
+<dt>offset, <a class="indexterm" href="#pstricks-connections">Node
+connections</a></dt>
+<dt>origin, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pstricks-coordinate">Coordinate systems</a></dt>
+<dt>plotpoints, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pstricks-plots">Plots</a></dt>
+<dt>plotstyle, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pstricks-plots">Plots</a></dt>
+<dt>rbracketlength, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pstricks-arrowheads">Arrowheads and such</a></dt>
+<dt>runit, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pstricks-dimensions">Dimensions, coordinates and angles</a></dt>
+<dt>shadow, <a class="indexterm" href="#pstricks-line-styles">Line
+styles</a></dt>
+<dt>shadowangle, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pstricks-line-styles">Line styles</a></dt>
+<dt>shadowcolor, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pstricks-line-styles">Line styles</a></dt>
+<dt>shadowsize, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pstricks-line-styles">Line styles</a></dt>
+<dt>showorigin, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pstricks-axes">Axes</a></dt>
+<dt>showpoints, <a class="indexterm" href="#pstricks-basic">Basic
+graphics parameters</a></dt>
+<dt>subgriddots, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pstricks-grids">Grids</a></dt>
+<dt>subgridwidth, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pstricks-grids">Grids</a></dt>
+<dt>swapaxes, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pstricks-coordinate">Coordinate systems</a></dt>
+<dt>tbarsize, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pstricks-arrowheads">Arrowheads and such</a></dt>
+<dt>ticks, <a class="indexterm" href="#pstricks-axes">Axes</a></dt>
+<dt>ticksize, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pstricks-axes">Axes</a></dt>
+<dt>tickstyle, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pstricks-axes">Axes</a></dt>
+<dt>unit, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pstricks-dimensions">Dimensions, coordinates and angles</a></dt>
+<dt>xunit, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pstricks-dimensions">Dimensions, coordinates and angles</a></dt>
+<dt>yunit, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#pstricks-dimensions">Dimensions, coordinates and angles</a></dt>
+</dl>
+</dd>
+</dl>
+</dd>
+</dl>
+</div>
+<div class="indexdiv">
+<h3>Q</h3>
+<dl>
+<dt>quotation, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>quote, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>Quoted text with paragraph indentation, displaying, <a class=
+"indexterm" href="#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>Quoted text, displaying, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+</dl>
+</div>
+<div class="indexdiv">
+<h3>R</h3>
+<dl>
+<dt>Ragged left text, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>Ragged left text, environment for, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>Ragged right text, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>Ragged right text, environment for, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>Relational Operators, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#special-symbols">Special Symbols</a></dt>
+<dt>Remarks in the margin, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#margin-notes">Margin Notes</a></dt>
+<dt>report class, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#document-classes">Document Classes</a></dt>
+<dt>Reserved Characters, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#special-characters">Special Characters</a></dt>
+<dt>Right-justifying text, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>Right-justifying text, environment for, <a class="indexterm"
+href="#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+</dl>
+</div>
+<div class="indexdiv">
+<h3>S</h3>
+<dl>
+<dt>Sectioning, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#sectioning">Sectioning</a></dt>
+<dt>Several Small Packages, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#small-packages">Several Small Packages</a></dt>
+<dt>Simulating typed text, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>Sizes of text, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#typefaces">Typefaces</a></dt>
+<dt>Small Packages, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#small-packages">Several Small Packages</a></dt>
+<dt>Space, inserting vertical, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#spaces-and-boxes">Spaces &amp; Boxes</a></dt>
+<dt>Spaces, <a class="indexterm" href="#spaces-and-boxes">Spaces
+&amp; Boxes</a></dt>
+<dt>Spacing, within Math mode, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#math-formulae">Math Formulae</a></dt>
+<dt>Special Characters, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#special-characters">Special Characters</a></dt>
+<dt>Splitting the input file, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#splitting-the-input">Splitting the Input</a></dt>
+<dt>Starting &amp; Ending, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#starting-and-ending">Starting &amp; Ending</a></dt>
+<dt>Starting on a right-hand page, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#line-and-page-breaking">Line &amp; Page Breaking</a></dt>
+<dt>Styles of text, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#typefaces">Typefaces</a></dt>
+<dt>Styles, page, <a class="indexterm" href="#page-styles">Page
+Styles</a></dt>
+<dt>Subscript, <a class="indexterm" href="#math-formulae">Math
+Formulae</a></dt>
+<dt>Superscript, <a class="indexterm" href="#math-formulae">Math
+Formulae</a></dt>
+<dt>Symbols, <a class="indexterm" href="#math-formulae">Math
+Formulae</a></dt>
+<dd>
+<dl>
+<dt>Miscellaneous, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#special-symbols">Special Symbols</a></dt>
+<dt>Special, <a class="indexterm" href="#special-symbols">Special
+Symbols</a></dt>
+</dl>
+</dd>
+</dl>
+</div>
+<div class="indexdiv">
+<h3>T</h3>
+<dl>
+<dt>Tab stops, using, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>tabbing, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>table, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>Table of Contents, creating, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#table-of-contents">Table of Contents</a></dt>
+<dt>Tables, creating, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>tabular, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>Terminal Input/Output, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#terminal-input-slash-output">Terminal Input/Output</a></dt>
+<dt>Texinfo, <a class="indexterm" href="#texinfo">Texinfo
+(tbd.)</a></dt>
+<dt>Thanks, for titlepage, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#page-styles">Page Styles</a></dt>
+<dt>thebibliography, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>theorem, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>Theorems, defining, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#definitions">Definitions</a></dt>
+<dt>Theorems, typesetting, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>Title making, <a class="indexterm" href="#page-styles">Page
+Styles</a></dt>
+<dt>Title pages, creating, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>Title, for titlepage, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#page-styles">Page Styles</a></dt>
+<dt>titlepage, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>Typed text, simulating, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>Typeface Sizes, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#typefaces">Typefaces</a></dt>
+<dt>Typeface Styles, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#typefaces">Typefaces</a></dt>
+<dt>Typefaces, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#typefaces">Typefaces</a></dt>
+</dl>
+</div>
+<div class="indexdiv">
+<h3>U</h3>
+<dl>
+<dt>url, <a class="indexterm" href="#url-package">url</a></dt>
+<dt>Using BibTeX, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+</dl>
+</div>
+<div class="indexdiv">
+<h3>V</h3>
+<dl>
+<dt>Variables, a list of, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#counters">Counters</a></dt>
+<dt>varioref, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#varioref">varioref</a></dt>
+<dt>verbatim, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>Verbatim text, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>verse, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#env-latex">Environments</a></dt>
+<dt>Vertical space, inserting, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#spaces-and-boxes">Spaces &amp; Boxes</a></dt>
+</dl>
+</div>
+<div class="indexdiv">
+<h3>X</h3>
+<dl>
+<dt>xindy, <a class="indexterm" href="#xindy">xindy</a></dt>
+<dd>
+<dl>
+<dt>Command List, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#xindy-command-list">Command List</a></dt>
+<dd>
+<dl>
+<dt>Markup Commands, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#xindy-command-list-markup">Markup Commands</a></dt>
+<dt>Raw Index Interface, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#xindy-command-list-raw-index">Raw Index Interface</a></dt>
+</dl>
+</dd>
+<dt>Invoking, <a class="indexterm" href="#xindy-invoking">Invoking
+xindy</a></dt>
+<dd>
+<dl>
+<dt>Command Line Options, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#xindy-invoking-cmdline">Command Line Options</a></dt>
+<dt>Search Path, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#xindy-search-path">Search Path</a></dt>
+</dl>
+</dd>
+<dt>Processing Commands, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#xindy-command-list-processing">Processing Commands</a></dt>
+<dd>
+<dl>
+<dt>define-alphabet, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#xindy-command-list-processing-define-alphabet">define-alphabet</a></dt>
+<dt>define-attributes, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#xindy-command-list-processing-define-attributes">define-attributes</a></dt>
+<dt>define-crossref-class, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#xindy-command-list-processing-define-crossref-class">define-crossref-class</a></dt>
+<dt>define-letter-group, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#xindy-command-list-processing-define-letter-group">define-letter-group</a></dt>
+<dt>define-location-class, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#xindy-command-list-processing-define-location-class">define-location-class</a></dt>
+<dt>define-location-class-order, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#xindy-command-list-processing-define-location-class-order">define-location-class-order</a></dt>
+<dt>define-rule-set, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#xindy-command-list-processing-define-rule-set">define-rule-set</a></dt>
+<dt>define-sort-rule-orientations, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#xindy-command-list-processing-define-sort-rule-orientations">define-sort-rule-orientations</a></dt>
+<dt>merge-rule, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#xindy-command-list-processing-merge-rule">merge-rule</a></dt>
+<dt>merge-to, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#xindy-command-list-processing-merge-to">merge-to</a></dt>
+<dt>require, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#xindy-command-list-processing-require">require</a></dt>
+<dt>searchpath, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#xindy-command-list-processing-searchpath">searchpath</a></dt>
+<dt>sort-rule, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#xindy-command-list-processing-sort-rule">sort-rule</a></dt>
+<dt>use-rule-set, <a class="indexterm" href=
+"#xindy-command-list-processing-use-rule-set">use-rule-set</a></dt>
+</dl>
+</dd>
+</dl>
+</dd>
+</dl>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/info/tex-references/tex-refs.txt b/info/tex-references/tex-refs.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..2aa806cb0b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/info/tex-references/tex-refs.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,8776 @@
+References for TeX and Friends
+
+Michael Wiedmann
+
+ <mw at miwie dot in-berlin dot de>
+
+ Copyright © ? Stephen Gilmore
+
+ Copyright © ? Torsten Martinsen
+
+ Copyright © 1988, 1994 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+
+ Copyright © 1994 - 1996 Torsten Martinsen
+
+ Copyright © 2002, 2003 Peter Karp, Michael Wiedmann
+
+ Copyright © 2004 - 2012 Michael Wiedmann
+
+ License
+
+ Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this
+ document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License,
+ Version 1.2 or any later version published by the Free Software
+ Foundation; with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts,
+ and no Back-Cover Texts.
+ Revision History
+ Revision 0.4.1 2012-12-03
+ Removed obsolete file still referenced in Makefile (no visible
+ changes)
+ Revision 0.2.0 2003-01-11
+ License changed to GNU Free Documentation License.
+ Revision 0.0.1 2002-06-21
+ This version was adapted from the edition 1.6 of the LaTeX2e
+ documentation, converted to DocBook XML using texi2db, and
+ further edited manually.
+ __________________________________________________________
+
+ Table of Contents
+
+ Preface
+ Credits
+ 1 TeX
+
+ 1 PlainTeX
+
+ 1.1 Overview
+
+ 2 LaTeX
+
+ 2.1 Options
+ 2.2 Overview of LaTeX and Local Guide
+ 2.3 Commands
+ 2.4 Parameters
+
+ 3 LaTeX Packages
+
+ 3.1 amsmath
+ 3.2 dcolumn
+ 3.3 float
+ 3.4 fontenc
+ 3.5 german
+ 3.6 graphics
+ 3.7 hyperref
+ 3.8 inputenc
+ 3.9 KOMA-Script
+ 3.10 mathpazo
+ 3.11 varioref
+ 3.12 Several Small Packages
+
+ 4 Generic Packages
+
+ 4.1 PiCTeX (tbd.)
+ 4.2 PSTricks
+
+ 5 fontinst (tbd.)
+ 6 ConTeXt (tbd.)
+
+ 6.1 Overview
+
+ 7 Texinfo (tbd.)
+
+ 2 pdfTeX
+
+ 1 Options
+
+ 1.1 --file-line-error-style
+ 1.2 --fmt format
+ 1.3 --help
+ 1.4 --ini
+ 1.5 --interaction mode
+ 1.6 --ipc
+ 1.7 --ipc-start
+ 1.8 --jobname name
+ 1.9 --kpathsea-debug bitmask
+ 1.10 --maketex fmt
+ 1.11 --no-maketex fmt
+ 1.12 --output-comment string
+ 1.13 --parse-first-line
+ 1.14 --progname name
+ 1.15 --recorder
+ 1.16 --shell-escape
+ 1.17 --translate-file tcxname
+ 1.18 --version
+
+ 2 Environment
+
+ 3 Metafont (tbd.)
+ 4 MetaPost
+
+ 1 Options
+
+ 1.1 --file-line-error-style
+ 1.2 --help
+ 1.3 --ini
+ 1.4 --interaction mode
+ 1.5 --jobname name
+ 1.6 --kpathsea-debug bitmask
+ 1.7 --mem mem
+ 1.8 --parse-first-line
+ 1.9 --progname name
+ 1.10 --recorder
+ 1.11 -T
+ 1.12 --translate-file tcxname
+ 1.13 --troff
+ 1.14 --version
+
+ 2 Environment
+
+ 5 BibTeX
+
+ 1 Parameters
+ 2 Command Qualifiers
+ 3 bib files
+
+ 3.1 @STRING command
+ 3.2 Entry Format
+ 3.3 Entry Types
+ 3.4 Field Text
+ 3.5 Field Types
+
+ 4 bst files
+
+ 4.1 ABBRV.BST
+ 4.2 ALPHA.BST
+ 4.3 PLAIN.BST
+ 4.4 SAMPLE.BST
+ 4.5 UNSRT.BST
+
+ 6 Make-Index
+
+ 1 Options
+
+ 1.1 -c
+ 1.2 -g
+ 1.3 -i
+ 1.4 -l
+ 1.5 -q
+ 1.6 -r
+ 1.7 -s sty
+ 1.8 -o ind
+ 1.9 -t log
+ 1.10 -p no
+ 1.11 -L
+ 1.12 -T
+
+ 2 Style File
+
+ 2.1 Input Style Specifiers
+ 2.2 Output Style Specifiers
+
+ 3 Example
+ 4 Ordering
+ 5 Special Effects
+
+ 7 xindy
+
+ 1 Command List
+
+ 1.1 Processing Commands
+ 1.2 Markup Commands
+ 1.3 Raw Index Interface
+
+ 2 Invoking xindy
+
+ 2.1 Command Line Options
+ 2.2 Search Path
+
+ A Appendices
+
+ 1 Bugs / Known Issues / Missing Features
+ 2 About this Document
+ 3 Release News
+ 4 GNU Free Documentation License
+ Index
+
+ List of Tables
+
+ 1.1 Options for \newcommand
+ 1.2 Options for \newenvironment
+ 1.3 Options for \newtheorem
+ 1.4 Commands in a tabbing environment
+ 1.5 Commands used inside a tabular environment
+ 1.6 Standard styles distributed with BibTeX
+ 1.7 Three environments that put LaTeX in math mode
+ 1.8 Math Miscellany
+ 1.9 Typefaces
+ 1.10 Standard type size commands
+ 1.11 Low-level font commands
+ 1.12 Special coordinates and angles
+
+Preface
+
+ LaTeX2e is a document preparation system implemented as a macro
+ package for Donald E. Knuth's TeX typesetting program.
+
+ LaTeX was originally conceived by Leslie Lamport.
+
+ This updated LaTeX reference is by no means complete, but it's
+ a first step towards a more complete LaTeX reference! We
+ welcome if we'll get pointed to missing commands or even better
+ when you make additions and further improvements and send them
+ to the authors.
+
+ TUG (TeX User Group) and DANTE (German TeX User Group) both
+ have excellent FAQ's which answer many questions or give great
+ pointers to additional resources both on the internet or in
+ books. Most if not all missing packages can also be found on
+ the CTAN servers.
+
+ This reference is not meant to replace the package
+ documentation or the standard literature like the LaTeX
+ handbook and the LaTeX companion. Look there for detailed
+ descriptions of the commands and even mostly more options and
+ examples.
+
+ The authors intend to extend this documentation to other TeX
+ related packages (e.g. ConTeXt, MetaPost, Metafont, etc.).
+ Contributions are very welcome!
+
+Credits
+
+ The following people have contributed substantial parts to this
+ documentation project or helped in some other way (listed
+ alphabetically):
+ * Karl Berry
+ * Wolfgang Borgert
+ * Ramon Casellas
+ * Holger Danielsson
+ * James Devenish
+ * Hubert Gaesslein
+ * Peter Karp
+ * Rolf Niepraschk
+ * Hans Fredrik Nordhaug
+ * Simon Pepping
+ * Bob Stayton
+ * Herbert Voss
+
+Chapter 1. TeX
+
+ Table of Contents
+
+ 1 PlainTeX
+
+ 1.1 Overview
+
+ 2 LaTeX
+
+ 2.1 Options
+ 2.2 Overview of LaTeX and Local Guide
+ 2.3 Commands
+ 2.4 Parameters
+
+ 3 LaTeX Packages
+
+ 3.1 amsmath
+ 3.2 dcolumn
+ 3.3 float
+ 3.4 fontenc
+ 3.5 german
+ 3.6 graphics
+ 3.7 hyperref
+ 3.8 inputenc
+ 3.9 KOMA-Script
+ 3.10 mathpazo
+ 3.11 varioref
+ 3.12 Several Small Packages
+
+ 4 Generic Packages
+
+ 4.1 PiCTeX (tbd.)
+ 4.2 PSTricks
+
+ 5 fontinst (tbd.)
+ 6 ConTeXt (tbd.)
+
+ 6.1 Overview
+
+ 7 Texinfo (tbd.)
+
+1 PlainTeX
+
+1.1 Overview
+
+ For a really excellent reference of all TeX primitive control
+ sequences see David Bausum's TeX Primitive Control Sequences.
+
+2 LaTeX
+
+Note
+
+ The original file latex2e.texi contains the following copyright
+ and permission notice:
+
+ “Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies
+ of this manual provided the copyright notice and this
+ permission notice are preserved on all copies.”
+
+ “Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions
+ of this manual under the conditions for verbatim copying,
+ provided that the entire resulting derived work is distributed
+ under the terms of a permission notice identical to this one.”
+
+2.1 Options
+
+ LaTeX understands the following command line options.
+
+2.1.1 -file-line-error-style
+
+ Print error messages in the form file:line:error.
+
+2.1.2 -fmt=FMTNAME
+
+ Use FMTMAME instead of program name or a %& line.
+
+2.1.3 -ini
+
+ Be initex, for dumping formats; this is implicitly true if the
+ program is called as initex.
+
+2.1.4 -interaction=STRING
+
+ Set interaction mode
+ (STRING=batchmode/nonstopmode/scrollmode/errorstopmode).
+
+2.1.5 -ipc
+
+ Send DVI output to a socket as well as the usual output file.
+
+ Note: not available on all systems.
+
+2.1.6 -ipc-start
+
+ As -ipc, and also start the server at the other end.
+
+ Note: not available on all systems.
+
+2.1.7 -jobname=STRING
+
+ Set the job name to STRING.
+
+2.1.8 -kpathsea-debug=NUMBER
+
+ Sets path searching debugging flags according to the bits of
+ NUMBER.
+
+2.1.9 [-no]-maketex=FMT
+
+ Disable/enable mktexFMT generation (FMT=tex/tfm).
+
+2.1.10 -mltex
+
+ Enable MLTeX extensions such as \charsubdef.
+
+2.1.11 -output-comment=STRING
+
+ use STRING for DVI file comment instead of date.
+
+2.1.12 -parse-first-line
+
+ Parse of the first line of the input file.
+
+2.1.13 -progname=STRING
+
+ Set program (and fmt) name to STRING.
+
+2.1.14 -recorder
+
+ Enable filename recorder.
+
+2.1.15 -shell-escape
+
+ Enable \write18{SHELL COMMAND}.
+
+2.1.16 -src-specials
+
+ Insert source specials into the DVI file.
+
+2.1.17 -src-specials=WHERE
+
+ Insert source specials in certain places of the DVI file. WHERE
+ is a comma-separated value list: cr display hbox math par
+ parend vbox.
+
+2.1.18 -translate-file=TCXNAME
+
+ Use the TCX file TCXNAME.
+
+2.1.19 -help
+
+ Display this help and exit.
+
+2.1.20 -version
+
+ Output version information and exit.
+
+2.2 Overview of LaTeX and Local Guide
+
+ The LaTeX command typesets a file of text using the TeX program
+ and the LaTeX Macro package for TeX. To be more specific, it
+ processes an input file containing the text of a document with
+ interspersed commands that describe how the text should be
+ formatted. It produces at least three files as output:
+ 1. A Device Independent, or .dvi file. This contains commands
+ that can be translated into commands for a variety of
+ output devices. You can view the output of LaTeX by using a
+ program such as xdvi, which actually uses the .dvi file.
+ 2. A transcript or .log file that contains summary information
+ and diagnostic messages for any errors discovered in the
+ input file.
+ 3. An auxiliary or .aux file. This is used by LaTeX itself,
+ for things such as sectioning.
+
+ For a description of what goes on inside TeX, you should
+ consult The TeXbook by Donald E. Knuth, ISBN 0-201-13448-9,
+ published jointly by the American Mathematical Society and
+ Addison-Wesley Publishing Company.
+
+ For a description of LaTeX, you should consult:
+
+ LaTeX: A Document Preparation System, by Leslie Lamport,
+ Addison-Wesley Publishing Company, 2nd edition, 1994.
+
+ The LaTeX Companion, by Michel Goossens, Frank Mittelbach, and
+ Alexander Samarin, Addison-Wesley, 1994.
+
+2.3 Commands
+
+ A LaTeX command begins with the command name, which consists of
+ a \ followed by either (a) a string of letters or (b) a single
+ non-letter. Arguments contained in square brackets, [], are
+ optional while arguments contained in braces, {}, are required.
+
+ NOTE: LaTeX is case sensitive. Enter all commands in lower case
+ unless explicitly directed to do otherwise.
+
+2.3.1 Counters
+
+ Everything LaTeX numbers for you has a counter associated with
+ it. The name of the counter is the same as the name of the
+ environment or command that produces the number, except with no
+ \ (enumi - enumiv are used for the nested enumerate
+ environment). Below is a list of the counters used in LaTeX's
+ standard document classes to control numbering.
+part paragraph figure enumi
+chapter subparagraph table enumii
+section page footnote enumiii
+subsection equation mpfootnote enumiv
+subsubsection
+
+\addtocounter
+
+ The \addtocounter command increments the counter by the amount
+ specified by the value argument. The value argument can be
+ negative.
+
+\alph{counter}
+
+ This command causes the value of the counter to be printed in
+ alphabetic characters. The \alph command uses lower case
+ alphabetic alphabetic characters, i.e., a, b, c... while the
+ \Alph command uses upper case alphabetic characters, i.e., A,
+ B, C....
+
+\arabic{counter}
+
+ The \arabic command causes the value of the counter to be
+ printed in Arabic numbers, i.e., 3.
+
+\fnsymbol{counter}
+
+ The \fnsymbol command causes the value of the counter to be
+ printed in a specific sequence of nine symbols that can be used
+ for numbering footnotes.
+
+ NB. counter must have a value between 1 and 9 inclusive.
+
+\newcounter{foo}[counter]
+
+ The \newcounter command defines a new counter named foo. The
+ counter is initialized to zero.
+
+ The optional argument [counter] causes the counter foo to be
+ reset whenever the counter named in the optional argument is
+ incremented.
+
+\refstepcounter{counter}
+
+ The \refstepcounter command works like \stepcounter. See
+ \stepcounter, except it also defines the current \ref value to
+ be the result of \thecounter.
+
+\roman{counter}
+
+ This command causes the value of the counter to be printed in
+ Roman numerals. The \roman command uses lower case Roman
+ numerals, i.e., i, ii, iii..., while the \Roman command uses
+ upper case Roman numerals, i.e., I, II, III....
+
+\stepcounter{counter}
+
+ The \stepcounter command adds one to the counter and resets all
+ subsidiary counters.
+
+\setcounter{counter}{value}
+
+ The \setcounter command sets the value of the counter to that
+ specified by the value argument.
+
+\usecounter{counter}
+
+ The \usecounter command is used in the second argument of the
+ list environment to allow the counter specified to be used to
+ number the list items.
+
+\value{counter}
+
+ The \value command produces the value of the counter named in
+ the mandatory argument. It can be used where LaTeX expects an
+ integer or number, such as the second argument of a \setcounter
+ or \addtocounter command, or in:
+\hspace{\value{foo}\parindent}
+
+ It is useful for doing arithmetic with counters.
+
+2.3.2 Cross References
+
+ One reason for numbering things like figures and equations is
+ to refer the reader to them, as in See Figure 3 for more
+ details. A smarter version of the cross reference commands is
+ available in the package varioref.
+
+\label{key}
+
+ A \label command appearing in ordinary text assigns to the key
+ the number of the current sectional unit; one appearing inside
+ a numbered environment assigns that number to the key.
+
+ A key can consist of any sequence of letters, digits, or
+ punctuation characters. Upper and lowercase letters are
+ different.
+
+ To avoid accidentally creating two labels with the same name,
+ it is common to use labels consisting of a prefix and a suffix
+ separated by a colon. The prefixes conventionally used are
+ * cha for chapters
+ * sec for lower-level sectioning commands
+ * fig for figures
+ * tab for tables
+ * eq for equations
+
+ Thus, a label for a figure would look like fig:bandersnatch.
+
+\pageref{key}
+
+ The \pageref command produces the page number of the place in
+ the text where the corresponding \label command appears. ie.
+ where \label{key} appears. For a smart version see \vpageref.
+
+\ref{key}
+
+ The \ref command produces the number of the sectional unit,
+ equation number, ... of the corresponding \label command. For a
+ smart version see \vref.
+
+2.3.3 Definitions
+
+\newcommand
+
+\newcommand{cmd}[args]{definition}
+\newcommand{cmd}[args][default]{definition}
+\renewcommand{cmd}[args]{definition}
+\renewcommand{cmd}[args][default]{definition}
+
+ These commands define (or redefine) a command.
+
+ Table 1.1. Options for \newcommand
+ cmd A command name beginning with a \. For \newcommand it must
+ not be already defined and must not begin with \end; for
+ \renewcommand it must already be defined.
+ args An integer from 1 to 9 denoting the number of arguments of
+ the command being defined. The default is for the command to
+ have no arguments.
+ def If this optional parameter is present, it means that the
+ command's first argument is optional. The default value of the
+ optional argument is def.
+ definition The text to be substituted for every occurrence of
+ cmd; a parameter of the form #n in cmd is replaced by the text
+ of the nth argument when this substitution takes place.
+
+\newenvironment
+
+\newenvironment{nam}[args]{begdef}{enddef}
+\newenvironment{nam}[args][default]{begdef}{enddef}
+\renewenvironment{nam}[args]{begdef}{enddef}
+
+ These commands define or redefine an environment.
+
+ Table 1.2. Options for \newenvironment
+ nam The name of the environment. For \newenvironment there must
+ be no currently defined environment by that name, and the
+ command \nam must be undefined. For \renewenvironment the
+ environment must already be defined.
+ args An integer from 1 to 9 denoting the number of arguments of
+ the newly-defined environment. The default is no arguments.
+ Arguments can only be used in te {begdef} part.
+ default If this is specified, the first argument is optional,
+ and default gives the default value for that argument.
+ begdef The text substituted for every occurrence of
+ \begin{nam}; a parameter of the form #n in cmd is replaced by
+ the text of the nth argument when this substitution takes
+ place.
+ enddef The text substituted for every occurrence of \end{nam}.
+ It may not contain any argument parameters.
+
+\newtheorem
+
+\newtheorem{env_name}{caption}[within]
+\newtheorem{env_name}[numbered_like]{caption}
+
+ This command defines a theorem-like environment.
+
+ Table 1.3. Options for \newtheorem
+ env_name The name of the environment to be defined. A string of
+ letters. It must not be the name of an existing environment or
+ counter.
+ caption The text printed at the beginning of the environment,
+ right before the number. This may simply say Theorem, for
+ example.
+ within The name of an already defined counter, usually of a
+ sectional unit. Provides a means of resetting the new theorem
+ counter within the sectional unit.
+ numbered_like The name of an already defined theorem-like
+ environment.
+
+ The \newtheorem command may have at most one optional argument.
+
+\newfont
+
+ \newfont{cmd}{font_name}
+
+ Defines the command name cmd, which must not be currently
+ defined, to be a declaration that selects the font named
+ font_name to be the current font.
+
+2.3.4 Document Classes
+
+ Valid LaTeX document classes include:
+ * article
+ * report
+ * letter
+ * book
+ * slides
+
+ Other document classes are often available. See Overview, for
+ details. They are selected with the following command:
+
+ \documentclass [options] {class}
+
+ All the standard classes (except slides) accept the following
+ options for selecting the typeface size (10pt is default):
+
+ 10pt, 11pt, 12pt
+
+ All classes accept these options for selecting the paper size
+ (default is letter):
+
+ a4paper, a5paper, b5paper, letterpaper, legalpaper,
+ executivepaper
+
+ Miscellaneous options:
+ * landscape --- selects landscape format. Default is
+ portrait.
+ * titlepage, notitlepage --- selects if there should be a
+ separate title page.
+ * leqno --- equation number on left side of equations.
+ Default is right side.
+ * fleqn --- displayed formulas flush left. Default is
+ centered.
+ * openbib --- use open bibliography format.
+ * draft, final --- mark/do not mark overfull boxes with a
+ rule. Default is final.
+
+ These options are not available with the slides class:
+ * oneside, twoside --- selects one- or twosided layout.
+ Default is oneside, except for the book class.
+ * openright, openany --- determines if a chapter should start
+ on a right-hand page. Default is openright for book.
+ * onecolumn, twocolumn --- one or two columns. Defaults to
+ one column.
+
+ The slides class offers the option clock for printing the time
+ at the bottom of each note.
+
+ If you specify more than one option, they must be separated by
+ a comma.
+
+ Additional packages are loaded by a
+
+ \usepackage[options]{pkg}
+
+ command. If you specify more than one package, they must be
+ separated by a comma.
+
+ Any options given in the \documentclass command that are
+ unknown by the selected document class are passed on to the
+ packages loaded with \usepackage.
+
+2.3.5 Layout
+
+ Miscellaneous commands for controlling the general layout of
+ the page.
+
+\flushbottom
+
+ The \flushbottom declaration makes all text pages the same
+ height, adding extra vertical space when necessary to fill out
+ the page.
+
+ This is the standard if twocolumn mode is selected.
+
+\onecolumn
+
+ The \onecolumn declaration starts a new page and produces
+ single-column output.
+
+\raggedbottom
+
+ The \raggedbottom declaration makes all pages the height of the
+ text on that page. No extra vertical space is added.
+
+\twocolumn
+
+ \twocolumn[text]
+
+ The \twocolumn declaration starts a new page and produces
+ two-column output. If the optional text argument is present, it
+ is typeset in one-column mode.
+
+2.3.6 Environments
+
+ LaTeX provides a number of different paragraph-making
+ environments. Each environment begins and ends in the same
+ manner.
+\begin{environment-name}
+ .
+ .
+ .
+\end{environment-name}
+
+array
+
+\begin{array}{col1col2...coln}
+column 1 entry & column 2 entry ... & column n entry \\
+ .
+ .
+ .
+\end{array}
+
+ Math arrays are produced with the array environment. It has a
+ single mandatory argument describing the number of columns and
+ the alignment within them. Each column, coln, is specified by a
+ single letter that tells how items in that row should be
+ formatted.
+ * c --- for centered
+ * l --- for flush left
+ * r --- for flush right
+
+ Column entries must be separated by an &. Column entries may
+ include other LaTeX commands. Each row of the array must be
+ terminated with the string \\.
+
+ Note that the array environment can only be used in math mode,
+ so normally it is used inside an equation environment.
+
+center
+
+\begin{center}
+Text on line 1 \\
+Text on line 2 \\
+ .
+ .
+ .
+\end{center}
+
+ The center environment allows you to create a paragraph
+ consisting of lines that are centered within the left and right
+ margins on the current page. Each line must be terminated with
+ the string \\.
+
+\centering
+
+ This declaration corresponds to the center environment. This
+ declaration can be used inside an environment such as quote or
+ in a parbox. The text of a figure or table can be centered on
+ the page by putting a \centering command at the beginning of
+ the figure or table environment.
+
+ Unlike the center environment, the \centering command does not
+ start a new paragraph; it simply changes how LaTeX formats
+ paragraph units. To affect a paragraph unit's format, the scope
+ of the declaration must contain the blank line or \end command
+ (of an environment like quote) that ends the paragraph unit.
+
+description
+
+\begin{description}
+\item [label] First item
+\item [label] Second item
+ .
+ .
+ .
+\end{description}
+
+ The description environment is used to make labelled lists. The
+ label is bold face and flushed right.
+
+enumerate
+
+\begin{enumerate}
+\item First item
+\item Second item
+ .
+ .
+ .
+\end{enumerate}
+
+ The enumerate environment produces a numbered list.
+ Enumerations can be nested within one another, up to four
+ levels deep. They can also be nested within other
+ paragraph-making environments.
+
+ Each item of an enumerated list begins with an \item command.
+ There must be at least one \item command within the
+ environment.
+
+ The enumerate environment uses the enumi through enumiv
+ counters (see Counters). The type of numbering can be changed
+ by redefining \theenumi etc.
+
+eqnarray
+
+\begin{eqnarray}
+math formula 1 \\
+math formula 2 \\
+ .
+ .
+ .
+\end{eqnarray}
+
+ The eqnarray environment is used to display a sequence of
+ equations or inequalities. It is very much like a three-column
+ array environment, with consecutive rows separated by \\ and
+ consecutive items within a row separated by an &.
+
+ An equation number is placed on every line unless that line has
+ a \nonumber command.
+
+ The command \lefteqn is used for splitting long formulas across
+ lines. It typesets its argument in display style flush left in
+ a box of zero width.
+
+equation
+
+\begin{equation}
+ math formula
+\end{equation}
+
+ The equation environment centers your equation on the page and
+ places the equation number in the right margin.
+
+figure
+
+\begin{figure}[placement]
+
+ body of the figure
+
+\caption{figure title}
+\end{figure}
+
+ Figures are objects that are not part of the normal text, and
+ are usually floated to a convenient place, like the top of a
+ page. Figures will not be split between two pages.
+
+ The optional argument [placement] determines where LaTeX will
+ try to place your figure. There are four places where LaTeX can
+ possibly put a float:
+ 1. h (Here) - at the position in the text where the figure
+ environment appears.
+ 2. t (Top) - at the top of a text page.
+ 3. b (Bottom) - at the bottom of a text page.
+ 4. p (Page of floats) - on a separate float page, which is a
+ page containing no text, only floats.
+
+ The standard report and article classes use the default
+ placement tbp.
+
+ The body of the figure is made up of whatever text, LaTeX
+ commands, etc. you wish. The \caption command allows you to
+ title your figure.
+
+flushleft
+
+\begin{flushleft}
+Text on line 1 \\
+Text on line 2 \\
+ .
+ .
+ .
+\end{flushleft}
+
+ The flushleft environment allows you to create a paragraph
+ consisting of lines that are flushed left, to the left-hand
+ margin. Each line must be terminated with the string \\.
+
+\raggedright
+
+ This declaration corresponds to the flushleft environment. This
+ declaration can be used inside an environment such as quote or
+ in a parbox.
+
+ Unlike the flushleft environment, the \raggedright command does
+ not start a new paragraph; it simply changes how LaTeX formats
+ paragraph units. To affect a paragraph unit's format, the scope
+ of the declaration must contain the blank line or \end command
+ (of an environment like quote) that ends the paragraph unit.
+
+flushright
+
+\begin{flushright}
+Text on line 1 \\
+Text on line 2 \\
+ .
+ .
+ .
+\end{flushright}
+
+ The flushright environment allows you to create a paragraph
+ consisting of lines that are flushed right, to the right-hand
+ margin. Each line must be terminated with the string \\.
+
+\raggedleft
+
+ This declaration corresponds to the flushright environment.
+ This declaration can be used inside an environment such as
+ quote or in a parbox.
+
+ Unlike the flushright environment, the \raggedleft command does
+ not start a new paragraph; it simply changes how LaTeX formats
+ paragraph units. To affect a paragraph unit's format, the scope
+ of the declaration must contain the blank line or \end command
+ (of an environment like quote) that ends the paragraph unit.
+
+itemize
+
+\begin{itemize}
+\item First item
+\item Second item
+ .
+ .
+ .
+\end{itemize}
+
+ The itemize environment produces a bulleted list. Itemizations
+ can be nested within one another, up to four levels deep. They
+ can also be nested within other paragraph-making environments.
+
+ Each item of an itemized list begins with an \item command.
+ There must be at least one \item command within the
+ environment.
+
+ The itemize environment uses the itemi through itemiv counters
+ (see Counters). The type of numbering can be changed by
+ redefining \theitemi etc.
+
+letter
+
+ This environment is used for creating letters. See Letters.
+
+list
+
+ The list environment is a generic environment which is used for
+ defining many of the more specific environments. It is seldom
+ used in documents, but often in macros.
+\begin{list}{label}{spacing}
+\item First item
+\item Second item
+ .
+ .
+ .
+\end{list}
+
+ The {label} argument specifies how items should be labelled.
+ This argument is a piece of text that is inserted in a box to
+ form the label. This argument can and usually does contain
+ other LaTeX commands.
+
+ The {spacing} argument contains commands to change the spacing
+ parameters for the list. This argument will most often be null,
+ i.e., {}. This will select all default spacing which should
+ suffice for most cases.
+
+minipage
+
+\begin{minipage}[position][height][inner-pos]{width}
+ text
+\end{minipage}
+
+ The minipage environment is similar to a \parbox command. It
+ takes the same optional position argument and mandatory width
+ argument. You may use other paragraph-making environments
+ inside a minipage.
+
+ Footnotes in a minipage environment are handled in a way that
+ is particularly useful for putting footnotes in figures or
+ tables. A \footnote or \footnotetext command puts the footnote
+ at the bottom of the minipage instead of at the bottom of the
+ page, and it uses the mpfootnote counter instead of the
+ ordinary footnote counter See Counters.
+
+ NOTE: Don't put one minipage inside another if you are using
+ footnotes; they may wind up at the bottom of the wrong
+ minipage.
+
+picture
+
+\begin{picture}(width,height)(x offset,y offset)
+ .
+ .
+ picture commands
+ .
+ .
+\end{picture}
+
+ The picture environment allows you to create just about any
+ kind of picture you want containing text, lines, arrows and
+ circles. You tell LaTeX where to put things in the picture by
+ specifying their coordinates. A coordinate is a number that may
+ have a decimal point and a minus sign --- a number like 5, 2.3
+ or -3.1416. A coordinate specifies a length in multiples of the
+ unit length \unitlength, so if \unitlength has been set to 1cm,
+ then the coordinate 2.54 specifies a length of 2.54
+ centimetres. You can change the value of \unitlength anywhere
+ you want, using the \setlength command, but strange things will
+ happen if you try changing it inside the picture environment.
+
+ A position is a pair of coordinates, such as (2.4,-5),
+ specifying the point with x-coordinate 2.4 and y-coordinate -5.
+ Coordinates are specified in the usual way with respect to an
+ origin, which is normally at the lower-left corner of the
+ picture. Note that when a position appears as an argument, it
+ is not enclosed in braces; the parentheses serve to delimit the
+ argument.
+
+ The picture environment has one mandatory argument, which is a
+ position. It specifies the size of the picture. The environment
+ produces a rectangular box with width and height determined by
+ this argument's x- and y-coordinates.
+
+ The picture environment also has an optional position argument,
+ following the size argument, that can change the origin.
+ (Unlike ordinary optional arguments, this argument is not
+ contained in square brackets.) The optional argument gives the
+ coordinates of the point at the lower-left corner of the
+ picture (thereby determining the origin). For example, if
+ \unitlength has been set to 1mm, the command
+\begin{picture}(100,200)(10,20)
+
+ produces a picture of width 100 millimetres and height 200
+ millimetres, whose lower-left corner is the point (10,20) and
+ whose upper-right corner is therefore the point (110,220). When
+ you first draw a picture, you will omit the optional argument,
+ leaving the origin at the lower-left corner. If you then want
+ to modify your picture by shifting everything, you just add the
+ appropriate optional argument.
+
+ The environment's mandatory argument determines the nominal
+ size of the picture. This need bear no relation to how large
+ the picture really is; LaTeX will happily allow you to put
+ things outside the picture, or even off the page. The picture's
+ nominal size is used by LaTeX in determining how much room to
+ leave for it.
+
+ Everything that appears in a picture is drawn by the \put
+ command. The command
+\put (11.3,-.3){...}
+
+ puts the object specified by ... in the picture, with its
+ reference point at coordinates (11.3,-.3). The reference points
+ for various objects will be described below.
+
+ The \put command creates an LR box. You can put anything in the
+ text argument of the \put command that you'd put into the
+ argument of an \mbox and related commands. When you do this,
+ the reference point will be the lower left corner of the box.
+
+ Picture commands:
+
+\circle{diameter}, \circle*{diameter}
+
+ The \circle command produces a circle with a diameter as close
+ to the specified one as possible. If the *-form of the command
+ is used, LaTeX draws a solid circle.
+
+ Note that only circles up to 40 pt can be drawn.
+
+\dashbox
+
+ Draws a box with a dashed line.
+
+ \dashbox{dash_length}(width,height){...}
+
+ The \dashbox has an extra argument which specifies the width of
+ each dash. A dashed box looks best when the width and height
+ are multiples of the dash_length.
+
+\frame{...}
+
+ The \frame command puts a rectangular frame around the object
+ specified in the argument. The reference point is the bottom
+ left corner of the frame. No extra space is put between the
+ frame and the object.
+
+\framebox(width,height)[position]{...}
+
+ The \framebox command is exactly the same as the \makebox
+ command, except that it puts a frame around the outside of the
+ box that it creates.
+
+ The framebox command produces a rule of thickness \fboxrule,
+ and leaves a space \fboxsep between the rule and the contents
+ of the box.
+
+\line(x slope,y slope){length}
+
+ The \line command draws a line of the specified length and
+ slope.
+
+ Note that LaTeX can only draw lines with slope = x/y, where x
+ and y have integer values from -6 through 6.
+
+\linethickness{dimension}
+
+ Declares the thickness of horizontal and vertical lines in a
+ picture environment to be dimension, which must be a positive
+ length. It does not affect the thickness of slanted lines and
+ circles, or the quarter circles drawn by \oval to form the
+ corners of an oval.
+
+\makebox(width,height)[position]{...}
+
+ The \makebox command for the picture environment is similar to
+ the normal \makebox command except that you must specify a
+ width and height in multiples of \unitlength.
+
+ The optional argument, [position], specifies the quadrant that
+ your text appears in. You may select up to two of the
+ following:
+ * t - Moves the item to the top of the rectangle
+ * b - Moves the item to the bottom
+ * l - Moves the item to the left
+ * r - Moves the item to the right
+
+ See \makebox.
+
+\multiput(x coord,y coord)(delta x,delta y){number of copies}{object}
+
+ The \multiput command can be used when you are putting the same
+ object in a regular pattern across a picture.
+
+\oval(width,height)[portion]
+
+ The \oval command produces a rectangle with rounded corners.
+ The optional argument, [portion], allows you to select part of
+ the oval.
+ * t - Selects the top portion
+ * b - Selects the bottom portion
+ * r - Selects the right portion
+ * l - Selects the left portion
+
+ Note that the corners of the oval are made with quarter circles
+ with a maximum radius of 20 pt, so large ovals will look more
+ like boxes with rounded corners.
+
+\put(x coord,y coord){ ... }
+
+ The \put command places the item specified by the mandatory
+ argument at the given coordinates.
+
+\shortstack[position]{... \\ ... \\ ...}
+
+ The \shortstack command produces a stack of objects. The valid
+ positions are:
+ * r - Moves the objects to the right of the stack
+ * l - Moves the objects to the left of the stack
+ * c - Moves the objects to the centre of the stack (default)
+
+\vector(x slope,y slope){length}
+
+ The \vector command draws a line with an arrow of the specified
+ length and slope. The x and y values must lie between -4 and
+ +4, inclusive.
+
+quotation
+
+\begin{quotation}
+ text
+\end{quotation}
+
+ The margins of the quotation environment are indented on the
+ left and the right. The text is justified at both margins and
+ there is paragraph indentation. Leaving a blank line between
+ text produces a new paragraph.
+
+quote
+
+\begin{quote}
+ text
+\end{quote}
+
+ The margins of the quote environment are indented on the left
+ and the right. The text is justified at both margins. Leaving a
+ blank line between text produces a new paragraph.
+
+tabbing
+
+\begin{tabbing}
+text \= more text \= still more text \= last text \\
+second row \> \> more \\
+ .
+ .
+ .
+\end{tabbing}
+
+ The tabbing environment provides a way to align text in
+ columns. It works by setting tab stops and tabbing to them much
+ the way you do with an ordinary typewriter.
+
+ It is best suited for cases where the width of each column is
+ constant and known in advance.
+
+ This environment can be broken across pages, unlike the tabular
+ environment.
+
+ The following commands can be used inside a tabbing
+ environment:
+
+ Table 1.4. Commands in a tabbing environment
+ \= Sets a tab stop at the current position.
+ \> Advances to the next tab stop.
+ \< This command allows you to put something to the left of the
+ local margin without changing the margin. Can only be used at
+ the start of the line.
+ \+ Moves the left margin of the next and all the following
+ commands one tab stop to the right.
+ \- Moves the left margin of the next and all the following
+ commands one tab stop to the left.
+ \' Moves everything that you have typed so far in the current
+ column, i.e. everything from the most recent \>, \<, \', \\, or
+ \kill command, to the right of the previous column, flush
+ against the current column's tab stop.
+ \` Allows you to put text flush right against any tab stop,
+ including tab stop 0. However, it can't move text to the right
+ of the last column because there's no tab stop there. The \`
+ command moves all the text that follows it, up to the \\ or
+ \end{tabbing} command that ends the line, to the right margin
+ of the tabbing environment. There must be no \> or \' command
+ between the \` and the command that ends the line.
+ \kill Sets tab stops without producing text. Works just like \\
+ except that it throws away the current line instead of
+ producing output for it. The effect of any \=, \+ or \-
+ commands in that line remain in effect.
+ \pushtabs Saves all current tab stop positions. Useful for
+ temporarily changing tab stop positions in the middle of a
+ tabbing environment.
+ \poptabs Restores the tab stop positions saved by the last
+ \pushtabs.
+ \a In a tabbing environment, the commands \=, \' and \` do not
+ produce accents as normal. Instead, the commands \a=, \a' and
+ \a` are used.
+
+ This example typesets a Pascal function in a traditional
+ format:
+\begin{tabbing}
+function \= fact(n : integer) : integer;\\
+ \> begin \= \+ \\
+ \> if \= n $>$ 1 then \+ \\
+ fact := n * fact(n-1) \- \\
+ else \+ \\
+ fact := 1; \-\- \\
+ end;\\
+\end{tabbing}
+
+table
+
+\begin{table}[placement]
+
+ body of the table
+
+\caption{table title}
+\end{table}
+
+ Tables are objects that are not part of the normal text, and
+ are usually floated to a convenient place, like the top of a
+ page. Tables will not be split between two pages.
+
+ The optional argument [placement] determines where LaTeX will
+ try to place your table. There are four places where LaTeX can
+ possibly put a float:
+ * h : Here - at the position in the text where the table
+ environment appears.
+ * t : Top - at the top of a text page.
+ * b : Bottom - at the bottom of a text page.
+ * p : Page of floats - on a separate float page, which is a
+ page containing no text, only floats.
+
+ The standard report and article classes use the default
+ placement [tbp].
+
+ The body of the table is made up of whatever text, LaTeX
+ commands, etc., you wish. The \caption command allows you to
+ title your table.
+
+tabular
+
+\begin{tabular}[pos]{cols}
+column 1 entry & column 2 entry ... & column n entry \\
+ .
+ .
+ .
+\end{tabular}
+
+ or
+\begin{tabular*}{width}[pos]{cols}
+column 1 entry & column 2 entry ... & column n entry \\
+ .
+ .
+ .
+\end{tabular*}
+
+ These environments produce a box consisting of a sequence of
+ rows of items, aligned vertically in columns. The mandatory and
+ optional arguments consist of:
+
+ Table 1.5. Commands used inside a tabular environment
+ width Specifies the width of the tabular* environment. There
+ must be rubber space between columns that can stretch to fill
+ out the specified width.
+ pos Specifies the vertical position; default is alignment on
+ the centre of the environment.
+ * t - align on top row
+ * b - align on bottom row
+
+ cols Specifies the column formatting. It consists of a sequence
+ of the following specifiers, corresponding to the sequence of
+ columns and intercolumn material.
+ * l - A column of left-aligned items.
+ * r - A column of right-aligned items.
+ * c - A column of centred items.
+ * | - A vertical line the full height and depth of the
+ environment.
+ * @{text} - This inserts text in every row. An @-expression
+ suppresses the intercolumn space normally inserted between
+ columns; any desired space between the inserted text and
+ the adjacent items must be included in text. An
+ \extracolsep{wd} command in an @-expression causes an extra
+ space of width wd to appear to the left of all subsequent
+ columns, until countermanded by another \extracolsep
+ command. Unlike ordinary intercolumn space, this extra
+ space is not suppressed by an @-expression. An \extracolsep
+ command can be used only in an @-expression in the cols
+ argument.
+ * p{wd} - Produces a column with each item typeset in a
+ parbox of width wd, as if it were the argument of a
+ \parbox[t]{wd} command. However, a \\ may not appear in the
+ item, except in the following situations:
+ 1. inside an environment like minipage, array, or
+ tabular.
+ 2. inside an explicit \parbox.
+ 3. in the scope of a \centering, \raggedright, or
+ \raggedleft declaration. The latter declarations must
+ appear inside braces or an environment when used in a
+ p-column element.
+ * *{num}{cols} - Equivalent to num copies of cols, where num
+ is any positive integer and cols is any list of
+ column-specifiers, which may contain another *-expression.
+
+ These commands can be used inside a tabular environment:
+
+\cline{i-j}
+
+ The \cline command draws horizontal lines across the columns
+ specified, beginning in column i and ending in column j, which
+ are identified in the mandatory argument.
+
+\hline
+
+ The \hline command will draw a horizontal line the width of the
+ table. It's most commonly used to draw a line at the top,
+ bottom, and between the rows of the table.
+
+\multicolumn
+
+ \multicolumn{cols}{pos}{text}
+
+ The \multicolumn is used to make an entry that spans several
+ columns. The first mandatory argument, cols, specifies the
+ number of columns to span. The second mandatory argument, pos,
+ specifies the formatting of the entry; c for centred, l for
+ flushleft, r for flushright. The third mandatory argument,
+ text, specifies what text is to make up the entry.
+
+\vline
+
+ The \vline command will draw a vertical line extending the full
+ height and depth of its row. An \hfill command can be used to
+ move the line to the edge of the column. It can also be used in
+ an @-expression.
+
+thebibliography
+
+\begin{thebibliography}{widest-label}
+\bibitem[label]{cite_key}
+ .
+ .
+ .
+\end{thebibliography}
+
+ The thebibliography environment produces a bibliography or
+ reference list. In the article class, this reference list is
+ labelled References; in the report class, it is labelled
+ Bibliography.
+ * widest-label: Text that, when printed, is approximately as
+ wide as the widest item label produces by the \bibitem
+ commands.
+
+\bibitem[label]{cite_key}
+
+ The \bibitem command generates an entry labelled by label. If
+ the label argument is missing, a number is generated as the
+ label, using the enumi counter. The cite_key is any sequence of
+ letters, numbers, and punctuation symbols not containing a
+ comma. This command writes an entry on the .aux file containing
+ cite_key and the item's label. When this .aux file is read by
+ the \begin{document} command, the item's label is associated
+ with cite_key, causing the reference to cite_key by a \cite
+ command to produce the associated label.
+
+\cite[text]{key_list}
+
+ The key_list argument is a list of citation keys. This command
+ generates an in-text citation to the references associated with
+ the keys in key_list by entries on the .aux file read by the
+ \begin{document} command.
+
+ The optional text argument will appear after the citation, i.e.
+ \cite[p.~2f.]{knuth} might produce `[Knuth, p. 2]'.
+
+ The package cite.sty allows a line break in the \cite reference
+ and can sort numerical entries.
+
+ overcite.sty makes citations like footnotes.
+
+\nocite{key_list}
+
+ The \nocite command produces no text, but writes key_list,
+ which is a list of one or more citation keys, on the .aux file.
+ \nocite{*} uses all entries from the BibTeX database.
+
+Using BibTeX
+
+ If you use the BibTeX program by Oren Patashnik (highly
+ recommended if you need a bibliography of more than a couple of
+ titles) to maintain your bibliography, you don't use the
+ thebibliography environment. Instead, you include the lines
+\bibliographystyle{style}
+\bibliography{bibfile}
+
+ where style refers to a file style.bst, which defines how your
+ citations will look.
+
+ Table 1.6. Standard styles distributed with BibTeX
+ alpha Sorted alphabetically. Labels are formed from name of
+ author and year of publication.
+ plain Sorted alphabetically. Labels are numeric.
+ unsrt Like plain, but entries are in order of citation.
+ abbrv Like plain, but more compact labels.
+
+ In addition, numerous other BibTeX style files exist tailored
+ to the demands of various publications.
+
+ The argument to \bibliography refers to the file bibfile.bib,
+ which should contain your database in BibTeX format. Only the
+ entries referred to via \cite and \nocite will be listed in the
+ bibliography.
+
+theorem
+
+\begin{theorem}
+ theorem text
+\end{theorem}
+
+ The theorem environment produces Theorem x in boldface followed
+ by your theorem text.
+
+titlepage
+
+\begin{titlepage}
+ text
+\end{titlepage}
+
+ The titlepage environment creates a title page, i.e. a page
+ with no printed page number or heading. It also causes the
+ following page to be numbered page one. Formatting the title
+ page is left to you. The \today command comes in handy for
+ title pages.
+
+ Note that you can use the \maketitle (see \maketitle) command
+ to produce a standard title page.
+
+verbatim
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+ text
+\end{verbatim}
+
+ The verbatim environment is a paragraph-making environment that
+ gets LaTeX to print exactly what you type in. It turns LaTeX
+ into a typewriter with carriage returns and blanks having the
+ same effect that they would on a typewriter.
+
+\verb char literal_text char \verb*char literal_text char
+
+ Typesets literal_text exactly as typed, including special
+ characters and spaces, using a typewriter (\tt) type style.
+ There may be no space between \verb or \verb* and char (space
+ is shown here only for clarity). The *-form differs only in
+ that spaces are printed
+
+verse
+
+\begin{verse}
+ text
+\end{verse}
+
+ The verse environment is designed for poetry, though you may
+ find other uses for it.
+
+ The margins are indented on the left and the right. Separate
+ the lines of each stanza with \\, and use one or more blank
+ lines to separate the stanzas.
+
+2.3.7 Footnotes
+
+ Footnotes can be produced in one of two ways. They can be
+ produced with one command, the \footnote command. They can also
+ be produced with two commands, the \footnotemark and the
+ \footnotetext commands. See the specific command for
+ information on why you would use one over the other.
+
+\footnote[number]{text}
+
+ The \footnote command places the numbered footnote text at the
+ bottom of the current page. The optional argument, number, is
+ used to change the default footnote number. This command can
+ only be used in outer paragraph mode; i.e., you cannot use it
+ in sectioning commands like \chapter, in figures, tables or in
+ a tabular environment.
+
+\footnotemark
+
+ The \footnotemark command puts the footnote number in the text.
+ This command can be used in inner paragraph mode. The text of
+ the footnote is supplied by the \footnotetext command.
+
+ This command can be used to produce several consecutive
+ footnote markers referring to the same footnote by using
+
+ \footnotemark[\value{footnote}]
+
+ after the first \footnote command.
+
+\footnotetext[number]{text}
+
+ The \footnotetext command produces the text to be placed at the
+ bottom of the page. This command can come anywhere after the
+ \footnotemark command. The \footnotetext command must appear in
+ outer paragraph mode.
+
+ The optional argument, number, is used to change the default
+ footnote number.
+
+2.3.8 Lengths
+
+ A length is a measure of distance. Many LaTeX commands take a
+ length as an argument.
+
+\newlength
+
+ \newlength{\gnat}
+
+ The \newlength command defines the mandatory argument, \gnat,
+ as a length command with a value of 0in. An error occurs if a
+ \gnat command already exists.
+
+\setlength
+
+ \setlength{\gnat}{length}
+
+ The \setlength command is used to set the value of a length
+ command. The length argument can be expressed in any terms of
+ length LaTeX understands, i.e., inches (in), millimetres (mm),
+ points (pt), etc.
+
+\addtolength
+
+ \addtolength{\gnat}{length}
+
+ The \addtolength command increments length command by the
+ amount specified in the length argument. It can be a negative
+ amount.
+
+\settodepth
+
+ \settodepth{\gnat}{text}
+
+ The \settodepth command sets the value of a length command
+ equal to the depth of the text argument.
+
+\settoheight
+
+ \settoheight{\gnat}{text}
+
+ The \settoheight command sets the value of a length command
+ equal to the height of the text argument.
+
+\settowidth
+
+ \settowidth{\gnat}{text}
+
+ The \settowidth command sets the value of a length command
+ equal to the width of the text argument.
+
+Predefined lengths
+
+ \width
+
+ \height
+
+ \depth
+
+ \totalheight
+
+ These length parameters can be used in the arguments of the
+ box-making commands See Spaces & Boxes. They specify the
+ natural width etc. of the text in the box. \totalheight equals
+ \height + \depth. To make a box with the text stretched to
+ double the natural size, e.g., say
+
+ \makebox[2\width]{Get a stretcher}
+
+2.3.9 Letters
+
+ You can use LaTeX to typeset letters, both personal and
+ business. The letter document class is designed to make a
+ number of letters at once, although you can make just one if
+ you so desire.
+
+ Your .tex source file has the same minimum commands as the
+ other document classes, i.e., you must have the following
+ commands as a minimum:
+\documentclass{letter}
+\begin{document}
+ ... letters ...
+\end{document}
+
+ Each letter is a letter environment, whose argument is the name
+ and address of the recipient. For example, you might have:
+\begin{letter}{Mr. Joe Smith\\ 2345 Princess St.\\ Edinburgh, EH1 1AA}
+ ...
+\end{letter}
+
+ The letter itself begins with the \opening command. The text of
+ the letter follows. It is typed as ordinary LaTeX input.
+ Commands that make no sense in a letter, like \chapter, do not
+ work. The letter closes with a \closing command.
+
+ After the closing, you can have additional material. The \cc
+ command produces the usual cc: .... There's also a similar
+ \encl command for a list of enclosures. With both these
+ commands, use \\ to separate the items.
+
+ These commands are used with the letter class:
+
+\address
+
+ \address{Return address}
+
+ The return address, as it should appear on the letter and the
+ envelope. Separate lines of the address should be separated by
+ \\ commands. If you do not make an \address declaration, then
+ the letter will be formatted for copying onto your
+ organisation's standard letterhead. (See Overview, for details
+ on your local implementation). If you give an \address
+ declaration, then the letter will be formatted as a personal
+ letter.
+
+\cc
+
+ \cc{Kate Schechter\\Rob McKenna}
+
+ Generate a list of other persons the letter was sent to. Each
+ name is printed on a separate line.
+
+\closing
+
+ \closing{text}
+
+ The letter closes with a \closing command, i.e.,
+\closing{Best Regards,}
+
+\encl
+
+ \encl{CV\\Certificates}
+
+ Generate a list of enclosed material.
+
+\location
+
+ \location{address}
+
+ This modifies your organisation's standard address. This only
+ appears if the firstpage pagestyle is selected.
+
+\makelabels
+
+ \makelabels{number}
+
+ If you issue this command in the preamble, LaTeX will create a
+ sheet of address labels. This sheet will be output before the
+ letters.
+
+\name
+
+ \name{June Davenport}
+
+ Your name, used for printing on the envelope together with the
+ return address.
+
+\opening
+
+ \opening{text}
+
+ The letter begins with the \opening command. The mandatory
+ argument, text, is whatever text you wish to start your letter,
+ i.e.,
+\opening{Dear Joe,}
+
+\ps
+
+ \ps
+
+ Use this command before a postscript.
+
+\signature
+
+ \signature{Harvey Swick}
+
+ Your name, as it should appear at the end of the letter
+ underneath the space for your signature. Items that should go
+ on separate lines should be separated by \\ commands.
+
+\startbreaks
+
+ \startbreaks
+
+ Used after a \stopbreaks command to allow page breaks again.
+
+\stopbreaks
+
+ \stopbreaks
+
+ Inhibit page breaks until a \startbreaks command occurs.
+
+\telephone
+
+ \telephone{number}
+
+ This is your telephone number. This only appears if the
+ firstpage pagestyle is selected.
+
+2.3.10 Line & Page Breaking
+
+ The first thing LaTeX does when processing ordinary text is to
+ translate your input file into a string of glyphs and spaces.
+ To produce a printed document, this string must be broken into
+ lines, and these lines must be broken into pages. In some
+ environments, you do the line breaking yourself with the \\
+ command, but LaTeX usually does it for you.
+
+\\
+
+ \\[extra-space], \\*[extra-space]
+
+ The \\ command tells LaTeX to start a new line. It has an
+ optional argument, extra-space, that specifies how much extra
+ vertical space is to be inserted before the next line. This can
+ be a negative amount.
+
+ The \\* command is the same as the ordinary \\ command except
+ that it tells LaTeX not to start a new page after the line.
+
+\-
+
+ The \- command tells LaTeX that it may hyphenate the word at
+ that point. LaTeX is very good at hyphenating, and it will
+ usually find all correct hyphenation points. The \- command is
+ used for the exceptional cases.
+
+ Note that when you insert \- commands in a word, the word will
+ only be hyphenated at those points and not at any of the
+ hyphenation points that LaTeX might otherwise have chosen.
+
+\cleardoublepage
+
+ The \cleardoublepage command ends the current page and causes
+ all figures and tables that have so far appeared in the input
+ to be printed. In a two-sided printing style, it also makes the
+ next page a right-hand (odd-numbered) page, producing a blank
+ page if necessary.
+
+\clearpage
+
+ The \clearpage command ends the current page and causes all
+ figures and tables that have so far appeared in the input to be
+ printed.
+
+\enlargethispage
+
+ \enlargethispage{size}
+
+ \enlargethispage*{size}
+
+ Enlarge the \textheight for the current page by the specified
+ amount; e.g. \enlargethispage{\baselineskip} will allow one
+ additional line.
+
+ The starred form tries to squeeze the material together on the
+ page as much as possible. This is normally used together with
+ an explicit \pagebreak.
+
+\samepage
+
+ \samepage
+
+ The object in the argument {} should be on the current page.
+
+\fussy
+
+ \fussy
+
+ This declaration (which is the default) makes TeX more fussy
+ about line breaking. This can avoids too much space between
+ words, but may produce overfull boxes.
+
+ This command cancels the effect of a previous \sloppy command.
+ \sloppy
+
+\hyphenation
+
+ \hyphenation{words}
+
+ The \hyphenation command declares allowed hyphenation points,
+ where words is a list of words, separated by spaces, in which
+ each hyphenation point is indicated by a - character.
+
+\linebreak
+
+ \linebreak[number]
+
+ The \linebreak command tells LaTeX to break the current line at
+ the point of the command. With the optional argument, number,
+ you can convert the \linebreak command from a demand to a
+ request. The number must be a number from 0 to 4. The higher
+ the number, the more insistent the request is.
+
+ The \linebreak command causes LaTeX to stretch the line so it
+ extends to the right margin.
+
+\newline
+
+ The \newline command breaks the line right where it is. It can
+ only be used in paragraph mode.
+
+\newpage
+
+ The \newpage command ends the current page. In contrast to
+ \pagebreak it can produce a partly empty page, even when
+ \flushbottom is active.
+
+\nolinebreak
+
+ \nolinebreak[number]
+
+ The \nolinebreak command prevents LaTeX from breaking the
+ current line at the point of the command. With the optional
+ argument, number, you can convert the \nolinebreak command from
+ a demand to a request. The number must be a number from 0 to 4.
+ The higher the number, the more insistent the request is.
+
+\nopagebreak
+
+ \nopagebreak[number]
+
+ The \nopagebreak command prevents LaTeX from breaking the
+ current page at the point of the command. With the optional
+ argument, number, you can convert the \nopagebreak command from
+ a demand to a request. The number must be a number from 0 to 4.
+ The higher the number, the more insistent the request is.
+
+\pagebreak
+
+ \pagebreak[number]
+
+ The \pagebreak command tells LaTeX to break the current page at
+ the point of the command. With the optional argument, number,
+ you can convert the \pagebreak command from a demand to a
+ request. The number must be a number from 0 to 4. The higher
+ the number, the more insistent the request is.
+
+\sloppy
+
+ \sloppy
+
+ This declaration makes TeX less fussy about line breaking. This
+ can prevent overfull boxes, but may leave too much space
+ between words.
+
+ Lasts until a \fussy command is issued. \fussy.
+
+2.3.11 Making Paragraphs
+
+ A paragraph is ended by one or more completely blank lines ---
+ lines not containing even a %. A blank line should not appear
+ where a new paragraph cannot be started, such as in math mode
+ or in the argument of a sectioning command.
+
+\indent
+
+ \indent
+
+ This produces a horizontal space whose width equals the width
+ of the paragraph indentation. It is used to add paragraph
+ indentation where it would otherwise be suppressed.
+
+\noindent
+
+ \noindent
+
+ When used at the beginning of the paragraph, it suppresses the
+ paragraph indentation. It has no effect when used in the middle
+ of a paragraph.
+
+\par
+
+ Equivalent to a blank line; often used to make command or
+ environment definitions easier to read.
+
+2.3.12 Margin Notes
+
+ The command \marginpar[left]{right} creates a note in the
+ margin. The first line will be at the same height as the line
+ in the text where the \marginpar occurs.
+
+ When you only specify the mandatory argument right, the text
+ will be placed
+ * in the right margin for one-sided layout
+ * in the outside margin for two-sided layout
+ * in the nearest margin for two-column layout.
+
+ By issuing the command \reversemarginpar, you can force the
+ marginal notes to go into the opposite (inside) margin.
+
+ When you specify both arguments, left is used for the left
+ margin, and right is used for the right margin.
+
+ The first word will normally not be hyphenated; you can enable
+ hyphenation by prefixing the first word with a \hspace{0pt}
+ command.
+
+2.3.13 Math Formulae
+
+ Table 1.7. Three environments that put LaTeX in math mode
+ math For Formulae that appear right in the text.
+ displaymath For Formulae that appear on their own line.
+ equation The same as the displaymath environment except that it
+ adds an equation number in the right margin.
+
+ The math environment can be used in both paragraph and LR mode,
+ but the displaymath and equation environments can be used only
+ in paragraph mode. The math and displaymath environments are
+ used so often that they have the following short forms:
+\(...\) instead of \begin{math}...\end{math}
+
+\[...\] instead of \begin{displaymath}...\end{displaymath}
+
+ In fact, the math environment is so common that it has an even
+ shorter form:
+$ ... $ instead of \(...\)
+
+Subscripts & Superscripts
+
+ To get an expression exp to appear as a subscript, you just
+ type _{exp} . To get exp to appear as a superscript, you type
+ ^{exp }. LaTeX handles superscripted superscripts and all of
+ that stuff in the natural way. It even does the right thing
+ when something has both a subscript and a superscript.
+
+Math Symbols
+
+Spacing in Math Mode
+
+ In a math environment, LaTeX ignores the spaces you type and
+ puts in the spacing that it thinks is best. LaTeX formats
+ mathematics the way it's done in mathematics texts. If you want
+ different spacing, LaTeX provides the following four commands
+ for use in math mode:
+ 1. \; - a thick space
+ 2. \: - a medium space
+ 3. \, - a thin space
+ 4. \! - a negative thin space
+
+Math Miscellany
+
+ Table 1.8. Math Miscellany
+ \cdots Produces a horizontal ellipsis where the dots are raised
+ to the centre of the line.
+ \ddots Produces a diagonal ellipsis.
+ \frac{num}{den} Produces the fraction num divided by den.
+ \ldots Produces an ellipsis. This command works in any mode,
+ not just math mode.
+ \overbrace{text} Generates a brace over text.
+ \overline{text} Causes the argument text to be overlined.
+ \sqrt[root]{arg} Produces the square root of its argument. The
+ optional argument, root, determines what root to produce, i.e.,
+ the cube root of x+y would be typed as $\sqrt[3]{x+y}$.
+ \underbrace{text} Generates text with a brace underneath.
+ \underline{text} Causes the argument text to be underlined.
+ This command can also be used in paragraph and LR modes.
+ \vdots Produces a vertical ellipsis.
+ \ensuremath{} It's argument is set in math mode. This is needed
+ for own definitions.
+
+2.3.14 Modes
+
+ When LaTeX is processing your input text, it is always in one
+ of three modes:
+ * paragraph mode
+ * Math mode
+ * Left-to-right mode, called LR mode for short
+
+ LaTeX changes mode only when it goes up or down a staircase to
+ a different level, though not all level changes produce mode
+ changes. Mode changes occur only when entering or leaving an
+ environment, or when LaTeX is processing the argument of
+ certain text-producing commands.
+
+ Paragraph mode is the most common; it's the one LaTeX is in
+ when processing ordinary text. In that mode, LaTeX breaks your
+ text into lines and breaks the lines into pages. LaTeX is in
+ math mode when it's generating a mathematical formula. In LR
+ mode, as in paragraph mode, LaTeX considers the output that it
+ produces to be a string of words with spaces between them.
+ However, unlike paragraph mode, LaTeX keeps going from left to
+ right; it never starts a new line in LR mode. Even if you put a
+ hundred words into an \mbox, LaTeX would keep typesetting them
+ from left to right inside a single box, and then complain
+ because the resulting box was too wide to fit on the line.
+
+ LaTeX is in LR mode when it starts making a box with an \mbox
+ command. You can get it to enter a different mode inside the
+ box - for example, you can make it enter math mode to put a
+ formula in the box. There are also several text-producing
+ commands and environments for making a box that put LaTeX in
+ paragraph mode. The box make by one of these commands or
+ environments will be called a parbox. When LaTeX is in
+ paragraph mode while making a box, it is said to be in inner
+ paragraph mode. Its normal paragraph mode, which it starts out
+ in, is called outer paragraph mode.
+
+2.3.15 Page Styles
+
+ The \documentclass command determines the size and position of
+ the page's head and foot. The page style determines what goes
+ in them.
+
+\maketitle
+
+ \maketitle
+
+ The \maketitle command generates a title on a separate title
+ page. In the article class, \maketitle will also switch to
+ pagestyle plain. See Page Styles for commands to change page
+ numbering.
+
+ Information used to produce the title is obtained from the
+ following declarations:
+
+ See Page Styles for the commands to give the information.
+
+\author
+
+ \author{names}
+
+ The \author command declares the author(s), where names is a
+ list of authors separated by \and commands. Use \\ to separate
+ lines within a single author's entry -- for example, to give
+ the author's institution or address.
+
+\date
+
+ \date{text}
+
+ The \date command declares text to be the document's date. With
+ no \date command, the current date is used.
+
+\thanks
+
+ \thanks{text}
+
+ The \thanks command produces a \footnote to the title.
+
+\title
+
+ \title{text}
+
+ The \title command declares text to be the title. Use \\ to
+ tell LaTeX where to start a new line in a long title.
+
+\pagenumbering
+
+ \pagenumbering{num_style}
+
+ Specifies the style of page numbers. Possible values of
+ num_style are:
+ * arabic - Arabic numerals
+ * roman - Lowercase Roman numerals
+ * Roman - Uppercase Roman numerals
+ * alph - Lowercase letters
+ * Alph - Uppercase letters
+
+\pagestyle
+
+ \pagestyle{option}
+
+ The \pagestyle command changes the style from the current page
+ on throughout the remainder of your document.
+
+ The valid options are:
+ * plain - Just a plain page number.
+ * empty - Produces empty heads and feet - no page numbers.
+ * headings - Puts running headings on each page. The document
+ style specifies what goes in the headings.
+ * myheadings - You specify what is to go in the heading with
+ the \markboth or the \markright commands.
+
+\markboth
+
+\markboth{left head}{right head}
+
+ The \markboth command is used in conjunction with the page
+ style myheadings for setting both the left and the right
+ heading. You should note that a left-hand heading is generated
+ by the last \markboth command before the end of the page, while
+ a right-hand heading is generated by the first \markboth or
+ \markright that comes on the page if there is one, otherwise by
+ the last one before the page.
+
+\markright
+
+\markright{right head}
+
+ The \markright command is used in conjunction with the page
+ style myheadings for setting the right heading, leaving the
+ left heading unchanged. You should note that a left-hand
+ heading is generated by the last \markboth command before the
+ end of the page, while a right-hand heading is generated by the
+ first \markboth or \markright that comes on the page if there
+ is one, otherwise by the last one before the page.
+
+\thispagestyle
+
+ \thispagestyle{option}
+
+ The \thispagestyle command works in the same manner as the
+ \pagestyle command except that it changes the style for the
+ current page only.
+
+2.3.16 Sectioning
+
+ Sectioning commands provide the means to structure your text
+ into units.
+ * \part
+ * \chapter (report and book class only)
+ * \section
+ * \subsection
+ * \subsubsection
+ * \paragraph
+ * \subparagraph
+
+ All sectioning commands take the same general form, i.e.,
+
+ \chapter[optional]{title}
+
+ In addition to providing the heading in the text, the mandatory
+ argument of the sectioning command can appear in two other
+ places:
+ 1. The table of contents
+ 2. The running head at the top of the page
+
+ You may not want the same thing to appear in these other two
+ places as appears in the text heading. To handle this
+ situation, the sectioning commands have an optional argument
+ that provides the text for these other two purposes.
+
+ All sectioning commands have *-forms that print a title, but do
+ not include a number and do not make an entry in the table of
+ contents.
+
+ \appendix
+
+ The \appendix command changes the way sectional units are
+ numbered. The \appendix command generates no text and does not
+ affect the numbering of parts. The normal use of this command
+ is something like
+\chapter{The First Chapter}
+ ...
+\appendix
+\chapter{The First Appendix}
+
+2.3.17 Spaces & Boxes
+
+ All the predefined length parameters See Predefined lengths can
+ be used in the arguments of the box-making commands.
+
+\dotfill
+
+ The \dotfill command produces a rubber length that produces
+ dots instead of just spaces.
+
+\hfill
+
+ The \hfill fill command produces a rubber length which can
+ stretch or shrink horizontally. It will be filled with spaces.
+
+\hrulefill
+
+ The \hrulefill fill command produces a rubber length which can
+ stretch or shrink horizontally. It will be filled with a
+ horizontal rule.
+
+\hspace
+
+ \hspace{length}, \hspace*{length}
+
+ The \hspace command adds horizontal space. The length of the
+ space can be expressed in any terms that LaTeX understands,
+ i.e., points, inches, etc. You can add negative as well as
+ positive space with an \hspace command. Adding negative space
+ is like backspacing.
+
+ LaTeX removes horizontal space that comes at the end of a line.
+ If you don't want LaTeX to remove this space, include the
+ optional * argument. Then the space is never removed.
+
+\addvspace
+
+ \addvspace{length}
+
+ The \addvspace command normally adds a vertical space of height
+ length. However, if vertical space has already been added to
+ the same point in the output by a previous \addvspace command,
+ then this command will not add more space than needed to make
+ the natural length of the total vertical space equal to length.
+
+\bigskip
+
+ The \bigskip command is equivalent to \vspace{bigskipamount}
+ where bigskipamount is determined by the document class.
+
+\medskip
+
+ The \medskip command is equivalent to \vspace{medskipamount}
+ where medskipamount is determined by the document class.
+
+\smallskip
+
+ \smallskip
+
+ The \smallskip command is equivalent to
+ \vspace{smallskipamount} where smallskipamount is determined by
+ the document class.
+
+\vfill
+
+ The \vfill fill command produces a rubber length which can
+ stretch or shrink vertically.
+
+\vspace
+
+ \vspace{length}, \vspace*{length}
+
+ The \vspace command adds vertical space. The length of the
+ space can be expressed in any terms that LaTeX understands,
+ i.e., points, inches, etc. You can add negative as well as
+ positive space with an \vspace command.
+
+ LaTeX removes vertical space that comes at the end of a page.
+ If you don't want LaTeX to remove this space, include the
+ optional * argument. Then the space is never removed.
+
+\fbox
+
+ \fbox{text}
+
+ The \fbox command is exactly the same as the \mbox command,
+ except that it puts a frame around the outside of the box that
+ it creates.
+
+\framebox
+
+ \framebox[width][position]{text}
+
+ The \framebox command is exactly the same as the \makebox
+ command, except that it puts a frame around the outside of the
+ box that it creates.
+
+ The framebox command produces a rule of thickness \fboxrule,
+ and leaves a space \fboxsep between the rule and the contents
+ of the box.
+
+lrbox
+
+ \begin{lrbox}{cmd} text \end{lrbox}
+
+ This is the environment form of \sbox.
+
+ The text inside the environment is saved in the box cmd, which
+ must have been declared with \newsavebox.
+
+\makebox
+
+ \makebox[width][position]{text}
+
+ The \makebox command creates a box just wide enough to contain
+ the text specified. The width of the box is specified by the
+ optional width argument. The position of the text within the
+ box is determined by the optional position argument.
+ * c --- centred (default)
+ * l --- flushleft
+ * r --- flushright
+ * s --- stretch from left to right margin. The text must
+ contain stretchable space for this to work.
+
+ See \makebox (picture).
+
+\mbox
+
+ \mbox{text}
+
+ The \mbox command creates a box just wide enough to hold the
+ text created by its argument.
+
+ Use this command to prevent text from being split across lines.
+
+\newsavebox
+
+ \newsavebox{cmd}
+
+ Declares cmd, which must be a command name that is not already
+ defined, to be a bin for saving boxes.
+
+\parbox
+
+ \parbox[position][height][inner-pos]{width}{text}
+
+ A parbox is a box whose contents are created in paragraph mode.
+ The \parbox has two mandatory arguments:
+ * width - specifies the width of the parbox, and
+ * text - the text that goes inside the parbox.
+
+ LaTeX will position a parbox so its centre lines up with the
+ centre of the text line. The optional position argument allows
+ you to line up either the top or bottom line in the parbox
+ (default is top).
+
+ If the height argument is not given, the box will have the
+ natural height of the text.
+
+ The inner-pos argument controls the placement of the text
+ inside the box. If it is not specified, position is used.
+ * t --- text is placed at the top of the box.
+ * c --- text is centred in the box.
+ * b --- text is placed at the bottom of the box.
+ * s --- stretch vertically. The text must contain vertically
+ stretchable space for this to work.
+
+ A \parbox command is used for a parbox containing a small piece
+ of text, with nothing fancy inside. In particular, you
+ shouldn't use any of the paragraph-making environments inside a
+ \parbox argument. For larger pieces of text, including ones
+ containing a paragraph-making environment, you should use a
+ minipage environment See minipage.
+
+\raisebox
+
+ \raisebox{distance}[extend-above][extend-below]{text}
+
+ The \raisebox command is used to raise or lower text. The first
+ mandatory argument specifies how high the text is to be raised
+ (or lowered if it is a negative amount). The text itself is
+ processed in LR mode.
+
+ Sometimes it's useful to make LaTeX think something has a
+ different size than it really does - or a different size than
+ LaTeX would normally think it has. The \raisebox command lets
+ you tell LaTeX how tall it is.
+
+ The first optional argument, extend-above, makes LaTeX think
+ that the text extends above the line by the amount specified.
+ The second optional argument, extend-below, makes LaTeX think
+ that the text extends below the line by the amount specified.
+
+\rule
+
+ \rule[raise-height]{width}{thickness}
+
+ The \rule command is used to produce horizontal lines. The
+ arguments are defined as follows:
+ * raise-height - specifies how high to raise the rule
+ (optional)
+ * width - specifies the length of the rule (mandatory)
+ * thickness - specifies the thickness of the rule (mandatory)
+
+\savebox
+
+ \savebox{cmd}[width][pos]{text}
+
+ This command typeset text in a box just as for \makebox.
+ However, instead of printing the resulting box, it saves it in
+ bin cmd, which must have been declared with \newsavebox.
+
+\sbox
+
+ \sbox{cmd}\{text}
+
+ This commands typesets text in a box just as for \mbox.
+ However, instead of printing the resulting box, it saves it in
+ cmd, which must have been declared with \newsavebox.
+
+\usebox
+
+ \usebox{cmd}
+
+ Prints the box most recently saved in bin cmd by a \savebox
+ command.
+
+2.3.18 Special Characters
+
+ The following characters play a special role in LaTeX and are
+ called special printing characters, or simply special
+ characters.
+# $ % & ~ _ ^ \ { }
+
+ Whenever you put one of these special characters into your
+ file, you are doing something special. If you simply want the
+ character to be printed just as any other letter, include a \
+ in front of the character. For example, \$ will produce $ in
+ your output.
+
+ One exception to this rule is the \ itself because \\ has its
+ own special meaning. A \ is produced by typing $\backslash$ in
+ your file.
+
+ Also, \~ means `place a tilde accent over the following
+ letter', so you will probably want to use \verb instead.
+
+ In addition, you can access any character of a font once you
+ know its number by using the \symbol command. For example, the
+ character used for displaying spaces in the \verb* command has
+ the code decimal 32, so it can be typed as \symbol{32}.
+
+ You can also specify octal numbers with ' or hexadecimal
+ numbers with ", so the previous example could also be written
+ as \symbol{'40} or \symbol{"20}.
+
+2.3.19 Special Symbols
+
+Accents on Characters
+
+ The rules differ somewhat depending whether you are in text
+ mode, math modes, or the tabbing environment.
+
+Text Mode
+
+ The following accents may be placed on letters. Although o is
+ used in most of the example, the accents may be placed on any
+ letter. Accents may even be placed above a missing letter; for
+ example, \~{} produces a tilde over a blank space.
+
+ The following commands may be used only in paragraph or LR
+ mode:
+ * \`{o} produces a grave accent, ò
+ * \'{o} produces an acute accent, ó
+ * \^{o} produces a circumflex, ô
+ * \"{o} produces an umlaut or dieresis, ö
+ * \H{o} produces a long Hungarian umlaut
+ * \~{o} produces a tilde, õ
+ * \c{c} produces a cedilla, ç
+ * \={o} produces a macron accent (a bar over the letter)
+ * \b{o} produces a bar under the letter
+ * \.{o} produces a dot over the letter
+ * \d{o} produces a dot under the letter
+ * \u{o} produces a breve over the letter
+ * \v{o} produces a v over the letter
+ * \t{oo} produces a tie (inverted u) over the two letters
+
+ Note that the letters i and j require special treatment when
+ they are given accents because it is often desirable to replace
+ the dot with the accent. For this purpose, the commands \i and
+ \j can be used to produce dotless letters.
+
+ For example,
+ * \^{\i} should be used for i, circumflex, î
+ * \"{\i} should be used for i, umlaut, ï
+
+Math Mode
+
+ Several of the above and some similar accents can also be
+ produced in math mode. The following commands may be used only
+ in math mode:
+ * \hat{o} is similar to the circumflex (cf. \^)
+ * \widehat{oo} is a wide version of \hat over several letters
+ * \check{o} is a vee or check (cf. \v)
+ * \tilde{o} is a tilde (cf. \~)
+ * \widetilde{oo} is a wide version of \tilde over several
+ letters
+ * \acute{o} is an acute accent (cf. \`)
+ * \grave{o} is a grave accent (cf. >\')
+ * \dot{o} is a dot over the letter (cf. \.)
+ * \ddot{o} is a double dot over the letter
+ * \breve{o} is a breve (cf. \u)
+ * \bar{o} is a macron (cf. \=)
+ * \vec{o} is a vector (arrow) over the letter
+
+Tabbing Environment
+
+ Some of the accent marks used in running text have other uses
+ in the Tabbing Environment. In that case they can be created
+ with the following command:
+ * >\a' for an acute accent
+ * \a` for a grave accent
+ * \a= for a macron accent
+
+Arrows
+
+ LaTeX provides commands for all sorts of arrows. The following
+ commands are used only in math mode.
+
+ In general the command names are created from left, right, up,
+ or down. leftright gives a double headed arrow. Prefacing with
+ long gives a longer arrow. Capitalizing the first letter gives
+ a double-shanked arrow.
+
+ Examples are:
+ * \leftarrow
+ * \Leftarrow
+ * \longleftarrow
+ * \Longleftarrow
+ * \rightarrow
+ * \Rightarrow
+ * \longrightarrow
+ * \Longrightarrow
+ * \leftrightarrow
+ * \Leftrightarrow
+ * \longleftrightarrow
+ * \uparrow
+ * \downarrow
+ * \Uparrow
+ * >\nearrow points from southwest to northeast
+ * \searrow points from northwest to southeast
+ * \swarrow points from northeast to southwest
+ * \nwarrow points from southeast to northwest
+
+ The \stackrel command is useful for putting things over or
+ under your arrow.
+
+ See also:
+ * Math Symbols
+ * Binary and Relational Operators
+ * Greek Letters
+ * Miscellaneous Symbols
+ * Variable Size Math Symbols
+
+Binary and Relational Operators
+
+ Some math symbols are obtained by typing the corresponding
+ keyboard character. Examples include
++ - = < >
+
+Note
+
+ plus, minus, and equal sign may be used in either text or math
+ mode, but < and > are math mode only (they produce inverted
+ exclamation and question marks, respectively, in text mode).
+
+ The following commands may be used only in math mode:
+ * \pm plus or minus sign
+ * \mp minus or plus sign
+ * \times times (an "x")
+ * \div divided by sign
+ * \ast an asterisk (centered)
+ * \star a five-point star (centered)
+ * \bullet a bullet
+ * \circ an open bullet
+ * \cdot a centered dot
+ * \leq less than or equal to
+ * \ll much less than
+ * \subset is a subset of
+ * \geq greater than or equal to
+ * \gg much greater than
+ * \equiv equivalence symbol
+ * \sim similar to
+ * \simeq similar or equal to
+ * \approx approximately equal to
+ * \neq not equal to
+ * \per "perpendicular to" symbols
+ * \propto proportional to
+
+ Note that greater than and less than are obtained simply by
+ entering > and <.
+
+ A slash, indicating not can be placed through a symbol (or a
+ letter) with the \not command. For example, not less than is
+ \not< and not less than or equal to is \not\leq. If the slash
+ isn't properly positioned it can be moved by putting a math
+ mode spacing command between the \notand the symbol.
+
+Delimiters
+
+ Delimiters are objects which act logically like parentheses.
+ These can be used only in math mode.
+
+ The delimiters recognized by LaTeX include:
+ * ( (left parenthesis)
+ * ) (right parenthesis)
+ * [ (left bracket)
+ * ] (right bracket)
+ * \{ (left brace)
+ * \} (right brace)
+ * | (vertical line)
+ * \vert (vertical line)
+ * \| (double vertical lines)
+ * \Vert (double vertical lines)
+ * / (slash)
+ * \backslash (backslash)
+ * \langle (left angle bracket)
+ * \rangle (right angle bracket)
+ * \uparrow (uparrow)
+ * \downarrow (down arrow)
+ * \updownarrow (up/down arrow)
+
+Making Delimiters the Right Size
+
+ Delimiters in formulas should be big enough to fit around the
+ formulas they delimit (for example arround arrays). To obtain
+ stretchable delimiters (LaTeX makes them the appropriate size)
+ type a \left or \right command before the delimiter. \left and
+ \right commands must come in matching pairs, although the
+ delimiters themselves need not be the same. Thus, \left \{ ...
+ \right \[ produces a legal pair. In cases where only one
+ delimiter is desired, it is possible to make the matching
+ delimiter invisible by typing a period (.) after the command,
+ i.e., \left. or \right.
+
+ In an eqnarray environment the matching \left and \right cannot
+ be split between lines and it may be necessary to use an
+ invisible \right. and \left. to terminate and begin parts on
+ different lines. In this case a second problem may arise, since
+ the size of the delimiters will be chosen only for the local
+ part, so that the size of the visible left and right delimiters
+ might not match. The solution is to trick LaTeX into thinking
+ that both parts have the same vertical height. This can be done
+ by placing a strut, that is a zero-width \rule. It can also be
+ accomplished with the \vphantom command, which I have not found
+ documented, but which appears to work.
+
+ \vphantom{construct} creates a zero-width object with the
+ height of construct. The argument can contain things such as
+ \frac or the variable size math symbols and should be chosen
+ according to what is in the section with the delimiter you want
+ to match.
+
+Some Examples
+
+A six-j symbol
+
+\[ \left\{
+\begin{array}{ccc}
+a & b & c \\
+d & e & f \end{array}
+\right>\} \]
+
+ This should be displayed something like (insofar as it can be
+ rendered in "ascii art"):
+( a b c )
+- -
+( d e f )
+
+ Note that the \[ ... \] set this off as Display Math, and that
+ the Array Environment is used to generate the three centered
+ columns inside the braces.
+
+A "multiple choice" equation
+
+\[ f(x) =
+ \left\{ \begin{array}{l}
+ 0, x < 0 \\ 1, x = 0 \\
+ 2, x > 0 \end{array} \right. \]
+
+ will be displayed as
+ ( 0, x < 0
+f(x) = - 1, x = 0
+ ( 2, x > 0
+
+ Note that the invisible \right delimiter is specified using a
+ period.
+
+Ellipsis
+
+ Ellipses (three dots) can be produced by the following commands
+ * \ldots horizontally at bottom of line
+ * \cdots horizontally center of line (math mode only)
+ * \ddots diagonal (math mode only)
+ * \vdots vertical (math mode only)
+
+Greek Letters
+
+ These commands may be used only in math mode:
+ * \alpha
+ * \beta
+ * \gamma
+ * \delta
+ * \epsilon
+ * \varepsilon (variation, script-like)
+ * \zeta
+ * \eta
+ * \theta
+ * \vartheta (variation, script-like)
+ * \iota
+ * \kappa
+ * \lambda
+ * \mu
+ * \nu
+ * \xi
+ * \pi
+ * \varpi (variation)
+ * \rho
+ * \varrho (variation, with the tail)
+ * \sigma
+ * \varsigma (variation, script-like)
+ * \tau
+ * \upsilon
+ * \phi
+ * \varphi (variation, script-like)
+ * \chi
+ * \psi
+ * \omega
+
+ Capital letters:
+ * \Gamma
+ * \Delta
+ * \Theta
+ * \Lambda
+ * \Xi
+ * \Pi
+ * \Sigma
+ * \Upsilon
+ * \Phi
+ * \Psi
+ * \Omega
+
+ See also:
+ * Math Symbols
+ * Accents
+ * Miscellaneous Symbols
+
+Miscellaneous Symbols
+
+Some symbols for math
+
+ The following symbols are also used only in math mode
+ * \aleph Hebrew aleph
+ * \hbar h-bar, Planck's constant
+ * \imath variation on i; no dot
+ * \jmath variation on j; no dot
+ * \ell script (loop) l
+ * \wp fancy script lowercase P
+ * \Re script capital R (Real)
+ * \Im script capital I (Imaginary)
+ * \prime prime (also obtained by typing ')
+ * \nabla inverted capital Delta
+ * \surd radical (square root) symbol
+ * \angle angle symbol
+ * \forall for all (inverted A)
+ * \exists exists (left-facing E)
+ * \partial partial derivative symbol
+ * \infty infinity symbol
+ * \triangle open triangle symbol
+ * \Box open square
+ * \Diamond open diamond
+ * \flat music: flat symbol
+ * \natural music: natural symbol
+ * \clubsuit playing cards: club suit symbol
+ * \diamondsuit playing cards: diamond suit symbol
+ * \heartsuit playing cards: heart suit symbol
+ * \spadesuit playing cards: space suit symbol
+
+Some Other Symbols
+
+ The following symbols can be used in any mode:
+ * \dag dagger
+ * >\ddag double dagger
+ * >\S section symbol
+ * >\P paragraph symbol
+ * >\copyright copyright symbol
+ * >\pounds British pound sterling symbol
+
+Calligraphic Style Letters
+
+ Twenty-six calligraphic letters are provided (the upper case
+ alphabet). These can only be used in math mode.
+
+ In LaTeX 2.09 they are produced with the \cal declaration:
+${\cal A}$
+
+ In LaTeX2e they are obtained with the \mathcal command:
+$\mathcal{CAL}$
+
+Math Functions
+
+ Functions like log or cos are normally used in math mode.
+ However, inmath mode strings of letters are treated as a
+ product of variables, which would normally be displayed in math
+ italics rather than a text font which would be appropriate for
+ these functions. To get proper display of such functions they
+ are generated with LaTeX commands.
+
+ Some of these commands are:
+ * \arccos
+ * \arcsin
+ * \arctan
+ * \cos
+ * \cosh
+ * \cot
+ * \coth
+ * \csc
+ * \deg
+ * \det
+ * \dim
+ * \exp
+ * \gcd
+ * \hom
+ * \inf
+ * \ker
+ * \lg
+ * \lim
+ * \liminf
+ * \limsup
+ * \ln
+ * \log
+ * \max
+ * \min
+ * \sec
+ * \sin
+ * \sinh
+ * \sup
+ * \tan
+ * \tanh
+
+ Two commands are provided for the "modulus" function
+ * \bmod
+ * \pmod{}
+
+ The former would be used to write "a mod b" as a \bmod b and
+ the latter, which requires an argument that is displayed in
+ parentheses, would be used to write "n = i (mod j)" as n = i
+ \pmod{j}
+
+Variable Size Math Symbols
+
+ The size of some mathematical symbols, notably summation signs,
+ product signs, and integral signs, depends on the environment
+ in which they appear (i.e., displaymath as opposed to math
+ environments.
+
+ These include:
+ * \sum a summation sign (capital sigma)
+ * \prod a product (capital pi)
+ * \coprod a coproduct (inverted capital pi)
+ * \int an integral sign
+ * \oint a surface (circular) integral sign
+ * \bigcup big "U"
+ * \bigcap big inverted "U"
+ * \bigvee big "V"
+ * \bigwedge big inverted "V"
+ * \bigodot big "O" with dot at center
+ * \bigotimes big "O" with cross inside
+ * \bigoplus big "O" with a + inside
+ * \biguplus big "U" with a + inside
+
+ The \sqrt command also produces a variable size symbol
+ appropriate for the size of hte radicand argument.
+
+ The "limits" associated with these symbols are entered as
+ subscripts for entries appearing below the symbol and as
+ superscripts for entries appearing above the symbol. For
+ example the sum from n=0 to infinity of x^n would be entered as
+\sum_{n=0}^{\infty} x_{n}
+
+ The actual placement of the limits depends on whether this is
+ in displaymath mode in which case they are placed below/above
+ or in math mode in running text in which case they are placed
+ as regular subscripts and superscripts.
+
+ Note that it is possible to treat several of these symbols (a
+ common example would be a double sum) as a single symbol for
+ placing limits above and/or below by using the \mathop command.
+
+ Hats and tildes over symbols which stretch (as best they can)
+ to the correct size for their arguments are produced by
+ \widehat and \widetilde
+
+2.3.20 Splitting the Input
+
+ A large document requires a lot of input. Rather than putting
+ the whole input in a single large file, it's more efficient to
+ split it into several smaller ones. Regardless of how many
+ separate files you use, there is one that is the root file; it
+ is the one whose name you type when you run LaTeX.
+
+\include
+
+ \include{file}
+
+ The \include command is used in conjunction with the
+ \includeonly command for selective inclusion of files. The file
+ argument is the first name of a file, denoting file.tex. If
+ file is one the file names in the file list of the \includeonly
+ command or if there is no \includeonly command, the \include
+ command is equivalent to
+\clearpage \input{file} \clearpage
+
+ except that if the file file.tex does not exist, then a warning
+ message rather than an error is produced. If the file is not in
+ the file list, the \include command is equivalent to
+ \clearpage.
+
+ The \include command may not appear in the preamble or in a
+ file read by another \include command.
+
+\includeonly
+
+ \includeonly{file_list}
+
+ The \includeonly command controls which files will be read in
+ by an \include command. file_list should be a comma-separated
+ list of filenames. Each filename must match exactly a filename
+ specified in a \include command. This command can only appear
+ in the preamble.
+
+\input
+
+ \input{file}
+
+ The \input command causes the indicated file to be read and
+ processed, exactly as if its contents had been inserted in the
+ current file at that point. The file name may be a complete
+ file name with extension or just a first name, in which case
+ the file file.tex is used.
+
+2.3.21 Starting & Ending
+
+ Your input file must contain the following commands as a
+ minimum:
+\documentclass{class}
+\begin{document}
+ ... your text goes here ...
+\end{document}
+
+ where the class selected is one of the valid classes for LaTeX.
+ See Document Classes (and see Overview), for details of the
+ various document classes available locally.
+
+ You may include other LaTeX commands between the \documentclass
+ and the \begin{document} commands (i.e., in the `preamble').
+
+2.3.22 Table of Contents
+
+ A table of contents is produced with the \tableofcontents
+ command. You put the command right where you want the table of
+ contents to go; LaTeX does the rest for you. It produces a
+ heading, but it does not automatically start a new page. If you
+ want a new page after the table of contents, include a \newpage
+ command after the \tableofcontents command.
+
+ There are similar commands \listoffigures and \listoftables for
+ producing a list of figures and a list of tables, respectively.
+ Everything works exactly the same as for the table of contents.
+
+ NOTE: If you want any of these items to be generated, you
+ cannot have the \nofiles command in your document.
+
+\addcontentsline
+
+ \addcontentsline{file}{sec_unit}{entry}
+
+ The \addcontentsline command adds an entry to the specified
+ list or table where:
+ * file is the extension of the file on which information is
+ to be written: toc (table of contents), lof (list of
+ figures), or lot (list of tables).
+ * sec_unit controls the formatting of the entry. It should be
+ one of the following, depending upon the value of the file
+ argument:
+ 1. toc --- the name of the sectional unit, such as part
+ or subsection.
+ 2. lof --- figure
+ 3. lot --- table
+ * entry is the text of the entry.
+
+\addtocontents
+
+ \addtocontents{file}{text}
+
+ The \addtocontents command adds text (or formatting commands)
+ directly to the file that generates the table of contents or
+ list of figures or tables.
+ * file is the extension of the file on which information is
+ to be written: toc (table of contents), lof (list of
+ figures), or lot (list of tables).
+ * text is the information to be written.
+
+2.3.23 Terminal Input/Output
+
+\typein
+
+ \typein[cmd]{msg}
+
+ Prints msg on the terminal and causes LaTeX to stop and wait
+ for you to type a line of input, ending with return. If the cmd
+ argument is missing, the typed input is processed as if it had
+ been included in the input file in place of the \typein
+ command. If the cmd argument is present, it must be a command
+ name. This command name is then defined or redefined to be the
+ typed input.
+
+\typeout
+
+ \typeout{msg}
+
+ Prints msg on the terminal and in the log file. Commands in msg
+ that are defined with \newcommand or \renewcommand are replaced
+ by their definitions before being printed.
+
+ LaTeX's usual rules for treating multiple spaces as a single
+ space and ignoring spaces after a command name apply to msg. A
+ \space command in msg causes a single space to be printed. A
+ ^^J in msg prints a newline.
+
+2.3.24 Typefaces
+
+ The typeface is specified by giving the size and style. A
+ typeface is also called a font.
+
+\Styles
+
+ The following type style commands are supported by LaTeX.
+
+ These commands are used like \textit{italics text}. The
+ corresponding command in parenthesis is the declaration form,
+ which takes no arguments. The scope of the declaration form
+ lasts until the next type style command or the end of the
+ current group.
+
+ The declaration forms are cumulative; i.e., you can say
+ \sffamily\bfseries to get sans serif boldface.
+
+ You can also use the environment form of the declaration forms;
+ e.g. \begin{ttfamily}...\end{ttfamily}.
+
+ Table 1.9. Typefaces
+ \textrm (\rmfamily) Roman.
+ \textit (\itshape) , \emph Emphasis (toggles between \textit
+ and \textrm).
+ \textmd (\mdseries) Medium weight (default). The opposite of
+ boldface.
+ \textbf (\bfseries) Boldface.
+ \textup (\upshape) Upright (default). The opposite of slanted.
+ \textsl (\slshape) Slanted.
+ \textsf (\sffamily) Sans serif.
+ \textsc (\scshape) Small caps.
+ \texttt (\ttfamily) Typewriter.
+ \textnormal (\normalfont) Main document font.
+ \mathrm Roman, for use in math mode.
+ \mathbf Boldface, for use in math mode. For bold symbols or
+ complete equations take a look at \boldsymbol and \bm.
+ \mathsf Sans serif, for use in math mode.
+ \mathtt Typewriter, for use in math mode.
+ \mathit Italics, for use in math mode, e.g. variable names with
+ several letters.
+ \mathnormal For use in math mode, e.g. inside another type
+ style declaration.
+ \mathcal `Calligraphic' letters, for use in math mode.
+
+ In addition, the command \mathversion{bold} can be used for
+ switching to bold letters and symbols in formulas.
+ \mathversion{normal} restores the default.
+
+Sizes
+
+ The following standard type size commands are supported by
+ LaTeX.
+
+ The commands as listed here are "declaration forms". The scope
+ of the declaration form lasts until the next type style command
+ or the end of the current group.
+
+ You can also use the environment form of these commands; e.g.
+ \begin{tiny}...\end{tiny}.
+
+ Table 1.10. Standard type size commands
+ \tiny
+ \scriptsize
+ \footnotesize
+ \small
+ \normalsize (default)
+ \large
+ \Large
+ \LARGE
+ \huge
+ \Huge
+
+Low-level font commands
+
+ These commands are primarily intended for writers of macros and
+ packages. The commands listed here are only a subset of the
+ available ones. For full details, you should consult Chapter 7
+ of The LaTeX Companion.
+
+ Table 1.11. Low-level font commands
+ \fontencoding{enc} Select font encoding. Valid encodings
+ include OT1 and T1.
+ \fontfamily{family} Select font family. Valid families include:
+ * cmr for Computer Modern Roman
+ * cmss for Computer Modern Sans Serif
+ * cmtt for Computer Modern Typewriter
+
+ and numerous others.
+ \fontseries{series} Select font series. Valid series include:
+ * m Medium (normal)
+ * b Bold
+ * c Condensed
+ * bc Bold condensed
+ * bx Bold extended
+
+ and various other combinations.
+ \fontshape{shape} Select font shape. Valid shapes are:
+ * n Upright (normal)
+ * it Italic
+ * sl Slanted (oblique)
+ * sc Small caps
+ * ui Upright italics
+ * ol Outline
+
+ The two last shapes are not available for most font families.
+ \fontsize{size}{skip} Set font size. The first parameter is the
+ font size to switch to; the second is the \baselineskip to use.
+ The unit of both parameters defaults to pt. A rule of thumb is
+ that the baselineskip should be 1.2 times the font size.
+ \selectfont The changes made by calling the four font commands
+ described above do not come into effect until \selectfont is
+ called.
+ \usefont{enc}{family}{series}{shape} Equivalent to calling
+ \fontencoding, \fontfamily, \fontseries and \fontshape with the
+ given parameters, followed by \selectfont.
+
+2.4 Parameters
+
+ The input file specification indicates the file to be
+ formatted; TeX uses .tex as a default file extension. If you
+ omit the input file entirely, TeX accepts input from the
+ terminal. You specify command options by supplying a string as
+ a parameter to the command; e.g.
+
+ latex \scrollmode\input foo.tex
+
+ will process foo.tex without pausing after every error.
+
+ Output files are always created in the current directory. When
+ you fail to specify an input file name, TeX bases the output
+ names on the file specification associated with the logical
+ name TEX_OUTPUT, typically texput.log.
+
+3 LaTeX Packages
+
+3.1 amsmath
+
+ amsmath consists of several packages to aid in typesetting
+ math.
+
+ \boldsymbol
+ Produces a bold math symbol. When not only a single
+ symbol, but a complete equation has to be bold you might
+ consider using the superior \bm command which takes
+ better care of spacing.
+
+ \pmb
+ Can be used for mathematic symbols, when no bold version
+ is available. It prints the standard symbol several
+ times slightly shifted and is inferior to a real bold
+ font!
+
+3.2 dcolumn
+
+ \usepackage{dcolumn}
+
+ Defines a system for defining columns of entries in an array or
+ tabular which are to be aligned on a decimal point.
+
+ This package defines D to be a column specifier with three
+ arguments:
+D{sep.tex}{sep.dvi}{decimal places}
+
+ sep.tex should be a single character, this is used as the
+ separator in the .tex file. It will usually be '.' or ','.
+
+ sep.dvi is used as the separator in the output.
+
+ decimal places should be the maximum number of decimal places
+ in the column.
+
+ \newcolumntype can be used to define own column types.
+
+3.3 float
+
+Note
+
+ The contents of this section was taken from the documentation
+ of float v1.3d of 2001/11/08.
+
+ “This style option improves the interface for defining objects
+ such as figures and tabels in LaTeX. It adds the notion of a
+ float style that governs the appearance of floats.”
+
+ \newfloat{<placement>}{<ext>}[<within>]
+ Add a new class of floats.
+
+ \floatstyle{<style>}
+ Sets a default float style.
+
+ \floatname{<style>}{<name>}
+ Define the float name used in the caption of a float.
+
+ \floatplacement{<>}{<placement>}
+ Resets the default placement specifier of a class of
+ floats.
+
+ \restylefloat<style>
+ Change styles for the standard float types figure and
+ table.
+
+ \listof{<type>}{<title>}
+ Produces a list of all floats of a given class.
+
+3.4 fontenc
+
+ \usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+
+ chooses T1-fonts and allows correct automatic hyphenation.
+
+3.5 german
+
+ Das german Paket muß geladen sein:
+
+ "a
+ erzeugt ein ä
+
+ entsprechend "o, "u, "A, "O, "U, "s (ß)
+
+ "ck
+ wird bei Trennung zu k-k
+
+ "ff
+ wird bei Trennung zu ff-f
+
+ entsprechend "ll, "mm, "pp, "rr, "tt
+
+ \glqq
+ oder "` erzeugt untere doppelte Anführungszeichen
+
+ \grqq
+ oder "' erzeugt obere doppelte Anführungszeichen
+
+ \glq
+ erzeugt untere einfache Anführungszeichen
+
+ \flqq
+ oder "< doppelte linke französische Anführungszeichen
+
+ \frqq
+ oder "> doppelte rechte französische Anführungszeichen
+
+ \flq
+ einfache linke französische Anführungszeichen
+
+ \frq
+ einfache rechte französische Anführungszeichen
+
+ "|
+ verhindert eine Ligatur an der Stelle
+
+ \-
+ markiert mögliche Trennstelle, im restlichen Wort ist
+ keine Trennung mehr möglich
+
+ "-
+ Trennvorschlag, der Rest des Wortes kann noch
+ automatisch getrennt werden
+
+ ""
+ Trennvorschlag, bei dem bei einer Trennung kein
+ Bindestrich eingefügt wird
+
+ "~
+ Bindestrich, an dem nicht getrennt werden darf
+
+ "=
+ Bindestrich, an dem getrennt werden darf
+
+ \dq
+ erzeugt ein nicht-typographisches gerades
+ Anführungszeichen
+
+\texttt{\dq}
+
+ <
+ oder \dq ergibt das Zoll-Zeichen
+
+3.6 graphics
+
+ Look up details in grfguide.
+
+3.6.1 \includegraphics
+
+ \includegraphics[]{picture-name}
+
+ File extensions of the graphics should be omitted, so it's
+ easier to change the format (for example for pdf or ps output).
+
+3.6.2 \graphicspath
+
+ \graphicspath{dir-list}
+
+ dir-list is a list of absolute or relative paths, where the
+ command \includegraphics{} searches for the graphic files:
+
+ \graphicspath{{eps/}{tiff/}} would cause the system to look in
+ the subdirectories eps and tiff of the current directory. This
+ is unix syntax, on a Mac it would be:
+
+ \graphicspath{{:eps:}{:tiff:}}
+
+ Under Windows/DOS use also the slash / to separate directories.
+ Not all tex installations can handle filenames with spaces. So
+ it's better to avoid them.
+
+3.7 hyperref
+
+ For more infos read in the book LaTeX Web Companion or Mit
+ LaTeX ins Web.
+
+3.7.1 Options
+
+ 4
+ use Acrobat 4 features (default: false).
+
+ a4paper, a5paper, b5paper, legalpaper, letterpaper,
+ executivepaper
+ use the specified paper size.
+
+ anchorcolor
+ set color of anchors (default: black).
+
+ backref
+ do bibliographical back references (default: false).
+
+ baseurl
+ set base URL for document (default: empty).
+
+ bookmarks
+ make bookmarks (default: true).
+
+ bookmarksnumbered
+ put section numbers in bookmarks (default: false).
+
+ bookmarksopen
+ open up bookmark tree (default: false).
+
+ bookmarksopenlevel
+ level to which bookmarks are open (default: \maxdimen).
+
+ bookmarkstype
+ to specify which `toc' file to mimic toc.
+
+ breaklinks
+ allow links to break over lines (default: false).
+
+ citebordercolor
+ color of border around cites (default: 0 1 0).
+
+ citecolor
+ color of citation links (default: green).
+
+ colorlinks
+ color links (default: false).
+
+ debug
+ provide details of anchors defined (same as verbose,
+ default: false).
+
+ draft
+ do not do any hyper linking (default: false).
+
+ dvipdf, dvipdfm, dvips, dvipsone, dviwindo, hypertex,
+ latex2html, pdftex, tex4ht, textures, ps2pdf, vtex
+ use the specified backend.
+
+ extension
+ suffix of linked files (default: dvi).
+
+ filebordercolor
+ color of border around file links (default: 0 .5 .5).
+
+ filecolor
+ color of file links (default: cyan).
+
+ frenchlinks
+ use small caps instead of color for links (default:
+ false).
+
+ hyperfigures
+ make figures hyper links (default: false).
+
+ hyperindex
+ set up hyperlinked indices (default: true).
+
+ hypertexnames
+ use guessable names for links (default: true).
+
+ implicit
+ redefine LaTeX internals (default: true).
+
+ linkbordercolor
+ color of border around links (default: 1 0 0).
+
+ linkcolor
+ color of links (default: red).
+
+ linktocpage
+ make page number, not text, be link on TOC, LOF and LOT
+ (default: false).
+
+ menubordercolor
+ color of border around menu links (default: 1 0 0).
+
+ menucolor
+ color for menu links (default: red).
+
+ naturalnames
+ use LaTeX-computed names for links (default: false).
+
+ nesting
+ allow nesting of links (default: false).
+
+ pageanchor
+ put an anchor on every page (default: true).
+
+ pagebackref
+ backreference by page number (default: false).
+
+ pagebordercolor
+ color of border around page links (default: 1 1 0).
+
+ pagecolor
+ color of page links (default: red).
+
+ pdfauthor
+ text for PDF Author field (default: empty).
+
+ pdfborder
+ width of PDF link border (default: 0 0 1; 0 0 0 for
+ colorlinks)
+
+ pdfcenterwindow
+ position the document window center of the screen
+ (default: false).
+
+ pdfcreator
+ text for PDF Creator field (default: LaTeX with hyperref
+ package).
+
+ pdffitwindow
+ resize document window to fit document size (default:
+ false).
+
+ pdfhighlight
+ set highlighting of PDF links (default: /I).
+
+ pdfkeywords
+ text for PDF Keywords field (default: empty).
+
+ pdfmenubar
+ make PDF viewer's menu bar visible (default: true).
+
+ pdfnewwindow
+ make links that open another PDF file start a new window
+ (default: false).
+
+ pdfpagelayout
+ set layout of PDF pages (default: empty).
+
+ pdfpagemode
+ set default mode of PDF display (default: empty).
+
+ pdfpagescrop
+ set crop size of PDF document (default: empty).
+
+ pdfpagetransition
+ set PDF page transition style (default: empty).
+
+ pdfproducer
+ text for PDF Producer field (default: empty).
+
+ pdfstartpage
+ page at which PDF document opens (default: 1).
+
+ pdfstartview
+ starting view of PDF document (default: /Fit).
+
+ pdfsubject
+ text for PDF Subject field (default: empty).
+
+ pdftitle
+ text for PDF Title field(default: empty).
+
+ pdftoolbar
+ make PDF toolbar visible (default: true).
+
+ pdfview
+ PDF `view' when on link traversal (default: empty).
+
+ pdfwindowui
+ make PDF user interface elements visible (default:
+ true).
+
+ plainpages
+ do page number anchors as plain arabic (default: true).
+
+ raiselinks
+ raise up links (for HyperTeX backend; default: false).
+
+ runbordercolor
+ color of border around run links (default: 0 .7 .7).
+
+ unicode
+ Unicode encoded pdf strings (default: true).
+
+ urlbordercolor
+ color of border around URL links (default: 0 1 1).
+
+ urlcolor
+ color of URL links (default: magenta).
+
+ verbose
+ be chatty (default: false).
+
+3.7.2 Commands
+
+ \texorpdfstring{TeX-string}{pdf-string}
+ allows different texts for PDF or TeX creation.
+
+\section{The role of \texorpdfstring{H$_2$O}{water}}
+
+ \href{URL}{Text}
+ the text will be resolved into a URL. The URL must be
+ complete, according to a base-url which might be defined
+ in a \hyperbaseurl.
+
+\href{http://www.karpfenteich.net/pit/}{Peter's input tips}
+
+ \hyperbaseurl{URL}
+ defines a base URL, which is preset to a given URL. This
+ helps to make portable documents.
+
+ \hyperimage{image-URL}
+ includes the picture of the URL reference.
+
+ \hyperref{URL}{category}{name}{text}, \hyperref[mark]{text}
+ text is activated as a hyperlink to the point which is
+ defined with a \label command with the symbolic name
+ mark.
+
+ \hyperlink{name}{text}, \hyertarget{name}{text}
+ \hyperlink creates an internal link to an object which
+ is somewhere defined with a \hypertarget command.
+
+ For HTML the command \hyperlink inserts a # character in
+ front of each link. Thus it'll refer to the topical
+ document, while \href will expect a complete URL.
+
+ \autoref{marker}
+ \autoref is a substitution for the standard \ref
+ command. It inserts a context sensitive phrase.
+
+see \autoref{foo}
+
+ for a \label in a section will output see section 3 for
+ an example.
+
+ There are macros to change the default output with the
+ help of the \renewcommand:
+
+\figurename *\figurename*
+\tablename *\tablename*
+\partname *\partname*
+\appendixname *\appendixname*
+\equationname *\equationname*
+\Itemname *\Itemname*
+\chaptername *\chaptername*
+\sectionname *\sectionname*
+\subsectionname *\subsesctionname*
+\subsubsectionname *\subsubsectionname*
+\paragraphname *\paragraphname*
+\Hfootnotename *\Hfootnotename*
+\AMSname *\AMSname*
+\theoremname *\theoremname*
+
+ \nolinkurl
+ Allows line breaks in a verbatim like environment like
+ \url, but without the hyperlink function. This is useful
+ to define own commands like this example:
+
+\newcommand*{\urlw}[1]{\href{http://www.#1}%
+ {\nolinkurl{www.#1}}}
+
+ This new defined command \urlw allows the user to
+ typeset a linkable (this function is offered by \href)
+ www.example.org address in the latex source like this:
+
+\urlw{example.org}
+
+ This will produce the string www.example.org which is
+ hyperlinked and breakable (when the driver like pdfTeX
+ allows line breaks in links).
+
+3.8 inputenc
+
+ \usepackage[encoding name]{inputenc}
+
+ Allows to specify an input encoding for direct input of
+ character codes > 127, e.g. accented characters.
+
+ Important encodings are:
+
+ latin9, latin1
+ Linux, Unix, VMS
+
+ ansinew
+ Windows (codepage 1252)
+
+ cp850
+ OS/2, MSDOS (codpage 850)
+
+ applemac
+ Apple Macintosh
+
+3.9 KOMA-Script
+
+ The KOMA-Script package has a very detailed and well written
+ documentation. Read the scrguide for further information! :-)
+
+3.9.1 Page-Layout
+
+ \typearea[BCOR]{DIV}
+
+ \areaset[BCOR]{Breite}{Höhe}
+
+3.9.2 Options
+
+ headinclude, headexclude, footinclude, footexclude
+ will determine if headers and footers are used in the
+ calculation of the page size. Default is exclude.
+ Include will make the text area smaller.
+
+ DIV
+ is a factor which determins how large the used page size
+ is. This method takes care of good typography.
+
+ Try values between 10 and 15. Higher values will cause
+ smaller margins. An example would be: DIV12.
+
+ BCOR
+ Binding correction. Takes care of the loss of the
+ visible paper size when the paper is cut and a book is
+ bound.
+
+3.9.3 Letter Class scrlttr2
+
+ This reference is based on the excellent scrguien.pdf from
+ 2002-09-06.
+
+Options
+
+Defining Options Later
+
+ \KOMAoptions{options list}
+ Use this to change options after loading the class. List
+ single or multiple options, separated by commas.
+
+Page Layout Options
+
+ paper=format
+ Defines the paper format.
+
+ BCOR=length, DIV=value, headlines=count
+ Divisor, binding correction, and number of headlines.
+
+ enlargefirstpage
+ If true some more text would fit on the first page
+
+Other Layout Options
+
+ twoside
+ Activate possibilities of a double-sided document, but
+ stay with with the one-sided layout as far as possible.
+
+ cleardoublepage=style
+ Inserted pages by \cleardoublepage get one of these page
+ styles:
+
+ + empty
+ + plain
+ + standard
+
+ headsepline, footsepline
+ Insert a separator line below the head or above the
+ foot.
+
+ mpinclude, mpexclude
+ These two options of the typearea package should not be
+ used with scrlttr2.
+
+ pagenumber=position
+ This option defines if and where a page number will be
+ placed. Possible values are:
+
+ bot, foot
+ Page number in foot, horizontal position not
+ changed
+
+ botcenter, botcentered, botmiddle, footcenter,
+ footcentered, footmiddle
+ Page number infoot,centered
+
+ botleft, footleft
+ Page number in foot, left justified
+
+ botrigth, footright
+ Page number in foot, right justified
+
+ center, centered, middle
+ Page number centered horizontally, vertical
+ position not changed
+
+ false, no, off
+ No page number
+
+ head, top
+ Page number in head, horizontal position not
+ changed
+
+ headcenter, headcentered, headmiddle, topcenter,
+ topcentered, topmiddle
+ Page number in head, centered
+
+ headleft, topleft
+ Page number in head, left justified
+
+ headright, topright
+ Page number in head, right justified
+
+ left
+ Page number left, vertical position not changed
+
+ right
+ Page number right, vertical position not changed
+
+ Default is botcenter
+
+ parskip=value
+ Mark paragraphs alternatively by vertical skip. Possible
+ values are:
+
+ false, off
+ Paragraph indentation instead of verticalk space
+
+ full, on, true
+ One line vertical space between paragraphs; at
+ least 1 em free space in the last line.
+
+ full*
+ One line vertical space betwen paragraphs; at
+ least a quarter of a line free space at the end of
+ a paragraph.
+
+ full+
+ One line vertical space betwen paragraphs; at
+ least a third of aline free space at the end of a
+ paragraph.
+
+ full-
+ One line vertical space betwen paragraphs; last
+ line of a paragraph may be arbitrarily filled.
+
+ half
+ Half a line vertical space between paragraphs; at
+ least 1 em free space in the last line.
+
+ half*
+ Half a line vertical space between paragraphs; at
+ least a quarter of a line free space at the end of
+ a paragraph.
+
+ half+
+ Half a line vertical space between paragraphs; at
+ least a third of a line free space at the end of a
+ paragraph.
+
+ half-
+ One line vertical space between paragraphs; last
+ line may be arbitrarily filled.
+
+ Default is false.
+
+Font Options
+
+ fontsize=size
+ Font size of the document. Defaults to 12pt.
+
+Options for Letterhead and Address
+
+ fromalign
+ Defines the placement of the from address in the
+ letterhead. Possible values are:
+
+ center, centered, middle
+ Return address centered.
+
+ false, no, off
+ Standard design for return address.
+
+ left
+ Left justified return address.
+
+ rigth
+ Right justified return address.
+
+ Default is left
+
+ fromrule
+ Allows to place a horizontal rule within return address.
+ Possible values are:
+
+ afteraddress, below, true, yes
+ Line below return address
+
+ aftername
+ Line right below sender's name
+
+ false, no, off
+ No line.
+
+ Default is false.
+
+ fromphone
+ Defines whether the phone number will be part of the
+ return address.
+
+ fromfax
+ Defines whether the facsimile number will be part of the
+ return address.
+
+ fromemail
+ Defines whether the email address will be part of the
+ return address.
+
+ fromurl
+ Defines whether the URL will be part of the return
+ address.
+
+ fromlogo
+ Defines whether the logo will be part of the return
+ address.
+
+ addrfield
+ Defines whether a return address field will be set.
+
+ backaddress
+ Defines whether a return address for window envelopes
+ will be set.
+
+ subject
+ Choose of your subject should have a title and if the
+ subject should be set before or after the opening.
+ Possible values are:
+
+ afteropening
+ Set subject after opening.
+
+ beforeopening
+ Set subject before opening.
+
+ titled
+ Add title to subject.
+
+ untitled
+ Do not add title to subject.
+
+ Defaults are beforeopening and untitled.
+
+ locfield
+ Toggle between presets for the field width of
+ additionbal sender attributes.
+
+ narrow
+ Small sender supplement field.
+
+ wide
+ Wide sender supplement field.
+
+ Default is narrow.
+
+ foldmarks
+ Activates fold marks.
+
+ numericaldate
+ Toggles between standard, language-dependent date
+ presentation and a short, numerical one.
+
+ refline
+ Defines that the reference line may extend beyond the
+ normal type area.
+
+Format Options
+
+ draft
+ Toggles between the final and the draft version.
+
+Letter Class Option Files
+
+ \LoadLetterOption{name}
+ Load a lco file. name is the filename without suffix.
+
+ Predefined lco files:
+
+ DIN
+ For A4 size paper, complying with DIN 676.
+
+ DINmtext
+ For A4 size paper, complying with DIN 676, but
+ using an alternate layout with more text on the
+ first page.
+
+ KOMAold
+ Fo AQ4 paper size using a layout close to the
+ obsolete scrlettr class.
+
+ SN
+ For Swiss letters with address field on the right
+ side, according to SN 010 130
+
+ SNleft
+ For Swiss letters with address field on the left
+ side.
+
+ \LetterOptionNeedsPaperSize{option name}{paper size}
+ Useful to be abel to emit warnings if the user selects a
+ different paper size from the one the lco file is based
+ on.
+
+General Document Properties
+
+Font Selection
+
+ See also the section for Changing Fonts in KOMA-Script (still
+ to be written).
+
+ backaddress
+ Back address for a window envelope
+
+ descriptionlabel
+ Label in a description environment
+
+ fromaddress
+ Sender's address in letterhead
+
+ fromname
+ Sender's address in letterhead if different from
+ fromaddress
+
+ pagefoot
+ Footer, sometimes header of a page
+
+ pagehead
+ Header, sometimes footer of a page
+
+ pagenumber
+ Page number in footer or header
+
+ subject
+ Subject in the opening
+
+ title
+ Headline in the opening
+
+Page Style
+
+ See also the section for Page Style in KOMA-Script (still to be
+ written).
+
+ empty
+ Entirely empty headers and footers
+
+ plain
+ Empty head and and only page number in header or footer
+
+ headings
+ Automatic page headings
+
+ myheadings
+ Manual page headings
+
+Variables
+
+ The main difference between a command and a variable is that a
+ command usually triggers an action whereas a variable only
+ consists of plain text. Furthermore a variable can have an
+ additional description.
+
+ \newkomavar[description]{name},
+ \newkomavar*[description]{name}, \addtoreffields{name}
+ \newkomavar defines a new variable, addressed with name.
+
+ The command \addtoreffields adds the variable name to
+ the reference fields. See section Business Line.
+
+ The command \newkomavar* works like \newkomavar with an
+ additional call of the command \addtoreffields.
+
+ Overview of all variables:
+
+ backaddress
+ Back address for window envelopes
+
+ backaddressseparator
+ Separator within the back address
+
+ ccseparator
+ Separator between title of additional recipients and
+ additional recipients
+
+ customer
+ Customer number
+
+ date
+ Date
+
+ emailseparator
+ Separator between e-mail name and e-mail address
+
+ enclseparator
+ Separator between title of enclosure and and enclosures
+
+ faxseparator
+ Separator between title of fax and fax number
+
+ fromaddress
+ Sender's address without its name
+
+ frombank
+ Sender's bank account
+
+ fromemail
+ Sender's e-mail
+
+ fromfax
+ Sender's fax number
+
+ fromlogo
+ Commands for inserting the sender's logo
+
+ fromname
+ Complete name of the sender
+
+ fromphone
+ Sender's telephone number
+
+ fromurl
+ URL of the sender
+
+ invoice
+ Invoice number
+
+ location
+ More details of the sender
+
+ myref
+ Sender's reference
+
+ place
+ Place
+
+ placeseparator
+ Separator between place and date
+
+ phoneseparator
+ Separator between title of telephone and telephone
+ number
+
+ signature
+ Signature beneath the ending of the letter
+
+ specialmail
+ Special mail
+
+ subject
+ Subject
+
+ subjectseparator
+ Separator between title of subject and subject
+
+ title
+ Letter title
+
+ toname
+ Complete name of recipient
+
+ toaddress
+ Address of recipient without its name
+
+ yourmail
+ Date of recipient's mail
+
+ yourref
+ Recipient's reference
+
+ \setkomavar{name}[description]{content},
+ \setkomavar*{name}{description}
+ \setkomavar sets the content of the variable name. The
+ optional argument sets the description of the variable.
+
+ \setkomavar* only sets the description.
+
+ \usekomavar[command]{name}, \usekomavar*[command]{name}
+ \usekomavar gives you access to the content of the
+ variable name.
+
+ \usekomavar* gives you access to the description of the
+ variable name.
+
+ \ifkomavarempty{name}{true}{false},
+ \ifkomavarempty*{name}{true}{false}
+ The true argument will be executed if the content or
+ description is empty. Otherwise the false argument will
+ be executed.
+
+ The starred version handles the description of a
+ variable, the variant without star the content.
+
+Pseudo Lengths
+
+ \@newplength{name}
+ Defines a new pseudo length
+
+ \useplength{name}
+ Access value of pseudo length name
+
+ \setlengthtoplength[factor]{length}{pseudo length} ,
+ \addtolengthplength[factor]{length}{pseudo length}
+ Assign a multiple of pseudo length to a real length.
+ Adds a multiple of pseudo length to length.
+
+ \@setplength[factor]{pseudo length}{value} ,
+ \@addtoplength[factor]{pseudo length}{value}
+ Assign a multiple of a value to a pseudo length. Adds
+ value to pseudo length.
+
+Letter Declaration
+
+Letterhead
+
+ firstheadvpos
+ Distance between the top of the sheet and the
+ letterhead.
+
+ firstheadwidth
+ Width of the letterhead.
+
+ fromname, fromaddress, fromphone, fromfax, fromemail, fromurl,
+ fromlogo
+ This variables give all statements concerning the sender
+ necessary to create the letterhead.
+
+ phoneseparator, faxseparator, emailseparator, urlseparator
+ Separators for variables in letterhead.
+
+ \firsthead{construction}
+ Create letterhead freely.
+
+Footer
+
+ firstfootvpos
+ Distance between footer and upper border of the sheet.
+
+ firstfootwidth
+ Width of letter's firstpage footer.
+
+ \firstfoot{Construction}
+ Set definition for first page's footer
+
+Address
+
+ toaddrvpos, toaddrhpos
+ Distance between address window of a window envelope and
+ the upper and left border of the sheet.
+
+ toaddrwidth
+ Width of the address window.
+
+ toaddrindent
+ Value of indentation for the address from the left
+ border.
+
+ backaddress, backaddressseparator, backaddrheight
+ Double backslashes within return address will be
+ exchanged with backaddressseparator. Height of the
+ return address field.
+
+ specialmail, specialmailindent, specialmailrightindent
+ Optionally set between return address and addressee.
+ specialmailindent and specialmailrightindent determine
+ left and right indentation.
+
+ toname, toaddress
+ Usually not set directly by the user.
+
+ \begin{letter}[options]{address}
+ Major point of the letter class.
+
+ \AtBeginLetter{command}
+ Hook for commands run at begin of a letter.
+
+Sender's Extension
+
+ locwidth
+ Declares width of sender's extensions.
+
+ location
+ Content of sender's extension.
+
+Business Line
+
+ refvpos
+ Distance between upper border of sheet and business
+ line.
+
+ refwidth
+ Available width for the business line.
+
+ refaftervskip
+ Vertical space to be inserted beneath business line.
+
+ place, placeseparator
+ If all variables for business line are empty, the
+ content of place and placeseparator will be set,
+ followed by content of date.
+
+ yourref, yourmail, myref, customer, invoice, date
+ Typical fields for business lines.
+
+Title and Subject Line
+
+ title
+ Additional tile. Set centered beneath the business line.
+
+ subject, subjectseparator
+ Set the subject of the letter, optional prefixed by a
+ label.
+
+Further Issues
+
+ tfoldmarkvpos, bfoldmarkvpos
+ Position of upper and lower fold mark.
+
+ foldmarkhpos
+ Distance between fold marks and the sheet's left border.
+
+ frombank
+ Internally not used yet.
+
+ \nexthead{construction}, \nextfoot{construction}
+ Create letter head or foot for the following pages
+ freely.
+
+The Text
+
+Opening
+
+ \opening{opening}
+ Set the opening of the letter.
+
+Footnotes
+
+ See section Footnotes in KOMA-Script (still to be written).
+
+Lists
+
+ See section Lists in KOMA-Script (still to be written).
+
+Margin Notes
+
+ See section Margin Notes in KOMA-Script (still to be written).
+
+Text Emphasis
+
+ See section Logical Markup of Text in KOMA-Script (still to be
+ written).
+
+Closing Part
+
+Closing
+
+ signature
+ Inlcudes an explanation for the inscription. Defaults to
+ \usekomavar{fromname}.
+
+ \closing{closing phrase}
+ Typesets the colsing phrase follwoed by a vertical space
+ and the contents fo variable signature.
+
+ sigindent, sigbeforevskip, \raggedsignature
+ Indentation of the box for closing phrase, inscription
+ and signature (defaults to 0mm). Vertical space between
+ closing phrase and signature (defaults to two lines).
+ Alignment inside the box.
+
+Postscript, Carbon Copy, and Enclosures
+
+ \ps
+ Set a postscript.
+
+ \cc{distribution list}, ccseparator
+ Set a ddistribution list. If the contents of ccseparator
+ isn't empty then the name and the content of the
+ variable is inserted prior to distribution list.
+
+ \encl{enclosures}, enclseparator
+ Same structur as the distribution list.
+
+Language Support
+
+Language Selection
+
+ \captionenglish, \captionUSenglish, \captionamerican,
+ \captionbritish, \captionUKenglish, \captiongerman,
+ \captionngerman, \captionaustrian, \captionfrench,
+ \captionitalian, \captionspanish, \captiondutch,
+ \captioncroatian
+ If the used language selection scheme does not support
+ switching the language the above commands can be used
+ directly.
+
+ \dateenglish, \dateUSenglish, \dateamerican, \datebritish,
+ \dateUKenglish, \dategerman, \datengerman,
+ \dateaustrian, \datefrench, \dateitalian, \datespanish,
+ \datedutch, \datecrotian
+ Numerical date representation.
+
+Language-Dependent Terms
+
+ \yourrefname, \youremailname, \myrefname, \customername,
+ \invoicename, \subjectname, \ccname, \enclname,
+ \headtoname, \headfromname, \datename, \pagename,
+ \phonename, \faxname, \emailname, \wwwname, \bankname
+ These defintions can be modified to support a new
+ language of for private customization.
+
+Defining Language Terms
+
+ \providecaptioname{language}{term}{definition},
+ \newcaptioname{language}{term}{defintion},
+ \renewcaptionname{language}{term}{definition}
+ Assign a definition for a language to a term.
+
+Address Files and Circular Letters
+
+ \adrentry{Lastname}{Firstname}{Address}{Telephone}{F1}{F2}{Comm
+ ent}{Key}
+ Address entry for address files. The file extension has
+ to be .adr!
+
+ \addrentry{Lastname}{Firstname}{Address}{Telephone}{F1}{F2}{F3}
+ {F4}{Key}
+ This command supports four freely definable parameters
+ for an address entry.
+
+ \adrchar{initial letter}, \addrchar{initial letter}
+ Separator for address entries. Ignored by scrlttr2.
+
+3.9.4 Address Files with scraddr
+
+ \InputAddressFile{file name}
+ Read the contents of the given address file. Filename
+ extension has to be .adr and has to be omitted in the
+ argument.
+
+ \Name{Key}, \FirstName{Key}, \LastName{Key}, \Address{Key},
+ \Telephone{Key}, \FreeI{Key}, \FreeII{Key},
+ \Comment{Key}, \FreeIII{Key}, \FreeIV{Key}
+ Access to the data in address file. \Name is a
+ concatenation of \FirstName and \LastName.
+
+ AdrFreeIVempty, AdrFreeIVshow, AdrFreeIVwarn, AdrFreeIVstop
+ Package warning options. Defaults to AdrFreeIVshow.
+
+3.10 mathpazo
+
+ Math fonts for the use with the Palatino font.
+
+3.10.1 \upDelta / \upOmega
+
+ Math fonts for the use with the Palatino font.
+
+ Package options are:
+
+ [slantedGreek]
+ Uppercase Greek will be typeset slanted.
+
+ [noBBpl]
+ Do not use PazoMathBlackboardBold as (partial)
+ blackboard bold font (e.g with \mathbb{R}).
+
+ [osf]
+ Make the font family pplj (Palatino with old style
+ numerals) the default roman font, and use an alternative
+ version of the virtual math italic fonts (zplmrj7m and
+ zplmbj7m) with upright Palatino old style numerals for
+ use with the \oldstylenums command.
+
+ [osfeqnnum]
+ Use old style numerals for equation numbering.
+
+3.11 varioref
+
+ Smarter version of the original latex2e cross reference
+ commands. Generated strings are customizable, Babel options are
+ recognized (further info in the package documentation).
+
+ \vref, \vpageref
+ \vref is similar to \ref but adds an additional page
+ reference, like on the facing page or on page 27
+ whenever the corresponding \label is not on the same
+ page.
+
+ \vpageref is a variation of \pageref with similar
+ functionality.
+
+ \vrefrange, \vpagerefrange
+ The \v...range commands take two labels as arguments and
+ produce strings which depend on wether or not these
+ labels fall onto a single page or on different pages.
+
+ \vref*, \vpageref*, \vpagerefrange*
+ Star * variants do not add any space before the
+ generated text for situations like:
+
+(\vref{foo} ...)
+
+3.12 Several Small Packages
+
+ Must be loaded with the usual \usepackage command. Further info
+ for a package to be found in the documentation (dvi, pdf, ps)
+ or in the sty-file itself.
+
+3.12.1 bm
+
+ Bold math symbols or equations with better spacing then the
+ \boldsymbold command. If possible load after other packages
+ which redefine the fonts. When no bold font is available for a
+ certain char bm will use poor man's bold \pmb.
+
+ \bm
+ Produces bold math symbol or equation.
+
+ \unboldmath
+ Can be used to set parts of an equation unbold.
+
+3.12.2 url
+
+ Defines line breakable hyperlinked (uses hyperref package)
+ verbatim input for urls and e-mail addresses.
+
+ Example: \url{http://example.org} outputs http://example.org.
+
+ Related commands are \href and \nolinkurl.
+
+4 Generic Packages
+
+4.1 PiCTeX (tbd.)
+
+ tbd.
+
+4.2 PSTricks
+
+4.2.1 Overview
+
+ The idea behind the PSTricks package of Timothy van Zandt is to
+ provide most of the PostScript language in LaTeX and TeX
+ syntax.
+
+4.2.2 Commands and Parameters
+
+4.2.2.1 Color
+
+ \newgray{color}{num} , \newrgbcolor{color}{num1 num2 num3} ,
+ \newhsbcolor{color}{num1 num2 num3} ,
+ \newcmykcolor{color}{num1 num2 num3 num4}
+
+ Note that these commands are obsolete for LaTeX. Load PSTricks
+ with \usepackage{pstcol} and use the standard LaTeX color
+ commands instead.
+
+4.2.2.2 Setting graphics parameters
+
+ \psset{par1=value1,par2=value2,...}
+
+4.2.2.3 Dimensions, coordinates and angles
+
+ \pssetlength{cmd}{dim}
+
+ unit=dim, xunit=dim, yunit=dim, yunit=dim
+ Default: 1cm
+
+ \degrees[num]
+
+ \radians
+
+4.2.2.4 Basic graphics parameters
+
+ linewidth=dim
+ Default: .8pt
+
+ linecolor=color
+ Default: black
+
+ showpoints=true/false
+ Default: false
+
+4.2.2.5 Lines and polygons
+
+ linearc=dim
+ Default: 0pt
+
+ framearc=num
+ Default: 0
+
+ cornersize=relative/absolute
+ Default: relative
+
+ \psline*[par]{arrows}(x0,y0)(x1,y1)...(xn,yn)
+
+ \qline(coor0)(coor1)
+
+ \pspolygon*[par](x0,y0)(x1,y1)(x2,y2)...(xn,yn)
+
+ \psframe*[par](x0,y0)(x1,y1)
+
+4.2.2.6 Arcs, circles and ellipses
+
+ \pscircle*[par](x0,y0){radius}
+
+ \qdisk(coor){radius}
+
+ \pswedge*[par](x0,y0){radius}{angle1}{angle2}
+
+ \psellipse*[par](x0,y0)(x1,y1)
+
+ \psarc*[par]{arrows}(x,y){radius}{angleA}{angleB}
+
+ \psarcn*[par]{arrows}(x,y){radius}{angleA}{angleB}
+
+ arcsep=dim, arcsepA=dim, arcsepB=dim
+ Default: 0pt
+
+4.2.2.7 Curves
+
+ \psbezier*[par]{arrows}(x0,y0)(x1,y1)(x2,y2)(x3,y3)
+
+ \parabola*[par]{arrows}(x0,y0)(x1,y1)
+
+ \pscurve*[par]{arrows}(x1,y1)...(xn,yn)
+
+ \psecurve*[par]{arrows}(x1,y1)...(xn,yn)
+
+ \psccurve*[par]{arrows}(x1,y1)...(xn,yn)
+
+ curvature=num1 num2 num3
+ Default: 1 .1 0
+
+4.2.2.8 Dots
+
+ \psdots*[par](x1,y1)(x2,y2)...(xn,yn)
+
+ dotstyle=style
+ Default: *
+
+ Dots: *, o, +, triangle, triangle*, square, square*,
+ pentagon, pentagon*, |
+
+ dotscale=num1 num2
+ Default: 1
+
+ dotangle=angle
+ Default: 0
+
+4.2.2.9 Grids
+
+ \psgrid(x0,y0)(x1,y1)(x2,y2)
+
+ gridwidth=dim
+ Default: .8pt
+
+ gridcolor=color
+ Default: black
+
+ griddots=num
+ Default: 0
+
+ gridlabels=dim
+ Default: 10pt
+
+ gridlabelcolor=color
+ Default: black
+
+ subgriddiv=int
+ Default: 5
+
+ subgridwidth=dim
+ Default: .4pt
+
+ subgridcolor=color
+ Default: gray
+
+ subgriddots=num
+ Default: 0
+
+4.2.2.10 Plots
+
+ \fileplot*[par]{file}
+
+ \dataplot*[par]{commands}
+
+ \savedata{command}[data]
+
+ \readdata{command}{file}
+
+ \listplot*[par]{list}
+
+ \psplot*[par]{xmin}{xmax}{function}
+
+ \parametricplot*[par]{tmin}{tmax}{function}
+
+ plotstyle=style
+ Default: line
+
+ plotpoints=int
+ Default: 50
+
+4.2.2.11 Coordinate systems
+
+ origin={coor}
+ Default: 0pt,0pt
+
+ swapaxes=true
+ Default: false
+
+4.2.2.12 Line styles
+
+ linestyle=style
+ Default: solid
+
+ dash=dim1 dim2
+ Default: 5pt 3pt
+
+ dotsep=dim
+ Default: 3pt
+
+ border=dim
+ Default: 0pt
+
+ bordercolor=color
+ Default: white
+
+ doubleline=true/false
+ Default: false
+
+ doublesep=dim
+ Default: 1.25\pslinewidth
+
+ doublecolor=color
+ Default: white
+
+ shadow=true/false
+ Default: false
+
+ shadowsize=dim
+ Default: 3pt
+
+ shadowangle=angle
+ Default: -45
+
+ shadowcolor=color
+ Default: darkgray
+
+ dimen=outer/inner/middle
+ Default: outer
+
+4.2.2.13 Fill styles
+
+ fillstyle=style
+ Default: none
+
+ fillcolor=color
+ Default: white
+
+ hatchwidth=dim
+ Default: .8pt
+
+ hatchsep=dim
+ Default: 4pt
+
+ hatchcolor=color
+ Default: black
+
+ hatchangle=rot
+ Default: 45
+
+4.2.2.14 Arrowheads and such
+
+ arrows=style
+ Default: -
+
+ Arrows: -, <->, >-<, <<->>, >>-<<, |-|, |*-|*, [-], (-),
+ o-o, *-*, oo-oo, **-**, c-c, cc-cc, C-C
+
+ arrowsize=dim num
+ Default: 2pt 3
+
+ arrowlength=num
+ Default: 1.4
+
+ arrowinset=num
+ Default: .4
+
+ tbarsize=dim num
+ Default: 2pt 5
+
+ bracketlength=num, rbracketlength=num
+ Default: .15
+
+ dotsize=dim num
+ Default: .5pt 2.5
+
+ arrowscale=num1 num2
+ Default: 1
+
+4.2.2.15 Custom styles
+
+ \newpsobject{name}{object}{par1=value1,...}
+
+ \newpsstyle{name}{par1=value1,...}
+
+4.2.2.16 The basics
+
+ \pscustom*[par]{commands}
+
+4.2.2.17 Parameters
+
+ linetype=int
+ Default: 0
+
+4.2.2.18 Graphics objects
+
+ liftpen=0/1/2
+ Default: 0
+
+4.2.2.19 Safe tricks
+
+ \newpath
+
+ \moveto(coor)
+
+ \closepath
+
+ \stroke[par]
+
+ \fill[par]
+
+ \gsave
+
+ \grestore
+
+ \translate(coor)
+
+ \scale{num1 num2}
+
+ \rotate{angle}
+
+ \swapaxes
+
+ \msave
+
+ \mrestore
+
+ \openshadow[par]
+
+ \closedshadow[par]
+
+ \movepath(coor)
+
+4.2.2.20 Pretty safe tricks
+
+ \lineto(coor)
+
+ \rlineto(coor)
+
+ \curveto(x1,y1)(x2,y2)(x3,y3)
+
+ \rcurveto(x1,y1)(x2,y2)(x3,y3)
+
+4.2.2.21 For hackers only
+
+ \code{code}
+
+ \dim{dim}
+
+ \coor(x1,y1)(x2,y2)...(xn,yn)
+
+ \rcoor(x1,y1)(x2,y2)...(xn,yn)
+
+ \file{file}
+
+ \arrows{arrows}
+
+ \setcolor{color}
+
+4.2.2.22 Pictures
+
+ \pspicture*[baseline](x0,y0)(x1,y1)
+
+ \endpspicture
+
+4.2.2.23 Placing and rotating whatever
+
+ \rput*[refpoint]{rotation}(x,y){stuff}
+
+ \uput*{labelsep}[refangle]{rotation}(x,y){stuff}
+
+ \pslabelsep
+
+ labelsep=dim
+ Default: 5pt
+
+4.2.2.24 Repetition
+
+ \multirput*[refpoint]{angle}(x0,y0)(x1,y1){int}{stuff}
+
+ \multips{angle}(x0,y0)(x1,y1){int}{graphics}
+
+4.2.2.25 Axes
+
+ \psaxes*[par]{arrows}(x0,y0)(x1,y1)(x2,y2)
+
+ Horizontal Vertical Dflt Description
+ Ox=num Oy=num 0 Label at origin.
+ Dx=num Dy=num 1 Label increment.
+ dx=dim oy=dim 0pt Dist btwn labels.
+
+ labels=all/x/y/none
+ Default: all
+
+ showorigin=true/false
+ Default: true
+
+ ticks=all/x/y/none
+ Default: all
+
+ tickstyle=full/top/bottom
+ Default: full
+
+ ticksize=dim
+ Default: 3pt
+
+ \psxlabel, \psylabel
+
+ axesstyle=axes/frame/none
+ Default: axes
+
+4.2.2.26 Framed boxes
+
+ framesep=dim
+ Default: 3pt
+
+ boxsep=true/false
+ Default: true
+
+ \psframebox*[par]{stuff}
+
+ \psdblframebox*[par]{stuff}
+
+ \psshadowbox*[par]{stuff}
+
+ \pscirclebox*[par]{stuff}
+
+ \cput*[par]{angle}(x,y){stuff}
+
+ \psovalbox*[par]{stuff}
+
+4.2.2.27 Clipping
+
+ \clipbox[dim]{stuff}
+
+ \psclip{graphics} ... \endpsclip
+
+4.2.2.28 Rotation and scaling boxes
+
+ \rotateleft{stuff}
+
+ \rotateright{stuff}
+
+ \rotatedown{stuff}
+
+ \scalebox{num1 num2}{stuff}
+
+ \scaleboxto(x,y){stuff}
+
+4.2.2.29 Nodes
+
+ \rnode[refpoint]{name}{stuff}
+
+ \Rnode(x,y){name}{stuff}
+
+ \RnodeRef
+
+ \pnode(x,y){name}
+
+ \cnode*[par](x,y){radius}{name}
+
+ \circlenode*[par]{name}{stuff}
+
+ \cnodeput*[par]{angle}(x,y){name}{stuff}
+
+ \ovalnode*[par]{name}{stuff}
+
+4.2.2.30 Node connections
+
+ nodesep=dim
+ Default: 0
+
+ offset=dim
+ Default: 0
+
+ arm=dim
+ Default: 10pt
+
+ angle=angle
+ Default: 0
+
+ arcangle=angle
+ Default: 8
+
+ ncurv=num
+ Default: .67
+
+ loopsize=dim
+ Default: 1cm
+
+ \ncline*[par]{arrows}{nodeA}{nodeB}
+
+ \ncLine*[par]{arrows}{nodeA}{nodeB}
+
+ \nccurve*[par]{arrows}{nodeA}{nodeB}
+
+ \ncarc*[par]{arrows}{nodeA}{nodeB}
+
+ \ncbar*[par]{arrows}{nodeA}{nodeB}
+
+ \ncdiag*[par]{arrows}{nodeA}{nodeB}
+
+ \ncdiagg*[par]{arrows}{nodeA}{nodeB}
+
+ \ncangle*[par]{arrows}{nodeA}{nodeB}
+
+ \ncangles*[par]{arrows}{nodeA}{nodeB}
+
+ \ncloop*[par]{arrows}{nodeA}{nodeB}
+
+ \nccircle*[par]{arrows}{node}{radius}
+
+ \pcline*[par]{arrows}(x1,y1)(x2,y2)
+
+ \pccurve*[par]{arrows}(x1,y1)(x2,y2)
+
+ \pcarc*[par]{arrows}(x1,y1)(x2,y2)
+
+ \pcbar*[par]{arrows}(x1,y1)(x2,y2)
+
+ \pcdiag*[par]{arrows}(x1,y1)(x2,y2)
+
+ \pcangle*[par]{arrows}(x1,y1)(x2,y2)
+
+ \pcloop*[par]{arrows}(x1,y1)(x2,y2)
+
+4.2.2.31 Attaching labels to node connections
+
+ \lput*[refpoint]{rotation}(pos){stuff}
+
+ \aput*[labelsep]{angle}(pos){stuff}
+
+ \bput*[labelsep]{angle}(pos){stuff}
+
+ \mput*[refpoint]{stuff}
+
+ \Aput*[labelsep]{stuff}
+
+ \Bput*[labelsep]{stuff}
+
+4.2.2.32 Coils and zigzags
+
+ \pscoil*[par]{arrows}(x0,y0)(x1,y1)
+
+ \psCoil*[par]{angle1}{angle2}
+
+ \pszigzag*[par]{arrows}(x0,y0)(x1,y1)
+
+ coilwidth=dim
+ Default: 1cm
+
+ coilheight=num
+ Default: 1
+
+ coilarm=dim
+ Default: .5cm
+
+ coilaspect=angle
+ Default: 45
+
+ coilinc=angle
+ Default: 10
+
+ \nccoil*[par]{arrows}{nodeA}{nodeB}
+
+ \nczigzag*[par]{arrows}{nodeA}{nodeB}
+
+ \pccoil*[par]{arrows}(x1,y1)(x2,y2)
+
+ \pczigzag*[par]{arrows}(x1,y1)(x2,y2)
+
+4.2.2.33 Special coordinates
+
+ \SpecialCoor
+
+ Table 1.12. Special coordinates and angles
+ Coordinate Example Description
+ (x,y) (3,4) Cartesian coordinate.
+ (r;a) (3;110) Polar coordinate.
+ (node) (A) Center of node.
+ ([par]node) ([angle=45]A) Relative to node.
+ (!ps) (!5 3.3 2 exp) Raw PostScript.
+ (coor1|coor2) (A|1in;30) Combination.
+
+ Angle Example Description
+ num 45 Angle.
+ (coor) (-1,1) Coordinate (vector).
+ !ps !33 sqrt Raw PostScript.
+
+ \NormalCoor
+
+4.2.2.34 Overlays
+
+ \overlaybox stuff\endoverlaybox
+
+ \psoverlay{string}
+
+ \putoverlaybox{string}
+
+ gradbegin=color
+ Default: gradbegin
+
+ gradend=color
+ Default: gradend
+
+ gradlines=int
+ Default: 500
+
+ gradmidpoint=num
+ Default: .9
+
+ gradangle=angle
+ Default: 0
+
+4.2.2.35 Typesetting text along a path
+
+ \pstextpath[pos](x,y){graphics object}{text}
+
+4.2.2.36 Stroking and filling character paths
+
+ \pscharpath*[par]{text}
+
+ \pscharclip*[par]{text} ... \endpscharclip
+
+4.2.2.37 Exporting EPS files
+
+ \TeXtoEPS ... \endTeXtoEPS
+
+ \PSTtoEPS[par]{file}{graphics objects}
+
+ bbllx=dim
+ Default: -1pt
+
+ bblly=dim
+ Default: -1pt
+
+ bburx=dim
+ Default: 1pt
+
+ bbury=dim
+ Default: 1pt
+
+ headerfile=file
+ Default: s
+
+ headers=none/all/user
+ Default: none
+
+4.2.2.38 Boxes
+
+ \psmathboxtrue, \psmathboxfalse
+
+ \everypsbox{commands}
+
+ \pslongbox{name}{cmd}
+
+ \psverbboxtrue, \psverbboxfalse
+
+4.2.2.39 Tips and More Tricks
+
+ \pslbrace, \psrbrace
+
+4.2.3 List of Additional PSTricks Packages
+
+ psgo
+ Draw Go diagrams
+
+ pst-blur
+ PSTricks package for "blurred" shadows
+
+ pst-euc
+ Géométrie en LaTeX et PSTricks
+
+ pst-fr3d
+ Three dimensional framed Boxes
+
+ pst-ghsb
+ PSTricks package for HSB Gradients
+
+ pst-gr3d
+ PSTricks package for 3D grids
+
+ pst-lens
+ Optique géométrique
+
+ pst-node
+ PSTricks package for nodes
+
+ pst-ob3d
+ A PSTricks package for three dimensional basic objects
+
+ pst-osci
+ Oscilloscopes with PSTricks
+
+ pst-poly
+ Polygons with PSTricks
+
+ pst-tree
+ PSTricks package for trees
+
+ pst-uml
+ Draw easily diagrams with UML notation
+
+ vaucansom.sty
+ Drawing automata
+
+5 fontinst (tbd.)
+
+ tbd.
+
+6 ConTeXt (tbd.)
+
+6.1 Overview
+
+ ConTeXt is based on PlainTeX and MetaPost and gets controlled
+ with some Perl scripts. It's mainly targeted towards layout
+ oriented users and especially useful for presentations. It's
+ extensible by the use of modules and has in it's base
+ distribution already a large amount of functionality. The
+ preferred output format is PDF, but DVI is possible too.
+
+ Some of the unique features of ConTeXt are:
+ * Inline XML (including MathML, ChemML, and PhysML)
+ * really good XML support in general
+ * inline MetaPost
+
+7 Texinfo (tbd.)
+
+ tbd.
+
+Chapter 2. pdfTeX
+
+ Table of Contents
+
+ 1 Options
+
+ 1.1 --file-line-error-style
+ 1.2 --fmt format
+ 1.3 --help
+ 1.4 --ini
+ 1.5 --interaction mode
+ 1.6 --ipc
+ 1.7 --ipc-start
+ 1.8 --jobname name
+ 1.9 --kpathsea-debug bitmask
+ 1.10 --maketex fmt
+ 1.11 --no-maketex fmt
+ 1.12 --output-comment string
+ 1.13 --parse-first-line
+ 1.14 --progname name
+ 1.15 --recorder
+ 1.16 --shell-escape
+ 1.17 --translate-file tcxname
+ 1.18 --version
+
+ 2 Environment
+
+Note
+
+ The contents of this section was taken from pdftex(1).
+
+1 Options
+
+ pdfTeX understands the following command line options.
+
+1.1 --file-line-error-style
+
+ Print error messages in the form file:line:error which is
+ similar to the way many compilers format them.
+
+1.2 --fmt format
+
+ Use format as the name of the format to be used, instead of the
+ name by which pdfTeX was called or a %& line.
+
+1.3 --help
+
+ Print help message and exit.
+
+1.4 --ini
+
+ Be pdfinitex, for dumping formats; this is implicitly true if
+ the program is called as pdfinitex.
+
+1.5 --interaction mode
+
+ Sets the interaction mode. The mode can be one of batchmode,
+ nonstopmode, scrollmode, and errorstopmode. The meaning of
+ these modes is the same as that of the corresponding \commands.
+
+1.6 --ipc
+
+ Send DVI or PDF output to a socket as well as the usual output
+ file. Whether this option is available is the choice of the
+ installer.
+
+1.7 --ipc-start
+
+ As --ipc, and starts the server at the other end as well.
+ Whether this option is available is the choice of the
+ installer.
+
+1.8 --jobname name
+
+ Use name for the job name, instead of deriving it from the name
+ of the input file.
+
+1.9 --kpathsea-debug bitmask
+
+ Sets path searching debugging flags according to the bitmask.
+ See the Kpathsea manual for details.
+
+1.10 --maketex fmt
+
+ Enable mktexfmt, where fmt must be one of tex or tfm.
+
+1.11 --no-maketex fmt
+
+ Disable mktexfmt, where fmt must be one of tex or tfm.
+
+1.12 --output-comment string
+
+ Use string for the DVI file comment instead of the date.
+
+1.13 --parse-first-line
+
+ If the first line of the main input file begins with %& parse
+ it to look for a dump name or a --translate-file option.
+
+1.14 --progname name
+
+ Pretend to be program name. This affects both the format used
+ and the search paths.
+
+1.15 --recorder
+
+ Enable the filename recorder. This leaves a trace of the files
+ opened for input and output in a file with extension .fls.
+
+1.16 --shell-escape
+
+ Enable the \write18{command} construct. The command can be any
+ Bourne shell command. This construct is normally disallowed for
+ security reasons.
+
+1.17 --translate-file tcxname
+
+ Use the tcxname translation table.
+
+1.18 --version
+
+ Print version information and exit.
+
+2 Environment
+
+ See the Kpathsearch library documentation (the `Path
+ specifications' node) for the details of how the environment
+ variables are used when searching. The kpsewhich utility can be
+ used to query the values of the variables.
+
+ One caveat: In most pdfTeX formats, you cannot use ~ in a
+ filename you give directly to pdfTeX, because ~ is an active
+ character, and hence is expanded, not taken as part of the
+ filename. Other programs, such as Metafont, do not have this
+ problem.
+
+ TEXMFOUTPUT
+ Normally, pdfTeX puts its output files in the current
+ directory. If any output file cannot be opened there, it
+ tries to open it in the directory specified in the
+ environment variable TEXMFOUTPUT. There is no default
+ value for that variable. For example, if you say pdftex
+ paper and the current directory is not writable, if
+ TEXMFOUTPUT has the value /tmp, pdfTeX attempts to
+ create /tmp/paper.log (and /tmp/paper.pdf, if any output
+ is produced.)
+
+ TEXINPUTS
+ Search path for \input and \openin files. This should
+ probably start with ``.'', so that user files are found
+ before system files. An empty path component will be
+ replaced with the paths defined in the texmf.cnf file.
+ For example, set TEXINPUTS to ".:/home/usr/tex:" to
+ prepend the current direcory and ``/home/user/tex'' to
+ the standard search path.
+
+ TEXFONTS
+ earch path for font metric (.tfm) files.
+
+ TEXFORMATS
+ Search path for format files.
+
+ TEXPOOL
+ Search path for pdfinitex internal strings.
+
+ TEXEDIT
+ Command template for switching to editor. The default,
+ usually vi, is set when pdfTeX is compiled.
+
+Chapter 3. Metafont (tbd.)
+
+ tbd.
+
+Chapter 4. MetaPost
+
+ Table of Contents
+
+ 1 Options
+
+ 1.1 --file-line-error-style
+ 1.2 --help
+ 1.3 --ini
+ 1.4 --interaction mode
+ 1.5 --jobname name
+ 1.6 --kpathsea-debug bitmask
+ 1.7 --mem mem
+ 1.8 --parse-first-line
+ 1.9 --progname name
+ 1.10 --recorder
+ 1.11 -T
+ 1.12 --translate-file tcxname
+ 1.13 --troff
+ 1.14 --version
+
+ 2 Environment
+
+Note
+
+ The contents of this section was taken from mpost(1).
+
+ MetaPost is a programming language much like Knuth's Metafont
+ except that it outputs PostScript programs instead of bitmaps.
+ Borrowed from Metafont are the basic tools for creating and
+ manipulating pictures. These include numbers, coordinate pairs,
+ cubic splines, affine transformations, text strings, and
+ boolean quantities. Additional features facilitate integrating
+ text and graphics and accessing special features of PostScript
+ such as clipping, shading, and dashed lines. Another feature
+ borrowed from Metafont is the ability to solve linear equations
+ that are given implicitly, thus allowing many programs to be
+ written in a largely declarative style. By building complex
+ operations from simpler ones, MetaPost achieves both power and
+ exibility.
+
+1 Options
+
+ MetaPost understands the following command line options.
+
+1.1 --file-line-error-style
+
+ Print error messages in the form file:line:error which is
+ similar to the way many compilers format them.
+
+1.2 --help
+
+ Print help message and exit.
+
+1.3 --ini
+
+ Be inimpost, for dumping bases; this is implicitly true if the
+ program is called as inimpost.
+
+1.4 --interaction mode
+
+ Sets the interaction mode. The mode can be one of batchmode,
+ nonstopmode, scrollmode, and errorstopmode. The meaning of
+ these modes is the same as that of the corresponding commands.
+
+1.5 --jobname name
+
+ Use name for the job name, instead of deriving it from the name
+ of the input file.
+
+1.6 --kpathsea-debug bitmask
+
+ Sets path searching debugging flags according to the bitmask.
+ See the Kpathsea manual for details.
+
+1.7 --mem mem
+
+ Use mem as the name of the mem to be used, instead of the name
+ by which MetaPost was called or a %& line.
+
+1.8 --parse-first-line
+
+ If the first line of the main input file begins with %& parse
+ it to look for a dump name or a --translate-file option.
+
+1.9 --progname name
+
+ Pretend to be program name. This affects both the format used
+ and the search paths.
+
+1.10 --recorder
+
+ Enable the filename recorder. This leaves a trace of the files
+ opened for input and output in a file with extension .fls.
+
+1.11 -T
+
+ Produce TROFF output.
+
+1.12 --translate-file tcxname
+
+ Use the tcxname translation table.
+
+1.13 --troff
+
+ As -T.
+
+1.14 --version
+
+ Print version information and exit.
+
+2 Environment
+
+ See the Kpathsearch library documentation (the `Path
+ specifications' node) for the details of how the environment
+ variables are use when searching. The kpsewhich utility can be
+ used to query the values of the variables.
+
+ If the environment variable TEXMFOUTPUT is set, MetaPost
+ attempts to put its output files in it, if they cannot be put
+ in the current directory.
+
+ Here is a list of the environment variables which affect the
+ behavior of MetaPost:
+
+ MPINPUTS
+ Search path for input files.
+
+ MFINPUTS
+ Auxiliary search path for input files with .mf
+ extensions.
+
+ MPSUPPORT
+ Directory for various tables for handling included TeX
+ and troff.
+
+ MPXCOMMAND
+ The name of a shell script that converts embedded
+ typesetting commands to a form that MetaPost
+ understands. Defaults: makempx for TeX and troffmpx for
+ troff.
+
+ TEX
+ The version of TeX - or LaTeX - to use when processing
+ btex and verbatimtex commands. Default TeX. This version
+ of MetaPost allows you to use a `%&format' line instead.
+
+ TROFF
+ The troff pipeline for btex and verbatimtex commands.
+ Default eqn -d\$\$ | troff
+
+ MPEDIT
+ A command template for invoking an editor.
+
+ A .mem file is a binary file that permits fast loading of macro
+ packages. MetaPost reads the default plain.mem unless another
+ .mem file is specified at the start of the first line with an &
+ just before it. There is also an mfplain.mem that simulates
+ plain Metafont so that MetaPost can read .mf fonts. (Plain
+ Metafont is described in The Metafontbook).
+
+ Experts can create .mem files by invoking inimpost and giving
+ macro definitions followed by a dump command.
+
+ The MetaPost language is similar to Metafont, but the manual A
+ User's Manual for MetaPost assumes no knowledge of Metafont.
+ MetaPost does not have bitmap output commands or Metafont's
+ online display mechanism.
+
+Chapter 5. BibTeX
+
+ Table of Contents
+
+ 1 Parameters
+ 2 Command Qualifiers
+ 3 bib files
+
+ 3.1 @STRING command
+ 3.2 Entry Format
+ 3.3 Entry Types
+ 3.4 Field Text
+ 3.5 Field Types
+
+ 4 bst files
+
+ 4.1 ABBRV.BST
+ 4.2 ALPHA.BST
+ 4.3 PLAIN.BST
+ 4.4 SAMPLE.BST
+ 4.5 UNSRT.BST
+
+Note
+
+ The contents of this section was taken from the HTML helppages
+ for BibTeX of Norman Walsh (Version 1.0, 12 Apr 94).
+
+ Invokes the BibTeX utility to compile a bibliography file for
+ LaTeX. Full details can be found in "LaTeX: A Document
+ Preparation System" by Leslie Lamport.
+
+1 Parameters
+
+ bibliography-file-spec
+
+ Specifies the name of the bibliography database file to be
+ compiled by BibTeX. If the file specification does not include
+ a file type, BibTeX assumes a default type of BIB.
+
+2 Command Qualifiers
+
+ /BIBINPUTS /BIBINPUTS=(name,...)
+
+ Specify directories containing input files, and the order in
+ which they will be searched to locate each input file. A null
+ value in the list indicates the current directory. The search
+ procedure TeX uses to locate input files is to first search
+ your default directory and then search each of the directories
+ specified by the /BIBINPUTS option.
+
+ Default is /BIBINPUTS=(TEX_BIB:); TeX looks in the directory
+ associated with the logical name TEX_BIB.
+
+ /STATS /STATS /NOSTATS [D]
+
+ This qualifier is used while debugging .BST files to determine
+ BIBTEX memory usage.
+
+ /TEXINPUTS /TEXINPUTS=(name,...)
+
+ Specify directories containing input files, and the order in
+ which they will be searched to locate each input file. A null
+ value in the list indicates the current directory. The search
+ procedure TeX uses to locate input files is to first search
+ your default directory and then search each of the directories
+ specified by the /TEXINPUTS option.
+
+ Default is /TEXINPUTS=(TEX_INPUTS); TeX looks in the directory
+ associated with the logical name TEX_INPUTS.
+
+ /TRACE /TRACE /NOTRACE [D]
+
+ This qualifier is used while debugging .BST files to follow
+ program flow.
+
+3 bib files
+
+ This help entry contains the same information as Appendix B of
+ the LaTeX manual. It describes the format of a bibliography
+ database (.BIB) file.
+
+ A bibliography database file may contains two types of entry -
+ an abbreviation definition or a reference entry for citation.
+
+3.1 @STRING command
+
+ The @STRING command is used to define abbreviations for use by
+ BibTeX within the bibliography database file. The command
+ @string{jgg1 = "Journal of Gnats and Gnus, Series~1"}
+
+ defines 'jgg1' to be the abbreviation for the string "Journal
+ of Gnats and Gnus, Series~1". Parentheses can be used in place
+ of the outermost braces in the @string command, and braces can
+ be used instead of the quotation marks. The text must have
+ matching braces.
+
+ The case of letters is ignored in an abbreviation as well as in
+ the command name @string, so the command above could have been
+ written:
+ @STRING{JgG1 = "Journal of Gnats and Gnus, Series~1"}
+
+ A @string command can appear anywhere before or between entries
+ in a bibliography database file. However, it must come before
+ any use of the abbreviation, so a sensible place for @string
+ commands is at the beginning of the file. A @string command in
+ the bibliography database file takes precedence over a
+ definition made by the bibliography style, so it can be used to
+ change the definition of an abbreviation such as 'Feb'.
+
+3.2 Entry Format
+
+ A bibliography database file contains a series of reference
+ entries like the following:
+ @BOOK{kn:gnus,
+ AUTHOR = "Donald E. Knudson",
+ TITLE = "1966 World Gnus Almanac",
+ PUBLISHER = {Permafrost Press},
+ ADDRESS = {Novisibirsk} }
+
+ The @BOOK states that this is an entry of type book. various
+ entry types are described below. The 'kn:gnus' is the citation
+ key, as it appears in the argument of a \cite command referring
+ to the entry.
+
+ This entry has four fields, named AUTHOR, TITLE, PUBLISHER and
+ ADDRESS. The meanings of these and other fields are described
+ below. A field consists of the name, an '=' character with
+ optional space around it, followed by its text. The text of a
+ field is a string of characters, with no unmatched braces,
+ surrounded by either a pair of braces or a pair of '"'
+ characters. Entry fields are separated from one another, and
+ from the citation key, by commas. A comma may have optional
+ space around it.
+
+ The outermost braces that surround the entire entry may be
+ replaced by parentheses. As in TeX input files, an end-of-line
+ character counts as a space and one space is equivalent to many
+ spaces. Unlike TeX, BibTeX ignores the case of letters in the
+ entry type, citation key and field names. The above entry could
+ have been typed as follows:
+@BOOK(kn:gnus, author = {Donald E. Knudson},
+ TITLE = "1966 World Gnus Almanac",
+ PUBLISHER = {Permafrost Press},
+ ADDRESS = {Novisibirsk} )
+
+ However, the case of letters does matter to LaTeX, so the
+ citation key ("kn:gnus" in the example above) should appear
+ exactly the same in all \cite commands in the LaTeX input file.
+
+ The quotes or braces can be omitted around text consisting
+ entirely of numerals. The following two fields are equivalent:
+Volume = "27" Volume = 27
+
+3.3 Entry Types
+
+ When entering a reference in the bibliography database, the
+ first thing to decide is what type of entry it is. No fixed
+ classification scheme can be complete, but BibTeX provides
+ enough entry types to handle almost any reference reasonably
+ well.
+
+ References to different types of publications contain different
+ information; a reference to a journal might include the volume
+ and number of the journal, which is usually not meaningful for
+ a book. Therefore, database entries of different types have
+ different fields for each entry type, the fields are divided
+ into three classes:
+
+ Required
+ omitting the field will produce an error message and may
+ result in a badly formatted bibliography entry. If the
+ required information is not meaningful, you are using
+ the wrong entry type.
+
+ Optional
+ the field's information will be used if present, but can
+ be omitted without causing any formatting problems. A
+ reference should contain any available information that
+ might help the reader, so you should include the
+ optional field if it is applicable.
+
+ Ignored
+ the field is ignored. BibTeX ignores any field that is
+ not required or optional, so you can include any fields
+ you want in a bibliography entry. It's often a good idea
+ to put all relevant information about a reference in its
+ bibliography entry - even information that may never
+ appear in the bibliography. For example, if you want to
+ keep an abstract of a paper in a computer file, put it
+ in an 'abstract' field in the paper's bibliography
+ entry. The bibliography database file is likely to be as
+ good a place as any for the abstract, and it is possible
+ to design a bibliography style for printing selected
+ abstracts.
+
+ BibTeX ignores the case of letters in the entry type.
+
+3.3.1 article entry
+
+ An article from a journal or magazine.
+
+ Format:
+@ARTICLE{citation_key,
+ required_fields [, optional_fields] }
+
+ Required fields: author, title, journal, year
+
+ Optional fields: volume, number, pages, month, note, key
+
+3.3.2 book entry
+
+ A book with an explicit publisher.
+
+ Format:
+@BOOK{citation_key,
+ required_fields [, optional_fields] }
+
+ Required fields: author or editor, title, publisher, year
+
+ Optional fields: volume, series, address, edition, month, note,
+ key
+
+3.3.3 booklet entry
+
+ A work that is printed and bound, but without a named publisher
+ or sponsoring institution.
+
+ Format:
+@BOOKLET{citation_key,
+ required_fields [, optional_fields] }
+
+ Required fields: title
+
+ Optional fields: author, howpublished, address, month, year,
+ note, key
+
+3.3.4 conference entry
+
+ An article in the proceedings of a conference. This entry is
+ identical to the 'inproceedings' entry and is included for
+ compatibility with another text formatting system.
+
+ Format:
+@CONFERENCE{citation_key,
+ required_fields [, optional_fields] }
+
+ Required fields: author, title, booktitle, year
+
+ Optional fields: editor, pages, organization, publisher,
+ address, month, note, key
+
+3.3.5 inbook entry
+
+ A part of a book, which may be a chapter and/or a range of
+ pages.
+
+ Format:
+@INBOOK{citation_key,
+ required_fields [, optional_fields] }
+
+ Required fields: author or editor, title, chapter and/or pages,
+ publisher, year
+
+ Optional fields: volume, series, address, edition, month, note,
+ key
+
+3.3.6 incollection entry
+
+ A part of a book with its own title.
+
+ Format:
+@INCOLLECTION{citation_key,
+ required_fields [, optional_fields] }
+
+ Required fields: author, title, booktitle, year
+
+ Optional fields: editor, pages, organization, publisher,
+ address, month, note, key
+
+3.3.7 inproceedings entry
+
+ An article in the proceedings of a conference.
+
+ Format:
+@INPROCEEDINGS{citation_key,
+ required_fields [, optional_fields] }
+
+ Required fields: author, title, booktitle, year
+
+ Optional fields: editor, pages, organization, publisher,
+ address, month, note, key
+
+3.3.8 manual entry
+
+ Technical documentation.
+
+ Format:
+@MANUAL{citation_key,
+ required_fields [, optional_fields] }
+
+ Required fields: title
+
+ Optional fields: author, organization, address, edition, month,
+ year, note, key
+
+3.3.9 mastersthesis entry
+
+ A Master's thesis.
+
+ Format:
+@MASTERSTHESIS{citation_key,
+ required_fields [, optional_fields] }
+
+ Required fields: author, title, school, year
+
+ Optional fields: address, month, note, key
+
+3.3.10 misc entry
+
+ Use this type when nothing else seems appropriate.
+
+ Format:
+@MISC{citation_key,
+ required_fields [, optional_fields] }
+
+ Required fields: none
+
+ Optional fields: author, title, howpublished, month, year,
+ note, key
+
+3.3.11 phdthesis entry
+
+ A PhD thesis.
+
+ Format:
+@PHDTHESIS{citation_key,
+ required_fields [, optional_fields] }
+
+ Required fields: author, title, school, year
+
+ Optional fields: address, month, note, key
+
+3.3.12 proceedings entry
+
+ The proceedings of a conference.
+
+ Format:
+@PROCEEDINGS{citation_key,
+ required_fields [, optional_fields] }
+
+ Required fields: title, year
+
+ Optional fields: editor, publisher, organization, address,
+ month, note, key
+
+3.3.13 techreport entry
+
+ A report published by a school or other institution, usually
+ numbered within a series.
+
+ Format:
+@TECHREPORT{citation_key,
+ required_fields [, optional_fields] }
+
+ Required fields: author, title, institution, year
+
+ Optional fields: type, number, address, month, note, key
+
+3.3.14 unpublished entry
+
+ A document with an author and title, but not formally
+ published.
+
+ Format:
+@UNPUBLISHED{citation_key,
+ required_fields [, optional_fields] }
+
+ Required fields: author, title, note
+
+ Optional fields: month, year, key
+
+3.4 Field Text
+
+ The text of the field is enclosed in braces or double quote
+ characters. A part of the text is said to be enclosed in braces
+ if it lies inside a matching pair of braces other than the ones
+ enclosing the entire entry or the entire field text.
+
+ BibTeX manipulates the case of letters in the field text as
+ described in the subtopics below.
+
+3.4.1 Names
+
+ The text of an author or editor field represents a list of
+ names. The bibliography style determines the format in which
+ the name is printed: whether the first name or last name
+ appears first, if the full first name or just the first initial
+ is used, etc. The bibliography file entry simply tells BibTeX
+ what the name is.
+
+ You should type an author's complete name and let the
+ bibliography style decide what to abbreviate. (But an author's
+ complete name may be "Donald~E. Knuth" or even "J.~P.~Morgan";
+ you should type it the way the author would like it to appear,
+ if that's known.)
+
+ Most names can be entered in the obvious way, either with or
+ without a comma, as in the following examples:
+
+ "John Paul Jones" "Jones, John Paul" "Ludwig von Beethoven"
+ "von Beethoven, Ludwig"
+
+ Some people have multiple last names - for example, Per Brinch
+ Hansen's last name is Brinch~Hansen. His name should be typed
+ with a comma:
+
+ "Brinch Hansen, Per"
+
+ To understand why, you must understand how BibTeX handles names
+ (for what follows, a "name" corresponds to a person).
+
+ Each name consists of four parts: First, von, Last, and~Jr;
+ each part consists of a (possibly empty) list of name-tokens.
+ For example the First part of Per Brinch~Hansen's name has the
+ single token "Per"; the Last part has two, "Brinch" and
+ "Hansen"; and the von and Jr parts are empty. If you had typed
+
+ "Per Brinch Hansen"
+
+ instead, BibTeX would erroneously think "Brinch" were a
+ First-part token, just as "Paul" is a First-part token in
+ "John~Paul Jones".
+
+ Here's another example:
+
+ "Charles Louis Xavier Joseph de la Vallee Poussin"
+
+ This name has four tokens in the First part, two in the von,
+ and two in the Last. Here BibTeX knows where one part ends and
+ the other begins because the tokens in the von part begin with
+ lower-case letters.
+
+ If you want BibTeX to consider something a single token,
+ enclose it in braces. You should do this, for example, if a
+ comma is part of a name:
+
+ "{Barnes and Noble, Inc.}" "{Barnes and} {Noble, Inc.}"
+ "{Barnes} {and} {Noble,} {Inc.}"
+
+ The braces surrounding the comma keep "Inc." from being
+ interpreted as a First token; this name has only a Last part,
+ with either one, two, or four tokens (there must be a space
+ separating the tokens in the second and third forms). Probably
+ the second form is slightly more meaningful, but don't lose
+ sleep over this since only rarely will an institution be an
+ author or editor.
+
+ So the two names
+
+ "von Beethoven, Ludwig" "{von Beethoven}, Ludwig"
+
+ are considered by BibTeX to be different names. In the first,
+ "Beethoven" is the Last part and "von" is the von part; in the
+ second, which in this case happens to be incorrect, the Last
+ part has a single token and there's no von part. The
+ bibliography style will probably print both the same, but it
+ may alphabetize and label them differently.
+
+ "Juniors" pose a special problem. Most people having "Jr." in
+ their name precede it with a comma. Such a name should be
+ entered as follows:
+
+ "Ford, Jr., Henry"
+
+ However, a few people do not use a comma. They are handled by
+ considering the "Jr." to be part of the last Last token:
+
+ "{Steele Jr.}, Guy L." "Guy L. {Steele Jr.}"
+
+ This name has no Jr part.
+
+ To summarize, you may type a name in one of three forms:
+
+ "First von Last" "von Last, First" "von Last, Jr, First"
+
+ You may almost always use the first form; you shouldn't if
+ either there's a Jr part or the Last part has multiple tokens
+ but there's no von part.
+
+ If there are multiple authors or editors, their names must be
+ separated by the word "and", surrounded by spaces, not enclosed
+ in braces:
+
+ AUTHOR = "Ralph Alpher and Bethe, Hans and George Gamow"
+
+ Since BibTeX interprets commas as separating parts of a name
+ and "and" as separating names themselves, this example has
+ three coauthors: Ralph Alpher, Hans Bethe, and George Gamow. If
+ the word "and" appears as part of a name, it must be enclosed
+ in braces, as in the example of "Barnes and Noble,~Inc." given
+ above. If you have too many names to list in a field, you can
+ end the list with "and others"; the standard styles
+ appropriately append an "et al."
+
+ BibTeX's rules are actually a bit more complicated than
+ indicated here, but this description will suffice for most
+ names.
+
+3.4.2 Titles
+
+ The bibliography style determines whether or not a title is
+ capitalized; the titles of books usually are, the title of
+ articles usually are not. You type a title the way it should
+ appear if it is capitalized (you should capitalize everything
+ but articles and unstressed conjunctions and prepositions, and
+ even these should be capitalized as the first word or the first
+ after a colon):
+
+ TITLE = "The Agony and the Ecstasy"
+
+ BibTeX will change uppercase letters to lowercase if
+ appropriate. Uppercase letters that should not be changed are
+ enclosed in braces. The following two titles are equivalent;
+ the "A" of "Africa" will not be made lowercase.
+
+ "The Gnats and Gnus of {Africa}" "The Gnats and Gnus of
+ {A}frica"
+
+3.4.3 Abbreviations
+
+ Instead of an ordinary text string, the text of a field can be
+ replaced by an abbreviation for it. An abbreviation is a string
+ of characters that starts with a letter and does not contain a
+ space or any of the following ten characters:
+
+ " # % ' ( ) , = { }
+
+ The abbreviation is typed in place of the text field, with no
+ braces or quotation marks. If 'jgg1' is an abbreviation for
+
+ Journal of Gnats and Gnus, Series~1
+
+ then the following are equivalent:
+
+ JOURNAL = jgg1 JOURNAL = "Journal of Gnats and Gnus, Series~1"
+
+ Some abbreviations are predefined by the bibliography style.
+ These always include the usual 3 letter abbreviations for the
+ month: jan, feb, mar etc.
+
+ Bibliography styles usually contain abbreviations for the names
+ of commonly referenced journals. Consult the Local Guide for a
+ list of the predefined abbreviations for the bibliography
+ styles available.
+
+ You can define your own abbreviations by using BibTeX's @STRING
+ command.
+
+3.5 Field Types
+
+ Below is a list of all fields recognized by the standard
+ bibliography styles. An entry can also contain other fields,
+ which are ignored by those styles.
+
+ BibTeX ignores the case of letters in the field names.
+
+3.5.1 address field
+
+ Publisher's address. For major publishing houses, just the city
+ is given. For small publishers, you can help the reader by
+ giving the complete address.
+
+ Format:
+ADDRESS = field_text
+
+3.5.2 annote field
+
+ An annotation, used only for annotated bibliography styles
+ (which are not among the standard ones).
+
+ Format:
+ANNOTE = field_text
+
+3.5.3 author field
+
+ The name(s) of the author(s).
+
+ Format:
+AUTHOR = field_text
+
+3.5.4 booktitle field
+
+ Title of a book, part of which is being cited.
+
+ Format:
+BOOKTITLE = field_text
+
+3.5.5 chapter field
+
+ A chapter number.
+
+ Format:
+CHAPTER = field_text
+
+3.5.6 edition field
+
+ The edition of a book - for example, "second".
+
+ Format:
+EDITION = field_text
+
+3.5.7 editor field
+
+ Name(s) of editor(s). If there is also an "author" field, then
+ the "editor" field gives the editor of the book or collection
+ in which the reference appears.
+
+ Format:
+EDITOR = field_text
+
+3.5.8 howpublished field
+
+ How something strange has been published.
+
+ Format:
+HOWPUBLISHED = field_text
+
+3.5.9 institution field
+
+ The institution that published the work.
+
+ Format:
+INSTITUTION = field_text
+
+3.5.10 journal field
+
+ A journal name. Abbreviations are provided for many journals;
+ see the Local Guide.
+
+ Format:
+JOURNAL = field_text
+
+3.5.11 key field
+
+ Used for alphabetizing and creating a label when the "author"
+ and "editor" fields are missing. This field should not be
+ confused with the citation key that appears in the \cite
+ command and at the beginning of the entry.
+
+ Format:
+KEY = field_text
+
+3.5.12 month field
+
+ The month in which the work was published or, for an
+ unpublished work, in which it was written.
+
+ Format:
+MONTH = field_text
+
+3.5.13 note field
+
+ Any additional information that can help the reader.
+
+ Format:
+NOTE = field_text
+
+3.5.14 number field
+
+ The number of a journal, magazine, or technical report. An
+ issue of a journal or magazine is usually identified by its
+ volume and number; the organization that issues a technical
+ report usually gives it a number.
+
+ Format:
+NUMBER = field_text
+
+3.5.15 organization field
+
+ The organization sponsoring a conference.
+
+ Format:
+ORGANIZATION = field_text
+
+3.5.16 pages field
+
+ A page number or range of numbers such as "42--111"; you may
+ also have several of these, separating them with commas:
+ "7,41,73--97". The standard styles convert a single dash to a
+ double. >
+
+ Format:
+PAGES = field_text
+
+3.5.17 publisher field
+
+ The publisher's name.
+
+ Format:
+PUBLISHER = field_text
+
+3.5.18 school field
+
+ The name of the school where a thesis was written.
+
+ Format:
+SCHOOL = field_text
+
+3.5.19 series field
+
+ The name of a series or set of books. When citing an entire
+ book, the the "title" field gives its title and an optional
+ "series" field gives the name of a series in which the book is
+ published.
+
+ Format:
+SERIES = field_text
+
+3.5.20 title field
+
+ The work's title.
+
+ Format:
+TITLE = field_text
+
+3.5.21 type field
+
+ The type of a technical report - for example, "Research Note".
+
+ Format:
+TYPE = field_text
+
+3.5.22 volume field
+
+ The volume of a journal or multivolume book work.
+
+ Format:
+VOLUME = field_text
+
+3.5.23 year field
+
+ The year of publication or, for an unpublished work, the year
+ it was written. This field's text should contain only numerals.
+
+ Format:
+YEAR = field_text
+
+4 bst files
+
+ Bibliography style files define the style of a bibliography
+ source list.
+
+ The standard bibliography style files are PLAIN, UNSRT, ALPHA
+ and ABBRV.
+
+ If you want to make a bibliography style of your own, look at
+ SAMPLE.BST.
+
+4.1 ABBRV.BST
+
+ This style is the same as the style defined in PLAIN.BST,
+ except that entries are more compact because first names, month
+ names and journal names are abbreviated.
+
+4.2 ALPHA.BST
+
+ This style is the same as the style defined in PLAIN.BST except
+ that entry labels like "Knu66", formed from the author's name
+ and the year of publication, are used.
+
+4.3 PLAIN.BST
+
+ This style is formatted more or less as suggested by
+ Mary-Claire van Leunen in "A Handbook for Scholars" (Alfred A.
+ Knopf, New York, 1979). Entries are sorted alphabetically and
+ are labelled with numbers.
+
+4.4 SAMPLE.BST
+
+ This is a sample bibliography style file meant to help you
+ construct a new style. It creates a bibliography in which
+ entries appear as follows:
+
+ [Jones79] Jones, R. L. and Richards, P. Q. The Birds and the
+ Bees. {\it Journal of Irreproducible Results 4}, 2 (Jan. 1979),
+ 27-33.
+
+ [Jones82a] Jones, P. G. The Bees and the Trees ... (1982).
+
+ [Jones82b] Jones, R. L. The Trees and the Peas ... (1982).
+
+ [Krist74] Kristofferson, R. P. Peopl and Places ... (1974)
+
+ It should illustrate how you write a style file. The functions
+ are described in an informal Pascal-like style in comments.
+ Because of the way while loops and if-then-else statements must
+ use functions, the following convention is used. If a while
+ loop is labeled 'foo' in the informal description, then its
+ test and body are the functions named 'foo.test' and
+ 'foo.body'. If an if statement is labeled 'foo', then its two
+ clauses are the functions named 'foo.then' and 'foo.else'.
+ (Null clauses just use the 'skip$' function.) Note that because
+ functions have to be defined in terms of already-defined
+ functions, the actual function definitions are given in a
+ 'bottom-up' order.
+
+4.5 UNSRT.BST
+
+ This style is that same as PLAIN.BST except that entries appear
+ in the order of their first citation.
+
+Chapter 6. Make-Index
+
+ Table of Contents
+
+ 1 Options
+
+ 1.1 -c
+ 1.2 -g
+ 1.3 -i
+ 1.4 -l
+ 1.5 -q
+ 1.6 -r
+ 1.7 -s sty
+ 1.8 -o ind
+ 1.9 -t log
+ 1.10 -p no
+ 1.11 -L
+ 1.12 -T
+
+ 2 Style File
+
+ 2.1 Input Style Specifiers
+ 2.2 Output Style Specifiers
+
+ 3 Example
+ 4 Ordering
+ 5 Special Effects
+
+Note
+
+ The contents of this section was taken from the HTML helppages
+ for Make-Index of Norman Walsh (Version 1.0, 12 Apr 94).
+
+ Some obvious errors in this documentation have been corrected
+ according to makeindex(1L).
+
+ Additional information was taken from makeindex(1L) and the
+ program source files as found in teTeX 2.0.2.
+
+ Make-Index is a general purpose index processor. It takes one
+ or more raw index files (normally generated by a formatter),
+ sorts the entries, and produces the actual index file. It is
+ not dependent on any particular format of raw index file,
+ although the .idx file generated by LaTeX is the default. Up to
+ three levels (0, 1, and 2) of subitem nesting within the same
+ entry is supported. The input format may be redefined in a
+ style file so that raw index or glossary output from other
+ formatters may be processed. The style file also defines the
+ style of output index file. Unless specified otherwise, the
+ file name base of the first input file (idx0) is used to
+ determine other related input/output files. The default input
+ file type is .idx.
+
+1 Options
+
+ Make-Index is a Unix program, and therefore has a Unix-style
+ command line. Instead of qualifiers delimited with a slash (/),
+ Make-Index options are delimited with a hyphen (-).
+
+1.1 -c
+
+ Enable blank compression. By default every blank counts in the
+ index key. The -c option ignores leading and trailing blanks
+ and tabs and compresses intermediate ones to a single space.
+
+1.2 -g
+
+ Employ German word ordering in the index, in accord with rules
+ set forth in DIN 5007. The quote character must be redefined in
+ a style file (for example, redefine quote as '+'). If the quote
+ character is not redefined, Make-Index will produce an error
+ message and abort.
+
+1.3 -i
+
+ Use stdin as the input file. When this option is specified and
+ the -o is not, output is written to stdout.
+
+1.4 -l
+
+ Use letter ordering. Default is word ordering (explained in the
+ Ordering section).
+
+1.5 -q
+
+ Quiet mode, send no messages to stderr. By default progress and
+ error messages are sent to stderr as well as the transcript
+ file. The -q option disables the stderr messages.
+
+1.6 -r
+
+ Disable implicit page range formation. By default three or more
+ successive pages will be automatically abbreviated as a range
+ (e.g. 1--5). The -r option disables it, making the explicit
+ range operators the only way to create page ranges (see the
+ Special Effects section below).
+
+1.7 -s sty
+
+ Take sty as the style file. There is no default for the style
+ file name. The environment variable INDEXSTYLE defines the path
+ where the style file should be found.
+
+1.8 -o ind
+
+ Take ind as the output index file. By default the file name
+ base of the first input file idx0 concatenated with the
+ extension .ind is used as the output file name.
+
+1.9 -t log
+
+ Take log as the transcript file. By default the file name base
+ of the first input file idx0 concatenated with the extension
+ .ilg is used as the transcript file name.
+
+1.10 -p no
+
+ Set the starting page number of the output index file to be no.
+ This is useful when the index file is to be formatted
+ separately. Other than pure numbers, three special cases are
+ allowed for no: any, odd, and even. In these special cases, the
+ starting page number is determined by retrieving the last page
+ number from the source log file. The source log file name is
+ determined by concatenating the file name base of the first raw
+ index file (idx0) with the extension .log. The last source page
+ is obtained by searching backward in the log file for the first
+ instance of a number included in [...]. If a page number is
+ missing or the log file is not found, no attempt will be made
+ to set the starting page number. The meaning of each of these
+ cases follows:
+
+ any
+ The starting page is the last source page number plus 1.
+
+ odd
+ The starting page is the first odd page following the
+ last source page number.
+
+ even
+ The starting page is the first even page following the
+ last source page number.
+
+1.11 -L
+
+ Sort based on locale settings. String comparisons for sorting
+ are done using strcoll(3), which compares strings according to
+ the current locale category LC_COLLATE.
+
+ Not available on all systems (depends on compile time
+ settings).
+
+1.12 -T
+
+ Special support for Thai documents.
+
+ Not available on all systems (depends on compile time
+ settings).
+
+2 Style File
+
+ The style file format is very simple. It is a list of
+ <specifier, attribute> pairs. There are two types of specifiers
+ (input and output). The pairs don't have to obey any particular
+ order in the file. A line lead by `%' is a comment. The
+ following is a list of all the specifiers and their respective
+ arguments where <string> is an arbitrary string delimited by
+ double quotes ("..."), <char> is a single letter embraced by
+ single quotes ('...'), and <number> is a nonnegative integer.
+ The maximum length of a <string> is 144. Notice that a
+ backslash must be escaped (by an extra backslash) in the string
+ quotation. Anything not specified in the style file will be
+ assigned a default value, which is shown on a separate line.
+ This file can reside anywhere in the path defined by the
+ environment variable INDEXSTYLE.
+
+2.1 Input Style Specifiers
+
+2.1.1 actual <char>
+
+ Default: @
+
+ The symbol which indicates that the next entry is to appear in
+ the actual index file.
+
+2.1.2 arg_close <char>
+
+ Default: }
+
+ This is the closing delimiter for the index entry argument.
+
+2.1.3 arg_open <char>
+
+ Default: {
+
+ This is the opening delimiter for the index entry argument.
+
+2.1.4 encap <char>
+
+ Default: |
+
+ The symbol which indicates that the rest of the argument list
+ is to be used as the encapsulating command for the page number.
+
+2.1.5 escape <char>
+
+ Default: \\
+
+ The symbol which escapes the next letter, unless its preceding
+ letter is escape. In other words, quote is used to escape the
+ letter which immediately follows it. But if it is preceded by
+ escape, it does not escape anything.
+
+ Notice that the two symbols must be distinct.
+
+2.1.6 keyword <string>
+
+ Default: "\\indexentry"
+
+ This is the command which tells Make-Index that its argument is
+ an index entry.
+
+2.1.7 level <char>
+
+ Default: !
+
+ The delimiter which denotes a new level of subitem.
+
+2.1.8 quote <char>
+
+ Default: "
+
+ quote is used to escape the letter which immediately follows
+ it, but if it is preceded by escape, it is treated as a
+ ordinary character. These two symbols must be distinct.
+
+2.1.9 range_close <char>
+
+ Default: )
+
+ The closing delimiter indicating the end of an explicit page
+ range.
+
+2.1.10 range_open <char>
+
+ Default: (
+
+ The opening delimiter indicating the beginning of an explicit
+ page range.
+
+2.2 Output Style Specifiers
+
+2.2.1 page_compositor <string>
+
+ Default: "-"
+
+ This specifier is used to separate a range of page numbers.
+
+ Officially undocumented!
+
+2.2.2 preamble <string>
+
+ Default: "\\begin{theindex}\n"
+
+ The preamble of actual index file.
+
+2.2.3 postamble <string>
+
+ Default: "\n\n\\end{theindex}\n"
+
+ The postamble of actual index file.
+
+2.2.4 setpage_prefix <string>
+
+ Default: "\n \\setcounter{page}{"
+
+ The prefix of the command which sets the starting page number.
+
+2.2.5 setpage_suffix <string>
+
+ Default: "}\n"
+
+ The suffix of the command which sets the starting page number.
+
+2.2.6 group_skip <string>
+
+ Default: "\n\n \\indexspace\n"
+
+ The vertical space to be inserted before a new group begins.
+
+2.2.7 heading_prefix <string>
+
+ Default: ""
+
+ The header prefix to be inserted before a new letter begins.
+
+2.2.8 heading_suffix <string>
+
+ Default: ""
+
+ The header suffix to be inserted before a new letter begins.
+
+2.2.9 headings_flag <string>
+
+ Default: 0
+
+ The flag indicating the condition of inserting new letter
+ header. Default is 0, which means no header. Positive means
+ insert an uppercase letter between prefix and suffix. Negative
+ means insert a lowercase letter.
+
+2.2.10 symhead_positive <string>
+
+ Default: "Symbols"
+
+ Heading for symbols to be inserted if headings_flag is
+ positive.
+
+2.2.11 symhead_negative <string>
+
+ Default: "symbols"
+
+ Heading for symbols to be inserted if headings_flag is
+ negative.
+
+2.2.12 numhead_positive <string>
+
+ Default: "Numbers"
+
+ Heading for numbers to be inserted if headings_flag is
+ positive.
+
+2.2.13 numhead_negative <string>
+
+ Default: "numbers"
+
+ Heading for numbers to be inserted if headings_flag is
+ negative.
+
+2.2.14 item_0 <string>
+
+ Default: "\n \\item "
+
+ The command to be inserted between two primary (level 0) items.
+
+2.2.15 item_1 <string>
+
+ Default: "\n \\subitem "
+
+ The command to be inserted between two secondary (level 1)
+ items.
+
+2.2.16 item_2 <string>
+
+ Default: "\n \\subsubitem "
+
+ The command to be inserted between two level 2 items.
+
+2.2.17 item_01 <string>
+
+ Default: "\n \\subitem "
+
+ The command to be inserted between a level 0 item and a level 1
+ item.
+
+2.2.18 item_x1 <string>
+
+ Default: "\n \\subitem "
+
+ The command to be inserted between a level 0 item and a level 1
+ item. The difference between this and previous is that in this
+ case the level 0 item doesn't have any page numbers.
+
+2.2.19 item_12 <string>
+
+ Default: "\n \\subsubitem "
+
+ The command to be inserted between a level 1 item and a level 2
+ item.
+
+2.2.20 item_x2 <string>
+
+ Default: "\n \\subsubitem "
+
+ The command to be inserted between a level 1 item and a level 2
+ item. The difference between this and previous is that in this
+ case the level 1 item doesn't have any page numbers.
+
+2.2.21 delim_0 <string>
+
+ Default: ", "
+
+ The delimiter to be inserted between a level 0 key and its
+ first page number. Default is a comma followed by a blank.
+
+2.2.22 delim_1 <string>
+
+ Default: ", "
+
+ The delimiter to be inserted between a level 1 key and its
+ first page number. Default is a comma followed by a blank.
+
+2.2.23 delim_2 <string>
+
+ Default: ", "
+
+ The delimiter to be inserted between a level 2 key and its
+ first page number. Default is a comma followed by a blank.
+
+2.2.24 delim_n <string>
+
+ Default: ", "
+
+ The delimiter to be inserted between two page numbers for the
+ same key in any level. Default is a comma followed by a blank.
+
+2.2.25 delim_r <string>
+
+ Default: "--"
+
+ The delimiter to be inserted between the starting and ending
+ page numbers of a range.
+
+2.2.26 delim_t <string>
+
+ Default: ""
+
+ The delimiter to be inserted at the end of a page list. This
+ delimiter has no effect on entries which have no associated
+ page list.
+
+2.2.27 encap_prefix <string>
+
+ Default: "\\"
+
+ The prefix for the command which encapsulates the page number.
+
+2.2.28 encap_infix <string>
+
+ Default: "{"
+
+ The prefix for the command which encapsulates the page number.
+
+2.2.29 encap_suffix <string>
+
+ Default: "}"
+
+ The suffix for the command which encapsulates the page number.
+
+2.2.30 line_max <number>
+
+ Default: 72
+
+ The maximum length of a line in the output beyond which a line
+ wraps around.
+
+2.2.31 indent_space <string>
+
+ Default: "\t\t"
+
+ The space to be inserted in front of a wrapped line. Default is
+ two tabs.
+
+2.2.32 indent_length <number>
+
+ Default: 16
+
+ The length of indent_space. In the default case this is 16 (for
+ 2 tabs).
+
+2.2.33 suffix_2p <string>
+
+ Default: ""
+
+ Delimiter to replace the range delimiter and the second page
+ number of a two page list. When present, it overrides delim_r.
+
+2.2.34 suffix_3p <string>
+
+ Default: ""
+
+ Delimiter to replace the range delimiter and the second page
+ number of a three page list. When present, it overrides delim_r
+ and suffix_mp.
+
+2.2.35 suffix_mp <string>
+
+ Default: ""
+
+ Delimiter to replace the range delimiter and the second page
+ number of a multiple page list (three or more pages). When
+ present, it overrides delim_r.
+
+3 Example
+
+ The following example shows a style file called book.isty which
+ defines a stand-alone index for a book. By stand-alone, we mean
+ it can be formatted independent of the main source.
+preamble
+"\\documentstyle[12pt]{book}
+\\begin{document}
+\\begin{theindex}
+{\\small\n"
+
+postamble
+"\n\n}
+\\end{theindex}
+\\end{document}\n"
+
+ Suppose a particular book style requires the index (as well as
+ any chapters) to start from an odd page number. Given foo.idx
+ as the raw index file, the following command line produces an
+ index in file foo-.ind.
+makeindex -s book.isty -o foo-.ind -p odd foo
+
+ The reason to use a non-default output file name is to avoid
+ clobbering the source output (presumably foo.dvi) because if
+ the index is in file foo.ind, its output will also be in
+ foo.dvi as a result of separate formatting using . In the
+ example the index is in foo-.ind, its output will be in
+ foo-.dvi and thus introduces no confusion.
+
+4 Ordering
+
+ By default makeindex assumes word ordering. The -l option turns
+ it into letter ordering. The only difference is whether a blank
+ is treated as an effective letter or not. In word ordering, a
+ blank precedes any letter in the alphabet, whereas in letter
+ ordering, it doesn't count at all. This is best illustrated by
+ the following example:
+ word order letter order
+ sea lion seal
+ seal seal lion
+
+ Numbers are sorted in numeric order. For instance,
+ 9 (nine), 123
+ 123 10 (ten), see Derek, Bo
+
+ Letters are first sorted with uppercase and lowercase
+ considered identical; then, within identical words the
+ uppercase letter precedes its lowercase counterpart.
+
+ Patterns lead by a special symbol precede numbers, which
+ precede patterns lead by a letter. The symbol here refers to
+ anything not in the union of digits and English alphabet. This
+ includes those which follow 'z' in the ASCII chart. As a
+ special case, anything started with a digit but mixed with
+ non-digits is considered a symbol-leading pattern instead of a
+ number.
+
+5 Special Effects
+
+ In the normal case entries such as
+\indexentry{alpha}{1}
+\indexentry{alpha!beta}{3}
+\indexentry{alpha!beta!gamma}{10}
+
+ in the raw index file will be converted to
+\item alpha, 1
+ \subitem beta, 3
+ \subsubitem gamma, 10
+
+ in the output index file by Make-Index. Notice that the level
+ symbol (!) is used to delimit levels of nesting.
+
+ It is possible to make an item appear in a designated form by
+ using the actual (@) operator. For instance,
+\indexentry{alpha@{\it alpha\/}}{1}
+
+ will become
+\item {\it alpha\/} 1
+
+ after the conversion. The idea is that the pattern preceding @
+ is used as sort key, whereas the one following it is put in the
+ actual result. However, the same key with and without the
+ actual part are regarded as distinct entries.
+
+ It is also possible to encapsulate a page number with a
+ designated command using the encap (|) operator. For example,
+ in the default case,
+\indexentry{alpha|bold}{1}
+
+ will be converted to
+\item alpha \bold{1}
+
+ where \bold{n} will expand to {\bf n}. This allows the encap
+ operator to be used to set pages in different fonts, thereby
+ conveying more information about whatever being indexed. For
+ instance, given the same key the page where its definition
+ appears can be in one font while where its primary example is
+ given can be in another, with other ordinary appearances in a
+ third. Notice that in this example, the three output attributes
+ associated with page encapsulation encap_prefix, encap_infix,
+ and encap_suffix correspond respectively to backslash, left
+ brace, and right brace. If this is to be formatted by languages
+ other than , they would be defined differently.
+
+ By the same token, the encap operator can be used to make cross
+ references in the index. For instance,
+\indexentry{alpha|see{beta}}{1}
+
+ will become
+\item alpha \see{beta}{1}
+
+ in the output index file after the conversion, where
+\see{beta}{1}
+
+ will expand to
+{\it see\/} beta
+
+ Notice that in a cross reference like this the page number
+ disappears. Therefore, where to insert such a command in the
+ source is immaterial.
+
+ A pair of encap concatenated with range_open (|() and with
+ range_close (|)) creates an explicit page range. That is,
+\indexentry{alpha|(}{1}
+\indexentry{alpha|)}{5}
+
+ will become
+\item alpha, 1--5
+
+ Intermediate pages indexed by the same key will be merged into
+ the range implicitly. This is especially useful when an entire
+ section about a particular subject is to be indexed, in which
+ case only the range opening and closing operators need to be
+ inserted at the beginning and end of the section, respectively.
+
+ This explicit page range formation can also include an extra
+ command to set the page range in a designated font. Thus
+\indexentry{alpha|(bold}{1}
+\indexentry{alpha|)}{5}
+
+ will become
+\item alpha, \bold{1--5}
+
+ A couple of special cases are worth mentioning here. First,
+ entries like
+\indexentry{alpha|(}{1}
+\indexentry{alpha|bold}{3}
+\indexentry{alpha|)}{5}
+
+ will be interpreted as
+\item alpha, \bold{3}, 1--5
+
+ but with a warning message in the transcript about the
+ encounter of an inconsistent page encapsulator. Secondly, an
+ explicit range beginning in a Roman page number and ending in
+ Arabic is considered an error. In a case like this the range is
+ broken into two subranges, if possible, one in Roman, the other
+ in Arabic. For instance,
+\indexentry{alpha|(}{i}
+\indexentry{alpha}{iv}
+\indexentry{alpha}{3}
+\indexentry{alpha|)}{7}
+
+ will be turned into
+\item alpha, 1--iv, 3--7
+
+ with a warning message in the transcript complaining about the
+ illegal range formation.
+
+ Finally, every special symbol mentioned in this section may be
+ escaped by the quote operator ("). Thus
+\indexentry{alpha"@beta}{1}
+
+ will actually become
+\item alpha@beta, 1
+
+ as a result of executing Make-Index. However, if quote is
+ preceded by escape (\), its following letter is not escaped.
+ That is,
+\indexentry{f\"ur}{1}
+
+ means
+\item f\"ur, 1
+
+ which represents umlaut accented u to the family of processors.
+
+Chapter 7. xindy
+
+ Table of Contents
+
+ 1 Command List
+
+ 1.1 Processing Commands
+ 1.2 Markup Commands
+ 1.3 Raw Index Interface
+
+ 2 Invoking xindy
+
+ 2.1 Command Line Options
+ 2.2 Search Path
+
+Note
+
+ The content of this section was taken from the original
+ documentation of xindy V2.1 (Doc/manual*.html).
+
+ xindy means flexible indexing system. It is an indexing system
+ that can be used to generate book-like indexes for arbitrary
+ document preparation systems. This term includes systems such
+ as TeX and LaTeX, the Nroff-family or SGML-based systems (e.g.
+ HTML) that process some kind of text and generate indexing
+ information. It is not fixed to any specific system, but can be
+ configured for a wide variety of purposes.
+
+1 Command List
+
+ Here is the complete list of xindy's commands that may be used
+ in the index style. The symbol name always refers to a string.
+ We separate the commands into the processing and markup
+ commands. The commands are listed in alphabetical order.
+
+ The parenthesis [ and ] denote optional parts of the syntax and
+ { and } denote the grouping of elements. A vertical bar
+ indicates alternatives. However, the enclosing round braces are
+ part of the syntax and must be supplied.
+
+1.1 Processing Commands
+
+1.1.1 define-alphabet
+
+(define-alphabet name string-list)
+
+ Defines name to be the alphabet consisting of all elements of
+ the string-list. Examples:
+(define-alphabet "example-alphabet" ("An" "Example" "Alphabet"))
+
+ defines an alphabet consisting of exactly three symbols. For
+ the successor relationship holds: succ("An")="Example" and
+ succ("Example")="Alphabet". The built-in alphabet digits is
+ defined as follows:
+(define-alphabet "digits"
+ ("0" "1" "2" "3" "4" "5" "6" "7" "8" "9"))
+
+1.1.2 define-attributes
+
+(define-attributes attribute-list)
+
+ Defines all attributes the raw index may contain. Parameter
+ attribute-list is a list of list of strings. The nesting level
+ must not be more than 2. So (..(..)..) is allowed, whereas
+ (..(..(..)..)..) is not.
+
+ The list has two kinds of elements: strings and list of
+ strings. A single string is treated as if it were a single
+ element list. So the lists ("definition") and ( ("definition")
+ ) are equivalent. All elements forming a list are a so-called
+ attribute group. The members of a group are written to the
+ output file before any member of the following groups are
+ written.
+
+ Examples of valid attributes lists are:
+
+ ("definition" "usage") defines two attribute groups. The first
+ one contains all references with the attribute definition and
+ the second one all with the attribute usage.
+
+ (("definition" "important") "usage") defines two attribute
+ groups. The first one contains all references with the
+ attributes definition or important and the second one all with
+ the attribute usage. In the attribute group ("definition"
+ "important") the attribute definition overrides important.
+
+1.1.3 define-crossref-class
+
+(define-crossref-class name [:unverified])
+
+ Defines name to be a class of cross references. We distinguish
+ two types of cross reference classes. Verified cross reference
+ classes can be checked for dangling references. If for instance
+ a cross reference points to the non-existent keyword `foo' a
+ warning is issued and the user is advised to correct the
+ invalid cross reference. This is the default. If for some
+ reasons this mechanism must be deactivated the switch
+ :unverified can be used to suppress this behaviour.
+
+1.1.4 define-letter-group
+
+(define-letter-group name [:before lgname] [:after lgname]
+ [:prefixes list-of-prefixes])
+
+(define-letter-groups list-of-letter-groups)
+
+ This command defines a letter group with name name, which must
+ be a string value, grouping all index entries that have a sort
+ key beginning with the prefix name. The command
+(define-letter-group "a")
+
+ is equivalent to the command
+(define-letter-group "a" :prefixes ("a"))
+
+ Using the latter form one can associate more than one prefix
+ with a given letter group. Also further prefixes can be added
+ to an already existing letter group by simply defining the same
+ letter group again. This results not in a redefinition but in
+ adding more prefixes to the currently defined prefixes.
+
+ Example:
+(define-letter-group "a")
+
+ defines a letter group containing all index entries beginning
+ with the string "a".
+(define-letter-group "c" :after "a")
+
+ defines a letter group containing all index entries beginning
+ with the string "c". The letter group appears behind the letter
+ group "a"
+(define-letter-group "b" :after "a" :before "c")
+
+ inserts letter group "b" between letter group "a" and "c". This
+ allows incremental definition of letter groups by extending
+ already defined ones.
+
+ The arguments :after and :before define a partial order on the
+ letter groups. xindy tries to convert this partial order into a
+ total one. If this is impossible due to circular definitions,
+ an error is reported. If more than one possible total ordering
+ can result, it is left open which one is used, so one should
+ always define a complete total order.
+
+ The command define-letter-groups (with an `s' at the end) is
+ simply an abbreviation for a sequence of define-letter-group
+ definitions where the elements are ordered in the ordering
+ given by the list. Example:
+(define-letter-groups ("a" "b" "c")
+
+ equals the definitions
+(define-letter-group "a")
+(define-letter-group "b" :after "a")
+(define-letter-group "c" :after "b")
+
+ See also commands markup-letter-group-list and
+ markup-letter-group for further information.
+
+1.1.5 define-location-class
+
+(define-location-class name layer-list
+ [:min-range-length num]
+ [:hierdepth depth]
+ [:var])
+
+ Defines name to be a location class consisting of the given
+ list of layers. A list of layers consists of names of basetypes
+ and/or strings representing separators. Separators must follow
+ the keyword argument :sep. If the keyword :min-range-length is
+ specified we define the minimum range length to be used when
+ building ranges. The argument num must be a positive integer
+ number or the keyword none in which case the building of ranges
+ is disallowed. If the switch :var is specified the declared
+ class is of type variable, i.e. it is a var-location-class.
+ Since building of ranges is currently only allowed for standard
+ classes :var and :min-range-length must not be used together.
+ The keyword argument :hierdepth can be used to declare that the
+ location references have to be tagged in a hierarchical form.
+ Its argument depth must be an integer number indicating the
+ number of layers the hierarchy does contain. See command
+ markup-locref-list for more information. Examples:
+(define-location-class "page-numbers" ("arabic-numbers")
+ :minimum-range-length 3)
+
+ Defines the location class page-numbers consisting of one layer
+ which is the alphabet arabic-numbers. Since the minimum range
+ length is set to 3 the location references 2, 3 and 4 don't
+ form a range because the range length is only 2. But the
+ references 6, 7, 8, and 9 are enough to form a range. Some
+ example instances of this class are 0, 1, ... 2313, etc.
+(define-location-class "sections" :var
+ ("arabic-numbers" :sep "."
+ "arabic-numbers" :sep "."
+ "arabic-numbers"))
+
+ defines a variable location class. Valid instances are 1, 1.1,
+ 1.2, 2, 2.4.5, but none of 2-3 (wrong separator), 1.2.3.4 (more
+ than 3 layers), 2.3.iv (roman number instead of arabic one).
+
+1.1.6 define-location-class-order
+
+(define-location-class-order list)
+
+ Defines the order in which the location classes are written to
+ the output file. The parameter list is a list of names of
+ location classes. Examples:
+(define-location-class-order
+ ("page-numbers" "sections" "xrefs"))
+
+ tells the system that the page numbers should appear before the
+ section numbers and that the cross references should appear at
+ the end. If this command is omitted, the declaration order of
+ the location classes in the index style is implicitly used as
+ the output order. In the case that a location class does not
+ appear in the list, the output may behave unexpectedly, so one
+ should always enumerate all used location classes when using
+ this command.
+
+1.1.7 define-rule-set
+
+(define-rule-set name
+ [ :inherit-from ("rule-set" "rule-set-2") ]
+ :rules (<rule>...) )
+
+ A complete specification of a multi-phase sorting process for a
+ language requires that some rules have to appear in several
+ subsequent sorting phases. Rule sets can be used to define a
+ set of rules that can be instantiated in an arbitrary sorting
+ phase. Basically, they offer means to separate the definition
+ of sorting rules from their instantiation, hence, acting as a
+ wrapper for calls to sort-rule. They do not add new
+ functionality that is not already present with sort-rule.
+
+ A rule can be of the form:
+<rule> ::= ("pattern" "replacement"
+ [:string|:bregexp|:egegexp] [:again])
+
+ The following incomplete example defines a new rule set of name
+ isolatin1-tolower that inherits definitions from rule set
+ latin-tolower, overriding or adding the sort rules in the list
+ of :rules.
+(define-rule-set "isolatin1-tolower"
+
+ :inherit-from ("latin-tolower")
+
+ :rules (("?" "?" :string :again)
+ ("?" "?" :string :again)
+ ("?" "?" :string :again)
+ ("?" "?" :string :again)
+ ("?" "?" :string :again)
+ ("?" "?" :string :again)
+ ("?" "?" :string :again)
+ ...
+ )
+...)
+
+ Rule sets can be instantiated with the command use-rule-set.
+ For further descriptions on the sorting model refer to the
+ command sort-rule.
+
+1.1.8 define-sort-rule-orientations
+
+(define-sort-rule-orientations (orientations...))
+
+ Defines the order for the different sorting phases. The
+ currently implemented orientations are forward and backward.
+ This command must precede all sort-rule commands in an index
+ style. It defines the orientations and implicitly sets the
+ maximum number of sorting phases performed.
+
+ For further descriptions on the sorting model refer to the
+ command sort-rule.
+
+1.1.9 merge-rule
+
+(merge-rule pattern replacement [:again]
+ [:bregexp | :eregexp | :string])
+
+ Defines a keyword mapping rule that can be used to generate the
+ merge key from the main key of an index entry. This mapping is
+ necessary to map all keywords that are differently written but
+ belong to the same keyword to the same canonical keyword.
+
+ The parameter pattern can be a POSIX-compliant regular
+ expression or an ordinary string. The implementation uses the
+ GNU Rx regular expression library which implements the POSIX
+ regular expressions. Regular expressions (REs) can be specified
+ as basic regular expressions (BREs) or extended regular
+ expressions (EREs). You can use the switch :bregexp to force
+ the interpretation of the pattern as a BRE, or :eregexp to
+ interpret it as an ERE. If you want xindy to interpret the
+ pattern literally, use the switch :string. If none of these
+ switches is selected, xindy uses an auto-detection mechanism to
+ decide, if the pattern is a regular expression or not. If it
+ recognizes the pattern as a RE, it interprets it as an ERE by
+ default.
+
+ The parameter replacement must be a string possibly containing
+ the special characters & (substitutes for the complete match)
+ and \1 ,..., \9 (substituting for the n-th submatch. Examples:
+(merge-rule "A" "a")
+
+ replaces each occurrence of the uppercase letter `A' with its
+ lowercase counterpart.
+(merge-rule "\~"([AEOUaeou])" "\1")
+
+ transforms the TeX umlaut-letters into their stripped
+ counterparts, such that `\"A ' is treated as an `A' afterwards.
+
+ The following sequences have a special meaning:
+
+ ` ~n '
+ End of line symbol (linefeed).
+
+ ` ~b '
+ The ISO-Latin character with the lowest ordinal number.
+
+ ` ~e '
+ The ISO-Latin character with the highest ordinal number.
+
+ ` ~~ '
+ The tilde character.
+
+ ` ~" '
+ The double quote character.
+
+ Tilde characters and double quotes have to be quoted themselves
+ with a tilde character. The special characters ` ~b ' and ` ~e
+ ' allow the definition of arbitrary sorting orders by rules. In
+ connection with an additional character every position in the
+ alphabet can be described. E.g. ` m~e ' is lexicographically
+ placed between `m' and `n'.
+
+ Due to efficiency, rules that just exchange characters or
+ substitute constant character sequences are not treated as
+ regular expressions. Therefore, instead of using the rule
+(merge-rule "[A-Z]" "&")
+
+ it is more efficient (though less comfortable) to use
+(merge-rule "A" "Ax")
+(merge-rule "B" "Bx")
+...
+(merge-rule "Z" "Zx")
+
+ Usually rules are applied in order of their definition. Rules
+ with a special prefix precede those that begin with a class of
+ characters, so that the search pattern `alpha' is checked
+ before `.*', but `auto' and `a.*' are checked in order of their
+ definition.
+
+ The first rule from a style file that matches the input is
+ applied and the process restarts behind the substituted text.
+ If no rule could be applied, the actual character is copied
+ from the input and the process continues with the next
+ character.
+
+ Sometimes it is necessary to apply rules anew to the result of
+ a transformation. By specifying the keyword argument :again in
+ the merge rule the rule is marked as mutable, which means that
+ after using this rule the transformation process shall restart
+ at the same place. E.g. the rule
+(merge-rule "\$(.*)\$" "\1" :again)
+
+ deletes all surrounding `$ ' symbols from the input.
+
+ See also command sort-rule.
+
+1.1.10 merge-to
+
+(merge-to attr-from attr-to [:drop])
+
+ A merge rule says that the attribute attr-from can be used to
+ build ranges in attr-to. Both attributes must name valid
+ attribute names. The switch :drop indicates, that the original
+ location reference with attribute attr-from has to be dropped
+ (removed), if a successful range was built with location
+ references in attribute attr-to. A detailed description is
+ given in the section about processing phases.
+
+1.1.11 require
+
+(require filename)
+
+ This command allows to load more index style modules. The
+ module is searched in the directories defined in the search
+ path. The file is read in and processing of the current file
+ continues. The argument filename must be a string. This allows
+ to decompose the index style into several modules that can be
+ included into the topmost index style file. Example:
+(require "french/alphabet.xdy")
+(require "french/sort-rules.xdy")
+(require "tex/locations.xdy")
+(require "tex/markup.xdy")
+
+ Submodules can load other submodules as well. If a file is
+ required that was already loaded, the require command is simply
+ ignored and processing continues without including this file
+ twice. See also command searchpath.
+
+1.1.12 searchpath
+
+(searchpath {path-string | path-list})
+
+ This command adds the given paths to the list of paths, xindy
+ searches for index style files. The argument path-string must
+ be a colon-separated string of directory names. If this path
+ ends with a colon the default search path is added to the end
+ of the path list. Example:
+(searchpath ".:/usr/local/lib/xindy:/usr/local/lib/xindy/english:")
+
+ adds the specified directories to the search path. Since the
+ last path ends with a colon, the built-in search path is added
+ at the end. Specifying
+(searchpath ("."
+ "/usr/local/lib/xindy"
+ "/usr/local/lib/xindy/english"
+ :default))
+
+ yields exactly the same result as the example above. Here
+ path-list must be a list of strings and/or the keyword(s)
+ :default and :last. The keyword :default signifies that the
+ default pathnames are to be inserted at the specified position
+ in the list. The keyword :last allows to insert the currently
+ active paths at the indicated position. Since this allows to
+ insert the built-in paths at any position and incrementally
+ adding new paths to the search path, this version of the
+ command ist more flexible than the first version.
+
+1.1.13 sort-rule
+
+(sort-rule pattern replacement [:run level] [:again])
+
+ Defines a keyword mapping rule that can be used to generate the
+ sort key of an index entry from the merge key. This key is used
+ to sort the index entries lexicographically after they have
+ been merged using the merge key.
+
+ The argument :run indicates that this rule is only in effect a
+ the specified level (default is level 0). For a detailed
+ discussion on the definition of sort rules for different layers
+ refer to the documentation about the new sorting scheme
+ (new-sort-rules) that comes with this distribution.
+
+ See command merge-rule for more information about keyword
+ rules.
+
+1.1.14 use-rule-set
+
+(use-rule-set [:run phase]
+ [:rule-set ( <rule-set>... ))
+
+ This command instantiates the gives rule sets to be in effect
+ at sorting phase phase. The order of the rule sets given with
+ argument :rule-set is significant. Rule set entries of rule set
+ appearing at the beginning of the list override entries in rule
+ sets at the end of the list.
+
+ The following example declares that in phase 0 the rule sets
+ din5007 and isolatin1-tolower should be active, whereas in
+ phase 2 the other rule sets have to be applied.
+(use-rule-set :run 0
+ :rule-set ("din5007" "isolatin1-tolower"))
+
+(use-rule-set :run 1
+ :rule-set ("resolve-umlauts"
+ "resolve-sharp-s"
+ "isolatin1-tolower"
+ ))
+
+ For a discussion on rule sets refer to command define-rule-set.
+
+1.2 Markup Commands
+
+ The following commands can be used to define the markup of the
+ index. They don't have any influence on the indexing process.
+ Since the markup scheme is characterized by the concept of
+ environments, the syntax and naming scheme of all commands
+ follows a simple structure.
+
+ The commands can be separated into environment and
+ list-environment commands. All commands of the first group
+ support the keyword arguments :open and :close, whereas the
+ second group additionally supports the keyword argument :sep.
+ If one of these keyword arguments is missing, the default
+ markup tag is always the empty tag. The :open tag is always
+ printed before the object itself and the :close tag is always
+ printed after the object has been printed. If a list is printed
+ the :sep tag is printed between two elements of the list but
+ not before the first element, or after the last one. All
+ commands dealing with a list have the suffix `-list' as part of
+ their command name.
+
+ Since the number of commands and the heavy usage of default and
+ specialized tags makes the markup somehow complex (but very
+ powerful) we have added a mechanism to trace the markup tags
+ xindy omits during its markup phase with the command
+ markup-trace.
+
+ Here follows the list of markup commands in alphabetical order
+ with some of the commands grouped together.
+
+1.2.1 markup-attribute-group-list
+
+(markup-attribute-group-list [:open string] [:close string]
+ [:sep string])
+
+(markup-attribute-group [:open string] [:close string]
+ [:group group-num])
+
+ Location class groups consist of lists of attribute groups. The
+ markup of this list can be defined with the command
+ markup-attribute-group-list.
+
+ To allow different markup for different attribute groups the
+ command markup-attribute-group can be specialized on the group
+ number with the keyword argument :group which must be an
+ integer number. E.g., given are the groups ("definition"
+ "theorem") and ("default") with group numbers 0 and 1, then
+(markup-attribute-group :open "<group0>" :close </group0>"
+ :group 0)
+
+(markup-attribute-group :open "<group1>" :close "</group1>"
+ :group 1)
+
+ can be used to assign different markup for both groups in a
+ SGML-based language.
+
+1.2.2 markup-crossref-list
+
+(markup-crossref-list [:open string] [:close string]
+ [:sep string]
+ [:class crossref-class])
+
+(markup-crossref-layer-list [:open string] [:close string]
+ [:sep string]
+ [:class crossref-class])
+
+(markup-crossref-layer [:open string] [:close string]
+ [:class crossref-class])
+
+ A crossref class group contains cross references of the same
+ class. The separator between the classes is defined with the
+ (markup-locclass-list :sep)-parameter. A list of cross
+ references can be tagged with the command markup-crossref-list
+ that specializes on the :class argument.
+
+ Each cross reference is determined by a list of layers
+ indicating the target of the cross reference. To define a
+ suitable markup for such a list the command
+ markup-crossref-layer-list can be used.
+
+ Each layer of a cross reference can be assigned two tags that
+ specialize on the class of the reference, like all other
+ commands.
+
+ A suitable markup for a cross reference class see within
+ LaTeX2e could look like that:
+(markup-crossref-list :class "see" :open "\emph{see} "
+ :sep "; ")
+(markup-crossref-layer-list :class "see" :sep ",")
+(markup-crossref-layer :class "see"
+ :open "\textbf{" :close "}")
+
+ An example output could look like ... see house; garden,winter;
+ greenhouse
+
+1.2.3 markup-index
+
+(markup-index [:open string] [:close string]
+ [ :flat | :tree | :hierdepth depth ])
+
+ Defines the markup tags that enclose the whole index via the
+ :open and :close parameters. Examples:
+(markup-index :open "Here comes the index~n"
+ :close "That's all folks!~n")
+
+ defines that the :open string is printed before the rest of the
+ index and the :close string appears after the index is printed.
+
+ Additionally one can specify the form of the generated index.
+ It is possible to produce flat indexes by specifying the switch
+ :flat, to generate a tree with the :tree switch or any kind of
+ mixture between both by specifying the depth up to which trees
+ shall be built with the parameter :hierdepth. Its argument
+ depth is the number of layers that can be formed into a tree.
+ Therefore :flat is an abbrevation of :hierdepth 0 and :tree is
+ an abbrevation of :hierdepth max-depth, with max-depth being
+ the maximum number of layers a keyword has. An example: the
+ keywords
+("tree" "binary" "AVL")
+("tree" "binary" "natural")
+
+ can be transformed in the following ways:
+
+ A flat index (:flat or :hierdepth 0)
+tree binary AVL
+tree binary natural
+
+ with :hierdepth 1
+tree
+ binary AVL
+ binary natural
+
+ and a tree (:tree or :hierdepth > 1)
+tree
+ binary
+ AVL
+ natural
+
+ Most often one will create tree-like indexes or ones that are
+ flat.
+
+1.2.4 markup-indexentry-list
+
+(markup-indexentry-list [:open string] [:close string]
+ [:sep string] [:depth integer])
+
+(markup-indexentry [:open string] [:close string]
+ [:depth integer])
+
+ Letter groups consists of a list of index entries. The command
+ markup-indexentry-list defines the markup of these lists. The
+ markup can be specialized on the depth if the index is
+ hierarchically organized. The command
+(markup-indexentry-list :open "\begin{IdxentList}"
+ :close "\end{IdxentList}"
+ :sep "~n")
+
+ defines that the index entries of all layers are wrapped into
+ the given markup tags. If additionally
+(markup-indexentry-list :open "\begin{IdxentListII}"
+ :close "\end{IdxentListII}"
+ :sep "~n"
+ :depth 2)
+
+ is defined, all index entry lists of all layers (except layer
+ 2) are tagged according to the first specification, and the
+ index entry list within depth 2 are tagged according to the
+ second rule.
+
+ The command markup-indexentry defines the markup of an index
+ entry at a given depth. Since index entries may also contain
+ subentries and the markup for subentries may be different in
+ different layers, the optional keyword argument :depth can be
+ used to assign different markup for different layers. If depth
+ is ommited the default markup for all possible depths is
+ defined. The top-most index entries have depth 0.
+(markup-indexentry :open "\begin{Indexentry}"
+ :close "\end{Indexentry}")
+
+ defines that the index entries of all layers are wrapped into
+ the given markup tags. If additionally
+(markup-indexentry :open "\begin{IndexentryII}"
+ :close "\end{IndexentryII}"
+ :depth 2)
+
+ is defined, all index entries of all layers (except layer 2)
+ are tagged according to the first specification, and the index
+ entries with depth 2 are tagged according to the second rule.
+
+1.2.5 markup-keyword-list
+
+(markup-keyword-list [:open string] [:close string]
+ [:sep string] [:depth integer])
+
+(markup-keyword [:open string] [:close string]
+ [:depth integer])
+
+ The print key of an index entry consists of a list of strings.
+ The markup of this list can be defined with the command
+ markup-keyword-list. The keyword argument :depth may be
+ specified to define the markup of the list at a particular
+ depth.
+
+ The keyword of an index entry consists of a list of strings.
+ Each of these components is tagged with the strings defined
+ with the command markup-keyword. Since we maybe need different
+ markup for different layers, the optional keyword argument can
+ be used to specialize this markup for some depth.
+
+1.2.6 markup-letter-group-list
+
+(markup-letter-group-list [:open string] [:close string]
+ [:sep string])
+
+(markup-letter-group [:open string] [:close string] [:group group-name]
+ [:open-head string] [:close-head string]
+ [:upcase | :downcase | :capitalize])
+
+ The first command defines the markup of the letter group with
+ name group-name. Since the markup of letter groups often
+ contains the name of the letter group as a part of it, the
+ other keyword arguments allow an additional markup for this
+ group name. If one of the parameters :open-head and :close-head
+ is specified additional markup is added as can be described as
+ follows:
+<OPEN>
+ IF (:open-head OR :close-head)
+ <OPEN-HEAD>
+ transformer-of(<GROUP-NAME>)
+ <CLOSE-HEAD>
+ FI
+ <INDEXENTRIES...>
+<CLOSE>
+
+ Here, transformer-of is a function that possibly transforms the
+ string representing the group name into another string. The
+ transformers we currently support can be specified with the
+ switches :upcase, :downcase and :capitalize which result in the
+ corresponding string conversions. If none of them is specified
+ no transformation is done at all.
+
+ The command markup-letter-group defines the markup of the list
+ of letter groups.
+
+1.2.7 markup-locclass-list
+
+(markup-locclass-list [:open string] [:close string]
+ [:sep string])
+
+ Each index entry contains a list of location class groups. This
+ markup command can be used to define the markup of this list.
+
+1.2.8 markup-locref
+
+(markup-locref [:open string] [:close string]
+ [:class locref-class]
+ [:attr attribute]
+ [:depth integer])
+
+ The markup tags of a location reference can be specialized on
+ the three arguments :class, :attr and additionally, if
+ sub-references are used, :depth. Most often one will only use a
+ tag depending on the attribute. For example, all location
+ references with the attribute definition should appear in a
+ font series like bold, emphasizing the importance of this
+ location reference; those with the attribute default in font
+ shape italic. The markup in this case would not specialize on
+ the depth or any particular class. A valid definition, suitable
+ for a usage within HTML, could look like this.
+(markup-locref :open "<B>" :close "</B>" :attr "definition")
+(markup-locref :open "<I>" :close "</I>" :attr "default")
+
+1.2.9 markup-locref-class
+
+(markup-locref-class [:open string] [:close string]
+ [:class locref-class])
+
+ All location references of a particular location reference
+ class can be wrapped into the tags defined by this command. It
+ specializes on the keyword argument :class.
+
+1.2.10 markup-locref-layer
+
+(markup-locref-layer [:open string] [:close string]
+ [:depth integer] [:layer integer]
+ [:class locref-class])
+
+(markup-locref-layer-list [:open string] [:close string]
+ [:sep string]
+ [:depth integer]
+ [:class locref-class])
+
+ A location reference contains a list of location reference
+ layers. The second markup command can be used to markup this
+ list. It specializes on the class of the location references
+ and the depth (if sub-references are used).
+
+ The first command allows to tag the elements of a layer list
+ differently. The first element of this list can is
+ specialisable with :layer 0, the next element with :layer 1,
+ etc. See the next example for an example.
+
+1.2.11 markup-locref-list
+
+(markup-locref-list [:open string] [:close string] [:sep string]
+ [:depth integer] [:class locref-class])
+
+ An attribute group contains a list of location references
+ and/or ranges. Additionally a layered location reference itself
+ may contain sub-references that are stored as a list of
+ location references. We specialize the markup for these lists
+ on the location class they belong to with the keyword argument
+ :class, and on :depth that specializes on the different
+ subentry levels when using location references with
+ sub-references.
+
+ Given is a list of location references that have the class
+ description
+(define-location-class "Appendix"
+ ("ALPHA" :sep "-" "arabic-numbers")
+ :hierdepth 2)
+
+ This location class has instances like A-1, B-5, etc. The
+ keyword argument :hierdepth 2 informs xindy to markup these
+ location references in a hierarchical form. With the commands
+(markup-locref-list :sep "; "
+ :depth 0 :class "Appendix")
+(markup-locref-list :open " " :sep ","
+ :depth 1 :class "Appendix")
+(markup-locref-layer :open "{\bf " :close "}" :layer 0
+ :depth 0 :class "Appendix")
+
+ we obtain a markup sequence for some example data that could
+ look like
+ \bf A} 1,2,5; {\bf B} 5,6,9; {\bf D} 1,5,8; ...
+
+1.2.12 markup-range
+
+(markup-range [:open string] [:close string] [:sep string]
+ [:class locref-class]
+ [:length num] [:ignore-end])
+
+ A range consists of two location references. Markup can be
+ specified with the :open and :close arguments and one separator
+ given by the argument :sep.
+
+ Since both location references are tagged with markup defined
+ by the command markup-locref a specialization on attributes or
+ depth is not necessary. Specialization is allowed on the class
+ they belong to, because the separator between two location
+ refences may be different for each location class. Argument
+ :length can be used to define different markup for different
+ lengths. In conjunction with :length is may be useful not to
+ print the second location reference at all. For example, one
+ wishes to markup ranges of length 1 in the form Xf. instead of
+ X--Y. This can be accomplished with the switch :ignore-end.
+
+ The markup tags for a range (X,Y) can be described as follows:
+<OPEN>
+ Markup of location reference X
+<SEP>
+ IF (not :ignore-end)
+ Markup of location reference Y
+ FI
+<CLOSE>
+
+ The following tags can be used to define a range of page
+ numbers (given in a location class page-numbers) without
+ considering the open and close parameters:
+(markup-range :sep "-" :class "page-numbers")
+
+ Location ranges then appear separated by a hyphen in a form
+ like this:
+ ..., 5-8, 19-23, ...
+
+1.2.13 (markup-trace [:on] [:open string] [:close string])
+
+ This command can be used to activate the tracing of all markup
+ commands xindy executes. The switch :on activates the trace. If
+ :on is omitted, the command line flag -t can be used as well.
+ All tags which are emitted but not yet defined explicitly by
+ the user are tagged with a symbolic notation indicating the
+ commands that must be used to define this tag. The defaults for
+ the keyword argument :open is `<' and for :close is `>'. The
+ beginning of an example output could look like:
+<INDEX:OPEN>
+ <LETTER-GROUP-LIST:OPEN>
+ <LETTER-GROUP:OPEN ["a"]>
+ <INDEXENTRY-LIST:OPEN [0]>
+ <INDEXENTRY:OPEN [0]>
+ <KEYWORD-LIST:OPEN [0]>
+ <KEYWORD:OPEN [0]>
+ ...
+
+ We use a simple indentation scheme to make the structure of the
+ tags visible. The symbolic tag <LETTER-GROUP:OPEN ["a"]> for
+ example indicates that the tag that can be specified with the
+ command
+(markup-letter-group :open "XXX" :group "a" ... )
+
+ is emitted at this point in the markup process. By
+ incrementally adding markup commands to the index, more and
+ more tags can be defined until the whole markup is defined.
+ This general mechanism should allow everyone understand the
+ markup process. The best is to start with a small index, define
+ the complete markup and afterwards process the whole index.
+ Additionally one can enclose the symbolic tags into an
+ environment that is neutral to the document preparation system,
+ such as a comment. For TeX this could be
+(markup-trace :open "%%" :close "~n")
+
+ or a definition in the TeX document like
+\def\ignore#1{}
+
+ combined with the command
+(markup-trace :open "\ignore{" :close "}")
+
+1.3 Raw Index Interface
+
+ This section can be skipped if the reader is not interested in
+ adapting xindy to a new document preparation system.
+
+ The raw index is the file that represents the index that is to
+ be processed. Since many different document preparation systems
+ may use different forms of index representations, their output
+ must be transformed in a form readable by xindy. We also could
+ have written an configurable parser performing this task, but
+ usually a tool written with some text processing tools such as
+ perl, sed or awk can achieve the same task as well. Therefore,
+ adapting xindy to a completely different system can mostly be
+ done by writing an appropriate raw index filter.
+
+ The format of the raw index interface of xindy is defined as
+ follows:
+(indexentry { :key string-list [:print string-list]
+ | :tkey list-of-layers }
+ [:attr string]
+ { :locref string [:open-range | :close-range]
+ | :xref string-list } )
+
+ The pseudo variable string is a sequence of characters
+ surrounded by double quotes, e.g.
+"Hi, it's me" "one" "a string with two \"double quotes\""
+
+ are three examples of valid strings. If you need to include a
+ double quote as a literal character, you must quote it itself
+ with a backslash as shown in the third example. A string list
+ is simply a list of strings separated by whitespaces and
+ surrounded by round braces. An example of a string list is
+("This" "is" "a" "list" "of" "strings")
+
+ So far about the syntax. The semantics of the different
+ elements are described here.
+
+ :key
+ The argument string list defines the keyword of the
+ index entry. It must be a list of strings, since the
+ keyword may consist of different layers such as ("heap"
+ "fibonacci").
+
+ :print
+ The optional print key defines the way the keyword has
+ to be printed in the markup phase.
+
+ :tkey
+ Another possibility to define the keys of an index entry
+ is with the :tkey keyword argument. It can be used
+ instead of the :key and :print arguments. Instead of
+ specifying separately the key and the corresponding
+ print key, we define the keyword by its layers. Each
+ layer consist of a list of one or two strings. The first
+ string will be interpreted as the main key, whereas the
+ second one will become the print key. If the print key
+ is ommited, the main key is taken instead. So the
+ definition
+
+:tkey (("This") ("is") ("a") ("bang" "BANG !!!"))
+
+ is equivalent to
+
+:key ("This" "is" "a" "bang")
+:print ("This" "is" "a" "BANG !!!")
+
+ :locref
+ The reference an index entry describes can be a location
+ reference or a cross reference. The switch :locref
+ describes a location reference. Its optional arguments
+ are :open-range and :close-range. The string that must
+ be supplied must somehow encode the location reference.
+ It might look like the string "25" representing the page
+ number 25, or "Appendix-I" representing the first
+ appendix numbered in uppercase roman numerals.
+
+ :open-range,:close-range
+ These are switches that do not take any arguments. They
+ describe the beginning and ending of a range, starting
+ or ending from the location reference that is given by
+ the argument :locref. If they are supplied, the location
+ reference may have influence on the way ranges are
+ build.
+
+ :xref
+ These arguments choose the second alternative. The
+ argument string list of parameter :xref describes where
+ the index entry should point to.
+
+ :attr
+ This parameter may be used to tag a location reference
+ with a certain attribute or it names the class of a
+ cross reference. It may also used to associate different
+ markup for different attributes in the markup phase. If
+ this parameter is omitted or is the empty string, the
+ indexentry is declared to have the attribute default.
+
+ Some examples:
+(indexentry :key ("airplane") :locref "25" :attr "default")
+
+ defines an index entry with the key airplane' indexed on page
+ 25'. This index entry has the attribute default.
+(indexentry :key ("house") :xref("building") :attr "see")
+
+ defines a cross reference with the key house pointing to the
+ term building. This cross reference belongs to the cross
+ reference class see.
+(indexentry :key ("house") :xref("building") :open-range)
+
+ is an invalid specification, since :open-range mustn't be used
+ together with cross references.
+
+2 Invoking xindy
+
+2.1 Command Line Options
+
+ The following command line options are accepted:
+xindy [-h] [-t] [-v] [-l logfile] [-o outfile]
+ [-L n] [-f filterprog]
+ indexstyle raw-index
+
+ The argument indexstyle names a file, containing the index
+ style description. The argument raw-index names a file,
+ containing the raw index. Both arguments are mandatory.
+
+ -h
+ Gives a short summary of all command line options.
+
+ -l
+ Writes helpful information into the specified logfile.
+ For example, the keyword mappings are written into this
+ file, so one can check if the intended mappings were
+ actually performed this way.
+
+ -o
+ Explicitly defines the name of the output file. If not
+ given, the name of the raw-index is used with its
+ extension changed to .ind (or added, if it had no
+ extension at all).
+
+ -t
+ Enters tracing mode of the symbolic markup tags. The
+ format of the emitted tags can be defined with the
+ command markup-trace.
+
+ -L
+ Set the xindy logging-level to n.
+
+ -f
+ Run filterprog on raw-index before reading. The program
+ must act as a filter reading from stdin and writing to
+ stdout. The most obvious use of this option in
+ conjunction with TeX is to run -f tex2xindy on the index
+ file prior to reading the entries into xindy.
+
+ -v
+ Shows the version number of xindy.
+
+ Errors and warnings are reported to stdout and additionally to
+ the logfile if -l was specified.
+
+2.2 Search Path
+
+ The system uses the concept of a search path for finding the
+ index style files and modules. The searchpath can be set with
+ the environment variable XINDY_SEARCHPATH which must contain a
+ list of colon-separated directories. If it ends with a colon,
+ the built-in searchpath is added to the entire searchpath. See
+ the command searchpath for further details.
+
+Appendix A. Appendices
+
+ Table of Contents
+
+ 1 Bugs / Known Issues / Missing Features
+ 2 About this Document
+ 3 Release News
+ 4 GNU Free Documentation License
+ Index
+
+1 Bugs / Known Issues / Missing Features
+
+ PDF
+ A PDF file is no longer supported.
+
+ Texinfo
+ Currently we don't know any working solution to convert
+ DocBook XML to Texinfo (at least not for a complex
+ document). Anyone who wants to work on this issue is
+ highly welcome. A starting point could be the docbook2X
+ project at http://docbook2x.sourceforge.net.
+
+ vim-help
+ Quite a few poeple are asking for a version in vim-help
+ format. Srinath Avadhanula has already done some work on
+ this.
+
+2 About this Document
+
+ The source format of this document is DocBook XML (V4.3).
+
+ The various output formats were generated using:
+ * xsltproc (libxml2-2.6.26/libxslt-1.1.26) as XSLT processor
+ * DocBook XSL Stylesheets (V1.77.1) for HTML and Epub
+
+ You'll always find the newest version of this document at
+ http://www.miwie.org/tex-refs/.
+
+3 Release News
+
+ V0.4.1 12-12-03
+
+ + Removed obsolete file still referenced in Makefile (no
+ visible changes)
+
+ V0.4.0 12-12-02
+
+ + Minor changes for Epub output
+ + Added missing IDs on some sections and tables
+
+ V0.3.9 05-05-14
+
+ + Consistent naming scheme of IDs to ease the use of
+ this reference for other projects
+ + Added new section float in chapter LaTeX
+
+ V0.3.8 04-10-28
+
+ + Minor changes in \maketitle
+
+ V0.3.7 04-08-26
+
+ + Corrected typos and markup errors in chapter BibTeX
+ + Switched to DocBook XML V4.3
+ + Added new section Options in chapter LaTeX
+
+ V0.3.6 04-06-21
+
+ + Added a note in chapter LaTeX with the copyright and
+ permission notice of the original file latex2.texi
+ + Corrected typos and added missing hyperlinks in
+ chapter xindy
+ + PDF file optimized/linearized and some finetuning
+
+ V0.3.5 04-05-01
+
+ + Added content to chapters MetaPost and pdfTeX
+ + Enhanced index for chapter Make-Index
+
+ V0.3.4 04-04-24
+
+ + Version control system changed from CVS to SVN
+ + Added missing entries to chapter Make-Index
+
+ V0.3.3 04-01-26
+
+ + Corrected again section Output Style Specifiers and
+ Input Style Specifiers of chapter Make-Index
+ + Corrected some symbols in the index
+
+ V0.3.2 04-01-16
+
+ + Corrected sections Output Style Specifiers and Input
+ Style Specifiers of chapter Make-Index
+ + Enhanced index in PDF
+
+ V0.3.1 04-01-06
+
+ + More work on PDF
+ + Modularized XSL stylesheet files
+ + Corrected some typos
+
+ V0.3.0 03-12-25
+
+ + Changed document root to book
+ + More work on PDF version
+ + Using new XSL stylesheets V1.64.1
+ + Minor fixes
+
+ V0.2.6 03-10-27
+
+ + Rearranged appendix
+ + Work on PDF version
+
+ V0.2.5 03-10-17
+
+ + Added contents of GNU FDL in appendix
+ + Using new XSL stylesheets V1.62.4
+ + Switched to xsltproc as XSLT-processor
+ + Reedited some deeply nested sections
+ + Changed colors in CSS
+
+ V0.2.4 03-09-06
+
+ + Added subsection dcolumn
+ + Subsection fontenc translated into english
+ + Corrected typo in \sbox
+
+ V0.2.3 03-04-12
+
+ + Provide PDF output using ConTeXt and DocBook In
+ ConTeXt (still experimental)
+ + Reedited (beautified) sections LaTeX / Commands /
+ Counters | Cross References | Definitions | Layout |
+ Environments | Footnotes
+
+ V0.2.2 03-01-26
+
+ + Added bzip2 compressed version of source and outfiles
+ tarball
+ + Using new XSL stylesheets V1.60.1
+ + Eliminated more spurious &Acirc; characters in HTML
+ output
+
+ V0.2.1 03-01-18
+
+ + Using new XSL stylesheets V1.59.2
+ + Eliminated spurious &Acirc; characters
+
+ V0.2.0 03-01-11
+
+ + Using new XSL stylesheets V1.58.1
+ + Minor changes to CSS file
+ + License changed to GNU Free Documentation License
+ + Added subsection Commands and Parameters to section
+ PSTricks
+ + Reworked inputenc section
+
+ V0.1.3 02-10-17
+
+ + Started rework of KOMA-Script section
+ + Added subsection Additional PSTricks Packages
+ + Using new XSL stylesheets V1.56.1
+
+ V0.1.2 02-10-01
+
+ + Reworked hyperref section
+
+ V0.1.1 02-09-19
+
+ + Added template sections for PiCTeX and Texinfo
+ + Added subsection Release News in appendix About this
+ Document
+ + Using new XSL stylesheets V1.55.0
+ + Added missing CSS file to outfiles tarball
+ + Corrected wrong FPI
+
+ V0.1.0 02-08-20
+
+ + Eliminated trailing '.' in numbered sections
+ + Minor markup errors corrected
+ + Reworked CSS file
+
+ V0.0.5 02-08-10
+
+ + Switched to DocBook XML 4.2
+ + Sections 'Bibindex' and 'xindy' completed
+
+ V0.0.4 02-07-25
+
+ + Section 'Makeindex' completed
+
+ V0.0.3 02-07-13
+
+ + New XSL stylesheets solve bug in creating index (no
+ other changes)
+
+ V0.0.2 02-07-05
+
+ + New (template) sections 'fontinst', 'Bibtex',
+ 'Makeindex', and 'xindy'
+ + New section 'Special Symbols'
+ + Added information for 'german' package
+ + Registered as a new project (tex-refs) on
+ freshmeat.net
+
+ V0.0.1 02-06-21
+
+ + First official announcement
+
+4 GNU Free Documentation License
+
+Version 1.2, November 2002
+
+ Copyright (C) 2000,2001,2002 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+ 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA
+ Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
+ of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
+
+
+0. PREAMBLE
+
+The purpose of this License is to make a manual, textbook, or other
+functional and useful document "free" in the sense of freedom: to
+assure everyone the effective freedom to copy and redistribute it,
+with or without modifying it, either commercially or noncommercially.
+Secondarily, this License preserves for the author and publisher a way
+to get credit for their work, while not being considered responsible
+for modifications made by others.
+
+This License is a kind of "copyleft", which means that derivative
+works of the document must themselves be free in the same sense. It
+complements the GNU General Public License, which is a copyleft
+license designed for free software.
+
+We have designed this License in order to use it for manuals for free
+software, because free software needs free documentation: a free
+program should come with manuals providing the same freedoms that the
+software does. But this License is not limited to software manuals;
+it can be used for any textual work, regardless of subject matter or
+whether it is published as a printed book. We recommend this License
+principally for works whose purpose is instruction or reference.
+
+
+1. APPLICABILITY AND DEFINITIONS
+
+This License applies to any manual or other work, in any medium, that
+contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it can be
+distributed under the terms of this License. Such a notice grants a
+world-wide, royalty-free license, unlimited in duration, to use that
+work under the conditions stated herein. The "Document", below,
+refers to any such manual or work. Any member of the public is a
+licensee, and is addressed as "you". You accept the license if you
+copy, modify or distribute the work in a way requiring permission
+under copyright law.
+
+A "Modified Version" of the Document means any work containing the
+Document or a portion of it, either copied verbatim, or with
+modifications and/or translated into another language.
+
+A "Secondary Section" is a named appendix or a front-matter section of
+the Document that deals exclusively with the relationship of the
+publishers or authors of the Document to the Document's overall subject
+(or to related matters) and contains nothing that could fall directly
+within that overall subject. (Thus, if the Document is in part a
+textbook of mathematics, a Secondary Section may not explain any
+mathematics.) The relationship could be a matter of historical
+connection with the subject or with related matters, or of legal,
+commercial, philosophical, ethical or political position regarding
+them.
+
+The "Invariant Sections" are certain Secondary Sections whose titles
+are designated, as being those of Invariant Sections, in the notice
+that says that the Document is released under this License. If a
+section does not fit the above definition of Secondary then it is not
+allowed to be designated as Invariant. The Document may contain zero
+Invariant Sections. If the Document does not identify any Invariant
+Sections then there are none.
+
+The "Cover Texts" are certain short passages of text that are listed,
+as Front-Cover Texts or Back-Cover Texts, in the notice that says that
+the Document is released under this License. A Front-Cover Text may
+be at most 5 words, and a Back-Cover Text may be at most 25 words.
+
+A "Transparent" copy of the Document means a machine-readable copy,
+represented in a format whose specification is available to the
+general public, that is suitable for revising the document
+straightforwardly with generic text editors or (for images composed of
+pixels) generic paint programs or (for drawings) some widely available
+drawing editor, and that is suitable for input to text formatters or
+for automatic translation to a variety of formats suitable for input
+to text formatters. A copy made in an otherwise Transparent file
+format whose markup, or absence of markup, has been arranged to thwart
+or discourage subsequent modification by readers is not Transparent.
+An image format is not Transparent if used for any substantial amount
+of text. A copy that is not "Transparent" is called "Opaque".
+
+Examples of suitable formats for Transparent copies include plain
+ASCII without markup, Texinfo input format, LaTeX input format, SGML
+or XML using a publicly available DTD, and standard-conforming simple
+HTML, PostScript or PDF designed for human modification. Examples of
+transparent image formats include PNG, XCF and JPG. Opaque formats
+include proprietary formats that can be read and edited only by
+proprietary word processors, SGML or XML for which the DTD and/or
+processing tools are not generally available, and the
+machine-generated HTML, PostScript or PDF produced by some word
+processors for output purposes only.
+
+The "Title Page" means, for a printed book, the title page itself,
+plus such following pages as are needed to hold, legibly, the material
+this License requires to appear in the title page. For works in
+formats which do not have any title page as such, "Title Page" means
+the text near the most prominent appearance of the work's title,
+preceding the beginning of the body of the text.
+
+A section "Entitled XYZ" means a named subunit of the Document whose
+title either is precisely XYZ or contains XYZ in parentheses following
+text that translates XYZ in another language. (Here XYZ stands for a
+specific section name mentioned below, such as "Acknowledgements",
+"Dedications", "Endorsements", or "History".) To "Preserve the Title"
+of such a section when you modify the Document means that it remains a
+section "Entitled XYZ" according to this definition.
+
+The Document may include Warranty Disclaimers next to the notice which
+states that this License applies to the Document. These Warranty
+Disclaimers are considered to be included by reference in this
+License, but only as regards disclaiming warranties: any other
+implication that these Warranty Disclaimers may have is void and has
+no effect on the meaning of this License.
+
+
+2. VERBATIM COPYING
+
+You may copy and distribute the Document in any medium, either
+commercially or noncommercially, provided that this License, the
+copyright notices, and the license notice saying this License applies
+to the Document are reproduced in all copies, and that you add no other
+conditions whatsoever to those of this License. You may not use
+technical measures to obstruct or control the reading or further
+copying of the copies you make or distribute. However, you may accept
+compensation in exchange for copies. If you distribute a large enough
+number of copies you must also follow the conditions in section 3.
+
+You may also lend copies, under the same conditions stated above, and
+you may publicly display copies.
+
+
+3. COPYING IN QUANTITY
+
+If you publish printed copies (or copies in media that commonly have
+printed covers) of the Document, numbering more than 100, and the
+Document's license notice requires Cover Texts, you must enclose the
+copies in covers that carry, clearly and legibly, all these Cover
+Texts: Front-Cover Texts on the front cover, and Back-Cover Texts on
+the back cover. Both covers must also clearly and legibly identify
+you as the publisher of these copies. The front cover must present
+the full title with all words of the title equally prominent and
+visible. You may add other material on the covers in addition.
+Copying with changes limited to the covers, as long as they preserve
+the title of the Document and satisfy these conditions, can be treated
+as verbatim copying in other respects.
+
+If the required texts for either cover are too voluminous to fit
+legibly, you should put the first ones listed (as many as fit
+reasonably) on the actual cover, and continue the rest onto adjacent
+pages.
+
+If you publish or distribute Opaque copies of the Document numbering
+more than 100, you must either include a machine-readable Transparent
+copy along with each Opaque copy, or state in or with each Opaque copy
+a computer-network location from which the general network-using
+public has access to download using public-standard network protocols
+a complete Transparent copy of the Document, free of added material.
+If you use the latter option, you must take reasonably prudent steps,
+when you begin distribution of Opaque copies in quantity, to ensure
+that this Transparent copy will remain thus accessible at the stated
+location until at least one year after the last time you distribute an
+Opaque copy (directly or through your agents or retailers) of that
+edition to the public.
+
+It is requested, but not required, that you contact the authors of the
+Document well before redistributing any large number of copies, to give
+them a chance to provide you with an updated version of the Document.
+
+
+4. MODIFICATIONS
+
+You may copy and distribute a Modified Version of the Document under
+the conditions of sections 2 and 3 above, provided that you release
+the Modified Version under precisely this License, with the Modified
+Version filling the role of the Document, thus licensing distribution
+and modification of the Modified Version to whoever possesses a copy
+of it. In addition, you must do these things in the Modified Version:
+
+A. Use in the Title Page (and on the covers, if any) a title distinct
+ from that of the Document, and from those of previous versions
+ (which should, if there were any, be listed in the History section
+ of the Document). You may use the same title as a previous version
+ if the original publisher of that version gives permission.
+B. List on the Title Page, as authors, one or more persons or entities
+ responsible for authorship of the modifications in the Modified
+ Version, together with at least five of the principal authors of the
+ Document (all of its principal authors, if it has fewer than five),
+ unless they release you from this requirement.
+C. State on the Title page the name of the publisher of the
+ Modified Version, as the publisher.
+D. Preserve all the copyright notices of the Document.
+E. Add an appropriate copyright notice for your modifications
+ adjacent to the other copyright notices.
+F. Include, immediately after the copyright notices, a license notice
+ giving the public permission to use the Modified Version under the
+ terms of this License, in the form shown in the Addendum below.
+G. Preserve in that license notice the full lists of Invariant Sections
+ and required Cover Texts given in the Document's license notice.
+H. Include an unaltered copy of this License.
+I. Preserve the section Entitled "History", Preserve its Title, and add
+ to it an item stating at least the title, year, new authors, and
+ publisher of the Modified Version as given on the Title Page. If
+ there is no section Entitled "History" in the Document, create one
+ stating the title, year, authors, and publisher of the Document as
+ given on its Title Page, then add an item describing the Modified
+ Version as stated in the previous sentence.
+J. Preserve the network location, if any, given in the Document for
+ public access to a Transparent copy of the Document, and likewise
+ the network locations given in the Document for previous versions
+ it was based on. These may be placed in the "History" section.
+ You may omit a network location for a work that was published at
+ least four years before the Document itself, or if the original
+ publisher of the version it refers to gives permission.
+K. For any section Entitled "Acknowledgements" or "Dedications",
+ Preserve the Title of the section, and preserve in the section all
+ the substance and tone of each of the contributor acknowledgements
+ and/or dedications given therein.
+L. Preserve all the Invariant Sections of the Document,
+ unaltered in their text and in their titles. Section numbers
+ or the equivalent are not considered part of the section titles.
+M. Delete any section Entitled "Endorsements". Such a section
+ may not be included in the Modified Version.
+N. Do not retitle any existing section to be Entitled "Endorsements"
+ or to conflict in title with any Invariant Section.
+O. Preserve any Warranty Disclaimers.
+
+If the Modified Version includes new front-matter sections or
+appendices that qualify as Secondary Sections and contain no material
+copied from the Document, you may at your option designate some or all
+of these sections as invariant. To do this, add their titles to the
+list of Invariant Sections in the Modified Version's license notice.
+These titles must be distinct from any other section titles.
+
+You may add a section Entitled "Endorsements", provided it contains
+nothing but endorsements of your Modified Version by various
+parties--for example, statements of peer review or that the text has
+been approved by an organization as the authoritative definition of a
+standard.
+
+You may add a passage of up to five words as a Front-Cover Text, and a
+passage of up to 25 words as a Back-Cover Text, to the end of the list
+of Cover Texts in the Modified Version. Only one passage of
+Front-Cover Text and one of Back-Cover Text may be added by (or
+through arrangements made by) any one entity. If the Document already
+includes a cover text for the same cover, previously added by you or
+by arrangement made by the same entity you are acting on behalf of,
+you may not add another; but you may replace the old one, on explicit
+permission from the previous publisher that added the old one.
+
+The author(s) and publisher(s) of the Document do not by this License
+give permission to use their names for publicity for or to assert or
+imply endorsement of any Modified Version.
+
+
+5. COMBINING DOCUMENTS
+
+You may combine the Document with other documents released under this
+License, under the terms defined in section 4 above for modified
+versions, provided that you include in the combination all of the
+Invariant Sections of all of the original documents, unmodified, and
+list them all as Invariant Sections of your combined work in its
+license notice, and that you preserve all their Warranty Disclaimers.
+
+The combined work need only contain one copy of this License, and
+multiple identical Invariant Sections may be replaced with a single
+copy. If there are multiple Invariant Sections with the same name but
+different contents, make the title of each such section unique by
+adding at the end of it, in parentheses, the name of the original
+author or publisher of that section if known, or else a unique number.
+Make the same adjustment to the section titles in the list of
+Invariant Sections in the license notice of the combined work.
+
+In the combination, you must combine any sections Entitled "History"
+in the various original documents, forming one section Entitled
+"History"; likewise combine any sections Entitled "Acknowledgements",
+and any sections Entitled "Dedications". You must delete all sections
+Entitled "Endorsements".
+
+
+6. COLLECTIONS OF DOCUMENTS
+
+You may make a collection consisting of the Document and other documents
+released under this License, and replace the individual copies of this
+License in the various documents with a single copy that is included in
+the collection, provided that you follow the rules of this License for
+verbatim copying of each of the documents in all other respects.
+
+You may extract a single document from such a collection, and distribute
+it individually under this License, provided you insert a copy of this
+License into the extracted document, and follow this License in all
+other respects regarding verbatim copying of that document.
+
+
+7. AGGREGATION WITH INDEPENDENT WORKS
+
+A compilation of the Document or its derivatives with other separate
+and independent documents or works, in or on a volume of a storage or
+distribution medium, is called an "aggregate" if the copyright
+resulting from the compilation is not used to limit the legal rights
+of the compilation's users beyond what the individual works permit.
+When the Document is included in an aggregate, this License does not
+apply to the other works in the aggregate which are not themselves
+derivative works of the Document.
+
+If the Cover Text requirement of section 3 is applicable to these
+copies of the Document, then if the Document is less than one half of
+the entire aggregate, the Document's Cover Texts may be placed on
+covers that bracket the Document within the aggregate, or the
+electronic equivalent of covers if the Document is in electronic form.
+Otherwise they must appear on printed covers that bracket the whole
+aggregate.
+
+
+8. TRANSLATION
+
+Translation is considered a kind of modification, so you may
+distribute translations of the Document under the terms of section 4.
+Replacing Invariant Sections with translations requires special
+permission from their copyright holders, but you may include
+translations of some or all Invariant Sections in addition to the
+original versions of these Invariant Sections. You may include a
+translation of this License, and all the license notices in the
+Document, and any Warranty Disclaimers, provided that you also include
+the original English version of this License and the original versions
+of those notices and disclaimers. In case of a disagreement between
+the translation and the original version of this License or a notice
+or disclaimer, the original version will prevail.
+
+If a section in the Document is Entitled "Acknowledgements",
+"Dedications", or "History", the requirement (section 4) to Preserve
+its Title (section 1) will typically require changing the actual
+title.
+
+
+9. TERMINATION
+
+You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Document except
+as expressly provided for under this License. Any other attempt to
+copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Document is void, and will
+automatically terminate your rights under this License. However,
+parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under this
+License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such
+parties remain in full compliance.
+
+
+10. FUTURE REVISIONS OF THIS LICENSE
+
+The Free Software Foundation may publish new, revised versions
+of the GNU Free Documentation License from time to time. Such new
+versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may
+differ in detail to address new problems or concerns. See
+http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/.
+
+Each version of the License is given a distinguishing version number.
+If the Document specifies that a particular numbered version of this
+License "or any later version" applies to it, you have the option of
+following the terms and conditions either of that specified version or
+of any later version that has been published (not as a draft) by the
+Free Software Foundation. If the Document does not specify a version
+number of this License, you may choose any version ever published (not
+as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation.
+
+
+ADDENDUM: How to use this License for your documents
+
+To use this License in a document you have written, include a copy of
+the License in the document and put the following copyright and
+license notices just after the title page:
+
+ Copyright (c) YEAR YOUR NAME.
+ Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this documen
+t
+ under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.2
+ or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
+ with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts, and no Back-Cover
+Texts.
+ A copy of the license is included in the section entitled "GNU
+ Free Documentation License".
+
+If you have Invariant Sections, Front-Cover Texts and Back-Cover Texts,
+replace the "with...Texts." line with this:
+
+ with the Invariant Sections being LIST THEIR TITLES, with the
+ Front-Cover Texts being LIST, and with the Back-Cover Texts being LI
+ST.
+
+If you have Invariant Sections without Cover Texts, or some other
+combination of the three, merge those two alternatives to suit the
+situation.
+
+If your document contains nontrivial examples of program code, we
+recommend releasing these examples in parallel under your choice of
+free software license, such as the GNU General Public License,
+to permit their use in free software.
+